PROCEEDINGS

(>K THE

§apl .^ocictn of f irtoria.

VOL. XXYII. (New Sekiks).

PARTS 1. AND II.

Edited under the Authority oj the Couucil.

ISSUED AUGUST. 1914, and MARCH. 1915-

(Cotihiiiiiiif; f'n/'frs read he/ore the Socifty during 1914)-

TlIK AUTHORS OK IIIK SKVKRAL PAPKRS ARB INDIVIDUALLY lIKSfONSlHLK KOR '
80I1NI>NK.>*8 OK IllK OPINIONS GIVKN AND KOR TlIK ACCIJRACV OK THR
STATKMKNTS MADK THKRKIN.

MELHUUKNE:

FOKD & SON, PRINTERS, DRUMMONU STHEKT, CARLTON.

1915. 1^

CONTENTS OF VOLUME XXVII.

I. — Victorian Holotlmroiclea, with desciiptioiis of Now Species.

Hy E. C. Joshua. (Plat« I.) ... ... ... ... 1

II.— N.jte.s on .Xustralian Cicadidae. By How.vbd .\8hton.

(Plate ir.) . . . ... ... 12

in.— Three New .\friean Cicadas. K_v Ho\v.\rd Ashton. (Plate

III.)... ... .. .. ... ... ... l.->

IV. — The Anatomy of Caryodes dufre.snyi, Leach. By Olive H.

Davies, M.Sc. (Plate IV.) ... ... .. . 1«>

V. — ()n a New SjHJcies .»f Ceratodus from the Cretaceous of New

South Wales. Hv FreoerI'K Chapman, A.L.S., .^c.

(Plate V.) . .. .. . . j:,

VI. — De.scriptiiiii of New and Kare Fossils ohtaineil l>y l»eep Boriii;,'-

in the Mallee. (Part III.— Ostracoda to Fishes.) By

Fkedekick Chai'MAX, A.L.S., Ac. (Plates VI. to X.) .. I's
VII.— Further Notes on Australian Hy<ln.ids. -Ill By W. .M

Bale, F.K M.S. ^Plates XI.. XII. and XIII.) .. 72

VIII. — Un some New Species of Victorian Marine Molhisca By .1. II.

(tatlifk and C. J. (iabkiel. (Plates XI V, XV. and XVI » ".M
IX.— Additions to the Catalogue of the Marine Shells of Victoria.

By J. H. (tatmke and <" .1. (Jabkikl ... .. i>'.»

X. -Victorian (jraptolites. Part IV.; Some N'.w or Little-known
Sp.cies. By T. S. Hai.i,. M.A.. D.Sc. ( Plates XVII. and
XVIII., and Te.xt Fif,Mire8) ... ... ... ... *1m|.

XI. — The Petrolo^'y and Minin-^' Geoloj^y of tho Country ni;ir

Queenstown. By Nukman H. Jinnkk, B.Sc. (Plate Xl.\) I l'.»

.\ 1 1.— Studies in the Physical Chemistry of Kssential < )ils. (Part
I. — The Physical Pro|K'rties of mixtures of two Terpene
substances in relation to thos" of the constituents. By
Ik. Bakky Drew, M.Sc, and E. Ivan Rosknblum, M.S,-.
Part II. — The Physical Constants of some Terijenes and
oxyiLjenated derivatives thereof, and their variation witii
temperature. By Iva.s Kosenblum, M.Sc. ... . 1 1!»

XIII. — Sin<;ular Parameter Values in tlie Boiuidary ProMems of the

P.itential Theory. By < '. E. Wka rHKRBUUN. .M.A., B.S.-. Kit
XIV. On the (Jeojrraphical Distril.ution of tlie Sea-(Jrasses. By <'.

H. OSTKNKKLI). ... ... ... ... 17'.»

XV— Mitt. -r Pit and Sensitivity of Appl.'sto Poi.-uns. Bv II. 'i

Bkiii.ahl. B.S.v, and A. « '. II. KoTHeka. IVI.A., U.S.-. ... litl

XVI. — Notes on Australian an<l Tasmanian Si-ydmaeuidae, with

Descriptions of N»'w Species. ByAKruiK M. Lea ID.s

XVII. —Notes ou A inyctoiides, with Descriptious t.f N.-w Spici.-b

(Part II.). Hv EusTACK AV. Fkboitsun, .M |{ . ( 1,..'\1 2:t2

X\' III. —The Petrology of the Ign.'ous Rocks near HeHle.svin<« and

Narbethoug. By Nokm.\n K. .Ins-NKR, B.S<-. (Plat.- I.) . 'Ml
XIX.— On the Occurrence of Fj^neous Pebble.-* in a Con^'lomerate of
Upper yihirian A«,'e from near Wiilhalla. By Nokman
R. JuNNER, B.Sc. (Plate II. ( ... ^sc,

XX. — Contributions to the Flora t>f Australia. N«. L'l' My Ai.kkkk

J. EwAKT. D.Sc. Ph.I> 297

XXI.— Certain Suffixes in O.-eanic Liiuffiu^ifs. IJy W <i. Ivk.vn ;{Ua

XXII.— Notes on the .-<o-calleil Obhi«liau from Geeloug au«l from Tara-
dale, and on .\ustralitcs Hy Kunkst W. Skkath. D.Sc .
A.R.C.S.. F.G.S ... . 3a:J

XXIII.— On Bitt.r I'il and Sensitivity ..f Apj-l. .^ t.. P..i>..i» lU

Alkrh. .1. EwAKT, l>.Sc.. Fh !• Xlli

XXIV. — New or Little-known Victorian Ftmsils in the Natiiiial
Museum. (Part XVII. — Some Tertiary CephaU'poda). By
Frederick Chai-man. A.L S . .i.- (Phitcb III.-VII I i 3ol

XXV. — Descriptions t>f thre«' unusual fmuis of Australites fr<>m
Western Victoria. By Er.n-kkt \V Skkath. hSc. .V.b'C.S..
F.G.S. (Plate IX.) .. . . ... 3G2

XXVI. — Notfon Eucalyptus alpina, Liiid., and its Essential nil. Hy

l;. r. Bakkk. F.l-.S.. an<l H. d Smith. F.CS. . :i»)7

XXVII.— Some Observations un the Methods of Using the Ag^JlutinH-
tiou T«.st in the Dia-rnosis of Disejise in the liovinos caused
by the Bacillus of ('..nta-^i<>u'^ Abortion. By II. K. Sedijon,
B.V.Sc. . ... :i70

Index ... :«»!

[Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.). Part I.. 1914.J

Am. I — Victoi'idn Hulutharoidea, with descriptions of
New Species.

By E. C. JOSHUA.

(With I'latf I.),
k.ad l:.'th March. lUli

III tliu following' j»:i|MT Htti'fH spttics art- dralt witli. four of
wliicli are liflii-vi-iJ to lo new to scitMite. No iitteiiipt lias been made
to L'ive :i eonipletu synonvniy of eaeli speeieK. l)Ul a leferenie has
been ^'iven to wlioro sueli may Iw ftnind. The author desiies to
oxprfss hiK thanks to PKifeKsor Speruei. the Diieetor of the
National .MiiNeum. .\IellM)urne, for permission to make an examina-
tion of tho speeiniens eontained in its eollettion. in which all those
<I<m1i with are intlmled; ho also wishes tc» thank Mr. J. A. Ker-
sliau. tlin Curator of tho alxjvo institution, for much kindness and
attention iireived from him. T.j Dr. T. S. Hall, of the Hiolopical
(U'jtartinent. of the I'niversity of .MellMiurne. his thanks are duo
foi most useful jruidaiue jriven on many occasions, partiiiilarly
it: tojMKvtion with tho literatur*- of the subject. Very valuable
assistaiui' in i-olleit inir has Ikch L'iven him by Mr. H. Hoebuck.
a (Htloii^r naturalist, ami by .Mr. James WilKon. in the nuikingr
'if arranged slides of the spicules found in some of the species.
ir«- part ioilarly desires to thank Professor Dendy. of Kinp's Col-
IfL''-. London, for vi-ry kindly comparing specimens <.f ('liiritlnta
(hiiuiliin ii^ix, Parker, with that of tlu' Author's Trorli<nhit(i aUnni.

Taxonoiny.

Tho system of classification adopteil in this jiajier is that of
I.inlwip (ICt. but (^stergren's revision of the Paractinopoda is
used in dealing with this order.

The yenus ?>//•» j'o.'/.V'"'* is discai-ded : tlie writer is of opinion
that, the jreinis (|ua iriiius never had any real existence. Semper's
lanirua>:o in dealimr with it conveys little more than the sugjrestioii
for a ;:tnus. and in his catalogue and synonymy he entirely ignores
it. Clark (M) has taken it .seriously, and I followed him in de-
scribing Trorhodotii (ilhini. but more recently the examination of
numerous sj)tvimens of this spivies has definitely sh<»wn me that

2 E. C. Joshua :

the wheel papillae and aggregations are not c(Mi8tantly met with,
and that in ninnerous individuals the distril)uti(iii of the wheels
conld only be described as scattered everywhere, thus coni])ining in
one species the characters of two genera. So gi'eat an authority
as Dendy will have neither of these genei-a, and adhei-es to tlie
original genus Chiridota for the reception of all these wheel-bear-
ing forms. Personally, I think that the genus Cliiridofa nuiy be
usefully sepai-ated from the sigmoid bearing genera on account of
its members exhibiting bracket shaped ossicles ; there would appear
to be no species having an ossicle which could "be described as
intermediate in form between a sigma and a bracket.

Verrill's genus Leptoxi/napta is used for the species doJahrifrra
iStimpson, Clark (3) having definitely pointed out the propriety
of this course.

The following is a list of the species dealt with : — ■

Stlvliopiix nioUis (Hutton).

St icJiopiis s/zniilans Dendy.

Citcintuind /uronsp/cua Bell.

Cnciiinaria niiifanx, sp. n.

Phyllophoru^ iJenritidiuK Dendy.

Plii/Unp/innis rexfie/tt^, sp. n.

C()l()chi nm xpinoi^iis ((|*uoy and (lainiard). ,

Coloch'nus (Jolioluni (Pallas).

Fsolidium cotwen/enx R. Perrier.

Gaudiud cJ/denMis (J. MuUer).

Lepfosi/napta dnhdrrifera (Stimpson).

(liiridotit r/igas Dendy.

Ckiridofa inge.ns, sp. n.

Trochodota allaiii (Joshua). ,

Trochndota ruehnchi , sp. n.

GENUS STICHOPUS.

Sticiiopus mollis (Hutton).

For syiiouyniy see

1907. Sticiiopus mollis, Dendy and IJindU- (To; and
1887 Holothuria victoriae. Bell (1);
191.3. Sticiiopus mollis, Erwo Willy (S).
After Trading Bell's act'ount of his Il.,lotliinia \ictori;te. and
examining tlie hgures he gives of its spicules. I havr no hesita-
tion in synonymising it with Hutton 's species.

Victorian Holothuroldeu. 3

This Holdtlnniiin is I'oininon in Port Phillip Bay. iuiJ at luuiiei-
'Ovis localitiL's on the coast. Yniiiij; specimuus inay frequently he
met with on rocks just l)elow low water mark, the older animal*
.prefer deeper water.

Sticiiopus simulans Dendy and Hiudle.

For synonymy see

191.3. Erwe Willy (8).

On several occasions I have made preparations of the skins of
Holothurians. which, before seeing,' Dendy and Hindle's paper, I
regarded as specimens of Sticliopiis mollis; they, however, ex-
liibited the peculiar dichotomoid ossicles described by Dendy (4),
(5), in addition to the ordinary spiculation, and must therefore
be regarded as belonging to the above-named species.

GENUS CUCUMARIA.

CUCUMARIA INCONSPICUA Bell (1).

I have collected numerous specimens of this little holothurian at
Flinders; the form described by Bell is usually found between tide
marks, but it is also met w4th in water of from five to ten fathoms
in depth — these latter specimens do not quite accord with Bell's
account of the distribution of the podia in his type — in the strictly
littoral forms the pedicels may be described as ventrally confined
to the radii, and dorsally almost so; but in those collected in
■deeper water, the arrangement in rows is quite lost dorsally,
but the ventral disposition remains the same; the result is an
animal whose external appearance is identical with Cucumaria
parva, Ludwig; the spiculation, however, is unaltered, and the de-
tails of the internal anatomy are the same as in the shore speci-
mens. In addition to the large cruciform bodies I found numerous
small rods branclied at the ends, and very numerous
minute (32 /<.) dichotomously foliaceous ossicles, which in some
individuals occui- in dense crust-like patches. This animal has
■the curious brood-sheltering habit noticed by Ludwig (17) in
Cucumaria parva. I liave never seen the young actually adhering
to the parent, but on placing some living specimens in a narcotic
.solution, after removing the larger animals, a number of minute
individuals of from 1 to 3 mm. in length were found at the bottom
of the receptacle; these can only be assumed to have become de-
tached from the older specimens. The spiculation of the young
animals agreed with that of their parents.

2a

4 E. C. Josh iia :

I think that there can be no doubt that this species is very close-
to. if not identical with Ludwig's Cucumarla parvo. It is to be
noted that Ludwig (17) has pointed out that so far as 2)arva is
concerned, the process of reproduction may occur before complete
development of the spicules has been attained.

CccuMARiA MUTANs, sp. n. (Plate I., Figs. 1 (a), (b), (c), (d).)

Localities. — Port Phillip Bay. Westernport Bay. and Victorian
Coast line.

Length 60 mm., greatest width 20 mm., tapering gradually to
both posterior and anterior ends. Tentacles, ten of almost equal
length, pedicels confined to the radii. In the three ventral radii
they occur in five closely disposed rows; in the two dorsal radii
in three rows. The calcareous deposits consist of numerous tables.
80 fx in diameter, with three large central holes, and a spire hav-
ing three rods, joined by a transverse beam, and terminating in
six or seven spinous projections. The calcareous ring has ten
pieces of about equal length, without posterior prolongations. The
internal anatomy shows no peculiarities; colour, degraded white;
tentacles, black.

This is perhaps one of our commonest Holothurians — the young
forms being met Avith between tide marks in all the localities in
which I have collected. It is to be noted, however, that these
young forms differ very materially from the mature animal; their
colour is a deep blue black, and the tables, which are crowded-
in the older animal, are few and far between in the young, and
are usually devoid of the spire.

Though a very typical Cucumarian. its spiculation would appear
to specifically distinguish it from any previously described species.

GENUS PHYLLOPHORUS.

Phyllophorus dearmatus Dendy.

I collected a single specimen of this animal at Flinders, and
there is another from Westernport Bay. in the collection of the
National Museum. Melbourne; Mr. Roebuck obtained two at Tor-
quay. Tlio al)sence of spicules in the perisome would appear to be
not unconunon in uiembers of this genus. A species about to be
described exhibits the same pec-uliarity, and another species at pre-
sent undescribed, found in South Australia, is quite devoid of
calcareous bodies in the perisome, with the exception of the cribri-

Victor ian H<jlutJiar<>'ulea. 5

form plates at the end of the poelia (present also in detirnuif us.
and rfsf/t'/is). Perfectly fresh material >vas used for examinatiun.
so that the possibility of destruction by an acid preservative is un-
tenable.

Phyllophorus vkstikns, sp. nov. (Plate T., Figs. 2 (a), (b), (c), (d).)

Localities. — Port Phillip Bay. Westernport Bay, and Victorian
'Coast line.

Size, 70 X 25 mm., fusiform flexed dorsally. Tentacles 20.
ten outer, alternating with five pairs of inner, the outer dorsal
tentacles are about three times the length of the ventral, the ten-
tacles forming the inner crown do not vary in size. Tube feet
are thickly disposed over the whole surface of the body, no ar-
rangement in rows being anywhere visible. The calcareous ring
(Fig. 2) consists of ten very irregular and complex processes,
deeply imbedded in cartilage; the radial pieces have prolongations
posteriorly. In the perisome there are no calcareous deposits other
than large cribriform plates, at the extremities of the tube feet,
The tentacles are provided with rods, having expanded ends pierced
Avith several holes; they also exhibit irregularly distributed patclies
of small foliaceous ossicles (Fig. 2a, 2b, c, d, e). Polian vessel
and madreporal canal, single. The genitalia consist of numerous
comparatively short unbranched coeca, springing from each side
of the genital duct, for a distance of about 30 mm. ; in the type
they contain ova. and are of a bright yellow colour.

The body colour of the animal is a brownish pink; tube feet,
white; tentacles, black. In life, it covers itself with stones, shells
and shore debris.

This Holothurian is of frequent occurrence along our coast line,
though its habit of coating itself with debris would often protect
it from observation. The strong dorsal flexure invariably, noted
in all spirit specimens of this genus, would appear to lie a post
mortem contraction, as I have, in this species at least, never seen
it in life; the animal simply adheres and accommodates itself to
the surface to which it mav be attached.

CxExrs roLorHiRus.

CoLOCHiRUS SPINOSUS (Quoy and Gaimar
For synonymy, see
Theel (19). and
1897. Whitelegge (20), Colochirus spinosu

6 E. C. Joshua :

There are five typical specimens of this species in the collec-
tion of the National Museum. Melbourne. They are presumed ta
have been collected in Victorian waters, but exactly when and
where is not indicated. Whitelegge (20) records the animal from
Port. Jackson, X.S.W.

COLOCHIRUS DOLIOLUM (Pallas).

For localities and synonymy, see
Erwe Willy (8).

Young specimens of this Colochirus are frequently found from
the shore down to al)Out five or ten fathoms. Tlieir spiculation
exactly agrees with the mature form, but the dark, brown, pig-
mented areas, which occur in the older animals, are only repre-
sented by very faint yellow bands, which rapidly lose their colour
in spirits.

GEXUS PSOLIDIUM.

PsoLiDiUM CONVERGENS Perrler.

1905. Perrier R. (18), Psolidium convergens.
Locality. — Flinders.

I secured three specimens of this apparently rare species at
Flinders; they agreed well with Perrier's description (18).

GENUS CAUDINA.
Caudina chilensis (J. Muller).

For synonymy, see
Clark (3).

Localities.— We^teA-u\)0\-t Bay, Mordialloc.

The above localities furnished two specimens which, though dif-
fering widely in appearance, I assign to this species. The larger,
picked up after a storm at Mordialloc, measures 100 x 40 mm. ;
.it tapers sharply posteriorly, but cannot be described as caudate,
colour yellow, blotched with brownish pink ; TJie spirules are inoi-e
massive than those typical of chil('>isi-'<. the lioles being smaller,
and the cross being frequently lost by fusion with the disc. The
whole ossicle seems to have undergone a process of hypertrophy.

The other specimen, from Westernport Bay. is fairly typical.
Some temptation existed to regard these two specimens as belong-
ing to distinct species, but fortunately the writer has recently
had an opportunity of examining a collection of over forty speci-

Vicfin'Hiii H(>/<)lliaroitl('((. 7

mens of c/i/ic/is/s, fi-oiii till! South Australian Pul)lic Musfuin. in
^vlli^•!^ numerous gradations between the typical form and that
al)nvi) described are recognisable.

(;EXU8 lrptosynapta.

Lki'Tosvnapta dolabkifkka (8timpson).

I'Or svnonvmy, see
Clark (3).

Localities. — Port Phillip Bay, Westernport Bay, Wilson's Pro-
montory, Torquay, Corio Bay, Flinders.

Tlie species is common. I have met with it from low water mark
df)wn to twenty fathoms. There is no doubt in my mind that if
dolaJn-iferu was collected at a locality north of the equator, it
would be identified without hesitation as itihaerens. The only
slight, Init fairly constant difference, that 1 could detect, was in
the width of the anchor plates, which in dolahrifera are slightly
narrower. The calcareous ring may be quite without neural per-
forations, or it may have any number up to five. The colour may
vary from rose to white, and one specimen from Wilson's Promon-
tory was a deep purple black.

CiiiKiDOTA GK^AS Deudy.

Localities. — Wilson's Promontory, Torquay.

There is one specimen in the Museum collection. This was col-
lected by Mr. Kershaw, at Wilson's Promontory; it is very con-
siderably contracted, measuring 70 mm. by 15 mm., the integu-
ment being much wrinkled transversely, and quite opate. Mr.
Roebuck has twice met Avith the animal at Torquay. On the
last occasion he collected six specimens on a far outlying reef,
wliicli is exposed only on the occasion of an exceptionally low
tide. He gave me two excellent specimens, one of which, in spirits,
measures 15 cm. in length. Mr. Roebuck describes the animal in
life as being of very handsome appearance, bright scarlet in
colour, with dense, Avhite, prominent papilae. A large specimen
is capable of extending itself to a length of from eighteen inches
to two feet. When handled, they are very prone to separate them-
selves into two or three pieces. The description of Dendy and
Hindle (5) rendered the identification easy, but the difference of
the spacing of the radial muscles, noticed by these authors, cannot,
I think-, be regarded as a constant character.

8 E. 0. Joshua :

I found tlint it varied iK't (Hily in different specimens. l)ut in
different nix-as of tlie same individual. In some eases (jne of the
muscles would l)e divided in two for some part of its length ; I think
that both this and tlie otlier condition refei'red to must be assigned
to the state of contraction of tiie ciicular muscles. Tlie ari-ange-
ment of the wlieel papilae is subject to variation ; thev frc(piently
occur in all tlie radii. The polian vessels were very numei-ous
and variable in size in the animals I opened.

Chiridota ixgens, sp. n.

Sea Hall (9).
Dr. Hall very kindly placed at my disposal a slide containing
the Chiridota spicule, referred to in the above paper. It has been
presumed to be a tertiary fossil, and I am inclined to think i-ightly
so. The wheel is exceptionally large, 200 f>. in diameter, and of
tlie usual Chiridota character. Although collected from a situa-
tion in close proximity to the sea, it diffei's from the ossicle
peculiar to tlie two Chiridotidae, found in the locality, viz.,
C r/ir/aa, and T. roehuchi ; the wheels of the foi-mer average 112
fx in diameter, and of the latter, 80 /<. In view of the circum-
stances under wliich it was found, I propose regarding the species
as new. Hall's figure conveys a good idea of the structure of the
spicule.

GENUS TROCHODOTA.

Trochodota allani (Joshua). (Plate I., Fig. 3).

Taeniogyrus allani Joshua (11).
Chiridota allani Dendy (7).

Localifies. — Port Phillip Bay, Westernport Bay, Corio Bay.

This species is extraordinarily abundant on the sludge baidvs
which form (the greater part of the bottom of Port Phillip Bay.
I have seen the dredge presenting tlie appearance of having been
dragged through a mass of lilood slime, from tlie thousands of
this species adhering to it. Accompanying it, usually, are al)out
one per cent, of Lepfos//napfa dolahrifera.

Professor Dendy very kindly compared specimens of tliis animal
with those of ('hiridnfa di/nedinensis Parker, witli wiiich it was
at one time thought to be identical, and was able to conHrm the
differences I pointed out in my original description of the species.

(II.) For reasons given in my note on Taxonomy elsewhere, I
have abandoned my recognition of Taetiiotji/DtK as a genus, and
noAV assign this species to Ludwig's Trochodofa.

Proc. E.S. Victoria, 1014. Plate I.

VietorHni HulollniroiJn,. 9

It is pL'rhiips wiirtli iiotiiiir that (tllfi/i / freiUK'iiliv ixtssi'ssrs whct'ls
luiviii<|- iimrr than six s))(ilN.fs. A ti<riiri- of <>iil' sliowini: !) spdUt'S is
givL'ii. (Fig. :V).

Tkochodota uoKiiUCKi, sp. 11. (Plate T., Figs 4 (a), (1)), (c).)

Locditf //. — T()i([uay.

Lengtli 7.") mm., l»-ea(ltli 6mm.; vermit'onn ; coldui-. wd. Tvu
tentacles, the two v^'iitial of wiiieh are about half the length <>f
the dorsal. Each tentacle has 1)ut four digitations, the two
proximal of which are about one-third of the lengtli of the disTal.
Deposits of two kinds, consisting of wheels meusui-ing SO ^ in
diameter, and sigmoid bodies (Figs. 4 a and e), 130 /a in length.
The wheels have six spokes; the rim is hexagonal, its innei' margin
is coarsely serrated around its whole circumference. The sexes are
apparently separate. The genital glands are unbianched. There
is a single polian vessel, and one madreporal canal, which is fused
to the dorsal mesentery. Mi-. Koebuck collected several specimens
from beneath stones at Torquay, and I have since met with tliem in
the same locality. The animal would appear to ])e very close to the
European species, Trochodofa reiitisfa, Semon. However, the pro-
portion of the digitations on the tentacles and the form of the wheel
ossicles differ from the illustrations of these structures, given respec-
tively by Clark (3) and Ludwig (16) for venu'^fa. I have, unfor-
tunately, been unable to refer to Semon's original paper. The
variation in the size of the tentacles is quite constant, and has been
•determined by the examination of numerous specimens, both in a
living and preserved condition. They increase gradually in size
from the venter to the dorsum.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

(1) Bell, F. Jeffrey. — " Holothuroidea, descriptions <if new

species." Proc. Zool. Soc. London. June 21, 1887.

(2) Bell. F. Jeffrey. — " Notes on Echinoderms collected in Port

Phillip." Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. ii.. pp. 401-407.
London, 1888.

(3) Clark, H. L. — " The Apodous Holothurians."' Sniitlisonian

Contributions, vol. xxxv. Washington. 1907.
<4) Dendy, A. — " Observations on the Holothurians of New Zea-
land, with descriptions of four new species." Journal
Linnean Society, Zoology, vol. xxvi. London, 1898.

10 E. G. Joshua :

(5) Dendy, A., and Hiudle. — Jour. Linn. Soc, vol. xxx.. Zoology.

London, 1907.

(6) Dendy, A.. — " On a small collection of Holothurians from the

Auckland Islands." Sub-Antarctic Islands of New Zealand,
Wellington, N.Z. 1909.

(7) Journal of The Quekett Microscopical Club. Ser. II.. vol.

xii.. No. 72, pp. 105/7. 1913.

(8) Erwe, Willy. — " Holothuroidea " in " Die Fauna Sudwest

Australiens," Band, iv.. Lief 9. Gustav Fischer, Jena,
1913.

(9) Hall. T. S.— -Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xv. (n.s.), Pt. 1,

1902.

(10) Hutton, F. W.— Catalogue of the Echinodermata of New

Zealand. Wellington, 1872.

(11) Hutton, F. W. — " Notes on some New Zealand Echinodermata,

with description of a new species." Trans, and Proc. of
the New Zealand Institute, vol. ii. Wellington, 1879.

(12) Joshua, E. C. — " On a new Holothurian of the genus

Taeniogyrus, found in Port Pliillip Bay." Proc. Royal Soc.
Victoria, vol. xxi. (new series), pt. 1. Melbourne, 1912.

(13) Lampert, Kurt. — " Die Seewalzen," Semper, Reisen im Ar-

chipel der Phillippinen, 4 bd., 3 Abth. Wiesbaden, 1885.
(14:) Lampert, Kurt. — " Die wahrend der Expedition S.M.S. Ga-
zelle, 1874-1876, von Prof. Dr. Studer gesammelten Holo-
thurien." Zool. Jahrbiicher, Al)th. f. system, 4 bd. 1889.

(15) Ludwig, H. — " Beitrage zur. Kentniss der Holothurien,"

Arbeiten aus dern zool. zootom. Institut., Wiirsburg, 2 bd.
Wlirsburg, 1874.

(16) Luwdig, H. — Die von G. Chierchia auf der Fahrt. der Kgl.

Ital korvette " Vettor Pisani," gesammelten Holothurien.
Zool Jahrbiicher. 2 bd. 1886.

(17) Ludwig, H. — " Ecliinodermen, 1, Bucli, Die Seewalzen." In

Bronn, Klassen und Ordnungen des Their-reichs, 2 bd., .3
Abth. Leipzig. 1889-1892.

(18) Ludwig, G. — " Holothurien, in : Ergef)n. dei- Hamburg."'

Magalhaensischen Sammelreise, Hamburg, 1898.

(19) " Ostergren, Das system der Synaptiden " (Vorlautige Mitt-

Iioilung). Ofv. K. Sv. Vet. Ak. Forhand, vol. iv., pp. 111-
120. Stoekholm. 1898.
(LM)) Prirer, R. — " Holothuries antai'ctiques du Museum d'His-
toire natui-elle ile Paris." Annales des Sciences natur.. 9
ser. Paris. 1<)05.

Victorian Hololliuroideu. 1 I'

(21) Theel, Hjaluui-r. — Report on the Holotliuroideu, pai't ii.

Report oil the scientific results of the voyage of H.M.S..
Challenger. — Zoology, vol. xiv., part xxxix. London, 1886.

(22) Whitelegge, T. — "The Crustacea and Ecliinoderniata." Re-

cords of The Australian Museum, vol. v. Svdney, 1903.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE.

Fiir. 1. — Cucu?naria mufa/ifi, sp. n.

a, calcareous ring, enlarged.

b, c. d, ossicles from perisome x 300.
Fig. 2. — Plii/llophorits vestiens, sp. n.

a, b, rods from tentacles x 300

c, d, e, small bodies from tentacles x 400
f, calcareous ring, enlarged.

Fig. 3. — Abnormal ossicle from Trochodota allani (Joshua) x 300-
Fig. 4. — Trochodota roehitcki, sp. n.

a, Avheel ossicle x 300.

b, tentacle, enlarged.

c, sisrmoid ossicle x 300.

[PROc- Kot. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S)., Pt. I., 1914].

Art. II.— Notes on Australian Cicadidae.
By HOWARD ASHTON.

(With Plate II.).

[Read 14th May, 1914].

Of the cicadas described beh)w. two belong to the distinc-
tively Australian genus Macrof ri stria ^ and come fi'oni Xoi'thern
Australia, having been given to nie by Mr. Chas. French, junr.
Government Entomologist. One of them is remarkable for its re-
semblance to Thopha Sessiliba, Dist. so closely resembling it in
general appearance that it might even be mistaken on a passing
glance. Tlie otlier is not remarkable in any way except for its
almost uniform chestnut colour. In this it resembles M. ingrnsig-
nata, Dist., but it is distinct from this species in its more .sessile
eyes, its nai'i'ower thorax, and the lack of the Ijlack basal area and
membrane to the tegmina. I have named it after Mr. Fiench. The
• other tAVo belong to the genus Psalfor/a. one of tliem cominir from
Lord Howe Island.

Sub-family Cicadinae.
Division Cicadaria.

Genus Macrotristkia. Stal.

M. FRENCHI, 11. Sp.

/feud deep, reddish-yellow, ocelli sunouiidcd by l)lack. two
'castaneous spots at base of front.

J'roiiotinu light castaneous, obscure yellowish central longitudinal

fascia, posteror margin l)road, bright yellow. Meso/iof)i/n very
•deep castaneous. with cruciform elevation and posterioi- margins
•dull ochraccous. Ahdoineii deep castaneous. shading to l)lack.

penultimate segment margined posteriorly with dull yellow.

Tegmina vitreous, costa and basal cell pale liriglit yellow, havsal
membrane orange-red, venation from light fuscous at l)a.se to dark

fuscous at apex. Wings; vitreous, venation yellow at ba.se. pale

fuscous at apex. Body beneath black, face, legs and rosti-uni cas-

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1914. Plate II.

Howard Ashton deU

Notes on Ausfrdltau ('Icddiihif. 13-

taiR'i'us. Sp;u-L' between t'uee and eyes yellow. Abdominal segments
shining hlnek. margined with dnll orhiaceous.
. Le/if/(/i. — 34 mm., exp. tt'g. 10") mm.
//irh. — Catherine River. N. Teiiitorv, S. Australia.

M. TH0PH0IDK8. n. sp.

Head and thoi-ax othiaeeous. //cad a little reddish. Proiiotuin
with two central longitudinal lines (enclosing a yellow streak), in-
cisures, anterior border of posterior margin, eastaneous. posterio]-
margin very l)road. stramineous. Mesoiiofum Avith two short central'
obcouical spots, two longer outer fascia, and the area before the
cruciform elevation eastaneous. Abdomen eastaneous. Tegmnia
witii costa stramineous, posterior edge and other venation, except
ulna eastaneous, basal cell deeply and opaquely eastaneous, basal
membrane ochraceous. Anastomoses to apical areas very faintly
infuscated, and traces of suffusion about apices of longitudinal
veins to these areas. Wings with venation stramineous. Body
beneath light eastaneous, except for head, which is reddish-yellow.
Face prominent, reddish-yellow. Rostrum, eastaneous, darker at
tip, reaching hind coxae. The eyes are very sessile, and the-
head very short above. The species, except for its red and yellow-
colouration, resembles M. angidaris, Germ., more than any otlier
of its genus. The wing tips of the specimen are mutilated.

LetigtJi. — il nmi. ; exp. teg., circ. 120-124 mm.

//ah. — Norseman, W. Australia.

Allied to M. godingi, Dist.

Division Cyclochilaria.
Genus Psaltoda, Stal.

PSALTODA ADONIS, n. Sp.

//ea(/ and thorax gieen. abdomen brownish lutemis. Head, with
base of front, narrow fascia Ijetween eyes, and i-egion of ocelli black,
eyes dark Ijrown, ocelli close together, pale red. Pvonotitni with
incisures, inner border of anterior margin, inner and outer bordei's
of posterior margins black. Mesonofum with two short central
obconical spots yellowish, margined with black, two longer obconi-
cal black spots outside these, inwardly excavated with yelloAvish-
green, a central lanceolate line, and tw^o rounded spots at anterior

114 Howard Ashton : Notes on Australian Cicadidae.

angles of cruciform elevation, black. Abdomen deep brownish,
somewhat luteous. with darker bands on apical segmental margins.
Tegmina vitreous, costa green on basal half, thence deep lirown.
'Other venation Ijrown, with apical veins narroAvly infuscated and
veins at the bases of second and third apical areas deeply and
broadly margined Avith fuscous. Wings with apical veins nari-owly
fuscously margined. Head beneatli with lateral striae, and central
■sulcus to face black, legs green, with fore and intermediate tibiae
and tarsi brown, opercula broad, brown, overlapping at centre.
.obli(iue at hind margins, rostrum barely reaching hind coxae.

Lenr/fh. — 37 mm.; exp. teg. 114 mm.

Hab. — Blackbutt, Queensland.

Allied to P. fnmipetmis, Ashton, from which it may lie clearly
distinguished by the different marking of tegmina and wings, the
greater size, the more convex front to head, and the very oblique,
angular opercula.

PSALTODA IX8ULAKIS, n. sp.

JJead pale yellow; base of front, Avliole of vertex, and broad
fascia from eyes through vertex, black. Pronofum black, anterior
.marginal transverse fascia, followed by two oblique spots, a narrow
central fascia and two large triangular discal spots, pale yellow.
Posterior margin pale yellow. Mesonotum pale yellow, two central
•obconical spots, the apices of which unite with the lateral angles of
a broad central lanceolate spot, wliich then occupies the whole space
before cruciform elevation, and two broader exterior obconical
fasciae, black. Abdomen shiny black, two patches of silvery tomen-
'tum one on each side of second segment. Body beneath yellowish-
white, streaks to femora and fore tibiae black, rostrum black,
reaching hind coxae. Opercula outwardly oblique, rounded pos-
;teriorly. Tegmina and wings viti'eous, immaculate, venation near
■base yellowish, outwardly fuscous.

Length, 26 mm., exp. teg. 76 mm.

flab. — Lord Howe Island.

Allied to P. harrisii. Leach.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE.

Fig. 1. — Macrotristria thophordes, n. sp. Natural size.

Fig. 2. — Macrotristria frenchi, n. sp. Natural size.

Fig. 3. — Psa/toda adonis, n. sp. Natural size.

F"'ig. 4. — Psaltoda insidaris, n. sp. x 3.

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), P'r. I., 1914J.

Aim'. Hi. — Threr New African ('ieadas.

By HOWARD ASH TON.

(With Plate III.)

[Read 14th May, 1914].

All these species come from Central Africa, and all belong to
the dominant African genus Platypleura. The first one, P. nir/ro-
marginata, is distinguished by its immensely dilated pronotal
angles, being allied to Butler's P. quadniticoUis, but differing in
the lighter colour of the liead and thorax, and the generally yellow
venation of wings and tegmina. It is also smaller than Butler's
species.

The second species, P. s/kiunha, is the smallest of this genus, I
think, so far recorded from Africa, It is a very distinct little
species, being placed in Distant's divison of the genus, in whicli tlie
tegmina and wings are wholly opaque. The only hyaline or trans-
parent portions are the first discoidal and a small spot in the
second discoidal areas, a postcostal spot in the radial area, a
fascia extending along the basal halves of apical areas, except the
■seventh, some minute spots at the extreme apices of these areas, and
the tegminal and wing margins. The general effect of the tegmina
is of a broad fuscous wing, with two transparent fasciae running
diagonally along the apical half.

The third species, P. longirostris, is closely allied to P. adouma,
Dist., but may be at once distinguished by the yellow colouration
of the wings. It somewhat resembles Walker's P. signifera,
but differs by the fact that its tegmina and wings have no
parent spots, and that the margins, whicli are very narrow, are
coloured right to the edge. The rostrum, also, is very much longei-.

The genus Platypleura, besides being widely distributed over
Africa, Asia, Malaysia, and the Philippines, lias Ijeen recorded by
Mr. W. W. Froggatt, from Northern Australia, a typical species
having been taken by Mr. J. 0. Tepper, and named after him.

]6 Hoivard Ashton :

Sub-family Cicadinae.
Division Polyneuraria.
Gen. Platy pleura, Am. and Serv.

P. ^•IGROMARGINATA, D. sp.

Jiale. — Hecuh ochraceous. with a faint tint of green. Eyes brown,
ocelli red. a slender broken l)lack fascia between eyes, passing
through region of ocelli. Proiiot n ni , ochraceous, faintly greenish,
central tranverse fascia on anterior margin, and margins of pos-
terior marginal area l>lack, with broad V)lack margins to the
strongly produced lateral processes, enclosing a triangular spot on
each of these produced areas. MexoDof uni shining chocolate brown,
two comma-shaped spots in centre of anterior margin, and a trans-
verse spot, anteriorly ol»tusely angled in the depression before the
ci-uciform elevation. Ijlack. Cruciform elevation with broad flat-
tened disc, light yellowish olive. Ahdnnnui shining black, sparsely
greyishly pilose, with obseure central dorsal castaneous fascia, final
segmenr brown, tip black. Head beneath obscurely ochraceous,
frontal rugae castaneous. central frontal sulcus, two large spots be-
tween eyes and front, and two converging fasciae beside clypeus,
blai'k. Sternum ochraceous. nuirked with black, heavily pilose,
pronotal lateral margins same as above, legs castaneous, with joints
yellow. Abdomen beneath didl ocliraceous, with central broad black
longitudinal fascia. Opercula translucent brown. Tegmina and
iriiKjs. hyaline, venation rtchraceous, a little fuscous at apices, slight
infuscations al)out tegminal apical areas, including bases of same
and a series of faint spots on ends of longitudinal veins. Anal
areas of wings a little dusky. Head very slnnt. not half as long as
pronotum. as wide (including eyes), as jironotum and mesonotuni
(excluding pronotal margins), front depiessed, not seen from
above, flattened beloAv, deeply centrally sulcate and laterally cari-
nate. Rostrum yellow, darker at tip. just passing hind coxae.
Opercula very s(|uaie. just touching in centre.
I male in Coll.. H. A.
LriKjth. — 24 mm.. ; exp. teg.. 80 mm.
//r/A.— Africa. Kntel>be. T^^anda.

Pla'i'Vpi.kura siktmha. n. sp.
11 1(1(1 l)i-owiiish ocliraceous, two black fasciae lietwcen eyes, one
pasiug tlirough l)ase of front, tlie (tther across region of ocelli.

Proc. U.S. Vii-tni-i;v. 191 !•. IMatc Til.

Three New African Cicadaf^. 17

Eyva l)r(i\\ii. I'rointt mii brownish oehruL-eous, iinmacvilate.
Mf'sdiiot mil . Idownish ochvaceous, with four sti-oiifrly dcfiiuMl
black ulvdiiiial spots, the inner pair shorter, brownish spots at
anterior angles of and on centre of disc of cruciform elevation.
Abdomen V)lack, shading at lateral edges and tip to an obscure
castaneous. Body beneath brownish ochraceous. Ttgmina all grey-
ish fuscous and oj^aque, except for a hyaline fascia across bases of
apical areas, and another, including upper discoidal area and
portion of second. SjDot behind costa. small spots in apices of apical
areas, and margin, also hyaline. Wiiif/s Avith basal third and anal
area yellow, central third deep fuscous, and apical margin, Avhicii
is very broad, hyaline. Head equal in width to mesonotum. short,
obtusely convex, front not prominent, pronotal margins narrow and
not produced laterally; head, pronotum and mesonotum about equal
in length to abdomen. Face flattened, rostrum just reaching hind
coxae. Opercula, broadly rounded posteriorly, not quite meeting
centrally. Seven males in Coll. H. A.

Le/if/t/i. — 13-15 mm. ; exp. teg., 37-40 mm.

I/ah. — Central Africa. Sikumba.

Platypi.euha longirostris, n. sp.

Head, dull ochraceous. base of front in two bright yellow spots,
followed by a fine black fascia. Black fascia between eyes, includ-
ing area of ocelli and broken between ocelli and eyes, and surround
a dull ochraceous spot. Eyes brown. Pronotum dull ochraceous,
incisures and spot before posterior margin blackish. Spot on
anterior angles of pronotal lateral margins, which are fairly ampli-
ate and rounded, black. Mesonotum ochraceous, two central obconi-
cal spots, on each side a longer fascia extending over almost whole
of lateral areas, between the two central spots a fine line joining
with a large black area before the cruciform elevation ; all black,
cruciform elevation shining yellow. Abdomen black, tympanal
coverings dull castaneous. penultimate segment of abdomen above
covered, except for central dorsal line, with white tomentum.
Tegmiiia warm fuscous, marked with several white spots, of whiel
the most prominent are. two in radial area, one in third discoidal
area, one in eighth apical area, and one at apex of fifth apical area.
Wings reddish yellow, evenly margined with piceous, white spot
on margin just outside anal area, which is all yellow. Body beneath
almost uniformly dull brown, central sulcus to face, tip of rostrum.

3

18 HovKud AsJiton .• Nciv Ajnai.n Cicadidtu'.

transvei'se fasciae on abdominal segments, markings to fore femora.
black, sternum and abdomen powdered with wliite tomentum.
Rostrum reaches penultimate abdominal segment. Opercula broad,
rounded, just touching centrally. Tliree males and two females in
Coll. H. A.

Length. — J" 22 mm., exp. teg., 64 mm

7/^6. —Africa, Entebbe, Uganda.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE.

Fig. 3. — Plalypleura iiigromanjiiKUa, ii. sp. x -.
Fig. 4. — Platyjileura longirostris, n. sp. x 2.
Fig. 5. — Platypleura siknmba, n. .sp. x 2.

[Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Pr. I., 1914].

Akt. IV. — The Anatomy of Caryodes dufresnyi, Leach

Bv OLIVE B. DAVIES, M.Sc.

(Government Research Scholar, Melbourne Univet-eity).

(With Plate IV.).

[Read 14th May, 1914].

Introduction.

Most of the specimens with which this work was carried out wer ■
collected by Mr. C. French, at Port Esperaute. N.W. Tasmania,
and sent to Mr. Kershaw, at the National Muesum, who kindly gave
them to me to work out their anatomy.

Two other specimens, one of which was immature, were collected
by Miss Raff, M.Sc, at Mount Wellington, Tasmania.

Caryodes dufresnyi Avas named and first described l)y Leach as a
Helix; Zoological Miscellany, vol. 2, pp. L53, L54. pi. 120.

A short account of the anatomy, mostly of the reproductive
system, has been given by Semper, in Reis. im Philip., vol. iii. p.
102, pi. xvi., f. 7.

Mr. C. Hedley, F.L.S., has given us a description and a figure in
the Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W. (2), vi., 1891, p. 19, pi. ii., f. la, pi.
iii., f.l; and some further information as to its systematic position
in the Rec. Austr. Mus., ii. 1892, p. 29.

Other descriptions, chiefly of the shell, have been given by
Quoy and Gaimard, in the Voyage of the Astrolabe, vol. ii., j)]. x..
f.l; and by Adams, in the Genera of Recent MoUusca, vol. 2, pp.
146 and 153.

After having been described by Leach as a Helix, Caryodes
dufresnyi was described as Bulimus dufresnyi. The genus BuUmus
according to Cox, possesses the following characteristics : — " Shell
oblong or turreted, aperture with unequal longitudinal margins,
toothless or dentate; columella entire, revolute externally or
simple; peristome simple or expanded." While Semper adds: —
" A parallel ridged jaw. Teeth similar, in straight or curved rows.
Shell long, with thick mouth edge. The kidney is, in spite of the
long lung, as short as the pericardium; it is three cornered.

20 Olive B. Davie.< :

genital organs are quite simple, without aceessory oigans ; tli ■
Huiy l-)e a flagelluin."

The genus Cari/odes possesses the following thaiaiters. as given
bv Semper : — " Foot as usual, on the left of the edge of the manth-
there is a neck fold. There is a very peculiarly-sti uttured acces-
sory gland to the sheath (Scheide) (homologous to dart sac). Jaw
smooth. Teeth all unicuspid (as in Acavus).

" For the characters of the shell, see Albers."

External Features and General Description.

As 1 was unable to procure any living spcciments of Caryodt^
liufresnyi, I had to take the following description and nieasure-
ments from preserved animals.

Shell : Height. 37 mms. ; greatest diameter, 12 mms. Mouth
Opening: Height, 10.5 nmis. ; width, 6 mms. Whorls, 5. Col c
brown or brownish green, with darker brown and yellow bands.
There is no umbilicus.

The foot of an average specimen, preserved in spirit, measured
25 mm. in length. The animal itself was greyish brown, with a
lighter grey colour along the sole of tlie foot.

Organs of the Mantle Cavity.

The Mantle cavity is very long and narrow ; the kidney and heart
are situated at the posterior end of it; the bl(X)d vessels are large
and well marked.

The Kidney is a somewhat triangular organ, with a depression
on one side, into which the heart is fitted, and its apex directed for-
wards. Arising from the apex is a bladder-like structure, which
runs backwards, down one side of the kidney and |)artly round its
base, to oi>cn al)out half way along this into the puhnonai ;
cliamljer.

The Heart. The auricle is rather large compared with the ven-
tricle, it is extremely thin, being little more than a membranous
sac. The ventricle has thick walls and a small lumen. The heart
is surrounded by the pericardium, an extremely thin membrane,
in some places very ditlicult to make out in the sections.

The Renopericardial canal can be seen very distinctly in section,
one of which is' represented in Fig. TIT. It is a short canal leading
from the pericardial cavity into the kidney; the canal is lined
along along its length by very definite, ciliated, columnar cells.

Tic Ainitinnif of (\i I'ifitiirs ihifn'<iii/i. 'J I

The Reproductive System.

The Hermaphrodite »rh»ii«l lies rinse to the iiiteinal svirt'ace of the
third coil of the viseeral mass. It is a rosette shaped ^rhmd. com-
posed i)f a numV)er of fiuger-like processes united at the centre of
the gland.

The Hermaphrodite duet is a sinuuus duet lunninir from the her-
maphrodite gland to the albumen gland. It leaves the hermaphro-
dite gland from alKUit its centre and runs to near the anterior en<l
•of the albumen gland, turns back, lying closely applied to the
gland, and enters it about its centre on the under surface.

The Albumen gland is a large compact gland lying behind and
partly under the mantle cavity. It is incompletely divided by deep
furrows, which give it the appearance of being somewhat lobed.

The Coimnon dtict leaves the albumen gland from its anterior
*nd, and passes forwards, where it divides into vas deferens and
■oviduct.

The Vas deferens is a long slender tube, which, on leaving the
common duct, passes round and under a pectiliar gland, which I
shall call the shell gland, and the oviduct, up to the anterior end.
where it then turns and runs backwards, to enter the penis on the
under surface at the posterior end.

The Penis is large and strongly muscular. At the posteiioi- t-ud
the retractor penis muscle connects it with the ImxIv wall. It opens
to the exterior beside the female opening.

The Oviduct is a broad tube leading fron» the common duct to
the exterior. Shortly after leaving the common duct, the oviduct
receives the opening of a large wide gland, wjiiih ajtpears to f\nie-
tion as a shell gland.

The gland which I heard call the shell gland is a large thick-
walled gland, receiving the duct of the receptaculum seminis, near
its anterior end. Internally the lining of the gland is thrown into
very large folds, and lying in the grooves between these I found
small deposits of calcium carlxmate.

This is the structure referred to by Semper as a long thick sac. to
the under sheathing of which the uterus and long drawn out reeep-
taclum seminis are placed, and to its base a retractor. This sac
cut open contains a sausage shaped Ixidy, which is free at the
hinder end, and appears rounded at the end ; its outer wall was
thickly wrinkled and covered with thick epithelium, in the creases
■of which lay calcium carbonate in irregular plates. He then goes
on to give a description of the arrangement of the muscles of this
•organ.

22 Olive B. Davies :

In transverse section there is seen to be a thin external mem-
brane; underlying this there is a layer of muscular tissue; and
lining the lumen of the gland ciliated columnar epithelium, com-
posed of very long narrow cells, very granular at their bases and
with many vacuoles. Down one side of the gland is a specially-
marked fold, probably the one to which Semper refers. In section
this is seen to be composed of muscular tissue, amongst which is
scattered some brown material, with no definite structure, and is-
probably some kind of secretion.

The Receptaculum Seminis is a globular body connected by a long
thin duct with the shell gland.

The Alimentary System.

Tlie Jaw is simple and smooth.

The Radula consists of a numl>er of rows of similar unicuspid
teeth, one of which is shoAvn in Fig. VIb.

The Mouth opens into a very narrow oesophagus, which is closely
surrounded by the salivary glands. The large strong retractor
muscles run from either side of the ventral surface of the buccal
mass, and uniting, run along the length of the foot. These muscles
are of use in the biting and tearing of the food.

The Oesophagus leads into a fairly large stomach, which bends
back on itself, so that its anterior end and its posterior end lie side
by side. The stomach leads by a long intestine, Avhich twists
amongst the liver mass, receiving the ducts from this, and finally
ends in the rectum, which runs along the side of the length of the
long pulmonary chamber, to open to the exterior at the respiratory
opening.

The Salivary glands completely surround the anterior end of the
oesphagus. being fused in the mid-dorsal line. Their ducts open
into the hinder part of the buccal cavity.

The Liver is a large brown organ occupying by far the larger part
of the visceral hump. The intestine passes through it, and receives
its ducts near to its anterior end. In it are also embedded the
Hermaphrodite gland and the Hermaphrodite duct, while the All)u-
men gland lies closely fitted into a depression on its ventral surface,
being almost completely hidden by it.

The above work was carried out in the Melbourne University,
under the direction of Professor Spencer, whom I wish to thank
h>r all his advice. I also wish to thank Mr. J. Brake, B.Sc, who
kindly took the photograph represented in, Fig>. I. for meu,.

The Ainiioiitij of Caryodex dtifresnyi. 23

Literature.

Adams. — Geneiu of Recent Mollusca, vol. ii. pp. 146 and 163.
Cox. — Monograph of Australian Land Mollusca.
Hedley. C. F.L.S.— Pn.e. Linn. Soc, N.S.W. (2), vi., 1891, p. 19,
pi. ii.. f. la., pi. iii., f.l; Rec. Austr. Mus. ii., 1892, p. 29.
Semper. — Reis. ini Philip., vol. iii., p. 102, pi. xvi., f. 7.
Quoy and Gaimard. — Voyage of the Astrolabe, vol. ii., pi. x., f. 1.
Leach. — Zoological Miscellany, vol. ii. pp. 153-154, pi. 120.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

all figur(

3S : —

An.

Anus.

A.G.

Albumen gland.

Aur.

Auricle.

B.M.

Buccal mass.

B.V.

Blood vessel.

c.

Cilia.

CD.

Conunon duct.

C.G.

Cerebral ganglia.

C.G.A.

Common genital atrium.

H.D.

Hermaplirodite duct.

H.G.

Hermaphrodite gland.

K.

Kidney.

L.

Liver.

M.C.

Mantle cavity.

0.

Oesphagus.

OD.

Oviduct.

P.

Penis.

P.C.

Pericardium.

R.

Rectum.

R.M.

Retractor muscle.

R.P.C.

Renopericardial canal.

R.S.

Receptaculum seminis.

Sa.G.

Salivary gland.

S.G.

Shell gland.

T.S.

Superior tentacle.

V.

Ventricle.

V.D.

Vas deferens.

V.H.

Visceral hump.

24 Olive B. Davies: The Anatomy of Ca-ryodes <lafre8vyi.

Fig. I.— Bulimus dufresnyi (Shell) from a photograph.

Fig. II. — Dissection of Bulimus dufresnyi. to show general posi-
tion of the organs.

Fig. III. — Section across the Kidney and Heart, showing the
Kenopericardial canal.

Fig IV. — The Reproductive System.

Y'lg. V. — The Reproductive System dissected out. to show the
course of the vas deferens, and the shell gland.

Fig. VI. — (A) Portion of Radula, showing teeth in position. (B)
Single tooth.

Proc. R.S. Victoria. 1914. Plate IV

^$

F.o„.l

HIM \

PC /

^" F)u 111

PC

.VGA

Fie.VI

[Proc. Eoy. Soc. Victoria. 27 (N.S.).. I'l. 1.. 1914 .

Akt. V. — On a New Species of Ceratodus from the
Cretaceous of New South Wales.

By FREDERICK CHAPiMAN, A.L.S., Ac.

(Palaeontologist to the National Museum, Melbourne.)

(With Plate v.).

[Read 14th May, 1914].

Introductory.

The specimen now described is an opalised tooth of Ceratodus,
from the Upper Cretaceous of Walgett, X.S.W. It was presentL'd m
the National Museum by T. C. Wollaston, Esq.. of Glenelg. S.A.
The external surface of the tooth has been remarkably well pre-
served during the opalisation process, even to the minutest pittings
and rugosities. During replacement, the precious opal has infilled
the hollow portions of the tooth with amorphous mineral. l)ut
the external part is faitlifully replaced, as it still shows, in some
places to the depth of 8 mm., the vasodentinal structure as clearly
as in a recent tooth of Cerafodus. The tooth is somewhat imperfect,
having lost approximately 6 mm. of the anterior denticle, and a
small flake from the posterior denticle.

Description of Ceratodus (^Metaceratodus)^ wollastoni, subgen.
and sp. nov.

This tooth, including a portion of the splenial bone, comes from
the right side of the mandible, or lower jaw. It carries four den-
ticles which, in their directly normal arrangement, are like those
of the living Ceratodus (Neoceratodus) forsferi, Krefft. The inner
border is more strongly convex than in the Jurassic species. C.
avus. Smith Woodward, 2 but exhibits parallel, longitudinal grooves,
as in that form. The grinding surface is nearly flat, or only slightly
convex, and shallow sulci extend from between the bases of the
denticles nearly along the entire surface to the inner margin.
The grinding surface, moreover, is roughened by a regular series

1 New subgenus to include the Australian Mesozoic species. See note at end of paper.

2 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. ,\viii., 1906, pp. 1-a, pi. i., figs, la, b. Reprinted in Rec.
<5eol. Surv. Victoria, vol. ii., pt. 2, 1907, pp. 135-137, pi. xiv.

26 Frederick- Cha^mian :

of small pittings or areolations. the margins of which tend to form
a rudely polrgonal network. These pittings are much finer an(J'
closer than seem to be indicated in the woodcut given bv Ameghino,
of Ceratodu< iheringi.x from the Upper Cretaceous of Patagonia.
The splenial portion at the base projects from the tooth for about
4.5 nmi., and is flange-like. At the junction of the tooth with
the splenial, the lower surface is rather deeply excavated.

Dimension^.— IjQTxgth. of tooth when complete, about 35 mm.
Length of second anterior denticle from its junction with the base,
6 mm. Length of anterior denticle, approximately 17 mm. when
complete. Greatest height of tooth as distinct from the splenial
bone. 10 mm.

OccurreiK-e. — Upper Cretaceous (opal deposits). Walgert. '
Baradine, New South Wales. Collected and presented by T. C.
WoUaston, Esq.

Bel-at ion ships. — A British form, Ceratodii^ di^auris. Agassiz,-
from the Rhaetic of Aust Cliff, shows, in the figure given by L. C.
Miall,^ four denticles, as in the present species. The denticles in
the specimen mentioned, however, are more trenchant than in the
present species.

Ceratodus aru4. Smith Woodward.* sliows a nearer relationship-
than other described forms, in having four denticles, and in these
being comparatively short.

An Upper Cretaceous species from Patagonia. C. iheringi,
Ajiiegliino.-' appears to be a palatal tooth. It has more salient den-
ticles, five in number, and. according to Ameghino. shows closer
alliance with the European mesozoic species than with the living
Australian C (yeoceratodtis) forateri.

Dr. Emile Haug has described a Cretaceous species of Ceratodus
{C. africavu^.) from Djoua. near Timassanine. in the Sahara.^
which differs from the Triassic European examples- in the presence
of crenulations upon the anterior side of the tooth, and of six ridges
instead of five, characters which approach those of the living lung-
fish. Cerafodvs (Xrorerafodus) forstrri. of Queensland.

TTie surface character of the upper portion of the tooth <>f C. tpof-
Jasfoni bears a dose resemblance to the recent Cerafodv^. from

I PnKHf. Unh-. La Phtto. Xo. f, 19M. p. 10, fijr. 1.

e r«ss»us fossUes, Alias, vol iiL, ISSS, pi. \ix., fisj. 19.

Z rSee Miall (Ceriitodiu parent:. Mi&ll non Ag^iaaz, fide Woodward and Siierbon. Brit. Fos;-. Ven.
IsSCi. p 36). Vul Soc. Mon., ISTs, pi. v.. fig. 7.

4 Loc-, sui>ra cit., pd. L, fii^s- 1, la, h.

5 Ijot: supra dt., j». 10. fi^. 1.

6 C R. .\t-*d. S.-i., Piris, vol. ciLxxiiiL. 1904. p. 1S29.

Proc. K.S. Victoria. 1914. Plate V.

F.C. ad nat. del.

Tooth of Ceratodus (Metaceratodus) wollastoni, sp. nov.
Upper Cretaceous; New South Wales.

A Ncic Speciefi of Geratodus. 27

which it seems to ilift'ev only in the less iiuuiber of denticles. Re-
garding this latter featuie. Smith Woodward remarks,! in speaking;
of the Jurassic form C ants, which likewise has only four den-
ticles, " The multiplication of the denticles has already been^
observed in the teeth of certain sharks as they are traced onwards
in time; the same phenomenon obviously occurs in C'erafodvs/'

Conclusions.

The occurrence of a tooth of C'rrafodus in the Upper Cretaceoii'-
New Sf)uth Wales helps to link up the fossil Australian species with
the living Ceratodus (Neoceratodus) of Queensland. The older
form. C. anus, like the present, in shoAving only four denticles as
against six in the living species, bears a close affinity to the Creta-
ceous species, C. wollastoni. On the other hand, the surface of"
attrition in the Cretaceous tooth has a .structure almost identical
with the tooth of the living lung-fish, distinguishing it in this
respect from the comparatively coarsely reticulated surface seen in
the Jurassic species, Ceratodus avus.

In consideration of the fact that a fossil scale of Ceratodus iden-
tical in l)oth form and structure with the living lung fish- has been;
found in the same series of Jurassic strata in Gippsland^ wdiich
contained the tooth of Ceratodus arus, the evidence for associating
the Juiassic specimen (and at the same time the present Cretaceous
form) with both genus and subgenus of the living mudfish, were it
not for the number of denticles on the tooth, Avould seem to be
almost conclusive. In view of the intermediate oi- annectant charac-
ters of the Jurassic and Cretaceous with the living species of Aus-
tralia, the subgeneric name of Metacerafodus is here suggested.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Fig. ]. — Ceratodus (Metacerafodus) wollastoiit , subgen. et sp.
nov. Kight mandibular tooth. Upper Cretaceous, W^algett, New
South Wales. Nat. size.

Fig. 2. — Ditto. Outer aspect of tootii. Nat. size.

Fig ."'>. — Ditto. Denticle enlarged, to show the nature of the
pitted outei- surface, x 2.

1 Lof. supra cit., 1006, p. 2.

•2 The native name " Barramunda" jfiven to the liiii{f-fi.sh is applied to any larjfe river fish inr
Queensland, and according,' to some authorities (see D. G. Stead, "Fishes' of Australia," 190<i, p.
229), properly belonj^s to the osteojjlossid, Scltrupagen leichardti. The native name " djelleh " es-
pecially denotes the lung-fish.

3 Rec. Geol. Surv. Victoria, vol. iii., pt. 2, 1912, p. 234, pi. xxxix.

^/

[Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Part 1., 1914].

-Ak'I'. Y\.— Description of Neiv and Rare Fossils obtained
by Deep Boring in the Mallee.

Part III.' — Ostracoda to Fishes.
With a cowtpiete list of Fossils found In the Borings.

BY

FllEDERICK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., Etc.

(Palaeontologist to the National Museum).

(With Plates VI. -X.).
[Read 11th June, 1914].

Class CRUSTACEA.

Super-Order OSTRACODA.

Family CYPRIDAE.

Genus ARGILLOECIA. G. 0. Sars.

Argillokcia badia, a. S. Biady. (Plate VI., Fig. 1).

Argilloecia bodia, G. S. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall.. Zoology,
vol. i., pt. iii.. p. 40, pi. vi., figs Sa-d. Egger, 1901,
Abhandl, k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., vol xxi., pt. ii.. p. 422,
pi. iv., figs. 6. 7.
Observations. —

.This is the first record of the species in the fossil state. It
-was described by Dr. Brady from a " Challengei' " dredging in
'2-10 fathoms at Port Jackson, New South Wales. Dr. Kgger also
obtained this species fioni " Gazelle "" dredgings off the N.W. coast
of Australia at 357 metres; and off the coast of Queensland at
951 metres. Its occurrence in the fossil condition adds tn the
list of species of Mallee fossils, especially the ostracoda and some

1. For Part II. see this pirt>litation, vol. .\.\%'i. (ii.s.) pt. ii., l')14, pp. S01-o31.
'2. The fossil ostracoda of the eainozoics of southern Australia have hitherto liocii ahiiost en-
■tirel.v iiefflet'ted. They are therefore here dealt with in more detail than the reniaiiiiii;; jiroups.

New and Hurt' Fossils. 2U

foraminit'era, still liviii<:- in the Australian afea. Ixit in lower
latitudes compared ^vitll their niioeene ancestors, this obviously
pointinfr to the existence of a waiiner climate in those times.

The length of the fossil specimen is .55 nun., whilst the recent
example from Port Jackson measuied .4mm. Dr. Egger's
"Gazelle" specimen measured still less, being .21 mm. in length..

Occurrence. — Bore 5. 189-190 feet (Janjnkian).

(ienus MACHOCYPIUS. (4. S. Brady.
^JACKocvFius DKcuKA. G. S. Brady sp. (Plate VI., Fig. 2).^

Ci/f/ierif/eis decora, G. S. Brady, 1865, Trans. Zool. Soc,
Lond., vol. v., p. 366. pi. Ivii., figs. 13a-c. Mac-
rocyprls decora, G. S. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall., Zool..
vol. i.. pt. iii.. p. 44. pi. i., figs, 'oa-d.; pi. vi., figs.
8a, b.
Ohservatioiis. —

The geographical distribution of this species extends from the
West Indies southwards to the Southern Ocean at Kerguelen Id..
and thenee to the Admiralty Ids.

This species has been recorded^ in the fossil state under the name
of Paracyprlit decora, from the Govt, well-boring in the Murray
River Flats, 30 miles N.W. of the Nor'-West Bend of the Murray
River. The age of the fossil from that locality is probably Kalim-
nan (L. Pliocene, " Miocene " of Prof. Tate). The present recorded
specimens range from Janjukian to Kalimnan. The Mallee
examples approximate to the living specimens in size.

Occurrence.— Bove 9. 256-263 feet; 315-325 feet, Kalimnan or
Janjukian). Bore 10. 160-186 feet (Kalimnan). Bore 11, 542-544
feet (Janjukian).

Macrocypris tumida, G. 8. Brady. (Plate VI., Fig 3).

Macrocypris tumida, G. S. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall., Zool.,
voF. i., pt. iii., p. 43, pi. vi., figs. la-d. Egger, 1901.
Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., vol xxi., pt. ii., p. 424.
pi. i., figs. 27-29.
Observations. —

This species is one of the commonest and most generally distri-
buted in tlie Kalimnan and Janjukian portion of the present

1. Gool. Maj,'., Deo. ii., vol. iii., 1876, p. 335 (list). See also ibid, vol. iv., 1877, p. 526, as to the
age of the beds. , :

■J]0 Frederich Chapman :

btn-ings. It varies greatly in the proportional aciimination of the
post-ventral angle, and may be distinguished from .1/. decora by
rthe evenly-swollen sides and less flexuoiis upper and lower borders.
Dr. Brady gives as original localities for the living specimens,
Kerguelen Id., at 28 fathoms, and Wellington Harbour, New Zea-
land, from the tow-net at ti-awl. Dr. Egger obtained this
-species from the north-west coast of Australia, at 357 metres.

Occurrence.— Bore 2. 198-200 feet (Kalimnan). Bore 4. 180-li)0
feet (Janjukian). Bore 8, 210-219 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 9, 256-263 feet (Kalinuian or Janjukian). Bore 10. 310-320
feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 11. 457-458 feet; 540-542
feet; 542-544 feet (Janjukian).

Genus BYTH0CYPBI8. (i. S. Brady.

JjYTHGCYPRIS tumefacta, sp. nov. (Plate VI., Figs, ia-c and 5).

JJescripfion. — Carapace subreniform, very tumid. Seen from the
;side, greatest height about the middle ; dorsal margin evenly
arched, ventral margin straight to slightly concave, with a faint
sinuousity in the middle; extremities rounded, the posterior rather
more acutely than the anterior. Left valve much larger than the
I'ight, overlapping all round. Seen from above, edge view sub-
oblong, anterior end sub-acutely rounded, the posterior bluntly
rounded. End view sub-circidar, ventral edge flatter than the
•dorsal. Surface smooth.

Dimensions. — Holotype : Length, 1.125 mm.; breadth of caia-
pace, .575 mm. ; height, .575 mm. Paratype : A left valve. Length,
.95 mm. ; height, .5 mm.

Affinities. — In outline this species is somewhat close to Bj/thn-
cypris reniformis, G. S. Brady, i from which' it materially differs in
its more swollen carapace and less reniform outline. It is interesting
to note, in common with the above comparison, that B. reniformis
is still living in Bass Strait, so that it is very probable that the
present species was the direct forerunner of the living Australian
form.

Occurrence. — Bore 4, 163-170 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 5, 189-190 feet (Janjukian). Bore 10, 310-320 feet (Kalimnan
or Janjukian). Bore 11, 342-349 feet; 450-452 feet; 540-542 feet;
546-548 feet; 552-554 feet; 554-556 feet; 556-558 feet; 558-560 feet
{Janjukian).

1. Kep. Chall. Zool., vol. i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 4G, pi. v., figs. \a-L

New and Ji<ire Fo-ssUfi. 31

Fain. BAIRDIIDAE.

Cxenu.s BAIKDIA, McCoy.

Bairdia AMYfJDALOiDKS, G. S. Biady. (Plate VT., Fig. 6).

Bairdia ami/(/daloi(/ex, G. S. Brady, 1865, Trans. Zool.
Soc, Lond., vol. v., p. 364, pi. Ivii., figs. Ga-c. Idem.
1880, Rep. Chall., Zool., vol. i., pt. iii., p. 54, pl. ix..
figs. 5rt-/; pl. X., figs. 2a-c. Chapman, 1910, Proc.
Roy. Soc, Vict., vol. xxii (N.S.), pt. ii. p.. 307.
Observations. —

The above species has been met with in fossil deposits only (mce
■previously, namely, at Batesford, near Geelong, in beds of Janjuk-
ian age. In the Mallee bores the continuity of the fossil series
with the living form is seen in the fact that examples occur in both
Janjukian and Kalimnan. beds. The fossil specimens are slightly
smaller, but otherwise typical, with tlie exception that the dorsal
margin is rounder and the posterior acumination sulcated, as in
B. victrix,^ from which species it differs in its more elongate shape
.and less strongly arched dorsal margin. It probably points to an
ancestral type from which both living forms have diverged through
• differences in environment.

In the living state B. amygdaloides has a fairly wide distribu-
tion, for it ranges from the coral islands of the Pacific and Torres
Strait to Port Jackson, and even as far south as Mqncoeur Id.. Bass
Strait. Its bathymetrical range is doAvn to 160 fathoms.

Occurrence. — Bore 4, 180-190 feet (Janjukian). Bore 10. 310-
320 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 11, 542-544 feet (Jan-
jukian).

Bairdia australis, .sp. nov. (Plate VI., Fig. 7)

Bairdia ovata, G. S. Brady (non Bosquet sp.), 1865, Trans.

Zool. Soc, Lond., vol. v., p. 354, pl. Ivii., figs. ~ia-c.

Idem, (in R. Etheridge's Report). 1876, Geol. Mag.

Dec. ii., vol. iii., p. 335.

Bairdia (?) ovata, G. S. Brady (non Bosquet sp.), 1880, Rep.

Chall. Zool., vol. i.. pt. iii., p. 53, pl. vii., figs. ?>a-d.

Observations. — As Dr. Brady has already pointed out,''^ the

recent specimens from Simon's Bay, South Africa (15-20 fathoms),

and from the E. of New Zealand (150 fathoms), differ from

1. G. S. Brady. Ibid, p. 56, pl. x., fi^s. ,5a-d.

2. Tom. cit, 1S80, p. 54.

'S'Z Fredericl' C/uipmau. :

Bosquet's Cretaceous fossils in having the carapace liigher in pro-
portion to the length, and in having a more acute posterior
angle. Bosquet remarks in his description^ that the valves are-
obliquely oval and rounded at the two extremities. The feature of
a sub-acute posterior angle is so constant in both the Cainozoic
and living Australian examples that it necessitates a separation of
these forms from the Cretaceous specimens.- They may, therefore.
appropriately bear the name Bairdio australis.

The earlier record of the above spec-ies as a fossil is by G. S.
Brady (in R. Etheridge, as B. orafa. Brady). It came from the
Kalimnan deposits (Lower Pliocene) of the Murray River Flats,
South Australia.

In the Mallee Bores the above species was obtained from both
Janjukian (Miocene) and Kalimnan beds. They are all isolated
valves, and thus similar to the living examples dredged by tlie
" Challenger."

Occurrence. — Bore 9, 256-263 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 11, 260-265 feet (Kalimnan). 540-542 feet; 542-544 feet:.
548-550 feet; 552-554 feet; 554-556 feet (Janjukian).

Family CYTHERIDAE.

Genus CYTHERE, Midler.

CYTHt;RE CAXALicuLATA, Reuss sp. (Phite VI., Fig. 8).

Ci/pridina caual/ciilafa. Reuss, 1850. Haidinger's Abhandl. ,

vol. iii.. p. 76. pi. ix.. fig. 12.

C //there canalicidata, Reuss sp.. Egger. 1858. Ostrak. der

Miocan.-Schicht.. vol. v., p. 33, pi. v.. figs. 10. 11.

Brady. G. S., 1865. Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., vol. v.,

p. 373, pi. lix.. figs. 4r/-/. Idem, 1880. Rep. Chall.

Zool.. vol. i.. pt. iii.. p. 73, pi. xiv., figs. ~ia-d. Egger,

1901, Abhandl. d. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss.. vol. xxi..

Abth. ii.. p. 432, pi, iv.. figs. 15, 16.

Observations. — This distinct little species has had a world-wide

distribution from Miocene times to the present day. Reuss-

described it from the Cainozoics of Bohenua, Austria (Miocene),

1. Bosquet, Vorli. de C'omm. CJeoI. Besfhr. Kaart Nederland, vol. ii., 18.i4. pp. "H nnd 74, pi. v.,
figs. ead.

•2. For tracings and a copy of the description of Bosquet's Cretaceou.s recoid I am iiiriebted to
mv friend Mr. Chas. r)a\ ies Sherlioni, A.I-.S.

A^eiv and Rare Fossils. 33

Gulicia (Miocene) and Parma (Middle Pliocene). Egger obtained
it from the Miocene of Ortenburg. Lienenklaus found the same
species in the Middle Oligocene of Jeurre. It has also occurred
in Pleistocene deposits in Scotland, as recorded by Brady, Crosskey
and Robertson. In Australia its present occurrence as a fossil is
in Miocene (Janjukian) strata. In some of the examples found
here, the rugosities of the carapace tend to become papillate.

In the living condition ('. caiialiculata was found by Dr. G. S.
Brady in dredgings from Hobson's Bay, where the present writer
has also found it in abundance, and in no wise differing from Reuss'
fossil form. Brady also found it in the " Challenger " dredgings
off East Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait, 38-40 fathoms; and in Port
Jackson. N.S. Wales. 2-10 fathoms. The example figured by Egger
(loc. cit. pi. iv.. figs. 15, 16) from the "Gazelle" dredgings, Sta.
90, 18' 52' S, 116° 13 E, off Western Australia, appears to be
identical with Brady's Cythere foveolata, which has a broader
carapace, and is not so rugosely ornamented.

Occurrence. — Bore 9, 256-263 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 11, 219-260 feet; 260-265 feet (Kalimnan); 446-448 feet; 546-
548 feet; 548-550 feet (Janjukian).

Cythere crispata, G. 8. Brady. (Plate VI.. Fig. 9).

Cythere crispata, G. S. Brady, 1868, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
ser. 4, vol. ii., p. 221, pi. xiv., figs. 14, 15. Idem,
1880, Rep. Chall. Zool., vol. i., pt. iii., p. 72, pi. liv.,
figs. 8 a-d.

Ohxerrations. — The fossil valves from the Mallee bores approach
the living specimens veiy closely, both in form and ornament. The
polygonal surface wrinklings ai-e, if anything, slightly coarser in
the fossil examples. In some features it approaches botli C . luh-
bockuina, G.S.B. and C. demissa, G.S.B.

In the fossil condition C. crispata has hitherto been known only
from the Pleistocene of Scotland, Ireland and Norway. It is a
widely distributed form at the present time, being known from tho
shores of Great Britain, Norway and the Mediterranean; and in
the southern hemisphere in Port Jackson (2-10 fathoms), off Boobv
Islands (6-8 fathoms); and in Hong Kong Harbour (7 fathoms).

This species has been lately recorded by the writer from
" Endeavour " dredgings off South Australia at 100 fathoms.

Occurrence. — Bore 11, 544-546 feet; 654-556 feet (Janjukian).

34 Frederick Chapman :

CYTHiiHK DASYDEHMA, G. S. Brady. (Plate VI., Fig. 10).

Ci/t/iere dasyderma, G. S. Brady. 1880, Rep. Chall. Zuol.,

vol. i., \>t. iii., p. 105, pi. xvii., figs, io-f ; pi. xviii..

figs. ia-f.

Ohservations. — The living species diffei-s from our fossil examples

in having the intersections of the angular excavations beset with

short, blunt spines. In the fossils the angular pittings are strongly

developed, and it may be surmised that the spines, if any existed,

were fine and have been abraded.

C. dasyderina has been recorded by its first describer from 20
widely separated localities, all of which sh(jw deposits of a more
or less deep sea nature.

Occurrence. — Bore 11. 552-554 feet; 554-556 feet (Janjukian).

Cythere dkmissa, G. S. Brady. (Plate VI., Fig. 11).

Cythere deniissa, G. S. Brady, 1868, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,

ser. 4, vol. ii.. p. 180, pi. xii.. figs. 1, 2. Idem. 1880,

Rep. Chall. Zool., vol. i.. pt. iii., p. 66, pi. xii., figs.

, \a-j. Id., 1890, Trans. Roy. Soc, Edin., vol. ixxv.,

pt. ii., No. 14, p. 497.

Ohservations. — ^The fossil specimens exhibit the merest trace of

the posterior spines of the border sometimes seen in the living

examples. Recent specimens were dredgd from Port Jackson at 2

to 10 fathoms; and from Noumea, New Caledonia, 2 to 6 fathoms.

In the South Sea Islands it occurred between tide-marks.

Occurrence.— Bove 10, 160-186 feet; 225-230 feet (Kalimuan).

Cythere bictyon, G. S. Brady. (Plate VII., Figs. 12, 13).

Cythere diet yon. G. 8. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall. Zool., vol.

i., pt. iii., p. 99, pi. xxiv., figs. la-y. Egger, 1901,

Abhandl. d. k. bayer. Ak. Wiss.. vol. xxi., abth. ii.,

p. 442, pi. vi., figs. 41-43.

Ohservations. — -It will be seen on reference to the splendid series

of figures given by Dr. Brady that this species is very variable,

owing to the passage of the aculeated surface in the younger stages

into the strongly ribbed and excavated ornament of the older

stages. In the senile condition it somewhat resembles C . normani,

but the latter has a more olilifiuely truncated antero-dorsal angle.

NeiD and Rare Fossils. 35

Brady records this species from many localities, chiefly in deep
water, as in the West Indies, ofi Sydney, and Papua. Egger notes
it from Kerguelen Island, and Table Bay, S. Africa.

I have lately found this species in dredgings made by the F.I.S.
" Endeavour," from E. of Tasmania at 777 fathoms, and off South
Australia at 100 fathoms.

It is very interesting to note that this species is one of the most
abundant in the Mallee fossil material, as it is in many deep-Avater
dredgings at the present day. It is, moreover, an almost restricted
southern form. The Mallee specimens frequently have their valves
united, pointing to tranquillity of the water during the deposition
of the calcareous Miocene ooze.

Occurrence.— Bore 1, 215-244 feet (Janjukian). Bore 9, 256-263
feet; 315-325 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 10, 310-320
feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 11, 219-260 feet; 260-265
feet (Kalimnan); 267-270 feet; 272-315 feet; 438-440 feet; 457-
458 feet (Janjukian).

Cythere flexicostata, sp. nov. (Plate VII., Figs. 14a, h).

Description. — Valve, seen from the side, elongate, pyriform;
broad anteriorly, with a deep flange-like border, highest in the
anterior third ; ventral and dorsal margins nearly parallel for some
distance, but tapering posteriorly to a blunt point; dorsal margin
convex, and interrupted by a short crest-like spine, ventral margin
straight; the posterior extremity is armed with a few ragged spines.
In edge view the valve is thickest in the posterior third, where it
terminates in a strong salient spine, falling abruptly and concavely
to the posterior, and gradually to the anterior, extremity. Surface
of valve ornamented with, six or seven longitudinal, sinuous costae,
which are more or less persistent from end to end of the valve;
they pass over the central boss or tubercle, and increase in strength
below and above the median area, being carried over on to the
anterior flange, and posteriorly take a sudden bend dorsally, pass-
ing steeply down to the blunt, spinous hind margin. Between
the costae there are faint pittings or excavations.

Dimensions. — Length of valve, .92 mm.; height, .44 mm.; thick-
ness of carapace, about .6 mm.

Observations. — So far as I can find, there is no described species
which shows a decided relationship to the above. Tlie general
form suggests a remote resemblance to the genus Bythocythere,

4a

36 Frederick CliWpman :

but the well-marked anterior border and position of the spines aiii.
tubercle suggest an affinity with forms like C>/fhere rastromar-
ginata.

Occiirrtnce. — Bore 10. 310-320 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).

Cythere lactea, G. 8. Brady. (Plate VII., Fig. 15).

Gythertlactta, G. S. Brady, 1865, Trans. Zool. Soc, Lend.,
vol. v., p. 377, pi. Ix., figs. 3rt-c. Idem, 1880, Rep.
Chall. Zool., vol. i., pt. iii.. p. 91, pi. xxii., figs. \a-d.
Ohservations. — The present fossil occurrences show this com-
paratively rare form to have existed as early as the Miocene. Our
specimen matches exactly that figured by Dr. Brady from an Aus-
tralian sounding at 17 fathoms.

Occurrence. — Bore 10, 310-320 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 11, 562-564 feet (Janjukian).

Cythere lepralioides, G. S. Brady. (Plate VII., Fig. 16).

(Jythere lejrralioides, G. S. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall. Zool.,
vol. i., pt. iii., p. 94, pi. xix., figs. ba-d.

Ohservations. — The Mallee specimeils came from a Kalimnan
horizon (Lower Pliocene). They are fairly typical as compared
with the living form, the specimen here figured being a somewhat
extreme variety with an unusually broad posterior extremity.
Brady records this species from two localities only, viz., Simon's
Bay, S. Africa (15-20 fathoms), and off the Cape of Good Hope
(150 fathoms). I have lately determined this species from " En-
deavour " d'redgings taken east of Tasmania at the exceptional
depth of 1122 fathoms.

Occurrence. — Bore 6, 114-150 feet (Kalimnan). Bore 8, 210-219
feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 10, 195-225 feet (Kalimnan).

Cythere lubbockiana, G. S. Brady. (Plate VIT., Fig. 17).

Gi/there lubbockiana, G. S. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall Zool..
vol. i., pt. iii., p. 68, pi. xiv., figs. 6a-d.
Obserraf/ons. — This is a shallow water species in modern de-
posits, being recorded by Dr. Brady from Booby Island, in 6-8
fathoms.

It occurs in the Mallee bore at a distinctly Janjukian (Miocene)
horizon, as well as in samples which have a mixed Janjukian and
Kalimnan (Lower Pliocene) fauna.

Neiv and Rare Fossils. 37

The fossils differ t'rtnii the liviii<i shells in luiviiifj: tlie surfaee-
pittings rather iiiore pionouueed. otherwise they agiee.

Occurrence. — Bore 8, 210-211) feet (Kalimnaii <ir Janjukian ).
Bore 11. 260-2(55 feet (Kaliiinian) ; 446-448 feet; 540-542 feet
i{Janjukiaii).

Cytiikrk militahis, (^. S. Brady sp. (Plate VIT., Fig. 18).

(\//f/irrcis mi/if oris, H. S. Brady. 1866, Trans. Zool. Soc,

Loud., vol. v., p. .'585, pi. Ixi., figs. 9a-f/.
Ci/there clar'njcra. Idem, 1880, Rep. Chall. Zool., vol i., pt.
iii.. p. 109, pi. xxiii., figs. la-d.

Ohser rat ions. — From an extensive series of valves whieh I refer
to the above form, obtained from dredgings round the Australian
coast, I am eonvinced that C. milifnris, as figured by Dr. Brady,
represents the young form of the later described C. clarigera. as
Brady himself has suggested. ^

Several early Cainozoie forms allied to this species have been
described by Keuss, Speyer and others, which show it to be one of
a related group which has persisted throughout the Cainozoie period.

The figured specimen is an extreme form in which the central
hystricated crest is st)-ongly developed, and the margin regularly
beset with blunt spines. Others of the fossil specimens are matched
by Brady's G. clarigern, which come from Port Jackson in New
South Wales (2-10 fathoms); whilst an occasional young form agrees
with the figure of C. miUtaris, passage forms being found which
link up the sei-ies. The species is very connnon in the first of
the depths indicated below. This is a glauconitic clay in which
this species, togethei- witli ('. f/icf//o/i, fi.S.B., and other ostracodal
shells, form about 15 per cent, of the washings.

Occurrence.— Bore 9, 256-263 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 11. 260-265 feet (Kalimnan); 562-564 feet (Janjukian).

Cythkre nobmani, G. S. Brady. (Plate VII., Fig. 19).

Cythere norniani, G. S. Brady, 1866, Trans. Zool. Soc.,

Lond., vol. v., p. .379, pi. Ixi.. figs. ba-d. Iden). 1880.

Rep. Chall. Zool. vol. i., pt. iii.. p. 101, pi. xvii., figs.

Za-d.; pi. xxvi., figs. 4r/, h.

Ohservnfions. — Oui' specimens elosely agree with the figures given

lay Dr. Brady in his original account of the species, specimens of

which were dredged from the Abrolhos Bank, S. Africa. The

1. R. Etheridge, Geol. Mag., Dec. ii., vol. iii., 1876, p. .S3o.

38 Frederick Chapman :

" Challenger '' specimens came from Heard Island in the Southern-
Ocean, at 150 fathoms. Cy there normani was also recorded as a
fossil by Dr. Brady, from a well-sinking in the Murray Flats of
South Australia,! in beds of later Tertiary age. I have lately
recorded this species from a raised beach (Pleistocene) on the slopes
of Mount Erebus in the Antarctic, from material collected on the
Shackleton Expedition.

Occurrence. — Bore 10, 310-320 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 11, 444-446 feet; 446-448 feet (Janjukian).

Cythere obtusalata, G. S. Brady. (Plate VII., Fig. 20).

Cythere ohtusalata, G. S. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall. Zool.,
vol. i., pt. iii., p. 91, pi. xii., figs. lo-o.

Observations. — It is interesting to record this striking little^
species foi- the first time from a fossil deposit, at an horizon near
the junction of the Janjukian and Kalimnan beds.

As a recent species C . ohtusalata has been recorded from off E.
Moncoeur Island, Bass Strait, at 38-40 fathoms, and off the-
Admiralty Islands at 16-25 fathoms (G. S. Brady), .l^so from
Kerguelen Island at 104 metres; near W. Africa at 677 metres; off"
Monrovia, W. Africa at 18 metres, and near Mauritius at 411
metres (J. G. Egger).

The fossil specimens are closely comparable with the recent
forms figured by Dr. Brady.

Occurrence. — Bore 9, 256-263 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 11, 442-444 -feet; 446-448 feet (Janjukian).

Cythere ovalis, G. S Brady. (Plate VII., Fig. 21).

Cythere ovalis, G. S. Brady. 1880, Rep. Chall. Zool.. vol.
i.. pt. iii., p. 66, pi. xiv.. figs. ia-d.

Obser nations. — This species was originally recorded from recent
dredgings off Booby Island, Torres Sti-ait at 6-8 fathoms.

The fossil specimen here figured comes from a Janjukian horizon
(Miocene). It is closely comparable with the living form, only
slightly differing in the more regular polygonal surface-pittings,
and in the absence of short spines at the posterior extremity.

Occurrence.— Bore 11, 267-270 feet (Janjukian).

New and Rare Fossils. 39

Cythp:re pakallklo<;kamma, G. S. Brady. (Plate VII., Fig. 22).

Cythere pardUfhxjraiiinia, G. S. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall.
Zool., vol. i., pt. iii., p. 82, pi. xv., figs. \a-e. Egger,
1901, Abhaiull. d. k. haver. Akad. Wiss., vol. xxi.,
abth. ii., p. 442, pi. vi.. figs. 15, 16.
Ohserratio/is. — Originally dredged off Prince Edward's Island
in the Southern Ocean at 50-150 fathoms, this species has lately
been found by the writer in a sounding off Cape Wiles, S. Aus-
tralia at 100 fathoms. Dr. Egger recorded it from the West
African coast, and it has lately t>ccurred as a Pleistocene fossil in
the Antarctic.

This species shows a considerable amount of variation, the orna-
ment in some specimens becoming granulate at the intersection of
the reticulations, whilst the carapace may be more inflated. It
seems to link on to Cythere wyville-thomsoni by annectant
characters.

Occurrence. — Bore 9, 315-325 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 10. 195-225 feet (Janjukian).

Cytheke postdeclivis, sp. nov. (Plate VIT., Figs. 23a, 6).

DeKcripfion. — Shell, seen from the side, oblong ovate, highest in
the anterior third, with parallel sides and broad recurved anterior
end, which projects towards the ventral margin, and is roundly
truncate at the dorsal angle; posterior extremity bluntly acuminate.
In edge view, the carapace is tumid, depressed in the median area,
steeply falling fore and aft to the extremities, the posterior being
deeply impressed, and often with a fossa in the central area. Sur-
face-ornament consisting of cancellated and vermiform depressions,
which have a distinct trend in certain parts of the shell, tending
to parallelism at the hinder end and the dorsal margin. The
muscle-spot area is indicated by a stellate arrangement of the
cancellae.

D/i/u'ns/(nis. — Length, 1-4 mm.; lieight, .675 mm.; thickness of
cai-apace. .6 mm.

Oh.<err(ifinnx. — In a general way this species is related to both
G. oral/'s and C. ca/icclla(a. The ornament, however, is so distinct
as to warrant the establishment of a new species. The posterior
depression is more marked than in C. cancellafa. It is one of
the commonest forms in the present collection of Mallee ostracoda.

40 Frederick Chapnian :

Occurrence. — Bore 3, 201-220 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 8, 210-219 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 10. :510-320
feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 11, 342-349 feet; 438-440
feet; 440-442 feet; 442-444 feet; 446-448 feet; 457-458 feet; 540-
542 feet; 542-544 feet; 544-546 feet; 546-548 feet; 548-550 feet;
5(M-566 feet (Janjukian).

Cythere rastromarginata, G. 8. Brady. (Plate VII., Fig. 24).

Cythere rastronmrgitiata. G. S. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall.
Zool., vol. i., pt. iii., p. 83, pi. xvi., figs. la-d. ; 2a-d.
Egger, 1901, Abhandl. d. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., vol.
xxi., abth. ii., p. 442, pi. vi., figs., 5-9.

Observations. ^T\\e " Challenger " examples came from Bass
Strait, and off Honolulu. Egger obtained it between Fiji and
Samoa, and from the Western Australian coast.

This is its first occurrence in the fossil state. It occurs in the
bores in the Kalimnan (Lower Pliocene) strata, or even below that
series. Like several other species of ostracoda occurring in these
borings, the form persists in the present Bass Strait fauna, not
many miles removed from the site of the old Murray Gulf.

Occurrence. — Bore 8, 210-219 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 11, 170-175 feet; 199-209 feet; 219-260 feet (Kalimnan).

Cythere scabrocuneata, G. S. Brady. (Plate VIII., Fig. 25).

Cythere scahrocuncato^Q. S. Brady, 1880. Rep. Chall. Zool.,
vol. i., pt. iii., p. 103, pi. xvii., figs. 5r/-/.- j)l. .xxiii.,
figs. '2a-c.

Observations. — The figured specimen is a ([uadrate and coarsely
papillate variety of the above species, but it is impossible' to
separate it from its associated typical examples from the same
series, some of which are identical with the living forms. This is
another species still living in Bass Strait, having remained per-
sistent in nearly the same area from Janjukian (Miocene) times. It
has also been recorded from recent dredgings in the Inland Sea,
Japan, and in Wellington Harbour, New Zeal-and.

Occurrence.— ^OYQ 11. 430-432 feet; 442-444 feet; 444-446 feet;
446-448 feet; 457-458 feet; 544-546 feet; 552-554 feet (Janjukian).

New and Rare Fossils. 41

Cythere sciNTiLLULATA, G. S. Brady. (Plate VIII., Fig. 26).

Cythere scintillulata, G. S. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall. Zool.,
vol. i., pt. iii., p. 62, pi. xiv., figs. -ia-d.

Observations. — This species is represented by one typical speci-
men in the bores, at a level showing a mixed Kalimnan (Lower
Pliocene) and Janjukian (Miocene) fauna. This is its first occur-
rence in the fossil state.

C. scintillulata was dredged in the Straits of Magellan by the
■" Challenger," at 55 fathoms.

Occurrence. — Bore 5, 189-190 (Janjukian).

Cythere scutigera, G. S. Brady. (Plate VIII., Fig. 27).

Cythere scutigera, G. S. Brady, 1868, Les Fonds de la Mer,
vol. i., p. 70, pi. viii., figs. 15, 16. Idem, 1880, Rep.
Chall. Zool., vol. i., pt. iii., p. 109, pi. xxii., figs. Sa-/.

Observations. — ^^This species, as represented in the Mallee Bores,
ishows the general specific characters of the recent species, but is less
•distinct in the sharper features of the carapace.

Brady has recorded this species from Amboyna, Java and Papua.

Occurrence. — Bore 11, 442-444 feet (Janjukian).

Cythere wyville-thomsoni, G. S. Brady. (Plate VIII,, Fig. 28).

Cythere wi/viUe-thomsoni. G. S. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall.
Zool., vol. i., pt. iii., p. 82, pi. xx., figs. 4«-/. Egger,
1901, Abhandl. d. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss.. vol. xxi. abth.
ii., p. 444, pi. vi., figs. 13-14.

Observations. — A single specimen of this form, typical in neaily
;all its characters with the recent form, but not so spinous at the
■extremities, and with more parallel sides, occurs in the Janjukian
•(Miocene) of the Mallee bores.

The " Challenger " obtained it from Heard Island and Kerguelen
Island in the Southern Ocean, and in Torres Strait. Egger's
■" Gazelle " specimens came from the west coast of Africa.

Occurrence. — Bore 10, .'UO-320 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).

42 Frederick Ghaprnan :

Genus KRITHE, Brady, Crosskey and Robertson.

Krithe eggkki, sp. nov. (Plate VIII., Figs. 29a, b).

Description. — Valve, seen from the side, narrow, subreniform,
anterior extremity rounded, posterior bluntly pointed at the ven-
tral angle ; dorsal margin arched, ventral slightly sinuous. The
anterior margin is bordered by a flange of unusual width for this
genus. Surface minutely punctate. Edge view of carapace ovate,
compressed anteriorly, broad at hinder end.

Dimensions. — Length, .615 mm.; height, .27 mm.; thickness of
carapace, .27 mm.

Affinities. — This species is related to Krithe producta, G. S.
Brady,! but is much narrower, and has a conspicuous, flange-like-
anterior border.

Named in honour of Dr. J. G. Egger, who has already described
more than one new species of this genus.

Occurrence. — Bore 11, 260-265 feet (Kalimnan).

Genus LOXOCONCHA, G. 0. Sars.

Lo.\ocoNCHA AUSTRALIS, G. S. Brady. (Plate A^IIf., Fig. 30).

Loxoconcha australis, G. S. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall Zool.,
vol. i., pt. iii., p. 119, pi. xxviii., figs. 5«-/. ; pi. xxix.,
figs. ']a-d.

Ohser rat ions. — The " Challenger " recorded this species from-
Port Jackson, New Soutli Wales, at 2-10 fathoms, and from Booby
Island, Torres Strait, 6-8 fathoms. I have lately obtained it from
a sounding east of Tasmania, 777 fathoms, dredged by F.I.S.
" Endeavour."

Typical specimens occur in both Janjukian and Kalimnan strata
in the bores, showing the species to have been established in Aus-
tralian seas as eai-ly as the Miocene.

Occurrence. — Bore 7, 142 feet 3 inches-155 feet (Kalimnan).
Bore 10, 105-225 feet ; 225-230 feet (Kalimnan). Bore 11, 444-446
feet (Janjukian).

1. Kep. Chall. Zool., vol. i., pt,. iii., 1880, p. 114, pi. \xvii., fi<;-8. In.?.

New and Rare Fossih. 43-

Genus XESTOLEBERIS, G. 0. Sars.
Xkstoleberis curta, G. S. Brady sp. (Plate VI 11., Fig. 31).

(?) Cytheridta carta, G. S. Brady, 1865, Trans. Zool. Soc,

Lond., vol. v., p. 370, pi. Iviii., figs. 7a, b.

Xestoleberis curta, G. S. Brady sp., 1868, Les Fonds de la

Mer, vol. i., p. 79, pi. x., figs. 16-18. Idem, 1880, Rep.

Chall. Zool., vol. i., pt. iii., p. 126, pi. xxxi., figs. Qa-d.

ObservatioJis. — The specimen from the bore, at a Kalimnani

horizon, is in every way typical.

As a recent species this form occurs in the Southern Ocean at
Kerguelen Island; at Port Jackson in New South Wales, at Booby
Island, Torx-es Strait, and in the Pacific Ocean at Honolulu, Fiji,
and New Caledonia.

Occurrence. — Bore 10, 225-230 feet (Kalimnan).

Xestolebkris margaritra, G. S. Brady ap. (Plate VIII., Fig. 32)..

Cj/theridea margaritea, G. S. Brady, 1865, Trans. Zool.

Soc, Lond., vol. v., p. 370, pi. Iviii., figs. ^a-d.
Xestoleberis margaritea, G. S. Brady sp., 1880, Rep. Chall..
Zool., vol. i., pt. iii., p. 127, pi. xxx., figs. 2a-g.
Egger, 1901, Abhandl. d. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., vol.
ixi., abth ii., p. 456, pi. iii. figs. 27-30.
Observations. — This species occui-s in the Mallee bores at the
top of the Janjukian series, thus showing the specimens to have
lived in Miocene times.

In the living condition, X. margaritea. is known from the-
Mediterranean and off Booby Island. Torres Strait.
Occurrence. — Bore 11, 267-270 feet (Janjukian).

Xestoleberis variegata, G. S. Brady. (Plate VIII., Fig. 33).

Xestoleberis variegata, (i. S. Brady, 1880, Rep. Chall. Zool..
vol. i., pt. iii., p. 129, pi. xxxi., figs. Sa-g.
Observations. — In the living condition this species has occurred
at Cape Verde, Tongatabu, Fiji, Samoa, Funafuti and New Cale-
donia, in depths varying from shallow water to 1150 fathoms. I'
have lately found this species in a sounding by F.I.S. " Endea-
vour."' off Cape Wiles, S. Australia, at 100 fathoms.

-44 Frederick Chapuian :

The present example from the bore came from the top of the
Janjukian series (Miocene). It is in every way comparable with
recent examples of the species now living in the Southern Ocean at
100, fathoms, even to the distinct variegation of the carapace.

Occurrrence. — Bore 11, 267-270 feet (Janjukian).

Genus CYTHERURA, G. 0. Sars.
CyTHKRUR.-V CAPILLIFERA, sp. uov. (Plate VIII., Figs. 34a, b).

Description. — Carapace oblong, compressed anteriorly. Seen
from the side, the valve is highest at the posterior third ; dorsal
margin straight in the middle, and convexly rounded to the
extremities; ventral border widely concave; surface gently sloping
to the front, swollen and abrupt behind, with a short caudal
•extremity. Edge view compressed at the anterior, abi-uptly trun-
cated behind, and steeply incurved to the caudal prolongation.
Surface ornamented with fine, sinuous, hair-liko lines, especially
on the ventral area, generally punctate over the whole surface.
Colour patches of organic origin still visible on tlie valve.

Dimensio7is. — Length, 1.04 mm.; height, .423 mm.; thickness of
■carapace, .423 mm.

Affinities. — The nearest allied form to the above appears to be
€i/therura similis. G. 0. Sars.i a species found round the shores of
Great Britain, and in the Arctic and Scandinavian seas, as well as
& Pleistocene fossil of Scotland, Ireland and Norway.

Occurrence. — Bore 11, 175-197 feet (Kalimnan).

Cytherura ouyenensis, sp. nov. (Plate VIII., Figs. 35a, b).

Description. — Carapace oblong, medially compressed; seen from
the side, rhomboidal, highest towards the front, height exceeding
half the length; anterior evenly rounded at the ventral, and trun-
cately so at the dorsal angle; posterior bluntly caudate; dorsal line
short and straight, curving steeply to the posterior, ventral margin
slightly concave, swelling out towards the posterior extremity, where
it suddenly curves inward to meet the blunt termination. Edge view
of carapace ovate, compressed in front and bluntly acuminate
behind; median area slightly depressed. Shell surface relieved
with numerous impressed puncta, encircled by a clear ring; other-

1. See Brady and Norman, Trans. R. Dublin Soc. 1889, vol. iv., ser. ii., p. 205, pi. xviii , Hg». 7-9

New and Rare Fossils. 45-

wise fairly smooth, excepting for a few striae pai'allel with tlie
ventral and anterior margins.

Dimetisiom. — Length, .6.*U mm. ; height, .:J4G mm. ; thickness of
carapace, .308 mm.

Affi/itfies. — The above species resemljles a weak form of Cytherura
ruditi, G. S. Brady, ^ that is, having minute pittings instead
of polygonal excavations, and without the faint flexuous ribs of that
species. The marked distinction of Ciiilwruni i)tnit'nen>si>i in having
a more rounded contour separates it from Brady's living species.
which came from the Arctic Seas and, doubtfully, from the Straits
of Magellan. Since Brady's recorded occurrence, ('. riulis has been
found by tjie writer in soundings from the Antarctic taken by
Capt. J. K. Davis in the " Nimrod " (British Antarctic Expedition,
1907-9). That specimen also showed a polygonal rather than the
punctate ornament of the present species.

Occurrence. — Bore 11, 267-270 feet (Janjukian).

, Genus CYTHEROPTERON. G. 0. Sars.
Cytheropteron batesfokdiense, Chapman. (Plate VIII., Fig. 36).

Gytheropteroii hatesfordiense, Chapman, 1910, Proc. Roy.

Soc, Vict., vol. xxii. (N.S.), pt. ii., p. 300, pi. ii., figs.
la-c.

Ohner vat ions. — Since the discovery of the originally described
specimens in the Batesford Limestone, this species has been found
in some abundance in the lower strata of the Mallee bores.

In the original description, I noticed the relationship of this-
form with Cytheropteron wellingtoniense, Brady. There is still
another species showing close affinities which occurs fossil in the
Cretaceous of Basdorf in Mecklenburg, namely, C. triangulares
Reuss sp.2, a species which also occurs in the Cainuzoic (London
Clay) of Copenhagen Fields and Piccadilly, London. This species
differs in having the alae less salient posteriorly, otherwise, as seen
in edge view, the two forms are very similar.

Occurrence.— Bovi^ 2, 211-240 feet (Janjukian). Bore 10, 310-
320 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 11, 438-440 feet; 440-442
feetj 442-444 feet; 444-446 feet; 457-458 feet; 5-18-550 feet (Jan-
jukian).

1. Ann. Mag-. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. ii., 1868, p. 84, pi. v., fi-s. 15-17. Hep. ('hall. Zool., vol. i.,
pt. iii., 1880, p. 1.52, pi. xxxii., flg.s. 3a-rf.

2. Cijthere triangularis, Reuss, Zeitsc^hr. rl. deutseh. Gesellscli., vol. vii., ISu.t, p. 27i), pi. .\-
fig. 8. Jones, Men. Tert. Eritom. (Pal. Soc), 18.o7, p. 25, pi. vii., fig-. 5. Cytheroptenni. t) iaixjulure
Jones, Mon. Tert. Entoni. (Pal. Soc), 1889, p. 44, pi. ii., figs, \9a-c.

46 Frederick Chcqntian :

■Cythrropteron batesfokdiense, Chapman., var. aculeata, var. nov.
(Plate VIIL, Fig. 37).

Description. — This variety is sufficiently well marked to merit
a distinctive name, since it has a more compressed carapace, and a
sharp ventral margin. Towards the posterior extremity, the ven-
tral border carries a series of short, strong prickles. The related
Eiuopean cainozoic form, C . triangulare sometimes shows very fine
. aculeations on the ventral edge.

Occurrence. — Bore 11, 453-454 feet (Janjukian).

Cytheropteron postumbonatum, sp. nov. (Plate VITI., Figs. 38),

Description. — Carapace oblong, compressed at the extremities.
Seen from the side, the valveis tumid in the central area, depressed
around the margins; anterior extremity with a subangular margin,
posterior rounded; surface in anterior third swollen into a pear-
shaped inflation, behind which is a deep furrow joining the mar-
ginal depressed areas, whilst posteriorly the valve is again inflated,
and towards the ventral side this prominence is produced into a
short recurved hornlike process. Edge view subovate, compressed
at the ends, with the post-ventral process pointing outwards and
backwards.

Surface of valve ornamented with numerous obscure pittings and
fine parallel striae towards the dorsal margin.

Dimensions. — Length, .5 mm.; height, .21 mm.; thickness of
carapace, including the process, circ. .4 mm.

Affinities. — ^The appearance in the Australian Cainozoic of this
modification of a well-defined Cretaceous group of Cytheroptera is
extremely interesting. C. postiimhonatuw is most closely allied to C.
umbo7iatvm, Williamson sp.,i a well-known member of the English
Chalk and Chalk-mai-1 of Norwich, Woolwich, Dover and Charing.
The Danish and British variety, C. umhonatum, var. acauthoptera,
Marsson var. 2 from the Island of Riigen, Norfolk, Dunstable and
Antrim, is distinguished from the specific form in having a much
longer postero-ventral spine and a prickly rather than a punctate

1. Ci/theriira umbonata, William.son, Mem. Manch. Lit. and Phil. Soc, vol. viii., 1847, p. 79, pi.
iv., fig. 78. Cytheropteron umbonatwn, Will. ep. Jones, Mon. Cret. Entom. (Pal. Soc), 1890, p.
40, pi. i., fijrs. n-26.

2. Cythere ac'tiithoptera, Marsson, Mittheil, naturw. Ver. Neu-Vorpomniern und Riigen, 1880,
p. 45, pi. iii., flifs. Ha-c. ('ytheropteron ui)ibonatn»i,\\\U. sp. var. acauthoptera, Marsson, var.,
Jones, Mon. Cret. Entcm. (Pal. Soc), 1890, p. 41, pi. i., fljfs. 1113; pi. iv., figs. 22-29.

New and Rare Fossils. 47

surface. The Australian specimen is short-spined and punctate.
and differs from 0. uinhonatum in the greater lengtli of the sliell
and the deeper median sulcus.

Occur rence .—lioYe 8, 210-219 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).

Cythekopteron phakantarcticum, sp. nov. (Plate IX., Figs. 39«, h).

Description. — Valve, seen from the side, oblong, tapering to the
anterior, which is rounded, produced posteriorly. Margins sur-
rounded by a distinct rounded flange; dorsal strongly convex and
slightly sinuous, ventral nearly straight. Surface compressed
towards the dorsal margin, rising rapidly from the antero-dorsal
to the ventral side to form a prominent ala with a moderately
sharp point, but not hooked. The caudal extremity is sharp and
superficially rounded. Edge view of carapace, trapezoidal. Sur-
face of valve on the alar slope depressed in the median area, and
vellicate, marked by numerous fine punctations.

Dimensions. — Length, .638 mm. ; height, to point of ala, .4 mm. ;
thickness of carapace, .73 mm.

Affinities. — The relationship of the present species clearly lies
with the Antarctic species, C. antarcticum, recently found by me
in material from a raised beach (Pleistocene) S.E. of Mt. Larsen
(Shackleton Expedition, 1908). That species differs, however, in
the more attenuated carapace, and the sharply pointed but less
expanded alar process. Another species approaching the above
C. praeantarcticum is Cytheropteron hamatum, G. 0. Sars, which
differs essentially in the more depressed alae with their hooked
terminals. The latter is a North Atlantic and Arctic species, in
Pleistocene and recent deposits.

Occurrence. — Bore 9, 256-263 feet (Kalimnan).

Cytheropteron reticosum, sp. nov. (Plate IX , Fig.s. 40a, b)

Description. — Carapace subquadrate, compressed. Seen from the
side, of nearly equal width from end to end ; anterior extremity
broadl}' rounded, posterior caudate; dorsal margin widely convex,
ventral nearly straight; a depressed flange runs round almost the

1. Cytheropteron uespertilio, G. S. Brady, non Reuss, 1S68, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4,
vol. ii., p. 33, pi. v., figs. 6, 7. Cytheropttron hamatnm, G. O. Sar.s, 1869, Nye iJybvaiidserustaceer
fra Lofoten. Videt)s]£ Forhand., p. 172.

48 Frederick Chcqrnian :

entire valve margin. Alar beak moderately salient, gradually
rising from the antero-dorsal angle towards the postero-ventral,
and terminating in a sharp marginal angle; surface of ala depressed
under the carinal edge, near the posterior extremity of the shell ;
caudate portion of the carapace much compressed. Edge view
suboval. compressed at the extremities, and broader towards the
posterior third. Shell surface covered with a fine network of
irregularly polygonal areolae.

Dimensions. — Length, .58 mm.; height, .31 mm.; thickness of
carapace. .16 mm.

Affinities. — So far as T am aware the nearest living species is
C. ivellingtoniense , G. S. Brady. i which was dredged in Wellington
Harbour. New Zealand. C. reticosutn differs in having more quad-
rate valves, more prolonged alae and a reticulated ornament. In
general form it is like u much compressed variety of Ci/theropteron
hatesfordiense.

Occurrence. — Bore 10. 195-225 feet (Kalimnan).

Cytheropteron rostratu.m, sp. nov. (Plate IX., Figs. 4Ia, 6).

i

De-^cription. — Sliell compressed, ovate; in side view arcuately
oval, highest in the middle ; anterior extremity compressed, nar-
rowly loundc'd. tlic iKisterior extremity subacute, excavated ven-
ti-ally ; dorsal margin strongly arched, curving steeeply to the
extremities. Ventral margin concave in tiie lower middle, and
convex towards the aiiTfrior end. Edge view compressed ovate,
arute at anterior. l)luiit at posterior end. Surface of valves finely
and striately punctate, tlie ornament being concentric with the
margins. The surface markings are more distinctly seen when the
shell surface is moistene<l.

Dimensions. — Length. A2'-] nnii. ; height. .21 nun. ; thickness of
carapace. .21 mm.

Affinities. — Tlie neaiX'sT allied s])C'L'ics to the above is Ci/there
scaphoides, CI. S. Brady .2 from KcMgnelen Island, in 20-511 fathoms.
They diffei-, liowever. in the outline, for the living species is oblong
and not arcuate. The sui-fare ornament in ])ot]i forms is similar.

Occurrence. — Bore 11. 2(17-270 feet (Janjukian).

1. Rep. Ch.-ill. Zool., vol. i., i-t. iii., 1880, p. 13(>, pi. xxxiv., fi;;s. 4«-(/.
•2. ToTi). s\ipra cit., p. VMi. pi. wxiii., fiys. !«-(/.

New and Rare Fossils. 49

Fain. CYTHERELLIDAE.

Genus CYTHEKELLA. Jones.

Cytiikhklla AURicuLUS, sp. nov. (Plate IX., Figs. 4:2a, h ; 43).

Description. — Cai-apace oblong, eonipiessed. Seen from the
side, valves subquadrate, with a marginal raised rim and depressed
central area relieved in the median line by a raised longitudinal
and crescentic bar. In the young example figured the central
raised band starts from the dorsal margin, and continues to curve
down and round, all but enclosing a central suboval space; dorsal
margin neaily straight, with a median concavity, ventral broadly
concave: ijoth extremities widely rounded. Edge view narrow
oblong, relieved l)y the marginal and median prominences. The
genei-al, depressed surface of the valve is roughly granulate, the
marginal and central bars smooth.

Dinntxioiis. — Length of lai'ger type specimen. .71 mm.; width,.
.41 iiiiii. ; thickness of carapace. .'■') mm.

Length of smaller type specimen, .5 nnn. ; width, .27 mm.

Affinities. — There is one living species, Cytherella latimnrginata,
G. S. Brady, 1 which resembles the above in having an encircling
fillet around the margin, but the centre of the valve is occupied by
a long, rounded protuberance, instead of a narrow curved bar as
in C. auriculus, the latter more nearly reseml)ling the contour of an
ear, hence the name.

The closest affinity lies, however, with some Cretaceous forms
well known from the English and European Chalk, the central type
of which is Ci/tlierella n'iUiamsoiiiaiKi . Jones. 2 This species has the
central bar broken to some extent, whilst the restricted character
of the central ornament, especially in our smaller figured type, is
perhaps more nearly approached in V ijthereUa chapmani, Jones, 5
from the Gault of Godstone, Surrey, England.

It is extremely curious to find this species and the previously
mentioned Cytheropteron postiunbo/iaf inn of the Austi-alian Miocene
so closely approaching their Cretaceous analogues.

Occurrence. — Bore 11, 219-260 feet (Kalimnan).

1. Rep. Chall. Zool., vol. i., pt. iii., 1880, p. 178, pi. xxxvi., fi<rs. 7«-<?.

■2. Mon. Cret. Entom.(Pal. Soc), 1849, p. 31, pi. vii., fij;-;. -^tki-h. Id., ibi<l., ISltO, p. 48, pi. iii.,

figs. r.r..62.

3. Mom. Cret. Entoni. (Pal. .Soc), 1890, p. 49, pi. iii., fi^-. 70.

5

60 Frederick Chapman .-

Cythkrklla lata, G. 8. Brady. (Plate IX., Figs. ^\a, b).

C;/therdJa lata, G. S. Brady, 1880, Kep. Ghall. Zoul.. vol. i.,
pt. iii., p. 173, pi. xliv., figs, via-e.

Ohsercafivus. — This species is found in the living condition in
as widely separated areas as the West Indies and the Japanese
Sea. At Torres Strait it was found in 155 fathoms.

The fossil example here depicted differs in no essential details
from the valves of the living form.

Occurrence. — Bore 5. 163-175 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).

CvTHKRELLA POLiTA, G. S. Brady. (Plate IX., Figs. \h(i, h).

Cytherella poUfa. G. S. Brady, 1868, Les Fonds de la Mer.
p. 161, pi. xix., figs. 5-7. Idem. 188U, Kep. Ghall.
Zool.. vol. i., pt. iii., p. 172. pi. xliii.. figs., oa-c;
pi. xliv., figs. la-g.

Ohserratioiis. — This species has been recorded in the living con-
dition from the West Indies; Wellington Harbour. New Zealand,
in the tow-net ; and from the mouth of Rio de la Plata. 13 fathoms.

Cytherella polifa is one of the best distributed of the cytherellids
in the Mallee washings. The fossil examples agree in practically
all points with the recent, with the exception that the former tend
to exhibit a broader antei'ior border.

Occurrence. — Bore 5, 153-175 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 8, 210-219 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 9. 315-325
feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 10, 160-186 tV>et ; 195-225
feet (Kalimnan). Bore 11, 457-458 feet; 546-548 feet (Janjukian).

Cythkrella pulchra, G. S. Brady. (Plate IX., Figs. 46«, h).

Cytherella pulchra, G. S. Brady, 1866, Trans. Zool. Soc,

Lond., vol. v., p. 361, pi. Ivii., figs. \a-(l. Idem, 1880,

Rep. Chall. Zool., vol. i., pt. iii., ]>. 174. pi. xliv.. figs.

3r/, />.

Ohser rat ion s: .—'T\ie living examples were found at Port Jackson

at 2-10 fathoms; and off Ascension Island, 42 fatlioins. As in many

other instances in the Mallee fauna, this si)ecies has survived in

Australian waters fi'om Miocene times. The fossil examples are

identical in all points \\ith the type of the living form. '". pulchra

Neiv and Rare Fossils. 51

-may be readily distinguished from C. polita, not only in the
narrower extremities, but also in the angularly tumid outline of the
carapace in edge view. It is extremely abundant in the washings
from the Mallee bores, and occurs from the Miocene upwards.

Occurrence.— Boi-e 2, 198-200 feet (Kalimnan). Bore 3, 260 feet,
-circ. (Janjukian). Bore 4, 163-170 feet (Kalimnan). Bore 9, 256-
263 feet; 315-325 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 10, 230-254
feet (Kalimnan). Bore 11, 175-197 feet; 197-199 feet; 219-260
feet (Kalimnan). 349-353 feet; 540-542 feet; 554-556 feet; 558-560
feet (Janjukian).

Cytherella punctata, G. 8. Biady. (Plate IX., Fig. 47).

Cytherella piincfafa, G. S. Brady, 1866, Trans. Zool. Soc,
Lond., vol., v., p. 362, pi. Ivii., figs., 2r^ h. Idem, 1880,
Rep. Chall. Zool., vol., i., pt. iii., p. 174, pi. xxxvi.,
figs. 6a, h.; pi. xliv., figs., ^a-g. Egger, 1901, Abhandl.
d. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., vol. xxi., abth. ii., p. 469,
pi. iv., figs. 34, 35.
Observations. — As a recent species this is one of the deeper
water forms of the genus Cytherella. It has been noted from Tris-
tan d'Acunha; Port Jackson; from Challenger Sta. 167 in the
Southern Ocean between Sydney and Nevr Zealand ; off the Ki
Islands; and in the Straits of Magellan.

Egger records the above species from the west coast of Aiistralia at
"357 metres.

Occurrence.— Bove 6. 114-150 feet (Kalimnan). Bore 9, 256^263
feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 11, 267-270 feet (Janjukian).

Cttherella subtruncata, sp. uov. (Plate TX., Figs. 48a, b).

Descrij)tion. — Carapace, from the side, compressed oblong or sub-
rectangular, with broadly rounded extremities; dorsal margin
nearly straight, slightly concave in the middle, ventral broadly
concave, antero- and postero-ventral angles rather more produced
than the dorsal; encircling border or flange fairly conspicuous on
the ventral edge. Median surface depressed. Seen from below,
compressed, elongate, pyriform, the contour depressed in the
middle, anterior extremity compressed and rounded, the posterior
inflated and much thicker. Surface smooth.

52 Frederick Chapman :

Dimensions. — Lengtli, .73 mm.; width. ..'^65 mm.; thickness of
carapace, .29 mm.

Affinities. — The above species differs from Dr. Brady's C. trun-
cata^ in having a depression in the median face of each valve, and
in the swollen and truncated posterior extremity in edge view.

The allied C. truncata has been recorded from Torres Strait.
The present fossil species is from a Kalimnan (Lower Pliocene)-
horizon in both cases.

Occurrence. — Bore 10, 225-230 feet (Kalimnan). Bore 11, 175-
197 feet (Kalimnan).

Super-Order CIRRIPEDIA.

Fam. LEPADIDAE.

Genus SCALPELLUM, Leach.

SCALPELLUM SUBQUADRATUM, sp. uov. (Plate X., Figs. 49^-0?;

50 and 51«, b).

Description. — Carina (holotype). — Elongate, strongly bowed in-
Avardly, with roof flat, gradually and evenly widening from apex
to base, and very slightly convex towards the basal margin ; surface
smooth except for faint growth-lines. Sides generally flat, thus
giving a square-sided appearance to the valve, and also showing
indications of a median groove. Basal margin broadly rounded.
Inner surface of valve deeply concave. Inner edge of carina crenu-
late near the apex, and cut through by short channels near the base.

Another specimen (paratype), and probably the rostral latus, is
narrow, of slightly thinner build, and showing strongly arched
growth-lines along the length of the valve; inner surface concave
and smooth.

Scutum (paratype). elongate triangular; occludent margin per-
fectly straight, basal, angularly rounded; tergal margin slightly
concave, with a nodulose edge. A longitudinal ridge runs from the
apex to the base, and close to the occludent margin. Superficial
growth-lines and shaded colour-patches very distinct. Inner sur-
face shoAvs the pit for the adductor scutorum, above which is a deep
fold running to the apex, and marked by some linear and sinuous
lines of growth.

Dimensions. — Carina (liolotype), extreme apex wanting. Length,
20 mm.; width at tlie base, 4.5 mm.; thickness of carina near
apical end, 2.25 mm.

1. Les Fondsde la Mer, 1868, p. 154, pi. xix., figs. 3, 4. Rep. Chall. Zool., vol. i., pt. ili., 1880,.
p. 174, pi. xxxvi., figs. Za-A.

NeAv and Rare Fossils. 53

Rostral latus. extreniL' apex wantiiifj:. Length, 8 nun. ; width at
base, 2.25 mm. ; thickness of carina at apical end. 1 nun.

Scutum. Length, minus apex, 7.75 nun.; greatest width, 9 una.

AffinitieK. — The above species shows a remarkable resemblance to
Scolpellmn quadratum, Dixon sp.,l a form which occurs in the
Londinian (Eocene, London clay) of Bognor, in Sussex and Hanip-
stead, near London, England. As in .S'. subqitadrafum, the lines
of growth start from the apex as noted by Darwin for that species.
From the living Scalpellitm rntilutn, Darwin, 2 this carina differs
in the flat, ungrooved roof, and strongly arched growth-lines.

A species of Scalpellam (S. jidieuse, Ortmann^), has been de-
scribed from tlie Miocene of Patagonia, in which the outer surface
of the carina is convexly rounded, and not flattened as in our
species.

Observations. — The largest specimen (holotype) is incomplete,
but probably wanting only 5 or 6 mm. The specimen was originally
found in two parts, washed from a large quantity of clay, and
it was only when examining the material in detail that the two
parts were found to fit together.

Occurrence. — Bore 4, 163-170 feet, holotype and parat^-pe
(Carina and Scutum), — (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 10, '310-
320 feet, paratype (rostral latus). (Kalimnan or Janjukian).

Fam. BALANIDAE.

(ienus BALANUS. Lister.

Balanus psittacus, Molina sp. (Plate X., Figs. 52a, 6).

Lepas psitfaciis, Molina, 1788, Hist. Xat., Chile, vol. i.,

p. 223.
Balanus psitfaciis, Molina sp. Darwin, 1854, Mon. Cirri-

pedia (Ray Soc). vol. ii.. p. 206. pi. ii., figs, 'ia-d .
Balanus cf. psiffacus, Molina sp.. Ortmann. 1902, Rep.
Princeton Univ. Exped., vol. iv., pt. ii.. p. 249. pi.
xxxviii.. fig. 2.
Observations. — The identification of the Mallee specimens of the
above, consisting as they do of only separated compartments, would
have been practically impossible but for the other and more com-
plete examples from the Kalimnan of Beaumaris in the

1. Xiphidimn qitadratum, Dixon, in Sowerby's Mineral Coiioh, vol. vii., 184C., pi. dexlviii.
DLxon, Geol. of Sussex, 1850, pi. xiv., figs. 3, i. Scalpellitm t/nadratum, Dixon sp. Darwin, Mon.
Fo«8. Lepadidae (Men. Pal. Soc), 1851, p. 22, pi. i. fig:. 3.

2. Mon. Cirripedia (Ray. Soc), 1851, p. 253, pi. vi., flj^. 2.

3. Rep. Princeton Univ. Exped., Patagonia, 1896-9, vol. iv., pt. ii., 1902, p. 247, pi. xxxvii.
ilgs. 9a-c.

54 . Frederick Chwpman:

National Museum (W. Kershaw coll.), and from the same
horizon at Muddy Creek, near Hamilton, in the Den-
nant collection. The example from Beaumaris is ideu-
tihable with the specimen referred to, B. cf. psittacus,.
Molina sp.. which has been found fossil in the Tertiary
beds of Patagonia. B. i^sittacus is still found living, according to^
Darwin, along the coast of Chili, and very abundant at a few
fathoms depth. Darwin remarks (loc. cit.) that this species is
distinguished externally from B. tintiniuilnduDi, another large and
well-known form, by its hexagonal rather than its trigonal orifice,
and. moreover, is not tinted so darkly as the latter species. It
is the largest species of the genus, sometimes attaining a length, in
the living examples, of nine inches.

Isolated compartments of the above species were found in the
Mallee bore at one depth only. The Mallee specimens retain much
of their original colour, although coming from the deepest part of
bore 9, the sample of which contained a mixed Janjukian and
Kalimnan fauna, and may be as old as the Miocene. One of the
Mallee fossils is of a pale purplish tint, with about 7 primary and
7 secondary fine, longitudinal ribs of a dark purple. These ribs
aie noted by Darwin (loc. cit., p. 207), and also depicted by
Oi'tmann (loc. cit., fig. 2). A fragment of the base of the parietes
in one of the Mallee specimens indicates the deep cup-shaped habit
of attachment in this species. In regard to the parietal tubes, as
Darwin notes, they are unusually large in proportion to the size
of the shell, and run up to the summit without any transverse
septa. " The radii," to again (|uote Darwin. " are generally very
highly developed, so tliat tlieii- summits are even wider than the
bases of the parietes; but on the other hand, in some few large
specimens, the radii are either very narrow or absolutely linear.'*
In the figured specimen from the Mallee it will be noticed that the
radii are similarly well-developed. The septa of the radii in the
Mallee examples, as in the living B. psiffnciis. are strongly denticu-
lated, as shown here (fig. 52^>).

Occurrence. — Bore 4, 163-170 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Borc !). .'515-325 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).

Balanus varians, Sowerby. (Plate X., Figs. 53, 54).

BaJdini.^ rarlans, G. B. Sowerby, 1846, in Darwin's Geol.
Observations on South America, pi. ii., figs. 4-6.
Darwin, 1854, Mon. Cirripedia (Ray Soc), vol. ii., p.

New and Rare Fossils. 55

208. pi. viii., fig. 9. Ortmaiui, 1902, Rep. Princeton
l-niv. Kxped., Patagonia, vol. iv.. pt. ii., p. 250, pi.
xxxviii.. figs. 'An-e.

Observations. — By comparing the Mallee specimens with many
other complete examples from Victoria, so far as regards the
parietes and in one instance where the opercnlar plates have been
preserved, one is enabled to draw some satisfactory conclusions as to
the identity of the very abundant remains of ])arnacles in the
lH)rings. The compartments are all separate, excepting one
instance, "which is here figured. Like the preceding species, this
form also occurs in the Patagonian Tertiaries at San Julian, and
the scutum tlierein found (loc. cit., fig. 'M) is comparable with a
specimen lately worked out of a fossil barnacle from Beaumaris,
wliich I refer to the above species.

At first sight one would be inclined to place the fossil forms in the
genus Chthamalus, as was done in the Dennant collection, but bear-
ing in mind the distinctive features of the two genera, which have
reversed characters as to disposition of alae and radii, the rostrum
of Balanus posse.ssing radii and not alae as in Chthamalus, as
Darwin pointed out, the separation is at once easily made.

All the Mallee examples have the walls of the parietes strongly
folded, but some specimens from Ascot, western Victoria, in the
Dennant collection, identified as Chthamalus sfellatus, have nearly
smooth parietes.

The separated compartments of this species of Balanus are common
in many of the bores, and seem to make their appearance at the
top of the Janjukian, where, in Bore 9 at 315-325 feet, they are
exceedingly conmion.

Occurrence. — Bore 6, 114-150 feet (Kalimnan); 158-161 feet
(Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 8, 165-180 feet; 180-199 feet; 204-
210 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 9, 254-256 feet (Kalim-
nan); 256-263 feet; 315-325 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore
10, 254-296 feet; 310-320 feet (Janjukian). Bore 11, 197-199 feet;
199-209 feet (Kalimnan).

Class PISCES.
Fam. CESTRACIONTIDAE.
Genus CESTRACION, Cuvier.
Cestracion CAiNOZOicus, Chapman and Pritchaid. (Plate X., Fig. 55).
Cesfracion cai/io~.oicus. Chapman and Pritchard, 1904, Proc.
Roy. Soc, Vict., vol. xvii. (N.S.), pt. i., p. 270, pi. li.,
figs. 5-8; pi. xii., fig. 2.

66 Frederick Chapman :

An antero-lateral crushing tooth occurs in one of the bores at an
horizon where fish reniaitis are abundant, and which may be rele-
gated to the top of the Janjukian. There is little doubt that it is
related to the specific form which has been previously recorded from
various localities in Victoria at or near the base of the Kalimnan.
The formerly recorded occurrences were nearly all represented by
the strong, broad lateral crushing teeth. The genus dates from
Upper Jurassic times (C falcifer, in the Solenhofen stone of
Bavaria).

Occurrence. — Bore 8, 210-219 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).

Fam. TRYGONIIDAE.
Genus TRYGON, Adanson.

Trygok cf. rugosus, Probst sp. (Plate X., Figs. i)^a-d).

Raia rugosus, Probst, (?) 1874, Beitrage zur Kenntniss der
fossilien Fische ous der Molasse von Baltringen, — Wurr-
temberg Naturw. Jahresheft 1874-82 (not seen). Zittel-
Barrois, 1893, Traite de Paleontologie, pt. i.. vol. iii.,
pp. 102, 103, fig. 120a-c. Trygoii rugosus, Probst sp.
Eastman-Zittel, 1902, Text-book of Palaeontology, p. 42,
fig. 83.
Observations.-^— A single specimen of a well-preserved tooth with
bifurcated root was found in a sample of the Mallee bores contain-
ing an admixture of Kalimnan and Janjukian shells, but with a,
predominance of the latter fauna. Both in width and height the
tooth measures 4.25 mm. In the Miocene marls of Baltringen,
Wurtemberg, Probst found a similar pavement tooth, which he
referred to Baia, but which has since Ijeen placed in the genus
Trygon. Our specimen is in close agreement as regards both shape
and structure, so that it seems advisable for the present to refer it
tentatively to Probst's species, which came from a similar, or
nearly similar, formation.

In respect to the generic position of the tooth, the marginal or
border teeth of the living Thornbacks (Baia), which I have been
able to examine in the National Museum through the kind offices of
Mr. J. A. Kershaw, show a bicuspid root, but differing from the
present specimen in having it more expansive or less hook-like than
in the Mallee fossil.

Occurrence. — Bore 5, 163-175 feet (probably Janjukian).

Neiv and Rare Fossils. 57

Fain. MYLIOBATIDAE.

Genus MYLIOBATIS, Cnvier.

MvLlOBATlS MOORABBlNENSis, Chapman and Pritchard. (Plate X.,
Fig. 57).

Myliohatis nioorahhinetisis. Chapman and Pritchard. 1907,
Proo. Roy. Soc, Vict., vol. xx. (N.S.). pt. i.. p. 60. pi.
v., figs. 1-3.

This species is represented in the Mallee bores in three samples
by median palatal teeth. They agree in all particulars with the
type examples from Beaumaris, with the exception of the figured
specimen from the Mallee, which has a slightly larger number of
■denticles in a given length on the articulating surface. In its
slender form and small size, whilst resembling the above species,
it seems quite distinct from the living Myliohatis australis, Mac-
leay. The type specimens came from a Kalimnan (Lower Plio-
cene) horizon.

Occurrence. — Bore 4, 163-170 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).
Bore 9, 315-325 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian). Bore 10. 225-230
feet (Kalimnan) — (figd. specimen).

Fam. SPARIDAE.

Genus CHRYSOPHRYS, Cuvier.

(^) Chrysophrys sp. (Plate X., Figs. 58, 59).

Obseririfions. — Numerous small, rounded, grinding teeth occur
in the clay washings from one or two of the Mallee bores. They
are exactly comparable with those found in the 8ea-Breams or
Chrysophrys, living at the present time in Australian seas. When
the basal surface is examined the structure is .seen to be the same
as in the living genus mentioned. Their occurrence as isolated
teeth show them to be easily detachable from their cartilaginous
setting, and therefore different from the closely paved pharyngeal
dentition in Labrodon. Towards the base the tooth is frequently
surrounded by a distinct cincture at its junction with the socket.
The apex of the tooth is often worn, and shows a conoentrir struc-
ture.

Occurrence. — Bore 3, 201-220 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian); 226
feet (Janjukian). Bore 8, 210-219 feet (Kalimnan or Janjukian).

58

Frederick Chapman .

A CoMPLiyfE List of Fossils found m the Mallicr Borings

WITH THEIK PROBABLE GEOLOGICAL HoRIZONS.

Janjukian (J) = Miocene. Kalimnan (K)=: Lower Pliocene.
Werrikooian (W)= Upper Pliocene. K or J = mixed sample.

Name.

Plant A E.

Boring Fungus, indet. _ . _ .

Litliothaninion ramosissimum, Eeuss sp.
Lithothamnion, afi'. lichenoides, Ellis and Solander-
Litliophyllum sp. - - - -

Animalia.
Foraniinifera —

Biloculina elongata, d'Orbigny
Biloculina irregularis, d'Orbigny
Miliolina oblonga, Montagu sp. -

Miliolina circularis, Bornemann sp.

Miliolina trigonula, Lamarck sp.

Miliolina seminuhim, Linne sp.

Miliolina vulgaris, d'Orb. sp. - -

Miliolina ciivieriana, d'Orb. sp.

Miliolina ferussacii, d'Orb. sp. -

Miliolina bicornis, Walter and Jacob sp.

Miliolina achreiberiana, d'Orb. sp.

Miliolina agglutinans, d'Orb. sp. -

Miliolina (Massilina) secans, d'Orb. sp.

Trillina howcliini, Schlumberger

Sigmoilina schlumbergeri, A. Silvestri

Planispirina sphaera, d'Orb. sp. -

Planispii'ina exigua, Brady - - - .

Hauerina intermedia, Howchin

Orbitolites complanata, Lam.

Haplophragmium emaciatum, Brady

Haplopliragmium canariense, d'Orb. sp. -

Haplophragmium sphaeroidiniforme, Brady

Ammodiscus ovalie. Chapman

Textularia gibbosa, Brady . - - .

Spiroplecta sagittula, Defrance sp.

Spiroplecta gramen, d'Orb. sp. -

Gaudryina pupoides, d'Orb. - - - .

Ciaudryina rugosa, d'Orb. - . . .

Verneuilina spinulosa, Reusa

Bulimina elegans, d'Orb. - . - .

Bulimina elegantiseima, d'Orb.

Bulimina contraria, Reuss sp. -

Virgulina schreibersiana, Czjzek

Bolivina punctata, d'Orb. - . - .

Geological horizons.

K.

?J.

J.

J.

J.

K.

K.

?J.

K.

(common),

(1

i-arely).

K.

?J.

K.

?J.

W.

K. J.

K.

J.

J.

K.

K.

or J.

K.

K.

or J.

K.

?K

. J.

J.

J.

K.

or J.

K.

or J.

K.

J.

K.

or J.

K.

or J.

J.

W.

K.

or J.

J.

T

J .

K.

or J..

?K

T

. J.

J.
J.

K.

T

J.

J.
J.

?Iv

. J.

Neui and Rare Fosxih

59>

Name.
Bolivina textilarioides, Reuss
Bolivina nobilis, Hantken . - -

Bolivina limbata, Brady
Bolivina robusta, Brady
Cassiduliua subgloboea, Brady
Cassidulina oblonga, Eeuss - - -

Lageua gracilis, Williamson
Lagena squamosa, Montagu sp. -
Lagena schlicliti, A. Silv.
Lagena marginata, Walker and Boys
Lagena orbignyana, Seguenza
Nodosaria (Glanduliua) laevigata, d'Orb.
Nodosaria scalaris, Batsch, sp.
Xodosaria raphanus, Linne sp.
Nodosaria badenensis, d'Orb.
Nodosaria affinis, d'Orb.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) pauperata, d'Orb. sp.
Nodosaria (D.) consobrina, d'Orb. -
Nodosaria (D.) soluta, Reuss
Nodosaria (D.) multilineata. Born. sp.
Nodosaria (D.) obliqua, Linne sp. -
Frondicularia complanata, Defr.
Frondicularia inaequalis, Costa

Frondicularia lorifera. Chapman
Marginulina glabra, d'Orb. -

Marginulina costata, Batsch sp.
A'^aginnlina legumen, Linne sp.
Cristellaria tricarinella, Reuss

Cristellaria aculeata, d'Orb. -

Cristellaria articulata, Reuss (keeled var.)

Cristellaria rotulata. Lam. sp.

Cristellaria cultrata, Montfort sp. -

Polymorpliina lactea. Walker and Jacob sp.

Polymorpliina gibba, d'Orb.

Polymorpliina compressa, d'Orb.

Polymorpliina elegantissima, Parker and Jone.s

Polymorpliina diepar, Stache

Polymorpliina communis, d'Orb.

Polymorpliina problema, d'Orb.

Polymorpliina oblonga, d'Orb.

Polymorpliina regina, Brady, Parker and Jones

Polymorpliina sororia, Reuss

Polymoi-phina rotundata. Born. sp.

Uvigerina angulosa, Williamson

Uvigerina tenuistriata, Reuss

Sagraina striata, Schlumberger

Sagraina raphanus, Parker and Jones

Globigerina bulloides, d'Orb.

Globigei-ina triloba, Reuss - - -

Globigerina conglobata, Brady

Pullenia quinqueloba, Reuss

(Jeolo};icai horizotis.

J.

J.

J.

K.

?K.

J.

J.

K.

or J.

J.

K.

J.

K.

or J.

K.

or J.

K.

or J.

J.

K.

rJ.

K.

or J.

K.

or J.

J.

J.

J.

J.

?K.

J.

W.

K.

J.

?K

. J.

?K

. J.

J.

J.

J.

J.

K.

or J.

?K

. J.

?K

. J.

W.

K. J.

J.

W.

K. ?J..

K.

J.

J.

K.

J.

K.

J.

K.

J.

K.

J.

K.

or J.

?K

. J.

J.

K.

K.

J.

J.

J.

J.

W.

<60 Frederick Chapman

Sphaeroidina bulloides, d'Orb.
Patellina corrug'ata. Will.
Discorbina araiicana, d'Orb. sp.
Discorbina bertheloti, d'Orb. sp.
Discorbina parisiensis, d'Orb. sp. -
Discorbina dimidiata, Parker and Jones -
Discorbina globularis, d'Orb. sp.
Discorbina turbo, d'Orb. sp.
Discorbina pileolus, d'Orb. sp.
Discorbina obtusa, d'Orb. sp.
Discorbina biconcava, Parker and Jones -
Planorbulina larvata, Parker and Jones -
Truncatulina lobatula. Walker and Jacob sp.
Truncatulina variabilis, d'Orb.
Truncatulina refulgens, Montfort sp.
Truncatulina wuelleretorfi, Schwager sp. -
Truncatulina ungeriana, d'Orb. sp. -
Truncatulina akneriana, d'Orb. sp. -
Truncatulina, reticulata, Czjzek sp.
Truncatulina tenera, Brady -
Truncatulina haidingeri, d'Orb. sp.
Anomalina ammonoides, Reuss sp. -
Anomalina polymorpha, Costa
Carpenteria proteiformis. Goes
Piilvinulina elegans, d'Orb. sp.
Pulvinulina eleg'ans, var. partschiana, d'Orb. var.
Pulvinulina repanda. Fichtel and Moll, sp.
Piilvintilina repanda, var. concamerata, Mont. var.
Pulvinulina calabra, (^osta sp.
Pulvinulina auricula, Fichtel and Moll. s]).
Pulvinulina karsteni, Reuss -
Pulvinulina truncatulinoides, d'Orb. s^j.
Pulvintilina schreibersii, d'Orb. sp.
Rotalia beccarii, L. sp. -
Rotalia papillosa, Brady ...
Rotalia papillosa, var. compressiuscula, Brady
Rotalia clathrata, Brady
Rotalia calcar, d'Orb. sp.
Rotalia orbicularis, d'Orb. sp.
Rotalia soldanii, d'Orb.
Rotalia venusta, Brady
'Gypsina howchini, Chapman
Gypsina vesicularis, Parker and Jones
Gypeina globulus, Reuss sp.
Nonionina depressula. Walker and Jacob sp.
Nonionina umbilicatula, Mont. sp.
J^onionina boueana, d'Orb. -
Nonionina scapha, F. uiid M. sp. - - .

Polystomella striatopunctata, Fichtel and Moll.
sp.

Geological horizons.

J.

K.

J.

W.

?K.

J.

?K.

J.

J.

?J.

K.

J.

J.

J.

J.

?K.

J.

K.

J.

J.

W.

K. J,

K.

AV.

K. J

J.

J.

J.

K.

J.

K.

J.

?K.

, J.

J.

K.

J.

J.

W.

K. J.

J.

K.

or J.

K.

J.

J.

J.

W.

K. J.

K.

or J.

K.

J.

K.

J.

J.

?K

. J.

YK

. J.

J.

J.

J.

?K

. J.

W.

J.

J.

K.

K.

or J.

W.

K.

New mid Rare FosslL'i.

61.

Name.

Polystomella striatopuuctata, var. evoluta.
Chapman - _ . .

Polyetomella niacella, Fichtel and Moll. sp.

Polystomella crispa, L. sj).

Polystomella subnodosa. Miinster sp.

Polystomella imperatrix, Brady

Polystomella verriculata, Brady

Polystomella craticulata, Fichtel and Moll, sp.-

Araphisteg-ina lessonii, d'Orb.

Operouliua complauata, Defr.

Operculina complanata, var. granulosa, Leymerie-

Operculina venosa, Fichtel and Moll. sp. -
Spongiae—

Calcisponges, triradiate spicules of,
Anthozoa —

Holcotrochus crenulatus, Denaut

Placotrochus elougatus, Duncan

Placotrochus deltoideus, Duncan

Sphenotrochus emarciatus, Duncan - - -

Deltocyathus fontinalis, Dennant

Bathyactis lens, Duncan sp. . . .

Bathyactis beaumariensis, Dennant -

Notophyllia variolaris, Dennant . - _

Graphularia senescens, Tate sp.

Mopsea tenisoni. Chapman - _ - -

Mopsea hamiltoni, Thomson - - - -

Isis compressa, Duncan . . . .

Echinoderma —

Antedon protomacronema. Chapman

Pentagonaster sp. -

Cidaris sp. - - - - -

Goniocidaris sp. - - - -

Paradoxechinus novus, Laube
Psammechinus woodsi, Laube sp. -
Echinocyamus (Scutellina) patella, Tate sp.
Fibularia gregata, Tate . - - -

Clypeaster gippslandicus, McCoy
Arachnoides (Monostychia") australis, Laube sp. -
Echinoneus dennanti. Hall - . - -

Linthia sp. . . . . .

of. Eupatagus sp. - - - -

Lovenia forbesi, T. Woods sp. . - -

Annelida^

Serpula ouyenensis. Chapman

Ditrupa cornea, L. sp., var. wormbetiensis, McCoy -
Ditrupa cornea, L. sp., var. constricta, Chapm. -
Spirorbis heliciformis, Eichwald
Polyzoa —

Cyclostomata —

Idmonea hochstetteri, Stoliczka sp. -
Idmonea lata, Maogillivray ... -

(Je

oloj,'i<-

ill liorizoMs.

K.

?J.

K.

J.

W.

K.

J.

K.

or .1

J.

?K

. J.

K.

J.

?K

. J.

:=K

, J.

K.

.T.

J.

K. (rareV J-

K.

?K

. J.

?K

. J.

?K

. J.

?K

. J.

?K

. J.

K.

?J.

K.

J.

K.

or J.

?K.

J. (common),

=K.

J.

J.

J.

K.

J. (common)..

J.

J.

J.

J.

:^K.

J. (common).

?K.

J. (common).

K.

?J.

?K.

J.

J.

K.

or J.

J.

?K.

J.

?K.

J.

K.

J. (common)^

?K.

J.

K.

J.

K. or J.

K. or J.

^62

Frederick Chapman .

Hornera diffusa, Macgillivray
Hornera frondiculata, Lamaroux
Diastopora patina, Lamaroux
Entalophora nr. sparsa, Maplestone
Entalophora verticillata, Goldfiiss sp.
Lichenopora aiistralis, Macgill.
Lichenopora porosa, Macgill.
Lichenopora radiata, Audrouin sp. -
LichenoiDora wilsoni, Macgill.
Heteropora pisiformis, Macgill.
Cheilostomata —

Catenicella sp. ....

Claviporella sp. . . . _

Caberea grandis, Hincks
Cellaria acutimarginata, Macgill. sp.
Cellaria angustiloba. Busk sp.
Cellaria australis, Macgill. -
Cellaria contigua, Macgill. -
Cellaria rigida, Macgill.
-Cellaria rigida, var. peranipla. Waters
Cellaria rigida, var. venusta, Macgill. -
Membranipora cf. fossa. Macgill. -
Lunulites canaliculata, Macgill. -
Lunulites (?) parvicella, T. Woods sp.
Selenaria cf. concinna, T. Woods -
Selenaria cupola, T. Woods sp. -
Selenaria marginata, T. Woods -
Selenaria marginata, var. lucens, Macgill.
Selenaria marginata, var. pulcliella, Macgill.
Selenaria marginata, var. spiralis. Chapman
Steganoporella magnilabris, Busk sp.
Steganoporella patula. Waters sp. -
Macropora clarkei, T. Woods sp.
Microporella magna, T. Woods sp.
Tessarodoma elevata. Waters sp. -
Tessai-odoma magnirostris, Macgill.
Adeona sp. - - - - -

Lepralia burlingtoniensis, Waters -
Lepralia oorrugata, Macgill.
Lepralia crassatina, Waters sp.
Lepralia elongata, Macgill. -
Lepralia gippslandii. Waters
Lepralia (?) graysoui, Maplestone -
Schizoporella (':) convexa, Macgill. -
Bipora cancellata. Busk sp. - - * -

Bipora philippinensis. Busk sp.
Smittia tatei, T. Woods sp. - - -

Porina gracilis, M. Edwards sp.
(?) Lekythopora sp. -
Cellepora fossa, Haswell sp. -
•Cellepora gambierensis, T. Woods -

Geological horizons.

K.

or J.

K.

or J.

J.

K.

or J.

J.

K.

or J.

?K.

J. (common).

J.

J.

K.

or J.

K.

K.

or J.

K.

or J.

J.

J.

K.

J.

?K.

. J. (common).

?K,

, J. (common).

J.

J.

J.

K.

or J.

K.

K.

or J.

K.

J.

K.

J.

K.

?J.

K.

or J.

K.

?J.

J.

J.

J.

J.

J.

J.

J.

J.

J.

J.

?K

. J.

K.

or J.

J.

K.

or J.

K.

or J.

?K

. J.

J.

J.

J.

?K

. J. (common).

?K

:. J.

New unci Rdve Fossils.

63

Cellepora tridenticulata. Busk

Cellepora tridenticulata, vai:^ uuiuniularia. Busk

(?) Schismopora costazei, Audr. sp. -

Schismopora incus, Macgill. - - - ■

Retepora producta, Busk _ . -

Bracliiopoda — -

Terebratulina catinuliforniis, Tate -

Terebratulina triangularis, Tate

Terebratulina flindersi, Chapm.

Terebratula tateana, T. Woods

Terebratella acutirostra, Cliapm.

Terebratella portlandica, Cliapm.

Magasella compta. Sow. sp. -

Magasella lunata, Tate . . -

Magasella woodsiana, Tate - - -

Magellania garibaldiana, Davidson sp.

Magellania insolita, Tate -
Pelecypoda —

Nucula morundiana, Tate

Nucula obliqua, Lamarck

Nucula semistriata, Tate . - -

Leda acinaciformis, Tate . - -

Leda apiculata, Tate ...

Leda crassa. Hinds - - - -

Leda huttoni, T. Woods

Leda woodsi, Tate . . _ -

Cucullaea corioensis, McCoy - - -

Limopsia beaumariensis, Chapm.

Limopsis beaumariensis, var. depressa, Chapm.

Limopsis insolita, G. Sow. sp.

Area (Fossularca) dissimilis, Tate sp.

Lissarca rubricata, Tate sp. -

Glycimeris cainozoicUiS, T. Woods sp.

Glycimeris convexus, Tate sp.

Glycimeris halli, Pritchard - - -

Glycimeris halli, var. intermedia, Pr.

Glycimeris halli, var. paucicostata, Pr. -

Glycimeris maccoyi, Johnston ep.

Perna percrassa, Tate sp. -

Pteria (Margaritifera) crassicardia, Tate sp.

Ostrea hyotidoidea, Tate _ . .

Ostrea manubriata, Tate . _ .

Gryphaea tarda, Hutton _ - .

Trigonia howitti, McCoy _ - _

Trigonia lamarcki. Gray ...

Trigonia margaritacea, Lam., var. acuticostata,
McCoy - - - . .

Pecten antiaustralis, Tate

Pecten eyrei, Tate . - . -

Pecten flindersi, Tate _ . .

Pecten foulcheri, T. Woods -

Cfolojiical horizons.
K. or J.
?K. J.
J.

K. or J.
?K. J.

rK. J. (common).

J.

J.

J.

J.

K. J.

K. ?J.

?K. J.

?K. J.

J.

J.

K.

K. ?J.

K. ?J.

K. ?J.

K.

K.

K. or J.

K. ?J.

K. or J.

K. J. (rare).

K. ?J.

K. or J.

J.

K.

K. or J.

K. ?J.

K. ?J.

K. ?J.

K. ?J.

K. ?J.

K. or J.

K. ?J.

K. or J.

K. or J.

K. or J.

K.

K. or J.

K. ?J.

K.

K. or J.

J.

J.

64

Frederick Chapman :

Oeol()«:if'al horizons.

Pecten gambierensis, T. Woods

Pecten murrayanus, Tate - - -

Pecten peroni, Tate - - - -

Pecteu polymorphoides, Zittel

Pecten praecursor, Chapm. - - -

Pecten sturtianus, Tate

Amussium zitteli, Hutton

Spondylus g^aederopoides, McCoy

Dimya dissimilis, Tate . . _

Lima (Limatula) jeffreysiana, Tate -

Placunanomia ione. Gray - - -

Mytilus deperditns, Tate

Arcoperna scaplia, Verco

Crassatellites communis, Tate ap.

Crassatellites kingicoloides, Pritchard

Cuna concentrica, Hedley - _ _

Cnna polita, Tate sp. -

Cuna radiata, Tate sp. - - -

Condylocardia tennuicostae, Cliapm. and Gabriel

Cardita calva, Tate . - - -

Cardita compacta, Tate - - -

Cardita latissima, Tate . _ -

Cardita pecten, Tate

Cardita solida, Tate - - - _

Cardita spinulosa, Tate . . _

E/Ochefortia donaciformis, Angas sp.

Erycina micans, Tate sp. - _ _

Montacuta sericea, Tate - ' -

Dosinea gray!, Zittel . - - -

Yenus (Cliione) hormopliora, Tate sp.

Venus (Cli.) propinqua, T. Woods sp. -

Venus (Ch.) subroborata, Tate sp.

Merctrix mnrrayana, Tate sp.

Psammobia aequalis, Tate . . .

Donax kenyoniana, Chapm. and Gabr.

Mactra axiniformis, Tate

Mactra hamiltonensis, Tate -

Mactra howchiniana, Tate - - -

Corbula coxi, Pilsbry - - - -

Corbula ephamilla, Tate - . .

Corbula pyxidata, Tate

Barnea tiara, Tate - . . .

Scaphopoda —

Dentalium aratum, Tate

Dentalium australe, Sharp and Pilsbry

Dentalium latesulcatum, Tate

Dentalium mantelli, Zittel - - .

Cadnlufi acuminatus, Tate
Polyplacophora —

Chitons, indet. - . . .

J.

K. PJ.

K. or J.

J.

J.

K. or J.

K. or J.

J.

K. or J.

K. J.

K. or J.

K.

J.

K. ?J.

K.

K. ?J.

K.

:-K. J.

K. ?J.

K.

K. J.

J.

K. ?J.

K. ?J.

K. ?J.

J.

K.

K.

K.

K. or J.

K. ?J.

K. ?.T.

K.

K.

K.

K.

K.

K.

K. (common).

J.

(rare).

K. J.

K. or J.

K.

J.

K. or J,

K. or J.

K. or J.

K.

K. or J.

Neiv and Rare Fossils

65

Oastcropoda- -

Liopyrga quadricingulata, Tate

Liopyrga sayceana, Tate

Liotia dennanti, Chapm. and Gabr.

Euclielus tasmanicus, T. Woods

Clancuhis aff. aloysii, T. Woods

Teinostoma depressula, Chapm. and Gabr.

Teinostoma pnlcherrima, Chapm.' and Gabr.

Cyclostrenia homalon, Verco - - -

Cyclostrema harrietta-e, Petterd

Eiilima pinguicula, Chapm. and Gabr.

Niso psila, T. Woods - - - -

Pyramidella jonesiana, Tate sp.

Tiirbonilla weeahensis, Chapm. and Gabr. -

Ewlisia triplicata, T. Woods sp.

Calyptraea corrug-ata, Tate -

Calyptraea kalimnae, Chapm. and Gabr. -

Natica cunninghamensis, Harris

Natica hamiltonensis, Tate -

Natica perspectiva, Tate . . -

Natica subinfundibtilum, Tate

Natica siiBinfundibnhim, var crassa, Tate

Natica substolida, Tate . . -

Natica subvarians, Tate - _ -

Natica wintlei, T. Woods . - _

Rissoa gatliffeana, Chapm. and Gabr.

Riseoa varicifera, T. Woods - - -

Rissoa (Onoba) bassiana, Hedley

Rissoa (O.) chrysalida, Chapm. and Gabr. -

Turritella circumligata, Verco

Tiirritella murrayana, Tate - - -

Turritella pag-odula, Tate . . -

Turritella platyspira, T. Woods

Turritella tristira, Tate _ _ .

Cerithium torrii, Tate ...

Tylospira coronata, Tate sp. - - -

Cassis coutusus, Tate - - - -

Cassis (Semicassis) subgranosa, Tate sp.

Lotorium tortirostre, Tate sp.

Lotorium tumulosum, Tate sp.

Nasfia spiraliscabra, Chapm. and Gabr.

Zemira praecursoria, Tate -

Tudicla costata, Tate

Tudicla turbinata, Tate - - -

Fasciolaria rugata, Tate _ _ .

Marginella hordeac^a, Tate - - _

Marg-inella muscarioides, Tate

Marginella praeformicula, Chapm. and Gabi

Marginella wentworthi, T. Woods

Voluta weldi, T. Woods

Ancilla hebera, Hutton sp. - - _

Geolof^ical horizoi

K.

'J.

K. or J.

K. or J.

K. or J.

K. or J.

K.

K.

K.

K.

K.

K. or J.

K.

^J.

K.

''J.

K.

?J.

K.

?J.

K.

?J.

K.

?J.

K. J.

K. J.

K.

K.

K.

(common).

(rare).

K.

J.

K.

K. or J.

K.

fj.

K.

?J.

?J.

J.

K.

?J.

K. J.

K. J.

K.

K.

?J.

K.

K.

K.

basal bed)

J.

K.

?K.

J.

J.

K.

J.

K.

K.

?J.

K.

?J.

K. J.

?K.

J.

66

Frederick Cimpinan :

Ancilla papillata, Tate sp.
Terebra angulosa, Tate . _ .

Terebra geniculata, Tatf . - _

Terobra profunda, Chapni. and Gabr.
Teiebra simplex, T. Woods -
Terebra subspectabilis, Tate
Pleurotonia selwyni, Pritch. - - -

Pleurotonia trilirata, Harris
Pleurotonia (Drillia) dilectoidea, Chapm.
Gabr. . _ - - _

Pleurotonia (D.) trevori, T. Woods sp.
Bela sculptilis, Tate - - - -

Toruatina aptyclia. Cossmann
Volvulella inflatior, Cossmann
Bullinella aratula, Cossmann
Vaginella cf. eligTnostoma, Tate
Ostracoda —

Argilloecia badia, G. S. Brady
Maerocypris decora, G.S.B. sp.
Macrocypris tumida, G.S.B. - - _

Bythocypris tumefacta, Chapm.
Bairdia aniygdaloides, G.S.B.
Bairdia australis, Chapm.
Cythere canaliculata, Reuss sp.
Cythere crispata, G.S.B.
Cythere dasyderma, G.S.B. - - -

Cythere demissa, G.S.B.
Cythere dictyon, G.S.B.
Cythere fiexicostata, Chapm.
Cythere lactea, G.S.B.
Cythere lepralioides, G.S.B. -
Cythere lubboekiana, G.S.B.
Cythere militarie, G.S.B. sp.
Cythere norniani, G.S.B.
Cythere obtusalata, G.S.B.
Cythere ovalis, G.S.B.
Cythere parallelogramma, G.S.B.
Cythere postdeclivis, Chaipm.
Cythere rastromarginata, G.S.B.
Cythere scabrocuneata, G.S.B.
Cythere scintillulata, G.S.B.
Cythere scutigera, G.S.B.
Cythere wyville-thomsoni, G.S.B.
Krithe eggeri, Chapm.
Loxoconcha australis, G.S.B.
Xestoleberi.s curta, G.S.B. sp.
Xcfitoleberis margaritea, G.S.B.
Xestoleberis variegata, G.S.B.
Cytherura capillifera, Chapm.
Cythernra ouyenensis, Chapm.
Cytheropteron batesfordiense, Chapm.

and

Geological horizons,
K. ?J.
K. or J.
K. ?J.
K. ?J.
K.
J.
K.

K. or J.
J.
K.
J.
J.
K.
K.
K.
?J.

J.

K. J,

K. J.

K. J.

K. J.

K. J.

K. J.

J.

J.

K.

K. J.

K. or J.

?K. J.

K. ?J.

K. J.

K. J.

?K. J.

?K. J.

.T.

?K. J.

?K. J.

W. K. rJ,

J.

J.

J.

K. or J.

K.

K. J.

K.

J.

J.

K.

J.

?K. J.

mJ Ih

Fos.sUs.

67

(Jcolojrical liorizons.

Cytlieropterou hatest'ordiense. var. aculoata, Chap.
Cytheropteron postumbonatum, Chapm.
Cytheropteron praeantarcticiim, Chapm.

Cytheropteron reticosum, Chapm.

Cytheropteron rostratum, Chapm.

Cytherella aiuiculus, Chapm.

Cytherolla lata, G.S.B.

Cytherella polita, G.S.B.

Cytherella pulchra, G.S.B. - - -

Cytlierella punctata. G.S.B. - - -

Cytherella subtruncata, Chapm.
Cirripedia —

Scalpellum subquadratum, Chapm. -

Balanus psittaciis, Molina sp.

Balanus varians, G. Sow. . - -

Decapoda —

Chelae of Crustacea, indet.
Pisces —

Cestracion cainozoicus, Chapm. and Pritch.

Galeocerdo aduncus, Agassiz -

Lamna compi-essa, Agassiz - - -

Carcharodon auriculatus, Blainv. sp.

Tryofon cf. rugosus, Probst sp.

Myliobatis moorabbinensis, Chapm. and Pritch.

Chimaeroid teeth, indet.

(?) Chrysophrys sp. -

Diodon formosue, Chapm. and Pritch.

Teleostean fish otoliths

K. or
K.
K.
J.
K.

K. or
K. J.
K. J.
K. J.
K.

K. J.

K. or J.

K. or J.

J.

K. or J.

J. (probably).

K. ?J.

J.

?K. J.

K. ?J.

K. J.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate VI.

Fig. ]. — Anjilloeci<( J, (id id, G. S. Brady. Right valve. Mallee-

B(.re, No. "). 18i)-190 feet. x 52.
Fig. 2. — Marocyjyris decora, G. S. Brady sp. Right valve; speei-

meii showing original colour markings. ^lallee Bore,.

No. 9, 256-263 feet, x 52.
-Macroci/pris tumida, G. S. Brady. Right valve. Mallee

Bore. No. 10, 310-320 feet. x 52.
-Bytliocyjjris finnefacta. sp. nov. «, Caiapate seen from

the right side; h, seen from below; c, end view,

Mallee Bore, No. II, 542-544 feet. x 40.
-B. titmefacta, sp. nov. Another specimen (paratype). left

valve. Mallee Bore No. 10, 310-320 feet. x 40.
-Bairdia amygdaloides, G. S. Brady. Left valve. Mallee

Bore, No. 10, 310-320 feet, x 52.

6a

Fig.

3.

Fig.

4.

Fig.

5.

Fig.

6.

68 FrederieJi Clucpinan :

Fig. 7. — Bnirdia (iiis'i-dlix. sp. iiov. Hif^lit valve. MalleL' ^\i\yv.

No. i), 256-26:5 tVet. x 52.
Fig. S.—Ci/tlK^re cniKilintJafd, Keuss sp. Right valve. Mallee

Bore, No. 11. 219-260 feet. x 52.
Fig. 9. — Ci/fhen^ cr/spafa. G. S. Bi-ady. Right valve. Mallee Boie.

X.). 11, 554-556 feet. x 52.
Fig. U).—r//f/ier(' (Ja.<ii'J<iina, (t. 8. livadv. Left valve. Mallee

Bore. Xo. 11. 554-556 feet. x 52.
Fig. W.—Ci/there r/emi-^sa. (i. S. Brady. Left valve. Mallee

Bore, No. 10. 160-1S6 feet. x 52.

Plate VIL

Fig. 12. — Ci/fherc dicfijou. (4. S. Brady. Left valve of a youth-
ful foi'iu, iuid well preserved. Mallee Bore, Xo. 9,

3 15-325 feet. x 40.
Fig. 13. — C. (Vn-tjiou. (t.S.B. Right valve of a senile form, with

smoother and thieker earapaee. Mallee Bore, Xo. 11.

438-440 feet, x 40.
Fig. 14. — Cj/fJiere flej-icosfafft, sp. iiov. a. Right valve; 6, profile

of valve seen from above. Mallee Bore, Xo. 10, 310-

320 feet, x 52.
Fig. 15. — (Ji/there larfea, G. S. Brady. Right valve. Mallee Bore,

Xo. 11, 562-564 feet, x 40.
Fig. 16. — ('//f litre lepraliolf/es, G. S. Brady. Right valve. Mallee

Bore, No. 8, 210-219 feet. x 52.
Fig. 17. — Ci/there luhhochiaiia, G. S. Brady. Right valve. Mallee

Bore, No. 11, 260-265 feet, x 52.
Fig. 18. — Ci/there militarix, G. S. Brady sp. Right valve. Mallee

Bore, No. 9, 256-263 feet. x 52.
Fig. 19. — Cyihcre nonuani, G. S. Brady. Right valve. Mallee

Bore, No. 10, 310-320 feet. x 40.
Fig. 20. — Gythere ohtusalata. G. S. Brady. Right valve. Mallee

Bore, No. 9, 256-263 feet, x 52.
Fig. 2\.— Gythere oualis, G. S. Brady. Left valve. Mallee Bore,

No. 11, 276-270 feet. x 40.
Fig 22. — Gythere parallelogramma, G. S. Brady. Left valve.

Mallee Bore, No. 9, 315-325 feet, x 52.
Fig. 23. — Gythere postdeclivis, sp. nov. a. Left valve; h, profile

of valve. Mallee Bore, No. 10. 310-320 feet, x 40.
Fig. 24. — Gythere rastromarginata , G. S. Brady. Right valve.

Mallee Bore, No. 11. 170-175 feet, x 52.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1914. Plate VI.

I'm.'. h'.S. Vift<iri;i, li

I'latc VI r.

\^^

F.C. ad nat. del.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 1914. Plate Vrri.

F.C. ad nat. del.

I'ror. !>'.<. Vi.'lnri.i, l'.)l L I'lnlc IX.

F.C. ad nat. del.

Proc. E.S. Victoria, 1914. riate X.

F.C. ad nat. del.

New and Rare Fossils.

Platk VIII.

69

F,g. 2^.-C,fJ,err .raLroc. n.afa, G. S. Brady. Right valve of a
'luadrate variety. Mallee Bore, No. 11, 457-458 feet
X 40.
Fig. 2fi._r.v/A... ...nnllulafa. (1. S. Brady. Left valve. Mallee

B..re. X... 5, 189-i;)() feet. x" 52.
F.g. 21.-C,thn-r ....fi.era, G. S. Brady. Left valve. Mallee

B.,re, .A„. f), ],S!)-190 feet. x 40. /

V^^^. 2^.~-C!,thrrr ,r,, riUr-thom,,on; . G. S. Bradv. Left valve

Mallee Bore, No. 10, .•nO-:320 feet. x 40
Fig. 29.-A-r/M. e,,r,erL sp. nov. «, Left valve; h. profile, from
^. .,,, ^ '^^^'"^^•- ^^i^'lleeBore, No. 11, 260-265 feet. x52
r,g. oO.-Z.,.wo..A. ...,,,//,, G. s. B,.^^^. Left valve. Mallee

Bore. N... 10, 225-230 feet. x 52
Fig. :n.-.Y.^V.^../.,,,,,, G.S.Brady sp. Right valve. Mallee

Bore, N... 10, 225-230 feet. x 52.
Fig. 32.-.Y.^/.^,,/, ,u,n,antea. G. S. Brady. Left valve. Mallee

B(.re. N(.. 11, 267-270 feet, x 52.
Fig. ^^.-Xe^toleh.n, ran.r,nfa^ G. S. Bra<ly. Left valve. Mallee

B..re, No. 11, 267-270 feet. x 52
Fig. 34.-C>^..... rapmifrra, sp. nov. .. Bight valve; i, pro-
hie. -Mallee Bore, No. 11. 175-107 feet. x52
Fig. :\:>.---(';,f],erura ou!,enensh. sp. nov. a. Right valve; h pro-
file seen from ahove. Mallee Bore. No. 11, 267-270
leet. X 52.
Fig. 36.-C>^..o,..^.. l.atesfordien.e^ Chapman. Right valve.

Mallee Bore, No. 11, 440-442 feet. x 40
Fig. 37.-r'. hnfe.fo,^;en.,, var. acuhnfa, var. nov. ^Left valve.

Mallee Bore. No. 11, 453-454 feet. x 40
'^- ••'^-^V/^/-/o;...;v>. po.f,nuhouat,nn^ sp. nov. «, Right valve;
l>. profile seen from below. Mallee Bore, No 8 210
218 feet. x 52.

PLArK TX.

Fig. :^^^.~('J^J,^^rnpf.ron praeaniarctimm, sp. nov. a. Left valve;

h. valve seen from above. Mallee Bore, No. 9 256-

263 feet. x 52.
Fig. iiS.-i',,n„,,..pf.ron refiro.un>, sp. nov. ., Left valve; b,

piofile. -Mallee Bore, No. ]0, 195-225 feet, x 52.

70 Frederick Cha'pm<(Ai:

Fig. 41. — Cytheropteron rosfratum, sp. nnv. a. Carapace seen

from left side; h, profile from l)t'lo\v. Mallee Bore,

No. 11, 175-197 feet, x 52.
Fig. 42. — Cytherelht auriculus, sp. nov. a, Left valve; h, profile.

Mallee Bore, No. 11, 210-260 feet, x 52.
Fig. 43. — C. auriculus, sp. nov. Left valve of a young example.

Mallee Bore, No. 11, 219-260 feet, x 52.
Fig. 44. — Cytherella lata, G. S. Brady, a. Left valve; J>. profile.

Mallee Bore, No. 5, 163-175 feet. x 52.
Fig. 45. — Cytherella polita, G. S. Brady, a. Left valve: A, profile.

Mallee Bore, No. 9, 315-325 feet. x 52.
Fig. 46. — Cytherella pulchra, G. S. Brady, a. Bight valve; i,

profile. Mallee Bore, No. 10, 230-254 feet, x 52.
Fig. il.— Cytherella jmtietata, G. S. Brady. Left valve. Mallee

Bore. No. 9, 256-263 feet, x 52.
Fig. 48. — Cytherella xuhtruncata, sp. nov. r^ Carapace seen

from tlie left side; />, carapaee seen from below.

Mallee Bore, No. 10, 225-230 feet, x 52.

Plate X.

Fig. 49. — Scalpelluin suhquadratuni, sp. nov. a. Carina. dc>rsal
view; />, lateral view; c, interioi- of valve; «•/. section
across posterior end of valve (Holotype). Mallee Bore,
No. 4, 163-170 feet. x 2.

Fig. 50. — .V. suJxpiadratmiK sp. nov. (?) Rostral latus (Paratype).
Mallee Bore, No. 10. 310-320 feet. x 2.

Fig. 51. — S. Kulx/iiadraf iiin, sp. nov. Scutum: a, exterior; h,
interior of valve (Pai-atype). Mallee Boi-e. No. 4,
163-170 feet. X 2.

Fig. 52. — Balaniis j)sitfariis, Molina sp. llosti-al compartment : a.
exterioi' ; l>, interior, showing strongly denticulated
septa of tlie radii. ^Nlallee Bore. No. 9, 315-325 feet.
X 2.

Fig. 53. — Balariiis rar/ans, (t. S. Sowerby. A complete l)ase.
Mallee Bore. No. 9, 315-325 feet. x 2.

Fig. 54. — B. variaii>f, Sowerliy. A carinal valve. Malice Bore, No.
9, 315-325 feet. x 2.

Fig. 55. — Cestrarion ca/nozoirm^. Chapman and Priti'liard. An-
terior lateral tooth. Mallee Bore, No. 8, 210-219 feet.
X 4.

Neio and Rare Fossils. 71

Fig. 56. — Trygon cf. nir/osiin, Probst sp. a. Anterior aspect of
tooth; h, posterior aspect; c, side view; d, upper sur-
face of tooth. Mallee Bore, No. 5, 163-175 feet, x 4.

Fig. 57. — Myliohafis inoorahhinensis, Chapman and Pritchard.
Lower or articulated surface of tooth. Mallee Bore,
No. 10, 2-25-230 feet, x 2.

Fig. 58. — (?) Chrysophrys sp. Rounded pavement tooth; with
crenulated basal margin. Mallee Bore, No. 8. 210-
219 feet. x 5.

Fig. 55. — (?) Chrysophrys sp. Tooth with thickened basal maigin.
Mallee Bore, No. 3, 201-220 feet. x 4.

[Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Part I., 1914].

Art. Vll. — Further Notes on Australian Hydrolds. — ///.

By W. M. bale, F.R.M.S.

(With Plates, XI., XII., XIII.).

[Read 9th July, 1914].

Orthopyxis, L. Agassiz.

Campaniilaria, auct., in part.

Ciytia, auct., in part.

Laomedea, auct., in part.

Eucopella, Von Lendenfeld. in part.

Agasfra, Hartlaub.

Trophosonie consisting of smooth or undvilated peduncles of vary-
ing length, springing from a creeping hydiorhiza, and supporting
each a single hydrotheca; hydrothecae campanulate. with the lower
part compressed, but usually circular above, the perisarc vaiying
much in thickness, but always greatly thickened inwards near the
base so as to form a " floor " on which the hydranth is supported;
hydranth radially symmetrical, with al)out 24-32 tentacles and a
large tiumpet-shaped hypostome.

Gonothecae very variable in form within the limits of a species;
gonozooid a modified medusa^ having neither tentacles nor diges-
tivH cavity, l)ut provided with four branched radial canals, and
sometimes with marginal sense-organs.

The sub-genus Orthopiixls, w^hich was proposed by Agassiz for
the reception of the single species Ciytia {Orthopyxis) poteritim (a
species Avhich had already been described by Hincks under the name
of Campminlaria c(dicidnta), has been disi-egarded by later ob-
servers, most of whom have been content to rank the species under
Ciytia or Campnnularia.

In l.'^S.'? Von Lendenfeld desci-ibed as the type of a new genus
and family a species which he called Evcopella campanrdaria, and
which, he claimed, was distinguished from all previously known
hydroids by the possession of a gonozooid medusoid in character
but totally destitute of manubrium and tentacles. Aliliongh re-
ferring to Agassiz' work he failed to notice that the characters on
which he based his new genus were precisely those of the forii)
desci-ibed in great detail by the Ameriian luitiii alist.

Australian Ilydrolds. 7'6

In ixrciit years several observers have, following Von Lenden-
fekl. admitted the genus Eiccopella, and Fraser. recognising the
affinity ot' C caliculafa with Von Lendenfeld's genus, has adopted
the name Kncoj/clhi cal/riihifd . No doubt Fraser is right with,
regard to the affinity of that species, but if such forms are to be
separated from Cdinpaniilarid or Vlijt'ui (as most observers seem
inclined to separate them), then they must be referred to Ortliopi/ria.
whieh ^\as fai' anterior to Von Lendenfeld's genus. That Eucopdla'
should be superseded is the more desirable, since much confusion
has been caused by the original association under that name of two
quite unrelated forms.

The most impoi-tant character of the genus Orf/iopi/u/s is the
structure of the gonozooid, which, as described by Agassiz, is a
very degraded form of medusa, having an umbrella with foui'
radial canals, l)ut neither manubrium nor tentacles. There is alsc'
a peculiarity of the tropliosome not noticed by any of the earlier
observers, namely the distinctly bilateral development of the hydio-
theca. which is compressed in the lower half so as to be of an elliptic
or iiblong section, while, as a lule, retaining the ordinary circular
form in the distal portion. Another prominent characteristic, ap-
parently Lummon to all the species, is the variability in thickness,
of the hydrotheca-wall, which occurs in individuals not only of the
same variety, but also of the same colony. I find this variation in
thickness to l)e dependent, to a certain extent, on the position in
whieh the hydrotheca is viewed; thus a hydrotheca seen in its
broader aspect is not only less tapering downwards, with a wider
and riattei- floor, but its wall conuiionly appears distinctly morf
thickened than when it is seen in its narrow aspect. In some of
the published figures of 0. coin preaxa the thickening of the calycle-
wall is remarkably developed.

In 0. ealicidata the peduncles, which vary extjemely in length,
are slender, thin-walled, and twisted into a loose, irregular spiral
generally throughout their length, but sometimes with smooth or
nearly smooth intervals. Most of the other forms agree in this
particulai'. oi- else have the undulations shorter and more pro-
nounced. l)ut O. compressff and 0. a/if/u/ata have peduncles whicln
are stouter in themselves, and pi-ovided with thicker perisarc. and
never exhibit the spiral oi- undulated form found in the other
species. Below the pronounced globular segment which occui-s im-
mediately under the hydrotheca in all the species, these often have-
a distinct oblong segment, and there may be a few constrictions at
irregular intervals.

74 W. M. Bale:

A noteworthy characteristic of the genus is the wide range of
variation displayed in the forms of the gonangia. Every species
has its typical form, but a large proportion of the individual gon-
;angia differ from their respective types very considerably, dis-
torted and irregular forms being abundant. Several species which
scarcely differ at all in regard to the trophosome have nevertheless
gonangia quite unlike each other.

Only in 0. caliculata and Evcopelln campanularia have tlie
gonozooids been the subject of elaborate investigations, tlie foinier
by Agassiz and the latter by Von Lendenfeld. The most important
■distinction is the presence in E . cainpanuloria of eiglit otocysts on
the umbi'ella-margin. So far as is known there is no noticea])le
difference in any of the species between the gonangia which contain
tlie male and the female medusae.

Perhaps the most striking point about the genus is the exceed-
ingly close relationship existing between the various species. Ex-
cept for the difference in the peduncles, which distinguishes 0. com-
pressa and 0. angidnta from the other forms included here, their
trophosomes agree so closely that, keeping in mind the variations
which exist in each species (and which will most probably be found
on furthei' investigation to be even more extensive than I have
'described them from the few specimens at my disposal^, we would
not find it surprising if all these variations were to occur within
the limits of a single species. Yet the differences in the gonosomes
appear ample to justify their separation. It is to be borne in
mind, however, that most of these species are described from the
trophosomes and the gonangia only; in none of them except 0. cali-
culata and E. campanularia have the gonozooids themselves been
".sufficiently investigated to render it certain that they come strictly
"vvithin the limits of the genus as it is described by Agassiz and Von
Lendenfeld. ^

•Okthopvxis caliculata (Hincks). (Pis. XI. and Xll., Fig. 1).

(Jainpainilaria cdl'cii/dfa, Hincks, .Ann. .Mag. Xat. Hist. (2),
xi.. 185;}. p. 178, pi. v.. fig. 5. Allman, Proc. Roy.
Soc. Edin.. iv., 1862, p. 61, 64. Hincks. Brit. Hyd.
Zooph., 1868, p. 164, pi. xxxi., fig. 2-2d. Jiale. Proc.
Lin. Soc. N.S.W. (2), iii., 1888, p. 755, pi. xiii.. figs.
^-^^. Schneider, Zool. Jahrb.. x.. 1897. p. 482.
Th..rnely. Zool. Uesults, Willey, iv., 1900, p. 454. Har-
;gitt, Amer. Nat., xxxv.. 1901, p. 88.'}. fig. 18. Hartlaul),

Aiixf ndlaii, HydroiJu. To

Zool. Jiihil)., Suppl. vi., 19()o. p. aGO. :)5:5. 5G2, ti-s.
K, L. Want'ii. Ann. Nat. Govt. .\Ius.. i.. IDOS. p. :!:'„•<.
f. 1!).
('aiitlKiiti(l(iri(i hrcvisci/pJtift, Sars, Middelliavet's Lit. Fanna,

1857, p. locS, pi. i., tigs. 12-i:i.
L(t()i>H'(iea caliciilafa, Alhnan, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (•)),

xiii., 186-t, i>. .-{T.-',.
Ci;/ti(i {OrfJiopi/.rix) poicr'nnn, Agas.siz. Coiitr. Nat. Hist.
r.8., iv.. 1.SG2. p. 2!)7, pi. xxviii.. tigs. 1-20, pi. xxix.,
tigs. 1-5.
Orfliopiii'iA pottrimii, A. Agassiz. Catal. N. Amer. .\cal..

1865, p. 81.
Catnpa?iular/a poieriiim. Nutting, U.S. Fisli. Comni. Hull.

for 1899, 1901, p. .'Ui, tig. 24.
Clytia caliculafn. Nutting, Proc. Wash. Acad. Sui., iii.. IDOl.

p. 170, pi. xvii., fig. 1-2.
Eucopdla calicidata, Fraser, Bull. Labor. N. H. State Univ.

Iowa, vi., 1911, p. .3G.

Campanularia luttyra, in part, Levinsen, Vid. Meddel. fia

den naturh. Foren, 1892, p. 26. Marktanner-Turnerets-

cher, Zool. Jahrb., viii., 1895, ■^. 406. Birula, Ann.

Mus. Zool. Acad. Sc. St. Petersbourg. 1898, p. M-6,

fig. 1-3. Billard, Arch, de Zool, exp. et gen. (4). vii..

1907, p. 340. Jaderholm, Kungl. Svensk. Vetenskaps-

akad. Handling., Bd. 45, 1909. p. 65. Broch, Fauna

arctica, v., 1909, p. 185, 225. Linko, Fauna de la

Russie, i., 1911, p. 170.

(Not Campanularia calicvlata. Calkins, Pioc. Boston Sou.

Nat. Hist., xxviii.. 1899, p. 351. pi. ii., fig. 11-lle..

pi. vi., fig. lid.)

This cosmopolitan species has been often described, l)ut all the

older descriptions missed an ijnportant point in the structure of

the hydrotheca, namely the bilateral development of the lower poi-

tion, Avhich is distinctly compressed, so that the hydrothecae at this

pai't may be said to have two broader and two narrower sides.

I have generally found the perisarc of the nariower sides somewliat

thicker than elsewhere, so that on viewing the hydrotheca in its

broader aspect the wall appears thicker than when seen in the other

direction. In a typical hydrotheca, as seen in its narrow aspect.

tlie two sides appear as convergent lines, straight throughout, the

outline in this aspect })eing therefore distinctly funnel-shaped. But

76 W. M. Bale:

as seen in the other aspect the sides are less convergent down to the
tloor or diaphragm, hehjw ^\hich they curve inward, making the-
outline hell-shaped. Tlie thickening of the calycle-wall may he
quite pronounced in the broader view, while not appearing in the
narrower aspect. This thickening is generally greatest at the
margin of the liydrotheca. becoming gradually less towards the
diaphragm. The conspicuous inwai'd thickening which forms the
diaphragm is pierced by a central channel, or hydropore, w^hich
expands into a small rounded cavity between the diaphragm and
the base of the hydidtheca. If the same liydrotheca be viewed in
its narrow aspect tlie sides will appear (|uite tliin, and even at the-
base tlie perisarc will not appear very thick, as the central enlarge-
ment of the hyd)'opore appears in this view to nearly fill the space
lielow the diaphraiini. But in some colonies all the hydrothecae
may appear thin-walh'd. in whatever dii^ection they are viewed.

Sometimes the border of the liydrotheca may be a little everted,
in •)ther cases not at all. especially when thick at the margin.
Considerable differences in size often exist among the hydrothecae-
of a single colony. I have not detected any sign of bilateral
synnuetry in the hydianths. which have a very large hypostome and
from about 24 to '50 tentacles. The peduncles may be of any length,
fnim twice that of tiie hydrothecae to twenty times, or even more.
Tliey are thin-walled, and twisted in a loose irregulai- spiral, with
oreasionally smooth interspaces.

The typical g(uiangia are oblong or ovate, tapering below, smooth,
and when matuie rounded at the top. They are but slightly com-
piessed. But variations fi'om the type are abundant ; sometimes
there are two intlatiojis. corresponding to the two contained zooids,
in other cases tliere ai-e still more irregular forms, and there may
be a series of annular undulations., Agassiz describes the goiiothecae
as about twice the length of the hydrothecae; in my specimens I find
them three to foui- times as long.

Miich difference of opinion exists as to whether O. cal/riilafa and'
('. i/i/ei/ra aj'e the sanie species. Among those wlio support this
view are Levinseii. iliiula. Billai-d. and Linko. while Hartlaub,
Calkins, and Nutting hold the contrary oj)iTiion. 1 am a1 the-
disadvantage of not having seen Birula's pa]>er, but I fiml fi-om
]Jid\o that ('. i/if('(/ro. forma fi/p/ca, is distinguished hf its orbicu-
lai- and thin-walled liydi'otliecae from forifur ral/ciilafn, in which the
liydi-.ithecae are cdmiiressed. with thick walls. This distinction
obviously does not iiuld good, since we find the compressed hydro-

Austi-al 1(1 II H jitl loids. 77

fluriU' (if i). rdliciihitd arc t'riM|iiciitiy (Hiitr as I liiii-\vallc<l as tliosu'
■of ('. n/frf/ni. Howwcr. it is admitted that (). cfilirulato has tlic
liydnithoear cdinpi-i'sscd while C. i.'ife(/r(f lias not, and in face of
tliat fact it \voidd rc([uire very sti-ouj^- evidence to ))rove the identity
of the two foi'iiis. It may l)e mentioned that Calkins claims to l)e
al)le to disliiiLinish between them by the diaphrauni, which in O.
(•(iliviihitii is sim])ly the inward thickening- of the peiisarc. while in
C . i iitei/rd. according' to this obsei'vc'r, theic is a special diapliia<;ni
overlying- the jU'risarcal thickeninfi'. Hioch (Bergens Museum
Aarbog 1 !)()."). Xo. G. p. 10. fig. 1), descriljcs and figures this
character as pertaining to (J. cdliciihttd , \n\i nothing of the soi't
■exists in any specimen of C. cnliculata observed by me. noi- indeed
in any of the species ascribed in this papei- to the genus Orfhop>/xis.

Orthopyxis macuocona, (Von Leudenfeld). (Pis. XI. and XII.,
Fig. 2).

Ct/iii [KniiiJI iia cah/ciilntn var. DUiln'oi/oiid . Von Lendenfeld.

Pi'oc. Lin. Soc. N.S.W., ix., 1<XS4. p. 922.
(Jniiipdiiiilaria calicidatd vai-. inakroyoiid. Bale.'Proc. Lin.
Soc. N.S.W. (2), iii., 1888, p. 755. pi. xiii., fig. 4-8.
Farquhar, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxviii., 1895, p. 459.

Hydrorhiza very stout, peduncles slightly to strongly waved,
three or four times as long as the hydrothecae.

Hydrothecae very much compressed, Avith the aperture circular
or elliptic ; in the broad aspect with very wide base and with the
■cavity usually equally w'ide from the aperture to the floor, which
is quite flat; in the narrow aspect with a somewhat abrupt decrease
of diameter about the middle; wall-thickening in the form of a
stout convex external band completely surrounding the upper half
of the hydrotheca; margin plain, slightly everted. Length .28— .45
mm. ; width of the broad side at aperture .22 — .28 mm.

Gonothecae very large, oblong or ovate, often irregular, 'smooth,
rounded above, very slightly compressed; length about 1.65 — 1.87
mm., width, .82 — .90 mm. Gonophore a medusoid bud, not becom-
ing free.

Hah. — Port Phillip (Von Lendenfeld); New Zealand (Farquhar);
Bondi (Australian Museum).

The character which led Von Lendenfeld to distinguish the variety
was the very large size of the gonangia, which otherwise much re-
semble those of 0. calic-ulata, being like them, subject to extreme
variation in form. They are of very firm perisarc. The hydro;^

ujIlibrarV '

jl LIBRAP

78 W. M. Bide:

tliecae are uioi'e compressed latei'ally than tliose of 0. caliculata,
aijil in most of tliem the sides, in tlie broader aspect, are not con-
vergent, so that in this view the cavity appears as if perfectly
cylindrical, with a flat floor. A much thickened annular band,
convex in section, encircle.s the disttl half of tlie hydrotheca com-
pletely; fi'oni the lower edge of this band to the floor the wall is
less thickened. The hydrothecae freijuently have the compressed
condition extended in some degree to the distal portion, so that
tlie aperture may l)e elliptical. The bead-like segment immediately
l)eIo\v the hydrotlieca is noticeably narrower than the peduncle on
which it is s\ippoi-ted, a feature not observable in 0. calicidatn.

The rounded summit of the gonotlieca f(jrms a convex cap, which
separates at maturity. There are usually tv,o gonozooids, which
ai'B described by Von Lendenfeld as medusoid buds, which do not
Ijccome free, and in fact do not possess a properly developed um-
Inella at the time when the sexual products a)e matui'ed. He adds
that they are similar to those of C . callcuJata .

Orthopyxis avilsoni n. sp. (Pis. XI. and XIT., Fig. 5).

Hydrorhiza rather slender, peduncles strongly waved, conunonly
2-4 times as long as the hydrothecae.

Hydrothecae usually thin-walled, but occasionally slightly thick-
ened, thickening principally near the top; mostly somewhat bell-
shaped in the broad aspect, rather more funnel-shaped in the narrow
view, with the thickening absent or scarcely indicated ; border plain,
very slightly eveited : length, .34 — .43 nnii., width at aperture,
.25— .33 mm.

Gonothecae very large, not compressed, sub-cylindrical, equal in
diameter thioughout except at the basal part, divided into about
seven or eight longitudinal areas by lines which run from the summit
to near the base; no operculum, irregular fornis frequent. Length
when mature, about 1.95 mm., diameter, .75 — .87 nan. Gono-
phores large, medusoid, umbrella with 8 otocysts (?).

Ifah.—Vovt Phillip (Mr. J. Bracebridge Wilson).

Many of the hydfothi'cae show no thickening, others appear in
tht' liroadcr aspect sliglitly thickened in the fashion of O. calicnlatn,
or with a, sub-marginal band in the same jxisition as that of 0.
iixicrofioiui l)ut much less pronounced. The two aspects differ but
litlle. the cavity l)eing somewhat more broadly rounded at the base
in one view than in tlie other. The ])eduncles usually have the

Austnillini N 1/(1 mills. :V^

uiidulatioiis sli(ii'tri- and iiioir stionji;!}' itfceiituated than tiiose of"
(). cdliciildtd . TIk' i::onan<i:ia aie of vei'v t-haracteristic foi-iii. They
rniiM-ldy iX'seinhk' a seven- oi' eight-sided prism, but the sides are-
curved instead of flat. The h)n<ritudiual lines are simply th^ optical'
expression of the folds in the perisare, where the sides meet. These
lines usually appear nioie or less irieuular, being bi-oken and want-
ing in parts, and in comparatively few cases are they fairly sti'aight
an<l uniform tlii-oughout. The gonotheca is subject to quite as many
irregularities as in the allied species; I have seen examples with a
deep constriction round the middle, and others with a series of"
irregular aniiulations. The sexes do not differ in foi-m. There are-
two medusae, one of which may be so lai-ge as to nearly fill the-
capsule, while the other is still very small. In one case I saw what
seemed to be otocysts.

The absence of a distinctly compressed condition of the gonangia
differentiates this species from all the others referred to in this
paper.

Okthopvxis platycarpa n. ><p. (Pis. XI. and XII., Fig 3).

Hydrorhiza stout, peduncles distinctly waved, mostly 2-4 times as
long as the hydrothecae.

Hydrothecae large, wide-based in the broader aspect, with the
walls often somewhat thickened, principally in the form of a convex
sub-marginal band, narrower aspect less thickened or not at all,
border plain, distinctly everted. Length, .o3 — .4.3 mm., width at
Ijorder, .32— .39 mm.

Gonothecae large, very much compressed, smooth, Avith straight
sides forming angles at the summit, which is slightly lower between
them, a single gonophore filling the capsule when matui-e. Length.,
alxnit 1.55 mm., width .72— .90.

Hah.— In or near Port Phillip.

This form, in the strongly compressed hydrotliecae, the bi-oad^
basal portion, and the form of the thickening, shows most affinity
with O. mncrogona, and occasionally a hydrotheca is seen which
might readily be taken for one of that species. The gonangia, how-
ever, differ greatly in their straight sides and squarish summit (as
seen in their broader aspect), and in their much compressed form.
Seen edge-wise they appear slightly curved alternately in opposite-
directions. In each of the few specimens which I examined there-
was a single large gonophore, occupying the Avhole cavity, but they
were not in a condition to permit of their character being made out
satisfactorilv.

•80 W. M. Bale.-

I have seen Imt few gonangia, and cannot say wliat may be tlie
extent of their lial)itual variation. Those whieh appeal' typical
somewhat resemble those of 0. (inr/ulata, but that species is readily
. distinguishable from the present by its smooth peduncles.

Orthopyxis comphkssa Clark.

Caiinianitlaria com/trrssa, Chuk, Proc. Acad. Xat. Sci.
Philad., 1876. p. 214. pi. viii.. tig. T). 6. Hartlaub.
Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. vi.. 1905, Bd. iii.. p. 062. fig. M,
Xinko. Faune de la Russie, Hydroidea. i.. 1911, p. 172.
'fig. 29.
•Chjt'ut com presxa. Nutting. Proc. \Yasli. Acad. Sci., iii.,
1901, p. 170. pi. xvii., fig. ."i, 4. Vanhoft'en, Deutsche
Sudpolarexp. 1901-3, xi., Zool. iii.. 1910. p. 303.
fig. 24-24e.
Eitcojyella campanuldria. Von Lendenfeld, Zeitschr. f, wiss.
Zool., xxxviii.. 18S3, pp. 497-583, pi. xxvii-xxxii. (i>ut
not pi. xxix., fig. 15, Dl. D^).
? Cam.panularia caliculata, Calliins, Proc. Best. Soc. Nat.
Hist., xxviii., 1899, p. 351, pi. ii.. fig. 11-llc. pi. vi.,
fig. lid.
? Not ('(iiujxniiilarKi coinpreftxa, Jaderliolm. Schwedisciien
Siidpolarexp. 1901-3, v., 1905, p. 14, pi. v., fig. 6 7
Not Glytin rompressa. Torrey, Univ. Calif. Publ., Zook^v.
i., 1902, p. 58, pi. vi., fig. 49.
0. compressa has the hydrothecae of the same type as those nf
'0. caliculata, but they have the perisarcal thickening more pro-
nounced. Most obseT-vers figure thick-walled and thin-walled hydr
thecae, which are probably different aspects of the same individi;.:i
The chief distinction between this species and 0. caliculafa is in tht
peduncles. These in 0. calicitl(i1a> are twisted in a somewhat irre-
gular spiral; the undulations may fail here and there, but are
rarely a' sent altogethei'. In O. ronipresfia the stalks are iioich
stouter, with thicker walls, while they are never imdulated, though
they may be divided, especially near the hydrotheca, by several
distinct constrictions. Their thick perisarc appears nan-owed in at
the point of origin, so that their diameter at this point is little
more than that of the internal canal, and altogether they closely
resemble those of the genus Silicularia.

Various ft^rnis of gonangia have been figured, some cuni ,i
others m(n-e elongated; Clark describes them as "largest at h-

A iisfral HI II H i/(lr()i*fs. ST

disrai fiitl, louiuk'd at thr l)ase. verv iinR-Ii compressL'd lateially."
Vanhufien's aiul Ijiiiko's ti^iu'cs show them with the perisarc very
much thickened towaids tlie liase. exactly as in tliuse of S/I/riilnria
ritii-iil(it(i (Hai-thiuh). which they also i-eseiiihle in theii' t'uneate-
outline.

( 'iintradictmy accounts ni' the speides are given hy diffefent ob-
servers. Nutting, Hartlaub, Vanhoffen, and Linko appear to have
seen specimens agreeing with Clark's. Calkins describes under tlie
name of CampanuJaria ctiliciilaia a fui ni of which the tropliosome.
according to his account, agrees exactly with that of 0. compressa,
not with that of 0. cal/culafa. At the same time the gonangia
which he figures are more like those of the latter species. Torrey
descrilies specimens of which the medusa has four long tentacles, as
however the hydrothecae have a toothed margin, which nevei' occurs
in O. cotnpressa, it is difficult to see why they are referred to that
species. The form given as C. roinjjressa by Jaderholm has ringed
or twisted peduncles, and therefore seems wrongly placed; the
gonotheca moreover is more like that of 0. caJiculatn. As Van-
hoffen states, the species is characterised by tlie thick hydrothecae,
the smooth stalks, and the bi'oad flat gonothecae.

In lanking EucopeUa campotuilario Von Lendenfeld as a synonym
of 0. compressa I follow Nutting, who lias pointed out in his paper
on the Hydroids of the Harriman Alaska Expedition that there-
appears to be no difference between tlie two species. E. campanu-
lana, however, has been involved in some confusion owing to Von
Lendenfeld's having included in his account of the species two forms
differing entirely in regard to the hydrothecae, though the gonangia'
are similar. He has figured a number of hydrothecae which he says
are connected by intermediate forms; most of these are of the-
ordinary Orthopyxis type, but two among them are of totally dif-
ferent form, and are obviously identical wuth those found in the
genus Silicularia. No intermediate forms between these and the
Orthopyxis are shown. In 1886 I received from the Australian
Museum a portion of the type specimens of E . campavularia, which
consisted solely of the Silirularia-iormH, and were similar to those
figured by me as E. campnnularia in the Proceedings of the Linnean
Society of N.S. Wales for 1888. I had not then seen Von Lenden-
feld's original paper, and was not aware that any other form had'
been included in the species. Neither in the type specimens sent to
me nor in any others of similar character whicli I have examined,
is there any approach to the Orthopyxis type, while colonies of the

82 IF. J/. BaU :

latter invariably fail to exhibit any liydrotheeae witli characters
tending towards the S/I/nilan'a form. The distinction Isetween the
trophosomes is absolute, and I consider it lieyniid a doubt that
Eucopella campainddria, as originally described, comprises two
distinct species, one a typical Orfliopij.ris. tlie (.tlier. at least so
far as the trophosome is concerned, a typical SlJiciilaria.

The acccvunt of the gonangia of E. ca luixnnddrld is contradic-
toiy, theii- length lieing stated as from two To tliree millimetres,
while they are fitiured as under .75 mm. ; but their compressed
•condition, and their cuneate outline, as seen in their broader
aspect, are (juite similar to the same features in the typical 0.
cornpressa. Only, therefore, in the event of future research reveal-
ing some important difference between the gonozooicl of that species
and Von Lendenfeld's description will be possible to maintain the
specific distinctness of E. campamilaria.

0. compresm is found in Xoilli and Soutli Ameiica, where, like
Von Lendenfeld's specimens, is appears to giow hal)itually, if not
exclusively, on Laminaria.

ORTHOPYXtS AXGULATA, U. sp. ( PU.

Hydrorhiza thick and broad, pedunch
smootli, occasionally with one or more
rowed in at tjie base.

Hydrothecae, in the broader aspect, very wide at the base, with
the floor somewhat flattened, often more or less thickened, thick-
ening sometimes confined to a convex band surrounding the distal
portion of the hydrotlieca, sometimes extending to the base ^ narrow
aspect funnel-shaped, with thin walls, except for a slight thicken-
ing where the sub-marginal band extends to them; margin plain,
everted. Length, .'M) — .45 mm., widtli at aperture. .27 — .37 mm.

Gonotliecae broad, muclr compressed, the broad aspect ovate, trun-
cate, with edges undulated; a little narrov.ed in near the top, and
then widening outward and upward, forming angular projections
at each side of the top, or even produced into blunt, horn-like pro-
cesses, summit of the gonangium straiglit or sliglitly concave be-
tween them. Length, about L27 — 1.36 nmi.. width, .87 — .96 mm.
Two gonophores in each gonotheca ; lunbrella with foui- b)'ancliing
radial canals, and eight otocysts.

//a7^._Port Phillip (Mr. J. Brace])ridgv \Vils(ui).

This species agrees with 0. roniprcssa, and differs fiom the other
forms here described, in the stout, thick-walled, smooth peduncles.

XL. ,ui<

1 XLF., Fig. 4).

i stoiU.

with thick perisarc.

distinct

constrictions, nar-

Aiifif raliiia Hydro ids. 83

The hydrotlitTUc' as seen in tlie broader aspect, are wider-based
than any other form except 0. inncrogona, with the wall often con-
siderably thickened at the border, and continuing fairly thick
down to the base; oi- in some cases the thickening is confined to
the upper part, foi-ming a convex l)and like that of 0. macrogond,
but not so pronounced. The narrow aspect is funnel-shaped, with
no thickening except a very slight one in the su]>marginal region.
The border generally rises a little above the thickened part, and is
distinctly everted.

The gonangia are broad, but rather short, theii- lieight averaging
a})out 1.3 mm., and their width .90. They are ovate, truncate
above, and nmch compressed ; in the broad view the edges are un-
dulated, curving inward near the top, and then outward, forming
where they meet the top blunt angles, w-hich are usually produced
someW'hat outward and upward. The summit of the gonangium
is slightly concave or nearly flat, and so nari-ow that an end view-
would be lanceolate rather than elliptic. Irregidar forms are found,
but most of those examined were normal. Two gonozooids are con-
tained, pretty closely packed, the lower one larger in proportion to
the upper than is usually the case, and lying obliquely to it. The
only gonangia seen contained male gonozooids. The eight otocysts
of the medusa were very distinct.

A very close affinity exists between the present species and
Eucopella campanularia Von Lendenfeld (which is discussed under
O. coinpressa). The principal difference is in the form of the gon-
angia, which are distinguished from those of E. campanularia by
the broader lower portion, the undulated outline, and particularly
by the prominent superior angles.

SiLiouLARiA, Meyen.

H i/panfhea, Allman.

Eucopella, in part, Von Lendenfeld, Hartlaub.
Allman's description of tlie genus Hypanthea is as follows : —
" Hydrothecae pedunculate, inoperculate, with walls enormously
thickened, and so far encroaching upon the cavity as to render im-
possible the complete retraction of the hydranth. Gonosome —
^Gonangia enclosing fixed sporosacs." The species were further char-
acterised by the possession of bilateral hydrothecae, with oblique
apertures. A more recently described species, however,- — .S'. diver-
gens Ha]-tlaul> — differs from all the others in having the hydrotliecae
regular, with a large cavity, and apparently resembling those of

84 W. M. Bale:

Orfhopj/xis. Probably these may be bilateral to the same extent
as those of Orf/iopi/.ris: in any case they seem to form a distinct
link hetAveen the two genera.

As stated under 0. comparivlaria Von Lendcnfeld included under
that species two distinct hydroids, an OrfJiopi/xu. and a Silicularia^
the latter of which is here distinguished under the name of .S'.
rawpannJaria.

In considering the relations of OrfJ/op//,vis and Silicularia
we must not overlook the different structure of the hydranths. Those
of Orthopyxls are, so far as an ordinary examination can disclose.
purely radial, while some species at least of Hilicninria are dis-
tinctly bilateral, as described by Hilgendorf in his //. nsipnmetrica ,
and as they exist in Von Lendenfeld's specimens, and ai-e indicated
by Hartlaub in E. reticulata. A large lobe or inflation occupies
that side of the hydrotheca, which is lower than the rest, apparently
to accommodate it, and as all species of Silicularia (except S. diver-
yens), also have one side lower, it is presumable that the structure'
of the hydranth is similar in all of them. Another peculiarity in
our specimens is the union of the proximal part of the tentacles
in a sort of calyx with an annular, thickened border, and of this
also there is a distinct indication in Hartlaul>'s figure of E.
reticulata.

Silicularia campanularia (Von Lendenfeld). (PI. XIII.,
Figs. 1-6).

Eucopella cainjian iilaria, in part. Von Lendenfeld, Zeitschr,
f. wiss. Zool.. v.. 188:^, p. 497-583; pi. xxix., fig. 15, Dl.

Eucopella campanularia. Bale, Proc. Lin. Soc. N.S.W., (2),
iii., 1888, pi. xiii., figs. 9-15. Mulder and Trebilcock.
Geelong Naturalist, (2), vi., 1914, p. 9, pi. ii., figs.
8-11.
1 Eucopella reticulata, Hartlaub, Zool. Jahrb. , Suppl. vi.,.
iii.. 1905. p. 569, fig. lU.
Hydi'orhiza very broad and thick-walled. Avith numerous branches,
which are mostly given oft' at liglit angles, and are commonly oppo-
sirL'. IVduncles very stout, and with thick perisarc, the longer
(UK'S sometimes a little attenuated in the middle, rounded at the
top, and narrowed in at the base, one or tAvo rounded or oblong
segments sometimes at the top, a distinct rounded or angular bead
betAvecn the nednmle and the hvdrotheca.

AasfndittiK Hydrohls. 85

Hydrothceae luiu-li cdiiiiu'essod, llie two hinad sides t'<iniiiii<j; erect
•convex lobes, the intermediate sides lower, forming two lips, one
lower than the other; the interior nearly tilled up Avith solid peri-
sarc, pierced by the hydropore. which is enlarged just above its
lower extremity, and gi-adually widens out above into the shallow
cavity of the liydrotheca.

Gonothecae usually deeuml)eut, euneate, compressed, rounded at
the top wlien mature, shortly but distinctly stalked, their perisai-c
thickened towards the basfe.

Hydranths seated' in the concavity of the hydrothecae, base flat-
tened, a large rounded retractile inflation of that side of the body
which is over the lower lip ; proximal portion of the tentacles united
and joined In- an annular band into a calyx surroun<ling the oi-al
extremity.

Gonophores — sporosacs, one or two in each gonotheca.

The foregoing description refers to the specimens which formed
part of Von Lendenfeld's types of Eucopella campanularia, and
which, as already mentioned, were sent to me from the Australian
Museum. The description applies equally to the two forms from
Bondi figured by me in the Proceedings of the Linnean Society
of New South Wales, under the name of E. campanularia. There
are slight differences among these forms, and as there may be a
doubt as to whether they should all be classed together, I now figure
the actual specimens taken from Von Lendenfeld's types. The re-
lationship between these three forms, also Eucopella reticulnta
Hartlaub, is very close.

In Von Lendenfeld's specimens tlie liydrorhiza is extremely broad,
reaching about .-S'^mm., of which the internal cavity occupies alxmt
.15 mm. When torn off and turned edgewise it is seen to be much
flattened. The peduncles also are very massive, the longer ones
may be attenuated in the middle portion, owing to the perisarc !:>€-
ing thinner, but neai- the extremities they usually reach their
normal diameter. The canal giadually widens a little to the base,
and as the perisarc is narrowed in at the same pa)t, the area of
attachment is slender. Just at the top of the peduncle there is
a distinct internal inflation of the canal. The bead-like segment
between the hydrotheca and the peduncle may be globular, or it
may be angular round the equator, and sometimes there is a second,
and larger, globular bead. The peduncles may be tumid at the top
•and bottom, and theii- length is variable, some being less than twice
the length of a liydrotheca, othei's ten times that length, but short
'Ones predominate.

86 W. M. Bale:

Tlie hjdrothecae were figured by Vou Leudeufeld as oljliquely
truncate, like those of //. ag(/regata Allman. but the figure is in-
accurate, the broader sides being elevated convex lobes. The two
lips are not everted. As seen broadside the outer lateral contours
are usually, but not always, slightly concave in the middle, and
in the longer one there may be a slight angle. Their length varies
between .30 and .55 mm., the width from .30 to .45 mm. The
gonangium is flattened at the top during its growth, 1)ut at maturity
the top is smoothly rounded, and firmly chitinous; there is no
special border, and only by close inspection can a line be detected
at which the convex top ultimately separates. They are about 1.35
— 1.60 mm. in length, and .75 — .90 in width.

Tlie hydranths. which I have seen only in Von Lendenfeld's speci-
mens, are very characteristic, and quite unlike those of Orthopyxis,
the lx)dy having on one side a large rounded inflation, which is
situated just inside the lower lip. In all the hydranths, as pre-
served, the body was bent over the higher lip, and in close contact
with it t(i tlie edge; on the opposite side is the lateral inflation,
which, when fully expanded, fills in tlie space above the lower lip;,
it is sometimes i-etracted to small dimensions, but more often ex-
panded sufficiently to be a conspicuous feature. Hilgendorf de-
scribes a similar lobe in liis U (jyanthed a^iftnmefricd, but mentions
that it is divided by a sharp constriction from the l)ody, a charac-
ter which I have not detected in my specimens. Hartlaub clearly
indicates the lateral inflation in his figures of Eiicopella reticulata.

The base of the hydranth is flattened; one edge of it fits into a
notch or sinuation half-way down the inside of the hydrotheca,
below the higher lip, the other rests on the lower side, opposite tO'
it.

The distal portion foi'ms a wide infundibuliform expansion or
calyx, composed (at least, in regard to its outer layei) of the united
proximal portions of the tentacles, and iiordcied l)y a thick, annu-
lar l)and, which is attached by its iniu'r margin to the edge of the
calyx; outside this circle of attachment tiie tentacles are free. The
aniiulus is evidently the homologue of tlu" hypostome of Orthopyxis,
but it is nairower and situated furtliei- fiom tin" centre, and the
fact that it is constant in position in all the hydranths conveys
the impression that it lias not tlie mobility of tin- liypostomes of
Orfltopyxh, which assume all sorts of varied di-grees of expansion
and contraction. Occasionally in a sli(U' of Ortiiopyxls is seen a
hydrotheca, with tlie tentacles recurved, and the hypostome ei-

Aiistralldii Hijih-ohls. 87

PjukUhI t(. its utmost limit, and siic-Ii a one presents a strong re-
semblance to the specimens before us. Possibly the treatment to-
which tliev have been submitted may liave caused them to become
fixed in an unusually widely expanded attitude, and may in part
account for the eliaracteristic form. I have, however, some speci-
mens of a New Zealand species, in which the condition is similar,
and Hartlaub's ligui-e of Eucopella reticulata gives a distinct indi-
cation of the annular band. An allied species, described by Mulder
and Trebilcock as Eucopella undulata (Geelong Naturalist, May,
1914), also appears to have the same structiire. ^

Unfortunately, the specimens, probably from the action of a
reagent, are excessively dark and opaque, so that I was unable to-
ascertain tlie structure satisfactorily, especially the condition of the
oral i-egion. In some cases there seemed to be a dome-like eleva-
tion in the middle of the calyx, in others it was not apparent. The
annulus lies flat, and tlie tentacles spring horizontally from below
it. and are mostly recurved. In one or two cases they were curled
inwards over the annulus, which was not at all retracted. As in
manv ("ampanularians a biserial arrangement of the tentacles is.
indicated by their occasional alternate elevation and depression.

The gonothecae are, as Hartlaub says of those of Exicopella
reticulata, " ham-shaped," rounded at the top when mature, and
without distinct operculum. In Von Lendenfeld's specimens some
of them contained the gonophores, which were so blackened that
theii' structure could not be made out. One of my Bondi speci-
mens included gonophores in various stages, some of the gonothecae
V)eing closely packed with the developing ova. In most cases there
were two gonophores. The perisarc of the gonotheca is thicker
towards the base, often excessively so. Hartlaub describes the gono-
theca of E. reticulata as passing into the peduncle gradually, and
without distinct constriction or interruption. While none of my
specimens quite agree with this, some of them are but slightly con-
tiacted at the base; in others, however, the contraction is extremely
abriipt. I cannot attach much importance to this character, as the
specimens vary greatly in regard to it; moreover, the position in
which the gonothecae are viewed has much to do with their apparent
foi'm. as they are commonly more or less bent at the base, and de-
cumbent.

1 In both the species referred to the lateral inflation of the h.vdranth is evident, as also is the
position of the upper portion, that is, leaninj; over the upper lip of the h.vdrotheca, and Mulder
and Trebilcock say that is the custoinar.v attitude durinj,' life. In all the species the iLfreatest diameter
is across the annular band. y

S8 W. M. Bale .-

The form from Bondi, figured by me in tlie Proceedings of the
Linnean Society of New South Wales for 1S88 (pi. 13, figs. 9-11),
corresponds pretty closely with Von Lendenfeld's specimens in size
and habit, but differs in the very regularly convex outline <<i the
hydrothecae, recalling, in the shorter ones, Allman's //. hemi-
spherica. The base of the gonotheca is mostly broadly rounded, l)ut
sometimes narrows more gradually into the peduncle. This form
may be provisionally distinguished as var. roiunda, but I think
it quite probable that the characteristic outline of the hydrothecae
may be an inconstant feature; if so, the specimens cannot be dis-
sociated from the type.

The other Bondi form (Proc. Lin. Soc. N.S.W., 1888, pi. 13, figs.
12-15), is of more lobust habit, with larger hydrothecae, and stouter
peduncles. The hydrorhiza is about as wide as that of the type,
but with the internal channel wider. Its lateral branches, uK^st of
which are exactly at right angles, are excessively numerous. The
hydrothecae may attain the length of about .(JO nun., and their
lateral contours, as .seen in the broader aspect, are somewhat con-
cave, so that the lips appear slightly everted. The internal sinua-
tion, in which the foot of the hydranth rests, is not very deep. The
outside is characteristically marked, with irregular raised veins,
giving it a woody appearance. It may be distinguished as var.
veno>^a.

Eucopella reticulata Hartlaub differs from my specimens mainly
in the gonangia, which are attenuated more aradually into the
peduncles, and in the size of the hydrothecae, which reach ovei- .75
mm. in lengtli, while those of .S'. aiinpauular'Ki i-arely reach .50
mm., and the average is about .40. Hartlaub's discription of the
hydrorhiza as wide-meshcd scarcely applies to tliat of the present
species.

The forms liei'e described, wliile agi'eeing closely with sonit' othei"
species in regard to rlie ti'o])hosonie, may readilv lir distinguished
l)y tlie gonothecae. Wlu'tlu'r the thicc Austvalian forms art- jn'o-
perly i-eferred to a single species is perhaps ((ncstionable, and lui--
ther investigation must decide;- Imt undoubtedly rach of tlifin ex-
hibits occasional resemblances to the otlicrs, as in tli</ size :\.un form
oi the hydrotliecae, the pi-esence of veining. and other rhaiactrrs.
The thick pciisarc of the hydrothecae seems to vaiy greatly in
density, and it is probable that much of the difference between those
of var. rotunda and var. rt'iiosa (the two cxtrein<'s) may be siinjdy
due to vai'ving degrees of contraction of the perisarc, caused by the

AiistroU,,,,, Hildronls. 89

.foiiilitioiis of liTuwth. And witli ri'<rai(l i«> A', nt tcuhttn , tin- ihai-
acttM-s ascrihed to it seeni hardly suttiiiciit to justify its sprritic-
separation.

Hil<iL'ndorf says that the specimens tiaurcd liy \\\v as E. cam /xnni-
laria aic //. hUdhidia (Coutihtrey). Of tliis I am v^ry doul)ff\d.
The goiiano-iii of //. hihiliiafd , airoi'din^' to l)oth ('ou<ihtrry and
Hilgeiidorf. art' very iinliki' those of the present form. Hilgendorf "s
account of //. hildhUitu is not in aeeord witli his figui'e, especially
as regards the jieduneles. His specific diagnosis is a copy of All-
man's description of //. atiyrfi/dto, including tlie measurement (\
inch), but Pie gives the height afterwards as A inch, which agrees
with Coughtrey's. The present species does not, I think, reach
more than half that height, and I suspect that //. hildhiatd may
be identical with the Xew Zealand form previously leferred to.
w^hich has the hydrothecae and hydranths nuich larger than those
of 'S'. catnpanularia, and agrees well with Coughtrey's figure.
Neither Coughtrey noi- Hilgeiidorf give any indication of the size

• of the hydrothecae in their specimens. The former, it is true, says
that his figures are magnified fifty times, but there is clearly some
mistake, as it is obvious to anyone acquainted with some of the
species figured that the magnification is not nearly fifty; in s(jme

• cases, indeed, it is not twenty.

SiLICtJLARIA UNDULATA (Muld(M- and Tiefiileock).

Eucnpella nnihdafd, Mulder and Trebilcock. (jeelong Natura-
list (2) vi., 1914, p. 10, pi. ii., tigs. 5-7.
This appears to be a different species from .S'. cainpanularia. be-
ing distinguished by the peduncles and the gonothecae. The
former are thin-walled and undulated, as in most of the spLries of
Orthopyxiif. though often becoming thicker and smooth at l)oth
extremities. According to the figures the base is not conti'acted at
the junction with the hydrorhiza, as in S. campan uhiria. The
gonothecae are decumbent, i-oughly orbicular in outline. Hat be-
neath, convex above, with faint, transverse iviuae. and with a snb-

• circular aperture, looking upward. The hydiotheeae are similar
to those of .S'. campatntlana.

A figure of the hydranth shows it leaning over the higher lip of
the hydrotheca, which is stated to be its position when living; the
inflation of the opposite side is noticeable, and the oral calyx and
the annulus are also shown. As the latter is described as a large
. cup-sliaped proboscis, it would seem that its cliaracter is more dis-

90 W M. Bale:

tinct than in the niouiitetl specimens of .S'. camptimdaria. The
tentacles are longer than tlmse of that species, a difference also
perhaps dependent on the condition of the specimens.

ZVGOPHYLAX RUFA Bale.

Campanularia rufa, Bale, Cat. Aust. Hyd. Zooph., 1884,
p. 54. pi. 1, tig. 1 ; Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.,
xxiii., 1887, p. 91.

" Campanidaria '^ rufa, Levinsen, Vidensk. Medd.. fra den
naturh. Foren, 64, 1913, p. 292.
This species was ranked by Billard as a synonym of Lictorella
antipathes (Lamarck), but erroneously, as I gather from the same
observer's remarks in his report on the Bi-itish Museum collection,
in which he says that L. antipathes does not exhibit the slight
distal narrowing of the hydrotheca, nor the everted margin, both
of which features characterise the present species (as mentioned in
the original description). It may also be noted that L. antipathes is
described as a coarse, woody, and rigid form, reaching according
to Lamarck and Allman about four inches, and according to Bil-
lard fourteen centimetres, while Ritchie says that some of the
specimens of which he obtained portions must have much exceeded
these dimensions. Z. rufa, so far as it is known, is a small, deli-
cate form, under an inch in height, with the fasciculation limited
to a few tutes on the stem only. The original Lafo'ea halecioides
of Allman (187.'3) seems to resemble Z. rufa more than does L.
antipathes, but it differs in the absence of a perisarcal diaphragm
in the hydrotheca. The nearest species to Z. rufa would seem to be
Lictorella. concinna Ritchie (Mem. Aust. Mus. iv., p. 823), which
is of similar habit, but its hydrothecae differ in form, especially
in the much elongated stalk-like condition of the proximal part,
whieh is below the diaphragm.

The pinnae of Z. rufa are sub-alternate; between every two on
the same side are two hydrothecae, one of them axillary. The
apophyses are distinct, and mostly about double the diameter of
the hydrotheca at the point of attachment. There is usually no-
intervening segment, though in exceptional cases such a segment
may occur. The portion of the hydrotheca lielow the diaphragm
or " floor " is short, genei'ally about one-sixth of the whole length.
In a few cases the apo]>hyses wliich support the axillary hydrothecae
are narrowed down gradually to the diameter of the hydrotheca-
base, and not divided fi-om the latter by a distinct joint.

Australian Hydro Ids. 91'

Tlie pieseiK'L' on soiiir of {\\v a])o]>liyses of a sarc-othera, or a pair
of tlieiii. was not iiiciil ioiied in tlie original description, having
Iteen overlooked by nie. an omission wliich is accounted for by the
fact that they are only present in a small jd'opoi'tion of cases, and
that rliey are so small as to he readily passed over, especially
as they are mostly below the axillary apophyses, where they are
more apt to be obscured. In fact, I could only find three or four
on the pinnae. In a few other instances marks were visible where
they had been detached, but for the most part even these were want-
ing. These little calycles are not unlike the hydrothecae in shape,,
but not narrowed at all towards the end.

Thyroscyphus mauginatus Bale.

Campanidaria marginafa. Bale, Cat. Aust. Hydr. Zooph.,.

1884, p. 54, pi. 1, fig. 2; Proc. Lin. Soc. N.S.W. (2),.

iii., 1888, p. 758. Bartlett, Geelong Nat., (2) iii., 1907,

p. 62, fig. — .
" Camijaindnrla '^ niarginata, Levinsen, Vidensk. Medd.

fra den naturh. Foren, 64, 1913, p. 289.
This species, which on account of its possessing hydrothecae with'
a four-valved operculum, I now refer to the genus Thyroscyi^hus,
is nevertheless of peculiar hal)it, differing from that of the otlier
known members of the genus. In its simplest form it consists of
a single hydrotheca, J)orne on a peduncle two or three times its own
length, which may have, near tlie base, a few irregularly-placed
joints; it therefore differs little in habit from such species as
Orthopyxis calicidata. But most commonly this structure is re-
peated two or three times, and in each case the new peduncle is
given off kterally from the preceding one, immediately below the-
summit of the latter, on which the hydrotheca is borne. The distal
end of the peduncle is usually a little curved, and the next peduncle
springs from the outer side of the curve. The curves do not usually
alternate; frecjuently two or thi-ee in succession are directed to
the same side. Occasionally two new peduncles spring side by side
from the preceding one.

In the original description I mentioned that I had only seen the
operculum in a fragmentary condition, and so delicate is its nature
that I have not, up to the present, seen a perfect one. However,
I have specimens sufficiently well preserved to show that the oper-
culum is of the type which characterises the genus Thyroscyphns.
In some instances all trace of the opeiculum had disappeared, al-
though the hvdranths still survived.

92 W. M. Bale:

Levinseii leiuarks that the sub-marginal V>and is douljtless due to
a regeneration; tlie fact, however, that it is always present, and is
constant in its position, seems in itself sufficient to negative that
view. It is. like the marginal liand. a thickened ridge surround-
ing the hydrotheca internally, and it not iinconnnonly corresponds
to a slight external constriction. It varies in the extent to which
it is thickened. Ijeing sometimes feebly developed, especially in the
newly-formed hydrothecae; and in any case, it is somewhat less
robust than the border-thickening, at least in the vicinity of the fotir
marginal points. The marginal band is at least as strongly ma)-kcd
at these points as elsewhere, the secondary band does not usually
form pionounced points like the marginal one, but is more bluntly
rounded at those positions.

The hydrotheca is without a fully-developed diaphragm. l)ut there
is an internal perisarcal ring just above the base. Higher up there
is a zone of thinly scattered bright points.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Pl-\te XT.

Fig. 1. — Orthopyxis caliciilata (Hincks).

Fig. '1. — Orthopyxis macrogona (Von Lendenfeld).

Fig. "5. — Orfhopy.rh plat ycnrpo . n. sp.

Fig. -i. — Orthopyxis a/n/alafa. n. sp.

Fig. 5. — Orthopyxis WiJxoni, n. sp.

(All magnified -id diameters).

Plate XII.

Fig. 1. — Orthopyxis caliculata (Hincks).

Fig. 2. — Orthopyxis macrogona (Von Lendenfeld).

Fig. 3. — OrfTiopyxis plafycarpa, n. .sp.

Fig. 4. — Orthopyxis angulata, n. sp.

Fig. 5. — OrtJiopyxis Wilsoni, n. sp.

(All magnified 20 diameters).

Vvnr. U.S. Victoria, 1911, Plate XI.

I'ruc. U.S. Victoiiii, 1914. Plate XII.

Pnx-. K.S. Victoria, 1914. I'hitc XIII.

Australian Ut/droith. 9J5-

Platk XIIT.

FiL^ 1. — SilicAilaria campditularia (Von Leiidenfeld). typi-.

Fiir- 2. — Sil/'riihrrtfr cti in jxt iiiilaria (Von Lendent't'ld ). var.
v( iiottd. \\. var.

Fi^v .'5. — SiJiciihirid c(iiii pdinilarid (Von Lendt'iit'eld), var.
rot inula, n. var.

(All ni.-iLTuitit'd 40 diameters).

Fi<r. 4. — Siliriilarin rani pan iilaria (Von Lendeiifeld i. var.
venosa, n. var.

Fip:. 5. — Siliriilaria cam pan nJaria (Von Lendenfeld ). type.

Fi^r. 6. — Silicvlaria campanularia (Von Lendenfeld), var..
rotunda, n. var.

(All magnified 20 diHineters)'.

[Pboc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Part I., 1914].

Ar'I'. VIII. — Oji some New Species of Victorian Marine
Molki.sca.

J. H. GATLTFF

AND

C. J. GABRIEL.

(With Plates XIV., XV., XVI.).

[Read 9th July, 1914].

This paper contains descriptions of five neAv species of univalves
-and two new species of bivalves.

EULIMA VICTORIAK, Sp. nov. (PI. XIV^ Fig. 1).

Shell small, thin, rather attenuated, subcylindrical. opaque-
white, with a glossy surface. Whorls seven, commencing with a
large, blunt, dome-shaped apex ; the whorls are flatly convex, and
of fairly regular increase. Suture scarcely discernible. Aperture
ovate, pointed above. Labrum regularly curved, thin, and very
prominent about the centre. The labium resolves itself into a
rather broadly reverted lip.

Dimensions of fype. — Length, 2.1; breadth, .6 mm.

Locality. — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory.

Observation. — The specific differentiation of this genus is one of
the most difficult to study, requiring patient investigation ; how-
ever, the cylindrical form and dome-shaped apex serve to dis-
tinguish the present shell from its Victorian congenors. The nearest
approach is perhaps E. fricata Hedley from Tasman Sea. Rec.
Aust. Mus. vi.. 1907, p. 2!)0. pi. Iv.. fig. 14.

Type in Mr. C. J. Gabriel's collection.

Lriostraca kilcundae, sp. nov. (Pi. XTV., Figs. 2 and 3).

Shell minute, light-brown colour, smooth, shining, sufficiently
"transpai'eiit to view the axial-pillar. It is tipped with a distinctly
rounded doTue-sliaped apex. Following this are five flatly convex

Vietorldir Marine M,>lluHca. 95

whoils, itartcd by u liiu'ur suture. The colouratidii of the wlioils
is fairly uniforiu. w ith no indication of markings as in the previous
species. The shell is hhu li lounded anteriorly. Aperture pyriforrn.
Labruin thin, .simple. Lal)iaui moderately thick on the Vjody.

Dhnr/is/o/is of ti/pc. — Len<ith, 1.75; breadth, G mm.

LovaUfi/. — Kileunda, in shell sand.

Ohservntion. — This is the smallest of our Victorian species, and
is immediately separable by its squat form, dome-shaped apex, and
uniform colouration. Its nearest ally is L. joshuana, GatlifF and
Gabriel, which is here refigured for comparison.

Type in Mr. C. J. Gabriel's collection.

Lkiostraca STYLiFORMis, sp. uov. (PI. XIV., Figs. 4 and 5).

Shell minute, acuminate, smooth, glassy. Whorls nine, through
Avhich the axial pillar may be plainly seen. Whorls ai'e slightly
•convex; suture fairly distinct in consecpience of the slight rounding
of the whorls. Tlie generic characteristic is indicated in the later
whorls by fairly distinct, but irregular orange-tinted markings,
more numerous and more pronounced on the body-whorl. Aperture
somewhat pyriform, outer-lip thin and roundly prominent at the
periphery. Inner lip slightly reflected.

Dimensions of type. — Length, 2.5; breadth, 8 mm.

Locality. — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory.

Observation. — A most delicate and curious little shell; its distinct
acuminate form .serving to distinguish from the Victorian members
of the genus.

Type in Mr. C. J. Gabriel's collection.

■Cyclostrema kilcundak, sp. nov. (PI. XV., Figs. 8, 9 and 10).

Shell very minute, white, hyaline, of four whorls including the
smooth globular protoconch. Discoidal, spire sunken, widely um-
bilicated. Ornamented with transverse riblets, aboiit twenty-seven
•on the body-whorl, they are irregularly spaced, becoming more
•crowded towards the mouth, the intervening spaces are traversed by
very fine encircling incised lines. Mouth circulai-.

Dimensions of ^5//?e.— Height, '\>h : diametei-, 1 mm.

Locality. — In shell sand, Kilcunda.

Observation. — Type in Mr. J. H. Gatliff's collection.

GdJlif and Gahrid

Cyclostrkma vkrcoi, sp. nov. (PI. XV., Figs. 11, 12 and 13).

Slifll veiv iriiiiutu. wliite, opaque, of foui- whorl's including the
l)iiitoc(incli. Dise-oidal. widely umbilicated, spire sunken. Whorls
erosst'<l l)_v riljlets. a])out seventeen on the last whorl, the inter-
vening spaces are smooth with the exception of a median spiral
thread on the base. Mouth circular.

Diiiu iisioiiH of ti/pf. — Height, .27; diameter, .75 mm.

Lncdhti/. — Dredged oft' Wilson's Promontory.

()J,s,rr(itlon.—'Yyi)ii in Mr. J. H. Gatlift"s collection.

Myodora subalbida, sp. nov. (PI. XV., Fig. 14).

Shell white, ol)long, obliquely truncated posteriorly, rounded
autLTit.rly, concentrically ridged, ridges somewhat rounded, re-
gularly spaced; about fourteen in number. Umbos central, acute.
Tlie Aviiole shell is covered l)y very fine radial striae, under the
mici-dscope this sculpture is divided into closely compacted
elongate, flattened, hexagonal areas, angularly defined posteriorly,
see figures 15 and 16. Right valve convex, with an angle e.xtending
from the umbos to the margin, and defining the truncated area. Left
valve similar to the right valve, but rather deeper. Pearly inside.

Dimen.^ions of f ;i pc . — Length antero-posterior, 10. ; undjo-ven-
tral, 5.5 mm.

Locnlifij. — Dredged in aljout seven fathoms. Western Port.

Oh.^ervotio)! . — Resend)ling M. a/bida, T. Woods, with which
species M. corrugata, Verco, is conspecific. Dr. Verco has kindly
compared our shell with his type and confirms our opinion that it
is distinct from oui- new species.

Type in Mr. J. H. Gatlift"s collection.

DosiNiA viCTORiAE, sp. uov. (PI. XVf, Flgs. 17, 18 and 19).

Shell cream-coloured, i-atlier Iwittle, inaequilatei'al, the anterior
side being the shorter. Unibods fairly prominent, slightly in-
curved, and situated at about one-tliird of the whole length from
the anterior. The concentric sculpture resolves itself into about 65
excessively thin erect lamellae, the interstices of which are micro-
scopically striate. The interstices are further sculpturd by fine
ol)solescent radial riblets which are not seen to ascend the lamellae,
and are a little less froiiucnt than the minute striae. Lunular area

Victoriaii Mivr'ive MoUiisca. 97

of a brown isli tiiii^e. eloiigately-eordit'oriii, medially elevated, and
ornamented with imhricating lamellae. The ligament is sunken,
narroAv. and long. Hinge area normal. The pallial sinus is broad,
well defined and oblicjuely ascending to about the centre of the
valve. The surface of the shell has four sub-equally spaced rays
of brown, arrow-sliaped markings. Further colouration may be
seen on the post-dorsal margin in four conspicuous brown macula-
tions.

Dimensions of fypt- — Length, 36; breadth, 34; sectional of
closed valves, 16 mm.

Localitjf. — W/estern Port, 5-10 fathorjis type taken alive;
dredged off Portsea, Port Phillip.

Observation. — Under the name of D. variegata, Gray, this species
was recorded from Victoria by Pritchard and Gatliff, P.R.S., Vic,
xvi. (new series), 1903, p. 133. Careful investigation and much
correspondence leads us to the conviction that this is manifestly a
wrongful identification; and, further, that the shell is an un-
descriljed species. /). variegata is extremely variable; this vari-
ability with the figures and remarks by Reeve, Conch., Icon. vi.
pi. 6, fig. 33a, and Sowerby Thes. Conch. II., pt. 13, p. 675, No.
72, pi. U4, fig. 83, excusably leading Pritchard and Gatliff to
regard the Victorian sliell as another of its forms. Close
study, however, has revealed cliaracters, suificiently consistent to
warrant our separating it as a distinct species. From D. varie-
gata, the shell may be readily distinguished by its flatness (al-
though in this respect showing slight variation), by its more
elongated lunule and in the character of the radial sculpture.
Another misapplied name is D. histrio ((jimel), var., an appellation
recognised in South Australia. From typical D. histrio it is quite
distinct as depicted in the well-executed figures, by Romer. Mono-
granh Dosinia, p. 33, pi. vi. figs. 2. 3.

The "Challenger" Report Laniell. p. 152, records D. Jiistrio
(Gmel). var. from Cape York, Flinders Passage, and Arafura Sea,
E. A. Smith, in his observations, remarking : " This species has
received several names from various authors. It is the Venus
anstraJAs of Quoy and Gaimard, the Artemis variegata of Reeve,
Artemis firafa and 1 pnticidaris of Sowerby, and perhaps the Artemis
scabra of Philippi. The specimens from station 187 (near Cape
York) and Flinders Passage resemble the variety Artemis lirata."
Reference to Sowerby's figure of Artemis lirata Thes. Conch., pi.
cxliv., fig. 85, clearly shows that our shell has been misunderstood
in S. Australia. D. deshayesi, A. Ad., as figured in " Challenger "

s

98 Gadif and Gabriel: Marine Mollusca.

Report Laniell. pi. 1. figs. 1 — le.. the type of which is in the
British Mus. of Nat. Hist., is soniewiiat siuiihir. We deemed it
advisable to have a comparative examination of our new species
with it, and forwarded specimens to Mr. G. B. Sowerhy, who re-
plied as follows, 8-1-1 i: — "I examined type of Dosinia deshayesi ;
I can understand some of your small ones j^assing for the young
of it, but is certainly a distinct sjaecies; its form is different, and
it is iiattei-; the ligamentary area is much narrower, and the
character of the concentric lamellae different. It is also certainly
distinct fiom D. histrio, which runs into t^nrieriafa. I think you
may safely describe it as a new species." Further confusion has
been added to the puzzle since one of us i-eceived from a South
AuvStralian correspondent a St. Vincent Gulf left valve under the
name of D. brazieri ; the author was not given, and diligent seai'ch
through literature failed to reveal any description under such
name : we conclude, therefore, that D. hrazieri is manuscript.

A medium-sized specimen has been selected for the type. The
series studied, ranging from 8 mm. to 45 mm. (paratype), exhibit-
ing some slight variation in contour. The colour rays in some
specimens are very clearly defined, while in others almost absent.

We have here to express our many thanks to Mr. F. Chapman
for his excellent illustrations of the species.

Type and paratype in Mr. C. J. Gabriel's collection.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Platk XIV.
Fig. 1. — Eulima victoriae, sp. nov.
Figs. 2 and 3. — Leiostraca kilcundae, sp. nov.
Pigs. 4 and 5. — Leiosti-aca styliformis, sp. nov.
Figs. 6 and T. — Leiostraca joshuana, Gatliff and Gabriel.

Plate XV.

Figs. 8, 9 and 10. — Cyclostreraa kilcundae, s]). nov.
Figs. 11, 12 and 13. — Gyclostrema vercoi, sp. nov.
Fig. 14. — Myodora subalbida, sp. nov.

Fig. 15 and 16. — Myodora subalbida, sculpture magnified.
All of the al)ove figures are variously magnified.

Platk XVI.

Figs. 17 and 18. — Dosinia victoria?, sp. nov.
Fig. 19.— Dosinia victoriie, paratype.

Figures natural size.

Proc. E.S. Victoria, I'.U t. Plate XIV.

Proc. K.S. Victoria, 1914. Plate XV.

Pioc. U.S. Vift..ri:i, 1914. Plate XVI.

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Part 1., 1914].

Akt. IX. — Additions to the Catalogue of the Marine Shells
of Victoria.

BY

J. H. GATLIFF

AND

C. J. GABRIEL.

[Eead July 9th, 1914].

In this paper we have added 21 more species to the catalogue,
including two neAv genera, namely, Cithna and Foramelina. and
the total number catalogued now reaches 1052.

We have continued to use the generic names previously adopted,
as, although alterations have been made and suggested by various
writers, we defer making changes until a pronouncement has been
anade by recognised authority as to the validity of the alterations.

Argobuccinum retiolum, Hedley.

1914. Argobuccinum retiolum, Hedley. Zool., Common-
Avealth trawler " Endeavoui," vol. ii., part 2,
p. 73, pi. 11, f. 5.
//o6.— Trawled in 100-250 fathoms, south from Gabo Island.
Observation. — Size of type: Length, 130; breadth, 60 mm. This
•species very closely resembles A. oregonensis, Redfield. which is
found in Alert Bay, British Columbia.

VoLUTA MAGNiFiCA, Chemnitz.

1795. Voluta magnifica, Chemnitz. Conch. Cab., vol. xi.,
p. 8, pi. 174-175, f. 1693-1694.

1840. Voluta magnifica, Chemnitz. Swainson, Malacology,

pp. 105 and 317.

1841. Voluta magnifica, Chemnitz. Kuster Conch. Cab.,

p. 154, pi. 23 and 24.
1844. Voluta magnifica, Chemnitz. Sowerby, Thes. Conch.,

vol. i., p. 200, pi. 54, f. 103.
1849. Voluta magnifica, Chemnitz. Reeve, Conch. Icon.,

vol. vi., pi. 1, f. 2.

8a

100 Gatlif and Gabriel :

1853. C'ymbiola inagnitica. Chemnitz. H. and A. Adams-

Genera, vol. i., p 163.
1855. Scapha magnifica, Chemnitz. Gray, Brit. Miis. List,.

part i., p. 10.
1859. — Voluta (Cymbiohi) magnitica. Chemnitz. Chenu..

Man. Conch., vol. i., p. 188. f. 959.
1867. — Voluta (Scapha) magnifica, Chemnitz. Angas,.

P.Z.S., Lon.. p. 193.

1871. Voluta (Aulica) magnifica, Chemnitz. Crosse, Jour.-

de Condi., vol. xix.. 3rd series, p. 284.

1872. Voluta (Scapha) magnifica, Cliemnitz. Cox, Distri-

bution of Australasian Volutes, p. 8.

1903. Voluta magnifica, Chemnitz. Hedley, Mem. Aust..
Mus., vol. iv., p. 371.

1914.— Scaphella magnifica, Chemnitz. Hedley, Zool. Com-
monwealth trawler " Endeavour," vol. ii., p. 2,.
p. 72.
Hah. — Trawled in 100-250 fathoms, south from Gabo Island.

MARCilNELLA SCHOUTANICA, May.

1912. Marginalia schoutanica, May. P.R.S., Tas., p. 45,.
pi. 2, f. 2.
Hab. — In about 40 fathoms, ofi Ninety Mile Beach.
Observation. — Size of type : Length, 4. ; breadth, 2.5 mm. " From
M. -pygmapAi., Sowb., it differs in being narrower with the plications
reaching much higher on the pillar."

SCALA PLATYPLEURA, VerCO.

1906. Scala platypleura, Verco, T.R.S., S.A., vol. xxx.,
p. 145, pi. 4, f. 6.
Eab. — Western Port.

Observation. — Size of type: Length, 5.; width, 2.3 mm. "It
differs from S. jukesiana, Forbes, in the more rapid increase of
its whorls, its fewer and much more solid varices, which also run
forward and doAvnwards instead of backward."

EuLiMA viCTOR[AK, Gatliflf and Gabriel.

1914. Eulima victoriae, Gatliff and Gabriel. Antea page.
Hab. — Dredged oft' Wilson's Promontory.

Additi.O)iK to CatiUogue of Shells. 101

ILEIOSTRACA KILCUNDAE, Gatlift' Hiid Gabriel.

1914. Leiostraca kilcundae, Gatliff and Gabriel. Antea
page 94.
Hab. — In shell sand, Kikunda.

Leiostraca stylifokmis, Gatliff and Gabriel.

1914. Leiostraca styliformis, Gatliff and Gabriel. Antea
page 95.
Hab. — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory.

Stylifer auricula, Hedley.

1907. Stilifer auricula, Hedley. P.L.S., N.S.W., vol.
xxxii., p. 505, pi. 18, f. 36.
Hab. — Ocean beach. Point Nepean.
Observation. — Size of type: Height, 2.15; breadth, 1.65 mm.

Genus Cithna, A. Adams, 1863.
•CiTHNA ANGULATA, Hedley.

1907. Cithna angulata, Hedley. Rec. Austr. Mus., vol.

vi., p. 291, pi. 55, f. 16.
1912. Cithna angulata, Hedley. May, P.R.S., Tas., p. 42.
Hab. — Dredged off Wilson's. Promontory.
Observation. — Size of type: Length, 2.9; breadth, 1.85 mm.

-Cyclostrema KILCUNDAE, Gatliff and Gabriel.

1914. Cyclostrema kilcundae, Gatliff and Gabriel. Antea
page 95.
Hab. — In shell sand, Kikunda.

'Cyclostrema vercoi, Gatliff and Gabriel.

1914. Cyclostrema vercoi, Gatliff and Gabriel. Antea page 96.
Hab. — Dredged off Wilson's Promontory.

RiSSOA PERTRANSLUCIDA, May.

1912. Rissoa pertranslucida. May, P.R.S., Tas., p. 48,
pi. 2. f. 8.
Hab. — Kilcunda.

Observation. — Size of type: Length, 2.; breadth, 1.5 mm. A
■conoid, white, smooth, transparent shell. Our specimens are rather
smaller.

102 Gatlif (thd Gabriel :

KissoA (Amphithalamus) eruatica, May.

1912. Ainpliithalainus erratica. May. Id., f. 7.

Hah. — Di-edged off Wilson's Promontory.

Observation. — Size of type: Length, 2.; breadth. 1.3 mm. Shell'
elongately pyramidal, or wedge-shaped, white, trlassv, and hyaline.

Phasianotrochus rutilus, a. Adam.s.

1851. Elenchus rutilus, A. Adams. P.Z.S., Lond., p. 171.

1889. Cantharidus rutilus, A. Adams. Tryon, Man..

Conch., vol. xi., p. 136, pi. 34, f. 8.

Hah. — Western Port.

Observation. — This species has been locally united by collectors
with P. irisodontes, Q. and G., but it is of a broader form. The
dimensions of the type are: Height, 17; breadth, 10.5 mm.

EUCHELUS VIXUMBILICATUS, Tate.

1893. Euchelus vix-umbilicatus, Tate. T.R.S., S.A., vol.

xvii., pp. 196 and 201, pi. 1. f. 4.

Hab. — Dredged off Phillip Island, Western Port, about 7 fathoms.

Observation. — Size of type: Height, 5.5; basal diameters, 5.5

and 5 mm. " Shell similar to E. scahriusculus, but relatively

broader, and the whorls more convex."

LucAPlNELLA CRUCis, Beddonie.

1883. Fissurella crucis. Beddome. P.R.S., Tas., for 1882,
p. 169.

1890. Glyphis crucis. Beddome. Tryon, Man. Conch., vol.

xii., p. 293.
1901. Fissurella (Lucapinella) crucis, Beddome. Tate and
May, P.L.S., N.S.W., vol. xxvi.. p. 408, f. 11, in.
text.
Hah.— Vovtsea, Port Phillip.

Observation. — Size of type: Length, 9; latitude, 5; altitude, 2'
mm. Tate and May place this as a synonym of M. niyrita,
Sowerby, a species that it strongly resembles, but it may be dis-
tinguished therefrom by its much finer sculpture, the undulating
outline of the outer edge, and it is usually marked by "two red
lines on the back forming a cross." We therefore consider it
worthy of rank as a species.

M. nigrita, was well known to Mi-. Beddonie. We have an ex-
tensive series from other States, and have no difTiculty in separating
it from M. crucis.

AJ,nfnnis In ('afa.l(>;/ar o/ S/>f4ls. 105

AcANTIlOCliriKS HLBUOSI'liATlS, T(»rr.

■ 1912. Aeanthoc'liites rubrostrntus. Ton-. T.R.S , S.A.,voL
xxxvi., p. IGi), pi. 7. f. 7, ii-f.
}ia/>. — Dredged 5 fathoms Liiiieburners Cliaimel, iieai' Sofrento,
Port Phillip.

Ohfttrvatioii . — Size of type: Dried specimen, length 11; breadth,
6 mm. Our identification has been confirmed by the author; the
specimen was obtained on a tunicate; when alive it has a swollen
girdle like A. speciosiis, A. Adams.

CORBULA PIXIDATA, Tate.

1887. Corbula pixida'ta, Tate. T.U.S., S.A., vol. ix., for

1885-G, p. 177, pi. 17, f. 12a, 12b.
181)6. Corbtda compressa, Verco. Id., vol. xx., p. 230, pi.
8, f. 2, 2a, 2b.
Nnh. — In about 40 fathoms, off Ninety Mile Beach.
Ohserration.- — We wrote to Dr. Verco about the validity of his
species, and he replied : "I have examined type and co-types of
C. pixidaf.n, Tate. They are identical with my C compressa, show-
ing slight variations in validity of concentric sculpture, and in
transverse diameter.''

The type is a fossil obtained " in the Turritella clays at Blanche
Point, Aldinga," South Australia.

DosiNIA VICTORIAN, (jJatlifF and Gabriel.

1914. Dosinia victoriae, UatlifT and Gabriel. Antea page 96.
Hah. — Dredged in Port Phillip and Western Port.

Myodora subalbida, GatlifF and Gabriel.

1914. Myodora subalbida, Gatliff and Gabriel. Antea page 96.
Hah. — Dredged in a])out seven fathoms, Western Port.

Gknus Foramelina, Hedley, 1914.
Foramkliva exempla, Hedley.

1914. — Foramelina exempla, Hedley Zool., Commonwealth
trawler "Endeavour," vol. ii., part 2, p. 71.
pi. 11-12. f. 6-8.
Hah. — Trawled in 100-250 fathoms, south from Gabo Island.
Ohserratio/i. — Size (.f type: Height. 120; length, 130 mm. A
shell somewhat resembling an oyster, with a lateral notch, perforat-
ing the right valve at the umbo.

[Pboc. Eoy. Soc. VicTOKiA, 27 (N.S.). Pt. L, 1914].

Ah'I'. X. — Victorian Grwptolltes, Part IV.; Some Neiv or
Little-Knoivn Species.

By T. S. HALL, M.A., D.Sc.
(Lecturer in Biology, in the University of Melbourne).

(With Plates XVII. and XVIII).

[Eead July 9th, 1914].

The present paper contains the descriptions of some new species,
as well as of some that it seems advisable of re-figure. Most of
the specimens are from my own collection, others were collected by
the officers of the Department of Mines at localities on which I
have reported. Two fine specimens are the property of the National
Museum, Melbourne, and others were found by Mr. T. S. Hart, at
Daylesford.

DiDYMOGRAPTUS KXTENSUS J. Hall. (PI XVIL Fig. 1).

For synonymy see S. L. Tornquist, Lunds Univ., Arsskrift, Bd.
37 (1901), Afd. 2, No. 5, p. 14; Elles and Wood, Mon. Brit. Grap.
Pt. 1 (1902), p. 8; Ruedemann. Giap. N. York, Pt. 1 (1904),
p. 668.

The following description is drawn up from examples from Burn's
Reef, Ghewton : —

Branches diverging at 180°, so that even from the beginning
they are in the same straight line. Width over first theca 0.5 mm. ;
at 3 cm. L5 nun., the increase in width being gradual and con-
tinuous. Thecae 10 in 1 cm., inclined at 35° to 40o. Apertural
angle 100° to llOo. The gradual increase in the width of the
branches, and their lying in one straight line, aie very charac-
teristic of this species.

Horizon. — Castlemainian.

DlDYMO(iRAPTUS HKRDITUS, 11. sp. (PI. XVIL, Fig. 2).

Branches diverging directly at 180^, somewhat lax, and perhaps
somewhat reclined. Width at fir.st theca 1 niiii.. at 4 cm. 1.3 nun.
Thecae 7 or 8 in 1 cm., incline*! at about 'M)^. l)roadly expand-
ing, so that the denticles arc boldly salient. Apertui-al mai-gin

Vlcturlan (JraptoUh's. 105

.at 1150. Sicula narrow, curved, 2 111111. li)ii<j;-. The branches are
given off near its apex, so that its pointed base projects beyond the
line of the thecal denticles, jj^iving the hydrosome a very charac-
teristic appearance in this region. Tlie small number of thecae
.and the salient denticles are also peculiai-.

Locality/. — Daphne Reef, Lost (iully. Chewton.

Horizon. — Highest zone of Bendigonian.

DiDYiMofJKAPTUs GRACILIS Tomquist. (Pi. XVIT., Fig. 3).

Tornciui.st. Acta l^niv. Lund. vol. 26, 1890, pt. 2, No. 4,

p. 17, pi. 1, figs. 9-12.
Hall. Geol. Mag. 1899, p. 448.

Hydrosome slender, about 1.3 mm. long, and very narrow, with
ii very delicate virgula, which is traceable for about 0.7 mm.
Branches extending at I8OO, and apparently arising at very dif-
ferent levels from the sicula, the left side of which projects as an
acute tooth. The left brancli is given off from about its middle,
the right branch appears To arise at the level of the a})erture.
Dorsal edge of the branch covexly swollen opposite the middle of
.each theca. Thecae 7 in 1 cm. ; slender, outer edge .straight and
facing somewhat inwards, the two edges forming an acute denticle.
Breadth of branch about 0.3 mm. ; width of theca at aperture about
the same. The virgula, or nema, is visible in some specimens, but
not in the specimen figured.

The figured specimen is from Bendigo.

Horizon. — I'pper Bendigonian.

DiDYMOfiRAPTUS AUREUS n. sp. (Pi. XVIL, Fig. 4).

Hydrosome resembling D. eoctensu.^ in form. Branches given (jff
from the sicula at I8OO, straight, and scarcely increasing in width.
Width at first theca L2 mm., at 2 cm. it is 1.5. Tliecae 8 in
1 cm. almost straight-sided, inclined at 30°, apertural angle 12()0.
Sicula 2.2 mm. long, slender, the branches arising near its l)ase.
The species differs from J), crtensus in its more even with, and in
the number of thecae in a given length.

Zocrt/^^y.— Bendigo (T.S.H.); Bald Hill, Dromana (D. J.
Mahony).

Horizon. — Lower Bendigonian.

106 T. S. Hall:

DiDYIMOGRAPTUS LATENS n. Sp. (PI. XVII., Fig. 5).

IlyJnjsonie small. The branches curve towards one another
dorsally, and become horizontal about the region of the fourth
theca, the gentle curvature of the dorsal edge of the branch being
very characteristic. Sicula broad and stout, about 1.5 mm. long,
and slightly more across the aperture. Tliecae 10 in 1 cm., very
slightly expanding, i^^clined at 25°, ovei'lapping half their length.
Apertural edge normal to the thecal axis.

I have previously referred to this species as B. aff. decens
Tqt.' ; but the form of the sicula is different. It differs similarly from
D. suecicus, Tullb.

Locality. — The type is from Diamond Hill, Bendigo, about 200
yards east of State school.

Horizon. — Upper and Middle Bendigonian. It is common, and
apparently always small, at many localities.

DiDYMOfiKAPTUs PROCUMBENS n. sp. (PI. XVII. Figs. 6 and 7).

Branches arising at right angles to the sicula, and then almost
imperceptibly reflexed. Breadth at first theca 0.75 mm. ; at 1 cm.,
1.5 mm.; at 2 cm., 1.75 mm. Sicula 2 mm. long, 0.5 mm. broad,
its aperture almost hidden by the first thecae. Thecae narrow,
straight-sided, 8 in 1 cm., inclined at about 2()o near the sicula,
increasing to a little over 30o at 1.5 cm. Apertural margin from
lOOo to 120O.

In the Bendigo and Lower Castlemaine series the size of the
hydrosome never seems to be more than 1 cm. in length, whereas
in the slates of Victoria Gully, Castlemaine, just after the dis-
appearance of Fhyllograptus fj/pus, a form occurs, which I regard'
as this species, which reaches a length of 4 cm.

Locality/ of type. — Diamond Hill, Bendigo.

Horizon. — Bendigonian to Middle Castlemainian.

DlDYMOCRAPTIS ADAMANTINUS U. sp. (PI. XVII., Fig. 8).

liiiinches about 1.5 cm. huig, and lather slendei- ; widtli about
0.7 itim. near the proximal end, increasing to 1 nmi. at al)out 1 cm.
from origin. Branches diverging at 15()o to 160^, and almost
straight. Thecae 10 or 11 in 1 cm., slightly expanding, overlap-

1. Geol. Mas., 1SS!>-

Victorian Gi-a'ptol'ites. 107

ping about halt' llu'ir length; inclined at .'{OO, apL-ituial nuiigin at.
lOOO. Sicula I..") mm. long, slender; the tirst theea arising near
its apex.

The speeies is closely allied to J), nicholsoni. Lap., hut differs a.
good deal in the proportions of the proximal part.

Locdlif;/. — The type is from Diamond Hill, Bendigo.

//r;?-/:o/;.— Bendigonian.

DiDYMOCRAPTUS MUNDUS n. sp. (PI. XVII., Fig. 9).

Branches diverging at 130o to 150^ from the sicula, and at ahout
the tenth theca. running nearly horizontally, and from tAvo to"
six cm. in length. Sicula rather narrow, about 1.5 mm. long.
Thecae 9 in 1 cm. near the sicula, and about 8 in 1 cm. distally,
broadly expanding, overlapping about one-half their length.
Apertural margin normal to the thecal axis, inclined at ISQo.
Outer extremity forming an acute denticle. Width of branch over
first theca 1 mm., and at 5 cm. from origin 1.7 mm. Details in.
sicular region not discernible in any of my specimens.

The species is closely allied to D. nitichis, and has generally
been referred to it. McCoy, Etheridge and myself have recorded'
D. nitidiis from various localities, but I now venture to think in-
correctly. 1 have changed my mind several times about it, but
have decided that a new name is advisable. D. mimdus differs
from D. nitidus in its slightly larger sicula, in the smaller number"
of thecae, and in their lower inclination. From D. euodus Lap
it difter.s in its greater width proximally, and smaller width dis-
tally. though it agrees with it in several other characters.

Locality. — It is widely distributed, and characteristic of the-
Upper Bendigonian, and Lower and Middle zones of the Castle-
mainian.

DiDYMOCiKAPTUS DILATANS n. sp. (PI. XVII., Fig. 10).

Branches 3 or 4 cm. long, rigid, straight, diverging at about
150O, gradually widening. Width over first theca 0.5 mm., and
at 25 mm. 1.0 mm. Sicula narrow, length about 1.3 mm. Thecae-
8 or 9 in 10 mm., inclined at about 20o, slightly expanding, over-
lapping one-third to half their length. Aperture normal to axis
of branch.

This species lias the habit of D. nicfiohoui . and 1). serratuhia,
but differs in the marked increase in width of the branches, and^

fj08 T. ^. Hall:

tlieii different angle of divergence. I have previously recorded it
as D. cf. tiifholsoiii . It is associated Avitli TctrtK/raptns pendens,
'Goniograptiis thureivni, etc.

Locrt/i^i/.— Daylesford (T. S. Hart, Loc. No. :}. 1908, Type),
J^endigo (Min. Dep., Nos. 4191, etc.).

Horizon . — l^ppcr Bendigonian.

DlDVMOGKAPTUS BIFIDU.S J. Hall. (PI. XVII., Fig. 11).

(rrdpfolithus hifidus J. Hall. Grap. Quebec Group, p. 73,

pi. 1. fig. 16-18. pi. 3. fig. 9, 10.
Did t/niotivapfus hifidu-s Elles and Wood. Mon. Brit. Grap.,

1901, p. 42, pi. 4, f. la-lf.
Didymofirapfits hifidiii^ Ruedenianii. (xrap. N. York. pt.
1, p. 689.
Branches of hydrosome 10 to .30 mm. long, slightly increasing
in width for the greater part of their length. Dorsal margin of
branch straight, thecal margin curved. Branches diverging usually
-at from 20° to 30o, but the angle sometimes greater in a small
variety. Thecae 11 or 12 in 1 cm., inclined at from 30^ to 50^,
four times as long as wide, free for nearly half their length. Aper-
tural margin normal to the axis of the branch, concave, with a
slightly mucronate denticle.

The description is drawn up from Victorian specimens. 1 have
previously recorded D. nn/rrhisoni from Basin Creek, (V)imadai,
but am of opinion that the single specimen on which the iec<»-d was
founded is D. hifidus, and that I have not seen D. miirrliiaoni .

Locality. — Wattle Gully, etc., Castlemaine, Basin Crick. Coi-
inadai, Tarilta, Daylesford (T. S. Hart), Steiglitz, Bendigo.

Horizon. — Confined to the lowest zone of the Castlemainiaii and
uppermost zone of the Bendigonian.

T)idvmo<;haptus caduceus var. manubkiatus var. nov. (PI. XVII.,
Figs, 12, 13).

Diffeis from the typical form by the immense size of the sicula,
whieli at tlie point of sei)aration of tlic l)raiiches is as wide as the
braiicii itself. Tliccae 10 in 1 cm. Blanches diverging at 1-300 to
14(lo. and varying from 2 to 3 mm. in width. Tliei'c is consider-
•abU- linigc ill the widtli of the branehes. ainl tlie angle of diver-
-geiiee. bul the great size of the sicula is reinarkahle. Tlie variety
iis citniinon at tlie recorded localities.

Victorian Graj^tolifes. 109'

l.ocaliti/. — -(^tuari'v in hard l>lue slate, one mile west of school on
road from Woodend to Macedon ; in similar rock Steiglitz District
(Min. Dept.).

Associates. — Goniof/rapfKs spp., 0/icor/rapfiis npsiloii, D .
caducens (large typical variety), I), forcijyiformis, etc.

Horizon. — Castlemainian.

Oncogkaptus n. gen.

Hydrosome at first biserial, but later dividing into two uniserial
branches. Thecae long, 'narrow and slightly curved.

The form of the genus is quite different from that of any other
graptolite. The form of the thecae and tlie great width of the
branches seem to remove it from the Dicranograptidae.

As regards its origin it may be pointed out that it resembles
D. caduceus in the form of its thecae. Concrescence of the branches
of this species for a certain distance would produce a somewhat
similar form. The thecae of the uniserial part appear to be
opposite, and not alternate, but though I have had a very large
number of specimens before me, none show the details of structure
very clearly, and I have waited in vain for a long time for better
material.

Oncograptus upsilon, n, sp. (Pi. XVII., Fig. 14).

Uniserial portion about 12 mm. long. Breadth at level of
bifurcation 10 or 12 mm. Width of uniserial branch about 6 mm.
Length of branch 10 mm. These are the dimensions of the type.
but the measurements vary a good deal in other specimens. The
whole polypary has the form of an aiiowliead.

Thecae 9 in 1 cm. Near the proximal end of the hydrosome
they are at right angles to the axis, and probably at the proximal
end itself have turned through an angle of 90°, and are in a line
with the axis of the undivided portion. At the distal end of the
uniserial branches they are inclined at about 30o. The apertures
are trumpet shaped, and a long recurved denticle is present. The
sicula has not been seen. The axil seems united by a membrane.

0. upsilon is the type of the genus.

Locality. — Frederick the Great Mine, Sebastian (Type). Quarries
north and west of Gisborne; Steiglitz; Castlemaine (Harri.s) ;
Yapeen (Ba. 90, Quartersheet 15 N.E.), in National Museum, pro-
bably collected by Ulrich in 1864; Ingliston (quarry near 42,i mile
viaduct on railway. A. E. Kitson). •

Horizon. — Castlemainian, but exact position uncertain.

.'110

T. S. Hall

GONIOGKAPTUS MACER T. S. Hall. (PI. XVII., Fig. 15).
(Geo/ Mag., i8gg, p. 449, ^figs. g, 10).

" Hydrosoine slender. Primary branches about 1 nun. in length,
;and forming an angle of 180° with each other. Secondary branches
diverging at about 90° from each other, and then bending in a
zig-zag manner at intervals of about 1.5 nun., and giving off ter-
tiary branches from the salient angle. Tertiary branches from
two to four in number. After giving off the final tertiary branches
.the secondary branches, as well as the tertiaries, may reach a
length of 30 to -40 mm., and are fairly rigid. Sicula about 1 mm.
in length, slender, and very slowly tapering. Thecae 8 or 9 in
10 mm., overlapping by half their length. Apertural margin
slightly concave, forming an angle of about IIQO with the axis of
the branch. Outer margin inclined at about 25° to the axis of the
branch, gently curving towards the distal extremity."

Horizon. — Rare in the Upper Bendigonian series, common in the
lower zones of the Castlemainian.

There is a fine slab in the collecticm of the Mining Department
(No. 9587), from Bendigo (71 Bo.), which shows about twenty
examples of the species. I give a new figure of the type.

GoNiOfjRAPTUS sPECiosus n. sp. (PI. XVIIL, and Text Fig. 1).
Hydrosome, when complete about 35 cm. in diameter, since the
distance from the sicular position to the extremity of the final
branch given off is 17.5 cm. United length of the primary branches
(" funicle "") is 3 mm. Length of longest branch measured (a
final branch) is 14.5 cm. The number of tei-tiary branches in the

Thecae ■< 7.

Victorian Graptolitc^. ) 1 1

type averages 6 uii each side of tin' t'dur see()ii<l:ii-v Iji'aiuhes. or
about 48 in all. Width of branch to tip (jf denticle •> nun. Thecae
8 or 9 in 10 nun., inclined at 40° to 50o. Apertural margin at
130O. Thecae slightly cnrved, and expanded with a somewhat
mucronate dt'nticle, and overlapping about one-half their length.
The inner end of the outer wall reaches as far Ijack as the denticle
■of the next theca but one. The type specimen is in the National
Museum. Melbourne, and is perhaps the most beautiful graptolite
known, though in point of size it is sui-passed by a few other
species, especially of ('lonor/rapf us.

Locdlitj/. — Slate-quarry about <S miles S.W. of Woodend. I
have a less perfect specimen from the same locality. A fragment
of the same species was collected at an unknown locality at Bendigo.

Horizon. — Castlemainian, but exact position uncertain. On the
same slab as the type occur Goniograptus fhureaui, Bidyniorirapt kk
■caduceus, D. caduceus var. manuhriatus, Phi/llograj}tns cf. fijpKS,
■Oncograptus upsiloti, and apparently a Trignnograptus, etc.

The type was found by Mr. Neil Johnson, and presented to the
National Museum in 1889.

GoNiOfiRAPTOS CRiNiTUS n. sp. (Text Figs. 2 and 3).

This species is doubtfully referred to Goniograpfus as a com-
plete hydrosome is unknown. The specimens found are usually
in the form of stout branches, which are bent in a zig-zag, the
angular bending being more pronounced towards the proxinuil
•end. At times two or three branches are associated, as in the
figured specimen. The angles of the zig-zag are from two to four
mm. apart, and from the salient angles are given off fine, theca-
bearing branches, which are unbranched, and fairly rigid. These
may be 100 mm. long or more. The main branches are about 0.75
mm. in diameter, and do not appear to be theca -bearing. The
finest branches are about 0.5 mm. in diameter, measured across
the aperture of the theca. The thecae are raiely preserved, and
when not visible the branch is about 0.25 mm. wide, and about
as rigid as a liorsehair. The thecae number 11 in 10 mm., and are
straight-sided, inclined at about 10°, aperture normal to their
length. At first sight this species might be mistaken for a T/iam-
nograptus, and I formerly recorded it as such. The ultimate
branches are. however, theca-bearing, and are much shorter than
those figured by James Hall. Thamnogropfus does not occur in
the Bendigonian or Castlemainian series.

] !-J

T. S. Hall

Prj.d

G. crinitus, thecae x 7.

G. crinitus

As stated above, I am not sure that tlie reference to Goniograptus
is correct, l)ut I hesitate to form a new genus for its reception, till
a complete hydrosome is found. The form of the thecae is much
more primitive than that of the typical species of Goriiograpfiis.

Horizon. — Upper Bendigonian and Lower Castlemainian, but
commoner in the loriner.

Vietoriitii Graptolites.

\\?^

GoMOGUAPTUs LAXUs II. sji. (Text Fig. 4).

Hydi'osuine slender. In the type two branches only are pre-
served, and these are in the one straight line, and reach a length of
35 mm. Ultimate branches arising at a distance of 2 mm. apart,^
and mav be more than 25 mm. long. No thecae are visible.

G laxus X 1.

The species differs from G. thureaui in the more slender and lax
habit of the ultimate branches. (Coll. Min. Dept., No. 8360.) The
counterpart No. 8358 has been preserved.

Locality of type. — Bendigo (M.D. 38 Bo. Near Garden Gully
Mine).

Honzoti. — Bendigonian Upper zones.

TKTRAfiRAPTUS HARTI n. sp. (Text Figs. 5, 6).

Hydrosome slender and rigid, with the habit of T. quadri-
hrachiafus. Sicula unknown. Primary branches in same straight
line. Secondary branches given off after first theca of primary
branch, diverging at about OQO. slender, fairly rigid. Width of
secondary branch to tip of denticle at 2 mm. from origin, 0.5
mm.; at 35 mm. it is 1 mm. Thecae 8 in 1 cm., narrow, very
slightly expanding, inclined at 15^ to axis of branch. Aperture
norma to axis of theca. Overlap slightly over one-third.

T. harti, type, x 1.

T. harti, cotype, x l.

114 T. S. HiOJ:

Lorr///7//.— Beudigo (M. Dep. 79 Bo.. No. 9750, Type); Davles-
ford, Junction of Jim Crow and Spring Ci-eeks, T. S. Hart ; Dayles-
ford. Min. Dep., No. 12.820.

lIor/:o/t. — Hiijrhest Bendig^onian.

TKTIlAaHAPTllS VVrnTKLAWl H. .sp. (PI. XVII., Fig. ]G).

Hydrosome slender. Primary branches at 180°, dividing at the
fifth theca. Length of branch, about 4.5 mm. Secondaries diverg-
ing at 90°, faii-ly rigid. Width of Itranclies nearly 0.5 mm. Sicula
long and narrow, length 1 mm., ])readth 0.2 mm. Thecae 10 in
1 cm., indenting the branch about half its width, inclined at 15^,
very slightly expanding. Apertui'e normal to the axis of the theca.

The great length of the " funicle,'' slightly over 1 cm., and the
slender nature of the branches are well marked cliaracters.

Locality. — Bendigo, Sheepshea*! Line (7!) lio. ), Mining De})art-
ment. No. 9756 Type. Counterpart, No. 9701. Associated with
T. serra, ( = T. amii), Go?)i(/rapf'i/s laxux, Didf/ntof/rapfns cac/vceus.

Horizon . — Upper Bendigonian.

MONOURAPTUS APLINI n. sp, (PI. XV II., Fig. 17).

Very minute, curved towards the ventral side. The most com-
plete specimens from an open U-shaped figure. Thecae 18-20 in
10 mm. ; apparently coiled in a rounded mass and i^pening later-
ally. Sicula about 1 ram. long and narrow.

This is tlie commonest graptolite in the beds just below the
Keilor bridge. The section was discovered by Aplin in 1854. and
was the first known graptolite locality in Australia. Unfortunately,
the fauna is in a very bad state of preservation, or sixty years
would not have elapsed before any species were described from the
locality.

M. aplini is closely allied to M. exigaits, Nicholson, and .1/.
nodifer, Tornquist, but its minute size separates it from them.

Locality. — Keilor, Aplin 's section.

Horizon. — Silurian, Melbournian.

MoNOGKAPTUs TUKRICULATUS Baiiande. (PI. XVII. , l^'igs. 18, 19).

The conical spiral foi'm. and the produced aperturjvl angle of
this species are unmistakable. The only two specimens I liave seen
are on the same slab, and are those figured. The specimens are

Victorian Graptolites. 115

in the geological collection of the University of Melbourne, and
are in a very imperfect state of preservation.
Horizon. — Silurian, Melbournian.

MoNOGRAPTUS PRIODON Bronn. (PI. XVII., Fig. 20).

Hydrosome straight, rigid, nearly 2.5 mm. wide. Thecae 9 in
10 nun., sigmoidally curved and tapering to the aperture. The
■distal third lient back to form a strong hook like portion. Overlap
about two-thirds.

The description is drawn up from a fragment, the only one I
have seen. It is in relief, but merely as a cast. The matrix is a
whitish, fine-grained micaceous sandstone.

Locality. — Macclesfield.

Horizon. — Probably Melbournian.

Triaenograptus neglectus n. g. et n. sp. (Text Fig. 7).

Hydrosome probably circular in outline, and slightly concave
near the middle, as in some species of Dictyonema. Branches
radiating from the centre. These branches give off a pair of lateral
branches, one on each side of the main branch. The three branches
thus formed produce a trident-like structure, which suggests the
generic name. The laterals from one branch usually unite with
corresponding laterals given off at the same level l)y a neighbour-
ing branch, and then run on as a new single branch. This' in its
turn gives off lateral branches, which behave in the same way.
Diameter of the type. -^5 cm. Width of branches, 1.5 mm. Inter-
spaces or fenestrae, two or three times as long as wide. Thecae, 5
•or 6 in 10 mm., only outer and apertural margins visible. Tliey
•appear to be straight-sided, and indent the branch for a fifth of
its diameter, and appear to be inclined at about 20o, but are so
imperfectly shown, that I do not attempt to figure them.

The symmetrical method of branching is peculiar, and unlike
tliat of any other graptolite known to me. Though apparently
allied to THcfyonema, it seems worthy of generic rank.

The present specimen was found stored away in the National
Museum, and the only record of its finding is contained in a news-
paper cutting pasted on it. This states that a fossil, presumably
the present one, was found in the Paving Company's Quarry,
Barker's Creek. This can only refer, I think, to a long-deserted
•quarry on the right bank of the creek, nearly opposite the late

116

T. S. Hall:

f'S-1

T. neglectus x ^.

Major Ryland's house, and just below the Chinamen's Gardens..
In my examination of this quarry many years ago, the only
graptolites I found were Tetragraptus serra, Dichor/raptus octo-
hrachiatus and Didf/mograpfus caduceus (large variety). From'
the character of tlie last-named species, I should judge the horizon
to be well up in the Castleniaine series, and the geographical posi-

Victorian Gruptolites. 117

tion ut' the (luairy would support this vieAv. The only other
graptolite un the present slab besides Triaemograptus is a very
indistinct example of apparently Didymograptus extensus.

Locality. — Barker's Creek Slate Quarry, North Castlemaine.
Mr. W. J. Harris has found a couple of examples in badly cleaved
slate from about the middle of the Castlemaine series, and to the
south of the town. I have a few fragments, which long puzzled me
from similar horizons in the same district, which I am now able to
recognise as this species.

Horizon. — Middle and Upper Castlemaine series, but exact posi-
tion not vet definitelv known.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Plate XVIL

Fig. L — Didymograptus extensus J. Hall. Burn's Reef, Castle-
maine.

Fig. 2. — Didymograptus perditus n.sp. Daphne Reef, Lost Gully
Chewton. (Type.)

Fig. 3. — Didymograptus gracilis Tornquist. Bendigo.

Fig. 4. — Didymograptus aureus n.sp. Bendigo. (Type.)

Fig. 5. — Didymograptus latens n.sp. Diamond Hill, Bendigo.
(Type.)

Fig. 6. — Didymograptus procumhetis n.sp. Diamond Hill, Ben-
digo. (Type.)

Fig. 7. — Didymograptus procumhens n.sp. Diamond Hill, Ben-
digo. (Co-type.)

Fig. 8. — Didymograptvs admanantivus n.sp. Diamond Hill, Ben-
digo. (Type.)

Fig. 9. — Didymograptus mitndus n.sp. Bendigo. (Type.)

Fig. 10. — Didymograptus dilatans n.sp. Daylesford (Sailors'
Creek). T. S. Hart. (Type.)

Fig. U.— Didymograptus hifidus J. Hall. Wattle Gully, Castle-
maine.

Fig. 12. — Didymograptus caduceus var. mauuhriatus var. nov.
West of Macedon. (Type.)

Fig. 13. — Didymograptus caduceus var. manuhriatus var. nov.
Macphers^pn's Creek, Steiglitz District. (Co-type.)

Fig. 14. — Oncograptus upsilon n. gen. et n.sp. Frederick the Great
Mine, Sebastian. (Type.)

118 T. S. Hall: Victorian Graptoiitei^.

Fig. 15. — GouiograjJtux inaciv T. S. Hall. (Type retigurecl.)

Fig. 16. — TetragrapfiiK irhifelawi n.sp. Bendigo, Sheepshead

line. (Type.)
Fig. 17. — Monofirapf tix a pli n i n.sp. Keilor (Aplin's section).

(Type.) X :].
Fig. 18. — Monugnipfii-'i fNrriciiIatii.< Barrande. Keilor (Aplin's-

section).
Fig. 11). — MoNograptvK fur-ricidatuit Barrande. Keilor (Aplin's

section).
Fig. 20. — Moiiocfrcrptus priodoii Br-onn. Macclesfield.

[Note. — All the figures on this plate are x H. except fig. 17,.
which is X 3.)

Plate XVITI.
Gonigraptit9 speciosits n.sp. West of Macedon. (Type.)-

LIST OF INSET BLOCKS.

Fig. 1. — Goniograptus speciosus n.sp. Thecae x 7.
Fig. 2. — Goniograptus crinitus n.sp. x 1.
Fig. 3. — Goniograptus crinitus n.sp. Thecae x 7.
Fig. 4. — Goniograptus laxus n.sp. x 1.
Fig. 5. — Tetragraptus harti n.sp. x t.
Fig. Q. — Tetragiaptus harti n.sp. x 1.

Fig. 7. — Triaenograptus neglectus n.gen. et n.sp. x i. (Traced fromi
a photograph.)

Proc. E.S. Victoria, 1914. Plate XVII.

Proc. U.S. Victoria, 19U. Plate XVIII.

[Pkoc. Roy. Sor. Victoria, 27 (N.S.). ^''Vht I., I914.J.

Art XI. — The Pctrolixjn II ml Mini III) Geoloi/i/ of the Country
near Qiireiisfoivn.

Bx NORMAN H. JUNNER, B.Sc.

(Wyselaskie Scholar in Geoloc^.y, University of Melbourne, 1913; 1851 Scholar
in Geology, Imperial OoUeye of Science, London S.W., 1914).

(With Plate XIX).

[Head 9th July, 1914. j

Contents.

1. Introduction and Previous Literature.

2. General Geoloj^y : —

(a) Silurian sediments.

(b) Quartz diorite, Yow Yow.

(c) Alteration of the diorite.

(d) Quartz porphyry, One Tree Hill.

3. The Caledonia Gobi Field :—

(a) History and production.

(b) One Tree Hill.

(c) Panton Hills (Oram's Reef).

(d) Yow Vow.

(e) Alluvial.

(f ) Future possibilities, secondary enrichment, etc.

4. Summary and Conclusions.

1. — Introduction and Previous Literature.

The following contribution is descriptive of certain features in
the geology of portion of the Parish of Queenstown. Unfortunately,
the field-work was not completed, owing to the transference of the
writer to England, and as a result no geological map of the area
has l)een prepared liy him. Tlie cliief purpose of the paper is to
present the results of a study of the chemical and petrological fea-
tures and metasomatic alteration of an hitherto undescribed in-
trusion of (juartz diorite near Queenstown. Furtlier, attention is
drawn to the former richness and future possibilities of an almost
forgotten goldfield. Previous references to the geology of this area
are scant, and are of no great importance. The following papers

120 N. R. Junner:

dealing with the area are chiefly concerned with the mining geohjgy,
and general mining features, and very little space in them is
devoted to purely geological questions.

(1) 1855-56. A. R. C. Selwyn.— " Repoit on the Geological

Structure of the Colony of Victoria, the Basin of the
Yarra, etc." Votes and Proc. Leg. Council, Victoria,
vol. ii., pt. 1.

(2) 1889. J. Stirling.—" Report on the Mining and Pros-

pecting Operations in the Gippsland and Castlemaine
Districts." Appendix H, Quart. Reports of the Mining
Surveyors and Registrars of Victoria.

(3) 1894. R. A. ¥. Murray. — " Report on the Auriferous

Country in the Neighbourhood of Queenstown." Prog.

Rep. Vict. Geol. Surv.. No. viii., pp. 67, 68.
<4) 1894. D. B. Walker.—" j^^port ..n Neglected Gold-

iields." Spec. Rep. Dep. Mines, Victoria.
<5) 1895. J. Stirling ct 0. A. L. Whitelaw.— " Reports on

Rapid Surveys of the Goldfields. Pa)'ishes of Wanan-

dyte, Nillumbik, Greensborough, and Queenstown (with

Map)." Spec. Rep. Mines Dept., Victoria.
(6) 1899. H. S. Whitelaw. — " Antimony Ores in Victoria."

Prog. Rep. Vict. Geol. Surv., No. X.

2.— General Geology.

A. — Silurian Sediiuents.

These are the northern extension of the same folded sei-ies of
sandstones, shales, and gritty beds that occur near Warrandyte and
Diamond Creek, and with the exception of the igneous rocks near
Yow Yow and One Tree Hill, they cover the whole of the area
described in this paper. The strike of these beds is consistently
east of north, varying from north IQO east to north 5()o east. As
in the sediments of the country to the south near Wai-randyte and
Diamond Creek, fossils are relatively .scarce, and the only ones
found by the present writer were two specimens of Chonetes allied
to Chonetes melbournensis, wliich latter form is restricted to the
Melbournian division of the Silurian. These fossils were discovered
in black, sandy, occasionally gritty shales from the nmllock-tip
of a shaft on the Victoria line of reef. One Tree Hill. Selwyn has
recorded fossils similar to those occurring in the gritty beds near
Warrandyte, from Watson's Creek about six miles north of War ran-

Pcti-ologi/ aiul Grohx/;/ of QurcnsfAnrit Didrlct.

121

■dyte. None of tliesr fmiiis linve been dt'scril)e«l. and tlierefore they
ai^ord no c-hie To tlic pi-ocise aire of these beds. In t}n« absence,
tlien'fnre. of nioic detailed palaeontolo^ncal work in this area,
nothinf; definite ean l)e said at j. resent respecting the age of these
sediments.

On stratigraphical grounds, in the assumed absence of major
fauhing and inversion, the relative stiatigraphical position of the
beds near QueenstoAvn can be fairly well gauged from sections
afforded by two traverses, one along the creek road from Hurst's
Bridge to Queenstown. and the other along the road from Kangaroo
•Grounds through Christmas Hills to Yarra Glen. Considering in
• detail the first section, the beds near Hurst's Bridge show consider-
able lithological similarity to those at Diamond Creek, and, further,
the Templestowe anticline, which is so marked a feature of Diamond
Creek, is seen in a i-ailway (.utting immediately south of the
Hurst's Bridge railway station. Traversing eastwards from
Hurst's Bridge, the strata dip consistently east, at an average
.angle of about 450, uiitil about a mile and a quarter beyond Cottle's
Bridge. 1 where the BuUeen syncline crosses the road section. This
fold, at this point, is not the important feature that it is to the
south near Research and the Yarra River.- The strata near the
axis of the fold are much steeper than they are further south, and
soon give place to east-dipping beds with an anticline between.
This anticline is the northerly continuation of a fold, not named,
but shown on a map accompanying the author's report on the Dia-
mand Creek area.' Continuing east, the beds appear to dip east
until close to Queenstown township, where a westerly dip is pre-
sent. It is evident, from this section, that the strata near Queens-
.town are stratigraphically much superior to the beds of the Temple-
:stowe anticline near Hurst's Bridge.

The Warrandyte anticline, devoid of its minor folds, crosses
Watson's Creek at a point near to where the creek changes from a
X.E.-S.W. course to one nearly east and Avest. The fold con-
tinues in a north-easterly direction to One Tree Hill, where the
structure is anticlinal, and the beds are lithologically similar to
those of Warrandyte. Sections along the road from Kangaroo
'(4ii)und to Yarra Glen show that the predominant dip is an easterly

1 Vide, Parish plans of (;reensl>oroiij;li and l^ueenstow n for this and other local
■r'mu: ill tliis paper.

2 Vide, J. T. Jutson, "The Structure and General Geology of the Warrandyte Goldfield and
adjacent Country." Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xxiii. (n.s.), pt. ii., p. 523, 1910.

3 Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. wv. (n.s.), pt. ii., 1912

122 . AL R. J tinner:

one. after cro.ssiii|JC the Warruudyte antieline, and that tlie strata:
of this fold are ^tratigraphically much inferior to the Yeringian:
beds near Yarra Glen. A general interpretation of the structure,
therefore, indicates that the beds near Queenstown are superior to>
those of the Templestowe anticline, which have been shown by the
author in a previous papei- to l)c pi'obably Melbournian or oldei' in
age,i and to be inferior to the Yeringian strata occuring to the
east of this area. Recapitulating, the age of these beds near
Queenstown may l)e regarded tentatively, in the absence of furtlier
palaeontological evidence, as either Melbournian or Yeringian ;
possibly both series are present in the area described.

B. — QiKtrt: Diorife, Yoir Yoir.

On tile sjMir sepai-ating Salter's (tuUv from Yow Yow Gully, and
about one and a-half miles east fi-om Queenstown, a rather tough
bluish-coloured, holocrystallinc )-ock, composed chiefly of hornblende
and felspai-, is seen to outcrop. About the surface, scattered, ex-
foliated boulders are present in places, but more frequently, and
especially near the noithevn and southern limits of this rock, it is
decomposed to a lirownish coloured granular mass. The depth of
surface decomposition varies, extending in places to over 150 feet.

The intrusion is roughly elliptical in plan and the walls, wliere
examination was possible, appeared to conform approximately in
strike and dip with the surrounding sti-ata. On the surface, the
sediments in juxtai>ositioii with the intrusion exhibit very little
alteiiiton, and, in fact, the sediments near Queenstcnvn township
and Yow Yow Gully away from the intrusion, ai'e much more
indurated. Aeconlim: to the District Mining Surveyor,'- ;i tunnel
driven in 1S60 fi-om Salter's Gully, passed through a band of
hard altered sandstone, rcsendiling basalt, l)efoi-e reaching the
diorite. Tliis points undoubtedly to hoi'nfels. l)ut apparently the
occurrence of this lock in proximity to the dioiite. is exceptional.
In its a])proximate conformity Avith the strata, alisence of marked
contact alteration, petrological and chemical charactei'istics. and
associated auiifcrous (piart/, veins, the intrusion is very closely
allied to the so-calle.l " dyke bulges " of the Wood's Point district.

CIk iinviil h'chifioHx. — A chemical analysis of a tyj)ical specimen
of the diorite fioiii the Caledonia Mine, Yow Vow, was made by

1 0)>. cit. p. S17.

•J \'i(k-, .Milling Sniv t-v ors' Hi-ports, ISIiO.

Fetrolo;/;/ and (leoUxjii of (Jveci.^toU'H J)isfricf. 123'

the writer at tlir Iniprrial ('(.lU-s;e of Seieme. London. For (uii--
poses of comparison. t\v(. vury similar analyses of ofher Victorian
diorites are appended.

II. III.

49.65 52.03

16.7a 23.57

0.31 1.60

8.99 6.90'

5.88 5.39

7.87 7.80

0.80 1.34

3.10 2.31

2.50 1.2?

0.14 0.26.
1.08
0.04
0.14

2.81 n.dt
n.det>.
NiO tr.

100.04. 99.60.
2.91 2.855

A me ricaii Classifiaitivn.

Maguiatic Name Bandose tfes.sose Hessose

near Hessose

I. Quartz Diorite, Caledonia Mine, Queenstown. Analyst, N. R„
Junner.

II. Quartz Diorite, Morning Star Dyke, Wood's Rnnt. Analyst,.
N. R. Junner.

III. Quartz Diorite, Dargo. A. W. Howitt.^

The chemical analysis of the Queenstown rock confirms its micro-
scopical determination as a quartz diorite. The marked excess of
soda over potash, and the relatively high percentage of lime, finds
expression in the predominance of soda lime felspais over jjotasb
felspars. The high percentages of water and cail)on dioxide are
due to the presence of chlorite and calcite. and do not signify that
the rock has suffered weathering, as these minei-als are regarded as-
being formed immediately after the consolidation of the rock_

1 Vidr, Proc. Roy. Soc. Viotoii.a, 1SS7.

SiO.,

I.

52.53

A1.A

18.78

FeP,

1.52

Feb

6.60

MgO

3.02

CaO

7.21

K.,0

1.73

Na.,0

2.54

H.36 +

2 24

H.3O-

0.53

co.,

0.39

P.O,

0.32

MnO

0.14

TiO.,

2.16

s

n.det

(NiCo)O

str. tr

99.71.

Sp. Gr

. 2.81

J 24 ^V. M. Janner :

Further, in weathered roeks. ferric oxide always predominates ovei
-ferrous oxide, whilst in the Queenstown rock the reverse is the case.
Petrology. — All specimens examined (some of them from the
-Caledonia mine coming from greater depths than 200 feet) showed
considera])le alteration, resulting in the formation of such secon-
dary minerals as chlorite, epidote, sericite, carbonates, leucoxene,
-pyrrhotite, and iron pyrites. In hand-specimen, the rock is even-
grained, and consists of about equal quantities of salic and femic
minerals, chiefly hornblende and felspar. Quartz is not visible
macroscopically. Microscopically it is a holocrystalline, medium
and even-grained rock, consisting essentially of brown hornblende,
felspar (both orthoclase and plagioclase), quartz, ilmenite apatite,
and the above-mentioned secondary minerals.

The hornblende is the brown variety, which is so cliaiacteristic
'of the igneous rocks of the Walhalla, Wood's Point gold belt. In
most sections, little of it remains, as it has been extensively changed
to chlorite and epidote. It is usually hypidiomorphic and often
includes ilmenite and felspar, showing that it consolidated later
than these minerals. Tremolitic outgrowths in optical continuity
with the brown hornblende are occasionally present. Twinning,
-with twin and composition plane parallel to the orthopinacoid, is
not uncounnon. It is markedly pleochroic, exhibiting the following
■colour scheme : —

X light yellow brown.

Y fairly dark brown.

Z very dark brown.

and Z>Y>X as usual.

Plagioclase (Recurs as beautifully zoned crystals, sliowing the
usual albite twinning, and occasionally twinned accoiding to the
("arlsbad and Pericline laws. Certain sections of zoned plagioclase
show no signs of the albite lamellae, but exhiliit basal cleavage, and
are therefore cut approximately parallel to 010. One such section
gave an extinction angle of-16o from the 001 cleavage for the
central core, and -t- 21^ from the same cleavage fur tlie clear outer
zone, indicating a kernel of labradorite (Ab An ), and an outer
zone of albite. Almost invariably the refractive index of the clear
exterior zone of the felspar is less than that of (}uartz. jiroving it
to be albite. Symmetrical extinction angles, from the all)ite
lamellae, range as high as 430 for the cores, showing phigioclase
near Bytownite. A few phenocrysts of untwinned oi' sini])ly twinned
kaolinised felspai-, having a refractive index less than that of

Pf'troloc/f/ and Geologt/ of Queenstowii J)isfrirf. 125'

quartz, are ortliDe-lasf. Cukulating- the percentage of t'elspai's fi-oju
the clieniical analysis, aceorilin<j: to the xVnierican ntethod, we get
the following result : —

Orthoclase, 10.01%.

Albite, 21.48%.

Aiiorthite. :n.69%.

Quartz is interstitial, and oeeurs in irregular shaped, pellucid
grains characterised by fairly abundant Huid inclusions containing
bubbles, llnienite is farly common, and is present in skeletal and
malformed crystals, occasionally showing hexagonal outlines. It is-
associated frequently with its replacement product, leucoxene, and
the triangular parting is often rendered very evident by relict
ilmenite bars surrounded by leucoxene. Extraction of any magnetic
particles from the powdered rock by a weak l;>ar magnet, showed
that only an inappreciable amount of magnetite was present.

The accessory minerals include apatite, and zircon ; the latter
in chloritic areas is often surrounded by pleochroic haloes.

Of the secondary minerals, chlorite is the most abundant, and is
usually intimately .associated with hornblende and epidote. It is
undoubtedly secondary after hornblende in nearly all cases, and '.
occasionally idiomorphic outlines of the latter mineral are preserved'
in the chlorite pseudomorphs. The chlorite is of the variety pen-
nine, giving ultra blue polarisation colours. It is decidedly pleo-
chroic X — Y, apple green. Z. yellow, and is microspherulitic in
part. Slightly yellow coloured grains of epidote. referable to
pistacite. almost invariably accompany the chlorite derived from
the hornblende. Some of the epidote is present as radial aggregates.
Fibres of a colourless mineral, having a refractive index between
that of chlorite and epidote. and exhibiting very high polarisation
colours, are probably calcite. It appears the most of the mag-
nesia, and part of the iron of the original hornblende,, have gone
to form chlorite, and the lime and the other portion of the iron,
with some alumina and water, have yielded epidote. Carbonate
occurs generally in massive cleaved, and twinned plates, filling
interstices between the quartz and the felsj^ar. It does not occur
replacing these minerals or the hornblende to any marked extent.
Notew-orthy is the fact that it differs very markedly from the meta-
somatic granular and dusty carbonate so commonly developed in
these rocks, as a result of hydrothermal vein alteration. A little
sericite replaces plagioclase, especially along cleavage planes. In
all sections examined a little sulphide is present, shoAving marked

?126 lY. E. Junner:

preference for areas of ihnenite and undoubtedly replacing the
latter mineral in many cases. The sulphide is easily recognised as
pyrrhotite by its lighter colour than ordinary pyrites in reflected
light, and by its irregular outlines. It is proved without doubt
by extracting the magnetic minerals from the powdered rock, and
either examining the separated material under a microscope, or by
adding a little hydrochloric acid to the separated grains, when
stilphuretted hydrogen is readily detected. A very little iron
pyrit-is also accompanied the pyrrhotite thus separated. Pyrrhotite
chough present in practically all sections, is most common in peg-
matitic veins intersecting the diorite.

Acid Df/A-es in Diorite. — Numerous small aplitic and pegmatitic

•dykes intersect the diorite. The pegmatites, in general, consist
cliiefly of large hornblende prisms and colourless felspar, whilst
in the aplite dykes, hornblende is rare or absent, and microscopic
sections show that orthoclase predominates over plagioclase. Speci-
men No. 120, Caledonia Mine, is typical of these aplites. The hand
specimen of the rock is of a light yellowish colour. Abundant
stibnite and pyrites are visil)le, disseminated throughout the speci-
men. Microscopically, it is a fairly even-grained, holocrystalline
rock, with granitoid texture, and composed of the following
minerals : — Quartz, felspar, muscovite. iron and arsenical pyrites,
stibnite, carbonate and sericite. No femic minerals are present,
and quartz is in slight excess of the total felspar. Orthoclase,
generally untwinned and greatly kaolinised, preponderates over
plagioclase, which is also much weathered. Sections of plagioclase
occasionally show intersecting lamellar twinning according to the
albite and pericline laws. Zoning is rare, and in nearly all sec-
tions, the mean refractive index of the plagioclase, determined by
the Becke method, is less than that of quartz, indicating oligoclase

■ or albite. Maximum extinction angles of 2()0 from the all)ite twin
planes, prove albite. A few rectangular sections of muscovite with
the usual separated leucoxene or rutile. iei»iesent, without doubt.
hornblende or biotite in the original rock. Most of the mica, how-
ever, is of the sericitic type and occius in the usual aggregates of
foils, sometimes arranged i-adially and often leplacing felspar.
Veinlets of carbonate and quartz cai-rying stibnite. travei-se the
rock. Acicular crystals of stibnite, together with a little ordinary
and arsenical pyrites, also occur promiscuously distiilmted
throughout the section. Certain miscroscopic veins of quaitz, which
intersect plagioclase crystals, are seoi to grade insensilily into the

Peti'oUxjif tiiid <7<'(>lo<ji/ of (Jiweiisioirji D'uslrici . 127

piiiiiarv ((uartz <j:iaiiis of the I'ouk, and are tliei'el'ore also primary.

Conijiarisou of (Jueeiti^toini DIoiite iritlt the MortiiiKj Star Dior/tc,
U'liod'.-: I'oinf. — The eheiiiioal analyses of these rueks show elose
siniilai-ities. From the relative pereentage of the alkalies, we should
expect a greater j)i-opoi'tion of oi'thoelase in tlie Queenstown diorite
than in the Morning Star roek, and microscopieal investigation
•eonlirnis this I)elief. Tlie high percentage of water in both analyses
is expressed hy the relative abundance of chlorite after horn])lende.
The higher jiereentages of ferrous oxide and titanium dioxide in
tlie Moi-ning Star I'ock indicate relatively more hornblende and
ilmenite, than in the (^»ueenstown lock.

Mineralogieally tlie rocks closely reseml)le one another. Especially
• characteristic is the occurrence of brown hornblende in each of
them. Zoned felspars are not usually piesent in the Morning Star
■ dioi-ite. and epidote is uncommon. Micropegmatite, which is
•characteristic of the Wood's Point rock, is only present in i)etrma-
titic veins at Queen stown.

C. — Alterotion of fhf Diorite.

Three types of alteration are recognisable.

I. A regional propylitic alteration during, or immediately after,
the consolidation of the ]-ock, at relatively high temperature and
pressure, resulting in the formation of chlorite, epidote, leucoxene,
-carbonate, pyrrhotite, and a little sericite.

II. Hydrothermal alteration near the vein Avails at mucli lower
■temperature and pressure, resulting in extensive cpriVitisation and
■carbonation, and in the disappearance of the femic minerals,
hornblende, chlorite, and pyrrhotite^ and their replacement by
muscovite, carbonates, and pyrites.

III. Surface decomposition by present-day vadose solutions.
Kaolinisatiou is i-eferable to the action of these solutions.

I. On most mining fields where ore deposits occur in igneous
rocks, a regional propylitic alteration of the country rock can be
recognised in addition to the hydrothei^mal alteration near . the
veins, but differences of opinion exist as to the cause of this altera-
tion, Propylitisationi of the andesites at Tonopah, Nevada, has
been ascribed by Spurr2 to the vein-forming waters filtei-ing thi-ough

1 Propylitisation is here used in the sense defined by Vogt, " Genesis of Ore deposits," 1901, and
liindgren, "Mineral Deposits," p. 446, 1913, and not in the restricted sense of other writers.

2 Geolo<,'y of the Tonopah Mining District, Nevada, U.S.G.S., P.P., No. 42, 1905.

128 K B. Junner:

the rocks. According to Spurr, there are transitions between the-
propylitic and sericitic facies. According to Kirk,i the chloritic
and sericitic phases 'of the alteration of the Butte Granite merge-
into each other very gradually. Stelzner and Bergeat^ and Schu-
maclier^ consider the propylitisation of the Tertiary andesites of
TraUvSylvania to be independent of the vein solutions and much
earlier, and Finlayson^ comes to similar conclusions with respect tO'
the alteration of the andesites of the Hauraki goldfield.

The author's study of the auriferous diorites of the Wood's Point
gold belt, and also of the related rock from Queenstown, has con-
vinced him that the regional propylitic alteration undergone 1)y
these rocks is independent of the vein solutions and that the effects
of the latter are superimposed upon the propylitisation. The-
propylitic alteration is regional, and no relation appears to exist
between tlie amounts of chlorite, epidote and pyrrhotite, and the
proximity t(j a vein fissure. These minerals are just as abundant
20 feet away from the vein fissure as they are two feet away from
it. Certainly no transition occurs between the two types of altera-
tion such as (Spurr has described at Tonapah.'' Furtlier, the
minerals developed in the propylitic facies are generally charac-
teristic of high temperature deposits. Both clilorite (Pennine) and
epidote are common in the crystalline schists, and contact meta-
morphic ore deposits, which are formed under considerable pressure
and at relatively high temperatures. The vein solutions w^ere
undoubtedly moderately strong alkaline charbonate and sulphide
solutions, and both the above minerals appear to be unstable in
the presence of such.

Significance of Pyrrhotite. — Pyrrhotite is usually regarded as a
high temperature mineral. Its occurrence as a primary mineral in
certain basic rcoks, and its association with such undoubted high
temperature minerals as garnet and magnetite in contact meta-
morphic ore deposits, clearly support this view. At Queenstown,
small quantities of pyrrhotite occur distributed through the propy-
litised diorite. It is closely associated with the ilmenite and
leucoxene, and in places occurs disseminated through these minerals.
In one section, narrow parallel bars of ilmenite traverse an irre-

1 " Conditions of Mineralisation in the Copper Veins at Butte, Montana." Economic Geology,
vol. vii., 1912.

■2 "DieErzlagerstatten." 1905-1906.

;{ Zeitschr, f. prakt. Geol., pp. 1-8:"), 1912.

4 " Problems in the Geology of the Hauraki Ctoldfielils. New Zealand." Economic Geology, vol
iv., No. 7, 1909,

.S Op. Cit. p. 210.

Pctrologn atid Geolojjy of Qacnii^totCH. 129

gular shapL^d grain of pyi'rliotite, suggesting an intergrowtli of the
two niinerals. However, ai'ound the t'dges of the pyrrhotite. some
leucoxene is seen, strongly suggesting that the pyrrhotite is re-
placing the leucoxene, and that tlie bars ai'e relics of a former
ihuenite grain. The iron, set free from the ilmenite in the change
to leucoxene, lias apparently united with sulphur from hydrogen
sulphide in the gases or solutions, causing pi'opylitisation, and
pyrrhotite has formed.

Of late, much attention has been devoted in the laboratory to
the study of the iron sulphides, and we are particularly indebted
to American chemists for valuable syntheses of them. Of parti-
cular interest are the results of Allen, Crenshaw, and Johnston at
the Carnegie Institute, Wasliington.i They have artificially pre-
pared pyrrhotite by the direct union of iron and sulphur at 700o,
and have shown that pyrite dissociates into pyrrhotite and sulphur
in an atmosphere of sulphuretted hydrogen, at temperatures above
5650. The action is represented by the following equation : —
FeS2^FeS(S)„ + (l-n)s
Pyrite Pyrrhotite Sulphur.
Above 565° the forward action proceeds, and below 565^ pyrrhotite,
in an atmosphere of hydrogen sulphide, passes into pyrites. The
formation of pyrrhotite, and not pyrites in the Queenstown diorite,
apparently by the attack of hydrogen sulphide on the ilmenite,
should therefore have taken place at high temperature; however,
not necessarily as high as 565, o as the dissociation temperature is
dependent on the pressure. Pyrrhotite has also been foi-med synthe-
tically by these authors in an acid environment, at temperatures
between 80o and 225, o but the syntheses ai-e undoubtedly inap-
plicable in our case, since the solutions causing propylitisation
must have been alkaline.

Recapitulating, it is seen that tlie minerals formed during the
propylitisation of the diorite, are, in their geological occurrence,
usually fairly high temperature minerals. Microscopic and field
evidence show that the propylitisation and sericitisation are inde-
pendent, and that the effects of the latter alteration are superim-
posed upon those of the former. The chemical analysis of the rock
shows, further, that the gases or solutions causing the alteration
must have contained water, carbon dioxide, and sulphides. The
composition of the original rock does not appear to have been

1 "The Mineral Sulphides of Iron." Anier. Jour. Sci., 4th sen, vol. xxxii., 1911.

10

130 ^V it*. Jmincr:

greatly changed as a result of the alteration. It appears very
likely that the niineralisers had their origin in the cooling niaguia,
and that their escape was made possible Ijy the relief of pressure
during the inti-usion of the diorite. Tlie gases thus expelled from
the magma would permeate the solidifying rock, and cause such
alteration as has been described.

II. Hydrothermal alteration adjoining vein fissures. Narrow
veins of auriferous cjuartz, generally only an inch or two in width,
but as much as twelve inches wide in places, traverse the diorite.
On either side of these veins, the coimtry rock has been bleache(l
for varying distances, generally less than one foot, and rendered
nuich finer grained. Considerable development of pyritt- and
arsenopyrite together with some stil)nite, has taken place in close
pi-oximity to the quartz veins. These sulphides are most abundant
along the vein wall, and decrease in amount outwards. That the
bleaching is a result of the alteration of the diorite by the vein
.solutions, is certain.

Specimen No. 140, Caledonia Mine, Yow Yow, shows an inter-
mediate stage in the alteration. Macroscopically, it is a fairly even
grained rock, greenish in colour, and showing fairly abundant
pyrites scattered through it. A section of the rock examined micro-
.scopically shows no hornblende or felspar. The hornblende remain-
ing from the propylitic alteration has not been first changed to
chlorite, and then to carbonates and muscovite, but apparently it
has in part passed directly to carbonate, and in part to a whitish
or yellowish, cloudy, nondescript material. Idiomorphic outlines
of hornblende are occasionally preserved in this material. The
carbonate is dolomitic or ankeritic in character, as dilute hydro-
chloric acid has very little action on the powdered rock in the cold.
Chemical analyses of similar carbonates developed in the diorites
near Wood's Point have shown them to be varying compounds of
the carbonates of lime, magnesia, ferrous oxide, and manganous
oxide. Chlorite still remains in considerable amount, Init epidote
has disappeared, having apparently succumbed to the action of the
carbonate solutions. Local patches of carbonate in the chlorite are
closely allied in shape to the epidote grains in the propylitic rock,
and undoubtedly replace the latter mineral. Some of the chlorite
is beginning to })ass to colourless mica (muscovite), and carbonates
have been intruded along the cleavage planes, and replace the
chlorite in part. The felspars have been almost completely re-
placed by closely packed sericite flakes. Under high powers,

Petrology and Geology of Queenstown.

131

tliese ureas of sericite are resolved into a mixture of quartz and
sericite. Carbonates are notably present in only very small amounts
in the altered felspar. i The extent to which sericitisation has taken
place in the wall rock, is shown by an analysis made for the alkalies.
Thus :— Na^O 0.21%.
K^b 3.45%.
It will be lemembered that in the original rock, soda was in marked
excess of potash, and hence it must have been leached out during
the alteration whilst tlie potash was fixed and probably more intro-
duced. It is often assumed that the waters causing such sericitisa-
tion were relatively rich in salts of potassum and contained little
sodium salts. I see no reason, however, for this assumption,- and
since the vein solutions have passed through the diorite on their
way to the surface they should presumably become richer in soda,
and correspondingly weaker in potash, owing to sericitisation, as
they approaclied the surface. Hence, even if the original uncon-
taminated waters were richer in potash salts than soda salts, tlie
relative proportions of these constituents should soon become re-
versed. Probably the correct explanation is that under the conditions
of temperature, pressure and concentration, existing at the time of
the alteration, no stable sodium mineral could form. Paragonite
and albite, for instance, are usually high temperature minerals,
found in the crystalline schists and contact metamorphic deposits,
and are very rarely formed under conditions of hydrothermal vein
alteration. The potash mica corresponding to paragonite — namely,
sericite, however, has a wide range of existence, occurring exten-
sively in the crystalline schists, and almost invariably in rocks
affected by vein solutions, and in the presence of the latte)-. it
appears to be particularly stable. A very little pyrrhotite remains,
but iron pyrites has increased considerably in amount. It is scat-
tered through the rock, and shoAvs no preference for regions where
chlorite and ilmenite are most common. Quartz has suffered very
little change as a result of these alterations. Its peculiar parallel
cracks simulating a cleavage, still remain. On close examination
under the high power, these cracks are seen to be not regular and
straight, but to be occasionally curved and branching. Apatite, in
general, is little changed. Occasionally it is fractured and replaced
by carbonates. Ilmenite is "almost entirely replaced by leucoxene.

1 Rosenbasch, " Eleniente der Gesteinlehre," 1898, pp. 70-71, states that ealcite, sericite, and
•quartz, are the products of the attack of carbonated waters on plagioclase felspars.

I It might be susf'ested since sericitisation is accompanied by partial dehydration of the rock,
that the ^•ein solutions contained very little water ; yet presumably this is not so.

10a

132 N'. R. J miner .-

Specimen No. 138, illustrates the extremely altered wall rock near"
the veins. In hand-sj^ecimen, it is a greenish coloured fine-grained
rock, greatly impregnated with pyrites, and veined by quartz
carrying a little stibnite and carbonate. None of the original
minerals of the diorite are recognisable. Microscopically chlorite
has entirely disappeared, and is replaced by massive mu,scovite,
giving a biaxial figure and having a fairly wide axial angle.
Streaks of carbonate have formed along the cleavage planes. Iron
pyrites, arsenical pyrites, and stibnite are all abundant in the
altered wall rock. The iron pyrites is often present in irregular
shaped grains, and when idiomorphic its form is usually the cube,
or a combination of the cube and octahedron, and more rarely, the-
pyritohedron. Arsenical pyrites is more abundant than the iron
pyrites close to the veins, and is readily distingushed from the
latter mineral by its silvery lustre in reflected light, and by its
idiomorphic outlines. Common forms are combinations of the unit
prism and the brachydome, giving wedge-shaped and hexagonal
sections. Cruciform twinning, which is so common in the arseno-
pyritei from the Diamond Creek Dyke, is only rarely seen in the
present case. Stibnite occurs singly in prismatic and acicular
crystals and as a network of these fibres. When massive, it is silver-
grey in reflected light. Some of this material, appearing metallic
in reflected light, is deep red in transmitted light. 2 It is most
common in the vein quartz, and in the quartz grains adjoining
the vein walL These three sulphides, although independently
crystallised, are undoubtedly essentially contemporaneous in origin.
Quartz still remains clear, but the grains are embayed, and partly
replaced by carbonates. The ilmenite has entirely disappeared, and
very little leucoxene remains anywhere in the section. Little
pyrites, either the iron variety or the arsenical type, is present
in the vein quartz, and the assumption is that the ilmenite and
the chlorite have supplied the necessary iron to form the pyrites
so abundant in the wall rock.

Summary of the effects of the vein solutions : — In the absence of
a chemical analysis of the wall rock, no definite conclusions can be
drawn with regard to chemical migrations of the original consti-

1 In the author's petrologlcal description of the Diamond Creek dyke, arseiiopyrite i.s mentioned'
as being possibly present. Further examination, however, shows it to be abundant near the vein
fissures. Vide, N. R. Junner, Proo. Koy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xxv.. p. 339, 1912.

2 Professor MiKj^e was able to prove that stibnite showed straijfht extinction by examination
of very thin flakes of the mineral between crossed nicols in direct sunlight. Vide Neues. Jahrb.
Min., vol. i., p. 12, 1898.

I'l'fro/o;/!/ (1 11(1 (u'oloijii of Qvft'iisfoivn. \'.Vi

tuonts of tilt' rock. Tlic luicToscope, however, reveals the fact thut
sericite, cai hoiiates. and jtyritcs ai'e the ultiuiiite products of the
original minerals. It is evident that the solutions causing the
alteration must have been rich in alkaline carbonates and sulphides.
That they also contained arsenic and antimony, is apparent from
the abundance of arsenopyrite and stibnite neai- the veins. The
solutions undoubtedly were acjueous, yet the rock has probably
suffered dehydration, which is explained by the disappearance of
■chlorite containing about 13% water, and its i-eplacement by seri-
cite containing only about 4%. A chemical analysis, of the wall
rock adjoining a quai-tz vein in the Morning Star diorite, showed
that the percentage of total water was 2.64 in the propylitised rock,
.and only 0.96 in the sericitised and carbonated facies. The efficacy
•of moderately strong alkaline carbonate solu^tions to dissolve rock-
forming minerals is well known. Therefore, the extreme metaso-
matic alteration undergone In- the original rock is easily explained
as a result of the attack of such solutions. Gold is known to be
soluble in alkaline sulphide solutions, and it was probably in such
.solutions that the gold in the veins at Yow Yow was introduced.

D. — Quartz l'orph\ir\j, One Tree Hill.

The eight inch to one mile geological map, published by the Vic-
torian Mines Department, shows an outcrop of porphyrite at
Smyth's Gully. The author is not aware of any such rock there,
and apparently the rock intended to be shown is the One Tree Hill
porphyry. This rock is seen on the surface, at the summit of One
Tree Hill, adjoining the Buck line of reef, and is here decomposed
to a mass of kaolin containing abundant quartz grains. It can
also be seen on the track leading from the hill to the battery in
Fern Tree Gully, and a tunnel driven from this gully into the hill
to cut the Buck and Swedish reef intersected it. Where seen on the
surface, the lock appears to l)e a dyke,i but the relations as revealed
by the tunnel section, although not very clear, seem more suggestive
of an intrusive pipe. The rock is greatly brecciated in places, and
xenoliths of black slate, sandstone, and quartz porphyry are often
included in it. Breccia and an agglomerate occur on the surface
near the head of Fern Tree Gully, and also in the tunnel, but
their relation to the normal igneous rock was not evident. The
pebbles of tlie agglomerate are chiefly quartz porphyry, and are

1 The 189.") geologically coloured parish plan of Queenstown shows a diorite dyke at One Tree
Hill.

134 A\ R. Jimner:

usually sub-angular in shape, and larelv more than three inches
in diameter. In the absence of field evidence to the contrary, it is
possible, but not probable, that these supposed volcanic l)reccias and
agglomerates have originated Ijy faulting. The rock is intrusive,
and the flow structure, which is characteristic of similar rocks
from Liljdale, Steel's Creek, and north of the Black Spur, is absent
in this case. Probably the rock fills what was once a volcanic con-
duit extruding rhyolitic lavas, which are now entirely denuded aAvay,^
Hand-specimens of the rock are leucocratic and porphyritic. and
show phenocrysts of quartz and altered felspar. A little pyrite is
also present. Examined microscopically, the rock is seen to have
been a quartz-felspar-porphyry, but its pristine characters are now
greatly masked l)y extensive sericitisation, carbonation and occa-
sional secondary silicification.

Section No. I':i2. 'J'he rock consisted originally of large clear
panidiomorphic phenocrysts of quartz, fairly large euhedral crystals
of felspar, and numerous crystals ot a femic mineral, probal)ly
biotite. in a microcrystalline ground-mass of the same minerals.
Apatite and zircon are accessories. As in the similar rocks
described from Diamond Creek, quartz is the only minei-al which
has withstood the action of the hydrothermal solutions which have
caused the alteration, to any mai-ked extent. It is generally clear.
a)id is often rounded and embayed by the ground mass. Such coi-
rosion, however, is pr()bal)ly magmatic, and occurs in many volcanic
and intrusive rocks not hydrothermally altered — e.g., Healesville
dacites. Isolated inclusions of the ground mass, and numerous
glass inclusions containing liquid bubbles, are present in the quai'tz
phenocrysts. Cracks occur about some of these glass inclusions
exactly as figured in Idding's " Rock Minerals," fig. 37b, p. 71.
Pyiamidally tern\inated crystals of zircon are also seen in the grains
of quartz. The felspar phenocrysts have been extensively metaso-
matically replaced by dusty carbonates and microscopic flakes of
.sericite. with a little quartz. The alteration of the felspar has
been so great in many sections that it can only be recognised by
its well-preserved idiomorphic outline. Where the alteration has not
been extieme, it can be generally proved without doubt that the
felsi)ar is predominantly orthoclase. Numerous included crystals of
apatite, zircon, and muscovite occur in the felspar. The original
femic mineral was probably biotite. It is now replaced by mus-
covite, and rutile has separated out,i however, not in the form of

1 Biotite frequeiitl.v contains a considerable percentajfe ot TiOj. A hiot.ite from tlie l)an-
ilenons: (iacite, analysed by H. C. Kic-liards, contained TO.'i", Ti02

FefroUxji/ (IikJ (icobniii of (Jiwensfon-ii. 135

sagenitic- webs as in the similar rock from Diamond Creek. Idio-
morphie outlines of original felspar are abundant in the ground
mass of the rock. They are now replaced by carbonates and sericite,
and it is manifestly impossible to tell whether they are orthoclastic
or plaj.Moclastic. Abundant granular impellucid carbonate occurs
throughout the section replacing both plienocrysts and minerals of
the gi'ound mass. Tlie powdered rock effervesces readily when
dilute hydroihloric acid is added in the cold, proving that the car-
bonate is chiefly calcite. Iron pyrites is present in nearly all sec-
tions. It is often idiomorphic, consisting of the following forms :
— 110, 100, and combnations of 100 and 111. The crystals are
often surrounded by a rim of secondary quartz arranged radially
with respect to the crystal edges. Such quartz may possibly repre-
sent recrystallised silica, formed by the attack of sulphuretted
hyrogen <>r alkaline sulphide solutions on the original iron mag-
nesium silicates.

Section No. 135. Brecciated porphyry. One Tree Hill. The
felspars in this section are not so greatly altered. Phenocrysts of
both <r,t]ioclase and plagioclase are present, but the former mineral
predominates. It is frecjuently very greatly sericitised and car-
bonated, and appeai-8 to contain microperthitic intergrowths of
albite. One plagif)clase phenocryst gave symmetrical extinctions
of 200 fvoin the albite twin lamellae, and had a refractive index
greater than quartz, indicating felspar near andesine.

Section No. 125. Xenolithic fragments of sandstone are present
in places in this section. They show no resorption, and are com-
posed of angular and sub-angular quartz grains, flakes of muscovite,
and a little zircon, and brown tourmaline.

Ihhiifd rockx from iJit- coti/ifrt/ east of Melbourne. — Acidic dyke
i-ocks (quartz poipliyry. felsite, and diorite dykes, of various
writers) aie faiily common in Victoria, associated with intrusions
of granite and gianodioiite. East of Melbourne they are fairly
numerous, and are known from Diamond Creek, Warrandyte,
Tomplestowe, Frankston. Kinglake, Ringwood. and several other
places. Similar locks neai- Steel's Creek, Lilydale and Mount
(Tiaham are prt)bal)ly the extrusive facies of the same magma.
These dykes are usually altered metasomatically. in much the same
mannei- as in the rock described above, from One Tree Hill, and
are <'ften traversed by, or associated with, auriferous quartz veins
wliieh almost invariably contain stibnite. Auriferous dykes a: u^
known at Diamond Creek. Warrandyte, Templestowe, Kinglake,

136 N. R. Junner:

Scotchman's Creek, near Warburton, and elsewhere. About tlnee
miles north of Steel's Creek, an apparently extrusive mass of
rhyolite is traversed by quartz veins carrying abundant stibnite,
which is auriferous in places.

3.— The Caledonia Gold Field.

A. — History and Production.

Although now abandoned and unknown to most people, the reefs
and alluvial of this field have yielded more gold than the better-
known Warrandyte reefs. The gold obtained from the Caledonia
field has come almost exclusively from the reefs at One Tree Hill.
Panton Hills, and Yow Yow, and from tlie alluvia of the creeks
draining these areas. The field was being worked at least as
early as 1855, although no official records prior to 1859 are extant.
The report of the Mining Surveyor for September, 1859, states that
there were 420 miners on this field. In the late fifties and early
sixties the One Tree Hill reefs, particularly the Swedish, yielded
exceptional returns, but they soon gave place as producers to more
consistent reefs like Oram's reef, Panton Hills, and except for
occasional very rich yields, later outputs have been unimportant.
Oram's reef was a very consistent producer from the time of the
discovery in 1859 until about 1885. During this period it averaged
three ounces to the ton (a record equalled on very few mining
fields), and at the greatest depth reached, the yields were even riche)-
than those from the upper workings. By far the greater part of
the gold won from Panton Hills came from this line of reef. Such
others as the Napoleon reef, Boomer's reef and Doctor's reef, have
yielded only a small quota. The reefs at One Tree Hill and Panton
Hills, and also those near Queenstown, are all in clo.se proximity
to anticlinal fractures, but those at Yow Yow are of a differc^ii
type. These reefs occur in the intrusive diorite and in the fractured
country rock adjoining the intrusion, and although they have not
been so rich as Oram's leef or the Swedish reef, they have never-
theless at various times contributed largely towards the district
total. Another important asset to this field was the discovery of
coarse gold in the alluvium of certain creeks, particularly in those
at Happy Valley, Fern Tree Gully, and Whisky Gully, which have
their source in One Tree Hill. These creeks affoided remunerative
employment to numerous miners for many years, and some fairly
large nugget,s (one of them weighing ove»' 100 ozs.) were unearthed.

Pcfrohx/!/ (1 11(1 (ieologi/ of QucciiKfoici). \'M

The alluvial digging.s, Imwrvei-, were soon exhausted, and after
about the year 1880, this source of gold became unimportant.

Production : — In compiling statistics of gold production, tlie
author has made considerable use of the Quarterly Reports of the
Mining Surveyors and Registrars from 1859 to 1891, and of the
Annual Reports of the Mines Department from 1891 to 1011. As
the latter publication gives only isolated rich yields, and not
the complete returns, for the greater part of the above period, any
statistics so obtained are necessarily incomplete. The records show
that up to 1890, nearly 25,000 ozs. of gold were won from the
><juartz reefs, distributed thus in round figures : —

Panton Hills 9000 ozs.

One Tree Hill 7500 ozs.

Yow Yow 7500 ozs.

Valued at £4 an ounce; this is equivalent to nearly £100,000 worth
of gold. Two thousand ounces is a very conservative estimate for
the production between 1890 and 1912. so that the total yield from
the field, exclusive of the yield from the alluvial, is well above
£100,000. No complete returns of the gold obtained from alluvial
.sources are possible, as the records are far from being complete.

/ B.—One Tree Hill.

The productive reefs at One Tree Hill \\\n parallel, and at short
•distances apart, all outcropping at the top of the hill, within u
width of 200 yards. The strike of these reefs varies from N. 15^ E.
to N. ^Oo E., corresponding closely to the strike of the contiguous
sedimenrv which are here chiefly brown and white sandstones, in
places indurated and changed to quartzite. At the south end of
the hill one or two small quartz reefs strike across the country rock,
but as far as the author is aware very little gold has been obtained
from them. The most important reefs worked at One Tree Hill
aie from east to west, the Buck, Moonlight, S^vedish, and the Home-
ward Bound. Further east than the Buck line are one or two
•other reefs, the most important of which is the Victoria reef. It
was prospected in the late fifties and early sixties, but, according
to the records, little gold was obtained. All these reefs dip at fairly
«teep angles, frequently approaching the vertical, and cut across
the strata in depth. In this respect they resemble the reefs at
Warrandyte. The Buck line of reef has been extensively developed
by means of a tunnel driven from Fern Tree Gidly. This tunnel

138 iV. R. Junner:

intersects the porpliyry above described, and the Buck reef occurs,
at the contact of this rock with the Silurian sandstones, and dip&
very steeply to the west. -The reef is here composed of compact
milky quartz, slightly mineralised. Pyrites is the dominant sul-
phide, and stibnite is relatively rare, as compared with its abund-
ance in the reefs at Yow Yow. Native lead has been recorded
from the Homeward Bound reef,^ pointing to the presence of a
fairly easily reduced lead mineral. It is interesting to note that
native lead has also been recorded from the quartz reefs at Warran-
dyte,2 and from the Ringwood antimony mine.3 According to the
Mining Surveyor for the division, the Buck reef was the widest and
poorest reef at One Tree Hill. Its average width was about three
feet although it was as much as six feet wide in places. The Reports
of the Mining Surveyors show that from this reef 2126 ozs. of
gold were obtained from .3.31.3 tons of quartz crushed, between the
years 1866 and 1873. This practically represents the total yield
recorded from tlie Buck reef, although not the total gold won, as
the records are undoubtedly incomplete, and the Reports mention
it as being reworked in 1866, after having been abandoned.

The Swedish reef was one of the earliest developed in this field.
It is well defined on the surface, and strikes N. 25o E. to N. 30o E..
and dips to the south-west, at about 60o. Numerous shafts have-
been sunk on its outcrop, but practically none of them descend to-
greater depths than 200 ft., and the majority are less than 100 ft.
deep. The Swedish reef gained notoriety in 18.59 and 1860, owing
to the discovery of some very rich patches of gold near the surface.
A few of the earliest recorded yields, undoubtedly from picked
spec-imens, may Ije (junted to illustrate the extraordinary richness of
the quartz, and the nuggety character of the gold.

The early records are far from complete, and, according to the-
Mining Sniveyoi-, many of the miners were unAvilling to divulge
the retuiMis. Tlie discrepancy between recorded and actual yields
is well illustrated by the Mining Surveyor's Report for January,
1861. He says, speaking of the Swedish reef : " The former owners
were al)Out to abandon No. 2 South, on tlie eve of their finding
quartz, yielding, from a few patches. al)nut £8000 worth of gold."
At £4 an ounce tliis gives 2000 ozs. of gold, yet the recorded yield
amounted to only 620 ozs. Apart from these very rich patches.

1 Annual Report, Sec. Mines, Victoria, 1911.

2 Vide, J. Atkinson : A locality list of all the niineials liitliei-to leconled from Victoria,
Proc. Hoy. Soc. Victoria, \ol. ix. (n.s.), p. 96, 1896.

;; Vi.le, Mineral .Statistics of Victoria, 1877.

Petrolvyy and Geology of Queendoirii.

139'

Date.

Depth

yuartz.
crushed.

Total Yield
of gold.

Average ozs.
per ton.

June,

1859

21

90 lljs.

144 ozs.

3584

August,

1659

21

60 lbs.

240 ozs.*

8960

January,

1860

64

1 bucket of

ore

80 ozs.*

—

March,

1860

—

57 lbs.

272 ozs.*

10680

March,

1860

—

specimen

48 ozs.*

—

1864

65 tons

780 ozs.

12

1865

50

16| tons

349 ozs.

21.2

1865

50

13 tons

134 ozs. 7 dwts.

10.3

1865

—

2 tons

86 ozs.

43

1865

—

8 tons

138 ozs.

22.9

1865

—

10 tons

125 ozs.

12.5

* Recorded in pounds
days to weijfh the gold in

weight, probably pounds a\ (
pounds avoirdupois.

airdupoii

■1, as it was usual in tin

e early mining

much, gold was obtained from the inferior grade quartz, wliich
aveiaged 4 ozs. to the ton. at 65 ft. The brilliance of the Swedish
reef was short-lived, and, after 1870, little more was heard of it.

C— Panto/) Hills (Orayn's Reef).

As previously mentioned, productive quartz mining at Panton
Hills has lieen almost entirely confined to one line of reef — namely,
Oram's. This reef was first opened up during 1859. and it yielded'
fairly consistently until 1885. After this isolated rich yields were
obtained, mostly from the ground previously worked over. The
reef outcrops on the east side of the main road from Kangaroo-
Grounds to Queenstown and Kinglake. It strikes approximately
N 250 E_ and dips to west. Its width varies from two inches to-
three feet, and it fconsists of laminated white quartz, rarely crystal-
line. Oram's reef has been developed to a depth of nearly 400 ft..
and longitudinally for a distance of about half a mile, and has
yielded approximately 9000 ozs. of gold ; more than 8000 ozs. of
which were obtained between the years 1865 and 1885. No gradual
change, and certainly no decrease in values, occur in depth, as is;
evident from the following table compiled from returns recorded
in the Mining Surveyor's Reports between 1866 and 1885. Only
those returns were used which gave the depth from which the ore-
was obtained.

140 .V. Ix. J tinner

li.-l.tli fniin
Surface.

Toiinau'o
Crushed.

I'oul Yiol.l

Av.

per ton.

0- 59 ft.

120i

249.

iizs. 4 dwts.

2

OZS.

1 (Iwt.

aO-lOO „

23 li

564

„ ^

■1

„

9 (Iwts.

ioo-i:)0 „

197^

901

t? ^

4

,,

11 dwt.

150-200 „

278

1 207

„ -i

4

„

" ))

200-250 „

358i

S64

:, 12

2

,,

^ M

250-300 „

67 4 ^

2369

M 17

3

10 „

300-370 „

—

—

5

OZS.

'I'Ik-.vl- ii'tuiiis sliow thiit tlio riilu'st ori' was obtaiiuMl fidiii hftwet'ii
l(»<l aii.l 2(1(1 ft., and that tlu' ore from shallow dcjiths was pooivr
ill valui' than tliat from the <k'OiH>i- workin'rs. No infefeiu-es i-an
l>i' drawn with safety from those yields, respecting the effec-t of
seiondary eiii iihment on the auriferous quartz. The ground water
level oeenrs at a de})th of about 200 ft., and the richest (luartz caiue,
therefore, fiom above this level; although the 300 ft. level alone
yielded 2000 ozs. of gold, eqtiivalent to nearly one-fourth of the
total gold won from this reef.

D.—Tou- Toil'.

Several quartz veins have been prospeeted, with varying success,
near the Yow Yow diorite intrusion. The best known of these reefs
are Allen's. Eureka. Comet, Murray's. . No. 5. and Hirr's reefs.
The records slu)w that Allen's reef was the largest producer of these,
but. owing to the multipilicity of names of claims and reefs, it is
manifestly impossible to calculate the yields from i)uli\ idual reefs
with any degree of exactness. AlU-n's reef varied in width from
IW(. to three inches, up To the corresponding nnmlvr of feet, and
was not Worked at greater depths than 200 ft. The reef occurs
within the diorite. and according to the Mining Surveyor, the yields
from tlie hard, undecomposed roik weri' jnst as ricli. or even
richer, than those from near the surface. With the excejttion of
tlie Caledonia, none of these reefs have been worked behnv 200 ft.
At this mine a shaft has Ix^en sunk l>etween 200 and 300 ft. in
depth, and several very thin, nearly vertical dipping, veins, have
been worked. These, however, were unprofitable in depth, not ite-
•cause of any dei.'rease in values, but owing to the great amotint of
very resistant diorite wjiieh had to l)e extracted with the quartz.
Stibnite is the jiredominant vein svdphide. and pyrites and mis-

Petrolo(ju and Geul<>(j>/ o/' Quef'iisfi,iri,. Ul

pitktrl :iiu sometimes present. Massive stibnite occurs in seveial of
these reefs, especially those situated on the west and north-^\e8t sides
of the iliorite. Calcite is a fairly common gangue mineral. The
gohl is of a high degree of fineness, as is usual elsewhere in Vic-
toria, where stibnite is the predominate vein sulphide, and is
generally valued at more than £1 an ounce. Neaily all these reefs
strike between north and north-east, and dip at steep angles. An
approximate estimate of the gold recorded from Yow Yow may he
stated as 8000 ozs., of which total, more than one-third (about
2700 ozs.) has been recorded from Allen's reef. The Eureka was
also an important contributor, and over 1500 ozs. were won from
this line of reef. Certain of these auriferous veins, worked within
the diorite, pass out into the sediments, and have been found to
be payably auriferous for some distance from the intrusion.

E. — Alluvial.
The bulk of the alluvial gold from this field came from the creeks,
draining One Tree Hill; and, compared \\^th the gold oljtained
fiom them, other returns are unimportant. The gold was almost
invariably of the nuggety type, and one nugget of 103| ozs. was un-
earthed in Cobbler's Gully. The occurrence is of interest, since
elsewhere in Victoria large nuggets are generally associated with
Ordovician strata, and nuggets of over 100 ozs. have been recorded
in only two other areas — namely, Alexandra, and Wood's Point. i
where undoubted silurian sediments are the country rock. The
following is a list, proVjably not complete, of nuggets recorded from
the alluvial near One Tree Hill : —

A. — Cohhler'it (hdhj. or Happy Valley.

^^'"&»'*- fro,n?urface. Reference. Ke.narks.

lOSiozs. 6 feet Q.R.M.S. Dec. 1874'^ lOOozs. 12dwts.

fine
88 „ — „ Sept. I860

84 „ Shallow „ Oct. 1860 78 ozs. tine.

83 „ 6 dwt.s. 6 inches „ Mar. 1870'

7-2 „ — „ Oct. 1860 .Severnl small

nuggets
42 „ - „ Nov. I860

1 Vide list of nuggets found in Victoria. Mem. Geo. Surv., Victoria, No. 12, 1912.

2 Quarterl3- Reports of the Miniiifc Surveyors and Re^strars of Victoria.

'6 Mixed with quartz. Found in the alluvial of the Swedish reef, cOozs. fine.

(d42

iV. K Ji

Weight.

Depth
from siii-faee.

40

,,

—

•Sept. 1860

32

„ 12g,-.s.^

—

Aixg. 1860

28

„ lldwts.

6 feet

Prog. Rep. No. 3, 1875 Estimated

17oz.s. 12dwt.s.

17

„ 1^ „'

12 „

Q.R.M.S. Dec. 1874

11

15 „ 6 in.

„ ' May 1860

5

„ n ,:

12 „

Dec. 1874

B. — Fern Tree Gully.

Weight.

Depth.

Reference.

Remarks.

Q.R.M.S. Dec. 1880 In

two nuggets.

Mar. 1862

Jan. 1862

R.B. Smyth, Gold Fields

of Victoria, 1868

M.S.R. ^Feb. 1861

Jan. 1861

Jan. 1861

Jan. 1861

56 ozs.

32 „ 1.
24 „
20 „

10 „
10 „

8 „

., Jan.

1861

C-

-Whiskey Gully.

Weight.

Depth.

Reference.

Remarks.

34 ozs. 13dwts. 11 feet Q.R.M.S. June 1869
9 „ „ Sept. 1861

3 ,, 5 dwts. ^ ,, „ June 1869

According to the district Mining Surveyor, other large nuggets
-were found and not reported by the finders. The evidence is
absolutely convincing that these nuggets have been shed from the
reefs, and that they have not grown in situ. Firstly, it is a Avell-
known fact on this field that the richest alluvial has always been
found in close proximity to fairly rich reefs — e.g., One Tree Hill.
Further in Cobbler's Gully, nuggets have been found in all posi-

1 Recorded from Fern Tree Gully or Happy Valley.

2 Possibly identical with the preceding nugget.

3 Probably Fern Tree Gully, as all nuggets from Cobbler's Gully were obtained ut shallow
- depths.

4 Mining Surveyor's Reports.

I'd I'olo;/!/ uiul (rfohHjji of Qaeeiisfotrii. 143

rions. tiDiii veil ildwii the uully ritilit up to the outcTDp of thr I'cofs
on One Tire Hill. The dislritt Mining Surveyor in ISTl) ii'ixuts
the tindinu' of a rieh spniineii of (piartz (8-3 ozs. (J dwts. ijross
wciiiht. ")() t)zs. fine) six iiu-lics lielow tlii' surt'aee leef. and un-
doutedly derived from this I'eef. The nuggets found ni'aiest the
reefs are generally mixtures of tjuartz, linionite and gold, and show
little signs of rounding. ('obl)ler's gully has yielded the largest
nuggets, and there is every i-eason to believe that tlioy have 1)een
derived from the Swedish reef, which has been shown to l)e a
nuggety reef, and much of the gold olitained fiom it would be
best described as nuggets. For instance, a specimen of ipiartz
from tliis reef, having a maximum dimension of 3 inches, was
found to yield 48 ounces of gold.l Mr. Hirt, who has had a very
intimate acquaintance with this field, told the writer in private
•c-onversation that a nugget 40 ozs. in weight, and associated with
quartz and limonite, was got from a dei^th of nearly 100 feet in a
claim on the Homeward Bound line of reef. It will be agreed, I
think, that the evidence allows of no other conclusion than that the
nuggets have been derived by the breaking doAvn by denudation of
the former upward extension of such reefs, as the Swedish at One
Tree Hill.

F. — Future possibilities, Secondary enrichment . etc.

Oram's is the only reef on this field developed at greater depths
than 300 feet, and the majority of the workings have not penetrated
below the ground water level. Notwithstanding the shallowness of
the workings, there is apparently nothing to show that the values
have not been maintained in depth, as is seen from the figures
given above for Oram's reef. Of the geological factors that may
have influenced the values near the surface, secondary enrichment
is the most important. The recognition of its effect on auriferous
quartz veins, is frequently difficult, and this is especially so in
Victoria. Victorian gold is generally of a high degree of fineness,
and usually free from sulphides of the base metals w^hich are easily
leached, and either oxidised or redeposited at lower levels as secon-
dary sulphides. Further, most of these mines were developed before
secondary enrichment was studied, and practically no facts relevant
to the question are now obtainable from the records. The yields
from various depths aid us little, as is seen from the tabulated

1 Vide, supra, p. 36.

144 N. R. Jutmer :

yield of Oram's reef. Hence, no conelusions can be drawn with
certainty regarding the effects of secondary enrichment on these
reefs, but the evidence, such as it is. suj^ports the conclusion that
the values liave not been greatly affected. The thin character of
the reefs, combined wtili their compai-ative density, tends to inhibit
extensive circulation of surface solutions, and hence to prevent
solution of the gold. The rich patches found near the surface at
One Tree Hill might be considered as suggestive of secondary
enrichment, but the evidence, although not conclusive, does not
support such a view. It appears fairly evident from the nuggets
found in the alluvial at Cobbler's Gully, that the former upward
extension of the Swedish reef was as rich, or even richer, than the
portion now exposed to denudation and vadose solutions. It seems
very likely, therefore, that the distriliution of the gold in the
Swedish reef near the surface, is not due to the present-day vadose
circulation, but is due to conditions determining the primary de-
position of the gold. Of such factors influencing the primary
deposition, decrease of temperature and pressuie, admixture with
surface solutions, and indicator effects are the most important.
There is fairly good reason to believe that the formation of these
reefs took place soon after the folding of the sediments, and it is
certain tliat several thousands of feet of these have been denuded
away. Hence the assumj^tion does not seem to be unwarranted
that tlie primary deposition of the gold, in the portion of the reef
now exposed, was not affected by admixture with surface solutions,
and presumably not to any marked degree by reduction of tem-
perature and pressure. We are left to deal with the effects of
indicators. At Ballarat East, where nuggety gold occurs in the
reefs, often at considerable depths, the nuggets are localised to
near the intersection of the vein quartz Avith tlieir seams termed
" indicators." Unfortunately, the Swedish reef at One Tree Hill
was not being worked at the time of my visit, and the records do
not mention the mode of the occurrence of the gold, so that positive
evidence, bearing on this question, is not forthcoming. However,
Mr. Hirt, Avho, as previously mentioned, has lieen on this field most
of his life, and whose word I have no reasoji to doubt, has informed
me that the ricli patches of gold, from the Swedish reef, were
generally localised to near the intersection of the main reef with
rather flat leaders of pinkish coloured quartz, two inches or so in
width. If this is so, there appears to me to be no valid reason
why other " indicator " veins and rich patches of gold should not
])e found in depth. A.s far as I am aware, tlie Swedish reef has not

PetroLxjii and Geoloyi/ of Qiiee/ttstuivn. 145

hocii ju-ospeeteil 1)l'1(iw 2(M> i'oi't , altlum^'h the records mention the
driving of :i tunnel fnuii I-'ein Tree (iully to prospect the Swedish
reef in depth, hut it is (h>ui)lfiil whether they ever worked this reef.
Messrs. Hirt nnd (terhuli liavt' recently driven a timnel from the
head of I'ohhler's (iully to cut the Swedish reef, hut at the time of
my visit, they a)>peared to have not Ijeen successful in locating it.
It is at least certain that there is no geological evidence in s\ipport
of the view that the gold docs not go down, and in the case of the
Swedish reef the possible occurrence of other rich patches of gold in
depth, has not been disproved. From the birth of this field the
reefs have been worked almost entii-ely by individual miners or
small parties, and companies were practically unknown. This is
prol^ably one important reason why the mines were abandoned at
such shallow depths. The presence of water and the need of pump-
ing macliinery. harder ground, increased liaulage, and the ditli-
culty of following such nari'ow reefs, all contended against the
enterprising individual, but such mines could, in many cases, Ijc
worked at a profit by small companies, with judicious expenditure
and economical methods of woi-king.

4.— Summary and Conclusions.

Until further palaeontological work has been attempted in this
area, no definite opinion can be expressed relative to the age of
these beds, near (^ueenstown. A stratigraphical comparison with
the strata at Diamond Creek and Yarra Glen, suggests that they
are intermediate in age between those at the above places, and
aie. theiefore, either Melbournian or Yeringian. It is, however,
possible that both series are i-epresented in the area dealt with in
this paper.

Although diorite is a popular field name for many rocks in Vic-
toria, chemical and petrological examination show that true dioiites
are exceptional. The association of hornblende diorites. with gold-
bearing quartz in Eastern Australia, is not uncommon. The ex-
tensive nietasoniatic changes undergone by these rocks frequently
accompanies the introduction of the auriferous quartz. The Queens-
town diorite has been shown to Ijc closely allied to the Moining
Star diorite. Wood's Point, and has suffered similar alteratioi,.
Two independent types of metasomatic alteration can be recognised
in the Queenstown diorite — (1) A pi-opylitic alteration at relatively
high temperature and pressure, resulting in the formation of
chlorite and epidote after hoi-nblende ; the development of pyrrhotite

11

146

iV. JU. Jwnner

Geological Sketch Map of poiLiou of the Parishes of Queenstown and
Greensborough. Repi-oduced from Mr. O. A. L. Whitelaw's
maps of these Parishes.

true. R.S. Victoria, I'Jl i. Piute XlX.

Fm.I.

Fi^.n

Fit^.in.

Fii^.IV.

Pch-u((>(ji/ ((till (rn>lo(/>/ of QiieeustoiVn. 14/

after ilmeuite, and iIil' I'diinat ion of calcito and a little seriidle.
(.'heinieal chan^'es in the roek are sliglit. (2) Alteration i)y the vein
.solutions. The chief effeets are extensive developinent of seiieite
after felspar, and of carbonates, pyrites and niuseovite. after
chlorite and remaining hornblende, ('lieniical migrations are prt,-
bably great. The relative proportions of the alkalies, foi- in.staneo.
are reversed.

The latter part of the j»a))er deals with certain characteristics of
an important, but now forgotten, gold field. Of particular inteiest
was the occurrence of large nuggets at One Tree Hill, clearly derived
frotii the Swedish reef which was known to be nuggety near the sur-
face.

In concluson. the writer wishes to record his indebtedness to Mi-.
A. M. Howitt. of the Victorian Geological Survey, for drawing his
attention to the record of alluvial nuggets found on this field ;
to Ml', (.'hapman, foi' identification of a few fossils; and to Messrs.
Tallin and Mann, of the Imperial College of Science, Lond(tn. and
the Melbourne University, Geological Departments, respectively,
for numeious rock sections, and Professor Skeats and the Secre-
tai-y for Mines of Victoria, for help in obtaining Parish Plans of
the a lea.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIX.

Eig. 1. — Microphotograph of <,)uaitz Diorite, Caledonia Mine,
<^ueenstown, x 10, ordinary light. The black areas
represent ihnenite, and tlie striated phenocryst is horn-
blende partially altered to light coloured chlorite and
epidote.

Eig. 2. — .Microphotograph of (,)uartz Diorite. Cale<Ionia Mine.
Queenstown, x 20, crossed nicols ; showing well-zoned
plagioclase phenocrysts.

Eig. ;}. — Microphotograph of highly metasomatically altered
Diorite. near a quartz vein. Caledonia .Mine. <^)ueens-
town, X 16, ordinary light. Q=quartz. E = highly
sericitised felpar. M = niuseovite and carbonate replacing
chlorite after hornI)lende. P = pyrite. As = arsenopyrite,
S =stibnite.

Fig i. — Microphotograph of metasomatically altered Quartz-
Felspar-Porphyry. One Tree Hill, X 11, ordinary light;
.showing phenocrysts of colourless quartz. idiouKjrphie
sericitised and carbonated orthoclase, and rectangular
sections of niuseovite aftei- I)iotite.

KND OF V^OLUME XXVII., PART I.

[Published September, 1914'.]

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Part II., 1914].

Art. XU.— Studies iv the Physical Chemistri/ of Essential Oils.

Part I. — The Physical Properties of mixtures oj two l^erjiene sub-
stances ill relation to those of the constituents.

BY

R. BARRY DREW, M.Sc,

AND

E. IVAN ROSEN BLUM, M.Sc.

(Communicated by W. Hebei- Green).
[Read 9th July, 1914).

It is of considerable interest to regard the mixture of organic
bodies which is presented to us by an essential oil from a physico-
chemical, as well as from the ordinary systematic point of view.
We have here a class of mixtures, easily obtainied in quantity,
whose constituents are mostly well-known, and of allied structure;
conditions v>^hich suggest a novel method of attacking the general
theory of solution, and should also give us valuable data, for judg-
ing the general composition of an oil from its physical constants
— a problem of interest, both from the commercial and from the
scientific standpoint.

As sliowing the questions which meet us here we may cite as an
instance two eucalyptus oils from the same species, which yielded
the same percentage of phellandrene [a= — 69°] and contained no
other optically active substance, whose rotations were as far dis-
tinct as —2.30 and — 44o respectively.

The major portion of an essential oil usually consists of one or
more terpenes. These may be considered as simple examples of
non-ionising, unassociated solvents, and it will be Avell, therefore,
to start our inquiry into essential oil equilibria by the study of
these simple substances, adding progressively more complex or more
reactive constituents, such as oxygenated derivatives, etc., and
essaying to evaluate the new solution factors as they occur.

An ideal invest ig:at ion, then, would start from the simplest
case — a mixture of tw(j terpenes — proceed through increasing com-
plexity in the number and nature of the components, and finally
reach that complicated equilibrium presented by a natural essen-
tial oil, such as that of Eucalyptus globulus.

150 -R. B. Drew and E. I. Rosenblum :

The following results are of a preliminary natui'e, and are
concerned with the simpler cases of sueh an inquiry.

Exveri men till.

The method followed in the measurements hei-e recorded was to
make mixtures of various concentrations from materials prepared
as freshly as possible. The density, refractive index, and rotation
of these were taken at 25° C, with such methods and precautions
as accurate physicochemical Avork suggests.

The pyknometer held about 6 c.c's., and the temperature adjust-
ment was correct to .Olo. The rotations were taken in a 100 mm.
*ube in a Schmidt and Haensch polarimeter. and the refractivia
indices in a Zeiss refractometer, and for eacli of these the diver-
gence in temperature did not exceed .1°.

The mixtures themselves were made up by successive additions of
one constituent to a definite amount of the other — a method
economical of material — and the results have shown it to be justi-
fied, for any systematic error arising from this cause would in-
crease with each addition, and such increases have not appeared.

Cnlculafion of Restdfs.

We may comment here on the methods emphiyed for calculating
the theoretical value of any physical property of a liquid mixture'.
If the property under consideration is additive, and no anomaly
is present, Ave have — -

P ^ m,V, + urj",

(calc.) ^ yn^n,'^

where P,, P.j, are the Values of tlie pi-operty considered, fur the
individual substances, and m^ and u/.^ are the masses of these sub-
stances in the mixture. If the additive relationshiji does not hold,
however, we must modify the formula to express the effects of the
molecules, atoms oi- ions, wliich are the disturbing factor. Thus,
if the molecules are the reacting entities to be considered, we have
[Ml, M2 1)eing the molecular weights] —

m,Pi ^/..Po

P _ M7 M.,

(calc.) rn.2 m,^

Ml M,

Since many factors in liquid mixtures are influencing a par-
ticular property, it is necessary to introduce more and more terms
before we can attain concordance. But since tlie diflficultv of in-

Physical Chemistry of Essential Oils. 151

terpreling the equations so obtained, makes this rather a waste
of labour, it suffices at present, where properties are atomic (e.g.,
Refractivity) to use the first of these equations, while for those
where the molecular influence is introduced (e.g., Density) the
second formula, giving what is known as the Molar Fraction,
serves as some correction.

Hence, these two methods of calculation are all that have been
employed in the present research.

7'/(e System l-pinene — d-pinene.

In considering the purity of the terpenes mentioned, it must be
remembered that where suitable solid derivatives, from which a
terpene may be regenerated in quantity, are wanting, the only
means of purification is repeatedly to distil under diminished pres-
sure. The product, of course, may be parti)- racemised, or may
contain some of its optical isomers. For tliis reason the physical
properties of two optical isomers, such as d- and l-pinene, are not
numerically identical, a point which is of little significance in the
present research, since these well-fractionated terpenes are " pure"
from the practical point of view. Indeed, the l-pinene of rotation
— 390 is almost free from I'acemate, while the + 25° rotation of
the d-pinene is quite as high as other workers have usually, ob-
tained. In the mixture of these two isomers, from our stand-
point, the simplest case, we should anticipate no constitutive ef-
fects, and indeed, the observed properties of the mixtures a<gree
excellently with those calculated by (1), the simple mixture for-
mula, and the slight deviations whicli occur n\ay be taken as indi-
cative of the magnitude of the exijerimental error in the other
systems as well.

The pineries were obtained from oils from Eucalyptus dextro
pinea and E. laevopinea, which were generously given us by Mr.
Smith, of the Sydney Technological Museum. He has w-orked out
their composition, and his results we have confirmed, and by dis-
tilling iii a rod and disk apparatus at 10 mm. pressure we have
obtained pinene fractions with the following properties : —

At25°C. d-Pinene. 1-Pinene.

Rotation ... +25.40° -39.64°

Refractive Index L4640 1.4639

Density ... .8604 .8646

152

R. B. Drew and E. I. Rosenblum

The System d-pinene — l-pinene.

1-pinene.
l-pinene
Concentra-
tion 100

Found
Calc.

Found
Calc.

Found
Calc.

86.82 75.04 50.87 28.

Eotation-

E. d-pinene.

15.92 0

-39.640 -31.390 -23.60o - 7.80o +6.45° +15.02° +25.40°

-31.370 -23.660 -7.83o +6.51° +15.05°

Refractive Index —

1.4639 1.4641 1.4640 1.4640 1.4641 1.4640 1.4640

1.4640 1.4640 1.4640 1.4640 1.4640 ...

Density —

.8646 .8639 .8633 .8626 .8614 .8610 .8604

.8640 .8636 .8625 .8616 .8611 ...

The Si/stems l-Pii^eiie-Cineol and d-Pinene-Gineol.

Of greater complexity is the case involving a partial replacement
of one of the terpenes by an oxygenated substance of allied struc-
ture. Cineol is such a substance, and with it the deviations from
the simple proportionately become noticeable.

These deviations, as in the case of the specific rotatory power,
may be due to a disturbance of the equilibrium, between active
and racemic terpene, brought about by the cineol, a possibility
supported by the fact that the refr activity is not affected.

It is in the density, however, that the divergences from the
simple proportionality become most marked, and here it can be
shown that the influence is molecular rather than structural, by the
fact, that when the theoretical densities .are calculated from the
molar fractions they again agree with the observed. In the simpler
case of d- and l-pinene the molar and weight fractions, of course,
coincide, since the two molecular weights are the same.

The cineol was obtained from Bosisto's 01. Eucalyptus B.P. by con-
version into the phosphoric acid compound and regeneration with
soda, after squeezing out the terpenes under pressure. The pro-
duct was then distilled with steam, and its constants were —

a =±0.00^
/A25= 1.4579

K.

.9220

Physical Gliemistry of Essential Oils.

ir>3

Thk System i.-pinene— cineol.

Mol. p.c.
Wt. p.c.

Found
Wt. p.c,
Mol. p.c.

Found
Wt. p.c.

Found
Wt. p.c.
Mol. p.c.

Concentration 1-pinene.

l-l>ii)tiic.

A.

B. C.

D.

E.

ciiieol.

100

82.46

51.36 36.26

16.34

11.69

0

100

80.26

48.24 33.44
Rotation —

14.71

10.47

0

$9.64'' -

- 32.38°

-19.650 -13.670

- 5.980

- 4.250

0(

...

-32.130 .

-19.310 -13.380

- 5.890

-^4.19o

...

-33.000

-20.56O -i4.51o

-6.540

- 4.670

Refractive Index —

1.4639

1.4629

1.4608 1.4600

1.4587

1.4585

1.4579

1.4628

1.4608 1.4600
Den.sity —

1.4588

1.4585

.8646

.8751

.8931 .9016

.9128

.9166

.9220

.8760

.8944 .9029

.9136

.9169

.8747

.8936 .9012

.9127

.9164

The System d-pinene — cineol.

Wt. p.c.
Mol. p.c.

Found
Wt. p.c.

Found
Wt. p.c.

Found
Wt. p.c.
Mol. p.c.

Found
Calc.

fl-pineiie.
10ft
100

29.510

Concentration d-pinene-
A, B. C.

82.84 64.18 46.85

84.54 66.98 49.95

21.220
21.04O

Rotation-
16.560
16.300

12.07O
11.90O

Refractive Index-

1.4630
1.4630

1.4618
1.4620

1.4609
1.4609

Density —

.8807 .8915

.8825 .8931

.8805 .8913

Specific Rotary Power —
24.390 18.800 13.54o
24.450 18.940 13.83o

.8700
.8709
.8699

30.12
32.80

7.780
7.650

1.4598
1.4597

.9019
.9034
.9018

8.620
8.890

E.
17.91
19.81

4.600
4.550

1.4586
1.4588

.9095
.9110

5.06O
5.290

cineol.
0
0

1.4579

.9220

Tlie Si/stem Cineol-Cifral.

Here one of the constituents of the mixture has an open chain.
Unfortunately, the refractivities lie too close together for differ-
ences to be detected, and both substances are inactive.

The densities show fair agreement when calculated from molar
tractions, but apparently other factors are introduced by th'e
wider structural differences.

The citral was from Merck's, and was characterised as follows —
8,5= .8900
/^,,= 1.4780

154 R. B. Dreiv and E. I. Rosenhlum .

The System cineol-ciiral.

Density —

Citral.

A.

13. C

I).

E.

y.

ciiieol.

Found

.8900

.8946

.9001 .9021

.9066

.9096

.9124

.9220

Wt. p.c. .

.8949

.9008 .9030

.9063

.9101

.9127

Mol. p.c. .

.8948

.9007 .9026

.9063

.9099

.9126

Concentration cineol—

Wt. p.c.

O

15.24

33.73 40.-35

50.98

62.62

70.70

100

Mol. p.c. .

o

15.07

33.43 40.03

50.65

62.30

70.42

100

The Fhellandrene Comj)lex.

We hoped by these methods to obtain from the rotation of a
Eucalyptus oil an indication of the amount of phellandrene it
contained, and a series of l-pliellandiene-cineol mixtures were
made up. The preparation of the phellandrene has been else-
where^ described, and its constants were —
a = -68.35°
tx^,= .8454

8.,5= 1.4747

The results were rather surprising, for we found that if the
measurements be taken immediately after mixing, the density and
rotation agree closely with the calculated values, and the refrac-
tive index exactly, but the mixtures are unstable, rapidly decreas-
ing in rotation, and increasing in density and refractive index.

This change goes on most rapidly in the presence of light and
oxygen, more slowly in the dark, and not at all, as far as we were
able to make out, in the absence of oxygen.

Phellandrene itself rapidly changes under similar conditions,
attaining equilibrium when its rotation is about -|-3o. We hope
to discuss this matter more fully in a future paper.

The System l-phellandkene — cineol.

Phellandrene.

A.

B.

Rotation-

c.

I).

E.

Calc.

- 13.630

^ 27.540 -

^41.43o

54.750

40.760

Obs. 201irs.

-68.350

- 12.900

-25.150

39.850

-52.50O

- 40.06O

Obs. 48hrs.

- 12.600

- 21.630

36.750

- 46.820

Refractive I

ndex —

Calc.

1.4627

1.4659

1.4688

1.4719

1.4688

Obs. Ihr...

1.4747

1.4628

1 .4659

1.4688

1.4719

1.4688

Obs. 44 hrs.

1.4631

1.4678
Density-

1.4699

1.4734

Calc.

.8980

.8845

.8714

.8585

.8719

Obs. ] liv.

.8986

.8858

.8728

.8595

.8726

Obs. 44 hrs.

.9018

.8956

.8776

.8678

.8764

Concentra-

tion.

10( 1

19.94

4( ).:{(;

60.62

80.10

59.64

1.4579

.9202

R. Barr.v Drew. Australian Association for the Advancement of Science. Report 1913.

Fhysicat Chemistry of Essential Oils. 155

Summary.

Simple mixtures of two terpens compounds follow the " Mix-
ture Law" quite closely. The divergences, at any time small, are
eliminated by the use of the " Molar Fraction Fox-mula."

For such mixtures the proportions of the constituents can be
calculated from the properties of the mixture, but whex'e one con-
stituent is niistal)le. as in phellandrene oils, such deductions are
unreliable.

These measurements w^ere made in the research laboratories of
the University of Melbourne, for the use of which we have to thank
Professor Masson.

Our thanks are also due to Professor Osborne for the use of his
polarimeter. and especially to Mr. H. G. Smith for his generous
gift of pinene eucalyptus oils.

Part II. — 7%e Physical Constants of some Terpenes and oxygenated
derivatives thereof, and their variation with temperature.

E. IVAN ROSEN BLUM, M.Sc.

(Comnmnicated by VV. Heber Green, D.Sc).

[Read 9th July, 1914).

Some measurements which had been made in the course of the
last paper, and the fac-t that he had on hand samples of a number
of terpenes prepared for that research, led one of the authors to
make a so-ies of measurements on the influence of temperature
change on the three chief physical constants of terpenes — Density,
Kefractive Index, and Rotation.

The terpenes employed are, in the main, those whose purifica-
tion has been described in the joint paper ; the others were as sup-
plied by Merck and Kahlbaum, and, with two exceptions, their
purity as indicated by their constants and by the usual tests was
such as to render it unnecessary to submit them to the somewhat
uncertain processes involved in further purification.

156 E. I. Roseiihlurii:

The density and refractive index of the terpineol indicate that
it is mainly the isomer of M. Pt. 350-.'36o C, Avhile the high den-
sity and diminished rotation of the d-limonene point to some
modification having occurred since it was originally prepared by
Kahlbaum.

Although the uncertain purity which is inherent to the terpenes
renders these results less valuable from the point of view of physico-
chemical theory, they may none the less be regarded as standards
bv workers in the fascinating field of Essential Oils.

Substance.

Souroe.

C;onstaiits at 20*(

3.

8

n

a

1-phellandrene .

d-pinene

1-pinene

pinene

d-limonene

. . Eucalyptus dives oil
.. E. dextropinea oil
.. E. laevopinea oil
. American turpeutine
. . Kahlbaum

.8551
.8682
.8668
.8603
.8922

1.4783
1.4659
1.4665
1.4690
1.4814

-65.110
+ 25.140
- 39.810
+ .1.00
+ 81.950

cineol

.. Bosisto, Melbourne

.9239

1.4598

± O.OOo

eugenol
safrol

.. Merck

.. Merck

1.0667
1.1003

1.5415
1.5385

-0.03O
2= O.OOo

terpineol
citral

.. Merck

.. Merck

... .9354

.8912

1.4835

1.4889

H 0.04O
d= O.OOo

(1) The Density.

The densities were measured at ten degree intervals between 10°
and 60O by means of a pyknometer holding about 6 c.c, and a
bath, which could be maintained at any required temperature,
while a measurement was in progress. Incidental errors due to
expansion of the glass of the pyknometer, etc., were eliminated
by taking a series of pyknometer values for distilled water over
the temperature range, calculating the specific gravity from these,
and then deriving the density as referred to water at 4° (\ from
the tables of the density of water.

These densities at ten-degree intervals are shown in the accompanying
table.

It will be observed that, while the coetficients of expansion are
in all cases close together, they fell into two groups, the oxy-
genated substances cineol, safrol and eugenol expanding to a
greater degree than the hydrocarbons.

Citral, the only straight chain terpene, and terpineol, are ex-
ceptional. The relation of temperature to density is strictly linear
except in the case of the ever-exceptional 1-phcllandrene, whore a
slight divergence is shown.

Physical Ghemlsfri/ of Kssentiol OiU

'J'hk Densities.

Substance.

lO"

20o

30"

40"

.500

60»

C'oefT.

l-phellandrene

.8635

.8551

.8469

.8387

.8306

.8224 ..

. .000826

d-pinene

.8763

.8682

.8602

.8522

.8442

.8361 ..

807

l-pinene

.8750

.8668

.8586

.8504

.8422

.8340

821

pinene

.8685

.8603

.8521

.8439

.8356

.8274

822

d-limoneue •■•

.9004

.8922

.8840

.8759

.8679

.8599 .

811

cineol

.9324

.9239

.9153

.9067

.8982

.8896 .

857

■eugenol

1.0754

1.0667

1.0579

1.0492

1.0404

1.0316

876

saf rol

1.1090

1.1003

1.0915

1.0828

1.0740

1.0652 .

876

terpineol

.9432

.9354

.9276

.9198

.9120

.9042

780

citral

.8992

.8912

.8832

.8752

.8671

.8891

800

(.2) Tlie Refractive Index.

Of recent papers on the relation between refractive index and
temperature the most interesting are those of Falk^, who found a
linear relation for those substances he examined, none of which,
however, were terpenes.

In the present research in every case there are found divergences
from this simple proportionality, the temperature coefficient in-
creasing with the rise of temperature except in the cases of cineol
and of l-pinene, where it decreases, and the divergences bein^"
most marked in the results for l-phellandrene.

Like the coefficients of expansion, these temperature coefficients
varv only within narrow- limits from .000402 for d-pinene to
.000480 for l-phellandrene. Since the coefficients for those organic
substancs, whose refractive indices are tabulated in Landolt-
Bornstein, vary from .0003 to .0008, this magnitude appears to
be a constitutional one. The measurements of refractive index
between lOo and 60^ are tabulated in the table. They were ob-
tained in a Zeiss refractometer, fitted wuth a constant temperature
device, which ensured constancy to at least .1°.

Three formulae have been suggested for calculating the refractive
power —

(1) n-\ld (2) n'-\:d and (3) ir - \ ; {n^ + '2)d

and Falk found that ir-ijd gave values that decreased as the
temperature I'ose, tr — \j{>r -\-'2d) values that increased, while, when
n — \jd\yA>i used for the calcidation. they increased in some cases
and decreased in others.

1 J. Amer. Cheni. Soc, 1909, 31. 86, 806.
Zeit. Physik. Cheiu., 1913, 82, 504.

158

E. I. RosenUum

This has been confirmed for the terpenes used in the present
research, and since the n-l/d figures approach more closely to
constancy than those based on tlie other two formula?,, they have
been adopted for comparing the molecular refractive powers.

The constants are calculated by the three formulae for cineol,
1-phellandrene and 1-pinene are shown in a table, and the values
of «- l/c?x M are shown for all tlie substances, plotted against the
temperatures.

These curves do not show much agreement with one another, the
greatest deviations being, as usual, shown by 1-phellandrene; but
it will be seen that the influence of temperature, though small, is
regular, and gives smooth curves.

Eisenlohri has recently obtained as accurately as possible a series

Refractive Indices.

Substance.

lllo

•20o

30"

40"

50o

60o

Average
coeff.

1-phellaiidreue

1.4822

1.4783

1.4742

1.4695

1.4642

1.4582 ..

. .0(K)480

d-pinene

1.4698

1.4659

1.4619

1.4578

1.4537

1.4497 .

. .000402

1-pinene

1.4713

1.4665

1.4617

1.4570

1.4525

1.4481 ..

. .000464

pinene

1.4734

1.469()

1.4645

1.4598

1.4549

1.4499 .

. .00047a

d-limonene ...

1.4857

1.4814

1.4769

1.4723

1.4677

1.4630 .

. .000454

cineol

1.4648

1.4598

1.4550

1.4505

1.4462

1.4420 ..

. .000456

eugenol

1.5455

1.5415

1.5374

1.5329

1.5282

1.5236 .

. .0004

saf rol

1.5425

1.5385

1.5343

1.5300

1.5252

1.5205 .

. .000440

terpineol

1.4878

1.4835

1.4792

1.4748

1.4706

1.4664 .

. .000428

citral

1.4929

1.4889

1.4848

1.4802

1.4752

1.4700 .

. .000458

Eepbactive powers by various formulae.

l-X>hellandrene.

l-pinene.

t"

m2 - i/d

a l/rf

n'i-l/(«'i + 2)d

t"

„-i-l/d

n-l/d tii

-l/(na + 2)d

10

13868

5584

3302

10

13321

5386

3198

20

13851

5593

3312

20

13280

5382

3199

30

13849

5598

3323

30

13234

5378

3199

40

13827

5597

3324

40

13206

5374

3203

50

13770

5588

3318

50

13178

5372

3206

60

13696

5571

3319

60

13152

5372

3210

Cineol.

Citral.

t"

n'i - i/d

n-m

«-J-l/(n2+2)d

to

/(••2 I/d

n ■- yd ivi

-l/(».-2-2)d

10

12290

4985

2964

10

136.63

5482

3231

20

12242

4976

2963

20

13653

5485

3238

30

12205

4971

2964

30

13639

5488

3244

40

12175

4968

2967

40

13605

5487

3247

50

12150

4968

2970

50

13565

5481

3248

60

12135

4967

2976

60

13515

5472

3249

1 Zeit. Fhysik. Oieni., 1011, 75, 58;").

Physical Chemistrt/ of Essential Oils.

159

Molecular Kefkactive Power n-lld.M

Substance.

lOo

20"

300

40«

50"

60"

1-phellandrene

75.94

76.06

76.13

76.12

76.00

75.77

d-pineue

72.92

72.96

73.03

73.08

73.12

73.16

1-pinenc

73.24

73.18

73.14

73.08

73.06

73.05

pinene

74.14

74.15

74.14

74.11

74.05

73.96

d-limoueue

73.36

73.38

73.37

73.33

73.29

73.23

cineol

76.76

76.62

76.54

76.50

76.49

76.48

eugenol

83.2U

83.26

83.32

83.30

83.26

83.23

safrol

79.26

79.29

79.32

79.30

79.24

79.18

terpineol

79.66

79.61

79.57

79.52

79.48

79.44

citral

83.32

83.37

83.42

83.40

83.31

83.18

Molecular Eefractions at 20°

a. Found [w^ - l/(n2 + 2)rf . M formulaj

b. Calculated from Atomic liefractionsi

Substance.
1-phellandrene
d-pinene
1-pinene
pinene
d-limonene
cineol
eugenol
safrol
terpineol
citral

45.05

45.25

43.37

43.51

43.48

43.51

44.03

43.51

43.42

45.25

45.63

45.62

48.35

47.37

46.08

45.40

46.45

45.04

49.22

46.78

of atomic refractions, and these have been used to calculate the
theoretical molecular refractions. As will be seen, these are in
excellent agreement with the experimental values in some cases, but
in others, as in that of citral, where the constants of the sample
showed it to be of quite satisfactory purity, the large divergence is
difficult to account for. In the cases of eugenol, safrol, and ter-
pineol, it may be due in part to the unknown influence of ring
formation.

The value for phellandrene lends some support to Wallach's
formula for that terpene, in that it indicates two double Ijonds.

(3) The Rotation.

Considerable attention has been devoted to the influence of tem-
perature on rotation, and from the work of a number of chemists
it appears that the rotation of solids dissolved in non-active sol-

1 Eis^nlohr. Zeit. Physik. Chem., 1911,

160 E. I. Rosenblum :

vents increases when the temperature rises, while that of optically
active liquids decreases.

Guye and Astonl examined some fifty organic liquids, and found
that in all cases except that of amyl alcohol the rotatory power
diminished with rise of temperature. This exceptional case they
explained by the dissociation of i:)reviously associated molecules.

The rotations of the only four terpenes which were optically
active were measured over a range of from 20° to 60^ by means
of a Ptilfrich polarimeter, fitted Avith a device for varying the
temperature of the tube by means of a bath, and the experimental values
are .shown in the accompanying table, while the molecular rotatory
powers - ajlAld.M.- have also been calculated and plotted against the
temperature.

The rotations of d- and 1-pinene are little affected by tempera-
ture change, but slowly decrease as the temperature rises. That
of d-limonene falls 0.134O for every degree rise of temperature,
while phellandrene again shows its abnormal character by a marked
increase of rotation.

In every one of its physical properticvS then, the curious nature
of this terpene, as obtained from the oil of Eucalyptus dives, is
expressed. It appears as if it must either be a mixture of two
terpenes inseparable by distillation, whose equilibrium is upset by
temperature change, or, as seems more probable, the molecules may
be associated at the lower temperatures, as in the case of amyl
alcohol.

Furtlier work may shed more light on this interesting terpene.

Rotation.

to

1-phelIandrene.

d-pineiie.

d-limonene.

I-pinene.

150

-AO.Olo

20O

-65.110

+ 25.11°

+ 81.92°

-.39.860

250

- 65.550

+ 25.09°

+ 81.44°

-.39.6.30

300

- 66.080

+ 25.05°

+ 80.74°

-39.460

40O

^67.020

+ 24.92°

+ 79.19°

-39.090

50o

-87.930

+ 24.78°

+ 77.66°

- 38.760

600

-69.020

+ 24.62'^

+ 76.49°

- 38.440

70O

-70.000

+ 74.85°

...

Molecular Eotations - . - . M

I d

Substance.

200

30O

40"

.500

600

1-phellandrene

103.56

106.12

108.73

111.34

114.08

d-pinene

39.38

39.54

39.72

39.90

40.08

1-pinene

62.42

62.52

62.58

62.63

62.69

d-limonene

124.93

124.33

123.48

122.43

121.30

1 Conipt. Rend., 1897, 124, 194197.
Compt. Kend., 1897, 126, 819-821.

Physical Gheinistt-y of Essential Oils. IGl

0°

I.

Molecular Kefkactivk Power — ^^

10° 20° 30° 40° 50' GO'

70° T
S3.

83

^^^^

««—

o-.*...,^^^

LUGEA

OL

ClTRAl

-1

■

lERPlN

:oL

S^^M

1L

-- i-i^

^^

L

ClNLQl

.^^

.— ^ "^

l.-eHCL

LKNIiT^

tNL

^^

■■ ■•

PlNLNi

-

d-UK

DNENt

— —

r-.

=»«-

i-?it

lEMt

l-Pi

iLNt

re.s

76

162

E. I. Rosenbliun

II.

MOLECTTLAR EOTATOBT PoWER.

30° 40'' 50'

CO" 70° T

ll'3

"^

--^

i- LLin

OTLETVe,

^^

\

/

/

/

/

/

in.Tid

rene

i

/

/

/

L-Klti

iTiE

■ ■

d-jlLTl

ETia

Physical Chemistry of Essential Oils.

COEFFICIKNTS.

Substance.

Density.

Refr.

Index.

notation.

1-phellandrene

.(K)0826

.000480

+ .097

d-pincne

807

UYl

- .01:?

1-pinene

821

464

- .034

pinene

822

470

d-limonene

811

454

-.132

cineol

857

456

eugenol

876

458

saf rol

876

44(J

terpineol

780

428

citral

802

458

SuDiinnri/ .

1. The influence of temperatuie change on tlie density, refrac-
tive index, and rotation of a nunil)er of terpenes and allied sub-
stances has been studied.

2. In the cases of density and refractive index the temperature
coefficients all lie close together, while the divergences from a linear
relation are slight.

3. Laevo-phellandrene, as obtained from the oil of Eucalyptus
dives, is in all its relations somewhat abnormal, and the suggestion
is made that it may form associated molecules at the lower tempera-
tures.

The thanks of the author are due to Dr. Heber Green for the
interest he has shown in this research.

[Proc. Koy. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Pt. II., 1914].

Art XIII. — Singular Parameter Values in the Boundary
Problems of the Potential Theory.

By C. E. weather burn, M.A., B.Sc.

(Ormond College, University of Melbourne).

[Read 9tli July, 1914].

The method of integral equations has been successfully applied
to the boundary problems requiring the determination of poten-
tials, Vs{p) and \(p) satisfying the boundary relations^ —

i^&>-'-£V)]-KS<'-»-£<->]='("

respectively, whether the potentials are ordinary2 corresponding to
Laplace's equation, or " generalised " corresponding to the equa-
tion—

(•2) v-'U-FU = 0

The latter potential I have considered in a paper^ recently com-
municated to the Quartei-ly Journal. It is shewn that solutions to
the problems can be uniijuely determined, except for certain singu-
lar values of the parameter, in the form of potentials of double and
simple strata respectively, given by'* —

(3) i W{r>)^/i{t)n{tp)dt

\ Y{'p)=/(A{pt)t{t)dt.
At a singular i^a'-ivnietei' value A,,, however, the solutions become
intinite, since each of thy functions ii(fp) and (^{pt) has a simple
pole, unless certain conditions are satished. It will be sliewn that
the parts H{tp) and (T{pt) of these functions remaining finite at the
pole Ay, form tlie corresponding functions for the solutions at this
pole of the problems (1), which, however, must be modified"' in their
second members. The residues P(^//) and <.}(pf) of B.{t p) and G:{pt)
respectively, also play an important part in the following argu-
ment.

1 Poineare. " Sur les Equations fie la Physique." Rendicoiiti, Paleinio, ISiU.

2 Plemelj. Moiiatsfefte \\\v Math, umi Physik, Bd. 1.5, .S. ;«7-4U (1!»U4): Brt. 18, 8. 180-211
(1907).

3 " Boundary ]irol)leiiis for tlic <;eiK'iaHsed potential coiiesponfliny to tlie equation
V2u-A;-U = 0." Quarterly Journal, vol. 4G, \^\^. «(J-S2.

4 The integ-ration throujrhout is e.xtended over the boundary of tlie resiou considered, uidess
otherwise stated. The notation of my previous payier is adhered to.

5 Weatherburn, loc. eit. § 0 ; also Plemelj, loc. cit., S. iO\-U.

Pdva/meter Values of Potential Theory. 165

Pleiuelj's work' is (.(HitiiitMl to the ordinary potential and deals
chiefly with the pole \=+l. The present paper extends the in-
vestigation to the generalised potential, and also to the general
pole Ao. For this charaeteristic number, which may be any what-
ever, more general relations are established connecting the resi-
dues and the functions H{tj)) and G(pq), which correspond to the
modified problems. The boundary discontinuities of these func-
tions and their derivatives are investigated, and also certain
theorems of reciprocity. Expansions for the various functions are
found as power series in the parameter A.

In the tirst part of the paper the investigation applies to the
ordinary and generalised potentials alike. In the second part
the ordinary potential is considered separately, and results pecu-
liar to Laplace's equation are obtained which depend either upon
the fact that A=±l are here characteristic numbers, or upon the
special value of the integral of h(tp) extended ovei- the boundary.
Values for the boundary integrals of the different functions are
investigated. Further from the convergence of the above expan-
sions when |Al = l a value is deduced for the conductoi' potential.
It will also be shoAvn that the solutions of thti second boundary
problem for the inner and outer regions ai'e expressible in terms
of a single function.

Finally the case of the generalised potential is considered
separately. The value is found of the integral of Ii(tp) extended
over the boundary, in terms of the potential of a space distribu-
tion of matter. Further relations are found connecting the boun-
dary integrals of the other functions involved.

I. — Ordindry and (jeneralised poientials.

^1. Solntions and flieir p(dex. The solutions of the boundary
problems as given by (o), when expressed in terms of the resolvent
H(^s) become^ —

(3') \ W(p) ^fi{l)[k{fp) + \rR{te)h{(Jp)d6]df.

'. V(p)=/[gU>t) + \/\j{p6)K{et)dd]Uf)df
where

h{ep)=fy{ep)

6 being a point on the boundary, and {/ (p>/) is a particular solu-
tion of Laplace's ecjuation if the potential is ordinary, and of the
equation (2) if it is genei'alised. The value of this function is
given by —

1 Cf. also " PotentialUieoreti&che Untersuchunfjen," Teubner, Leipzig (1911).

2 Cf. Weatherbuin. Loc. cit. § 2.

166 G. E. Weatherhurn:

' ' V yiP'j) = log ^01' t-lie logarithmic potential

y{p'l) = ^' ^or the Newtonian potential
which are solutions of Laplace's equation; and
^^'^ I il(.P<]) ^ -/U''-) fo>" tlie plane

( !?(y"7) = - •«"*'■/*■ ^O'' •'^P^c^

■when the potential is generalised correspduding to the equation
(2). In this /• is the radius vector joining the i)(>ints /; and q,
and f{z) has the same meaning as in my paper already referi-ed
to. The functions H(</j) and G(^0 '^'^'^ equal to tlie correspond-
ing expressions of (3') in st|uare brackets. The foiiuer is an ex-
tension of the solving function in which any ])oint y rejilaces the
boundary point .*;. The latter may be defined more generally for
any two points pq by —

G(m) = 'An) + Vi/(p^)H(%)f^«

This function is the Green's functicni^ for the lioundary problems
(1). It will be seen that H(#/;) can be expressed in terms of it by
normal differentiation, so that both solutions (•)) can be given
in terms of it by a representation of Green's type. It is easily
verified that

j'g{qt)VL{tp)dt = /'G {q()h{tp)dt
.so that the equations defining and connecting these tinutions aie —

(5) j liitp) - hilp) = XJ'h{l6)\l{ep)dd=\i H{/0)h{dp)d&

\ G{qp)~g{qp)^\/cj{qd}K{dp)d6 = k/\;(qO)h{6p)d6

Now when X. is ecjual to a characteristic number (singular value)
Ao, each of the functions 'il{tp) and G{qp) has a simple pole."^ The
solutions expressed by (3) are therefore infinite, and cease to have
.a meaning. Since the pole is simple we mav write —

where IHjp) and <'(/j[') are functions of A, which depend on A,,
and remain tinite when A— A,, ; the residues !'(//>) and A„ Qiqp)
-do not involve A but depend on A„. It iiow v.e siiiistitute from
.(6) in (5), multiply l)y (Ay-A) and pr<icecd to the limit A=A,„

we obtain tlie following relations : —

(7) ( ¥{tp) = \jTite)h{0p)de = Xj7,{tt^)V{Up)dO

) Q(qp)=/y{q6)'P{dp)de = XJ-q(q(J)hidp)de

1 Of. VVeatheibuni. "Green's Functions for the equntioii A "-^ (/-/.-'.!(( =0, etc." (^Hiarterly
Journal, vol. 4G. The remaining references are to my earlier paper.
•2 Weatherburii. Loc. cit. § 3.

Parameter Values of Potential Theory. 167

If again we substitute from (6) in (5) and use tlio i-elations (7)
we find —

^^^ J xfh{td)H{ep}d6=x/ii{te)h{ep)do=ii{tp)-.h{tp) + ~ .p(^;>)

I \fg{qd)H{dp)d e= \rG{qe) h{dp)d 6= G{qp) - cj{qp) V Q.{qp)
These relations are more general than those found for the ordinary
potential by Plemelj, who considers mainly the pole A= +1. They
play an important part in our argument.

The value of 'P{ts) is known, being the residue of tlie resolvent
for the simple pole Xq- I^ '"■ ^^^ the order of multiplicity of the
root Ao of the determinant D{/\), P(^s) may be expressed as the
sum

(9) P{te) = <^,(0<Al(«) + Ut)Hs) + • . • + <t>m{t)^m{s)

where the functions ^i, i//i(i=:l, 2, . . . . m) are the m linearly
independent solutions of the homogeneous integral equations.

<ji{t)=Xo/h{te)<f>{e)de

x(f{t) = ko/^{0)h{dt)de
satisfying the usual orthogonal relations. Hence the values of P{tp)
.and Q,{qp) are given by

(9') j -P{tp) =cfy,{t)4,,{p)+ +<f>mmm{p)

\ Q{qp) = ^i{q)hip)+ +^m{?)MP)

where ^(q) is the potential of a simple stratum of density (j>{t) over the
boundary, and i/^Qj) is that of a double stratum of moment Xa^(t).
If we introduce the functions

^^^) jk{tp) = h{tp)-\-P{tp)

we are enabled to express (8) in a form exactly similar to (5). For
if in the first of (8) we replace p by 0, multiply throughout by
V(Op) and integrate over the boundary, we find in virtue of (T)
that

/H(te)V{ep)dd =/F{td)H{Op)de = o.

Similarly it may be proved that

J G{qd)V{dp)dd =/Q{qe)H{ep)d6 = 0.

These integrals may therefore be combined with the integrals in (8)
without altering their values, so that the relations may be
Avritten

(11) ( \j'k{tO)H{ep)de = xf H{td)k{ep)dd = H(tp) - k{tp)

1 Xfl{qB)H{ep)dd = \fG{qd)k{ep)de^G{qp)-l{qp)
which are of the same form as (5); but G^qj)), as will be seen, is
the Green's function for the modified problems, and H {tp) bears
the same relation to it that H(#j5) bears to G(5'jp).

3a

168 C. E. Weatherburn :

^2. — Bouiuhtnj discqut inuifitx. — The second of equations (9)
shows that Q {qj)). regarded as a function of r/, is the potential
of a simple stratum of density ^(Op). From the boundary pro-
perties of such it follows that

Adding and subtracting we find for the normal derivative of
Q{qp) on either side of the boundary

1ao|q(^» = (1-A,)P(^^.)

Regarded, however, as a fuiictiou of p, Q (qp) is a double stratum
potential of moment X^Qi?^)- Henco
) i[Q(^^+)-Q(g<-)] = A„Q(<?0

» lSQ{qt-) + Q{qi+)] = xjQ{qe)h{et)dd=q(qt)

Adding and subtracting we have for the values of Q (qp) on either
side of the boundary

(13) jQ{qt + ):={i+K)Q{qt)

\ Q{qt-) = {l-K)Q{^f)

Similarly P (sp) as a function of p is a double stratum of
moment X(,^{sO) ; and its values on either side of the boundary are-
found in the same way to be

(14) I F{st+) = {]+X,)-P{st)
\-p{.sf.-) = {\-X,)P{sl)

From the second of equations (10) G(qp), regarded as a function
of ^ is the sum of potentials g(qp), —Q,{qp), and a simple stratum
of density Xff(Op). From the behaviour of tliese at the boundary,
and in virtue ..f (12), it follows

ir^,a^f~p)+ lG(t^p)'] = X/HW)H{Op)dO + /,{tp)-T{tp)/X,
Lan ail J

^H{tp)
Addiiiir and sul)sti-actin<'- we find

(15)

\^!^

{t~r) = {\+x)iJ{tp)-V(fp)

^a{f+p) = {l-X)H(tp) + F{tp)

Parameter Values of Potential Tlieory : 1 69

Regarded, however, as a function of p, G(qp) is a double stratum
potential of moment XG{gB), together with potentials g{qp) and
— Q(gp). From the boundary properties of these we deduce

(16) ^G{gt + )={1 + \)G{gt) - XMi^t)
lG{qt ) = {l-\)G{qt)+XMqt)

Finally H{sp) regarded as a function of p is the sum of potentials
h{sp), —'P(sp)IXg, and a double stratum of moment X/I(s$). From
which it follows, in virtue of (14) that

(17) I H{st + ) = ( 1 + X)II{ St) - V{st)
il{{st-) = ( 1 -X)II(.st) + P{st)

§3. — Solution regular at a singular parameter value. — We are
now in a position to find solutions to the boundary problems (1),
with second members modified, having no singularities for the
characteristic number X^. If we define the functions W{p) and
V{p) Ijy

(18) ^w{p)=/i{d)H{ep)de
lv{p)=fG{pd)i{e)de

we find on suljstituting the values of H{Op) from (8) that W{p) is
the sum of potentials of double strata of moments f(;;), -/"f (^)P^0^^5
and X/'i{6)JI{6t)d6 respectively.
Hence we find that

h[W{t+) - ir(^-)] -u[ir(^+)+ w{t^)]

= i(t) -/i{e}F{et)dd + xfi {6)H{et) do

- xf{ f {(f>)h{(f>t) -ft {d)F(e(f>)h{cf>t)de + xfi{e)H{0(fi)h{(jit)de]dcf>

In virtue of (8) the second member disappears except for the first
two terms. So that W(p) satisfies the boundary condition.

(19a) i,[Wit+)- n'{t-)] - hx[ W{t+) + w{t-)]=f{t) -fi(e)F{dt)dd

In this all the function.s are regular when A=/\„ ; so that
this equation admits the solution W{p) which is regular even
when X is put e(|ual to the singular value A^. It has been shown
elsewhere^ tliat for this value of the parameter tlie first problem (1)
does not admit a solution by double stratum unless the condition

/f(^)P(^0^^ = 0
is satisfied, in whicli case the solution is obviously TI (/?).

Similarly substituting the value of G{pd) given by (8) we find
that V{p) is the sum of potentials of simple sti'ata of densities i{t),
-j"P{te)i{e)d6 and X/H(te)i (0)dO. From the boundary pro-
perties of simple strata it follows that

= i{t) -f P{td)i{e)de-\-xfH{te) f {e)de

- xf/i{tcf>) [f (<^) -/'P{ci>e)t(6)dd+x/Ji(<fiO)i{0)dO]d<f>

1 Weathevburn. " Boundary Problems, etc," J (J.

170 C. E. Weatherhurn

In virtue of (7) and (8) the second member reduces to the first two-
terms; so tliat V(p) satisfies the boundary problem.

All the functions involved are regular for the singular value X = Ao,
so that F(/j) is the solution of the problem (19b) regular even when
X is equal to this singular value. The problem (lb) does not
admit a solution by simple stratum only, Avhen X=Ap, unless the
condition

/F{te)i{e)d$=:0

is satisfied, in which case the required solution is obviously V(p),
Tlie problems (19), derived from (1) by altering the second member,
we shall speak of as the modified problem for the singular value Ao-
The functions H(t-p) and G{2)t) bear the same relation to the solution
of the modified problems that 'H.(fp) and G{pf) bear to the original
problems (1).

iil. — Expansions. — From the formulae (8) and (18) we may ob-
tain, by the method of successive approximations, expansions for
the various functions in ascending powers of X. These are cer-
tainly true for | X | < 1, and in particular cases even for jXl^l.
For the present we shall assume that the absolute value of X is less
than unity.

Thus from (8) in virute of (7) we find

(20) [H{ts)=^[]i{ts) - IP(^«)] +x[a,(<s) - \-;P{ts)]

G{ps)=[g{ps) -q{ps)-\ + x]^l,{ps)- ^ q{ps)\

+ >^'[0.{ps) -\.^{Vs]+ ••••
where the suflixes denote functions formed by successive operations

h,{ts) = /h{t6)h{es)de,
h.lts)=/K{te)h{es)dd, etc.
and

g,{ps)=/c,(j^e)h{e.)d6,

r,.Xps)=/g,{p$)Hes)de, etc.
If Ave extend the notation and repbue •>-• by any point p we may
write

h^(t/>)=/ h(te)h(ep)d6,
h,,{fp)=/hn^,{fe)/i{ep)de, etc.

Pantiiietrr Vulues of Potential Theory. 171

and the tirst c(|uati()n ("iO) becomes

("^') |^(^y;)=.[/K//>)-|T(<;.)]+A[A,(/;>)-lp(/p)]+ ...

Introducinp' these values in (18) we have, for the solutions of the
boundary problems (li))

(21) I w{p)=/no){[h{ep)^lF{ep)'] +x[a,(^p)-1p(p^)] + .. }d^.

) np)==/{[y{j>0)-Q{pe)] + x[g,ip6)-lQ{j>0)'^ +..]HO)dO.

We may further obtain expansions for the moment i'(/,), and the
density [ji{t) of the strata satisfying (19); for these are solutions of
the integral equations

( v{t) - Xfv{6)h{$t)de=i{t) -/i{0)F(Ot)dO=^{t), say
I ix{t) - X/h{tO)fjL(d)dd=i{t) -/P{tO) iiO)dd = F{t), say,

and are therefore given by the expansions

(22) I v(0=E(0+AEi(0 + A%(0+ ....

) fM{i)=F{t)+\F,'{t)+X,F,'{t)+ ....

where the successive functions are given by

E,{t)=/F40)h(ef)dH

E.,(t)=rE,{6)h{6t.)d6, &c.
and

¥,'(()=/ h{te)F{6)de

F.J{f)=/h{td)Fi'{0)de, &c.
If we evaluate these functions we find

Ea{t)=/l(e)h„,_-^(6t)dO-\/i{0)F{ef.)dO

Fn'(0 =J'K- imi {0)de - ^/P{fO) HO)dB

If now we form double and simple strata with moment and density
given by (22) we find exactly the series (21) over again.

§5. — Forimd(E of Reciprocity. — The Green's function G(p5)
admits certain theorems of reciprocity. The argument used to
establish these for the ordinary potential^ is equally valid for the
generalised, the symbols having their altered significance. These
relations may be stated

i. If the points p and q are both in the same region or both on
the Ixiuiidary

(23) G(/^) = C(y/)

1. Pleraelj. F.oc. fit., S. 39fi-3i)8.

172 C. E. Weatherbuim :

ii. If p is a point of the iuiier region, </ of the outer, and t a
point on the boundary.

(24) (1+A)G(;.^)=(1-X)G(^/.)

G(tp) = {l-\-X)G{pt)
G{t^)={l-k)Q{^t)
From (23) and (6) we deduce immediately that if p and q are
both in the same region, or both on the boundary,

(25) ( Q{p^) = QU/p)

If, however, p and ^ are in the inner and outer regions respectively,
we find on substituting from (G) in the first of (24), multiplying by
Aq— A and putting A=:Ao

(26) ^{\+X,)Q(p^) = {l-X,)q{^p)

I (1+a)6'(m)=(1 -^)G(^p)+j^^-Q(n')

Similarly from the second and third of (24) we find

(27) ( Q{tp) = (l+X,)Q(pf,)
I Q(^.;)==(l-A„)Q(./0

and thence

(28) S 0{fp) = {\ +X)G(pt)-X,q(pt)
( G{t^) = {l-k)G{^/t)+X,Q{^/t)

II. — The ordinary pofeiti led.

§6. — Integral Relatione. — The preceding properties are common
to ordinary and generalised potentials. We know, however, that
while the values A:= + l, Avhich correspond to the problems for the
inner and outer regions separately, may both be characteristic
numbers for the ordinary potential, they are nofl singiilar for the
generalised. The properties arising from the existence of these
poles are then peculiar to the ordinary potential. Other special
relations arise from the fact that foi' this potential the function
h(tp) satisfies ihe integral relation2

(29) /h{tp)dt=2, 1, or 0

according as p is within the closed surface, on the l)oundary or
outside, and the integration is extended over the boundary. W©
shall find furthci- on a cori-esponding formula for the generalised
potential from which tliis may be deduced by putting A;=0.

Let us suppose that tiie boundary consists of m independent
surfaces each possessing at every ])oint a definite tangent plane
and two definite principal radii of curvature. The value A=l

1. Weatherburu. Loc. cit., § 3.

2. I'lemelj. Noc. cit., S. ^41-4. Another proof is 1).\ (Jrecn's TheoriMii as in S i) of this pujier.

Parameter Values of Potential Theory. 173

is always sinj^ular. We shall assume that the surfaces are all
exterior to one another, so that X. = — 1 is not a characteristic
number. The functions P(^s) and Q{ts) assume simple values at the
pole Ao=l. For the functions i/'i(«), ^i{s), • . • , >/'/«(*) are such that
i/',.(,s-) is equaP to + 1 over the rth surface and zero over all the
other surfaces; while 4)r{t) is a distribution of electricity over
the surfaces giving constant values over each of the surfaces
and rli)-oughout each of the vi inner regions. This distribution
<f)r(/) has a total charge +1 over the rth surface, and zero over
each of tIic otlieis. It tliere-fore represents the electric distribution
over the ;/( surfaces regarded as conductors, due to unit charge on
the rth sui-face. Hence, if we use an index to denote the particular
value of the pole A..,.

F+^{ts) = (f>y{t) rr^l, 2, .... Ill

according as .»>• is on the 1st. 2nd, wth surface. Fui'ther, the func-
tion if/r(p), being ecpial to the potential of a double stratum of unit
moment over the rth sui'face. is given bv

(30) if,,{/>)=jli{tp)</t = '2, 1, or 0

according as /> is within the rth surface, on its boundary, or out-
side that surface. The jjotential <I>r(^) due to the distribution
<f>r(^) is the conductor jxitential refei'red to. We shall denote it by
rr(^). So tliat

(31) i F + Uj.p) = 2cl>,{f), ^At), or 0

) Q + \>/p) = 2Vr{(j), VrW), or 0
according as p is witiiin the rth surface, on its boundary, or in the
outer region. This of course is a particular case of (13) and (14).
We may prove several interesting properties of the functions in-
volved in (5), (7) and (8), making use of the relation (29). If in
the first of (7) we replace p by a boundary point «, multiply by dt
and integrate over the boundary we find

/P(fs)dt = XjP{Os)dO
Hence

(32) /P(ts)dt=0 Ao±l.

By the .same process we deduce from (5) thaf^

(33) {l~\)/H(ts)dt=\

Substituting from (6) and putting Ay = 1 we have
(33') (1 -\)/ H+\ts)dt + jP + \ts)dt=l

1. Plemelj. Loc. cit., Kap. 16.

* In (32) X may be replaced by a i)oiiit p. The same may be done in (33) and (34') provided the
second member be changed to 2 for p in the inner reyion, and to 0 for p in the outer region. Cf. § 10.

174 C. E. Weatherbiirn :

This is an identity in A, and P+^(<s) does not contain X. We may
therefore put X— 1 giving

/P+Hts)dt=l
which may also be deduced from (31) in virtue of the properties of
the distribution <^r(0- This last relation combined with (33')
shows that

(34) /H+Hts)d(=0

while from (32) and (33) it follows that

(34') {1-Xyil[ts)dt = l A,±l.

This may also be proved from the first of (8), multiplying by df
and integrating over the boundary.

^7. — Expansions. — The second member of the equation (19a)
assumes, when X,, =1. the form

E(0 = f (0 -./■£ {0)<l>riO)de = f (0 - Gr
r= I, 2, . . . . , m
according as f is on the 1st, 2nd . . . ?»th surface.

The series (22a) now becomes, by (29)

(35) v{t) = [i{t)-Gr] + X[f,{t)-Gr]+X\Ut)-Cr]+ ....

and since v(^) noAv possesses no pole at X= +1, while X= — 1 is not
a singular value, this series is convergent for |Aj = l. The terms
therefore decrciise indefinitely, and we have for the constant Or
the value!

n= cc

=Lt j'i{6)hn{et)de

n=cc

whei-e f is on tlie rth surface. The constant C,- assumes m different
constant values, one on eacli of the surfaces.

In (35) we may put A= + 1 and tluis obtain tlie moments of the
strata, which satisfy i-espectively the boundary problems.
W(<-)=-[f(0-C,]

W{t+)=i{t)-Or

The singular value A — I also corresponds to the second problem
for the inner region. The second member of (19b) for this pole
takes the form

V{t)=i{t)-/'P{te)i{e)d6

^i{f)-MnfHO)dO = i(t)
provided the usual condition for the inner region, viz.,

/i{e)dO = 0
be satisfied. The function /u(^) represented by (22b) now becomes

(36) fL{t) = i{t) + Xi,'{t)-i-X\'{t)+

1 Cf. Plemelj. Potentialtheorctische lliitersuch\iiigeii, S. 60.

Parameter Values of Potential Theory. 1 7.>

It lias no piilf at /\= +1, while \= — 1 is not a singular value.
The series is therefore convergent for |A.1=1- In (36) we may put
\=±1 and thus obtain the densities of the simple strata which
satisfy respectively the boundary problems

da

The series for the solutions (21) may be obtained from that equa-
tion by substituting the values of PC'^p) and Q(pO). Further, if
Ao=I, the functions II+^{ts) and Cr-^^{ps) given by (20) have no
pole at \=1, while \=i — 1 is not a singular value. The series are
therefore convergent for jA| = l, so that the terms decrease indefi-
nitely. It follows that

giving the electric distribution^. <j>r{t) in terms of the iterated
functions hn(ts) : the limit assuming one of m different values,
according to the surface upon which -'j lies: Similarly fiom the
convergence of the second series (20) for lA|=l, it follows that

II = »

i.e.
(37) V,.{t)=U g,,{ts)

'll = CC

giving the conductor potential Vr(fj as the limit of the sequence
gi{ts), g^i^-'^)- ■ ■ ■ which assumes m different values according to
the surface on which s lies.

§8. — Solution of fhe second hnundary problem for both inner
and outer regions in terms of (t single function. — In the second
boundary proljlem the values A=±l correspond to the inner and
outer regions respectively. The former of these values is the only
pole involved. The boundary problem (19b) becomes, for Ao=U
and A=±l equivalent to the sepai-ate problems represented by

^ ' ^ ^(t+)=~i(t) for A=+l

dn

'^^{r)=HO for A=:-l

where in the former the boundary function i{t) is subject to the
usual integral condition. The solutions to the problems given by
(18) may be written
(39) r(p)=/Gll(pO)i(e)dO

and

v{p}=/vtl(pe)t(e)de

1 Cf. Potentialtheoretische Untersuchuiiuen S. 5S>.

176 G. E. Weatlierhurn :

respectively, where the index represents the pole Xq= + 1 and the
suffix the particular value of A. As noAv the pole Xo= + 1 is the
•only one to be considered we may drop the index in what follows.
These two solutions are expressed in terms of different functions
<T + \{ps) and G^iips). It is our object to express both of these in
terms of a single function. By means of the second equation (8)
w^e may write

(40) ( G^,{ps)^/G^,{pe)h{6s)d6=g{j^s)-T{r)

» G-,{vs)+/G^,{pe)h{e.^)de^g{ps) - v{p)

If we put

{1B{ps) = G^r{ps) + G i(;«)

\ 2R,{ps) = G^,{ps)-G ^,{ps)
we obtain from the preceding by adding and subtracting

(41 ) ( R{ps)-fR,Xpe)h{es)de=g{ps) - Tip)
' Ri{p^^)-/R{pO)h{0s)de=O

This last equation expresses B^ps) in terms of B(ps}; hence we
may determine both G + i(ps)iind G-.\{p^) in terms of the single
function S(ps). From (41) we find rliat F{p.<i) satisfies the integral
equation

B(ps) -/R(pe)h,{Os)dd=<j(ps) - T{p).

As in §4, by the method of successive approximations, this integral
•equation gives us an expansion for R{ps) and hence for R^(ps). We
find

( R{ps) = lffip.)-V{p)] + \!UP'^)-r{p)] + [ff,{ps)-T(p}]+ . .
\ Ii,{P^^)=[y,{px)-V{p)]-\-[g.,lps)-T(p)]+ . . .
Avhich are both convergent, being identical with tliose obtained by
adding and subtracting the absolutely convergent sei'ies for G + i{ps)
«-nd G- lips).

The solutions of the second boundary problem for both the inner
and the outer regions could also be expressed in terms of the
function K(ts) introduced by Plemelj.i For from (8) we find

G + \ps) - \l\j{pe)U^^ds)d6=z<i{ps)-T{p)
In this we may putAr:r±l in turn, and thus obtain G + iips)
and G-iips) in terms of H+i{ts) and 7/_i(te) respectively, and
hence in terms of li(fn). Introducing the values of tlie functions
we find

G + i{ps)=y{ps)- Tip) +/;/(]>e)\ K(Os) +/h{6(r)K{crs)dcT\de
= yips)-Tip) +/g(pe)K(ds)d6 +/g,(pO)K{Os)dO
Similarlv

G_,ips)=;,{ps)--Tip) -/(/ip6)Ki0s)d0+/;/,{pe)Ki0s)d6

So that the solutions for both legions may be expressed in terms
of K(ts).

1. Potent. Unter. S. 79.

Paraweter Values of Potential Theory. 177

III. — The (jeneralised potential.

§9. — Fundaweutal formula. — Tlif siiiipk' forms taken bv the in-
tegrals of §6 depend upon tlio fonnidu (2i)), whieh is true only for
the ordinary jjotential. 1 now propose to find the value of the
integral

n,{tp)dt

when the potential is -generalised. corres{)ondin^ to the equation
(2). In Green's formula

put U = l, and \=y[qj)), q being a variable point and y a fixed
point. If in (42) the integration is extended over a closed surface
and }} is outside the surface we find, since r/iqp) satisfies (2)

(43) fh{tp)dt= - }^/<j{qp)dg

where dq is the element of volume at q. The integration in the
second member being extended throughout the volume enclosed by
the surface, the integral represents the potential at p due to a
uniform distribution of mass of unit density throughout that
volume. We shall denote this potential by X(/>).

If, however, p is inside the closed surface we must surround j^ hy
a small sphere Q, of radius ?•, the surface integration of (42) now-
including the surface of this sphere, and the volume integration
extending only throughout the volume between the sphere and the
original surface. At the small sphere the positive direction of the
normal is that of /• increasing, so that (42) becomes

/h{tp)dt + ky{gp)d^=-J^,g(sp)ds=:l/2^Je-'^'{ l+^.jds
il il

and when the radius of the sphere becomes vanishingly small the
second member is equal to 2. Hence when /; is within the closed
surface

(44) fh{tp)dt = -2-ky'g{q2y)dq='2-k^X{p)

the volume integral of the second member being convergentl since-
the subject of integration becomes infinite at p — q only as \ir.

To find the value of fh{ts)dt where s is a point on the boundary
we observe that fh{tp)dt is a double stratum potential of unit
moment over the boundary. Hence its value at a point on the
surface is the mean of its values at points infinitesimally close to-
this, one just inside and the other just outside. So that

(45) fh{ts)dt= 1 -hrfg{gs)dq

= l-A;^X(s)

1 Cf. Leathern. " Volume and surface intejrrals used in Physics," p. H (Canibrid<fe Tract, 19U5)-

178 C. E. Weatherburn : Parameter Valines.

1^10. — Further relations. — By means of " the preceding results we
may obtain relations corresponding to those of §6 for the ordinary
potential. From the first equation (7) we find on multiplying by
dt and integrating over the boundary,

/F{tp)dt=Xj[l-Ic'X{6)]F(dp)dO
that is,

(46) (1 -Ao yFitp)dt= -k-'\JX{d)V{dv)dd

which reduces to (•■32) when /.-^ is put equal to zero. Similarly from
the first of (8) we find on integration with respect to t
)^/[\-k'X{d)]H(ej7)d$=/B(tp)dt-c-^lc'X{p)
-l/F{tp)dt
-or

(47) {i-xyn{tp)d(=c-k:'X(p)-xkyx(0)iJ(ep)d6

^J^---/x{e)Fi0p)dd

1— Afl

where c has the value 2, 1, or 0, according as p is Avithin the inner
region, on the boundary, or in the outer region. This relation
reduces to (33) when k is zero and p on the boundary.

Tliese might have been derived from (5), the first of wliicli be-
comes on integration

(48) {l-X)/H(f.p)df=c-PX{p)-X/rrX(0)Ji{ep)de

Substituting from (6), multiplying by (A.,, — A) and proceeding to
the limit A=Ao "^^'e arrive at (46). Then substituting from this
in (48) we find (47).

The preceding investigation deals with the singular parameter
values of the first two boundary problems only. In another paper ^
the author considers the third boundary problem for the equation
(2), requiring the determination of a solution satisfying the rela-
tion

^(^+)=A/?(ov(^^)-^(OU(o

The singular parameter values for this problem are there discussed.

1 Weatherburn. "The mixed boiuuiai-y problem for the geiieraUsed potential correspond in;.;-
to the equation y -i m- A:-2it = 0." Qniirterly .Journal, vol. 46, pp. 83-04.

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Part II., 1914.]

Art. XIV.— O/j. the. Geographical DistrihvAion of the Sea-
Grasses.

A Premminaky Communication.

By 0. H. OSTENFELD

(Copenliag-en, Denmark).

Ooimuiinieated by Professor A. J. Ewar
[Read October 8tli, 1914.]

For several years I have been studying the geographical distri-
bution of the Marine Flowering Plants, as it seemed to me that it
miglit have some general value hoth from a phylogenetic and a
geological point of view.

We owe most of our kiiowledge on these plants to the late P.
Ascherson, who, during a series of years, contributed to their
study, and A\as much interested in their geographical distribution.

Some considerations will show why I think this phytogeographical
study may be of more general interest.

The marine flowering plants — or sea-grasses — belong to two
monocotyledonous families — viz.. Hydrocharitaceae and Potamo-
(jetonaceae, Iwth of which are included in the cohort Helohime.
Tliis cohort consists of several families, nearly all of which are
water-plants (or swamp-plants). They are very distinct from the
other monocotyledons, and undoubtedly represent old types.

Sometimes it has been urged that from this cohort most of the
othei- Monocotyledons and Dicotyledons have originated. Be that
as it may, the Helobieae fni'm an especially well-marked group
within which the families show a progi'ession from types with
many fi'ee superior carpels to otheis with one syucarpous infei'ior
ovary. In all the families, genera witli one or a few species pre-
vail, and within the whole cohort only one genns. Potamogeton (the
Pondwoed). is really rich in species. It seems as if, in most cases,
the developing power of the genera has been checked.

The sea-grasses belong to —

(1.) 3 genera of Hydrocharitaceae — viz.: Halophila, Enhalus
And Thulassia, all widelv different from one another: and to

180 C. H. Ostenfeld:

(2) 5 genera of Fofamogetonaceae — viz. : C ymodocea, Diplarv
thera, Posidonia, Zostera, and Phyllosjjodix. The tAvo first and
the two last respectively are closely related to each other. Thus-
it might be possible to classify these 5 genera also into three
groups, each group widely differing from the others.

The systematic position of tlie sea-grasses, their aquatic habitat,
and the great structural differences between the genera, all point
to their great phylogenetic age.

The natural agent of dispersal of the sea-grasses is the sea cur-
rents, as the fruits in no case ripen above the water. The Potamo-
getoriaceae have droupe-like fruits, the epicarp of which is a
rather thin, fleshy cover of inconspicuous colour. The Hydro-
charitaceae have a berry, also of inconspicuous colour, containing
either many small seeds (//alojdrila). oi- a few large ones {Enhalus^
and y // ala.su io). In Zosfera (of the Potamogetonaceae) the epi-
carp, but in Enhalus and Thahisx/a tie -whole j-eritarp splits-
open, and ill all the genera the " stones," or seeds, then drop out.
As the fruits or seeds of the .sea-grasses do not possess a floating
apparatus, they are always heavier than water, and consequently
the migration of the species must be very slow.

Besides tliis transportation by means of currents, it is possible
— but not very probable— that certain fishes, and sea-mammals,
such as the Dugong and Manatee, and turtles, may eat the fruits
and thereby contribute to their distribution.

Tlie dispersal by means of detached shoots, which float in the
water, is almost negligible, as they do not live long when floating.

Being green antotiophous plants, the sea-grasses can grow
only in shallow water where the light is sufficient for assimilation
— i.e., they grow only along the coasts. The depth at which they
grow varies in the different species and in different seas. In
northern seas (cf/., Davish), the deeper limits of .^'os^^/y/ lie at about
10 meters. In tlie Mediterranean, J'oxido/iia grows at greater-
depths, though I cannot accept without further evidence the record
of its occurrence at a depth of about ")() meters.

The slow manner oi dispersal and the necessity of sliallow water
are factors which restrict the ai-ea of occun-ence of the sea-grasses.

Of the 8 genera mentioned above, Enhalus is monotypic. It
occurs in the wliole of the tropical Indopacifir region. Tlip Zostrra
genus consists of two or more sjiecies.

With the exception of PJn/llo.spadi.i, a younger type derived from
Zostera, and restricted to the northern Pacific, each genus inhabits.

raphical DiMrihution of Sea-Grasses. 1 H 1

both tlie Iiidopatilic and the Atluiitic regions. And, as nearly all
are tropical, sub-tropical, or warm-temperate plants (Zosfera being
the only one which reaches the cold regions), the occurrence of the
same genus in l)oth regions indicates that the genera are so old
that tliey originated at a time when the distribution of sea and
land was very different from tliat at pi'esent — this time being at
least not later than Early Tertiary. 1 It is not probable that such
heat-requiring plants could^ have migrated from the Indopacific,
where they most probably originated, into the Atlantic, through
the cold waters either around the Cape of Good Hope or Cape
Horn.

Thus their distribution seems to indicate the great age of the
sea-grasses, as does their low place in the natural system of the
Phanerogams.

Hence it will, I think, be obvious- that a detailed study of the
geographical distribution, bearing in mind their systematic affini-
ties, may possibly throw some light on the evolution of the sea-
grasses, on the distribution of sea and land, and on the age of
the present land-bridges or land-barriers separating the oceans.

The 8 genera of sea-grasses contain altogether only 30 species,
most of them having a wide distribution, as is often the case with
water plants.

It will be convenient to arrange them into several groups accord-
ing to their geographical distribution, instead of treating each
species separately.

1. — Indopacific grovp (7 species), i.e.. species which grow in
the Red Sea. along the coasts of East Africa and of tlie East-
African Isles, along the south and south-eastern coasts of Asia, in
the Malay Archipelago, the islands of the Pacific, and, in some
cases, also on the tropical coast of Australia.

II. — Malayan group (4 species), /.^., species found in the Malayan
region : south-eastern coast of Asia, Malay Archipelago, and the
tropical coast of Australia.

III. — East-African group (2 species), i.e.. species found only in
the Red Sea, along the coasts of East-Africa and of the East-
African isles.

IV. — Carihhean group (6 species), i.e., species occurring along
the coasts of the islands of the Caribbean Sea, Florida, and the
north-coast of South America, some extending as far as the Ber-
mudas.

idunia, perhaps even Upper Cretaceous.

182 C. H. Ostenfeld:

V. — Australia fi r/roiip (5 species), i.e., species found along the
western and southern coasts of Australia and all round Tasmania,
some extending as far as Queensland and New Zealand.

VI. — Mediterranean groirp (2 species), i.e., species occurring in
the Mediterranean and reaching the Atlantic coasts at the numtli
of the Mediterranean.

VII. — North-Facific (jronp (2 species), i.e.. species occurring
along the North-Pacific coasts of North America, and (one species)
also along the coasts of Japan.

VIII. — North-ttmperate group (2 species), i.e.. species occurring
in the northern (cold and temperate) parts of both the Atlantic
and the Pacific oceans.

Of these eight groups. I. -IV. are tropical. V.-VI. icann-femperate
(or subtropical), and VII. -VIII. temperate.

I. The Indo pacific yronp consists of 7 species — viz. : Halophila
ovalis; Enlialus acoroides; Thalassia Hemprichii ; Cymodocea isoeti-
folia; Cymodocea rutundata ; Cymodocea serrulata ; Diplanthera
uninervis

Halophila ovalis has the widest area of distribution, as it reaches
the western and southern coasts of Australia. Taken as a whole,
the geographical area of this group is larger than that of any other
(perhaps except that of Zostera marina). It is probable that the
group represents the direct offspring of tlie old types of sea-grasses
and that it inhabits their old area.

II. The Malayan group has four species, viz. : Halophila devi-
piens, Halophila ovata, Halophila Beccarii, Halophila spinulosa.
All these species are rare, being found only in a few places, but
it is pi'obal)le that further search will show that they have a wider
distiibution. so that the group may perhaps be included in the
Indopacific one.

[It is worth noting that //. spinulosa differs widely from all other
species of Halophila. and is probably of great age. Being of
quite characteristic habit, and also conjparutivcly cuns])ieuous. it
is not probable that it has been overlooked im the continiental
coasts of the Indian Ocean, from which it has not yet been re-
ported; it seems, in fact, to be restricted to the .Malay legion.]

HI. The East-African group has only two niciiibers — viz. : Halo-
phila stipulacea, Cymodocea ciliata. They aic routined to the
Red Sea and the western side of the Indian Oeean. (C. ciliata has
been reported from .Australia in eiror for ('. .^erndata.)

Geographical Distribution of Sea-Grasses. 18o

The two gioups. II. and III., are naturally placed as ^slll)divi^S
fiions of group 1.. and i-epresent two lines of differentiation finiii
the main l)ody of species, with its wider distiihution.
They show species, which have not yet attained their limits
of distribution, as it seems hard to understand that a species dis-
tributed along the shores of the lied Sea and the western side of
the Indian Ocean, should not be able to live along the Asiatic and
-Malay coasts, and rice versa . The absence of llalopJtila spiniilosa
from the Indian Ocean, and that of //. xtipulacea and C i/itiodocea
viliata from the Malay Archipelago, are further indicative of the
slow rate of niigration of the sea-grasses. These Avell characterised
species must have existed as such for a long time, probably as long
as a connection between the Indian and the Pacific oceans existed.

IV. The Caribbean group.

Halophila Aschersonii.

Halophila Engelmanii.

Halophila Baillonis.

Cymodocea manatorum.

Diplanthera Wrightii.

Thalassia testudinum.

This group contains 4 genera with 6 species. Four of these (one
of each genus — are so nearly related to 4 species of the Indopacitic
group, that — at least, in some cases — the characters distinguishing
them from one another are quite slight.

The 4 pairs of species are the following : —

indopacific :

Halophila decipiens.

Thalassia Hemprichii.

Cymodocea isoetifolia.

Diplanthera uninervis

Caribbean :

Halophila Baillonis.

Thalassia testudinum.

Cymodocea manatorum.

Diplanthera Wrightii.

I think it is advisable to draAv the conclusion that these 4 pairs
originated from 4 parent species, which were widely distributed
in the tropical seas, and that the present differentiation was sulj-
sequent to an alteration in the extension of sea and land — in otiier
words : the Caribbean species arose in their present area from
ancestors which came to the Caribbean Sea from the Indopacific

184 C. H. Ostenfeld:

at a time when the isthmus of Panama was not finally formed.
From geological evidence, it is usually agreed that the isthmus is
of Tertiary age. and the differentiation of the Caribbean species
is consequently more recent. The close resemblance of each species
to an Indopacific one agrees very well with this supposition.
Their i-estricted geographical areas may be similarly explained.

Two of them have reached the Bermudas, and this migration
accords with the direction of the Gulf Stream drift, which has
a very strong flow from the coast of Florida towards the north-
west, washing on its way the shores of the Bermudas. With this
exception, none of the Caribbean species has yet become distributed
in the Atlantic outside the Caribbean region. Although it may
be admitted that our knowledge of the sea-coast flora of South
America is imperfect, it is hardly likely that any rich sea-grass
vegetation, if existing, could have remained unreported.!

Besides the 4 Caribbean species having their Indopacific partners,
two species of Halophila also occur in the Caribbean region, one
in the northern part (Florida and Bahamas), and the other in the
southern parts (Antilles to Pernambuco). They are very closely
allied, and must have come from a common ancestor. On the other
hand, they are quite distinct from other species of Halophila, and
no allied species has yet been found in the Indopacific region. It
is possible that such a form may yet be found, but it is also pos-
sible that it has had its day and then died out there, and that the
Caribbean forms are the only remnants now existing of this par-
ticular section of the genus.

V. The Australian groujj. I have referred 5 species to thig
group, but it is not so homogeneous as I could wish :

Cymodocea antarctica.

Posidonia australis.

Zostera capricorni.

Zostera Mueller i.

Zostera tasmanica.

The systematic value of the three species of Zostera is somewhat
uncertain. It is possible that they ought to be reduced to two. and
even one of these might perhaps be united with Z. nana. Their
area of occurrence is along the east coast of Australia, from Cape
York southwards to Tasmania, and along the eastern part of the

1. Anioiipst the sea-jfrasses on record from the -Afrie^an .side of the Atlantic, there is a sterile
species of Diplantlwia, found at Loanda (Guinea). Whether it is the Caribbean D. Wrightii or,
more probably, the Indopacific D. uninervig, already recorded from the East-coast of Africa, it
is impossible to say.

Geog rap] ileal Dif<tribut!on of Sf'a-Grasses. IS-")

south coast (how far \vest\Yards 1 do not know); also in New Zea-
land and in one place on the coast of Chili. Thus the area covers
the temperate part of the South-Pacific, with an outpost in the
Tropics at Cape York.

The discussion of the orifi:in of this part of the Australian group
will be postponed and taken together with that of other species
of Zostera.

The other section of the Australian group consists of two species.
The first — Cymodncea anforcfica — stands somewhat isolated with-
in the genus. It is quite different from its nearest ally, the East-
African C ciliofa, and it must be supposed to be an old species.
The other — Fosidonm ausfralls — has only one congeneric species,
P. oceanicn, of the Mediterranean. Thus, these tAvo species, which
make up the isolated genus Posidonia, inhabit widely separated
and comparatively small areas of a Avarm-temperate charactei-.

The species are quite distinguishable from one anothei', in good
agreement with their I'emote areas of occurrence.

The marked specific differences, as Avell as the isolated place of
the genus within the Potamogetonaceae, indicate their" great age.
The following more detailed explanation of their distribution is
only a Avorking hypothesis. In former times the genus inhabited
& continuous area, of Avhich the present tAvo isolated areas are the
only remnants. It seems as if the genus is noAV no longer fit for
true tropical conditions, while the ancestors of the present species
did occur in the Tropics. Tropical conditions, tlien, have driven
Posidonia toAvards the north and south; and the Australian south-
coast and the Mediterranean are the last refuge for a dying genus,
Airhich, to judge from identifications of leaves from Tertiary -.'and
Cretaceous times, is one of the oldest floAvei'ing plants.

VI. The Mediterranean group contains only tAvo species — viz. :

Cymodocea nodosa.

Posidonia oceanica.

The tAVo species, Zostera marina and Z. nana also uceur in the
Mediterranean, but are not lestvicted to it.

We have already dealt Avith I'osldonla oceanica. Avhen treating
of the Australian /'. australis. Neither Posidonia nor Cymodocea
goes into the Black Sea, probably because its waters are neither
Avarm nor saline enough; Zostera marina and Z. nana, on the
other liand, having greater ability of adaptation, penetrate into
the Black Sea.

186 C. H. Ostenfeld:

Posidonia and Cymodocen have migrated through the Straits of
Gibraltar out along the nearest Atlantic coast, Posidonia going
northwards along the Iberian peninsula as far as the head of the
Bay of Biscay, and Cymodocea northwards to Cadiz and south-
wards alongl the African coast to Senegambia and the Canaries.
These interesting extensions of distribution are slight, and the two
species are essentially Mediterranean in type.

As explained above, Posidonia has its only allied species in Aus-
tralian Avaters. C ymodocea nodosa is nearest allied to C. rotun-
data. one of the Indopacific species. Therefore it seems justifiable
to consider the Mediterranean species as derived from the Indo-
pacific one; or, perhaps more correctly, to derive both from an
Indopacific ancestor. The main point, however, is that both Poii-
donia and C ymodocea. must be supposed to have come to the Medi-
terranean from the Indopacific region, and that this happened at
a comparative early time, since the two Mediterranean species have
developed so far along their own line of evolution,- and are now
specifically well characterised.

On the other hand, Zostera marina and Z. nana came into the
Mediterranean from the north and west, through the Straits of
Gibraltar.

VII. The North-Pacific group consists of the genus Phyllo-
spadix. with its two very closely allied species — viz. : Phyllospadiz;
Sroulcri and P. Torreyi.

Tlie genus Pliylloxpadi.r lias arisen from Zostera. It differs in
being dioecious and having a short, contracted rhizome (not the
long, straggling rhizome of Zostera). The two species are so close
togt'thcr. that an American lx)tanist, W. K. Dudley, who has
studied tliem in situ. doul>ts if they are really distinct. The one {P.
Scouleri) is very varial)le. while the other (P. Torreyi) is not. and
tlie amplitude of the variatitjn of the first species includes that of
tlie second one. Botli species inhabit the same part of the west
coast of Xo)-th America, from southern California to British
Colunihia ; and tlie variable (probably older) species occurs in
Japan, also making it probable that it, too, may be found in the
intermediate i-egion, along the shores of the Aleutian islands and
the south coast of Alaska.

The genus l)eing resti-icted to the northern Pacific, and derived
from Zostera, lias })robably originated not in the tropics, but in
its present liome, and at a comparatively late time.

Phyllospa/7ir serrulatu.s Rupr., of doubtful standing, came from
Alaska.

Geographical Distribution of Sea.-Orassfin. 1 87

VIII. TJtr North-Tnnpcrale group:

Zostera marina and Zostera nana.

Tliis <,M-()up has really (uily one typical representative — viz. : Z.
mariitti, but the other wide-spread species, Z. na?ia, comes perhaps
also best in here, as an irregular member. Its distribution, to-
gether with that of the Australian Zosferas, gives, I think, the key-
to the evolution of the genus.

Zostera is a very much reduced type, which is supposed to have
come from Potamofjrton- and Rupjna-Wke ancestors. The flower-
ing axis bears flowers on one side only, and the flowers are naked;
but on the outer side of each flower we find a scale — the so-called
r e.f iliac iihi III. This scale is sometimes supposed to be a reduced peri-
anth. It is present in Zostera nana, and apparently also in the
Australian species, while wanting — ordinarily — in Z. marina. Its
presence in Z. nana, and allied species, seems to indicate that
they are tlie older types, and Z. marina the younger. The distri-
bution of Z. nana and of its allies strengthens this view. Z. nana
is known along the coasts of Europe, from Southern Scandinavia
southwards into tlie Mediterranean, where it penetrates into the
Black Sea; further, it is found on the Atlantic coast of Morocco
and in the Canaries. It does not occur along the tropical west-
coast of Africa, but re-appears in South Africa and in Madagas-
car. It is reported with doulit from the Seychelles also. Lastly, we
have records of it from Tonkin and Japan. Now it must be ad-
mitted that the identity of the plants from all these regions is not
certain, as it is known, with flowers and fruits, from Europe only,
and tlie vegetative organs show no specific distinctions.

Owing to the uncei'tainty of some of the records, I find it better
to err on the side of caution, and to liiake the more general state-
ment : — that a narrow-leaved and small Zostera has been found
in the above-mentioned areas. I would associate with this form
the closely-allied three Australian species, the distribution of
which 1 have already given. In this way we get one group of
narrow-leaved and small Zosteras, wdth an almost word-wide dis-
tribution. It is worth noting that this gi-oup is absent from both
coasts of North America, and that the records are very scanty as
regards tropical localities. The distribution has some resemblance
to that of the genus Posidonia, but it is less restricted. And I
think the same explanation holds good here — viz. : the Zostera
group originated in the Tropics, and migrated both northwards
and southwards, nearly disappearing in its original home. Mean-

188 C. H. OHtenfeld:

wliile the extinction in the Tropics of Zostera has not been as com-
plete, as is the case with Pusidonia ; and Zof^fera does not show
8uch marked signs of waning as it does.

The younger type of the genus, Z. marina, is distributed along
the coasts of Europe, from the Black Sea and the Mediterranean
in the south to Lapland (Murman coast) in the north. From the
British Isles it has reached the Faeroes and Iceland ; and it is also
found at one locality on tlie western side of Greenland. But its
occurrence here is, I think, due to accidental transport by man,
as it is near places inhabited, onwards to the present time, from
the time of the old Xorse colonists.! Along the Atlantic coast of
America we find Z. marina, extending from the Gulf of St. Law-
rence to Virginia. Quite separated from its Atlantic area is the
North Pacific one, which on the American side extends from
Southern Califoi-nia to Alaska, while the Asiatic side includes the
coasts of Manchuria and Japan.

Z. marina is tlius distributed along all the coasts of the North
Atlantic and tlie North Pacific, but it is wanting in the intermedi-
ate area, the Arctic Ocean (with the above-mentioned exception of
Greenland). The question now naturally ai-ises : How has it come
to liave this discontinuous distribution? The possibility that it
originated during a warmer climate in the Arctic sea, and was
driven southwaids by a deterioration of the climate, is hardly prob-
able.

The origin of the genus was supposed to be tropical, and it is
more probable than Z. niarina also, which is ])y no- means young,
in spite of being younger than the Z. nana gioup, originated in
a Avarm ocean and migrated northwards; but tlie evidence is not
sufficiently clear whethei- tliis home was the Pacific or the Atlantic.
As it is not probable tliat the one species originated in botli oceans,
a migration from one ticean to the other seems necessary. We have
then two ways of migiation : (1) Eithei- it migrated through a
sea-connection v.hich dot's not now exist — f'.(j.. through the Carib-
bean connection (just as it is pi'obable tliat the ('ari])bean group
of sea-grasses did); (2) or, it migrated by way of the An-tic ocean
at a time Avhen its waters were Avarm. The latter way of migra-
tion seems moie probable from a biological point of view, and is
better in accord with tlie present-day c<ui(litions life of the
species.

Much of wliat has hen said liere about tlu' evolution of the sea-
gra.sses and tlifir iiiigiations is, of coursi-. only hypothetical, and

Geographical Bistrihution of Sea-Grasses. 1 89

may be wrong. Still, it seems to me that the existing facts of the
distribution of the genera and species make deductions of that
kind allowable. They are a help in gaining an idea of how these
interesting remnants of the older types of Flowering Plants at-
tained their present areas of distribution.

The peculiarities of distribution of the sea-grasses are not with-
out parallel. Amongst the Marine Algae similar cases have been
reported, (rtorge Murrai/ (l(S7-3) has pointed out that tliero is a
g:reat resemblance between the algal flora of the C'ari))bean Sea
and that of the Indopacific region. He supposes it to be explicable
by a migration by way of the Cape. A. Svedel/iis (1906) agrees
with Murray as to the great resemblance of the floras, which he
has himself studied, especially in Canhrjja (surely a very old type);
but his explanation necessitates a water-connection where the
Isthmus of Panama now is. This is essentially the same explana-
tion as that I have offered with regard to the origin of the Carib-
bean sea-grasses.

///. Summary.

1. The Marine Flowering plants, the sea-grasses, belong to two
families of the old monocotyledonous cohort, the Helohiecip. Tliey
are reduced and specially adapted ancient types.

2. With one exception (the monotypic Enhalus). the genera all
occur in the Indopacific and the Atlantic regions. This distribu-
tion indicates that the origin of the genera goes back to a time
when the relation of sea and land was different from that now — •
viz. to the earlier part of the Tertiary period.

3. The dispersal of the sea-grasses is restricted and slow. It
is mainly due to sea-currents, but the seeds are not able to float,
and detached pieces of rhizomes do not live long.

4. The 8 genera contain altogether only 30 species, which can
be arranged into 8 groups, according to their geographical distri-
bution— viz. : (a) 4 Tropical: Indopacific, Malayan, East-African
and Caribbean ; (b) 2 W arm-temperate (or sub-ti'opical) : Austra-
lian, Mediterranean; and (c) 2 Temperate: North-Pacific and
North-Temperate. .

5. The Indopacific group contains the majority of the species,
especially when we include the Malayan and East-African groups
as sub-divisions (13 species). The parent home of the sea-grasses
lies within the geographical area of this group.

6. The Caribbean group (6 species) has 4 species, each of which
is closely allied to an Indopacific one, and it is probable that the

190 Ostenfeid: Distribution of Sea-Grasses.

whole group migrated from the Indopacific to the Caribl>ean Sea
at a time when there was a connection between them through the
Isthmus of Panama. Two of these species have reached the Ber-
mudas, but elsewhere they are not found outside the Caribbean
region, the Atlantic Ocean being very poor in sea-grasses.

7. The genus Posidonia has at the' present time one species
along the south coast of Australia, and the other in the Mediter-
ranean. It is supposed that they represent the last remnants of
a genus whose home was somewhere in the Indian region, and
that it w^as driven away towards the north and the south.

8. The other species of the Mediterranean group, Cymodocea
jiodosa, also migrated from the south-east into the Mediterranean,
while the two Zosteras of this sea came from the north.

9. The genus Phi/llospadix is restricted to the North Pacific.
Its morphological characters indicate its derivation from Zostera.

10. The narrow-leaved, small Zosteras (Z. nana, and the three
Australian species) are supposed to be the older type of the genus,
as they still have the " retinaculum " (the scale attached to the
flower). When taken together, their distribution is " bipolar,"
with a few outposts in the Tropics.

11. It is supposed that the genus Zonfera originated in a warm
sea and migrated towards the north and the south.

12. The younger type, Zostera marina, is yet an old species.
It is supposed that it also originated in a warm sea (perhaps in
the Indopacific region), wandered northwards, and in one manner
or another came from the Pacific into the Atlantic, or vice versa.

13. With the exception of Phyllospadix, which originated in the
North-Pacific, and arose from Zostera, all the genera of sea-grasses
are supposed to have arisen in the Tropics, where the home of most
of them still is, Zostera marina being the only species which extends
into the Arctic Sea.

14. The distribution of the species still requii-es investigation.
This applias especially to the three Australian Zosteras, which are
little known, both systematically and geographically.

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria. 27 (N.S.), Pt. H., 1914].

Art. XV.— Bitter Pit and Sensitivity of Apples to Poisons,
An Answer to Prof. A. J. Ewart.

BY

H. G. BREIDAHL, B.Sc.

AND

A. C. H. ROTHERA, M.A, D.Sc.

[Read 8tli October, 1914].

This opportunity has kindly been given us of replying to a paper
by Prof. A. J. Ewart, appearing in the Proceedings of this Society,
Vol. XXVI., p. 228, March, 1914, in which he criticises a paper by
R. H. Greenwood and A. C. H. Rothera, forming portion of the
Second Progress Report, issued by Mr. D. McAlpine.

The position briefly is this :

A theory that Bitter Pit might be due to poisoning of certam
cell groups in the apple was put forward by Dr. Jean White, and
strenuously supported by Prof. Ewart. This theory included the
statement that the apple cells of the areas affected with pit have
their diastatic enzymes destroyed — or inhibited — by the poison be-
fore the cells themselves are killed. It is logical, if this be so, to
attempt to show that bitter pit tissue contains some poison capable
of inhibiting diastatic action, and Greenwood and Rothera searched
first for such a poison in a soluble form, second in an insoluble
form. They were unable to get any evidence of inhibition, their
results either showing no effect, or in the case of malt diastase an
acceleration with both normal pulp and pitted material. This
acceleration was assigned to the beneficial effect which traces of
organic acids exert upon malt diastase, which explanation is still
held to be the correct one for this }-esult. since it naturally accounts
for the slightly greater acceleration produced by healthy pulp cells
than by ])itter pit, and also for the greater retardation of ptyalin
(wliicli is injui'ed by slight acidity), by the foi-mer than tlie latter.

Against these expevimental results Prof. Ewart raises various
criticisms.

His fir.st is a complete denial. He writes : " On repeating these
experiments with filtered solutions of malt diastase dissolved in
distilled water. I am alik' to give them emphatic contradiction.
Prolonged contact with pounded apple pulp, boiled or unboiled.

192 BreiddJd and Rather a :

bitter pit, or normal, practically destroys diastase in one to three
days."

But in the next paragraph it appears that 20 grms. of pounded
pulp were added to only 10 c.c. of 1% Taka diastase. No experi-
ments are quoted which are comparable with Greenwood and
Rothera's, in which 1 grm. of pounded pulp was used with 5 c.c.
•of a 5% malt diastase, and the emphatic contradiction is therefore
most unjustifiable.

The second criticism is that the observed accelerating action on
malt diastase was not an acceleration, but only an apparent accele-
ration, due to an experimental pitfall.

Owing to actions of tannic acid on starch solutions causing pre-
cipitation of the starch, and also to the influence of tannic acid
upon the starch iodine test employed. Greenwood and R other a are
assumed to have been misled into taking the digestion of the starch
as complete, when it really was still incomplete.

Though convinced that a real acceleration of malt diastase had
been obtained with both normal apple tissue and bitter pit
material, and that the experimental technique employed excluded
the pitfalls suggested by Prof. Ewart, it was decided to carefully
investigate the criticism raised as to the action of tannic acid.

Freely acknoAvledging full indebtedness to Professor Ewart for
bringing the tannic acid complications to our notice, we find that
such complications cannot be applied to refute the experimental
results of Greenwood and Rothera.

Tn the first place, though the blue colour produced by starch
with a small amount of iodine can be destroyed by tannic acid,
the proportions of the reagents are quite different to those of the
experiments of Greenwood and Rothera, in which the maximum
tannic acid could not exceed .002% final concentration, and in
wliicli the iodine was always used in large excess.

For, in following a starch digestion, it is <_ustoniarv to remove
1 drop of the starch solution, which is then mixed with 1 drop of
a 1% iodine solution, and the blue colour ])rodueed under such
conditions is uninfluenced by tannic acid in concentrations up
to 1%.

Only when the (|uantity of tannic acid is large, and tlie iodine
vei-y little in amount, does the decolourising power of the tannic
acid become inqioitant.

Then again, we find that Ewait is unfortunate in his second
point that tannic acid inhibits diastatic action by forming a com-
pound with starch wliirli is resistant to the ferment.

Bitter Pit in Afrples 19:^

Although tannic acid (in the concentrations with which we ar&
concerned, when dealing witli apple tissue or juice) does produce
a slight cloudiness in a 1% filtered starch solution, this does not
render the starch any less readily digested by diastase. With the
weaker tannic acid solutions (as Prof. Ewart points out) the cloudi-
ness vanishes at .35° C.

In fact, with tlie taka diastase (Merck) in the possession of the
laboratory, the presence of small amounts of tannic acid caused
an acceleration of the enzyme action, and a slowing was only ob-
tained when the tannic acid concentration was approximately five
times as great as in apple juice.

It proved a most fortunate circumstance for us that the taka
diastase preparation in our possession (the same as that used by
Greenwood and Rothera) showed this acceleration, for it permitted
us to show that (at least for the tannic acid concentrations up tO'
.25%) tannic acid does not foi-m a starch compound of less digesti-
bility, and that where it does inhibit diastatic action it does sO'
by precipitating the enzyme as suggested by Payen.i

Solutions of the taka diastase in our possession gave no imme-
diate precipitate with dilute tannic acid, but in some of our ex-
periments, in which a weak enzyme solution was used, a precipitate
did form after two hours, and w^as accompanied by a slowing of
the rate of action.

This slowing apparently depended upon the flocculation of the
enzyme per se, and was not proportional to the amount of tannic
acid present. In fact, a slightly greater amount of tannic acid
produced less slowing, probably because the accelerating factor was
present simultaneously.

Careful tests were made in order to be certain that the tannic
acid acceleration was not due to an influence exerted upon the
starch iodine colour.

Greenwood and Rothera used strong solutions of taka diastase,
and in the light of present results the very small amount of tannic
acid extracted from healthy apple pulp, or pitted cells, could only
have had a slight accelerating influence.

With the malt diastase (Merck) (the same preparation as that
used by Greenwood *ind Rothera) tannic acid solutions, even when
dilute, always gave a precipitate, with solutions of the enzyme,
accompanied by a retardation of action. In Greenwood and
Rothera's experiments with malt diastase, accelerations were

1. Quoted from Cza)v o Rionhemie dei- Pflanzeii, vol. i., p. .•i4.5

194 Breidahl and Rothera .-

obtained, so that the invoking of the tannic acid retardation is
not applicable.

We therefore maintain (i) that Ewart's tannic acid complica-
tions are not applicable to the experiments of Greenwood and
Rothera; (ii) that Ewart is incorrect in assigning the tannic acid
retardation to an action upon the starch; and (iii) that experimen-
tal results obtained under quite different conditions and with quite
different proportions of reagents have been used in a wholly un-
justifiable manner, as though applicable to Greenwood and
Rothera's conditions, and reagent coticentrationa.

1. — Action of Tannic Acid on Filtered Starch Solutions.

1% tannic acid solution was added to 1% starch solution in the
proportions of 1:1; 1 :-3 ; 1:7; and 1:15 respectively, the final
•concoctions of tannic acid being 0.5%; 0.25%; 0.125%, and
0.0625% respectively. They were mixed and kept at room tem-
perature.

The first two gave a cloudiness immediately, which became dense
on standing; but after eighteen hours there was no sign of a
precipitate.

The third gave a very slight cloudiness on first mixing, but this
became more marked on standing.

The fourth showed no appreciable change from a control to which
an amount of water equal to the tannic acid solution had been
added, but after standing eighteen hours there was a just per-
ceptible difference.

In the course of one of the expeiiments. to be described later,
1% tannic acid and 1% filtered starch solutions were mixed, so that
the final concentrations were .2% tannic acid, and .8% starch re-
spectively. The starch solution had been made up five days previ-
ously, and had not been filtered in the meantime.

A cloudiness developed 'anunediately on mixing, which was done
at room temperature.

This was then placed in a water bath kept at 38o — 4()0C., with
a control. At the temperature of the bath it became much cleai-er.
being but little denser than the control (which contained .8%
starch solution), and at the end of twenty-thiee hours there was a
slight transparent precipitate at the bottom of both tubes, being
slightly greater in that containing tlie tannic acid.

Bitter Fit in Apples. 105

2. — The Action of Tannic Acid on the iodine tent for dextrins
formed during diastatic action o?i starch.

A final concentration of 1% tannic acid was found to have no
effect on this test, as used in Greenwood and Rothera's, and the
following experiments. This is because the conditions involve an
excess of iodine. The interference of tannic acid with the starch
and dextrin colours is due apparently to its forming' a combination
with the iodine, and naturally ceases when the iodine is in excess.

3. — Action of Tannic Acid on the diastatic hi/droli/sfs of starch.

Filtered starch solution was used throughotit the expei-iments,
which were done at a temperature of 38^ — 40^0.

Experiment 1. (Tubes each contained 15 c.c. of mixture.)

Using a 2.5% solution of taka diastase, which proved rapid in
action, the following mixtures were made up, and tested for com-
parative rates of action.

Tannic Acid
(final concentration).

.starch (1°,).

Diastase (2.5'J.

a (control) -

10 c.c.

1 c.c.

h

10 c.c.

1 C.C.

c

10 c.c.

] C.C.

d

10 c.c.

1 C.C.

.25%
.125%

c and d were finished in about 5| minutes, and a about 2
minutes later. f> still gave a strong red-brown at the end of 20
minutes.

Experiment 2. (Tubes each contained 10 c.c. of mixture.)

This was done, using taka diastase, with weaker concoctions
of tannic acid than those used in Experiment 1.

starch (1%). Diastase (2.5%). (fi„aT'concentrL«on).

a (cont

;rol) -

8 c.c.

-

1 c.c.

-

0

b

-

8 c.c.

-

1 c.c.

-

.1%

c

-

8 c.c.

-

1 c.c.

-

.05%

d

-

8 c.c.

Ice.

-

.025%

In 2 minutes, the control a .still gave a red-violet, whilst the
others were all red. b was finished in 5 minutes, c and d in about
8 minutes, and control a in 12 minutes.

196 Breidahl and Rothera :

Experiment 3. (Tubes each contained 10 c.c. of mixture.)
Usinof malt diastase.

Starch (1°,).

Diastase (•2.5;„

'• (final '

Liniiic AC
concenti

a (control) -

S c.c.

1 c.c.

0

b

8 c.c.

1 c.c.

.1%

c

8 c.c.

1 C.c.

-

.05%

d

8 c.c.

1 C.C.

.025 '/i

Altliougli the acid and staix-li solutions were mixed before add-
ing to the dia.stase, the concentrations of tannic acid were strong-
enough to cause a precipitate to form in the diastase solution.
(This Avas //of the case with taka diastase in Experiment 1.)

In 12 minutes the control a was well into the red, while the
olhe)-8 were all ))hR'. In 20 minutes d was beginning to show
traces of violet, the others being still l)lue.

The effect on saliva was parallel, a precipitate being formed br
.025% of tannic acid.

Experiment J/. (Tuljes each contained lO c.c. of mixture.)
This was done with weak taka diastase.

Starch (1;^),

Diastase (.-25".).

Tannic Acid.

a (control) -

8 C.C.

1 C.C.

0

h

8 C.c.

1 c.c.

.3%

c

8 c.c.

1 c.c.

.16%

d

8 c.c.

1 c.c.

.1%

These were left in a water bath overnight. The temperature-
started at 40OC.. but fell to 36oC. during the night.

On te.sting, after 18.\ hours, the control a liad finished, d gare
a very slig\ht colour, r gave more colour (red), whilst h gave a
very red l)rown.

In this experiment, ctnicentrations of tannic aiid, which gave
an acceleration in the short expei-iments. heio gave a very definite
retardation.

The following experiments were done to determine whether this
retardation was due to actiiui (ni the ferment oi- on the starch.

Experiment 5. (Tubes eath contained 10 c.c. of mixture.)

Taka Diastase Tannic Acid

(-2.,%). (final concentration).

a

8 c.c.

-

.2%

h

8 c.c.

.05%

c (control) -

8 c.c.

-

0

Bitlev Pit in Applet. 197

These wfiv kept in a water bath at :^80— 4()0('.

In 2 houis a hue. dispersed eoafjuliim liad appeared in about
equal amounts in a and h.

This had sli<rhtly increased and settled out at the end of 23
hours, and l)y tliis time a slijjfht precipitate had appeared in the
control c. a and }> were also darker in colour than r.

a. />. and c were shaken thoroughly, and 1 c.c of each was tested
on 5 c.c. of starch solution (1%).

The control finished in 1\ minutes, a in 4 minutes, and h in 5i
minutes.

Although a had been in contact with a greater percentage of
tannic acid, yet its action was quicker -than that of h.

This may be explained by supposing that the formation of a
coagulum was the sole inhibiting factoi-, and that the acceleration
was caused by the presence of .04% of tannic acid in the final
starch-diastase mixture, in the case of «, whereas only .01% was
present when testing h. [No acid being present in control.]

Experiment 6. (Tubes each contained 10 c.c. of mixture.)

Starcli (1%).

Tannic Acid

(final concentration).
a - 8 c.c. - .2%

h - 8 c.c. - .05%

c (control) - 8 c.c. - 0

In testing these, it was obviously necessary to compare them with
the control in the presence of a corresponding amount of acid,
hence the control was divided into two.

The following tubes were made up (each containing 5 c.c. of
mixture).

starch. Diastase.

(1 3 C.c. of a 1 c.c. 1% Taka diastase

a J '

'-2 3 c.c. of c (control) .,

, ^ 3 3 c.c. of h „

' 4 3 c.c. of c (control) ,,

1 and 2 then contained .12% of Tannic Acid
and 3 and 4 „ „ .03%

It was found that 1 and 2 went neck and neck (6 minutes), and
at a faster rate than 3 and /f, which also went neck and neck (10
minutes).

This experiment shows that the prolonged action of .2% tannic
acid on .8% filtered staixh solution does not materially affect its
subsequent hydrolyses by taka diastase.

Tannic Acid.

HiO.

0

1 c.c.

.6 c.c. of 1%

.4 c.c.

0

1 c.c.

.15 c.c. of 1%

.85 c.c.

[Proc. Eoy. Soc. Victokia 27 (N.S.), Part II., 1914.

Ar']'. XVI. — Notes on Australian and Tasmanian. Scydmaenidae,
ivitk Descriptions of New Species. '

By ARTHUR M. LEA.

[Read November 12tb. 191 4].

Xu family of beetles of equal extent in Australia and Tasmania
has been so much neglected as the Scydin-aenidae. Probably this
has been largely on account of the unsatisfactory descriptions by
the late Rev. R. L. King. So that, apart from the species named
by him, very few liave been recorded from Australia. The refer-
ences are as follows : —

1. King, Trans. Ent. Soc. N.S. AVales. I., pp. 91-99.

2. Macleay, I.e. II., y>. 155.

3. Sharp, Trans. Ent. Soc. London, 1874, p. 515.

4. Lea, Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 1905, p. ."577.

5. Lea, I.e. 1907, p. 153.

6. Lea, I.e., 1910, pp. 181-189.

7. Lea, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales. 1911. p. 456.

Some years ago I carefully examined all of King's and .Macleay's
types, now in the Ansti-alian Museum; and received from that
institution most of their species. But for these circumstances I
should probably have had to pass over all l>ut a few of the species
here described.

On prepai'ing to work at a particular group of insects I usually
write to many of my entomological correspondents, requesting the
loan of specimens of the group ; but with the Sej/dmaenidae the
species in external appearance are so much alike, and the prepara-
tory work is so extensivel, and often unsatisfactory, 2 that I felt
indisposed to do so in tliis instance. Mr. H. H. D. Griffith, how-
ever, allowed me to examine his collection of the family, and to
retain such specimens as 1 desired. From Mr. H. W. Davey and
others some ants' nest species were obtained, but these were noted
elsewhere ;3 a few were obtained from correspondents in the ordinary
course of exchange, and a few sent from the British Museum for

1. The majority of Australian collectors at present, iiiifortuiiatel.'s', seldom set out the legs
and anteimae of their beetles.

2. With siii!;?le specimens it is often difficult to jiidnc wliutlier tlie absence of clothingf from
certain parts may be natural or due to abrasion.

3. In I'roc. Koy. Soe. Victoria, lOtO, pp. ISl-lSit.

Australian and Tasmanian Scydtnaenidae. 1 '.•'.•

examination. I also examined all the Australian specimens of the
family in the Macleay Museinu. hut as most of these were taken
nuiny years ago, and many are uniciue and difficult to clean, many
were returned unnamed. Some of my own specimens are also left
unnamed, altliough almost certainly new.

The majoiity of the specimens from New South Wales were taken
during floods, and it is likely enough therefore that some of them
are ants' nest species. From Tasmania a large percentage of the
species were taken from mosses, lichens and tussocks ;i and it is
extremely j)robable that when mosses, etc., are well worked in other
parts of Australia, undescribed species w^ill be obtained in abun-
dance. So far New South Wales and Tasmania are the only two
States that have been (comparatively) well worked for species i>f
the family.

Ifeferopnathus armitagei, King.

Of this species King says, " Thorace fossula transversa basali ";
on a co-type before me, however, there is at the base of the pro-
thorax a close series of punctures, but they are separated, and not
combined to form a transverse depression, although at a hasty
glance they appear to be so.

Heterognathus gracilis. King.

Additional localities for this species are Tweed River. Forest
Reefs and Glen Innes.

Heferognathii.^ geniculatvs. King.

Additional localities for tliis species are Glen Innes and Forest
Reefs.

Heterognathus rohustus, n.sp.

Of a rather dark reddish castaneous, suture slightly infuscated.
Rather densely clothed with subei-ect, stramineous pubescence or
short hairs.

Head moderately wide, with small, partially concealed punctures.
Eyes of medium size, latero-frontal and fairly prominent. An-
tennae, for the genus, rather stout; club conspicuously three-
jointed. Prothorax moderately convex, about as long as wide,
sides rather strongly rounded, but becoming oblique to base;
punctures vei-y indistinct. Elytra rather short and wide, across
base wider than widest part of prothorax, but across middle not

1. Some of these also are perhaps inquilines, as many ants are to be taken in such situations.

5a

200 Arthur M. Lea :

twice as wide; sides rather strongly and evenly rounded, with small,
dense punctures, only partially concealed by clothing. Legs rather
long and stout; hind coxae moderately separated. Length, 2 mm.

Hab. — Queensland; Mulgrave River (H. Hacker).

A robust, densely pubescent species, allied to gracilis, but larger
and stouter, and elytra with dense and fairly distinct punctures.
Considerably stouter than carinatus, ninth joint of antennae
larger, and prothorax not carinated, etc.

The second-eighth joints of antennae are of almost even width,
but gradually decrease in length, from slightly longer than wide
to moderately transverse, the ninth joint is somewhat smaller than
the tenth, and about twice as long and twice as wide as the eighth,
the eleventh is subconic'al, slightly wider and distinctly longer than
the tenth.

Two rather dirty specimens from Brisbane, in the Macleay
Museum, probably belong to this species, but differ in having the
abdomen slightly less convex; the clothing also is somewhat sparser,
bTit this is probably due to abrasion.

Scydmae7ius kingensis, Lea.

Tasmanian specimens of this species have the longitudinal impres-
sion on each side of the suture, near the base more distinct than on
the type; so that conjoined they appear as a rather large depres-
sion, with the suture elevated in the middle of same. The antennae
were originally described as with the " last four (joints) forming
an elongate and loosely jointed club." Having had occasion to
examine many species recently, this now appears incorrect to me,
and the joints should be regarded as subcontinuous, and not form-
ing a club; a distinction readily apparent on examining numerous
species, whose antennae have the two, three, or four apical joints
conspicuously clavate.

Scydniaenus gulosus. King.

This species may be taken in abundance during floods on several
New South Wales rivers. There is also a specimen in the Macleay
Museum from South Australia, and two from Victoria.

On most of the specimens the head and prothorax are of a deep
shining black, but two specimens in the Macleay Museum from
Sydney and Ash Island, and one in my own collection from
AVindsor, have the parts named not much darker than the elytra.

The front tibiae are dilated only in the male.

Australian and Tasmanian Scychnaenidae. 201

Sci/(h/ia<-/iiis parrnmattensis, King.

Additional localities for this species are Clarence River, Windsor
and Tannvorth.

Scijdmaoiua clarus. n.sp.

<?■ Bright reddish castancous ; head prothorax and suture some-
■what darker than elsewiiere ; palpi and tarsi flavous. Sides at
base of head, and sides of prothorax, with moderately dense,
flavous hairs; rest of upper surface entirely glabrous.

Head transverse; obtusely bilobed between antennae. Eyes small
and prominent. Antennae rather long; club four-jointed. Pro-
tJwrar about as long as wide, moderately convex; each side of base
with a small deep fovea, the outer basal margins also foveate.
Ehffra at base scarcely wider than base of prothorax, sides dilated
to near the middle; and then rounded to ajjex; basal impressions
wide and conspicuou.s. Mctasttrnum rather widely concave' at
middle of apex. Legs rather long; hind coxae rather distant;
femora rather stout, the front pair stouter than the others. Length
If mm.

? Differs in having the metasternum depressed only in middle of
extreme apex, femora thinner and antennae somewhat thinnei- and
shorter.

Hah. — Tasmania : Mount Wellington, Frankford, from fallen
leaves and moss. (A. M. Lea.)

In appearance fairly close to r/lahripennis. but antennae rather
stouter, and prothoracic impressions and clotliing different.

At a glance the club appears to be subcontinuous with the other
joints of the antennae, but the eighth joint is longer and suddenly
(although not much) wider than the seventh, althougli as the follow-
ing joints slightly increase in width, and the seventh is itself
slightly Avider than the sixth, the clubbing is not so pronounced as
in many other species.' The basal foveae of the prothorax from
most directions appear to be completely isolated, but from others
a vague connecting depression is visible; the outer (Uies are quite
concealed from above.

On this and on all the following species of the genus the elytral
punctures are so extremely sparse and faint that they are quite
useless for purposes of identification ; on the head and prothorax,
if present at all, they are seen with difficulty, and only from certain
"directions.

2 1 12 Arthur M. Lea :

Sct/dmaenus setmniger, n.sp.

Black; elytra dark tastaneous, suture still darker, under surface
dark reddish-brown or black, abdomen generally pale; legs and
palpi fiavous, antennae somewhat darker. Upper surface glabrous,
except for numerous hairs at sides of prothorax, and a fascicle on
each side of base of head.

Head moderately transverse, convex, rounded between antennae.
Eyes small and prominent. Antennae moderately long and rather
thin ; club conspicuously four-jointed, but seventh joint distinctly
longer and wider than sixth, although decidedly narrower and
slightly shorter than eighth. Prothorax about as long as wide ;
base with two small deep foveae. Elytra rather wide and depressed ;
base slightly wilder than base of prothorax, the basal impressions
comparatively small ; sides gently dilated to beyond the middle, and
then regularly rounded to apex. Legs moderately long, hind coxae
moderately separated; front tibiae somewhat inflated towards apex
in male. Length, 1^ mm.

Hah. — Victoria (Macleay Museum), Portland (H. W. Davey);
N.S.W. : Forest Reefs; Tasmania : Jordan River, abundant in flood
debris, New Norfolk, in tussocks, Holjart, in moss, Launceston (A.
M. Lea).

The size and outlines are almost exactly as in bifascicidatun, but
the colours and habits are very different. In general appearance,
colours, etc.. it is much like glabrijjennis in miniature; gulosus is
frequently like it in colour, but is considerably narrower, with the
elytra clothed. The black head and prothorax readily distinguish
it from most of the species having the elytra glabrous.

The prothoracic foveae from some directions appear to be con-
nected together by a strong transverse impression, but from other
directions this impression appears rather faint ; from some it
causes the base to appear quadrifoveate.

Some specimens, from the Tweed River, differ in luvving some
sparse straggling hairs about the basal third of the elytra, but I
can find no other differences.

Sci/dniueniis f itnbri colli. •<, n.sp.

Bright castaneous, elytra (sutuie not at all) very little paler
than head and prothorax. antennae somewhat ]ialei- ; femora and
tibiae almost, the taisi and ])ali)i (|uitc', flavons. Upper surface
glabrous, except for numerous stramineous hairs at sides of pro-
thorax, and a small fascicle on each side of base of head.

Australian and Tasmanian Scydmaenidae. 208

I/ead moderately transverse, feebly bilobed between antennae.
Eyes small and very prominent. Antennae i-ather long; club four-
jointed. Prothora.r about as long" as wide; base with two small,
deep and i-atlier distant foveae. Elytra at extreme base no wider
than base of protliorax ; sides moderately dilated to just before
the middle, tlience narrowed to apex. Legs rather long; hind
coxae separated almost t'lie width of impression at apex of metas-
ternum. Length, 1^ mm.

Ilah. — Tasmania : Jordan River, in flood debris, Hobart, Mount
Wellington, in moss. Waratah. (A. M. Lea.)

Larger than casfo/ieo(/labe/\ elytra slightly longer in proportion,
and prothorax conspicuously fringed. Bifasciculafus, Avhich has
a similar fringe, is shorter, with wider elytra and slightly shorter
and tliinner antennae. In general appearance rather like small
specimens of c/anis, but antennae thinner, although not longer, the
joints (if the club less closely articulated, and basal impressions of
prothorax not quite the same.

The club is certainly four-jointed, but as its joints slightly in-
crease in width, and as the seventh is distinctly wider and some-
what longer than the sixth, from some directions it almost appears
to be five-jointed. From some directions a rather shallow impres-
sion connecting the protlioracic foveae is visible; but from others
these appear to be completely isolated.

Srj/d)uaein(s fiavoapicalts, n.sp.

Bright castaneous; elytra slightly paler, but becoming flavous at
apex; legs and palpi flavous. Clothing as in preceding species.

Head moderately transverse; rounded betAveen antennae. Eyes
rather small and prominent. Antennae rather thin; club dis-
tinctly four- jointed. PrntJmrar slightly wider than long, with two
deep l)asal foveae. Elytra moderately wide, at base slightly wider
than base of prothorax. sides regularly rounded and widest just
befoi-e middle. Leyx long; hind coxae moderately separated.
Length, ]| mm.

Hah. — N.S. Wales : Ropes Creek, Sydney (Macleay Museum),
Clarence River, Forest Reefs, Tamworth, Windsor (A. M. Lea.)

Slightly larger than castaneoglahtr, and prothoracic impressions
connected across base; that species also has not a conspicuous
lateral fringe of hairs. From the preceding species it differs in
being slightly smallei-. elytra rather less narrowed at base, and
antennae shorter and thinner.

204 Arthur M. Lea :

The flavous portion of the elytra varies from about one-fifth to
about one-third; although very distinct, it is not sharply limited.
The prothoracic foveae from some directions appear to be con-
nected by a strong transverse impression ; from other directions,
however, the impression seems rather feeble, although it is always
traceable.

Numerous specimens differ in having the head and protliorax
almost or quite black, and such specimens sometimes have tlie
apex of elytra scarcely flavous; but, as I can find no differences in
clothing or structure, I presume they represent varieties only.
They are coloured much as ne.miniger , except that the under sur-
face is not dark; but their size is very slightly, although consis-
tently, smaller than that of that species, and are also somewhat
narrower.

Scydtyiaenus flauipes, n.sp.

Bright castaneous ; elytra (suture excepted) somewhat paler ; legs
and palpi flavous. Clothing as in two preceding species.

Head (excluding neck) almost as long as wide, bilobed between
antennae. Eyes small and moderately prominent. Antennae long
and thin; club conspicuously four-jointed. Prothorai slightly longer
than wide; depressed; base with two small deep foveae. with a
conspicuous connecting impression. Elytra fiat and comparatively
narrow; widest about, middle ; basal impressions rather small.
Legs long; hind coxae moderately separated. Length 1^ mm.

Hah. — W. Australia : Swan River. (A. M. Lea.)

A small, depressed species, narrower thau most of those having
glabrous elytra. Except for the glabrous elytra, which, however,
are rather wider, it is much like atroph'us.

Scydmaetius si/hr/labrij)e/i/i/s, n.sp.

Castaneous. elytra (suture excepted) somewhat i>alef : legs and
palpi flavous. Upper surface glal)r(ius. cxrcpt toi' numerous
stramineous hairs at sides of protliorax, a few ahout Ijase (including
sides) of elytra, a few at sides of head, and a fascii'le on each side
of its base.

//ead moderately transverse, rather strongly rounded between
antennae. Eyes (foi- the genus) lather large. Antennae rather
long and thin; club four-jointed. I'rotliora.c al)out as long as
wide, moderately convex; base Avith two small deep foveae. Elytra
rather short and wide; at base distinctly wider than prothorax,

Australian and Tasmanian Scydmaenidae. 'H)'>

and thrice as wide alxmt the middle. J.e(/s loiij^; hind eoxae mode-
rately separated. Length, 1^ mm.

//«/>.— Queensland : Dalby. (Mrs. F. H. Hobler.)
The outlines are mueh as in ylahripennis , but the colours and
clothing are different, and elub somewhat thinner, etc. The elytral
clothing, although not dense, is fairly distinct, so I think it should
not be placed with the species having glabrous elytra.

The seventh joint of the antennae is distinctly longer and Avider
than the sixth, but as it is vei'y decidedly narrower and shorter
than the eighth, it cannot l)e regarded as forming part of the
club. The basal foveae of the prothorax ai'e connected by an im-
pression that from some dii'ections appears to be deep and distinct,
but fi-om othei-s is scarcely traceable.

Scydmaeiuis ohscuricontlti, n.sp.

Dark reddish castaneous; suture and eighth, ninth and tem
joints of antennae deeply infuscated; legs rather dark, tai-si and
palpi pale, but scarcely flavous. Elytra with sparse, suberect,
and moderately long, pale hairs; prothorax densely clothed at
sides, and glabrous else^vhere; head very sparsely clothed, but Avith
a loose fascicle on each side of base.

Head almost as long as Avide; feebly bilobed betAveen antennae.
Eyes rather small and moderately prominent. Antennae rather
long and thin ; club conspicuously four-jointed. Froihorax about
as long as Avide; foveae and connecting impression as in preceding
species. Elytra moderately long, at extreme base no Avider than
prothorax, sides regularly rounded and Avidest at about middle.
Legs long; liind coxae moderately separated; femora subclavate.
Length. 1^ nnn.

Hah. — Tasmania : Hobart (A. M. Lea).

In size and shape like insignivenfris, but club dark and otherAvise
different. The depression connecting the foveae together is very
shalloAv (it is ([uite invisible from certain directions), and very
different to tliat o/ denliventris. The elytra are decidedly narroAver
than in the preceding species, and the club is much darker. The
outlines are someAvhat as in Kiagensis, but the antennae and cloth-
ing are different. The outlines approach those of glabripennis ,
but that species has the elytra entirely glabrous, and head a; .
prothorax much darker.

The seventh joint of the antennae is very little longer or wider
than the sixth, and is only about half the width of the eighth.

206 Arthur M. Lea:

A specimen, taken from under rotting leaves in the National
Park (N. S. Wales), appears to belong to this species, but differs in
having the elytral clothing confined to the basal third (perhaps
from abrasion), and the elytra, undei- surface and legs somewhat
paler.

Sci/dnine/iu.<! hrerisefostis, n.sp.

Bi-ight reddish-castaneous, elytra very little (the suture not at
all) paler than liead and prothorax ; legs and palpi flavous.
Elytra with very short and indistinct, but almost evenly distributed
setae (scarcely pubescence) ; sides of prothorax with rather dense
stramineous hairs, similar hairs forming a fascicle on each side of
base of head.

Head about as long as wide, feebly bilobed between antennae.
Eyes small and prominent. Antennae comparatively short and
stout; club distinctly four-jointed. Prothorax slightly transverse;
each side of base with two small foveae. Elytra at base slightly
wider than prothorax; basal impressions smallei- than usual; sides
moderately dilated to near the middle, and then narrowed to apex ;
Lef/a rather long and stout ; hind coxae moderately separated.
Length, \\ mm.

Hah. — Tasmania : Mount Wellington, four specimens from moss.
(A. M. Lea.)

The elytra at first appear to be glabrous, but on looking at then^
sideways some very fine suberect setae become noticeable. The
first, second and eleventh joints of the antennae aie longer than
wide, all the others being transverse, the eighth, ninth and tenth
are fully twice as wido as long; the seventh is just perceptibly
longer and wider than the sixth. The prothoracic foveae are all
connected together by a transverse impression that varies, accord-
ing to the point of view, fi-om faint to strongly defined; the lateral
foveae are only partially visil)le from a])ove, but from the sides
each is seen to mark the l)ase of a longitudiiial im])ression.

ScydiiKteitiix hrevi pilix, n.sp.

Bright reddish-castaneous elytra (suture excepted), very little
paler; legs almost, the tarsi and palpi quite flavous. Elytra with
short and rather spaise, l)ut very distinct pale pubescence; pro-
thorax with dense hairs at sides, and a few at base and sides of
disc, biit middle of disc glabrous; head with a small loose fascicle
on each side of base, and sparsely clothed elsewhere.

Austvidiaii, and Tasmaaian Scydmaenidae. 207

/lead sliglitly loii^aT than wide, soniewhat rounded and flattened
betAveen antennae. Eyes small and rather prominent. Antennae
rather long and thin ; club four-jointed. Prothorax distinctly
longer than wide, rather convex; base with two rather large foveae.
Elytra moderately long, extreme base no wider than prothorax, but
almost twice as wide across middle. Tjei/s long; hind coxae rather
widely separated; femora subclavate. Length, If mm.

Hah. — Tasmania : Mount Wellington, Waratah, common in moss-
and fallen leaves. (A. M. Lea.)

About the size of tenuiconiisi, but rather narrowei', antennae-
not abnormally long, and elytral clothing unusually short for the
family. It is, however, more noticeable than in the preceding
species, from which it also differs in being larger, appendages
longer and thinner, and prothorax not quite the same. From
Phagonophana ahundans, the most abundant of all the moss fre-
quenting species in Tasmania, it is readily distinguished by its
smaller size, distinctly clubbed antennae, and shorter clothing.

The seventh joint of the antennae is slightly wider but no long"
than the sixth; and decidedly nanower than the eighth; the latter
is slightly narrower, but no shorter than the ninth, the two follow-
ing combined are about as long as the eleventh. The protlioracic
foveae are larger and closer together than usual; they are connected
by a transvei'se impression that varies in apparent depth with the
point of view; each also is more or less distinctly connected with a
lateral fovea, or longitudinal impression, that is quite invisible
from directly al)(>ve.

Scydmaenus teniticoruis, n.syj.

<? Castaneous, elytra scarcely or not at all jjaler than elsewhere;
antennae and legs somewhat paler, tarsi and palpi flavous. Elytra
with faii-ly numerous, and ratlier long, suberect pale hairs; \)V0-
thorax ratlier densely elutlied at sides. \n\t gi'eater portion of disc
glabrous; head sparsely clothed and without fascicles.

Head moderately transverse; feebly impressed between antennae.
Eyes of moderate size, but very prominent. Antennae unusually
long and thin; clul) four-jointed. Pro'thorax slightly longer than
wide, widest across apical third; with two large basal foveae, and
a smaller longitudinal one on each outer margin, the four more or
less distinctly connected by a transverse impression. Elytra rather
long, at extreme base slightly narrower than widest part of pro-
thorax, sides evenly rounded and widest almost in exact middle.
Metasternnm flattened along middle or verv feeblv concave. Abdo-

208 Arthur M. Lea:

men with fourth segment eoncave in middle, the eoncave portion
bounded on each side by a eonspieuous ridge that terminates as an
obtuse tooth. I^egs long; hind coxae moderately separated; femora
siibclavate; front tibiae hooked at apex. Length, 1 4/5 mm.

2 Differs in having the metasternum gently convex, abdomen
with fourth segment simple, head bifasciculate, antennae and legs
somewhat shorter, and front tibiae not hooked.

Hah. — Tasmania: Stanley, in tussocks on sunniiit of ''Nut,"
Hobart, in fallen leaves, Huon River. (A. M. Lea.)

Tlie long and thin antennae, witli peculiar abdomen and front
tibiae of t'he male, render this species very distinct. Each joint
of the antennae is at least tw'ice as long as wide, except the three
basal joints of the club, which, however, are distinctly longer than
wide; the seventh is about as long as the eighth. l)ut distinctly
narrower.

Scydmaenus dentiveitfrix, n.sp.

c? Dark castaneous, elytra somewhat paler, antennae slightly
paler than elytra, legs somewhat paler still, tarsi and palpi iiavous.
Elytra with moderately long and i-atlier sparse stramineous liairs;
on prothorax and head somewhat shortei- and darker, on the former
condensed at sides, and on the latter forming a loose fascicle on
each side of base; abdomen more densely pubescent than usual.

Head moderately transverse, flattened between antennae. Eyes
moderately large and rather prominent. Antennae long and thin;
club distinctly four-jointed. Frothorar feebly transverse; base
foveate and impressed. Elytrn moderately wide and rather de-
pressed, base wider than prothorax, sides evenly rounded, and
widest across middle. Metasternum ratlier convex. Abdomen with
fouith segment tridentate. J^egs ratliei' long; hind coxae rather
distant; front trochanters triangularly dentate. Length, Xlj nan.

? Differs in having fourth segment of aVxlomen simple, front
trochantei-s unarmed, and eleventh joint of antennae shorter.

11 at). — Tasmania : Hobart, fronj sods of grass, Huon River, in
tussocks, Swansea, Stanley; N. S. Wales: Glen Innes. Tamworth,
Wollongong, Windsor (A. M. Lea), Nepean River (A. J. Coates).

The colour is much as in the typical form of f/iilax/is, and in
general appearance it is close to latehricola, but readily distin-
guished from tliese by the basal impressions of prothorax. and the
abdomen. The teeth on the abdomen of the male ai-e of even length,
and very much smaller than in insigni rent ris. with the outer ones
more distant from the margins. Seen directlv from above, the

Australian and Tasmanian Scydmaenidae. 2(»1>

fourth segment iippears bifoveate, with the teeth marking the boun-
daries of the foveae; looking at them, from the direction of tlie
head they appear as three rather acute teeth; from some directions.
they appeal- as slioi-t acutL'ly tciininated ridges, on the same phme
as the base of the segment.

The seventli joint of the antennae is slightly larger than tlie sixtli,
and conspicuously smaller than tlie eighth, the eighth, nintli and
tenth are each sliglitly dilated to tlie apex, the eleventh is sliglitly
longer than the ninth and tenth combined. The basal prothoracic
foveae and the connecting impression are somewhat variable, the
foveae sometimes are rather large, shallow, and two in number,
with the connecting impression rather feeble. On other specimens,
the impression appears more distinct, and with two or four foveate
expansions. It is connected on each side with a longitudinal
impression that is quite invisible from above.

One of the Hobart specimens has the elytra darker than the
others, and with a faint infuscation along suture. The Swansea
ones are also so coloured. Two females from Cunnamulla .(Qld.),
taken by Mr. Hardcastle, appear to belong to the species, but are-
of a rather light castaneous, with the elytra still paler. A speci-
men from South Australia, in the Macleay Museum, appears to.
belong to the species, but is abraded; and, as it is somewhat dirty,
I have not been able to examine it satisfactorily.

Scydmaenus tridentatus, n.sp.

J' Bright castaneous, head and prothorax somewhat darker tha^j
elsewhere, tarsi and palpi flavous. Clothing much as in preceding
species.

Head moderately transverse, very feebly bilobed between an-
tennae, with two very indistinct impressions close to each eye. Eyes-,
small and prominent. Antennae slightly shorter, but otherwise
much as in preceding species. Prothorax lightly transverse; base
foveate and transversely impressed. Elyfro moderately wide, and
gently convex, base distinctly wider than prothorax, sides regularly
rounded and widest just before middle. Abdomen with fourth
segment armed. Legs rather long; front coxae rather di.stant;
femora stout, especially the front pair. Length, If mm.

? Differs in having the antennae shorter, front femora not quite
so stout, and abdomen unarmed.

Hah. — W. Australia : Swan and Vasse Rivers. (A. M. Lea.)

210 Arthur M. Lea:

The teeth on the fourth segment of the iibdonien of the male
^re intermediate between those of insif/n/ renfris and dentiventris,
•differing from the former in being sliorter, not quite as close to
the margins, on the same plane as the base of the segment, and
the median tooth quite distinctly a tooth, and not a slight thicken-
ing of a membranous flap, although remnants of such a flap are
present. From the latter species it differs in the outer teeth being
•decidedly longer than the middle one, more distant from each other,
and conspicuously projecting as teeth over the fifth segment. To
see them most clearly they should be examined from the direction
of the head, as, in this species and in rhntiveiitrls, they are some-
what obscured by clothing.

The base of the prothorax is transversely impressed, with the
imj^ression foveate, but the depressed parts are somewhat obscured
by clothing.

A female, possibly belonging to this species, differs in being some-
■\vhat wider, elytra more densely clothed, head with rather dense
clothing across base, and femora and tibiae almost flavous.

Scydmaenus fiiiihriatus, n.sp.

Of a rather dingy castaneous, suture somewhat darker than rest
■of elytra; tarsi and palpi flavous. Elytra with rather short and
depressed stramineous hairs, prothorax rather densely clothed at
sides, and sparsely elsewhere; not at all on middle of disc; head
sparsely clothed, except at sides and in middle of base, where
the clothing is dense.

Head feebly transverse; moderately bilobed Ijetween antennae.
Eyes small and moderately prominent. Antennae moderately
long; club conspicuously four-jointed. Prothorax lightly transverse;
base foveate. Elytra not very wide, base distinctly wider than pro-
thorax, sides regularly rounded and widest across middle. Legs
rather long; hind coxae moderately separated; femora suliclavato.
Length, Ifmm.

Hah. — N. S. Wales : Ourimbah, from rotting leaves. (A. M. Lea).

The general shape and appearance is much like liiat of Hete/rofi-
nathus robusfus, but the club is distinctly four-jointed. At a
glance it appears close to the preceding species. l)ut tlie l>ases of tlie
prothorax and elytra are different; the elytra and their rlothim:
are not as in hrevijrilis.

The cephalic fascicles are not separated the entire width of the
base, but appear extended round and almost drawn .together, caus-

Australian and Tasmanian ScydnKtenidae. 2 1 1

ing the lioiul to lie iikut densely clotlied at the base tliuii is usual,
HO that it is leally witlmut tiue fascicles. The seventh joint ot the
niiteiinae is very little lar^ei- than the sixth, and not half the nidrh
of the eighth, the latter is practically the same size as the ninth or
tenth. These combined are the length of the eleventh. At the base
of the prothoi-ax there are two small round foveae, somewhat closer
together than is usual ; there is also anothei' fcjvea on each margin,
but partly visible from above; all four are connected by an im-
pression that varies in apparent depth according to the point of
view; the lateral foveae are each connected by mi oblique impies-
sion. The elytra are suppled with faii'ly numerous punctures, of
small size certainly, but readily visil)le under a Coddington lens,
in which respec't they differ from the other species here descj'ibc<l.

Sci/dniatnu.s a/itplipennis, n.sp.

S' Bright castaneous, head and pi'othorax somewhat darker than
-elsewhere, tarsi and palpi Havous. Elytra with rather sparse and
not very long stiamineous hairs; prothorax not very densely clothed
at sides, and glabrous elsewhere; head very spai-sely clothed and
without fascicles.

Head slightly longer than wide, feebly bilobed between antennae.
Eyes small and prominent. Antennae moderately long; club in-
conspicuously four-jointed. I'rothorar distinctly longer than wide;
base with two somewhat irregular foveae. Elytra at base wider
than prothorax, and rather more than twice as wide about the
middle, subobliquely dilated to near the middle, and then rounded
to apex. Metasternum lightly convex. Abdomen with fourth seg-
ment bidentate. Legs long; hind coxae rather widely separated;
front trochanters triangularly dentate. Length, If mm.

2 Differs in having abdomen simple, and legs somewhat shorter,
with the front trochanters unarmed.

//«?>.— N. S. Wales : Sydney. (Macleay Museum), Forest Reefs.
(A. M. Lea.)

Readily distinguished from most species of the genus by the com-
paratively small prothorax, large elytra and bidentate abdomen.
The second to seventh joints of antennae are practically of even
width, and the seventh is not much, certainly not conspicuously so,
narrower than the eighth, so that the antennae might almost faiidy
be regarded as having the joints of subcontinuous width, and with
the club rather feebly defined; still it is defined, and this, with the
separation of the hind coxae, evidently distinguishes the species

212 Arthur M. Lea:

from I'liaf/oiiophaiia, to several species of wliieh it is ratlier close in
general appearance.

From certain directions the head appears to have a small but very
distinct fovea close to each eye; from other directions, however, it
appears no more than a very shallow and indistinct impression.
The basal foveas of the prothorax are somewhat transverse, closer
together and less rounded than usual, and with a feeble connecting-
impression ; the impression continued to connect with a longi-
tudinal impression on each side. The teeth on the fourth abdominal
segment of the male are moderately large and close together, and
project backwards on the same plane as the rest of the segment;
from certain directions they appear to be connected l>y a basal
membrane, but there is no trace of a smaller median tooth.

Svi/diiKtenus tennicoUis, n.sp. or var.

Head and prothorax rather dark reddish-castaneous; ehi;ra
about base and basal half of suture not much paler, but decidedly
paler elsewhere, and l)ecoming almost flavous posteriorly ; legs and
palpi flavous. Clothing much as in preceding species.

Head and antennae as in preceding species. Prothorar and
d]ttra narrower. ])ut otlierwise much the same. Legs long; hind
coxae rather widely separated. Length, If mm.

Hah. — Tasmania : Huon Kiver. (A. M. Lea.)

In general appearance very close to the preceding species, of
which it is perhaps a variety, but the prothorax and elytra are
slightly narrower, and the latter are somewhat paler. I am ac-
quainted with liut a single specimen, evidently a female.

Scydmaenus inastersi, n.sp.

<? Of a i-atlier dingy castaneous, legs paler, tarsi and palpi
flavous. Elytra with sparse and short depressed hairs, prothorax
rather densely clothed at the sides in front l)ut sparsely elsewhere,
head sparsely clothed and without fascicles.

Head moderately transvei'se; feebly bihilied l)et\veen antennae.
Eyes rather small and prominent. Antennae moderately long; club
distinctly four-jointed. J'rothorax about as long as wide; base with
two strong foveae. El i/t ra ratlicr wide and convex ; at base wider
than prothoi'ax, and acinss middle fully twice as wide, sides rather
strongly and evenly rdunded. Metaxfeniinn moderately convex.
Legs moderately long: hind coxae distinctly, but not very widely
separated; front ti))iae somewhat intiated towards apex. Lengtli.
1^ mm.

Australidn and Tasmnnian Scydmaenidae. 213

$ Differs in having,' the UR'tastfrnuiii ruthoi- inoro (.'onvex, and
front tibiae thinner, with the legs in general somewhat shorter.

f/ah. — N. S. Wales : Tweed River (Macleay Museum and A. M.
Lea); Clarence River, Tamworth (Lea).

Allied to (/iilosiis, and with the front tibiae also inflated in the
male; but liead and jiruthorax paler, size slightly smaller and
clothing sparser, etc. .Smaller than the pale form of denfivenfris,
and pruthorax different at l)ase. Wider than rlvularis and pro-
thoraeic impressions and colours different. Narrower than depre$-
sns and yrijfitlti, elytra less depressed, and different at base, and
prothoracic foveae different.

The colour of the upper surface is usually of a uniform dingy
castaneous, but on some specimens the elytra (suture excepted)
are slightly paler than the prothorax and head. The seventh joint
of the antennae is somewhat larger than the sixth, but is slightly
shorter and conspicuously narrower than the eighth. The pro-
thoracic foveae are connected by an impression that is not very
distinct, although traceable, from some directions, but very dis-
tinct, and apparently deep, from others.

Sci/dmaeuus usitatus, n.sp.

Of a rather bright reddish-castaneous, elytra sometimes slightly
paler than head and prothorax; legs and palpi flavous. Elytra
with fairly numerous but rather short, suberect pale hairs; pro-
thorax rather densely clothed at sides; head with a distinct but
rather loose fascicle on each side of base.

Head moderately transverse; feebly bilobed between antennae.
Eyes small and prominent. Antennae moderately long; club con-
spicuously four- jointed. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, base
bifoveate. Elytra moderately long, at extreme base the width of
prothorax, but about once and one-half as wide across middle, sides
moderately and regularly rounded. Legs moderately long; hind
coxae moderately separated; front tiljiae with apical half some-
what inflated. Length, 1| mm.

$ Differs in having the metasteriium more strongly convex; legs
somewhat shorter, and front tibiae less inflated towards-apex.

Ilah. — -Tasmania : Stanley, in tussocks at summit of " Nut."
Hobart, in moss, Waratah, (A. M. Lea.)

From the preceding species distinguished by having elytra de-
cidedly narrower, with the hind coxae more noticeably separated;
the clothing and prothoracic sculpture are also not the same. It

214 Arthur M. Lea:

is certainly close to gulosus, hnt the head and piothorax are not
shining black as in that species, and the inflation of the front
tibiae is somewhat different. It is smaller and liairier than colo-
bopsiti, more densely clothed than depifHsus and f/riffitlii, less
depresseti ; elytra and prothorax not tpiite the same as base, ana
antennae soniewhat shorter.

The eighth joint of the antennae is fully twice the width of the
seventh. The basal fovcae of the prothoiax are larger and closer
together than usual; connecting them is a short impi'ession that
appears (juite absent from some directinns, Ijut from other causes
than to appear confiueut ; the impression is continued to eacll side,
where it joins in with a 'lateral impression, which, however, i.s
partially concealed by clothing.

One specimen has the metasternum and alxlomen ahnost l)lack.

Scydmaenus pilosicoUi.^, n.sp.

Dark castaneous, elytra slightly palei- than prothorax, legs pale
castaneous, tarsi and palpi flavous. Elytra with moderately dense,
suberect, short, pale hairs; prothorax densely clothed at sides, and
sparsely elsewhere; head rather spai-sely clothed, l)ut with a loose
fascicle on each side of base.

Head moderately transverse; very indistinctly l)ilol)ed betweer;
antennae. Eyes small and prominent. Antennae moderately long;
club four-jointed. Prothomx slightly longer than wide; base with
two large and almost confluent foveae in middle, and one on each
side. Elytra with outlines as in preceding species. Legs mode-
rately long; hind coxae distinctly, but not very widely sepaiated.
Length, 1^ nmi.

Hah. — Tasmania : Hobart, from moss, Lc^ng Bay. (A. M. Lea.)

Slightly larger, hairier, and with slightly stouter and less con-
spicuous club than in the preceding species, and prothoracic im-
pressions deeper. Larger, hairier, and wider than nrularis.
Slightly smaller than colobopsis, nariower. more convex and more
densely clothed, and basal parts of prothorax and elytra not quite
the same.

The disc of the pronotum, although not densely clothed, is not
glabrous as in so many species of the genus. The seventh joint of
the antennae is slightly larger than the sixth, and almost two-thirds
of the width of, and somewhat shorter than, the eighth; the latt<ir
is somewhat narrowei' than tlie ninth, so that the club is not very
conspicuously four- jointed, although <|uite decidedly so. The pro-

Aitstralian and Tasmanian Scydmaenidae. 21")

thoracic foveae are umistially large, and the lateral ones are par-
tially vsiible from above; they are all so close together that there-
is not room for a conspicuous connecting impression, but fi'om some
directions the base appears to l)e conspicuously traversed by a
rather deep impression.

Scydinatii us latebricola, n.sp.

Black, under surface piceous; pruthorax diluted with red at
base; elytra dark castaneous, antennae paler; palpi and legs
tiavous, knees slightly infuscated. Elytra Avith rather long, sub-
erect, pale hairs; prothorax densely clothed at sides and glabrous
elsewhere; head with a loose fascicle on each side of base, very
sparsely clothed elsewhere.

Head slightly longer than wide; very indistinctly bilol)ed between
antennae. Eyes small and prominent. Antennae of moderate
length; club conspicuously four-jointed. Prothorax distinctly
longer than wide; with two round, moderately deep, but not very
large foveae, isolated from each other, but each connected with one
on the side. Elytra moderately long; base distinctly wider than
prothorax, and almost twice as wide across middle, sides mode-
rately and evenly rounded. Legs moderately long; hind coxae dis-
tinctly but not very widely separated. Length, 1^ mm.

Hah. — Tasmania : New Norfolk, in tussocks, (A. M. Lea.)

Very close to gitlosiis, but a trifle larger, club somewhat stouter
and shorter, head more densely clothed, prothorax more densely
clothed at sides, and elytra darker, with longer clothing. From
clientulus it differs in being larger and darker, club stoutei-, and
clothing longer and darker. It is rather like a large specimen of
the preceding species, but the prothoracic foveae are different, and
the hind coxae are a trifle closer together.

The eighth joint of the club is the length of, but slightly
narrower than, the ninth, but is fully twice the width of the
seventh, the latt-er is very little larger than the sixth. The lateral
foveae of the prothorax are partially visible from above; the im-
pression connecting each with one of the medio-basal foveae is very
conspicuous from some directions, but apparently absent frmn
others.

One specimen has the entire upper surface of a dark castaneous.

Scydmaenus walkeri, n.sp.
Bright reddish-castaneous, legs somewhat paler, tarsi and paljii
flavous. Elytra with rather short and subdepressed pale hairs;

216 Arthur M. Lea:

prothonix sparsely clothed at the sides and glabrous elsewhere;
head glabrous, even at the sides.

Head modeiately transverse; rounded between antennae. Eyes
small and moderately prominent. Antennae moderately long and
thin; club distinctly four-jointed. Profhorax rather convex,
about as long as wide; base bifoveate. Elytra rather wide, at base-
distinctly wider than prothorax, and more than twice as wide
across middle; sides rather strongly and evenly rounded. Legs
long; hind CDxae moderately separated. Length, 1^ mm.

J/ah.—y. W. Austialia : Upper Ord River (R. Helms), Adelaide
River (Bi-itisli Museum, t'roni: J. J. Walker).

Rather close to uiasfersi, but antennae longer and thinner, and
prothorax not quite the same.

At a glance the antennae appear to have the joints of subcon-
tinuous width, but the eighth joint, although distinctly narrower
than the ninth, is almost twice the width of the seventh; the latter
is distinctly, but not much, larger than the sixth. The prothoracic
foveae are rather small; from some directions a fairly distinct
connecting impression is visible, but from others it appears to be
entirely absent.

Scydmaenus calvicejjs, n.sp.

Colours and clothing much as in preceding species, except that on
the elytra the hairs are slightly shorter.

Head moderately transverse, flattened and almost straight be-
tween antennae. Eyes of moderate size and moderately prominent.
Antennae rather short; club conspicuously four-jointed. Frothorary
about as long as wide; base with two rather large round foveae,
close together, but without a connecting impression. Elytra with
outlines much as in preceding species. Metasternum rather con-
vex. Legs moderately long; hind coxae closer together than usuaU
although distinctly separated; front tibiae somewhat inflated in
male. Length, 1^ mm.

Hab.—^. S. Wales : Tweed River. (A. M. Lea.)

From the many similarly coloured species readily distinguished
by the isolation of tlie prothoracic foveae, and the rather sliort an-
tennae, with stouter club than usual ; the clothing also is decidedly
shorter than usual. From the pale foi-m of gulosus, which has the
foveae similarly isolated, the much shorter antennae are sufiicently
distinctive. In appearance it is close to mastersi, but is slightly
smaller, and antennae shorter, with club decidedly stouter; the
prothoracic foveae are also somewhat different. In general ap-

A ustralian and Tasmanian Seydmaenidae. -2 1 7

pfaiaiKe it is voiv close to tlie preceding species, but antennae ai-e
decidedly sliortcr, witli the ninth and tenth joints distinctly twice
as wide as long, instead of not nuuli wider tlian long. The eighth
joint is as long as the ninth, bnt slightly narrower, and is fnlly
twice the width of the seventh, the latter is scarcely perceptibly
larger tliaii the sixth.

Sci/(I iiKicintx (le prtssiis, n.sp.

Bright pale castaneous, sntui-e slightly darker than the rest of
the elytra ; legs and palpi Hav(nis. Elytra with sparse, subde-
pressed. pale hairs, prothorax moderately clothed at sides, and
glabrous eUewhere ; liead with a feeble fascicle on each side of
base; very sparsely clothed elsewhere.

Head moderately transverse, very feebly bilobed between an-
tennae. Eyes small and prominent. Antennae j-atlier long; club
conspicuously four-jointed. L'ruihorar almost' as long as wide;
base bifoveat<?. Elytra wide and somewhat depressed; base distinctly
w^der than prothorax, and more than twice as wide across middle;
sides strongly and evenly rounded. Metasternnni more convex than
usual. Legs long; hind coxae moderately separated; femora sub-
clavate. Length, 1 mm.

Hah. — South Australia (Macleay Museum), Adelaide, (H. H. D.
Griffith).

A small depressed species with comparatively wide elytra, long
-antennae and legs, and sliort clothing. It is fairly close to tnas-
tersi, but is more depressed, and the antennae are stouter, with
the club sliorter. It is rather wider than ralvlcf/is, and the jiro-
thoracic impressions are different.

The eighth joint of the antennae is feebly ti-anvei-se, about twice
the width of the seventli. and slightly narrower than the ninth, the
lattei- in turn being slightly narrower than the tenth; the eleventh
is briefly ovate, and very decidedly sliorter than the two preceding
combined; the seventh is very little larger than tlie sixth, the
basal foveae of the prothoi-ax are rather moi-e widely separateil than
usual; connecting them is an impression that is only moderately
distinct from soma directions, but which from others causes the
base to appear transversely sulcate.

Sct/dmaetius f/riffithi, n.sp.

Dark castaneous, elytra (suture excepted^ generally somewhat
paler; under surface piceous or black; legs and palpi castaneous.

218 Arthur M. Lea:

Elytra with not very numerous and rather sliort, subdepressed.
pale hairs; prothorax moderately clothed at sides, great portion of
disc glabrous; head sparsely flotlied. without basal fascicles.

Head about as long as wide ; feebly bilobed between antennae.
Eves of moderate size and rather prominent. Antennae long and
rather thin ; club conspicuously four-jointed. Prothorax slightly
longer than wide; base with two foveae of moderate size, and con-
nected by a rather strong impression. Elytra moderately long,
base .slightly wider than prothorax, and almost twice as wide across
middle; sides moderately and evenly idunded. Leris moderately
long; hind coxae distinctly but not very widely separated; front
tibiae dilated to apex in male. Length, 1 1/6 mm.

Hah.— ^out\\ Australia : Adelaide, (H. H. D. Griffith.)

Darker than the preceding species, with longer antennae and
with narrower and longer elytra; the suture is subdepressed to-
wards the base, as it is also in that species, although this charac-
ter is not of much use in distinguishing species. It is a trifle
larger than rlvularis, joints of club luore rounded, prothoracic
foveae less sharply defined, more distant, and with a feeble con-
necting depression ; and the head and prothorax not shining black
as in that species. The antennae are decidedly longer and thinner
than in ii si fat us. The head has a shallow impression close to each
eye. l:mt from certain directions each of the impressions appears
like a small fovea, much as in amplipeiinis, a species which other-
wise it has little in common with.

One female lias tlie body entirely pale castaneous. with the
appendages flavous, but it is probably immature.

Scydmaenus fuscipalp/s, n.sp.

Dark castaneous. suture still darker, under surface black, femora
deeply infuscated, tibiae and palpi paler, tarsi flavous. Clothing
much as in the preceding species, except that the entire disc of the
pronotum is glabrous, and that the liead has a loose fascicle on
each side of the base.

Head moderately transverse; very indistinctly bilobed between
antennae. Eyes small and prominent. Antennae long and
moderately thin ; clul) four-jointed. Prothorax distinctly longer
than wide, base hifovcatc. I'Uytra somewhat depressed; outlines
as in preceding species. Legs moderately long; hind coxae mode-
rately separated. Length, 1^ mm.

I/ab.—S. Australia : Adelaide (H. H. D. Griffith).

Austndian. and Tasmanian Scydnnaenidae. 219

Like an <.'nlai;j:f(l tdnii of the piuci'din;^' sjtfeies, hut darkcM\ even
as to the le^'s. it is due (/f the very few .speeies whose palpi are not
entirely tluvons.

Tlie eluh is ilistiiietly foiir-jointed, the eighth joint of the an-
tennae, however, is distinetly nnnower and iiioie lonnded than the
ninth, and scarcely twice the width of the seventh, the latter is
slightly larger than the sixth; the eleventh is almost as long as the
ninth and tenth conihined. The basal foveae of the prothorax, are
fairly large, close togetlier, and with a connecting impression, that
is always traceable, but varies in apparent depth with the point of
view.

Srt/dmaenua evanidux, n.sp.

Of a rather l)i-ight castaneous, antennae somewhat paler; legs
and palpi Havous. Elytra with short, sparse pale, depressed hairs
(almost pubescence); prothorax sparsely clothed at sides, and
glabrous elsewhere ; head almost glabrous, without basal fascicles.

Head moderately tiansverse; gently rounded between antennae.
Eyes rather small and moderately prominent. Antennae long and
rather thin; club conspicuously four-jointed. Frothorax somewhat
depressed, slightly longer than wide; base bifoveate. Elytra de-
pressed, base distinctly wider than prothoiax and aljout twice
as wide across middle; sides moderately and evenly rounded.
MefasfeniiuN ratliei' lightly convex. Li'f/s moderately long; hind
coxae moderately sejjavated. Length, 4/5th nun.

Hah.—^. S. Wales: Tamworth (A. M. Lea). %

A minute, depressed species, ■with thin antennae. In general
appearance it is close to Scydmaenilla pusdla. but antennae with
the club four-jointed, and liind coxae distinctly separated.

The eighth joint (.>f tlie antennae is scarcely, if at all. narroAver
tlian the ninth, and twice the width of the seventh; the latter is
slightly but noticeably larger than the sixth. The prothoracic
foveae are round and rather deep, but not very large, from some
directifins tliey appeal' to be isolated, Imt from others a faint con-
necting inqtression is traceal)le.

Scf/di/iae/iits ri rularis, n.sp.

Black; elytra and extreme base of prothorax deep reddish-cas-
taneous; antennae and abdomen someAvhat paler; legs and palpi
Havous. Elytra with fairly numerous and rather short, subde-
pressed, pale iiairs; prothorax densely clothed at sides and glabrous
elseAvhere; head sparsely clothed; eacli side of l)ase with a feeble fas-
cicle.

220 Arthur M. Lea :

Head lightly transverse; feebly bilobed between antennae. Eyes
small and prominent. Antennae moderatly long and not very thin;
club conspicuously four-jointed. Prothorar, slightly longer than
wide; base with two rather small, round, deep foveae, close to-
gether, but without a connecting" impression; each side with a
small fovea, also isolated from the median ones. Elytra i-ather
long, base not much wider tlian prothorax, and not twice as wid ■
across middle, sides moderately and evenly rounded, -/vf.r/.s mode-
rately long; hind coxae distinctly but not widely separated; tibiae
soiViewhat stouter in male than in female. Length, \\ mm.

Hah. — Victoria; N. S. Wales: Sydney (Macleay Museum), Nepean
River (A. J. Coates), Tweed, Clarence, Hawkesbury and Peel
Rivers, abundant in flood debris (A. M. Lea).

The prothoracic foveae are more sharply defined and closer to-
gether than usual. The colours are mucli as in (julosiis, but that
species is somewhat larger and wider, prothoracic foveae separated
almost twice the distance, Ijase of elytra not quite the same, and
joints of club more globular. Poramaffe/is/s is also larger and
wider, antennae longer, and club and base of elytra different. The
eighth joint of the antennae is very decidedly narrower than the
ninth, although almost twice the width of the seventh.

On an occasional specimen the metasternum is not much darker
than the elytra ; and one specimen has the entire body pale cas-
taneous, with the appendages still paler, but it is probably im-
mature.

Scydmaeiiiis foveidisfa/is, n.sp.

(? Dark castaneous; metasternum almost or quite black; legs and
palpi flavous, antennae somewhat darker. Elytra with moderately
numerous, short, subdepressed hairs, prothorax not very densely
clothed at sides and sparsely elsewhere, only middle of disc glab-
rous; head sparsely clothed, basal fascicles very fecltle and indis-
tinct.

Head about as long as wide; gently rounded between antennae
Eyes small and prominent. Antennae moderately long; elul) con-
spicuously four-jointed. Prothorax about as long as wide; base
bifoveate. Elytra moderately long, extreme base no wider than
prothorax, and across middle less than twice as wide; sides rather
lightly and evenly rounded. Metasternum rather lightly convex.
Legs moderately long; hind coxae distinctly but not widely sepa-
rated; front coxae inflated. Length, 1 mm.

Australian and Tasmania^ Scydmaenidae. 221

5 DiffiMs in liavin*,' the inetasteniuin more euiivex, tlio appeii-
<Iages somewhat shorter, with the front tibiae tliinner.

I/ab. — N. S. Wales; Nepean River (A. J. Coates), Tamwoitli.
Windsor (A. M. Lea).

Smaller, darker, wider and more depressed than the precedin<;
species, and prothoracie impressions different; the basal foveae are
rather small and widely separated, but with a connecting impres-
sion that appears very distinct from some directions, although
ratlier feeble from others. It is considerably smaller than manfersi,
usitatus and yidoxus.

The eighth joint oi the antennae is about twice the width of the
seventh, and almost the width of the ninth. The front coxae of tli ■
male are distinctly inflated from, near the base to near the apex,
but then decrease to the apex itself, as a result their outer edge
has a somewhat rounded outline.

One specimen has the elytra darker than the prothorax, a re-
versal of the usual colours in species of the genus.

Sci/dmae/nis apj}ropitiqiia?ift. n.sp.

Very dark brownish castaneous, elytra (sutuie excepted) generallv
slightly paler; metasternum black; abdomen usually black, but tip
obscurely diluted with red; antennae and legs of a rather dingy
pale castaneous, tarsi and palpi paler, but scarcely flavous. Elytra
with short, sparse, depressed hairs or pubescence; prothorax
rather sparsely clothed at sides, and glabrous elsewhere; head almost
glabrous, Avithout basal fascicles.

Head about as long as Avide, very indistinctly bilobed between
antennae. Eyes small and not very prominent. Antennae slightly
longer, but otherAvise mucli as in preceding species. Prothorar
about as long as Avide; base Avith two shaiply defined foveae of
moderate size, closer together than usual, and with a very feeble
connecting impression. Elytra subdepressed and rather Avide; base
distinctly Avider than prothorax, and aljout tAvice as Avide across
middle; sides rathei- strongly and evenly rounded. Ltga mode-
rately long; hind coxae lightly l)nt distinctly separated, front tibiae
8omeAvhat st(niter in male than in female. Length, 1 mm.

llah. — W. Australia : Vasse River, in flood debris (A. M. Lea).

Close to rtrularix, but soniCAvhat smaller, pi'othoracic foveae
someAvhat different, antennae shorter, and joints of club smaller.
Also close to the preceding species, but prothoracic foveae larger

222 Arthur M. Lea.-

and much closer together, with the connecting impression scarcely
traceable from certain directions, and not at all from others.

The elytra, although always dark, are usually somewhat paler
than the head and prothorax.

A specimen in the Macleay Museum, from Victoria, is very close,
to if not identical Avith this species; its elytra are rather darker,
l)ut I can find no other differences.

» Scydinaenus afrojihiis, n.sp.

Bright castaneous, antennae and legs somewhat paler, tarsi and
palpi flavous. Elytra with rather short, sparse, pale, depressed
hairs or pubescence; prothorax sparsely clothed at sides, greater
portion of disc glabrous; head very sparsely clothed, a few hairs on
each side at base, but scarcely forming fascicles.

Head lightly transverse ; feebly bilobed between antennae. Eyes
small and prominent. Antennae rather long; club conspicuously
four-jointed. Prothorax somewhat depressed, and slightly longer
than wide; base bifoveate. Elytra long, at extreme base no wider
than prothorax, and scarcely once and one-half across middle; sides
gently and evenly rounded. Metasternum rather longer than usual,
and moderately convex. Legs moderately long; hind coxae dis-
tinctly but not very widely separated; front tibiae rather stouter
in male than in female. Length, 1 mm.

Hab. — W. Australia : Swan and Vasse Rivers (A. M. Lea).

A small, narrow, species, in build close to the preceding species,
but slightly narrower, much paler and prothoracic impressions dif-
ferent; the basal foveas are distinctly transverse, rather large,
distinctly (at least from certain directions) connected with one on
each side, but indistinctly connected with each other. It is smaller
and distinctly narrower than duplicatiis and grijfithi, and the
prothoracic impressions are different. It is much the size and
colour of Sci/dmaetiilla 2^f'silla, but the club and liind coxae are
different.

The eighth joint of the antennae is twice the width of the
seventh, and fully as wide as the ninth.

Phagonophana sutu rails, n.sp.

Dark reddish-castaneous; elytra (sutu)-o excepted) and ajipen-
(lages paler. Hather densely clothed with niodei'ately long, sub-
t'l'cct. straiuiiieoiis liairs.

Australian and Tasmanian Scydmaenidae. 22.">

Head luodcratelv luii^'. Eyes small, latero-frontal and promi-
nent. Antennae fairly stout, passing middle coxae, joints of sub-
continuous widtli. Prothorax slightly? longer than wide; base with
i)regular foveae, partially obscured by clothing. Elytra at ex-
treme base the width of prothorax, but considerably wider across
middle, sides strongly and evenly rounded; each side of base with
two rather large impressions, of which the inner one is the smaller ;
narrowly striated on basal fourth close to suture; with small, irre-
gularly distributed and usually indistinct punctures. Leffs stout
and rather long; hind coxae almost touching; femora not peduncu-
late. Length, 2 mm.

Hab. — Tasmania : Mount Wellington, in moss (A. M. Lea).

Considerably smaller and somewhat narrower than ladpennis,
with denser and paler clothing, and femora approaching the
normal. It is stouter than the following species, antennae stouter,
clothing denser and longer, and elytra with sides regularly
rounded.

The clotliing is denser on head and sides of prothorax than else-
where, on the head almost entirely concealing its sculpture. The
eyes are on a lower plane than usual, so that, although distinctlv
projecting from their surroundings, they are not very conspicuous
from above. The second joint of the antennae is shorter than the
first, but longer than the third, the latter is about as long as wide,
but with the front edge narrowed to its junction with the fourtli,
the fifth to tenth have their apices similarly narrowed, i the tenth
is about twice as wide as the third, but the intervening joints so
regularly decrease in size, that the antennae cannot be regarded as
having a club; the eleventh joint is subconical, and slightly longer
than the two preceding combined. Close to the base and imme-
diately on each side of the suture there is impressed a verv fine
stria, inmiediately outside of which there is a still finei- stria,
which is continued for a short distance beyond the first ; but they
are rather indistinct from some directions. Seen from the direc-
tion of the liead the hind coxae appear rather widely sepaiated, but
when examined from along the abdomen they are seen to be almost
touching.

I'hagonopliaiia abundans. n.sp.
(? Dark castaneous, elytra, abdomen and appendages somewhat
paler, palpi and tarsi flavous. Moderately clothed with not very
long, suberect, stramineous hairs.

1. Similarly shaped joints in the PseJaphidae are described by M. Raffray as trapezoidal.

224 Arthur M. Lea :

Head moderately long, with a sniall and latlier shallow impres-
sion close to each eye. Eyes small, latero-fronta] and prominent.
Antennae rather long and thiin^ second to sixth joints of even width,
the others slightly and regularly increasing in width, and not dis-
tinctly clubbed, eleventh subconical, slightly longer than two pre-
ceding joints combined. I'rotliora.i strongly convex, and very de-
cidedly longer than wide; l)ase with foui- impressions, the two
outer marginal and longitudinal, l)ut partially visible from above,
the two inner round and fairly large f oveae ; the space between them
appearing almost as a carina. Elytra at extreme base the width of
prothorax, sides strongly obliquely dilated to the basal two-fifths,
where the width is more than twice that of the prothoi-ax. then
rounded, and then somewhat oblique to apex ; each side of base
depressed, the depression causing each side to appeal' like a small
projecting tooth; with sparse, rather small, and more or less con-
cealed punctures. Metasterinim somewhat flattened across middle
of apex. Abdomen with fourtli segment having a strong raised
double ridge on each side of middle, the middle of its apex exca-
vated, and with a smaller ridge or tooth. Leys long; liiud coxae
moderately separated; femora subclavate. Length, 1 4/5-2 mm.

? Differs in having metasternum more convex, abdomen simple,
and appendages somewhat shorter.

Hah. — Tasmania : New Norfolk, Hobart. Mount Wellington,
numerous specimens from moss and several from fallen leaves.

Seen from the side the fourth abdominal segment of the \\va\q
appears to have on each side of its middle, a strongly elevated
narrow ridge, highest towards its l)ase, with its l)asal end vertical,
and witli its apex projecting as a tiuncated tooth beyond the apex
of the segment. From an oblicjue tliiection each lidge is seen to 1)l'
distinctly double, with the separate parts conjoined at apex. Seen
directly fi-om behind each appears as two narrow ve)-tical teeth.

I'hayo n oph a n a h irt iceps , n . sp .

Moderately dark castaneous. elytra slightly paler, legs slightly
paler still, tarsi and palpi almost flavous. (^lothing much as in
preceding spei'ies, except that it is densei- on rhc lioad.

Head moderately wide. Eyes snndl, latero-fi-ontal and promi-
nent. Antennae long and i-ather thin, second joint slightly shorter
than first, slightly stouter than third and almost as long as thiid
and fourth combined, third to sixth of even widtli, the others
slightly and regularly increasing in width, eleventh sul)ci>nical.

Australian and Tasmanian Sci/chnaenidae. 225

slightly longer than ninth and tenth combined. Frof/iora.r strongly
convex, distinctly k>nger than wide, widest across apical third ;
near base with two rounded t'oveae, the space between almost cari-
nated. Kli/fra with outlines much as in preceding species; a nar-
row stria close to each side of the suture on the basal fifth; punc-
tures spai-se and indistinct. Lec/s long and rather stout; hind
coxae rather Avidely separated. Length, 2 1/6 mm.

Hah. — Tasmania : Southport (A. M. Lea).

In general appearance close to the preceding species, but an-
tennae stouter, elytra less suddenly inflated, and the shades of
colour of prothorax and elytra less strongly defined. The separa-
tion of the hind coxae is also more noticeable, but the two species
are so obviously close together that it is inadvisable to generically
separate them, although the separation is certainly more pro-
nounced than in any other species of Phagonophana.

Phagonophana crassipes, n.sp.

Colour and clothing as in ahundans, except that on the head and
prothorax the clothing is denser.

Head moderately long, with fairly numerous but more or less
concealed punctures. Eyes small, latero-frontal, and moderately
prominent. Antennae moderately long and not very thin, joints
of subcontinuous Avidth, eleventh joint subconical, as long as ninth
and tenth combined. Prothorax rather strongly convex, distinctly-
longer than wide, widest across apical third; base with four
strong impressions. Elytra at extreme base no wider than base of
prothorax, but almost twice as wide across middle, sides strongly
and evenly rounded ; each side of base with two impressions, appear-
ing confluent from some directions; with small, and rather sparse,
more or less obscured punctures. Legs long and rather stout ; hind
coxae almost touching; femora not pedunculate. Length, If mm.

Hah. — Tasmania (Macleay Museum and H. H. D. Griffith),
Hobart, Mount Wellington, in moss (A. M. Lea).

Somewhat smaller than ahundans and clothing shorter, and
elytra more regularly rounded and different at base; the basal
impressions on the prothorax are much the same, but they are
partially obscured by the clothing. The antennae are somewhat
shorter than in the three preceding species, the ninth and tentli
joints are fully twice as wide as long, the others gradually decrease
in width, so that the third is just perceptibly transverse.

526 Arthur M. Lea :

When viewed straight from behind the hind coxae are seen to be
sliglitly separated, but from other directions they appear to l)e
touching.

PJiagonopho/Ki pedu/iculnto, n.sp.

Of a rather dai'k reddish-castaneous, abdomen and legs some-
what paler, tarsi and palpi almost flavous. Elytra moderately
<-lothed with not very long, subdepressed, stramineous hairs, denser
on head and sides of prothorax; disc of the latter glabrous.

J/e(ir/ moderately wide. Eyes small, latero-frontal and promi-
nent. Antennae moderately long and not very thin. Prothorar
moderately convex, slightly longer than wide; base with four im-
pressions. Eh/fra at base distinctly wider than prothorax, and
almost twice as wide across middle, sides rather strongly and evenly
rounded; with moderately sparse and small punctures. Legs long
and rather thin; hind coxae touching; hind femora pedunculate,
the others much less so. Length, 1^ mm.

Hah. — N. S. Wales : Sydney (Macleay Museum), Clarence River
(A. M. Lea).

Rather close to the preceding species, but sliglitly smaller,
antennae a trifle longer (although stouter than most species of the
genus), prothorax with the basal impressions somewhat different;
and legs longer and of different shape.

The third to fifth joints of antennae are of even width, the sixth
is a trifle wider, the seventh is rather suddenly, although not much,
wider than the sixth, the others feebly and regularly increase in
width, so that it is somewhat diflicult to decide as to whether the
antennae should be regarded as having the joints of sub-continuous
width or as having a five-jointed' club. The four basal
impressions of the prothorax consist of two rather small
median foveae, and a longitudinal impression on each side, con-
necting them all is an impression that appears rather feeble from
some directions, but from othei-s appears almost as a deep continu-
ous groove. The elytral punctures, although small, are fairly dis-
tinct where the surface has been abraded.

The pedunculate femora, contiguous hind coxae and joints of
antennae of subcontinuous width, or almost .so, would appear to
■denote that this species belongs to Fhagonophana. Two of the
main characters, relied upon by King for distinguishing that genus
from others, are the biarticulate labial palpi, and mandibles with
two teeth and membranous edge; but to see these it is necessary to

Australian and Tastnanian Scydmaenidae. 227

mount speeiiuens, after treatiueiit, in Canada balsam, and smh
treatment destroys specimens for ordinary examination; so that
where but few specimens are available it is not advisable to so treat
them. While not contend in,ii[ that liidden characters should never
be used for the definition of genera, it certainly appears preferable
to use such characters as can be made out by the use of an ordinarx
lens, or l)y aid of tlie microscope, without the destruction of type
specimens.

PJuu/oiiopJunta parvicollis, n.sp.

Bright castaneous. abdomen tarsi and palpi somewhat paler.
Moderately clothed witli not very long, subde^^ressed. stramineous
hairs or pubescence, disc of prothorax glabrous.

Head about as long as wide. Eyes rather small, latero-frontal
and moderately prominent. Antennae moderately long. Prothoror
moderately convex, slightly longer than wide; base with four
moderate impressions. FAyira at base distinctly wider than pro-
thorax, and fully thrice as wade across middle; sides strongly and
evenly rounded, each side of base with two impressions; punctures
rather dense and distinct. Legs long and rather thin ; hind coxae
touching; four hind femora pedunculate. Length, 1^, mm.

Eah. — N. S. Wales : Sydney, Ourimbah (A. M. Lea).

The prothorax is unusually small in comparison with the elytra,
a character which at once distinguishes it from the preceding
species.

The elytra have a few rather lon^ hairs scattered amongst the
ordinary ones, but they are not very distinct except from tlie
sides. The second joint of the antennae is distinctly longer than
the third, the latter is briefly cylindrical, the fourth to sixth are
more or less globular, and of even width, the seventh is slightly
longer and distinctly wider than the sixth, the others gradually
increase in size, and, as also the seventh, are more or less trape-
zoidal; the eleventh is subconical and distinctly shorter than the
ninth and tenth combined. The antennae therefore could fairly be
regarded as having a rather loose five-jointed club, although at a
glance the joints appear to be of subcontinuous width. The medio-
basal impressions of the prothorax are transverse, the lateral ones
are oblique, and all are more or less feebly connected together bv
a transverse impression. The elytral punctures are quite distinct,
even before abrasion.

228 Arthur M. Lea :

Vhagonoplianti anthicoidti>, n.sp.

Of a uniform and l)right castaneous, tip of abdomen, tarsi and
l>ulpi very little paler. With short, depressed, and rather sparse,
stramineous hairs or pubescence.

Head distinctly transverse; with a siiort transverse antennary
ridge on each side, and a small fovea behind each ridge. Eyes
rather small, latero-median and pronjincnt. Antennae not very
long, joints of subcontinuous Avidth. Frothorar somewhat de-
pressed, distinctly longer than wide, widest close to apex; base with
two small foveae and a more distinct one on each side, although
only partially visible from al)ove. Ehjfvd depressed, base wider
than base of prothorax, but not wider than near its apex, sides
moderately rounded and widest at about basal two-fifths; with
fairly numerous, and. foi- the genus, rather coarse punctures on
basal half, becoming smaller posteriorly. Ltgs moderately long;
hind coxae feebly separated; hind femora decidedly pedunculated,
the others much less noticeably so. Length, 1 2/3 mm.

Hah. — N. 8. Wales : Sydney, Glen Innes (A. M. Lea).

A depressed species, in general appearance like several species
of Heterognathus, but the hind coxae are almost touching. The
elytral punctures are stronger than in the pi-eceding species. The
shape and general appearance are decidedly suggestive of some of
the pale species of Anthicus.

The second to sixth joints of antennae' are of even width, the
others regularly increasing in width, but as the ninth and tenth,
in addition to being wider, are somewhat longer than the seventh,
the antennae might be regarded as having a three-jointed club; the
eleventh joint is subconical. and almost as long as the ninth and
tenth combined.

Phni/ottopJiaiKi orij>f/i/iis. u.sp.

Of a rather dark reddish-castaneous, abdomen and appendages
somewhat paler, tarsi and palpi almost flavous. Moderately clothed
with suberect and moderately long stramineous hairs, becoming
dense on sides and base nf iiiothorax, and of head.

//f^ad rather long and tliin ; with a somewhat obscured drpiessinn
close to each eye. Eyes small, latcro-frontnl and moderately pi'o-
minent. Antennae moderately long. /'rof/iora r about once and
one-half as long as wide; base with four rathei- large foveae. Khftra
elongate-ovat'C, extreme base the width of prothorax, across middle
almost twice the width, sides regulaily roumh'd ; punctures small.

Auatralian and Tasmankui Scydiniaenidae. 229

sparse and indistiml. Ltf/s long and moderately stout; hind coxae
lightly separated ; feiudra scarcely pedunculate. Length, 1^ mm.

Hah. — Tasmania : Waratah, in moss (A. M. Loa).

The eleventh joint of the antennae is sul)conical, distinctly wider
than tenth, and about as long as nintli and tenth combined, these
are strongly transverse \\\t\\ the ninth narroAver than the tenth, the
eighth and seventh regularly decrease in width, so that, although
the antennae miglit fairly be regarded as having a three-jointed
club, they might just as fairly be regarded as having the joints of
subcontinuous width. The basal foveae of the prothorax are rather
large and close together, the lateral ones being partially visible
from above, but tliey are all partially obscured by clothing. The
hind coxae are so close together that it is only from certain direc-
tions that they can l)e seen to be separated. »

This and the foUo^wing are peculiarly narrow, convex species,
and it is possible that they should be regarded as belonging to a
new genus, but as their maxillary palj^i and hind coxaei appear to
be as in Fhagonophana, and as I have seen but a single specimen
of each, it is certainly inadvisable to treat them so as to render the
mouth parts visible.

Phagonophana tenuis, n.sp.

Bright castaneous, appendages somewhat paler. Rather lightly
clothed with short depressed hairs or pubescence.

Head (including neck) about twice as long as wide, with a short
transverse antennary ridge on each side in front. Eyes very small
and latero-frontal. Antennae moderately long. Prothorax dis-
tinctly longer than wide, sides lightly and uniforndy rounded; base
with four small foveae, the median ones rather close together,
the lateral ones partially concealed from above. Elytra and legs
much as in preceding species. Length, l\ mm.

Hah. — Tasmania : Mount Wellington, in moss (A. M. Lea).

In appearance like a pale miniature specimen of the preceding
species, but base of prothorax with smaller foveae, terminal joints
of antennae differently proportioned and clothing shorter and
sparser, etc.

The antennae should perhaps be regarded as having the joints
of subcontinuous width, but if regarded as clubbed it would not
be easy to decide whether the club consists of two or of three joints.
The eleventh is decidedly larger than usual, being considerably
wider than tlie tenth, and as long as the three preceding com-

7

230 Arthur M. Lea :

billed, the tenth is short, strongly transverse, and distinctly wider
than ninth, the latter is moderately transverse and somewhat
larger than the eighth.

Coatesia, n.g.

Head small, partially concealed from ajjove. Eyes small, medio-
lateral and rather jDrominent. Antennae moderately long, clubbed
^it apex. Maxillary palpi apparently three-jointed, but fourtli
joint small and conjoined to apex of third, causing the latter to
appear rather large. Labial palj^i minute. Frothorax strongly
transverse. Scutellnm minute. FAytra wide. Mesosternuin with
an acute intercoxal keel. Metasternum moderately long. Abdomen
about as long as ineso- and metasterpum combined. Legs rather
long and thin ; hind coxae moderately separated ; tibiae feebly
dilated to apex; tarsi very thin.

The minute species upon which it is proposed to found this
genus is much wider in proportion than any other of the family
actually known to me, or that I have seen figured. Its prothorax
also is Avithout any trace of the medio-basal foveae so common in
the family, although the lateral ones are present.

I cannot speak as to its position in the family generally, but
amongst the genera occurring in Australia it should be placed next
to Megaladerus, from which it differs in having prothorax decidedly
Avide, and hind coxae much closer together.

Goatesla lata, n.sp.

Bright reddish-castaneous, tip of abdomen, tarsi and palpi some-
what paler. Clothed with moderately dense, not very long, de-
pressed stramineous pubescence.

Head across eyes less than half the width of base of prothorax.
Antennae passing middle coxae, seven basal joints rather thin,
eighth slightly larger than seventh, ninth distinctly larger than
eighth, but not very large, tenth transverse, distinctly longer and
wider than ninth, eleventh large, wider than tenth, and as long
as three preceding combined. Prothorax moderately convex, fully
twice as wide as long, sides strongly rounded in front and almost
parallel toAvards base, base more than tAvice the Avidth of apex;
hind angles flattened, and each Avith a vague foveate impression ;
punctures minute and partially concealed. Elytra about once and
one-third as long as wide, Avidest at extreme l)ase, Avhich is closely
applied to, and the exact Avidth of base of prothorax, sides feebly

Australian and Tasmanian Scychnaenidae. 231

diminishing in width to near apex, and then strongly rounded ;
each side of base with a fairly large depression ; with dense, small
and partially concealed punctures. Length, 1 mm.

Hab. — N. S. Wales; Nepean River (A. J. Coates), Clarence
River, in flood debris (A. M. Lea).

The elytral punctures, although small, are fairly distinct, where,
through abrasion, they can be closely examined.

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.). Pt. II., 1914].

Art. XVII. — Notes on Amy derides, ivitJi Descriptions of

New Species.

[Pakt XL]

By EUSTACE W. FERGUSON, M.B., Ch.M.

[Read November 12th. 191-i].

A. — Notes on t/ie disfribufion of the suhfamily in Victoria.

The study of the distribution of most of the groups of our
Australian insect fauna, is as yet only at a beginning. In the
Coleoptera many thousands of species have been described and are
being described yearly, and yet, so far, little work has been done
towards the correlation of the facts of distribution, their depen-
dence on natural barriers, food supply and other factors. It is
true, of course, that much is known about the habits and distribu-
tion of mjany groups ; thus the Carenides, as also the Helaeides, are
well known to be interior forms, lovers of the inland slopes and
dry plains of the interior, whole other forms such as Notonomus
and Cardiothorax are denizens of the well-watered eastern slopes
and coastal scrubs. Viewed thus broadly the Amycterides are
typical inland forms, rich in species on the mountain ranges,
fewer in species, but widely distributed, over the inland plains.
It is not my purpose here to discuss in detail the distribution of the
subfamily; but certain facts or deductions may be mentioned, in
order to facilitate a discussion of the distribution in Victoria. In
this connection it may be mentioned that much light will probably
be brought to bear on the subject by the application of Mr. R. J.
Tillyard's scheme of Specific Contours ; so far lack of sufficient
data has prevented more than a very general outlining of the
contours.

From a consideration of the present distribution it is obvious
that, while the subfamily originally developed from a common
source, secondary zoocentres have now developed, resulting in
several types of distribution, all of them, according to Mr.
Tillyard's scheme, entogenic in character.

The genus G uhicorrhynchus represents the most generalised type
of distribution, it occurs in all the States and appears to be equally

Notes on Amycterides. 26'^

rich in species in all. Acaittlioloplnta also is generally disl riliuteil.
but is undergoing development along separate lines in tlic East and
in the West. A second type of distribution is exemplified by the
genus Fsalicluro ; this has its headquarters, oi' zoocentre. in the
Main Dividing Ivange of Northern X.S.Wales, spi'eading thence
along the Avhole eastern motmtain system and down tlic wu'steiii
slopes. Scleroriiius is an example of a thiid type, radiating from
a, zoocentre in the neighbourhood of the Jiead of Spciuer (ridf. in
South Australia. A western distribution with its head(Hiaitcis in
the south-west of West Australia probably also exists, tlie <lisliil)n-
tion of the " Euomides " suggests this; while the genus Xofnimpht's
suggests the existence of a noi'th-western type.

In turning now to Victoria, it will ])e seen that its geographical
position is between the zoocentres of the second and tliird types of
■distribution outlined above, t'onsequently we would expect to find
the predominant species in eastern Victoria closely allied to Xew
South Wales species, and in western Victoria to South Australian
species. Unforttinately, as yet, too little detail is known about the
habitats and range of many of the Victorian species, to enable an
■exact determination of their distribution; in the main, howevci-.
the species are distributed as above indicated.

Many regions of Victoria, however, appeal- to have been almost
completely neglected from an entomological point of view. This
is the more to be deplored, since with the advent of settlement, the
breeding grounds are being destroyed, and the extinction of many
local forms is not beyond the bounds of possibility.

The distribution of the Amycierides in Victoria may perhaps be
best approached by a discussion of the distrilnition of the different
genera.

PsALiDURA. — Of the 11 groups iitto which this genus has lieen
subdivided, but three are known to occur in Victoria.

P. approximata has been recorded from Mt. Buffalo ; it is tlie
most southerly representative of the horned-jaw gioup (mira-
group), which extends northward as far as Southei-n (.Queensland.
It is of interest as being more closely allied to /-'. tniracula, which
occurs in the Blue Mountains in N.S.Wales than to I', carterl (Mt.
Kosciusko), or P. mira (var. Edenensh: Eden).

P. flavosetosa is a species belonging to the candata-group, and
appears to have entered Victoria from the west. The candata-
group consists, as at present known, of but three species, but these
are spread over an immense extent of counti-y. fi-om Centi-al

234 Eustace W. Ferguson:

Queensland to South Australia. The range of F. flavosetosa ex-
tends from Fowler's Bay in South Australia to the Mallee country
in north-west Victoria (Ouyen, Sea Lake).

The bulk of the Victorian species of Psalidura belong to the
mirahiinda group, a group which is typically Victorian though
overlapping into surrounding States. F. mirahunda is almost cer-
tainly the original Curculio mirabilis of Kirby, and that name
should take precedence; the names impressa, cremdala, Howitti
and Helyi have already been relegated to synonymy. Tasmania
ia embraced in the range of the species, and it appears to be com-
mon along the southern portions of Victoria; I have records of th©
following Victorian localities : — Thorpdale, Flinders, Ferntree
Gully, Mordialloc, Melbourne and Wallan. Most of the specimens
I have seen Avex'e labelled merely Tasmania or Victoria. Of its
western limit I am uncertain. I have never received it from Port-
land. Vjut there is a specimen in the National Museum labelled
South Australia.

P. monticola Avas described from specimens taken by Mr. T. G.
Sloane at Mt. Buffalo, I have recently received a specimen from
Mr. J. E. Dixon from Tallangatta, while specimens in the National
Museum are from the Victorian Alps. The range of the species
therefore includes the north-eastern mountains, but its limits are
at pi-esent unknoAvn.

P. cultratfv was described from material originally in the
Castlenau collection. I have a note that one specimen was labelled
Melbourne, but it is strange that T have never seen specimens from
another source.

/*. Helmsi Avas described from Benalla (R. Helms).

P. flavovarin occurs at Portland and in South Australia, the
specimens from the latter State, that I have seen, were without
locality labels. A variety of this species occurs at Mt. Macedon.

Tlio locality of F. Leal (herein described) is unknown.

TaI;Aitrinus. — The distribution of this genus has not yet been
satisfactorily worked out; probably because the genus, as at present
constiuted, is extremely complex and requires subdivision. In the
main, however, the tuberculate and costate sections, which com-
prise the typical species, correspond in their distribution to
Psalidura: with, in the case of the tuberculate forms, a secondary
200centre in South-west Australia. The distribution of the granu-
late forms is much more puzzling; almost absent in N.S. Wales,
wliero tlio tulierculate and costate forms are most abundant, they
are common in Victoria. South Australia, to a less extent in

NofC'S on Amycterides. 235

Western Australia, and conunon also in Queensland. Of this sec-tion
of the genus, Victoria possesses 7 si)ecies.

2\ Rirerinae, Macl.. enjoys a wide range from the Riverina in
New South Wales, through the north of Victoria to Port Lincoln
in South Australia; it is common in the Mallee country in Victoria,
and probably occuis througliout the country north of the Dividing
Range.

T. fomefitosii.^ Boisd. occurs along the southern sea-board, from
South Australia to Wilson's Promontory; I have also seen it from
King Is.

1\ penicilldfiis Macl. is tlie Tasmanian representative of T.
tomentosus. and is lather doubtfully distinct. I have a spec-imen
labelled as Victorian.

T. fenehrirosiis Ferg. occurs chiefly in the southern portion of
the State; it is common about Melbourne, and I have specimens
from Benalla.

T. Hoivitfi Macl. also occurs in the neighbourhood of Melbourne.

T. simpliciiJfs Lea was described from South Australia, but is
common in western Victoria and as far east as Melbourne.

Of the tuberculate section 8 species occur in Victoria.

T. tuherculatiis Macl. occurs in the vicinity of Melbourne. T.
fi//sfri.r. a closely allied species, is herein described as new from
Portland.

T. t>/picus Macl., or a new species closely allied to typicus, 1
have seen from Benalla.

T. acutipennJs Fei-g., a closely allied species, occurs at Mel-
bourne and Mt. Macedon.

T. //itlanr/iolio/s Lea is also from Mt. Macedon.

The distribution of these species is interesting, as in almost all
the cases they aie nearly allied to New South Wales foim not
recorded from the intervening country. Thus 2\ tuhercidatus and
T. Ju/xtrij- find their nearest allies in T. fernico-sus, from central
eastern X.S. Wales, and 2\ halmnfurinuK from Kangaroo Island;
and furthermore the Kangaroo Island species is more nearly allied
to the NeAv South Wales species than it is to the Victorian. T.
neufipeniiis is most nearly allied to T . fy picas, but, as noted above,
this species, or one very closely related to it, comes as far south
as Benalla. T. inelauchol'tcKH is related to T. fur tier i from Mt.
Kosciusko.

7\ a/if/iisftis Ferg. rnu/ T. perpJerux, n.sp., are two closely related
fui-ins allietl to the hucephalus grouj). T. (ingustus occurs at Mt.

236 Eustace ^¥. Ferguson :

Macedon, Ballarat and Gleuample, and probably elsewhere, most of
my specimen being labelled Victoria. T. perplexus is from Port-
land.

T. scaher Boisd., an aberrant tuberculate form, occurs inland in
Victoria.

The costate section is represented in Victoria by several fine
species.

T. impressicoUis Macl. (syn. T. hiscipennis), I have from Dande-
nong and Narracan. I believe it also occurs at Warburton.

T. laevicoUis Pasc. has a similar distribution, most of the speci-
mens I have seen were labelled Gippsland.

T. costipetinis Ferg. occurs among the Dandenong Ranges, and
probably near Melbourne; I have never seen it fi-om Mt. Macedon.

T. carinatus Ferg. is found at Portland. It is closely allied to
T. laevicoUis and T. costipe/mis, and also to T. Kirht/i from New
South Wales.

ScLERORiNus. — This genus is represented in Victoria by species
belonging to 4 distinct groups. The most abundant species belong
to the Adelaidae-group ; and three species' have been described. Of
these S. llowitfi is conspecific with S. frisfis, while S. obliferatus
is somewhat doubtfully distinct. But the species of this group
present such variation in size and structure that it is extremely
difficult to find good specific distinctions. S. fri.sfiii occurs along
the southern sea-board and is also found in Tasmania and South
Australia. Of the locality of .S'. nUiferafus, I am uncertain, l^ut,
if I am correct in my identification, it occurs at Mt. Buffalo and
in the Australian Alps.

(S*. i?iornatus, n.sp., is closely allied, and is from (iippsland ; but
a closely related form occurs at Portland. Several other species
of this group also probably exist in Victoria, as a number of
single specimens have passed through my hands, which I have been
unable to certainly identify with any dcse-i'iljed form.

Including these forms, the gi'oup appears to extend over the
greater part of Victoria with the exception of tlie north-west. The
group is essentially a South Austi'alian one, and the A'ictorian
species are more nun\erous in the western i)art of tlie State, but
follow the mountain i-anges right into New South Wales.

The sabulosus group is represented by .S'. Diuoni and S. Goiidiei,
two species herein described, and 1)oth closely related to .S'.
sabulosiift. Of these S. Dironi occurs at Ouyen and Kow Plains, and
.S'. Goudiei at Biichip. A third repi-esentative of this group is
S. amj/vttroide.s, of which all the specimens I have seen came from
Portland.

Notes on Amycte rides. 237

The vestitiis-<,'roui) has st-vcral rei)roseiitatives.

S. vestitus Mad., otcuis in the Mallei' eouiitfy, my specimens ai-e
from Birchip and Sea Lake.

S. suhUneafus alsd oeeurs in the Mallee. ami I iiave received it
from Melbourne. Both of these species are common in South
Australia, they appear to have spread across into the north-west of
Victoria, and, so far, 1 have not seen specimens from the south-
west corner of that State.

S. dlplfola Ferg. from the Victorian Alps is the soutliei'n t'oi-m of
S. iiiconatans Lea, from Mt. Kosciusko.

S. tubercufosus Mad. was descrilied from Victoria, l)ut I am
unacquainted with its exact liabitat. S. luiirroiififtis is probably a
synonym.

.S'. itiacroui penniA Fei'g. occurs at Xelson, in the south-west
corner of Victoria. Both of these species are related to S. Germari
from South Australia, and appear to have spread into Victoria by
a more southerly route than .S". vestitiix.

S. dilaticollis Macl. occurs about Mellxtnrne, and .S'. biibolus
extends from South Australia to Tasnuinia. These two species are
representatives of a fourth group of tlie genus, which is now
Biore characteristic of New South Wales than of South Australia.

.S'. Riverinae Macl., an aberrant species, is widespread north of
the Dividing Range and extends into New South Wales.

Opetiopteryx. — This genus was described fiom a single specimen
- — 0. fii(/i(Ja Blackb. — taken on one of the higher mountains in
the Victorian A.lps. The genus is unknoAvn to me, but is probalily
allied to Sclerorinus.

AcANTHOLOPiirs. — The Victorian species of this genus arc more
■characteristic of the eastern forms than of the western. So far
comparatively few species have been recorded from Victoria ; doul)t-
less more remain to be discovered.

Ac. spiriif/er Macl. has a wide range, extending into New South
Wales. Of its Victorian range I am uncertain, most specimens I
have seen were labelled Victoria. I believe it occurs in the vicinity
of Melbourne.

Ac. appro.rimatus is widely distiibuted. 1 have or have seen
specimens from Bullarook. Araiat, Dandenong Ranges, Gippsland
and the Grampians. It is allied to Ac. Addnidat of South Aus-
tralia.

Ac. Di.voni, n.sp., and Ac. auf/ust icoJlis, n.sp., both herein
described, occur at Portland. They probably l»oth belong to the same
group.

2o8 Eustace W. Ferguson :

Ac. squamo.^us Macl. occiu's in the mountains to the north-east
of Melbourne. My specimens are from Narl)ethong, I have seen it
also from Warragul.

Ac. siildobafus Macl. was founded on a <? of Ac. nquamos^ts and
a ? of Ac. approximatus.

Ac. denticollis Macl., or its variety scrraticollis. occurs in Vic-
toria; I have seen specimens from Benalla.

An undescribed Acantliolop/tus is also in my collection from the
Victorian Alps.

Ac. brericor/n's. hei-ein described, is a geographical race of
Ac. dumosiix Bohem.. wliich occurs at King George Sound in West
Australia. Ac. hrevicornin is from Portland.

CuBicoRRHYNCHUs. — This genus is widespread throughout Aus-
tralia; it is a lover of the slopes and plains, and is rare in the
mountain districts. The genus is still in a considerable degree of
confusion, and probably Victoria will ])e found to possess more
species than are here noted.

C. inaculatut^ Macl. This species is widely distributed over
eastern Australia west of the Dividing Range, and is common in-
land in Victoria. G. hrevipes Lea, described as a variety of C.
nutculatus appears also to be common in Victoria.

G . glohicollis Lea occurs at Melbourne and probably elsewhere in
the State. I have a specimen from Albury in New South Wales.

G. sterilis Pasc, described from Victoria, I have never identified.

Of the Euomid genera Victoria has five representatives.

Tetralophus. — Three species at least occur in Victoria. T.
gcnlptnrafiis Waterhouse I have seen from Portland and Mel-
boui-ne.

T. rncamin Pasc. described from Victoria, is unknown to me.
The third species is represented by a single specimen in my col-
lection from Portland, it is undescribed. T. elevatus Pasc. prob-
ably also occurs in Victoria.

DiALEPTOpus lias one representative — 1). ferreus, described by
Pascoe from Victoria; I have not seen a Victoi'ian specimen. The
genus is common in South Australia.

Mythites. — Three Victorian species have been described. Of
these M. tttherculntux Lea appears to be widespread; M. por-
opteroules Lea is from Geelong; while .1/. rirnnulntns Lea is, I
l)elieve, found near Melbourne. BiihariR pifhecius, a New South
Wales species, also nrcurs in Victoria.

Sos>/fclti.< nn/icolli.'i Lea is another New Soutli Wales species
which occurs in Victoria. 1 liave no precise lecords of the locali-

Notes on Amycterides. 239

ties where the Victniiiui spec-imeiis of the last two spe<-ies were
taken

In addition to tlie jibove list two others — Aca/if/io/ophtis con-
vexiicsculus and AmorphorrJiinus australis — probably also occu*,
I believe I liave seen Victorian specimens, but cannot now ti-ace the
record.

Viewing tlie problem broadly, it appears to me probable that the
Amycterid fauna of Victoria has developed as the result of emigra-
tion from more than one zoocentre. The genus Psalidura has prob-
ably spread into Victoria from the north-east. Probably the
granulate forms first emigrated and by their isolation in different
mountain ranges have now evolved the various speciesi of the mira-
bunda-group. The costate forms, represented by P. opprox/'mata^
have only reached the north-east corner, while no representatives
of the tuberculate forms have yet been recorded. The tuberculate
and costate sections of the genus Talaurimis appear to have fol-
lowed similar lines; in the case of the costate forms they have not
yet reached into South Australia, though the tuberculate forms
have proceeded as far as the south-west of West Australia, where
they have evolved a secondary zoocentre.

A second line of invasion appears to have been from the west,
and there is some evidence to show that two routes have been
followed. The fauna of the Mallee country is typically South Aus-
tralian, and such forms as Sclerorinus dixoni and Sclerorinus
vestituti are characteristic. The fauna of the south-west contains
equally typically South Australian forms, but of a different type,
and is exemplified by such forms as Sclerorinus frisfis, Sclerorinus
miicronijjemiis and Talaurinus simplicipes. I have written the
above with some hesitation, as though familiar with the Amycterid
fauna of the Mallee country and of Portland in the south-west, I
have seen few species from the mid-western parts of Victoria.

The species of Cubicorrhi/uchus and to a less extent of Acantho-
lophus are so widespread that it is difficult now to trace their
emigrations. Probably they are representatives of a branch split
off before the evolution and different ation of the genera of the
Psalidura-Talauriuus-Sclerorinus complex. Too little has been
done in regard to the distribution of the Euomid genera to enable
one to form an accurate conception of their mode of spread; prob-
ably, however, most of the Victorian forms came from the west.

Many points of interest in tlie distribution of these insects
suggest themselves as worthy of further study, but too little is

240 Eustace W. Ferguson :

known at present of local faunas to enable any Init very broad
lines to be indicated. The correlation of distribution Avitli physio-
graphic features and geological changes also requires investigation.
Much interesting is also the question of the invasion of Tasmania
l>y these insects, but that cannot be touched on heie.

I have purposely dealt solely with the Aniycterides in this discus-
sion, but it is possible that other groups will be found to have
followed similar lines of distribution.

In the case of wing insects the factors governing distribution
iiVQ so different that the result is likely to be quite different. The
Amycterides, however, are typically wingless ground forms, which
have travelled a long Avay in a very long time. Possibly a close
study of their distribution may enable some light to be thrown on
the geological history of our country.

B. — ])excn ptioiis of new species, irifJi some notes on previously
described forms.

PSALIDURA VESTITA, U. sp.

$ Elongate, elliptical-ovate; size large. Black; rather densely
clothed with dingy yellow subsquamose pubescence; clothing more
or less uniform above, except on prothoracic granules and elytral
interstices; below clothing present on sternal segments, on the first
abdominal, at sides of the second, and at bases of the other ventral
segments; legs more or less clothed. Setae rather light brown.

Head and rostrum as in P. Masfersi. Prothorax (6.5 x 7 mm.)
very similar to P. Masfersi, slightly more elongate; granules, if
anything, slightly smaller. Elytra (14 x S mm.) in shape similar
to P. Mastersi; the foveae regular, somewhat obscured by the cloth-
ing, the intervening ridges fairly regular, in the more lateral striae,
each ridge with a definite setigerous gianule in the middle; inter-
stices subcostiform, Avith obsolete granules, these becoming more
definite on the more laterally placed interstices. Beneath as in
P. Masfersi: the forceps thin, very similar, slightly more incurved
to apex.

$ Larger and more robust; the protlioracic granules rather
■coarser; elytral foveae less definite, the intervening ridges setigero-
granulate in all the striae. Beneath convex, without anal excava-
tion or forceps.

Dimensions. — J" 23 x 8 mm. ; ? 25 x !).5 nun.

Except for the clothing, there is nothing to distinguish the present
species from /'. Mastersi. The clothing is, however, quite distinc-

Notes on Amycteridcs. 241.

tive ami appears to l>e constant. The contrast between the rather
nitid F. Masters/, with hardly a vestige of clothing, and this dull,
densely clothed species is too great to allow me considering them as
otherwise than specifically distinct.

The type ^ is from Richmond Downs, Queensland, and is in the
collection of the Queensland Museum; the type $ in my own col-
lection, and a second $ in the National Museum, Melbourne, came
from Mr. ('. French, and are labelled Queensland, without a definite
locality.

PSALIDURA LKAI, n. Sp.

^Elongate, subparallel. Black, legs diluted with reddish;
clothing absent; setae black, decumbent.

Head strongly convex, partially concealed by prothorax, mode-
rately closely setigero-punctate. Rostrum vei'y short, wide; internal
ridges prominent, somewhat convergent, separated at base by a
distinct median notch; median area strongly depres.sed in front;
sublateral and basal sulci continuous, rather deeply impressed.
Submentum with median tooth, forwardly directed. Prothorax
(6x6 mm.) evenly rounded on sides, median lobe produced over
head to some extent ; subapical construction faint but traceable -^
disc somewhat flattened, with median line feebly impressed; closely
set with small, rounded, contiguous, setigerous granules, these some-
what smaller towards centre. Elytra (13 x 8 mm.) evenly rounded
from behind base to apex, apex abruptly rounded, mucronate at
suture; humeral angles thickened, out-turned. Disc foveo-striate ;
striae moderately deep; foveae small, punctiform, slightly trans-
verse, and ill-defined, ridges between foveae little raised, each with
a fine setigerous granule; interstices moderately prominent, the
third and fifth slightly more so, set Avith small depressed umbilicate
setigerous granules, in double, frequently in triple, series, on the
fourth and sixth in single series, duplicated in the middle. Meta-
sternum transversely concave, more deeply depressed in middle
along intercoxal process; at sides on a level with middle coxae.
Fifth segment strongly excavate, anterior wall of excavation almost
vertical; excavation reaching to anterior margin of segment in the
middle; preanal fossa deeply set, slightly transverse. Fascicles
moderately large, separated about 1.5 mm. Forceps longer than
in P. citltrata, projecting beyond apex of elytra when not ex-
tended, broad at base, gradually narrowing beyond insertion of
laminae; apex somewhat obtusely pointed; with a ridge or setose
hair down centre of inner surface. Laminae inserted behind setose

242 Eustace W. Ferguson :

ridge, very long, parallel-sided, apices broadly rounded; slightly
•curved inwards. Dimensions: <? 20 x 8 mm. Hah. — Victoria]
Type in A. M. Lea's collection.

Close to F. cultrata but distinguished by its longer forceps; there
are also differences in the elytral sculpture. In P. cultrata the
length of the forceps beyond the insertion of the laminae is 1.5 mm.,
in P. Leai 2.5 mm. In the type the genitalia are partly extruded
and in c(jnsequence the laminae overlap, in another specimen the
genitalia are at rest and the apices of the forceps mei'ely touch. In
my table this species would fall beside P. Sloanei, but the absence
of clothing together with shape of the forceps, not twisted, will
separate it.

Talaurinus.

Through the kindness of Mr. K. G. Blair of the British Museum,
who, at my request, made an examination of Bohemann's types in
the Hope Collection, I am now able to clear up the question of the
identity of the species comprised in the semispifiosus-gvonp. The
species constituting that group are all very closely allied and also
very variable, so that it is difficult to find reliable features for
separating the species. It is quite possible that some of these
species, here regarded as distinct, are not really so; but I think it
iidvisable to attach names to the most distinctive types, although in
some cases there may be intermediate forms tending to link them
up. The puncturation of the external rostral ridges and of tlie
liead, I have found of some importance. The clothing is on the
whole fairly constant. The tuberculation, both of the prothorai
and elytra, though to a certain extent variable, can also be made
use of.

Talauriniis Roei Bohem. This is not the species redescribed by
me, but is identical with T. funereus Pascoe. It differs from all
others of the group in the much more closely and rugosely punctate
head and external rostral ridges, the latter being distinctly con-
vergent posteriorly. The head and rostrum, as viewed in profile,
are not in the same plane above ; the prothorax is closely and firtely
granulate; the elytra have the tubercles more acute, and more
spinelike, than in any other of the group. Of this species I have
an extensive series taken by Mr. H. J. Carter at Gingin, Western
Australia, and it is not too much to say that no two specimens are
•alike. The chief variation is in the number of the elytral tul^ercles ;
the head and rostrum and the prothorax are constant in their
•sculpture.

Notes on Amycterides. 243

Tnlauriniia semisp'niosus Bohem. ; T. past ilia >•/' as Bohem. ; 2\
pustidatun Pasc. From Mr. Blaii-'s notes these names apjjeai" to
belong to but one species. It is peihaps the connnonest species in
Western Australia, and is veiy variable. The type of T . pasfillariu.'i
was not examined, this should be in the Stockholm Museum; Init
specimens so labelled in the Hope Coll., were considered by Mr.
Blair to be conspecific with 7\ setnisj^inosiis. The puncturation of
the rostral ridges is fairly close, but not as in T. Roei. The pro-
thorax is fairly closely granulate, but is variable in this respect,
the median granules, or tubercles, in some specimens being more
spaced out and slightly transverse. The elytral tubercles are vari-
a,ble in number, and also in size, particularly on the more lateral
interstices; as a rule they are of moderate size, and the apical and
lateral ones subconical.

T . simulator Pasc. Compared with the last species T . simulator
has the tubercles rounded, shiny, and more .numerous on the fourth
and fifth interstices. Specimens identified for me by Mr. Blair
have the head and rostral ridges almost impunctate, only a few
obsolete punctures being traceable. My specimens came from
Kellerberrin, Western Australia. Other specimens from Eucla and
Eyre's Sandpatch are smaller and possibly distinct.

Talaurinus echinops Pasc. Though described as a Sclerorinus,
this species is certainly congeneric with T. semis2)inosus. It is a
more densely clothed species, with more numerous tubercles. The
head and rostral puncturation is much as in T. semispinosus, and
the prothoracic granules are small and closely placed. In general
appearance it is not unlike T. Roei, but the head and rostrum are
in the same plane above, the rostral punctures are different, and
the elytral tubeixles are stouter.

T . validus, n.sp. This species may be distinguished by its strong
elytral tubercles, much larger than in T . semispinosus. The punc-
tures of the head and rostrum are obsolescent. The prothoiacic
tubercles are large and widely separated.

Talaurinus Leai, n.sp. Close to the last species and with simi-
lar strong elytral tubercles, it differs in the more closely punctate
head and rostrum, and in the smaller, much more closely placed
protTioracic tubercles.

Talaurinus Westwoodi Bohem. The type of this species was
also examined by Mr. Blair, and it proves to be synonymous with
T. hucephalus Olivier.

Talaurinus excavatus Bohem. Mr. Blair has kindly sent out
specimens compared with the type in the Hope collection. It is the

244 Eustace W. Fergvmn :

speeies I have re-described as T. ruyifer Boisd. I have now little
doubt that tliis synonymy is correct.

SCI.KUORRHINELI.A.

S. Mangiest Bohem. Mr. Blair has examined the type, and has
determined my specimen as correctly named.

-s'. /nelaiiopsis Pasc. A specimen compared with the type of T.
itielanopsifi, has l)een sent out for examination. It is certainly a
SclerorrhintUa and distinct from S. Manglesi. The sjDecies may be
recognised by its strong closely set elytral tubercles, and by its lack
of clothing. The specimen sent is a male, and measures 14x6 mm.

TaLAURINUS GRANtJLATUS, U. Sp.

c? Ovate, general facies that of T. Riverinae. Black; densely
clothed above witli brown subpubescence ; head and prothorax trivit-
tate. elytra irregularly maculate with white, the wliite clothing
predominating on sides; ventral segments feebly maculate wnfh
yellowish setae in centre and with white laterally; legs mottled
white. Setae dark brown. Head and rostrum as in T. Riverinae .
Prothorax ("j.r) x 4.5 mm.) rotundate ; with deep post ocular
emargination and prominent ocular lobes; closely set with small,
but prominent, rounded, umbilicate, setigerous granules, partially
concealed by clothing, and larger than in T . Riverinae. Elytra
(9x7 mm.) rather widely ampliate, strongly declivoiis posteriorly;
apex subtruncate ; base gently arcuate, the humeri marked by a
small granule, not prominent. Disc puncto-striate, the punctures
shallow, indefinite, intervening ridges low, each with a smalt
setigerous granule; interstices closely granulate thi-oughout in
single series, the granules prominent, umbilicate, partially obscured
by clothing, larger than in T . Riverinae. Undersurface as in T.
Riverinae.

$ More elongate-ovate ; the undersurface eonvex, fifth segment
with u slight transverse impression near middle, not excavate.

Dimenxiom. — c? I'i x 7 mm. ; o+ W \ G nun. ,

Hah. — Purnong R., Muiray River, South Australia (S. W.
Fulton). Type in National Museum, Melbourne. Close to T.
Riverinae, l)ut with the granules both on prothorax and elytra
evidently larger than in that species.

Not en on Ainijcterides. 2 I-.

TALAl'HINr

^ Small, eloiiji-atf-dvati', in <,a'iic'ral t'arifs ]ik<' T. //uiciili/jen/iis.
Black, densely clothed with greyish subpuhescence, prothorax trivit-
tate, elytra maculate with lighter grey. Setae bright yellow.

Head and rostrum niucii as in 7'. niaciili pciiiiiK : antennal scape
long. Prothorax (3 x 4 mm.) rounded on sides, apical margin
feebly rounded above, with moderately definite post ocular emargina-
tion ; subapical construction moderately well marked; closely set
with small, rounded, setigerous granules, sides also granulate.
Elytra (7x5 mm.) elongate, at base not quite so wide as prothorax,
gradually widening backwards; base generally arcuate; humeri not
produced. Disc with series of small shallow foveiform punctiires,
the intervening ridges setigerous, not definitely granulate; inter-
stices with small obscure setigerous granides in single series; sides
Avith granules obsolete. Intermediate ventral segments rather long;
apical segment with a broad shallow depression in middle, running
into a deeper transverse sulcus, depression bounded on either side
by a strongly raised somewhat obliquely set ridge or tubercle.
Tibiae simple, without subapical emargination. Dimensions:
$ 12.5 X 5 mm.

Kah. — South Australia, Warburton Ranges (Hacker); Ouldea
(South Australian Museum). Type in A. M. Lea's collection.

In general appearance remarkably close to T . maculipennis, but
readily distinguished by the simple tibiae. T. simplicipes is a
shorter insect with different rostral sculpture, shorter and stouter
antennal scape and different apical excavation. T. Howitti also
differs in the structure of the excavation. T. flaveolus, inter alia,
has very different clothing and an almost obliterated elytral sculp-
ture. This species Avas amongst the Amycterides in the South
Australian Museum, but was not described as new until it could
be compared with T . corhonarius ; Mr. Blair of the British Museum
his since infoi'med me that it is not that species.

Tai.aurinus pkrplexus, n. sp.

(? Size moderately large, elongate-ovate. Black; densely clothed
with obscure, mingled brownish and golden, subpubescence; feebly
trivittate with light grey on prothorax, vittate along disc of elytra,
internal to fifth interstice; ventral segments maculate in middle
with yellow, forming an almost continuous vitta. Setae dark, red-
dish brown.

246 Eustace W. Feigiisou :

Head contimious in pi-otile with the rosti-um ; forehead feebly
flattened. Itostrnni moderately deeply exeavute; external ridges
subparallel; internal I'idges prominent, long, slightly convergent,
not meeting; median area moderately deeply depressed, narrow,
fiulciform; sublateral sulci long, moderately deep. Scrobes open
posteriorly. Eyes large, ovate. Antennal scape moderately long.
Prothorax (3.75 x 4 mm.) little wider than long, rather feebly
rounded on sides; apical margin rounded above, with moderately
marked postocular emargination, but with lobes indefinite; trans-
verse subapical impression well marked, median impression feeble,
more marked posteriorly. Disc rather closely set with small round
granules, smallest about centre, larger along subapical impression ;
sides also granulate. Elytra (11 x 6 mm.) elongate, at base as
wide as prothorax, gently widened from base backwards; ]>ase
gently emarginate, humeri very slightly produced. Disc with punc-
tures indefinable, but with intrastrial granules distinct, often con-
fused with the interstitial tubercles; interstices with small tubercles,
for the most part hardly larger than granules; second with about
eight isolated ones, small at base; becoming larger posteriorly, one
or two being on declivity; third with small granuliform tubercles,
irregularly arranged in double series from base to middle, thence
in single series, tubercles not reaching to apex; fourth with one or
two small tubercles about middle; fifth with tubercles similar to
third but inconstant in arrangement, basal tubercles generally in
double series; sixth with a single row of from six to ten small
tubercles, not extending to base or apex. Sides with interstitial
granules in single series. Beneath flat; intermediate segments
long; fifth segment with a feeble subquadrate impression, with a
small tubercle on either side near apex, partly obscured by setae.

^ Rather more ovate than $ ; elytral sculpture similar, but even
more confused; beneath gently convex, fifth segment without im-
pression.

Dimensions. — ^ 17 x 6 mm. ; ? 17 x 6.5 mm.

Hah. — Victoria, Portland (J. E. Dixon, also from National
Museum and British Museum).

Of this interesting species, I have recently received 26 specimens,
from J. E. Dixon, of Melbourne. Though I believe it to belong to
the tuberculate section of the genus, the tubercles are so fine as to
be mere granules. It is most nearly allied to T. a?igustus, also a
Victorian species, and the elytra! tubercles are fine in both species,
but the differences in arrangement, and especially the conspicuous

Notes on Aniycf^ruhs. 2 1<7

intrastrial granules, will not permit nie regardiiifx tlieni as eon-
specific. I have described the clothing from a spL-cimen in good
preservation, most of the series before me, howevei, liave a more or
less unifo]-m, dingy clothing. The elytral sculpture varies con-
siderably, particularly in regaid to the degree of duplication of
the tubercles on the third and fifth interstices. On the fifth the
basal tubercles, for perhaps a quarter of the length of the interstice,
are generally arranged, sometimes in single, sometimes in double
series, in a slight arc, with convexity outwards; the succeeding
tubercles are in a more or less straight line, sometimes in single
series throughout, sometimes in irregular double series, for another
quarter of the length of the interstice ; the remaining portion is
always tuberculate in single series.
Type in author's collection.

Talaurinus hystrix, n. sp.

^ Size moderately lai'ge, elongate, suboblongate. Black, without
clothing; setae black.

Head convex; forehead slightly depressed in front, the depression
bounded on either side by a short ridge, the continuation backAvards
of the external rostral ridges. Rostrum short, deeply excavate;
external ridges prominent; moderately closely setigero-punctate ;
internal ridges obsolete; median area not raised; sublateral sulci,
short, subtriangular, foveiforni, situated at extreme base of rostrum
and connected across base. Scrobes open belli nd, reaching almost
to eyes. Eyes subovate, almost rotundate. Prothorax (5x6 mm.)
rather strongly dilate; apical border with moderately prominent
ocular lobes. Disc strongly convex transversely; subapical con-
struction barely traceable; without median impression, but with
indefinite sublateral impressions ; moderately closely set with rather
strong, rounded tubercles, smaller in immediate centre, and also
along sublateral impressions. Sides with granules obsolete. Elytra
(11 X 7 mm.) not greatly widened on sides; base arcuate, humeri
marked by outwardly projecting tubercles. Disc without evident
punctures, but with numerous conspicuous granules, not definitely
traceable into series; interstices strongly tuberculate, tubercles sub-
conical basally, large and acutely conical, almost spinose, pos-
teriorly and laterally; sutural interstices wdth a row of fine
granules, and a few larger confluent ones at base; second with, as
a rule, from two to four (in type-form), about middle; third with
a row from base to halfway down declivity, varying from six to

248 Eustace W. F&^

^gu.i

eleven in number ; fourth with from one to three, anterior to
middle; fifth with from five to nine; sixth with from six to eight
strong, more outwardly directed, tubercles. Sides Avith tubercles
subobsolete. Apical ventral segment with a median excavation, sub-
divided into two deeper, suboval, longitudinal depressions, by a
somewhat raised median ridge, fringed at extreme apex with dense
hirsute setae; with a small tubercle on each side of the excavation
near apex, slightly projecting over excavation. Anterior femora
with a short ridge on the lower surface.

<? In appearance and sculpture very similar to male ; slightly
more ovate; beneath convex, fifth segment with a /\ shaped impres-
sion, enclosing a somewhat raised, rather closely punctured area.

Dimensions. — <? 17.5 x 7; ? 17 x 7 mm.

Hah. — Victoria, Portland (J. E. Dixon).

Of this fine species I have before me a series of 60 specimens, all
sent by Mr. J. E. Dixon. This long series has enabled me to take
into consideration questions of variation in size and tul^erculation.
In regard to size there is not an extreme range, the smallest male
measures 15 x 6 mm., and the largest female 18 x 8 mm.

I have given the general range of the number of tubercles on each
interstice in the description, but as a rule the highest and lowest
numbers are exceptional. In regard to the second interstice, occa-
sionally five tubercles may occur, while in one specimen there are
none on that interstice. In the type <?, on the .second interstice
immediately above the apex, occurs a short tubercle or spine; this is
as a rule absent, being present in only 12 out of 60 specimens, and
in 6 of these it occurs on one side only. It is not a sexuail
character, though the tubercles seem to occur rather oftener in the
male.

Of previously described species, the present one is most closely
allied to T. tuherculaUis, Macl. The apical excavation is similar
in type in the two species; in T. tuherculatus, however, it is wider,
and the secondary depressions are farther apart, and not so deep.
Apart from the anal excavation, however, T. hystrix differs from
T. tuherculatus in its relatively short, more robust form, and in the
complete absence of the variegate clothing so characteristic of T.
tuherculatus.

Talaurinus Leai n. .sp.

<? Large; elongate, subparallel. Black, without clothing above,
a narrow line of silaceous scales on each side of median line and
marginal plate of rostrum. Setae black.

Notefi on A my derides. 249

Head and rostrum continuous aljove in profile; foreliead sli^ditly
depressed at base of rostrum; head and rostrum moderately closely
punctate, punctures distinct, rounded, nowhere confluent, coarse)-
and rather closer together on lostrum. Rostruin excavate, external
ridges subparallel; median area not raised, but with a narrow
median laevigata line; internal ridges ol)solete ; latcro-l)asal sulci
subtriangular, deep, foveiform. Prothorax (5.5 x 7 mm.) )-at]iei-
strongly ampliate, widest in front of middle; apical maigin with
post-ocular emargination but with lol^es indefinite ; subapical con-
striction indistinct. Rather closely set with moderately small rounded
granules, slightly larger along constriction, and very feebly trans-
verse in middle; sides granulate. Elytra (12 x 7 mm.) subparallel;
humeri strongly tuberculiform, outwardly projecting; base between
humeri gently concave, and with thickened basal border, absent in
middle; derm granulate-punctate between the tul)ei'cles, no definite
arrangement into striae. Tubercles strong, acutely conical pos-
teriorly, less prominent, somewhat elongate on the second and
third interstices at base; second with six, not extending down
declivity; third with eight, at intervals, from Ijase to apex, the last
two or three on declivity in line with second interstice; fourth
without tubercles; fifth with eight, at intervals, from base down
declivity; sixth with six, rather closer together, strongly conical
and outwardly directed ; lateral interstices nodulose. Ventral seg-
ments flattened ; basal segments finely strigose, suture between them
depressed; intermediate segments smooth, rugosely punctate at
sides, less so in middle; apical segment rugosely punctate, with a
feeble triangular depression at apex, slightly deeper along posterior
margin, depression with short, thick, setose hair. Anterior femora
with a feeble ridge beneath.

? More ovate; convex beneatli; apical ventral segment with a
short transverse impression at apex.

Dimensions : J" 20 x 7 mm. ; ? 18 x 7 mm.

Hah. — West Australia, Swaii River, Darling Ranges.

Type in A. M. Lea's collection.

Closest to T . semispinosvs but considerably larger, more parallel,
with considerably stronger tuberculation of elytra. The prothoracic
granules are about the same size, but not (piite so depressed, and
the prothorax is notably larger and more transverse. The rostral
punctures — a fairly constant feature in this group — are similar.

2')0 Eustace ^Y. Ferguson:

Talaurinus validus, n. sp.

2 Large, robust, elongate-ovate. Black, dull; practically with-
out clothing above; sides of elytra maculate with white in depres-
sions.

Head convex, front shallowly concave, in middle slightly raised;,
profile of head continuous with that of rostrum. Rostrum short,
excavate; external ridges subj^arallel, continued on to head, bordei--
ing the concavity; median area sublaevigate, not raised; internal
ridges obsolete; lateraY l>i\sal suk-i shor.t, deep, ti-iangularily
foveiform, not meeting across base; punctures of head and rostrum
obsolescent. Sci'obes open posteriorly. Eyes small, subrotundate.
Prothorax (5.5 x 7 mm.) widest somewhat in front of middle;:
apical margin with moderately deep postocular emarginatiou ; sub-
apical impression not clearly defined; disc convex, set with large,
isolated, rounded tubercles, the central ones very slightly transverse.
Sides with tubercles smaller. Elytra (14x9 mm.) evenly and gently
rounded on sides; ajicx moderately strongly lounded ; base rather
strongly emarginate. the humeri strongly produced, tulierculiform,
the basal margin thickened on each side of suture owing to the
confluence of the Ijasal tubercles of the second and third interstices.
Disc of elytra granulose between the tubercles, punctures not defi-
nitely traceable. Suture with small granules, obsolete posteriorly,
becoming larger towards base and merging into basal border on
eithei- side, leaving a marked depression at junction of suture with
base. Othei- interstices strongly tuberculate, tulDercles large, sepa-
rate, rounded anteriorly, becoming conical posteriorly and laterally;:
second with five from base to edge of declivity; third with nine,
from Ijase practically to apex, the last two or three on declivity,
approximated towards middle, so as to be almost in line with second
interstice; fourth witli one on basal bordei-, and one or two nearer
middle of interstice; fifth with strong humeral tubercle, and six
strong conical tubercles, extending doAvn declivity; sixth witli seven
strong Lonival tubercles, outwardly directed. Sides with depres-
sions more defined and arranged in series, the interstices nodulose.
Beneath convex ; depressed along suture between first and second
segments, basal seginents minutely transversely strigose; fifth
segment witli shallow transverse impression at extreme apex.

/Jiit/r/isions. — 5 21x9 mm.

Hah. — West Austi'alia, Esperance Bay. Swan River.

Type in A. M. Lea's collection.

2i(>t<'s on Amycterides. 251

Allied to T. !<e/iii.</)i/i()siis Imt witli largei' and much stronger
tubercles, particularly on the protliorax and on the niore lateral
elytral interstices. It is possible that a long series of T. semi-
spi/wsiia might show. forms linking up the two species, but even in
that case I think this form well worthy of a distinctive name.

'r.VLAlRINUS CARINATIOR, 1). sp.

S Large, elongate-ovate. Black; rather densely clothed, except
on costae, Avith minute, muddy-grey subpubescence, hardly squames;
median vential vitta dark brown ; setae black.

Head convex, slightly ridged on either side in continuation of
the external rostral ridges; forehead feebly depressed in front.
Kostrum excavate; external ridges somewhat nodulose, traversed by
two slight transverse impressions, and separated from head by slight
impression; internal ridges less prominent than external, con-
vergent, apices not quite meeting; median area depressed; sub-
lateral sulci narrow, rather shallow, running into transverse depres-
sion at base of rostrum. Scrobes ending far from eyes. Eyes
ovate. Protliorax (5 x 5 mm.) little widened on sides; apical
margin feebly rounded above, with slight post-ocular emargination.
Disc -with an ill-defined, transverse, subapical constriction, and
rather broad median area, free from granules; with rounded
granules, moderately large, not closely set. varying in size; tending
to run together on either side of median line ; sides granulate.
Elytra (14 x 8 mm.) elongate-ovate, widest behind middle, apex
rounded, feebly mucronate at suture; base gently arcuate, humeri
thickened, somewliat out-turned. Disc with three broad sulciform
striae, each composed of a double series of foveae; in each series
foveae small, rather shallow, not confluent with those above or
below, less marked off from, though not absolutely confluent with,
those of the adjacent series. Interstices two, four, and six not
raised; three, five and seven strongly raised, costiform ; sutural
less prominent with ;i row of more or less confluent granules, more
strongly costate at base; third vei-y strongly raised and costiform,
narrow, somewhat crenulate; fifth almost as strongly raised as
third; seventh showing some tendency to resolve into its component
granules. Sides foveo-striate in single series; interstices with sub-
obsolete granules. Intermediate ventral segments long; fifth with
shalloAv median depression, and a moie strongly depressed pit at
extreme apex. Anterior femora simple. Diincnxiojix : <^ 22 x 8 mm.

//r/';.-New South Wales, Coramba (W. Heron per H. J. Carter).

TvpL' in autlior's collection.

252 Eustace W. Ferguson :

Close to 2\ itiveo-rittatus, but differing in the colour of the
clothing; the prothoracic granule^ are also smaller and less con-
fluent, and the elytral interstices narrower, more raised and less
crenulate.

Talaurinus posticalis, n. SJ).

<? Elongate, narrow, size moderately large. Black, with muddy-
grey clothing in depressions, giving insect a dingy appearance.
Setae few, mostly absent from elytra, of a light l)rownish colour.
Beneath with a broad, golden-brown, liirsute vitta, extending the
length of abdomen.

Head and rostrum in the same plane above ; forehead feebly
concave. Rostrum moderately long, deeply excavate, external ridges
with a light sinuation about middle, slightly thickened at base;
internal ridges short, little prominent, convergent but not meeting;
median area deeply depressed, sulciform posteriorly, widening out
in front; sublateral sulci short, not very dcej), running into depres-
sion at base of rostrum, behind the internal ridges. Scrobes simple,
ending far from eyes. Eyes ovate. Antennal scape moderately
long, rather strongly incrassate, slightly curved backwards. Pro-
thorax (4.5 X 4.5 mm.) subcylindrical, little rounded on sides;
apical margin lightly sinuate above, more deeply at sides; sub-
apical imjiression ill-defined, irregidar; disc with irregular depres-
sions and nodulose, irregular, confluent elevations, and more
definitely granule.? laterally; sides witli flattened granules. Elytra
(11 X 7 mm.) slightly wider at l)ase than prothorax, thence evenly
and gently rounded on sides; base lightly emarginate, hum<'ii
marked by thickened nodule. Disc with three broad foveolate sulci,
foveae extremely irregular and ill-defined, not marked off from each
other laterally, but separated at irregular intervals above and below
by irregular thickened ridges; the outer sulcus with foveae smaller.
more punctiform but still ill-defined. Interstices two, four and six
quite obsolete, the others costiform; first not elevated except at
bottom of declivity, where it is raised into a strong rounded ridge;
third interstice very prominent and costiform, .soniewhat flexuous
in outline, extending from base to halfway down declivity; fifth
somewhat less elevated, showing a slight tendency to break up into
its component granules, extending from humeral angle to edge of
declivity; seventh forming lateral boundary, costiform, less \n-o-
minent, also showing tendency to break up into granules. Sides
foveo-striate, foveae small, punctiform; interstices slightly elevated,
hardly costate, and not definitely granulate. Beneath with ventral

Notes oil Amycterides. 258

segments long; Hfth segment with a median depression, ubseured by
vitta. Anterior femora simple. /Ji/iu/isions : J 1!) x 7 nun.

J/ab. — New South Wales, Corandja (W. Heron per H. J. Carter.)
A typical member of the costate section, I know of no other
species with which 1 can compare it except T. crenulatns. From
that species it differs in its much larger size, and different clothing,
inter aim itiulta. In general appearance it is not unlike a species
of Mythites, but it is a typical Talaurinus.
Type in author's collection.

SCLEKORINUS DiXONI, 11. sp.

cT Elongate, large. Black; densely clothed with golden brown
squamosa subpubescence, prothorax feebly trivittate with lighter,
elytra with a few whitish maculae; median ventral vitta dark
golden-brown; setae dark.

Head and rostrum as in S. sahulosus. Prothorax (7x8 mm.)
widely ampliate; apical margin lightly rounded above, with rather
•deep post-ocular emargination ; subapical impression rather well
marked; median line free from granules but not deeply impressed,
disc set Avith small, more or less round, granules, smaller in centre,
somewhat flattened, and variable in size and to some extent in
shape. Sides with granules becoming progressively smaller towards
coxae, but not obsolete except posteriorly. Elytra (15 x 8 mm.)
elongate, very little widened on sides, narrowed to apex from level
of declivity, apex rounded; base feebly arcuate, humeral angles
marked by a small tubercle; seriate punctures small, obscure, each
subtended by a small, but definite, setigerous granule; interstices
tuberculate, sutural with small granules, somewhat larger near
base; second with three or four small isolated tubercles; third witli
a continuous row of about twenty-one small tul)ercles, or granules,
feebly subconical, slightly more so posteriorly, closely set. and
extending from base almost to apex; fourth with one or none;
fifth and sixth each with a continuous row of about sixteen similar
to third ; lateral interstices with small tubercles, not at all pro-
minent. Beneath as in ,S'. sahulosus. Anterior femora ridged
beneath.

$ Shorter and more ovate tlian tlie S ; prothorax slightly less
ampliate; elytra with tubercles more numeious and rathei- smaller,
second with six, third with a continuous low as in the $, but a
number of the middle tubercles duplicated, fourth with five, fifth
with twenty, sixth with sixteen.

254 Eustace W. Ferguson :

Dimensions. — 3 23 x 8 lum. ; ? 22 x 9 mm.

Hab. — Victoria, Ouyen (J. Dixon, Searce, Mellor), Kow Plains.

Of this species I Lave seen a large number of specimens sent to
me by Mr. J. Dixon and by the National Museum. All of the speci-
mens agree in having constantly small tubercles, noticeably smaller
than in S. sabulosus. From that species it also differs in the
different clothing and in the more granulate sides of the prothorai.
The median vitta in the 3 is also narrower and darker. The
differences in the elytral granulation are more marked between the
females of the two species, than in the case of the opposite sex.

Type in author's collection.

SCLERORINUS GOUDIEI, n. sp.

3" Close to S. Di.voui and with similar clothing.

Head, rostrum and prothorax as in .S'. Diro/ii. Elytra (15 x
8 mm.) with tubercles notably larger than in S. Dixoni (also larger
than in .S'. sahuloxus). the number of tubercles on the interstices 2
to 6 being 5, 21. 3, 17. and 16, on the left side of the type; on the
third interstice tubercles becoming slightly transverse, the posterior
ones conical. Otherwise as in S. Dixoni.

3 Differs from ? in usual manner; compared with female of
S. Dixoni. the tubei'cles are noticeably larger, fewer in number and
not duplicated on the third interstice, and with none on the fourtlu

Dimensions. — (? 23 x 8 mm. ; ? 22 x 9 mm.

//fl7>.— Victoria, Birchip (J. C. Goudie).

Type in author's collection.

Though compared with S. Dixoni, I regard this species as close to
S. sahulosus. It differs from the latter in the larger elytral
tubercles of both sexes, as well as in the clothing and sides of pro-
thorax. Three specimens from the National Museum labelled Wes-
tern District should perhaps be regarded as distinct. They differ
in the elytral tubercles Ijeing slightly larger and fewer in number
on the third, fifth and sixth interstices, the tubercles are also rather
more conical. The tubercle index is.— 3 5. 15, 5, 13, 11; ? 6, 17,
4, 16, 13. Their dimensions are.— <? 22 x 7.5 mm. ; ? 22 x 9 mm.
At present I think it l>6tter to consider these as forms of S. Qoudiei.

SCLEROKINUS INORNATUS, n. sp.

cT Elongate-ovate, rather small. Black, legs diluted with red;
above moderately densely clothed with minute, black subpubescence,.
and with long, black setae; l)eneath witli scattci-ed. black setae.

Notes oil Aniycterides. 25.">

Head gently convex above, continuous with rostrum. Kostruni
little excavate; external ridges subparallel; median carina distinct,
continued as a bare line up forehead, point of junction marked by
a round, punctiform fovea; lateral-basal sulci triangular, mode-
rately deep. Scrnbes simple. Eyes ovate. Prothorax (4x4 mm.)
little rounded on sides; apical margin slightly sinuate above, with
deep post-ocular emargination. ocular lobes well defined. Disc with
moderately distinct subapical constriction and rather indistinct
median line; almost smooth, except for some nearly obliterated
longitudinal setigerous ridges; sides obsoletely granulate above.
Elytra (9 x 6) gently widened on sides ; base subtruncate, humeral
angles subrectangular, not prominent; disc convex, strial punctures
obsolete; interstices feebly raised, with a few isolated, almost
obliterated, tubercles, on third interstice extending down declivity;
sixth interstice with tubercles smaller, slightly more definite and
mucli closei- together. Sides with seriate punctures more evident,
interstices witli almost completely obsolete granules, closely set, and
indicated mainly by the setae. Beneath laevigate, with scattered
setigerous punctures. Apical segment with a shallow^ rather broad,
median, channel, but without tubercles. Anterior tarsi witli three
basal segments transverse, the second and third spongiose beneath
except along median sulcus; intermediate and posterior tarsi with
segments more elongate, not spongiose.

? Somewhat larger, more ovate, more produced at apex, the
elytra separately acuminate; sculpture similar, but interstices not
raised, and tubercles slightly more distinct. Beneath convex;
apical segment with a narrow median impression, not quite reach-
ing anterior margin, deeper posteriorly; apical margin raised and
bisinuate in middle. Anterior tarsi not spongiose.

Dimensions. — <? 1") x 6; ? 16 x 7 mm.

Hah. — Victoria, Gippsland (C. French).

Types in National Museum, Melbourne.

Two males in the museum collection, from Portland and Western
Districts, differ in the lighter, more brownish, clothing, and in the
less obliterated sculpture.

The species is undoubtedly close to .S'. obliteratus, but. if I am
correct in associating that name with a species found in the Vic-
torian Alps, the present species is readily separated by the apical
ventral segment being without tubercles in the male. The sculpture
is also more obliterated in S. innrnafus, compared with the type
5) of S. ohlite.ratus.

256 Eustace W. Ferguson :

ACANTHOLOPHUS DiXONI, 11. Sp.

cT Elongate, suboblongate, flattened above; size moderately small.
Black. Moderately densely covered with dark grown subsquamose
clothing; with a light grey median vitta, and sqiiames of similar
colour, lightly scattered on the more lateral elytral tubercles ; with
white almost silvery squames, forming two small maculae on the
sides of the prothorax, and forming a moderately distinct vitta.
with a few macules above it posterioi'ly, on the sides of the elytra;
beneath with greyish squames lightly sprinkled over metasternum.
and at sides of ventral segments; legs with similar squames, and
with a moderately distinct whitish band, about one-third from the
apex of the femora.

Rostrum short, the upper surface feebly concave, almost flat, with
a median fovea or pit; lateral margins little raised, not tubercu-
late or angulate in front, gently convex in profile and continued
back to supraocular crests. Head with a single crest over each
eye, strongly curved backwards and upwards, the apex sharpliy
pointed ; the crest joined at base across head by a strong ridge,
with a median ridge running forward from it, and almost immedi-
ately liifmcating, tlii> limbs 'running forwards and outwards to
join the lateral rostral margins near the base, and enclosing with
them a deep fossa on each side. Forehead concave behind the ridge
joining the crests. Scrobes short; a deep groove running up from
in front of eye, on to the side of the crest. Pi'othorax (3.5 x 4.5).
slightly emarginate behind eyes, ocular lobes )atlier feebly deve-
loped. Disc with a strong transveise impression behind apex, and
a similar one immediately in front of base; with median and lateral
groups of tubercles on each side; with median area longitudinally
furrowed. Median tubercles moderately large, about six on each
side, the apical pair larger, more elongate, situated in fi-ont of sub-
apical impression, the other tubercles varying in size, not all in
line, the third from the front situated further out than the others.
Lateral tubercles large, flattened above, obtusely pointed, out-
wardly directed, with a feeble inclination backwards; consisting of
three larger and a few smaller tubercles ; two of the larger tubercles
situated in front of middle and conjoined at base, the hinder of
the two the larger, the third large tubercle situated behind middle,
Bmaller than the larger of the two anterior tubercles; a small
tubercle situated anterior to subapical impression, one situated
between and below the larger tubercles, and two situated posteriorly.
Sides somewhat rugosely strigose. Elytra (8.5 x 5 mm.) little wider

Notes on Am.ycterides. 257

than prothurax; little rounded on sides. Disc with three rows of
spinoee tubercles, the intermediate interstices rather coarsely"
granulate, suture granulate, the granules not extending down
declivity; first row with eight or nine tubercles, the basal ones
small, rounded, becoming progressively larger, the last three or four
spinose, the last one the largest; second row not quite reaching to
base, running obliquely backwards and outwards, about seven to
eight in number, the tubercles small at base, becoming progressively
larger and more spinose, the last four or five strong, outwardly
directed, spines, reaching slightly beyond first row; third row
extending from shoulder back, with a slight inclination outwards,
consisting of five large, outwardly directed, spines, the basal two
more or less conjoined, larger than the others, the rest sub-
equal. Sides with two upper interstices granulate. Beneath rather
closely, somewhat rugosely, punctate, the basal segments trans-
versely strigose. Legs simple; tarsi spongiose beneath except along
median groove.

$ Resembles c? , but is much larger ; elytra wider than prothorax ;
spines on elytra somewhat smaller, the two humeral spines almost
completely conjoined to form an oblique humeral crest ; convex
beneath, basal segments more lightly strigose, other segments hardly
rugose.

Dimensions. — S 12 x 5 mm.; ? 16 x 7 ; P. 4.5 x 5.5; E. 10 i
7 mm.

Hah. — Victoria, Portland (J. E. Dixon). Type in Coll. Ferguson.

Described from 2 (? c? and 11 ? $. In the type 3' the humeral
tubercles are separate, except at base, in the other <? and in all the
females, these are almost completely conjoined.

In appearance a very ordinary Acantholophus the present species
may be separated from most by the simple supraocular crests. Of
the described species with simple crests, it differs from all except
A. gladiator and A. aureolus, in having the intermediate tibiae
simple and not notched at apex. From the other two, it is bo
utterly different that no comparison is necessary. Apart from the
simple crests, the present species strongly resembles many of the
Adelaidae-group.

Acantholophus brevicornis, sub. sp. nov.

(? Moderately large, elongate, suboblongate ; very close to Ac.
dumosus. Black; sparsely clothed with brownish squames above,
sides maculate with greyish.

258 Eustace W. Ferguson :

Rostrum gently concave above, with a shalloAv median groove;
lateral margins subangulate in front, lowest at base; basal ridges
— intercristal and oblique — moderately distinct, basal foveae
rather shallow. Supraocular crests simple, very short, obtusely
pointed, projecting at right angles to the upper surface of head,
with no outward or backward tendency. Prothorax (4 x 5 mm.)
transverse; disc with subapical and sub-basal constrictions; median
tubercles relatively small, anterior pair larger, more elongate, sub-
cristiform, other tubercles not arranged in single line, middle
tubercles smaller, more outwardly placed, penultimate tubercles
rather larger, somewhat backwardly projecting; lateral tubercles
dentiform, broad at base, outwardly projecting, 2 large conjoined
tubercles anterior to middle, one posterior to middle, also a small
tubercle anterior to subapical constriction. Elytra (10 x G mm.)
subparallel, not greatly wider than prothorax. With three rows of
tubercles, the other interstices moderately coarsely granulate : first
row with nine tubercles, the basal ones small, rounded, the last
four spinose, becoming progressively larger; tubercles ending at
edge of declivity, two or three small spicules present on declivity,
the last subapical, larger, almost spines : second row with six
tubercles, the basal ones small, the last three larger, outwardly
projecting, and extending more posteriorly than the first row :
third row Avith five or six from shoulder to about middle, strong
outwardly-directed spines, the second somewhat larger than the
rest, the others subeqiial or decreasing slightly in size. Beneath
■coarsely, rugosely punctate, the punctures longitudinally confluent.
Middle tibiae with strong subapical notch.

? Somewhat more ovate, more convex beneath, intermediate
tibiae simple.

Dimensio7is. — c? 16 x 6 mm. ; ? 16 x 7 mm.

//a6. ^Victoria, Portland (J. E. Dixon).

Described from a series of 9 specimens sent by Mr. J. E. Dixon ;
type in author's collection. Closely allied to Ac. dumosiis Bohem..
of which I regard it as a geographical race or subspecies. It
'differs from specimens of Ac. duniosus from King George Sound in
(a) more parallel sided form, (b) shorter supraocular crests, (c)
rather larger prothoracic tubercles, (d) the presence of subapical
elytral spicules. These latter are smaller than in Ac. apicalix. from
whi<h species it also differs in the stronger elytral tubercles.

Notes on Amyctcrides. 251)

ACANTIIOLOPHUS AN(UTS'I'ICOI,IJS, II. sp.

<? Elongate, ovate; size inoderate. Bhuk ; iiKKlerately doiisely
covered with brown subsquamose clothing, the larger apical and
lateral elytral tubercles with lighter greyish clothing on the upper
surface; abdominal segments with a few gi-eyish setae at sides;
femora wi_th grey subapical patch on outer surface, forming an
incomplete ring.

Kostrum somewhat nairower than head, rather strongly concave
above, Avith a moderately deep, narrow median impression pos-
teriorly; lateral margins strongly angulate in front of middle,
sloping anteriorly to apex, and posteriorly to base of supra-
ocular crests. Crests simple, broad antero-posteriorly, the upper
edge rounded in front, feebly notched above, and produced to a
small degree backwards and upwards, the apex somewhat obtusely
pointed. Intercristal and oblique ridges somewhat prominent, the
basal foveae rather deep. Forehead feebly concave in front.
.Scrobes ending far from eyes; a moderately deep groove running
from in front of eye, on to side of crest, as far as notch in upper
margin. Prothorax (3.5 x 4 mm.) not » greatly transvere, apical
margin somewhat feebly emarginate behind eyes, lobes indefinite.
Subapical constriction distinct, sub-basal less so. With median
and lateral groups of tubercles; intervening spaces somewhat
sparsely granulate, median area Avith a narrow^ impression, deepest
in middle. Tubercles of median group rather small, slightly elon-
gate, about six in number, with three oi' four smaller ones about
middle, more outAvardly placed; anterior pair hardly cristiforni,
situated in front of subapical constriction, the second pair bridging
■over the constriction. Lateral tubercles triangularly dentiform,
broad at base, flattened above, outwardly projecting; a conjoined
pair in front of middle and a single one posterior to middle; also
a small rounded tubercle anterior to constriction. Ehi:ra (10 x
5.5 mm,) gently Avidened posteriorly; disc with three rows of
tubercles, the other interstices rather conspicuously granlate. Fii-st
row of tubercles about ten in number, the basal ones small rounded,
the last three becoming progressively larger and spinose; second
roAV Avith about ten, not quite reaching l)ase, running backwards
and outAvards and reaching beyond level of first row, the basal
tubercles small, becoming progressively larger, the last four or five
spiniform, outAvardty directed, the apical tAvo slightly smaller than
the immediately antecedent ones, and all smaller than the apical
tubercles of the first roAv; third roAv Avith f)-om eight to ten, largest

2(iO EuMace, W. Ferguwn : Notes on Aruycte rides.

iilKnit huiufral anglo (but still smaller than the spines of the other
i-o\vs). spinose, l)ecoming smaller posteriorly and passing into mere
granules. Sides with the upper three interstices distinctly granu-
late. Beneath subglabrous, with small, setigerous punctures; fifth
segment more strongly convex than the others. Legs simple, tibiae
not notched, tarsi spongiose beneath.

2 Of more ovate form; with elytral tubercles smaller, those of the
first row more numerous, and the anterior ones reduced to mere
granules; apical ventral segment with a strongly raised rounded
prominence, highest in middle, but occupying nearly the whole
segment.

Dimensions. — <? 15 x 5.5 mm. ; 2 16x7 nan.

Specimens of this species, taken by Mr. T. G. Sloane at Portland,
Victoria, in 1887. have been long in my collection, and lately Mr.
J. E. Dixon has forwarded me a long series (48) from the same
locality. Though variable to a slight extent in size, there is little
other difference to be detected in the series. The crest over the
eye at first sight appears single, but I believe it is really composed
of two conjoined tubercles; the species being therefore related to Ac.
Adelaidae and Ac. approximatxis.

It differs from all of this group in the relatively narrower pro-
thorax, and in the more numerous and more closely set elytral
tubercles.

Type in author's collection.

[I'Roc. K'oY. S<H. Victoria 27 (N.8.), Pt. II.. 19U].

Art. XVIII. — TJte Petrology of the Igneous HocLs near
HeaUsville and Narhetli()t)g.

By NORMAN R. JUNNER,' B.Sc.
(Caroline Kay Scholar in Geology, University of Melbourne, 1913).

(With Plate I.).

[Kead 12th November, l<>]-4

1.

Introduction and Physiography.

2.

Previous Literature.

3.

Upper Silurian Sediments.

4.

Petrology.

(a) Granodiorites.

(b) Dacites.

(c) Andesites.

(d) Pyroclastics.

(e) Ehyolitea.

(f) Metasomatically altered Rocks.

5. i'ield Relations and Origin of the Eocks : —

(a) Eelationship of the Granodiorite to the Sedi-

mentary and Volcanic Rocks.

(b) Relationship of the Volcanic Rocks to one

another.

(c) Origin of the Rocks.

6. Conclusions.

1. — Introduction and Physiography.

The area described in this paper consists chiefly of an elevated
series of ancient volcanic rocks, probably Devonian in age. The
relief is marked, Mount Donna Buang and other peaks rising to
more than 4000 feet above sea-level, Avhilst the bed of the Yarra at
Healesville is less than 300 feet above the same datum. The Silurian
sediments on the north side of the Victorian Main Divide which
passes through this area, have an average elevation of between 1000
and 1200 feet, but they rise to more than' 2000 feet above sea level
in places. Within the area described the divide is entirely in
volcanic rocks. The northern streams, of which the most important
is the Acheron river, flow into the Goulburn river, whilst the
Bouthern streams all drain into the Yarra river. Waterfalls are
present near the heads of most of the streams. They are principally
determined by joint planes in the volcanic rocks, e.g., Stevenson's
falls and the Acheron falls. The Mever's creek falls, however, are

262 N. R. .fanner:

of a different, nature, being <letermine(l by a mass of liurnfels with
softer unindurated sediments upstream and downstream from the
hornfels.

The rocks are usually covered by dense undergrijwtli, especially
so in the valleys, which ai-e often impassal)le. The soil covering-
is very deep in places, and hill-slip material is often abundant,
rendering geological mapping very difficult. Coarse bouldery
gravels are present in the upper reaches of all the streams, and in
inaccessible country of this nature they afford valuable infor-
mation as to the character of the rocks within the watershed of the
streams.

The dacitic rocks from this area possess many features in common
with the dacites described from Mount Macedon by Professor
Gregory,! and by Professor Skeats and Dr. Sunmiers.2 Rhyolites
and pyroclastic rocks of (?) Devonian age are apparently absent at
Macedon, although they are jjresent at various points in the Heales-
ville district. It was with the primary purpose of studying these
less well-known rocks in the latter area, that the present research
was undertaken by the writer.

2.— Previous Literature.

In 1854 Sir A. R. C. Selwyn^ pi-epared a geological map of por-
tion of the country to the east and south-east of Melbourne. The
Healesville igneous rocks are roughly delineated and referred to as
trap. In the accompanying report Selwyn stated that hornblendlc
granite passed into porphyry near Mount Monda.

In 1894 J. C. Newbery* described rocks from the Blacks' Spur
and Fernshaw as mica porphyrite and felspar porphyrite respec-
tively.

In 1901 E. G. Hogg-'* bi-iefly described the microscopical charac-
teristics of a granitic rock from the Watts' river aqueduct. He
determined it to be a fine-grained granitite composed of felspar,
with plagioclase in excess of orthoclase, quartz, biotite, apotite.
chlorite, calcite and muscovite.

In 1902 Professor Gregory, 6 in an important contribution deal-
ing with the Macedon igneous rocks, briefly described the allied

1 Vide infra, p. 3.

2 "The Geology and Petrology of the Macedon District." Bull. Vict. Oeol. Siirv., No. 24, 1912.

3 " The Geology, Paleontology and Mineralogy of the Country situated between Melbourne,
Western Port Bay, Cape Schaiick, etc." Kep. Geol. Siu'v. \'ict., Nov. 1S54.

4 " Descriptive Catalogue of the specimens of Rocks of \'ictoria, in the Industrial niid Techno-
logical Museum, Melbourne," 1894.

5 " Petrology of Victorian Granites." Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xiii. (n.s.), 1001.

6 " The Geology of Mount Macedon." Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. .\iv. (n.s), Pt. ii., 1002.

Igneous Rocks. 2(V6

dacitic rocks from near Healesville. He believed tliat the dacites
were either of late Mezozoic or early Tertiary age, and he stated
that " At the northern foot of the Blacks' 8pui-, the dacites rest on
granodiorite. " He described the microscopical features of a lock
with flow banding from near Lindt's gateway, and conclnde<l that
it was a weathered dacite.

In 1904 F. Chapmani contributed a feAv petrological notes on the
igneous rocks to the south of the area dealt with in the present
paper. He determined a gneissic banded rock consisting of plagio-
clase (? oligoclase), augite enwrapped by brown hornblende, and
hypersthene, from the Don river valley as a granulitic diorite.^
Brief petrological notes on the granodiorite and dacite are also
given.

A. E. Kitson^ believed that the dacite series was Upper Mezozoic
or Lower Cainozoic in age.

In 1908 Professor Skeats'' summarised certain of the salient
features in the petrography of the dacitic rocks near Healesville,
Narbethong and Marysville. He determmed the volcanic and in-
trusive rocks to be dacites, quartz porphyrites, quartz porphyries
and granite porphyries, and he stated that " At Dandenong Hills,
Narbethong, Marysville and the Strathbogie Ranges, the dacites
appear to pass, by the increase of quartz and the diminution or
disappearance of hypersthene, into quartz porphyries and quartz
porphyrites. No sharp junctions have been noticed and it is
inferred that the change is a gradual one."

In 1908 J. Easton,^ of the Victorian Geological Survey, made a
rapid survey of the boundaries of the dacite series near Heales-
ville, Warburton, Narbethong, etc. In a brief report mention is
made of the presence of normal biotite dacite, tuffs, granodiorite
and trachyphonolite. He records finding the latter rock at two
points near Warburton, but his determination of the rock is, with-
out doubt, erroneous, as alkaline rocks appear to be entirely absent
from this area.

1 " Excursion to Lauching Place." Victorian Naturalist, vol. xx., No. 9, 1904.

■2 In view of Professor Skeats' later work on the relations of the dacites and granitic rocks near
•Gembrook, it is probable that this rock is a gneissic dacite. Granodiorite and dacite come into re-
lation near the Don river valley.

3 " Excursion to Warburton." Victorian Naturalist, vol. xxii., No. 8, 1905.

4 " The Volcanic Rocks of Victoria." Pres. Add. Sect. C, Aus. Assoc. Adv. Sci., Brisbane,
1909.

0 "Boundaries of Formations between the head of the Acheron and Yea Rivers and the Varra."
Rec. Vict. Geol. Surv., vol. ii., Pt. 4, 1908.

264 N. M. Junner:

3.— Upper Silurian Sediments.

The basal beds of the Healesville area are a folded series of f airly
shallow water marine sediments, consisting chiefly of sandstones
and shales. Two fossiliferous conglomerates were found by the
Avriter near Narbethong, one on either side of the main road from
Healesville to Marysville. The western conglomerate was seen in
densely overgrown country, at a point about one and a-l^alf miles
east of the above-mentioned road, and about two miles from St.
Fillans. The conglomerate outcrops on a low ridge trending
approximately north and south, and is well jointed. It dips east
at about 70° and strikes about north and south, and contains
numerous poorly preserved fossils. The pebbles are mostly rounded
and sub-angular in shape, and consist almost entirely of sedi-
mentary rocks, vein quartz and quartzite being most common, and
chert and sandstone relatively uncommon.

The eastern conglomerate is visible along the now disused road
from Narbethong to Marysville. It consists of exactly the same
types of pebbles as occur in the w^estern conglomerate, and contains
casts of fossils, chiefly corals and crinoid stems. The direction of
dip of the conglomerate was not determinate, but the sediment*
near by are west dipping, and presumably the conglomerate also
dips in this direction. It seems likely, from the structure of this
portion of the area and from the lithological similarity of the two
conglomerates, that they are on the same stratigraphical horizon.
The abundant pebbles of milky vein quartz are interesting, suggest-
ing the occurrence in Victoria of quartz veins, possibly auriferous,
pre-Upper Silurian in age.

The Silurian sediments at, and to the east of Melbourne, strike
fairly consistently east of north. Near Healesville, however, the
beds swing round and the strike changes to the west of north, and
this direction is maintained as far east as Wood's Point. In
Healesville township the strata trends N. 20o W. approximately,
and dip about 70o to the west. In the northern portion of the area,
near Narbethong and Marysville,, the average strike is between 20<^
and 30o west of north. No explanation is suggested for this change
of strike. Clearly the effect is regional and no explanation, involv-
ing local causes, e.g., the effect of the intrusion of the igneous rocks,
faulting or cross-folding can be valid.

The precise age of these beds is doubtful. Fossils are very rare,
and with the exception of the poorly preserved fossils in the above-
mentioned conglomerates, and certain plant remains which the

Igneous Rocks. 205

writer found in reddish-coloured sandstones and mudstoues in tJio
north of the area, no other fossils have been seen or recorded. Mr.
Chapman has kindly examined these plant remains for me. and
has referred them to Haliserites Dechenianus, (Toppei-t, a fossil
■characteristic of his Tangilian division of Ihc Silui'ian, and which
is very abundant in the Tangilian beds at Wood's Point. The
presence of Haliserites, the occurrence of fossiliferous conglomerates
and the general lithology of these beds, all point to a close similarity
with the shallow water marine or estuarine beds near Wood's Point.
Tangilian mai-ine fossiliferous strata occur at Starvation creek and
McMahon's which are approximately on the continuation of the
same line of strike as the beds near Narbethong and Marysville.
The evidence at hand, therefore, although not conclusive, supports
the belief that the sediments to the north of the volcanics near
Narbethong are Tangilian, i.e.. Upper Silurian, in age. In the
Al>sence of fossils from the beds near Healesville nothing definite can
be said respecting their age.

Locally, near the intrusions of granodiorite, the sediments have
been metamorphosed and changed to hornfels. Such alteration,
however, is never very extensive.

Auriferous quartz veins traverse the sediments in places in this
Area, but none of them have been economically important.

4. — Petrology.
A. Granodioritt.

Granodiorite and granodiorite porphyry occur as small intru-
sions at several points around the periphery of the extrusive rocks.
The most important localities in which these rocks outcrop are
Malory's falls; the Maroondah aqueduct, north of Healesville; west
of the road from Healesville to Toolangi, near Meyers' falls; Nyoia
and in the ranges west of Narbethong.

Malory's falls. — At Malory's falls at a height of about 2000 feet
above sea level, is found a rather coarse grained, occasionally
porphyritic, rock composed of quartz, felspar, biotite and garnet.
Numerous pits are developed on the weathered surface of the rock
due to the removal of the felspar. Biotite occurs in fine six-sided
lustrous plates. Euhedral crystals of pink garnet (almandine) are
fairly common. Examined microscopically, the rock is seen to Ije
rery similar to the granodiorite described from the Macedon area.
by Professor Skeats and Dr. Summers.^ It is a holocrystalline

26H ' N. B. Junner:

rook, showing a tendency towards a porphyritic structure. Zoned
plagioclase, having a nucleus of oligoclase or oligoclase-andesine,
and an outer zone of albite, greatly predominates over orthoclase.
Several traverses of this section showed that the ratio of plagioclase
to orthoclase was approximately ."3 : 1. One plagioclase phenocryst
shoAved a highly sericitised idiomorphic core surrounded by finely
zoned pellucid felspar. Orthoclase is present in simply twinned
phenocrysts, including a small quantity of microperthitic albite. It
is apparently identical with the type present in the neighbouring
rhyolites. Titaniferous biotite occurs as deep brown idiomorphic
plates. Some of the biotite has been bleached, and r utile needles^
have separated out in the form of sagenite webs. Pleochroic haloes
due to inclusion of zircon are very noticeable in the altered mica.
Inclusions of ihnenite are also common. A little muscovite is also-
present, but it is undoubtedly secondary. Zircon and apatite a]e
common accessories. Tlie garnet crystals, which appear to be
homogeneous in hand specimens are seen under the microscope to be-
greatly fractured and to include unaltered and chloritised biotite,
quartz, ilmenite and apatite. Rims of biotite often surround the-
garnet crystals.

Maroondah (iqutdnci , north of Uealesvillt. — Granodiorite out-
crops on the ridge seijarating Meyer's creek and Donnelly's creek,
The rock is greatly decomposed near the surface, but fresh speci-
mens are obtainable froui the tips formed from the rocks taken out
in tlie tunnelling of the above-mentioned ridge for the Maroondah
aqueduct. At the western end of the tunnel contorted, steeply
dipping Silurian mudstones and .shales outcrop. Near the contact
the sediments have been changed to liornfels. Xenoliths of meta-
morphosed sediments are common in the granodiorite near the
coiitact.

In hand specimen the rock is medium and even grained, and
consists of colourless quartz, felspar and abundant biotite. Pink
garnets are not uncommon. Fine-grained rocks (microgranite or
aplite) are occasionally present.

Section No. HlOO, contact of granodiorite with sedimentary
Xenolith, from tunnel in Maroondah aqueduct. — The mineralogical
composition of tliis granodiorite is very similar to; that of the rock
from near Maloi-y's falls. The felspai-s. however, are greatly re-
placed by scrii-itc and carl)onatcs, and the brown biotite crystals
are greatly chloritised, and sagenitic webs of rutile have separated
o\it. A fail- amount of granular ilmenite occurs throughout the
section. Near the contact pyrrhotite makes its appearance in con-
siderable quantities, and the place of the granular ilmenite is taken

I (/neons Rocks. 267

by a prismatic- variety. Latlis of clear, zoned, acid plagioclase,
apparently all)ite. are very al)undant in the altered rock .

The granodiorites, from the other localities mentioned, are very
eiinilar to these rocks described above, and they do not call for
further attention.

B. — Dacites.
Tlie majoi- portion of the area desci'ibed in this paper is covered
by a series of fairly normal dacites. They show considerable
variation in colour and granularity, although their mineral com-
position is usually very uniform. Nevertheless, in the dacites from
the Blacks' Spur, quartz phenocrysts are abundant and garnet is
often present, and hypersthene is apparently wanting, Avhilst in the
dacites from the summit of Mount Juliet and from the ranges at the
head of the Acheron river, hypersthene is relatively abundant and
macro.scopic quartz phenocrysts are absent. Flow structure is rare
in hand specimens of the dacites, althougli not infrequently visible
in thin sections of the Blacks' Spur dacite. Vesicles are usually
absent, and mineralisers were apparently rare, as these rocks are
relatively little altered. These facts, considered in conjunction
with the great thickness of these lavas, probably point to a high
degree of viscosity for the extruded magma. Numerous xenoliths of
fine-grained andesites resembling liornfels, and white porcelainous
rocks occur in the cTacites from the Blacks' Spur. Lenticular
patches of more coarsely crystallised dacite, often rich in garnets,
are also common in the finer grained rock from this locality.
Jointing is Avell developed, both in the dacites and in the rhyolites.
Sections along Blacks' Spur road in dacite ,and at Archer's
Look-out in rhyolite, illustrate this jointing very Avell. The aver-
age specific gravity of the dacites is 2.71. A chemical analysis
by Mr. F. Stone of a specimen of dacite from the Blacks' Spur
gave the following result : —

SiOs 65.80

AI265 16.87

FeoOs 3.97

FeO 1.08

MgO 1.76

TaO 3.16

KoO 3.46

Na^O 2.54

I-I.6 1.05

MnO tr.

Total 99^68

268 iV^. Ji. Junner:

.The analysis is very similar to many others of Victorian dacites,
and calls for no special remarks.

Specimen No. H45, from near the source of the Acheron river,
resembles closely the normal dacites described from the Macedon
and Dandenong areas. It consists of phenocrysts of zoned plagio-
clase (labradorite Aljj Anj), greatly corroded quartz, biotite, and
occasional crystals of hypersthene, in a microcrystalline ground mass
composed of quartz, plagioclase, ilmenite and ( ?) potash felspar.
Zircorn and apatite are accessories. Occasional phenocrysts of
untwinned felspar may be orthoclase. The biotite phenocrysts have
been attacked by the solidifying magma, and as a result they are
often fretted and contain internal cavities filled with quartz and
felspar. The hypersthene is decidedly pleochroic and includes
ilmenite, felspar and biotite. The absorption scheme is as
follows : —

X light brown with a trace of pink.
Y brownish yellow.
Z light green.

Sections cut parallel to 010 give a biaxial figure, having a mode-
rately large axial angle. Ilmenite occurs as idiomorphic crystals
in the ground mass of the rock, and inclnde<l in biotite and
hypersthene.

Of particular interest is the occurrence in this section of two or
three irregular shaped phenocrysts of cordierite sliowing the charac-
teristic trilling.

One section in particular (vide plate I., figure 4) shows the trill-
ing very finely. The cordierite has a refractive index greater than
the balsam (/x= 1.532), and is distinctly biaxial. It is not greatly
altered, but contains numerous linearly arranged inclusions in
certain cases.

Specimen No. H44, Blacks' Spur road, is typical of the hypers-
thene free dacites. It consists of phenocrysts of colourless quartz,
beautifully zoned plagioclase (chiefly labradorite Abj Auj), and
deep brown six-sided biotite in a cryptocrystalline ground mass.
Accessory and secondary minerals are garnet, tourmaline, zircon,
pyrrhotite, ilmenite or magnetite (?) opal, chlorite, sericite,
quartz and sillimanite. Plagioclase phenocrysts are numerous.
They are usually well zoned, and show both albite and pericline twin
lamellae. Maximum symmetrical extinction angles of about 27o
indicate labradorite near Abj An^. Biotite is greatly chloritised,
noticeablv so close to the garnet crystals. It is concentrated round

Igneous Rod's. 2(5'.)

the margin of the hitter niineruL The garnet is seen under the
microscope to consist of irregular granular aggregates, resembling
the " siebstructure " of Weinschenck. Inclusions of biotite,
pyrrhotite and ilmenite are present in the garnet, and it is asso-
ciated with secondary quartz, zircon and tourmaline. A few lath-
ehaped sections are seen of a colourless mineral having moderately
high refractive index, but much less than that of zircon, and
exhibiting bright pinks and greens of the third order between
crossed nicols. The mineral shows straight extinction, and deter-
mination of its sign by a quartz wedge proves it to be positive.
It is, therefore, undoubtedly sillimanite, although its polarisation
colours are rather high for this mineral. Occasional laths of a
fibrous, strongly pleochroic (blue or violet to almost colourless)
tourmaline, having a negative sign and normal absorption, are
present in the section. Apatite and zircon are accessories.

Section No. H73, dacite, from near Donnelly's Aveir, consists of
large fractured phenocrysts of colourless corroded quartz and fairly
large plagioclase crystals, showing both Carlsbad and xA.lbite twin-
ning, in a fine-grained pilotaxitic ground mass composed of labra-
dorite laths, chlorite and a little quartz. One or two vesicles,
infilled with chlorite and epidote, are present in this rock. Biotite
is rare, being greatly chloritLsed.

Assimilation. — Assimilation of either aluminous sediments or
igneous rocks, has undoubtedly occurred to some extent, as is proved
by the presence of cordierite, sillimanite and garnet in certain of
these rocks. Numerous undigested sedimentary and igneous xeno-
liths are also seen in the dacites.

A. Bergeatl has recently described an interesting case of the
melting up and assimilation of an andalusite bearing rock by an
andesite, with the formation of cordierite, sillimanite, garnet,
biotite, orthoclase and spinel. All these minerals, with the excep-
tion of the last named, are present in the Healesville dacites.

Origiti of the garnet. — Pink garnet is relatively widespread in
(?) Devonian igneous rocks in Victoria. It occurs in granite or
granodiorite near Toora, Wilson's Promontory, Mount Taylor,
Beechworth, Healesville and elsewhere; and in intrusive and extru-
sive rocks, porphyries, porphyrites, daxites, etc., from near Mans-
field, Strathbogie ranges. Mount Dandenong, Healesville and War-
burton. The occurrence of the garnet in these rocks under such

1 " Der cordieritaudesit von Lipari, seine Andalusit fiihreiiden einscliliisse mid die genetiselien
veziehungen zwisclien deni Andalusit, Silliinanit, Biotit, Cordierit, Orthoklas und Spinell in deni
letzteren." Neues. Jalieb. Min. Geol. (Beil. Bd.) .30, pp. 57.1-657, 1910.

270 N. R. Junner:

varied conditions, strongly suggests that it is a primary mineral.
Although only rarely visible macroscopically in the rocks from the
Healesville area, microscopic examination has revealed its presence
in granodiorites, dacites. rhyolites, and tuffs. Its occurrence in
these rocks (both plutonic and extrusive) certainly suggests that
it was an original mineral in the magma from which these rocks
were derived. Microscopical examination of these garnet-bearing
rocks, however, leads one to doubt the primary origin of the
garnet for the following reasons : —

1. The apparently homogeneous crystals of garnet, occurring in
hand specimens of the rocks, are seen under the microscope to b«
aggregates of garnet grains associated with secondary quartz,
pyrrhotite, chlorite after biotite, sericitised felspar, and in on»
case with blue tourmaline.

2. The association of garnet with pyrrhotite and chloritised
biotite is characteristic. Rims of pennine occasionally surround
the garnet aggregates. Pyrrhotite is often a contact metamorphic
mineral, and has been noticed in the altered sediments adjoining
granodiorite at the Maroondah aqueduct.

3. Garnet is apparently absent in the hypersthene bearing
dacites; at least this is so in all the sections of these rocks that
I have examined. Sir Thomas Holland has described certain rocks
in Avhich garnet apparently replaces hypersthene, but in otir case
sufficient evidence is not available to determine whether such
replacement has taken place.

Contact metamorphism of the volcanic rocks only becomes marked
near certain of the granodiorite intrusions, and garnet is invari-
ably absent from the contact rocks, so that it is improbable that tlie
garnet is a contact metamorphic mineral.

Abyssal magmatic assimilation might possibly account for the
presence of the garnet in the Healesville igneous rocks. Cordieriie,
sillimanite and garnet have been previously mentioned as forming
at Lipari owing to the assimilation of an andalusite bearing rock
by an andesite.

Summing up, no definite conclusion, respecting the origin of the
garnet, can be arrived at, and it is left for future investigators to
make a more detailed study of the question.

(J . — Andesifex.
Quartz free andesites are rarely met with \u the Healesville area,
Tlie best example of these rocks seen by the writer occurs at a point

1 "Geology of the iifii;hl)oiiflioo(l of Salem, etc' Moinoir,^ (Jfol. Suiv, Inrlia, vol. x.\x., 1900

Ii/ncoiis Rocks. 27 T

about two miles alnng the Don road, nortli of Launcliinf; Place.
The rock is very tough and fine grained, and felspar is the only-
mineral visible niegascopically.

A thin section of the rock examined under the microscope, con-
sisted of phenocrysts of felspar in a fine-grained andesitic ground
mass of laths and stunted prisms of plagioclase, microcrystalline
quartz and magnetite dust. Chlorite, sericite and epidote (pistacite)
are alternation products. Original femic minerals are lacking.

Recrystallisation has taken place in the ground mass of tha
original rock, and a mosaic of quartz grains has been formed.
Occasional vesicles filled with chlorite and quartz ai*e also present.
The panidioniorpliic plagioclase phenocrysts are well zoned, and
give maximum symmetrical extinction angles of 36o from the albite
lamellae, indicating plagioclase near labradorite-bytownite (Ab?,
Ang). Most of them are highly sericitised, and a little secondary
epidote has been developed in the felspar in places. The ground
mass laths are generally only simply twinned and are referable to
labradorite.

Section No. H2, from near Wade's Look-out, is a fine-grained
andesite consisting of zoned phenocrysts of rather basic labradorite,
and chloritisecl femic mineral, in a pilotaxitic ground mass com-
posed of plagioclase laths, biotite, chlorite and ilmenite. Quartz
is absent. The section of this rock is very similar to sections of
certain black andesitic xenoliths present in the dacites.

►Section No. H79, biotite andesite, M.M.B.W. pipe line to Badger
Creek Weir. — A thin section of the rock examined microscopically
shows abundant phenocrysts of zoned plagioclase (andesine or acid
labradorite). chloritised biotite and ilmenite in a yellowish coloured
devitrified glassy ground mass. Quartz is almost entirely absent.
Abundant granular ilmenite occurs, included in biotite, and in the
ground mass of the rock some of the ilmenite is replaced by pyrites.
A little epidote replaces biotite.

A Pyroclastics.

Section iitar Wade's Look-out. — The best section of these frag-
mental rocks, in the area described, occurs in cuttings along the
Don road from Healesville to Launching Place, above Wade's Look-
out. Near the Look-out, the pyroclastics are seen resting on east-
dipping Silurian sediments. The former consist here of tuffs, and
volcanic agglomerates containing rounded and sub-angular pebbles
of rhyolite or quartz porphyry. About one-third of a mile above

272 N. R. Junner:

Wade's Look-out, two cuttings for road metal' have exposed good
sections of these fragmental rocks. The following section is seen in
one of these cuttings : —

A. — Dense, black, aphanitic asli resembling chert; width about
7 feet.

• B. — Coarser grained tuff or ash containing occasional agglomer-
atic pebbles of rhyolite. It is well bedded, and dips steeply to the
east; width about 5 feet.

C. — Partially unconsolidated, finely bedded tuff resembling a
mudstone; width about 2^ feet.

Examined under' a lens, numerous flakes of biotite and a few
grains of quartz and altered felspar, and a little pyrite and
muscovite are discernible in the rock. The tuff is ripple marked in
places, but it is impossible to determine whether these markings are
due to water action or wind. No fossils, either marine or fresh
water forms, were found in these tuffs, and they appear to bt*
Entirely sub-aerial in origin.

D. — Another band of black, flinty ash.

These pyroclastic rocks all appear to dip at fairly high angles to
the east, but they ai-e well jointed and it is possible, but not prob-
able, that jointing and bedding were confused by the author. It
is possible tKat these tuffs and ashes were originally deposited on
some fairly steep slope, but the more probable explanation of their
high dip is that they have been sul>jected to later earth movements.

Section No. HI, black cherty ash, referred to above as A. — Under
the microscope angular pieces of quartz and occasional fragments
of beautifully zoned plagioclase can be recognised in a crypto-
crystalline matrix. A little biotite is also present, and finely
divided iron oxide is plentiful. Bedding is distinctly visible.
The bedding planes, however, are not straight, but occur in the form
of waves, suggesting rippling.

Section No. H3, bedded tuff, partially unconsolidated, referred
to as D. — Microscopically it consists of numerous angular and
oval-shaped fragments of igneous rocks largely dacitic in composi-
tion. One or two xenolites of sandstone are present in the section.
The bulk of the rock, however, consists of finely-divided rock dust,
and fragments of crystals, of quartz, felspar, biotite, chlorite and
colourless garnet. The whole of the felspar appears to be plagio-
clase, and none of the orthoclase, so characteristic of the tuffs near
Malory's falls, is present. Chalcedonic silica is well developed in
places.

Igneous Rocks. 27:^

Section No. H30, xenolith in tuff, one-third of a mile above
Wade's Look-out. — A leucocratic, porphyritic rock, consisting of
phenocrysts of quartz, microperthitic, ortboclase, acid plagioclase
and niuscovite in a cryptocrystalline ground mass composed of the
same minerals. Orthoclase is in excess of plagioclase. The pheno-
crysts of niuscovite usually show included needles and sagenitic
M'ebs of rutile, and occasionally include a little epidote. They un-
doubtedly replace original biotite. Quartz grains are plentiful.
They remain clear, although often greatly corroded. Leucoxene is
fairly abundant, and one or two twinned sections of epidote are
also present. The rock may be described as a quartz porphyry or
rhyolite. The presence of the microperthitic orthoclase, so charac-
teristic of the rhyolites, is interesting.

Section No. H15, xenolith in tuff, one-third of a mile above
Wade's Look-out. — The rock is an altered quartz porphyry consist-
ing of large phenocrysts of quartz, highly sericitised and kaolinised
felspar, and occasional biotite crystals, in a microcrystalline
ground mass. The idiomorphic outlines of the felspar and the
absence of twinning suggest orthoclase. A little yellowish-brown
opal occurs in places, and brown iron oxides are rather common,,
showing that the rock is much weathered.

Track to Malory's falls. — Tuffs are well developed near the
northern foot of the Blacks' Spur, and they can be seen at
numerous points along the track from near Lindt's Hermitage ta
Malory's falls. They are generally light coloured, white or grey,
but are occasionally stained with hydrated oxides of iron. Certain
of the tuffs still remain loose and cavernous, but the majority have
been secondarily silicified and rendered more compact. Cubes of
pyrite are common. The lapilli present in the tuffs are usually
small, being rarely more than half an inch in diameter. Examined
microscopically, these tuffs are seen to consist chiefly of fragments
of rhyolitic rocks. Lapilli of sedimentary rocks are very rarely
present. Especially characteristic, in these pyroclastics, is the
microperthitic orthoclase so abundant in the rhyolite lavas.

Specimen No. 114, track to Malory's falls.— Numerous fragments
of banded rhyolite are seen in hand specimens of this rock.
Crystals of quartz and altered orthoclase are also visible mega-
scopically. Examined microscopically phenocrysts of altered micro-
perthitic orthoclase, acid plagioclase, and colourless quartz, are
immediately recognised. Chloritised biotite occurs in small
amount. The matrix of the rock appears to consist largely of
microcrystalline silica and sericitised felspar. That secondary

274 N. R. Junncr:

eilicification lias taken i^lace is evident from the silica added to some
of the quartz phenocrysts. The rock is a rhyolite tnff.

Section No. HSl, from near H4, is again composed ahnost entirely
of rhyolitic debris. — Rectangular sections of muscovite, secondary
after biotite, are numerous and clear, simply twinned laths of acid
plagioclase are not uncommon. Microperthitic orthoclase occurs as
fragments of crystals, much corroded and greatly sericitised in
places. The matrix is chiefly finely granular silica, chalcedony,
and sericitised felspar. Certain colourless isotropic cubes, of a
mineral having a refractive index much less than that of the
ground mass, are undoubtedly fluorite.

Section No. H9, track to Malory's falls, is made up of lapilli of
andesitic and rhyolitic rocks and fragments of chlorite, secondary
after biotite, quartz, plagiolcase, biotite and highly sericitised
orthoclase in a matrix composed chiefly of quartz and sericitised
felspar. Abundant leucoxene and zircon occur scattered through
■the section. Microperthitic orthoclase is almost entirely absent.
One or tAvo fragments of garnet are also present.

Section No. H39, immediately west of the Blacks' SjDur road, on
the track to Malory's falls. — Fluorite cubes are again present in this
section. The rock is a normal rhyolite tuff.

M.M.B.W. pipe line to Badger Greek Weir, S.S.W . of Mount
Riddell. — Ashes, tuffs with fine lapilli, and coarse agglomerates are
all present in the rocks from this locality. The agglomerate pebbles
are usually small, being rarely more than three inches in diameter,
and are mostly sub-angular in shape. They consist almost entirely
of a yellowish-green, aphanitic, pyritised rock resembling in hand
specimen the Diamond creek dyke rock. No signs of bedding are
visible in any of the tuffs. They are frequently honeycombed, and
secondary carbonates, sericite and pyrites have been developed in
them.

Specimen No. H88, pebble in agglomerate, S.S.W. of Mount Rid-
dell, is a leucocratic, aphanitic rock showing "minute grains of
quartz, felspar and a little pyrite in hand specimen. Micro-
scopically, it consists of phenocrysts of altered felspar, quartz and
a little chloritised femic mineial, in a ground mass of quartz,
felspar laths and occasional ilmenite. Carbonates, sericite. Lhlorite,
rutile and leucoxene are secondary minerals. Veinlets of quartz
and carbonates traverse the rock. The felspar phenocrysts are pre-
dominantly orthoclase; highly sericitised in general and often
carbonated. The plagioclase phencrysts are of albite or albite-
oligoclase, and are not zoned. The grains of quartz are pellucid as

hfuc.oiis Rocks. 21 h

tisual, but are often greatly fractured and corroded. The rock is a
metasomatieally altered rhyolite of quartz porphyry.

Section No. H91, xenolith in tuffs, S.S.W. of xMount Riddell. is
& slightly luetaniorphosed granodiorite. Biotite is greatly replaced
by chlorite (pennine) and rutile has separated out as sagenitic webs.
Abundant pyrrhotite occurs throughout the section, replacing much
of the original ilinenite'. The felspars are greatly altered, but
plagioclase appears to be in excess of orthoclase.

Section No. H94, andesite tuff, from same locality as preceding
specimens. Under the microscope the rock is seen to consist largely
of fragments of andesite showing fine pilotaxitic texture. The
original biotite crystals have been replaced by strongly pleochroic
chlorite (pennine) and epidote (pistacite), and leucoxene has sepa-
rated out. Quartz phenocrysts are rare, but the bulk of the
matrix of the rock appears to be silica, some of which is chalcedonic.
Occasional crystals of colourless isotropic garnet are seen in the
section. The felspar phenocrysts and ground mass laths appear to
be almost entirely plagioclase, often well zoned.

Track to Marooiidah weir. — Doubtful fragmental rocks occur near
Maroondah weir. Specimen No. Jl, metasomatieally altered
rhyolite tuff or rhyolite, one mile south-west of Maroondah weir,
is typical of these rocks. Hand specimens are brecciated, consist-
ing of fragments of a light-coloured rock in a darker coloured
matrix. Thin sections of the rock examined microscopically show
that silicification, carbonation and sei'icitisation have greatlv
affected the original rock. The primary minerals include simply
twinned orthoclase, plagioclase, corroded and fractured quartz,
garnet, zircon, sphene, apatite and a (?) femic mineral which has
been entirely replaced. Muscovite, carbonates ('I dolomite), chal-
cedony, quartz pyrites, (?) opal and brown iron oxides are
secondary. Most of the plagioclase has a refractive index less than
that of quartz, and appears to be albite, but certain zoned sections
give symmetrical extinction angles of 22° from the albite lamellae,
indicating andesine. Massive cleaved carbonates and flakes of seri-
cite replace much of the felspar. A little secondary, radially
arranged, albite has been developed in one place in the section.
Yellow-brown aggregates and double wedge-shaped sections of
sphene, showing bright pinks and greens of the third order under
crossed nicols, are not uncommon. The garnet is rarely idio-
morphic, occurring more often in corroded and irregular-shaped
grains. Microspherulitic chalcedony, showing a black cross under
crossed nicols, occurs throughout the section. Minute veins of
quartz traverse the rock.

276 ^\ R. Junver:

Section No. HlOl, one mile S.W. of Muroondah Weir. — Sharp
rhombs of dolomite occur in places, associated with secondary
quartz and iron oxides. Microscopic veinlets of banded silica and
carbonates intersect the rock.

Fragmental rocks, tuffs and flinty breccias whose fragmental
character is only revealed on weathering, also occur to the south
and south-west of Mount St. Leonard.

E . — Rhyoliies.
With the single exception of Professor Skeats' reference to quartz
l^orphyries and porphyrites occurring near Narbethong and MaryB-
ville, there is no mention, in the literature of the area, of extrusive
rocks more acid than the dacites. However, at Archer's Look-out,
St. Ronan's Well, near Lindt's Hermitage, the Acheron river
above St. Fillan's, and at several other points north of the main
divide, normal rhyolites outcrop. These rocks are characterised in
hand specimens by abundant quartz phenocrysts, and by the paucity
of femic minerals. Rhomb-shaped sections of glassy or pearly ortho-
clase can be recognised in nearly all hand specimens of these rocks.
Fluxion banding is often well developed. A chemical analysis of
the rhyolite from Archer's Look-out was made by the writer in the
geo-chemical laboratory of the Royal College of Science, London^
and gave the foUoAving result : —

I.

TI.

SiO^

74.39

78.64

ALA

14.28

9.85

Fe,0,

0.52

0.54

Feb

1.09

2.00

MgO

0.27

0.10

CaO

0.24

0.80

K.,0

5.33

5.16

Na^O

2.78

2.03

H..0 +

0.22

0.40

H2O-

0.56

0.14

CO.,

abs.

—

TiO,

0.29

0.67

P.O..

tr.

tr.

BaO

n. det.

—

MaO

11. det.

—

Total

99.97

100.33

Sp. (4r. 2.49
I. Khyolito, Archer's Lookout. Analyst, N. K. Junuer.
II. Rhyolite, Mount Wellington. Analyst, E. O. Thiele.

Igneous Rocks. 277

Using H. C. Richards' analysis of the biotite from the dacite
near Mount Dandenong, with slight adjustment of the relative pro-
portions of FeO and MgO to fit the percentages of these constituents
in the rock, we can determine approximately the mineral composi-
tion of the rock. Thus : —

Quartz

37.20

Orthoclase

•29.47

Albite (Ab^^An^)

24.69

Biotite

3.65

Ma(,'netite

0.70

Excess AljO;,

3.47

Excess H,0

0.67

Total 99.85

Much of the felspar is changed to kaolin, so that this mineral will
account for a certain amount of the surplus AUOg and H^O. The
percentages of iron oxides, magnesia, and lime are all low, and
there is a corresponding small percentage of lime-bearing felspar
and femic minerals present in the rock. Microscopical examination
shows that the felspar phenocrysts are orthoclase, containing micro-
perthitic inclusions of soda felspar, accounting for the moderately
high percentage of soda in the rock.

Microscojyical relations. — A section of the rock analysed showed
phenocrysts of quartz and kaolinised orthoclase in a microcrystal-
line ground mass consisting of quartz, orthoclase and biotite.
Zircon and apatite are accessories. Secondary minerals include
chlorite, kaolin, hematite, sericite and a little biotite, tourmaline
and brown opal. A micrometric analysis of the rock showed that
the ratio of ground mass to phenocrysts was approximately 1.1 :1.
The orthoclase phenocrysts are often idiomorphic and are sometimes
rounded by corrosion of the ground mass. They occasionally show
the characteristic cross fracture of sanidine. Carlsbad twinning is
not uncommon. The phenocrysts of quartz are occasionally hex-
agonal in section, but are more often rounded and embayed by
the ground mass. Numerous cracks and abundant glass inclusions
are present in the quartz. Biotite occurs sparingly as phenocrysts,
but is abundant in aggregates of minute flakes, in the ground mass
of the rock.

Section No. H50, Archer's Look-out, shows phenocrysts of
quartz, sanidine, and altered biotite in a microcrystalline ground
mass consisting of the same minerals, together with tourmaline.

278 N. R Jaiimn-:

sericite, and a very little ilmenite. The texture is i^orphyritic.
Flow banding is very well developed, yet the ground mass is
thoroughly crystalline.

A beautiful blue tourmaline occurs scattered through the section
in mossy aggregates. These aggregates examined under the high-
power resolve into groups of acicular crystals and hexagonal cross
sections of these needles. Pleochroism is very marked, varying from
ultramarine to yellowish or greenish-brown. An anomalous feature
of this mineral is that its strongest absorption is in the same
direction as in biotite, which also occurs in the same section. It
seems probable that the tourmaline replaces biotite and that it has
retained the original form of the mica.

Minute flakes and prismatic sections of biotite occur throughout
the section. These are probably secondary in origin. The original
biotite differs from them in having much larger sections, and in its
corrosion by the magma and separation of oxides of iron and
titanium. A brown, isotropic mineral, having a refractive index
Isfia than the balsam and occurring in small amount in the section,
is opal. It is fringed with secondary biotite in places.

Section No. H57, Acheron River, above St. Fillans. — This rock
consists of phenocrysts of deeply embayed colourless quartz, turbid
microperthitic orthoclase, and a little biotite and albite, in a
cryptocrystalline ground mass which was originally glassy and
microspherulitic. Minute spherulites, preserved in quartz, are not
uncommon in the ground mass of the rock. Chlorite and brown
iron oxide replace the original femic mineral which was probably
biotite. Prisms of tourmaline, showing normal absorption, are
associated witli chlorite or serpentine in places.

Section No. H49, Acheron River, above St. Fillans.- — Aggregates
of blue tourmaline showing anomalous absorption are present in
this section. The tourmaline occurs associated with muscovite and
replaces biotite, whose form it retains. Plagiocluse phenocrysts are
absent, but a little albite occurs in the ground mass of the rock.

Section No. H67, banded rhyolite from near Malory's falls. —
Chalcedonic silica, with nuclei of slightly yellow coloured, appa-
rently isotropic material, having a refractive index nmch greater
than the chalcedony, occurs in places in this section.

Certain obscure flinty rocks occurring near Mount St. Leonard
may be best described under the heading of rhyolites, although the
writer is quite prepared to admit the possibility of tlieir being
silicified tuffs.

Igneous Rocks. 279

Section No. H77, from Meyer's creek road, soutli-we.st of Mount
Jit. Leonard, is typical of these rocks. It consists of phcnocrysts of
<}uartz and occasional highly sericitised crystals of orthoclase and
plagioclase, in a microcrystalline ground mass of quartz, biotite
and altered felspar. The structure of the rock is homogeneous.
Radial aggregates of secondary biotite have been developed in
association with mosaics of secondary quartz and a little pellucid
felspar.

Section No. H72, from same locality as the preceding specimen. —
Microscopically it consists of occasional phenocrysts of pellucid very
rounded quartz, and a few panidiomorphic phenocrysts of highly
altered felspar in a micromosaic of quartz, felspar, sericite, iron
oxides, biotite and pyrite. One rather rounded and broken crystal
of slightly pink garnet occurs associated with a little biotite and
muscovite. Irregular shaped grains of pyrite are seen replacing
felspar in places in this section.

F. — Metasoinatically altered rocks.

The dacites in the Healesville area are remarkably fresh, and
-except for the occasional presence of chlorite, epidote, sericite and
very rarely tourmaline, they remain unaltered. It has been pre-
viously suggested that the dacitic lavas were very viscous and poor
in mineralisers; hence, perhaps, the minor alteration of these
rocks. The basal volcanic rocks, — the rhyolites, and tuffs, — how-
ever, have been greatly altered in places. These metasomatically
altered rocks are best seen along the aqueduct from the Badger
river, south-west of Mount Riddell. Here, a greenish-coloured,
compact rock, veined with carbonates and quartz are locally greatly
pyritised, outcrops. Examined under a lens, some of the limon-
itised pyrites appears to contain native gold. In the absence of
assays of the pyrites, however, one cannot assert definitely that
gold is present in these rocks. The fact that gold has been won
from the Badger creek, near by here, is perhaps significant. Ac-
cording to Professor Skeats, gold has been obtained from creeks
passing only over dacites near Marysville and Gcmbrook. but its
mode of occurrence is not known.

Specimen No. H80, from south-west of Mount Riddell, is typical
of these propylitised rocks. Hand specimens are compact and
aphanitic, and of a greenish-grey colour. The specific gravity of
the rock is 2.80. Examined microscopically it is seen that the
original rock has been greatly r^laced by carbonates, chlorite,

280 N. R. Junner :

sericite and pyrites, much of which has been oxidised to limonite
and hematite. One large, simply twinned, phenocryst of orthoclase
remains. It is partly replaced by sericite and granular chloritfe
and a little carbonate.

Other idiomorphic felspar crystals are seen to be entirely re-
placed by carbonates, chlorite (pennine), and sericite. The quartz
phenocrysts still remain clear, although greatly corroded and par-
tially sericitised in places. Small lenticular vesicles, infilled with
carbonates and quartz, are occasionally present. Veinlets of car-
bonates, chlorite and a little quartz traverse the rock. Carbonates
are abundant throughout the ground mass of the rock, especially
replacing felspar laths. The alteration of the tuffs and agglome
rates, that occur near by here, has been previously described.

Near the Echo tunnel, in the Maroondah aqueduct, and also near
the Maroondah weir, carbonation, sericitisation and pyritisation
have taken place in the basal volcanic rocks underlying the normal
dacites.

Secondary tourmaline and biotite have been mentioned as forming
in the rhyolites near Archer's Look-out, and in the tuffs near here
fluorite is occasionally present.

This alteration has been ascribed by the writer to the action of
vapours released from the neighbouring granodiorite.

5.— Field Relations and Origin of the Igneous Rock.

A. — Eelationshijy of the gronodiorift to the sedimentary and
volcanic rocks.

Wlierever seen the granodiorite is intrusive into the Silurian
sediments, and has altered the latter for some distance from th»
junction. Xenoliths of hornfels are also common in the grano-
diorite near the contact.

The relationship of the plutonic rock to the igneous rocks, how-
ever, is not so evident. Selwyn stated that hornblende granite
passed into porphyry near Mount Monda, and Ferguson also
believed that there was a gradual passage between the plutonic and
volcanic rocks near Gembrook.i However, Professor Skeata has
Bhown clearly that near Gembrook and Macedon, the granodiorite
is intrusive into the normal dacite, and that the latter rock has
been rendered gneissic in places near the contact. Whenever the
two rocks come into relation in the Healesville area marked con-

1 " Notes on certain Geological Features of the Parishes of Geniltrook North and Naugana."
Prog. Rept. Vict. Geol. Surv., No. 8, 1894.

Tg neons Rocks. 281

tact alteration of the dacite is usually absent. However, near
Nyora the dacite contiguous with the granodiorite has been ren-
dered gneissic, and in the ranges to the west of Narbethong a
gneissic dacite was seen by the writer near the contact with grano-
diorite. Clearly, in the Healesville district as elsewhere in Vic-
toria, the intrusion of the granitic rock took place after the
extrusion of the dacite.

Near Malory's falls rhyolite is apparently superposed on grano-
diorite. No alteration of the rhyolite near the contact is visible in
hand specimens. However, thin sections of the rhyolite show the
development of secondary biotite and blue tourmaline, and the
writer attributes this alteration to the action of vapours given off
from the cooling plutonic rock. Fluorite has also been formed in
the tuffs near Malory's falls. More certain evidence of the subse-
quent intrusion of the granodiorite, e.g., apophyses or dykes from
it passing into the rhyolites was not obtainable. In tlie sequel, it
will be show^n that the dacite is younger than the rhyolite, adding
further support to the sequence suggested above.

Secondary biotite has also been formed in the obscure flinty
rocks, probably rhyolites. from near Mount St. Leonard. Grano-
diorite outcrops on the east Vjank of Meyer's creek, close by here, and
it is probable that the alteration in the rhyolite was brought about
■owing to the intrusion of the plutonic rock.

B. — Relatio/isli/ps of the volcanic rockt< to one another.

That the pyroclastic rocks were associated with the rhyolitic out-
burst, and were previous to the dacitic activity is certain from
the following facts : —

1. Everywhere in the area, the tuffs occur marginal to the
dacites, and clearly underlie them at certain points.

2. Near Wade's Look-out and Badger weir, quartz porphyry
.and rhyolite pebbles and lapilli, from the agglomerates and tuffs,
.are often seen to have been caught up in the lowest layers of the
dacite.

3. The tuffs throughout the area are composed of rhyolitic
debris, and andesitic or dacitic ejectmenta are generally absent
from them.

A traverse up the Acheron river from St. Fillans shows that
the dacites overlie the rhyolites in this area. The latter rocks,
which, near their contact with the Silurian sediments contain
little biotite. become richer in this mineral close to the dacites.

282 N. R Junner:

yet, they appear to be sharply defined from one another. The
superposition of the dacites on the rhyolites near the Acheron
River, and the inclusion of fragments of the latter rock in the
former at certain places, are sufficient to prove the subsequent
extrusion of the dacites. The position of the quartz free andesites^
is not certain. They occur marginal to the dacites near Launching-
Place, suggesting that the latter rocks overlie them. Numerous
xenoliths of andesite occurring in the Blacks' Spur dacite, may
also indicate a subsequent origin for the dacite. However, in
the absence of mora certain evidence it is better to leave the ques-
tion of the age of the andesites unanswered. The evidence brought
forward is sufficient to establish the following sequence, from older
to newer —

Rhyolites and rliyolitic tuffs,

Andesite,

Dacites,

Granodiorite.
The sequence, viewed broadly, shows the order of extrusion to be
one of increasing basicity.

C- — Origrn of the rocks.
Without much doul^t all these rocks have been derived by dif-
ferentiation from a connaon magma. Whether the differentiation
is of a serial or complementary type, cannot however be deter-
mined Avith certainty in the absence of chemical analyses of all
these rocks. The qviestion of differentiation has been attacked
exhaustively in the Macedon area by Professor Skeats and Dr.
Summers, and at Dandenong, by Mr. Morris, and their conclu-
sions leave no room for doubting that the granodiorites and dacites
in these areas are consanguineous. If any further evidence i»
needed in the Healesville area to establish the comagmatic origin
of the rocks, the striking similarity in their mineralogical com-
position and their intimate association in the field may be put
forward in support of this view. Especially significant is the
occurrence of zone plagioclase and microperthitic orthoclase in
the granodioi'ite, and exactly the same types of felspar in the
dacites and rhyolites. Garnet is also present in all of these rocks.

6, — Conclusions.

1. Folded Upper Silurian shallow water marine sediments
form the basal bods of the Healesville area. Fossils are rare.
Haliserites Dechenianus, Goppert, was found in the north of the

Igneous Rochft. 288

area, determining the age of the beds as probably Tangilian.
Poorly preserved corals and ci'inoids, occur in conglomerates from
near Narbethong.

2. The vulcanieity in this area commenced in 1 Devonian
times, after the folding and uplift of the sediments. Extrusion of
rhyolites, accompanied by minor explosive outbursts, inaugurated
the cycle of volcanic activity. The expiring rhyolitic vulcanieity
was marked by the passage of hydrothermal solutions, containing
alkaline carbonates and sulphides, in solution, through the pre-
viously consolidated igneous rocks.

3. A great thickness of dacitic rocks, including quartz free
andesites, biotite dacites, and hypersthene biotite dacites suc-
ceeded the rhyolites and pyroclastic rocks, and covered up most
of them. The latter rocks are now only visible around the
periphery of the dacites, where denudation has been greatest.
There is good reason to believe that the dacitic magma was very
viscous. Steam cavities are almost entirely absent, and mineral-
isers which would have decreased the viscosity were apparently
ecaroe.

Later still, granodiorite was intruded at several points. Subse-
quent denudation, which has been greatest around the margins
of this volcanic pile, has exposed certain of these intrusions.

The volcanic activity appears to have been entirely sub-aerial.
There is no evidence present anywhere in the area of lacustrine
or marine sediments associated with the igneous rocks.

4. It is. very probable that all the igneous rocks described are
congeneric. The more complete evidence available from other
areas in Victoria, e.g., Macedon and Dandenong, where somewhat
similar rocks are present, supports this belief. The sequence of
eruption was apparently one of increasing basicity.

5. Magmatic fusion and assimilation of aluminous rocks by cer-
tain of the dacites has taken place, and as a result cordierite,
sillimanite and, possibly, garnet, have been formed.

6. The origin of the garnet remains unsolved, but it seems
very likely that it is a primary mineral in the rocks. Its exten-
sive occurrence, in granites, porphyries and dacites elsewhere in
Victoria, supports this contention.

In conclusion, the writer desires to express his indebtedness to
Professor "Watts, for many facilities granted him in the carrying
out of this research at the Royal College of Science, London ; and
to Professor Skeats, for advice and suggestions.

284

i\^. R. Junner

//AL!S£f!lT£.S

Granodiorite

EIZ] RhYOLITE(R) and DAClTEiD)

L5_l Silurian ^

Geological and locality sketch map of the Healesville and Narbethong area. The junctions
of the rhyolites and dacites are not shown owing to the mapping of their boundaries not

being completed.

Piw. K.S. Victoria, HM4. l'lat<- I.

Tif

^^S

r

'. , i

Hi '■0' t <^nl

u

Igneous Roch

EXPf.ANATION OF PLATES,

Platk I.

Fig. 1. — Microphotograph of a fractured garnet crystal occurring
in dacite from the Blacks' Spur. Inclusions of colourless
■ quartz and black pyrrhotite are visible. Ordinar}- light,
X 14.

Fig. 2. — Microphotograph of cherty ash, from a cutting in the
road, one-third of a mile above Wade's Look-out. Kude
bedding planes are visible in this section. Ordinary light
xl2.

Fig. 3. — Microphotograph of a finely corroded, originally idio-

morphic, quartz jjlienocryst, occurring in rh3'^olite, from

the Acheron River above St. Fillans. Ordinary light
x31.

Fig. 4. — Microphotograph of a cordierite trilling in dacite, from
near the head of the Acheron River. Crossed Nicols,
x50.

Fig. 5. — Microphotograph of andesite, from the Don road, 2 miles
north of Launching Place. Ordinary light x 25.

Fig. 6. — Microphotograph of porphyritic rhyolite, from Archer's
Look-out, Narbethong. Flow structure around an idio-
morphic phenocryst of quartz is well seen. Ordinary
light X 25.

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S)., Part II., 1914].

Art. XIX.— 0?i the Occurrence of Igneous Pehhles in a Con-
glomerate of Upper Silurian Age from near Walhalla.

By NORMAN K. JUNNER, B.Sc.

(With Plate II.)
[Read 12th Novemlier, 1914].

Introduction.

During a short visit made to Walhalla in June, 1913, with the
primary purpose of studying the relations between the auriferous
quartz reefs and the intrusive rocks there, my attention was
drawn, through the medium of a description in Mr. Herman's
report on the Walhalla Gold-field, i to an interesting conglomerate,
containing pebbles of igneous rocks, which was interbedded with
limestones, shales and grits of Yeringian age. It was at onc^
evident, from a cursory examination of the conglomerate, that
Mr. V. R. Stirling's idea^, of an immense fault and associated
fault breccia was untenable; and further that the igneous pebbles
had no genetic connection with the so-called diorite dykes which
are so characteristic a feature at Walhalla.

Many of the pebbles showed very little in hand specimens, and
it was only after sectioning them that their interesting nature
was revealed. Unfortunately, the time at my disposal was rather
limited, and my examination of the conglomerate and collection
of pebbles were not as detailed and thorough as they might have
been .

Previous Literature.

In 1878, Mr. R. A. V. Murray^ noted the presence of grits
associated with the limestone near the Thomson river, but did
not mention the occurrence of igneous detritus in the grits.

In 1899 Mr. V. R. Stirling* described a belt of bieccia occur-
ring near the Thomson river copper mine. According to him

1 " Report on the Walhalla Gold-Field." Spec. Rept. Dept. Mines, Vict., 1901.

'i "Notes on alleged Copper Occurrences at Cooper's Creek." Monthly Pro(f. Rep. Vict. Geol.
Siuv., No. 2, 1899.

;i I'log. Rep. Vict. Geol. Surv., No. .1, p. 4".

4 "Notes on alleged Copper Occurrences at (.'oopei's Creek." Moiithly I'luy Kep. \ict. Surv.
No. 2, 1899.

Igneous Pebbles. 287

it consisted of sub-angular and rounded fragments of quartzite,
decomposed diorite, limestone, etc., in a dark-coloured siliceous
matrix in part calcareous, and was associated with a decomposed
dyke and a belt of limestone. He concluded from the following:
evidence : —

(a) The direct association of the breccia with the decom-
posed dyke;

(b) The appearance of presumably the same belt of breccia
and dyke, first, on one side of the limestone, and then
on the other;

(c) The occurrence of included fragments of limestone in
the breccia ;

that the breccia was probably of volcanic origin, occupying an
immense strike fault in the silurian rocks.

In 1901. Mr. H. Herman^ described in some detail the relations
l^etween the beds near the Thomson river. He states that " A
gradual transition in texture can be traced from the coarse fossili-
ferous conglomerate . . . through fossiliferous shales with
crinoid stems, to highly calcareous encrinital shales, and finally
to encrinital limestone or marble." He regarded the conglomerate
as a normal shore line deposit, and explained the presence of
limestone pebbles in it, as either due to contemporaneous erosion
or thouglit possibly that they may have been derived from a pre-
existing formation. Mr. F. Chapman^, in 1907, described the
fossils occurring in the limestone near the Thomson River copper
mine. He mentioned the occurrence of flakes of biotite and
chlorite, and contorted bands of tuffaceous andesitic ejectmenta,
in sections of the limestone, and suggested that volcanic activity
took place contemporaneously with the deposition of the limestone.

Field Relations neap the Thomson River, Walhalla.

The Silurian sediments near Walhalla ^ consist lithologically of
sandstones, shales and slates, for the major part, but lenticular
bands of limestone associated with gritty and conglomeratic beds
are not unusual. The structure is geosynclinal with thin bedded,
highly cleaved, shales and slates in the centre of the geosyncline,
and more coarsely grained sandstones and gritty beds towards
the margins.

1 Op. cit., p. 12.

2 "The fossiliferous limestones and cong:lonierates of the Thomson and Tveis rivers and Marble-
creek, Gippslaiid." Records Vict. Geol. Surv., vol. ii., pt. 1.

3 For geological map and sections of the locality dealt with, vide Herman, op. cit.

^88 N. R. Junner:

Near the Thomson River copper mine the beds dip easterly,
^t angles between SO.o and 70o, and strike N. 15o E. to N. 20°
E. ; and the general stratigraphical succession, from the west to
«ast, starting from a point about half a mile west of the Thomson
River, is as follows : —

(1) Normal shallow water marine sediments chiefly shales and
sandstones.

(2) A band of conglomerate and gritty beds, well seen in sec-
tions on the track from the Copper Mine township to the Jubilee
Mine, and also in cuttings near the limestone quarries in Cooper's
•Creek.

(3) Overlying these conglomerates and fossiliferous grits in the
Cooper's Creek section, occurs a lenticular mass of dense black
limestone, highly fossiliferous, and traversed by veins of calcite.
The limestone matrix weathers more rapidly than the fossils, and
as a result the latter are often seen in fine relief on the weathered
surface of the rock. The forms present are chiefly corals, crinoids,
brachiopods, and polyzoa, and they are very similar to the fossils
■occurring in the Yeringian limestone at Lilydale. Bedding is not
very evident in the massive limestone, but occasional shale bands
•serve to define it. This band of limestone is not present in the
flection along the road from the Copper Mine township to the
Jubilee Mine. The corresponding strata, in this section, overlying
the conglomerate, consist of grits and calcareous shaly beds, and
one or two narrow bands of black, lioneycombed chert, which
undoubtedly replaces fossiliferous gi'itty beds.

4. Another outcrop of similar black limestone occurs not far
east of the above mentioned beds. At the time of my visit to the
locality, it was being cjuarried immediately to the north of Cooper's
creek, near its junction with the Thomson river. This patch of
limestone does not extend far to the soutli, for sections on the
same line of strike at the Thompson River show that the massive
limestono is absent, and that its place is taken by calcareous, fos-
siliferous grits containing pebbles of quartzite, and limestone
nodules composed in some cases almost entirely of corals. No
igneous pebbles were seen by the wiiter in this conglomerate.

Pebbles of igneous rocks are very numerous in the first men-
tioned conglomerate. The majority of these pebbles are well-
rounded, and they are generally small, being rarely more than
three inches in diameter, although Mr. Herman mentions that
pebbles up to 6 inches or 8 inches in diameter, are occasionally
present. They are partly set in a fine brownish coloured, granular

Igneous Pebbles. 28i>

matrix, resembling decomposed igneous material. The pebbles
appear to be chiefly volcanic, but occasionally coarsely crystalline
rocks, plutonic and metamorphic in character, are seen. Accord-
ing to Mr. Herman! diorite pebbles are predominant; but in my
limited examination I came across no such pebbles. Microscopical
examination of thin sections of these rocks shows that many of
them are closely related to one another; and in the specimens col-
lected by the author, all stages are represented between horn-
blende diabase, and the spherulitic facies of the same rock, or
variolite. No acid igneous rocks, either plutonic or volcanic,.
Avere found.

Section near the steel bridge over the Thomson river, about txvo^
miles north of its junction with Stringer's Crpplc'—The river, which
has followed the strike of the sediments for some considerable dis-
tance below here, at this point, cuts across the strike, and good
sections are available, especially so on the east bank of the river
Avhere cuttings made by the Long Tunnel Company for a tram
track, have uncovered the sediments.

Fossiliferous grits and calcareous beds w^ith occasional patches
of limestone occur at intermediate points between Cooper's Creek
and the steel bridge, and are again present further north of this
point. These outcrops are all in east dipping beds, and are on
the same line of strike as the Copper Mine series of limestones
and conglomerates, and are undoubtedly the northern continua-
tion of the same beds.

The section, near the steel bridge, shows that the beds consist
of hard, indurated black and grey, fine grained sandstones and
shales, interbedded with well cleaved slates, and coarse grit bands
and conglomerate; all dipping east at 50° to 70o. The beds
throughout the section are calcareous, and locally contain highly
fossiliferous lenticles and nodules of limestone. A fairly gradual
passage can be traced from gritty sandstones into coarse fossili-
ferous grit and conglomerate. The grits are often honeycombed
owing to the removal of the fossils. In the more calcareous beds
the fossils are preserved in their original calcareous matrix.
Corals (Favosites chiefly) and crinoids appear to be the most com-
mon fossils in these beds.

The band of conglomerate is well seen on the north side of a
small creek entering the Thomson River from the east. Pebbles
of quartzite are most common in this conglomerate, and igneous:

i Op. cit., p. 12.

290 K R Junner:

pebbles are not numerous. Others of vein quartz, sandstone, slate,
limestone and rarely chert were found by the writer. These
pebbles are usually small and rounded. Some of them are well
jointed by planes perpendicular to their longest axes, and these
joint planes are occasionally covered with a film of pyrites. Un-
•doubtedly this conglomerate, like the one near Cooper's Creek,
is a normal marine shore line deposit.

The author saw no evidence anywhere of the immense fault re-
ferred to by Mr. Stirling, and he feels convinced that no such
fault exists. No slickensides or gouges were seen ; and the shape
•of the pebbles does not support the view that they have originated
by faulting. No great disturbance of the strata has taken place,
and there is no evidence of any displacement of the beds. Thei
petrological characters of these pebbles disprove of the idea that they
were formed by the brecciation of the associated dyke, referred
to by Mr. Stirling, and forcibly suggest that they were derived
from pre Upper Silurian igneous rocks. The only series of vol-
canic rocks in Victoria, known to be pre Silurian in age, are
the Heathcotian, and hornblende diabase and associated pyro-
clastic rocks are characteristic of this series. The pebbles of
gneiss in the conglomerate must, undoubtedly, have come from the
pre Cambrian metamorphics of eastern Victoria, and the large
felspar crystals, referred to by Mr. Stirlingl, may have come from
the same source.

Further, Mr. Stirling's strong point of the occurrence of the
breccia first, on the east side of the limestone near the Copper
Mine township, and on the west side of it further south, can be
explained away when it is recognised that the limestone bands
are lenticular, and are not persistent in strike, and that there
may be two or more lenticular patches of limestone not quite on
the same line of strike.

Moreover, tlie evidence at hand does not support Mr. Chap-
man's belief in contemporaneous andesitic vulcanicity. It seems
to me more probable, as Professor Skeats2 has suggested, that the
volcanic debris included in the limestones, is detrital. The as-
sociated conglomerates and grits contain abundant, undoubtedly
•detrital, igneous pebbles, and it is quite natural to expect that
some of this material should be deposited with the limestones. The
field relations do not lend any support to Mr. Chapman's sugges-

1 Op. cit.

2 "The Volcanic Rock of Victoria." Pres. Add., Sect. C, .\iis. Assoc. Adv. Sci., I90».

Igneous Fehhles. 291

tion, and therefore, inferences drawn from the results of a micro-
scopic examination of thin sections of these rocks, must be accepted
with caution. Associated interbedded lavas or tuffs are absent,
and the igneous fragments present in the limestone can be most
easily explained on the assumption that they were derived from
the same source as the detrital igneous pebbles. No indubitable
Silurian igneous rocks have been recognised in Victoria, and moro
definite evidence than that brought forward by Mr. Chapman, is
needed to establish Silurian vulcanicity. The present writer agrees
with Mr. Herman that the conglomerates and grits are normal
ehore line deposits, and that the included igneous pebbles are de-
rived from pre-existing formations.

Petrology.

Honihlende yiieiss.

Specimen Wl, pebble in rduglomei-ate, section on road to Jubilee
Mine.

The hand specimen of the rock is coarse grained. Felspar and
hornblende can be recognised megascopically.

Examined microscopically, the rock shows very well the effects
of mechanical dynamic metamorphism. Strain polarisation has
been developed in the quartz grains, and they are considerably
mylonitised. The horneblende is almost entirely light green actino-
lite. The prisms and plates of this mineral are very rarely idio-
morphic, and are often twisted and bent in all directions. ■ The
elongation of the hornblende crystals is parallel to the direction
of foliation of the rock. They are occasionally twinned according
to the usual law; w4th twin and composition plane 100. One
idiomorphic basal section showed an excentric emergence of an
optic axis. Determination of the axial plane showed that it
bisected the obtuse angle between the cleavages, and that it was
parallel to the clinopinacoid, as is usual for hornblende. It is
moderately pleochroic, giving the following colour scheme : —
X light yellow green.
Y light green.
Z bright green, and Z>Y>X as usual.

The maximum extinction angle from the prismatic cleavage is 15o.
The felspar is greatly kaolinised, and has suffered a considei-able
amount of mechanical deformation. Plagioclase appears to be
in excess of orthoclase. The refractive index of the plagioclase is

292 N. R. Jv/nner:-

at times greater, and at other times less than that of the quartz,
and hence it appears to be oligoclase or oligoclase-andesine.
Sphene is not uncommon as irreguhir shaped dusty masses.
Rarely it is present as double wedge shaped crystals. A little
chlorite occurs replacing the hornblende; quartz is not abundant.
Apparently the original rock was an intermediate plutonic rock.

Horiihlende diabase (Epidiorife).

Section W2. Pebble in conglomerate near the Thomson River
copper mine, is a holocrystalline, fairly even grained rock with
pilotaxitic fabric. There is a tendency towards an ophitic tex-
ture in places, but it is never very pronounced. Plagioclase and
actinolite constitute almost the whole rock, but there is also a
little quartz, ilmenite, chlorite and zircon present. The actinolite
occurs usually in anhedral grains and masses. It is moderately
pleochroic, varying in colour from light green to almost colourless.
It is ophitically penetrated by the felspar in places. Most of the
felspar laths are either simply twinned, or untwinned. Owing
to their extensive sericitisation, it is frequently impossible to
determine their original characters. Extinction angles as high
as 350 from the twin planes were measured on certain felspars,
indicating a rather basic labradorite. Interesting outgrowths have
taken place around the original felspar laths. Their idiomorphic
outlines are generally visible as greatly altered cores, surrounded
by a clear outer zone of albite showing ragged boundaries.

One interesting case, of additional material being added to a
former idiomorphic crystal of felspar at two different periods, was
visible in this section. By the first addition tlie idiomorphic
crystal became rectangular in outline. Both the original crystal
and the added material Avere now completely sericitised, and a
second marginal addition of pellucid felspar took place. The
twinning of the original felspar extends through the clear ex-
terior zone, showing that the addition has been in crystallographic
continuity with the primary felspar. The method of formation
of these outgrowths has been masked in the present case by thdl
great changes undergone by the rock. Professor Judd,i from a
study of similar outgrowths on felspar crystals from the Western
Isles of Scotland and elsewhere, came to the conclusion that the
majority of such additions took place Avhilst the felspars were
fresh and unaltered, and that in the Scotch case the outgrowths took

1 Quarterly Journal of the Oeoloffical Society, London.

/(/neons Pehhle.s. 298

place at the expense of the original glassy ground mass. He men-
tions that in certain specimens of rocks from New South Wales
received by him from Professor David, the outgrowths apparently
took place after advanced kaolinisation of the original crystals.
In the Walhalla specimens, the latter remarks apply equally well,
with the substitution of sericitisation for kaolinisation.

A moderate amount of interstitial quartz, containing fluid and
glass inclusions, is present in this section. It is doubtful whether
the quartz is primary or not. Considerable changes have taken
place in the rock, and it is possible that the quartz was formed
at the time of the amphibolitisation of the original femic mineral
which Avas probably augite. A little chlorite (pennine) occurs
replacing the hornblende, specimen W4, from same locality as
W2. This rock resemljles the preceding one very closely. Quartz
however is rare. Sub-ophitic hornblende, and plagioclase laths
predominate. The plagioclase appears to be present in two genera-
tions. An analysis of this rock for silica and alkalies gave the
following result : —

SiO^ 52.99 per cent.

Ko 0 2.09 per cent.

Nao 0 ... 3.21 per cent.
The analysis confirms the microscopical determination of the rock
as a hornblende diabase, or according to Barker's nomenclature,
a hornblende dolerite. Since the hornblende is secondary, pre-
sumably replacing augite, the rock may be described as an epi-
diorite. No unequivocal potash felspar is present in the section,
so that the relatively high percentage of potash indicated in the
analysis, is probably due to the extensive sericitisation undergone
by the original felspars.

Basic spherulite {1 variolite).

In hand specimen, this rock is compact and aplianitic, and green
in colour. No vesicles are seen even with the aid of a lens, and
in only one specimen collected was there any evidence of varioles.

Section W6, pebble in conglomerate; section on road to the
Jubilee Mine. Examined microscopically, it is seen that the rock
is composed almost entirely of beautifully developed, sheaf and
fan like, and occasionally spherulitic aggregates of hornblende
and felspar. Phenocrysts are practically absent, as are also true
varioles marked off from the ground mass. According to the de-
finition of Professors Cole and Gregory, ^ " a variolite is a devitri-

11

294 iV. B. Jiinner:

fied spherulitic tachylyte, typically coarse in structure." The
■latter phrase of which was interpreted by Miss Raisin^ to prob-
ably mean that spherulites were visible niacroscopically. The
Walhalla rock therefore differs from the typical variolite in the
absence of macroscopic ally visible spherulites or varioles. The
hornblende is entirely actinolite, and it usually occurs as long
niicrolites frequently crossing one another. Examined under the
high power, many of these niicrolites are seen to be skeleton crys-
tals, and they very often enclose a tubular core of ground ni/ass
material showing very low polarisation colours. The edges of the
microlitea are often greatly serrated, and they usually fork at the
ends, and pass gradually into the ground mass of the rock. Cross
sections of these laths of actinolite occur in the form of small
jjarallelograms, with central inclusions, corresiionding to the
tubular inclusions present in the niicrolites. The actinolite laths
show a characteristic cross fracture at right angles to their length,
and more rarely a cleavage parallel to their elongation. Twinning
according to the usual law is not infrequently j) resent. Both
these niicrolites and the spherulites appear to be essentially con-
temporaneous in origin. At times the laths intersect the
spherulites, but often the reverse is true, and the spherulites cut
across, or project into the actinolite laths. Chlorite replaces much
of the actinolite. The felspar laths gi-ve maximum extinction
angles of 25^. They exhibit undulose extinction, and are serici-
tised in places.

Section W8, of pebble from same locality as the preceding speci-
men. This is an intermediate type between the normal diabase
and the spherulitic rock. Microscopically, it consists almost en-
tirely of hornblende and felspar laths, with secondary chlorite.
The long niicrolites of actinolite show the characteristic serrated
edges, and the central tul)ular inclusion of the ground mass. One
or two grains of the hornblende retain the rectangular ilcavage
of augite, clearly proving the secondary origin of the former
mineral. The felspar laths are usually only simply twinned, and
they are occasionally zoned. Extinction angles are generally low.
but angles as great as 40^ were measured on isolated sections.
The felspar in places includes hornblende, and in others pene-
trates the femic mineral, showing that both minerals are essen-
tially contemporaneous in origin. The chlorite is markedly
pleochroic, in shades of green and yellow. One section gave an

1 "The Vaiiolitic Rocks of Mont Genevre." Q.J.G S.. Loiirtoii. I8!K), p. 3:^0.

2 " Variolite of the Lleyn and associated Volcanic Rocks." (|».J.(;.S., I-oiidoii, 1893, y>. ir>.'i.

Igneous Pefthles. 2 *.»•'>

extinction angle of 7 degrees from the 001 cleavage. It is dis-
tinctly biaxial, having a fairly wide axial angle; is negative; and
is referable to clinochlore. A little disseminated pyrites occurs
throughout the section, and is associated with brown iron oxide.
True spherulites are absent from the rock, but j)lumuse aggregates
of hornblende and felspar are common.

Section W5 is practically identical with W6, except that the
spherulitic structure is not so well developed. Veinlets of quartz
and chlorite, with a little brown oxide, traverse the rock.

Section W3, of a pebble from same locality as the foregoing
specimens. Microscopically, the texture is aphanitic, with the ex-
ception of a few porphyritic crystals of felspar. These appear
to be entirely calcic felspar, giving maximum extinction angles of
430 from the twin planes. The basis of the rock is not easily
deciphered, but it appears to consist of plagioclase, grains of Ijlack
iron oxide, and ? augite. Vesicles infilled with chlorite are rarely
present. The rock is probably a basic volcanic, approaching a
basalt.

Section W9, pebble in conglomerate, near steel bridge over
Thomson River, is a highly chloi'itised. sericitised and carbonated
rock, probably a diabase. Apparently both plagioclase and ortho-
clase are present in the section ; chlorite (pennine) replacing ?
femic mineral; quartz showing strain effects and a little biotite and
ilmenite.

Summary.

A series of conglomerates, grits, and limestones, containing
igneous pebbles and debris, occurs near the Thomson river, Wal-
halla. Certain previous explanations, of the origin of the con-
glomerate, and of the igneous material, appear to be unsatisfac-
tory. It is shown that the explanation, which maintains that tlje
conglomerate is derived by post Silurian faulting and brecciation
of an accompanying dyke, is at variance with the field relations;
and also that there is little evidence of vulcanicity contemporaneous
with the deposition of the sediments. The Avriter concludes that
the conglomerate is a normal marine shore line deposit, and that
the igneous debris present in the conglomerates and limestones
is derived from pre-existing igneous rocks.

Petrologically, the pebbles show considerable similarity. All
intermediate stages between a hornblende diabase (epidiorite), and
the spherulitic type of the same rock are represented in the

llA

29(i N. B. Junner : Igneous Pebbles.

pebbles collected. Pel)ble8 of hornblende gneiss, quartzite. lime-
stone, slate, sandstone and chert are also present in the con-
glomerate.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.

Plate II.

Fig. L — Microphotograph of hornblende diabase pebble. No.
W2, showing two successive outgrowths from an idio-
morphic felspar phenocryst. Ordinary light x 25.

Fig. 2. — Microphotograph of spherulitic diabase. No. W6.
Ordinary liglit x 25.

rroc. K.S. Victoriii, I it 11. Plat.> II.

Fig. 1.

Fig. 2.

[Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), I^t. II., i5>l4.]

Art. XX. — (Jontributioiii^ to the Flora of Anstiulla, No. 22}

By ALFRED J. EVVART, J).Sc., Ph.D.

(< government Botanist of Victoiia and Professor of Botany and
Plant Physiolog-y in the University of Melbourne).

[Kead 12th November, 1<)14.].

.\na(;allis akvknsjs, Ty. '*Pimperiiel." (Priuuilaceae).
Recently responsible for the death of 23 cage birds at an aviary
in Mentone. The birds were given a few handfuls of cliickweed.
containing Pimpernel. Next morning 23 out of about 100 liirds
were dead.

Anthistiria imberbis, Retz (1779-91), (A. australis, R. Br., 1810),
(A. FoRSKALii, KuNTH., 1835), (Thkmeda Forskalii, Hackel,
1885). (Gramineae). "Common Kangaroo Grass."

A native to Australia, South Africa, and Asia. This peren-
nial grass is given under A. ciliata, L. in Bentham's Flora Aus-
tralieusis, but Linnaeus' species is an annual Indian plant. It
has also been termed A. vulgaris In* Hackel in Engler's Pflanzen
Familien. 11. Teil. 2. Abt. p. 29, 1887, but the oldest name has
priority. The plant has had five different scientific names in 100
years, but the popular name has remained constant during the
same period.

Antirrhinum Orontium, L. "Lesser Snapdragon."
(Scrophulariaceae).
Ballarat. W. H. Bacchus; Camberwell, C. French (jnr.).
October, 1913.

Previously recorded as a garden escape, but now appears to
maintain itself when wild, and may be considered as naturalised.
It is a native of Europe, Asia and Africa.

Artkmlsia vulgaris, L. "Mugwoi-t." (Conipositae).

Coode Island, Victoria. J. R. Tovey and C. French (jnr.).
March, 1912.

Apparently in process of naturalisation. It is a native of N.
Temperate regions.

1. No. 21 in Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xxvi. (n.s.), p. 152, 1913.

298 Alfred J. Eicart :

AsTKR SUBUT.ATUS, Miclix. " Shrub Aster." (Compositae).

Otukai, New Zealand. H. Carse, April, 1914.

A native of North America, widely spread as a naturalised
alien in Victoria and New South Wales, but has not been hitherto
recorded as growing wild in New Zealand.

Atropis magellanica or Atropis stricta? (Hook). Des\.
(Grauiineae).

Gerniantown, near Geelong, Victoria. H. B. Williamson,
N'ovember, 1910.

This grass is a native of the southern part of South America,,
has only recently appeared, and is apparently sufficiently estab-
lished to be considered naturalised, at least near Germantown.
In regard to it Professor Hitchcock writes: — "The species of thi»
genus are in great confusion, and it is difficult to identify them
with certainty, until the group has been inonographed. The three
nerved upper glume of A. magellanica is unusual." This species
has at different times been placed under Catabrosa, and also under
Glyceria. The grass appears as though it would be of some value
as a pasture plant, but nothing definite appears to be known from
this point of view in regard to it. It has no injurious properties
so far as is known at present.

Dr. Stapf writes: — "The spikelets agree very well with those
of a specimen of Glyceria stricta, collected l)y Adamson. near Mel-
bourne, in 1856, and fairly well with those of Hooker's type ot
Glyceria stricta from New Zealand, except that the joints of the
rhacilla are generally longer, and the spikelets therefore laxer ;
but we have no samples Avith panicles equally loose. I wonder
whether it can be a shade form. This could only be decided in the
field or by experiment. Meanwhile the grass might Ix- marked as
Glyceria (Atropis) stricta, f. perlaxa."

Professor Hackel considers it to be Atropis stricta. Hack. var.
tenuispica, Hack, ined (Glyceria tenuispica Steud.). a species found
in Australia and New Zealand.

The ])ositi()ii of this grass is for the present uncertain.

AvENA 15ARBATA, Brot. "Barbed Oat Grass" (Graniiiieae).

Govcniiiiciit Domain. Melbourne. Edwin Cheel, 9/1/1913.
A native of Aral)ia. Asia Minor, and the Mediterranean Regions,
not vet sufficientlv established to l)e considered naturalised.

1

Floni of Aiu^tralni. 299

Caladenia con(;K!sta, K. Br. "Slender Cfilfidein.-i." (Orchidaceae).

Mt. Difficult. (Iranipiaus. J. W. Audas, 30/10/1;^
Tho specimens have bronze to purple flowers. Bentliani gives
the tloAvers as 1-2 and pink. Luxuriant specimens also occur
with pale or puiplish pcriantlis, and they may have up to three
or four flowers.

Cexti NCULi's MiviMU.s, L. "Chaff Weed " (Prinndaceae).

This tiny plant is not recorded in Bentham's Flora Austra-
liensis, and in Baron von Mueller's Census is recorded as Aus-
tralian. In the Key to Victorian Plants, it is given with the native
plants, Init with the proviso, " possibly immigrated." The plant
was first collected in 1883 at Mt. Macedon as Anagallis centunculus,
and since then has been found as Hawkesdale (1899, F. M. Reader
and H. B. Willianison, and at Mentone, C. R. Roberts, 1910).
It is possibly more widely spread, but overlooked on account of its
small size. There can be no doubt that it is a naturalised alien
in Victoria, and not an original member of the native flora.
In Engler's Pflanzenreich (Primulaceae, 1905), it is recorded from
Europe, Asi.i, Africa, North and South America, but not from
Australia.

CoNRiNOiA oKiEXTAMs, iJonii. " Haie's Ear." (Cruciferae).

Warracknabeal, Borung Shire, Oct., 1913. St. Eloy Dalton,
Nov., 1904.

First i-ecorded a garden escape, near Qimlwola, and now ap-
parently naturalised. A freely seeding annual, apt to smother
seedlings in cultivated land, but not poisonous, or specially in-
jurious.

Cynosurus ECniNAius, Fi. " Rougli Dog's tail." (Graniineae).

Drouin. February, 1913. W. C. Anders.. n and H. J. Lindsay.

This grass is a native of Europe, whicli appears occasionally
on the shores of Great Britain. It appears to have definitely estab-
lished itself as a naturalised alien, and to be giowing plentifully
in at least one district of Victoria. The plant is an annual, and
less valuable as a pasture grass than the Crested D
(Cynosurus cristatus, L.), which is a perennial.

ujlLIBRARYJaoj

.-v

300 Alfred J. Ewwrt :

DiURls MACULATA, Sill. "Leopard Oicliid." (Oichideae).
.Vereker Range, Wilson's Promontory. J. W. Audas. August,
1914.

Previously recorded for Sealer's Cove by F. v. Mueller.

Eragrostis curvula, Nees, var. valida, Stapf. " African Love
Grass." (Grainineae).

Between Drouin and Warragul. Vict. W. (i. Anderson, Fel)..
1913.

This puzzling grass, which could for a long time not be referred
to any described species of Eragrostis, is considered by Mrs. Agnes
Chase to be the variety described by Stapf. It is a native of South
Africa, and the ordinary forms are sometimes grown as fodder
plants. When old, however, the stems are rather fibrous and the
foliage scanty. It can hardly as yet be regarded as definitely
naturalised.

Krechtitks Atkinsoniak, F. v. M. (Conipositae).
Otukai, New Zealand. H. Carse, April, 1914.

Not previously recorded as growing wild in New Zealand. It is
a native of New South Wales and Queensland.

Ehkchtitks valkrtanakfolta, 1). C. (Coiiiposirae).

Otukai, New Zealand. H. Carse, April. 1914. A native of

North America not previously recorded as introduced in New

Zealand. This plant lias been recorded as a naturalised alien in

New South Wales, but has not yet made its appearance in Victoria.

Erigkron caxadknsk, L. "Canadian Fleab.ine." ((^onipositae).
Orbost. N. Wellington, 23/3/1914.

A widely spread naturalised alien first recorded as naturalised in
1908, and which has now reached the Orbost district.

(tladiolus grandis, Thunberg. (Iridaceao). The liH rge-floweied
Cladiohis.

A native of S. Africa, which was recorded as a spreading garden
escape at Eltham in 1911, and has now appeared in thousands
along a drain at Digger's Rest, on the Bendigo line. (C. French,
Jr., Oct., 1914.)

The perfume is very strong, not unlike the scent of primroses.
The plant does not seem to have any obnoxious qualities, but many

Flora, of Ansfraliti. 301

of the Irideae are poisonous, and hence objectionable in pastures.
It may now be regarded as an established naturalised alien.

GoMPHRKNA CANESCENS, K. Bi'. ( Amaraiitaceae).

Herbert Bros.' Station, No. 2, Darwin. G. F. Hill, 28/5/]:!.
This plant has reddish-purple heads and seems worthy of garden
cultivation. The heads of the ordinary form are usually pale in
colour.

Helipterum Guilfoylki, Evvart. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xx.
(n.s.), p. 82. 1907 = H. Zacchkus^, 8. le Moore. (Compositae).

Mr. Spencer le Moore writes that the achenes of this plant differ
only from those of H. Zaccheus, S. le; Moore, in lieing rich brown
instead of dark slate colour and slightly shorter, and also finds
the same peculiar mucilaginous layer in H. Zaccheus that was first
described for H. Guilfoylei. The latter, therefore, becomes a
synonym to the former.

Hydrocotyle medicaginoides Turcz. "Trefoil Pennywort."
(Umbel life raft).
Miss J. E. Tilden, No. 811. Point Lonsdale, Nov., 1912. Not
previously recorded for the south of Victoria.

Hyoscyamus albus, L. "White Henbane." (Solanaceae).

Williamstown, Victoria. C. French, junr., Oct., 1913.

Noted as a garden escape at Cashel nearly 20 years ago, and
now definitely naturalised. The fruit is peculiar, opening by a
lid. In ancient times this plant was regarded as a sacred plant,
and sometimes smoked like tobacco as a preventative for toothache.
It belongs to a poisonous genus, and contains a hypnotic and
deleriant poison, hyoscyamin, but appears to be much less poisonous
than the black Henbane, Hyoftct/amns niger.

LiNAKiA ELATINK, li. "Hairy Toad Flax." (Scrophulariaceae).

Spreading in the Werribee district. C. French, junr., Oct.,
1913. ■

LiPPiA NODIFLORA, Mich, var. SARMENTOSA. ( Verbcuaceae).

Williamstown. J. R. Tovey, Jan., 1914.

The plant grows in dense mats in the gutters and has evidently
been introduced by foreign shipping. It is a common tropical

302 Alfred J. Ewart :

weed, and has been used for lawns in Egypt, where grasses and
ordinary h\wn plants fail.

MoRGANiA. GLABRA, R. Br. "Smooth Morgania." (Scrophulariaceae).
Myall, near Kerang. Miss Sheehan (H.B.W. No. 1465.)
Not previously recorded as Victorian. Baron von Mueller in-
cluded all the species of Morgania Avith Stemodia viscosa as Stemodia
Morgania, and hence the distribution of the species of Morgania
now recognised is not easy to trace, but no previous specimens of it
or records of it from Victorian localities can be found.

Olkaria ramulosa, Benth., var. intkrmkdia, A. J. Ewart.
New variety. (Conipositae).

J. W. Andas. (xrampians, 1914.

This form has the leaves of the type and the small heads of
(Aster) Oltaria microjihylla, Vent., thus justifying Bentham's inclu-
sion of this species as a varietj/ of 0. ramulosa. Baron von
Mueller maintained both species in the Census, although Bentham
noted the small flower heads of the Grampians form.

It is apparently a mountain variety, whereas other intermediate
forms which come nearer to the variety microphylla are coastal
plants (Portland, etc.).

Ononis spinosa, L. (Conipositae).

Cobden, C. A. Ogilvie, 1913.

This weed, the " Spiny Restbarrow,'' a native of Europe, may
now be considered to be definitely naturalised. Though practically
useless as a fodder plant, it usually grows on the poorer soils, and
since it is easily destroyed by cultivation, is hardly to be regarded
as a serious weed.

Orthocekas stkictum, K. Br. " Crow Orchid." (Orcliidaceae).

Head of Barry's Creek, Wilson's Promontory. Messrs. Pitcher
and Audas, Dec, 1912. Not previously lecorded for the National
Park.

PnY.SALls VISCOSA, L. "Sticky Cape Goo.seberry or (i round Cherry."
(Soliinaceae).
C. C. Brittlel)ank, .Marcli. 1913.

Growing in sucli al)undanci' as to be almost a pest. The plant,
which has already been recorded as an exotic, may now be regarded
as definitely naturalised.

Flont oj Australia. :>(>:>

PiNUS INSIGNIS, Doug. Monterey Pine." (Coniferae).

Between Beaconsfield and Emerald. J. W. Auda.s and E. E.
Pescott. 1913. Upper Beaconsfield. J. R. Tovey, August, 1914.

This tree is now evidently establishing itself as a naturalised
alien in many parts of Victoria, especially in the Beaconsfield and
Emerald districts. It spreads from wind-borne seeds developed on
planted trees.

Prasophyllum flavum, R. Br. "Yellow Leek Orchid.''
(Orchidaceae).
Mt. Baw Baw. C. French, junr., January, 1914.
A native of New South Wales and Queensland not previously
recorded for Victoria.

Pkasophyllum Suttoni, Rogers and Rees. "Alpine Leek Orchid."
(Orchidaceae).
Mt. Baw Baw, C. French, junr., January, 1914.
A native of Victoria previously only recorded from the Buffalo
Plateau.

Prostanthera denticulata, R. Br. "Rough Mint Bush."
(Labiatae).
Hall's Gap. Grampians, Victoria. Miss J. E. Tilden, No. 962,
Dec, 1912.

In Mr. Campbell's "Census of Grampian Plants" (Vict. Nat.,
Vol. XXVIII.. p. 108. 1911) footnote, it is stated that this species
does not occur in tlie Grampian Mountains. It was, however, re-
corded from the Grampians by Baron von Mueller, and still grows
in fair abundance.

Ranunculus ophioglossifolius, Vil. "Snake tongue Ranuncukis."
(Ranunculaceae).

Haddon. between Linton and Ballarat. H. B. Williamson, Dec,
1912.

This Briti.sh plant is a native of West Europe and the Mediter-
ranean regions. The plant is growing wild in fair abundance and
may be regarded as definitely naturalised.

Reseda lutea, L. "Cut-leaved Mignonette." (Resedaceae.)
Ptegnella. Sth. Australia. T. G. Osborn. Sept.. 1913.
This plant is a native of Europe, especially in limestone dis-
tricts. This is a nevs- record for South Australia, but Profes.sor

304 Alfred J. Euutrt : Florn, of Australia.

Osborn informs me he has since visited tlie locality and rooted out
the plant. It will be interesting- to see whether it reappears in the
same or other localities.

Salix Caprea, L. "Sallow Willow." (Salicaceae).

Leongatha. J. M. Molloy, 15/8/14.

A native of Europe and Asia, growing usually near water. It is
occasionally planted and has thence run wild, appearing to hold its
own in the native scrub, particularly on river banks or near water.

Thiclymitra vknosa, R. Br. "Veined Hood Orchid." (Orcliidaceae).

Mt. Baw Baw. J. G. O'Donoghue and C. French, junr., Jan..
1914.

A native of New South Wales and South Australia, not previously
recorded for Victoria.

Thitonia mneata, Ker. "Pencilled Tritonia." (Irideae.)

Charlton, Nov., 1913.

Already recorded as a garden escape at Geelong, and apparently
in process of becoming naturalised.

Vicia tetrasperma, Moench. "Slender Vetch." (Leguminosae).

Along the railway enclosure at Glen Iris, fairly abundant and
away from cultivation paddocks. W. G. Anderson, Nov., 1912.

The plant has previously been recoided as an exotic and may now
be regarded as definitely naturalised. It is a native of Europe and
W. Asia, from Mediterranean to Arctic. The present form ap-
proaches towards the variety i/roc/I/'s. l)nt has the shorter pods of
the type.

Zycjopiivllum ovatum, Ewart and White. "Dwarf Twinleaf."
(Zygophyl laceae).

Ouyeii. H. B. Williamson. No. 1468, Sept., 1913.

11 certain Oceanic Languages.

[Proc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Part II.. 191tJ.

Akt XXI. — Certain ISuffixes in Oceanic Laagumje,^

By W. G. I yens, M.A.

(Comuumicated by R. D. Boys, M.A.).

1. — Nature of the Enquiry.
Four Tables have been compiled by the writer, showing : —
Table I.— Verbal Suffixes
Table II. — Noun Suffixes
Table III.— Passive Suffixes
Table IV.— Adjectival Suffixes I
After each Table instances are given of words which show tlu
presence of such Suffixes witli remarks thereupon, and such con-
clusions are drawn as seem to be warranted by the evidence adduced.

2.— Object of the Enquiry.

(a) To collect instances of Verbal and Noun Suffixes occurring
in languages where their presence has not been recognised hitherto,

(b) To form a theory that will give a satisfactory explanation of
the formation of the Gerundives and of the Passive Suffixes in
Polynesian.

Note. — n is sounded as ng in singer. Abbreviations : v. — verb;
v.i. — verb intransitive; v.t. — verb transitive; adj. — adjective; n—
noun; adv. — adverb; prep. — preposition; Pol. — Polynesian.

TABLE I.

Verbal Suffixes.
This Table is founded on the Table of Verbal Suffixes in Dr.
Codrington's " Melanesian Languages," p. 180. New features
in it are — (1) Nguna, (2) Gilbert Islands, (3) Rotuma, (4) Maori.
(5) Samoan, (6) Tongan, Tahitian, Hawaiian, (7) Malay (8) Ulawa,
Sa'a, Wango lists have been amplified, (9) Lau, (10) Melanesian
New Guinea (Expedition to Torres Straits, Vol. iii., p. 458), (11)
New Britain.

Consonantal. Syllabic.

(;i) Loyalty Islands.
Nengone - - ?ie, ///', //

Lifu . . ft

:]0(3

W. G. Ivens

Consonantal.

(b) New Hebrides.

Anaiteui

1 -

-

rai, raig; jai, jaig; /mix •
taig; haig

J^'ate

/, ki, H, SI, ti

-

aki, faki, tnaki, naki, raki
sai, saki, /aki

.8esake

-

i, ki, ti, vi

-

raki

Nguna

-

i, gi, ki, mi, ni, si,
vi

a.

raki, sai

Aniljiym

-

ta

Espiritu

.Santo -

ni, vi

tag

Ai-aga

-

i

-

mai, rai, tai

<Jba

hi, si

tagi

Mae wo

-

gi, si

-

nagi. va, vagi

(c) Banks'

Island

5.

Merlav

«, r, t

la, na, ra, va

Oaua

-

o, n, n, /', s, t, V

g^g\ /<^g', »(^g\ f^g, sag, tag

A-^anua Lava

g, 71, n, r, t

me, leg, re, se, te, teg, ve

Mota

-

g, n, n, r, s, t, v {na.

-

"g^g'^g^ ^'K^^ '"''g^ 'i^\^^ "«AS

sa)

rag, sai;, tag, vag

Motlag

-

.?•

-

keg, geg, teg, veg

Volow

g, r

Ilea, nia, rea, tea, vea

Ureparapara

n, V

ran, sa, tc

Torres Is

ands -

g, J, t

-

ga, te

((]) New Britain.
k, n, t

(e) Fiji.
a, ca, ga, ka, m.i, na, - caka, kaka, laka, maka,
ra, ta, va, wa, ya raka, vaka, waka, yaka

(i) Gilbert Islands.
a, '/, ka, na, ta, da - Ini'i

ki

(g) Rotu.

(h) Maori.
/, ///, ki, mi, ni, \\i, pi,
ri, ti(ta, na, rana)

(i) Sanioan.
/', V, yf, //, ni, ni, si,
ti, VI (ta, va)

a^i, Ja^i, ga'i, ma'i, na'i,
/a'i, sa'i, ta'i, tani, va'i

l^uffixt'.s hi Oceanic Languages.

:{()'

Consonantal.

(j) 'longan.
/, ki\ hia, »ii, ji

(k) Tahit.iaii.
/', hi, mi

(I) Hawaiifin.

/, ki, II i

(in) Malay.
/, k, III, t, si, kan

(ii) Solomon Islands.
'/, /«■, //, mi, ni, ni, ri, - a'i, d'iiii, hci'iiii, hxiiii.

si (la, na)

Sa'a -

- '/, hi, Ii, mi, ni, ni, ri,

si (la, na)

Lau -

- ^i,fi, Ii, mi, ni, \\i

Fagani

- si

Waiigo

- '/', hi, mi, ni, ni, ri.

•

si

Vatui-anga-

- hi, Ii, mi, ni, si, ?;/

Florida

- hi, Ii, mi, ni, ni, si, ii,

vi

8avo -

- Ii

Bugotu

- hi, ni, ri, ti, vi

Gao -

- ni, z

Duke of York

- i, m

ma till, na ini, ra iiii,

ia^ini
d'i, a'iiii, ha'ini, Uiini,

md'ini, na'ini, na'ini,

ra'ini, ta'ini
a'i, fa'ini, ma'ini, na'ini,

to' ini
vagi
a'i, fa ini, iiia'ini, na'ini,

ta'ini
vahi
hagi, lai^i, fiagi, sagi, vagi

hagi, lagi, vagi
pai, iai, rai, iiai

(o) Melanesian New Guinea.

Roro

- na, ni

Mekeo

- ni

Notu

- i, hi, di, Ii, ni, ri,

(a, ta, na, sa)

Suau

■ i

Kiriwina -

- ki

Wedau

- ai, ei, oi, ni, gi, ni

Tavara

- ii e

Mukawa

- i, ni, si, vi

bai, dai, hai, Iai, mai, nai,
rai, tagi, agi, gingt

:308 W. G. Ivens:

NOTES, ETC., ON TABLE I.

Dr. Codrington, " Melanesian Languages," p. 177, gives the
following definition of the use and the nature of Verbal Suffixes.
" The Verbal Suffix marks the word as a Verb. All Verbs have not
Suffixes; a Suffix is added to a Verb to change in some way its
signification. It may very well be that a Verb with a suffixed termi-
nation may be found in a language in which the Verb without a
Suffix is not found at present, but the stem is a Verb, and the
signification of the Suffix will be felt in the meaning of the word."
This quotation applies directly to the use of these Suffixes in the
Melanesian languages. While the same Suffixes may be clearly
seen attached to Verbs in the Polynesian languages, yet it is very
evident that the Polynesian peoples do not regularly employ these
Suffixes in the same way or to the same extent in which they are
employed in Melanesia. However, instances given Wow from
Samoan and from Maori show certain uses of the Verbal Suffixes
directly corresponding to uses in the Melanesian languages.

The Verbal Suffixes are attached in the Melanesian languages to
Verbs, Nouns, Adjectives, Adverbs, their function being to make a
Neuter Verb definitely transitive, or to increase the transitive
signification of a Verb already transitive, or to fix its action on to
a certain object, or to mark a word as a Verb. In this latter
capacity the Verbal Suffixes are attached to Nouns, Adjectives and
Adverbs. No instance has been collected of a Verbal SuflSx added
to an undoubted Adjective in any Polynesian language, and it may
well be that the Adjectives in Sa'a and Ulawa, to which Verbal
Suffixes are added, imine big, xwainxti small, haora (Ulawa), small,
are really Verbs, and that the Verbal Suffixes are not really added
to pure Adjectives, and in all probability the so-called Adverbs to
which the Suffixes are added are really neuter Verbs.

It is unnecessary for the purpc^se of this enquiry to quote the
examples of Verbal Suffixes that are given in the languages treated
by Dr. Codrington in " Melanesian Languages," and accordingly
examples will be given in those languages only which the writer has
himself added to the Table, or which have been amplified.

(1) Verhal Sii-ffi.res in tlie htnguage of Ngima.

These have been collected from the translation of the Gospels
according to S.S. Matthew and John.

Maworawora adj. broken, 7nairori to break, (c.f. Mel. Lang., p.
461); muiiu v.i. to drink, niunuc/i to drink of; marimatagi v.t. to

Siifjixf's in Oceanic Laiigu<i<i<'s. 809

prepare. (Motu iiKttemafe ready); inafoiiki v.t. to fear (Ulawa
ma'aa, ma'au/ii); tinnnii to swallow; roronil to love, (Mota lolo
Iieart, affections): i<aina!<(iina ii. <j:1oiv, sd/tidsania/ii to glorify;
pitnusi prep, to, v.t. to see. fc.f. Ulawa lonsi, and Florida pitnnsi) ;
pululi to seal (Uliiwa puhi n pitili. piihi'i to pitch); tntauo to
beseech, fafauori to ask.

Certain Vcihs in Xgiina seem to have Suffixes compounded of
two forms; /lafi to throw, lutfiki and natihiiii to cast, noa to say, to
speak, Doasai and iioalixdi to declare. Dr. Codrington (" Mel.
Lang.."" p. 465) cpiestions whether ki in Sesake is a Verbal Suffix,
and in the following instance separates ki from the Verb sajjura,
soro sapui-a kiiia lepa, sweep away the dirt. He adds, however, that
snpuraki resembles the Mota savrag, and is used in Nguna as
meaning to sow; sarrar/ itself being made up of sav to sow, and
rag, Verbal Suffix. Since ki occurs in Nguna, a neighbouring
island, it probably occurs also as a Verbal Suffix in Sesake, and
raki certainly occurs in Nguna as a Verbal Suffix, and liniraki to
leave, abandon, shoAvs an undoubted instance of iriTci as a Syllabic
Suffix, c.f Sa'a liki to cross, go beyond, leave; Florida liligi beside,
to pass by.

(2) Verbal Suffixes in the language of Neir Britain.

Arik to split, Mota ari ; felek to peck at, Mota tere; likun to bend,
Mota luk; kolot to scold, Mota gol.

(3) Verbal iSuffixes in the language of the Gilbert Islands.

Mata XI. eye. inatai to look covetously at; boha to trade in oil,
bobai to trade; ma,\\a a branch, manai a spear with branches;
nruurti to engage in destroying, iiriia to destroy, xirubaH to engage
in destroying; okai a house for storing coconuts, okaia to store coco-
nuts; kauka to open, (Sa'a hu'e to open, hu'esi, Samoan sua to
grub up, Maori hnaki to open); )noti adj. broken off, motika to
break; biUi to go along, butika. to meet (c.f. Sa'a odo to journey
on, odo'i to meet); ua to swim, nana to swim out to; tabu to forbid,
tabuna to make taboo; ruo to descend, ruona to descend to; inoa a
namesake, inoana to name after; rao a companion, raona to asso-
ciate with; kori v.t. to scratch, korita v.t. to scratch; raba adj.
secret, rabata to approach cautiously in order to seize; bono adj.
shut, bonata to close; rabata n. the body, v.t. to embrace, rabata
v.t. to embrace; urina to remember, urinaba to remember with
affection or sorrow.

310 W. G. Ivens:

All of these instances are tlioroughly after the Melanesian style,
and Verbs, Nouns, and Adjectives have the Vei'lial Suffix attached.
The Adjectives are probably neuter Verbs.

(4) Verbal Suffixes in tlie laiKjuayi of lioiuma.

In the grammar of Rotuma (" Mel. Lang.." p. 406) Dr. Codring-
ton says : — " The transitive suffix ki appears in the Verb alaki
kill, from ala to die."

(5) Verbal Suffixes in Maori.

The Verbal Suffixes can be clearly seen in Maori and are found
attached to Verbs, Nouns, and so-called Adjectives. They have
never been recognised by the Maori grammarians, and Dr. Cod-
rington (" Mel. Lang.," p. 181) says that there is no suffix to the
Verb in Maori. But as will be seen from the examples appended
here, certain Verbal Suffixes have similar functions in Maori and
in the Melanesian languages, though the impression given by a
general study of the words in Maori which show the presence of a
Verbal Suffix is that they are not used with anything like the force
and power which they have in Melanesia, that, in fact, they have
ceased in the main to be " Transitive Suffixes," nor does their
addition to a word necessarily mark it as a Verb. Both Mota and
Sa'a afford examples of the addition of the Transitive Suffixes to
the Verb without thereby conveying a definite Transitive force;
Mota vura to spring forth, vuras to come forth, vuratag to spring-
forth forcibly; goro to pass over, of sound, gorot v.i. to strike, come
to the ears; tale to go round; ialLuj, v.i. to turn; qoro to throw
down something heavy, qoron to encounter anything severe. Sa'a
hure'i to gush forth, Mota vura as above.

Examples : mana a branch, manai mouth (Fiji mawa a mouth,
c.f. Motu haga to gape, liagai to open the mouth, Lau faga mouth,
Mota wana to gape, wanai, a gaping, wanara to branch, wanarai a
branch); taka to fasten a fish hook, fakai to wrap round; uku to
wash with clay, ukui to rub; horoi to wash, (Tongan holo to wash,
Samoan solo soloi towel) ; pao to strike with a hammer, paoi to
pound (c.f. Sa'a horo to kill, horo'i to hit); inoi to beg, pray
{Samoan inoino to demand, Lau ino to beseech); punui adj. close
together (Samoan punupunu a cluster of parasitical plants, Sa'a
hunu a bunch); vjhawha to lay hold of, what settled, possessing;
pu to blow, puhi to blow (Ulawa 'uhi); taka to fall off, roll, takahi
to trample; aro to face, arohi to examine; ara a path, arahi to

SiLffixes in Oceanic Languages. 311

lead. These last two examples are quite in the Melanesian style,
(c.f. Ulawa na'o to face, naohi to lead, to direct); fapa to pul-
verise, tnpahi to chop (Sa'a tajm to strike, tapali to cut off, reap);
hua to raise with a lever, huaki to open, uncover, (Sa'a hu'e to
lever hu'csi. to open, Samoan sua to grub. Tahitian huai to
uncover oven); mata eye, ?nafaki to watch, matai to seek to obtain
by artifice, (Mota mata eye, mafag to watch) ; kaha a rope, kahaki
a strap, a master, (Tongan kafa sinnet, kafakafai to bind); niahi
to vomit, (Mota lulua v.i. to vomit, luag v.t., Marquesas ua, uaki,
Malay luat to loathe); nunumi to disappear behind, (Sa'a nunu
shadoAv) ; horo, horomi to swalloiv. (Samoan folo to swallow); hau
to hew, to chop, haiimi to join, a joint; fanu to bui'v, tanumi to
fold double, to disappear behind, (Samoan tarnima'i to cover up
with, tanu to bury); koro a noose, korori adj. twisted, v. to stir
round; faro adv. a little while, farori to pass away quickly, (c.f.
Sa'a ha'atau far off, ha'atauli to be far off); hokai adj. spread out,
hokari to stretch out the legs, to move by stretching the legs,
(Florida voka to be open, Sa'a hoka to come apart, hokasi v.t. to
burst open); kopa adj. bent, kopnni to shut to, a lid, kopaki to
wrap; kapi to be covered, kapiti adj. enclosed; apiapi adj. close
together, apiti to place side by side (Samoan apiapi narrow, Sa'a
apiepi to be contiguous to, Malay apit side by side); ho to pout,
Jwai to sniff, to rub noses (Tahitian ho7ni to sniff', Mangareva
aka-hoho to lick, c.f. Sa'a nono to sniff, nono'i to kiss); po night,
poniponi adj. dim; titoni to peck (Hawaiian kiko to dot, Mar-
quesas, Tahitian tito to peck, Mota tit to strike off flakes); meatinia
the passive of mea, shows a compound Suffix made uj) of ti and n^;
rau a leaf, raupi to cover over.

Remarks. — There can be no doubt that the Verbal Suffixes appear
in Maori, since the above examples definitely prove their existence.
The use of such words as hokai, kapiti, punui, as Adjectives, may
easily find a parallel in Melanesia, Sa'a pele adv. by mischance,
pde'i adv. by mischance, pelena'ini to do by mischance, lae to go,
laehi v.t. to travel through, laelae'i adv. ere laelae'i wayside talk;
^hu to be complete, ahu'i prep, with suffixed pronoun, around;
and as will be seen below the Syllabic Suffixes are used in Sa'a to
form Participles, which may be considered as Adjectives. Melanesia
offers no parallel to the use of such a word as kahaki as a Noun
(c.f. however yapuhit , glue, in Mota, where the final t is the Verbal
Suffix), Init it is not difficult to see how its use as a Noun has come
about. Many words in Maori classed as Adjectives, e.g. apiapi, ar»

812 W. G. Iveris:

evidently Verbs (c.f. Mota vanam.eag waste, useless, Avhere ag is a
Verbal Suffix); while a word like taro a little Avhile, which is classed
as an Adverb, seems rather to be a Vei'b, also ha'atau in Sa'a which
has ]>een instanced above is rather a Verb, ha' a the Causative and
tan, verb, to be far off, and the conclusion may be drawn that the
so-called Adverbs to which the Verbal Suffixes are attached are really
Verbs (c.f. Mota, niwaninag adv. bumping up and down, nina to-
knock).

Both classes of the Sufhxes are used in Melanesia to form Parti-
ciples, or, as they may be considered, Adjectives, Sa'a ^^e/e'i (as
above), oro to stoop, uroma'i bowed together, luhe to loose, luhefa'i
loosed, inou to be broken, moufe'i only, single.

Maori seems to use more than one Suffix with the same Verb,
e.g. kopa, kopani, kopahi; mata, matai, mataki ; this may b&
paralleled by Ulawa, siki to come off, be detached, sikili to tw^ang
with the fingers, xikihi to undo, lae to go, loehi to go through, laeli
trahi to make an oi-ation; Mota sogo, sogoti, sogov; but as a rule in
^Felanesian each Verb is used with its own particular Suffix.

It will also be noticed that a common use of these Suffixes in
Maori is to convey thereby a slightly different signification to the
meaning of the Verb, e.g. fapa and tapahi, this may be paralleled
by Mota sala to boil, salag to cook with hot stones, but the common
Melanesian use of these Suffixes, viz., to make a neuter Verb
definitely transitive, etc., is not so common in Maori, though oro,
arohi is an example of it.

Our conclusion is, therefore, that with the one exception of Verbs
formed from Adjectives by the addition of the Verbal Suffixes (Sa'a
paine big, painesi to be too big for) all the various characteristic
uses of the Verbal Suffixes in Melanesia are found also in Maoris
while in addition Maori has employed the Suffixes to form Nouns.

(6) Verbal Suffixes in Samoan .

The Samoan use with regard to the Consonantal Verbal Suffixes
approximates very closely to the use of the same Suffixes in Mel-
anesia. " In Samoan the termination ta'i or sa'i adds the sense
of 'with' to the verb; 7110010' e to run, mo'eta'i to run witfi a
thing; 'a' an to swim, 'ausa'i to swim with a thing." ("Mel.
Lang.," p. 181.) But ta'i also conveys a particular transitive
force, lafi to hide oneself, lafifa'i to hide away, to conceal. In Sa'a
we notice that the Syllabic Suffix also conveys the sense of " with,"
hum to run, hurune'ini to run with a thing; olo to swim, olohi to

Sujffixes hi, Ocennic LaiH/iKu/cs. :]]:]

«wim for and get, olohaini to swim with and rarrv ('c.f. Mota fag.
^ag, vag ; Fiji caka, taka).

Examples. — muo first, niaai to bo first (Malay iiniJ(uinil<i first.
mulai to be first, also Mota anioa formerly dkxiI to l)f first);
inamafa weighty, honoured, mamaf, to be hoiioiued (c.f. " Mel.
Lang.," p. 415 : Maewo weda to be heavy, ivedei to be heavy up(jii ;
also p. 465. Sesake mairura broken, niairori to be l)i-okeH); a/a
sinnet, afaafai to bind with sinnet ; iiofo to sit, iiofoi to l)e in a
sitting posture; mawa branch, /nanai to sit astride; fnpu to make
sacred, fapui a sign of tapu, to prohibit by a tapu mark ; sapasapa/'
to take in the arms (Mota sapa/r, Sa'a \ipala); pola a plaited foco-
nut leaf, polnni to carry on a pola; fusa to be equal, tusani to
•divide equally; lavalava a loin cloth, lavasi to tie rotmd and
round; motu broken, motusi to break (Sa'a mo'u, to be broken.
mo'usi to break); pulvti to pitch, to glue (Sa'a puhi pitch, pulu' i
to pitch); mat a ey^e, mataf, to be swept away as clotids, to be open,
clear; poniponi twilight, poponi to scowl, begin to be blind (Poly-
nesian po night); inomo'e to sleep, mo'' egci i to carry over night, i.e.
to sleep with ; -s/// adv. exceedingly, xilifa" i to go beyond (Sa'a sill
to enter, sdihtl to insert); (do to cijiiceal, alofa' i to conceal;
punipuni to shut in, punita' i to stop up with anything; noga to be
quiet, 7wgafa'i to desist; tanu to bury, tanuma'i to cover up with;
nofo to sit, nofoa'i to sit and talk over news.

Verbs with the reciprocal prefix fe have si, fi, iii, a' i , fa' i, tna'i,
ta'i, na'i, va'i, as Syllabic Suffixes, and i, fi, iii, *■/, as Consonantal
Suffixes; fe'ausi to swim, fetauofi to take hold of; felaani, to go two
together; fealofani to love one another; lata, to be near, felata'i to
be near together; felamata'i to watch for one anotlier (c.f. Ulawu
he'itotori) } fetalia'i to give answer (c.f. Sa'a ala v.i. to answer,
alami to answer anyone, he' ialama' i to answer one another);
gagaiia to speak, fegaganava i to speak to one another; utti to draw
water, feutufa'i.

The Noun Suffix na may be added to tlie Verb when used with
either the Consonantal or the Syllabic Stiffix, nofo to sit, nofoa'i^
nofoa'iua a sitting; afi to do up in a bundle, afisi to carry under
the arms, afsina an armful; but in Melanesia tTie Noun Suffix is
attached only to the Consonantal Verbal Suffix. Sa'a usu to push,
iisuue'i to send, usune'lne a commandment. But if Dr. Macdonald's
example from Fate be correct, na hulutiaii nl na sunia tho plaster-
ing of the house, then the Samoan use has a perfect parallel in
Melanesia.

814 ^y. a. IveiiH:

Our conclusion is that all the various characteristic uses of th&
Verbal Suffixes in Melanesia, with the same exception noted in
Maori., viz., Verbs formed from Adjectives by the addition of the
Verbal Suffix, are found also in Samoan. In addition Ave note the
use of the Consonantal Suffix with the reciprocal fe (seen alsiO in
Sa"a), and the Consonantal Suffix forming a Noun from a Verb,
tapii). poniponi. This last use can be readily accounted for as in
Maori l)y the word thus formed being used to deseril)e both the
action and also the name of the action.

(7) Yerhal Susies in TougoH, Tahifiaii, and IJairaiinn .
Tongan,

holo to wipe, lioloi to wipe; kafa sinnet, kafakafai to wrap
sinnet round anything; huai to turn up. Iitiahiiai to uncover
(Samoan, sua to dig, etc.); buaki to vomit (Maori />ita foaming);
mafaki to spy (Oceanic niata eye); Iionii to sniff (Maori ho, honi, as
above); anuhia to spit on (Mota anus, Samoan unusa) ; nla to touch,
alaf, to feel after the hand. Mr. Ray, " Common origin of the
Oceanic peoples," gives aki as a Verbal Suffix.
Tahitian,

iapah'h to split breadfruit (Maori to pa to pulverise, tapahi
to chop; Sa'a tapa to strike, fa pal/ to cut off); ruai to vomit
(Mota lulua, luag; Maori ruaki); mat ait ai to examine (Oceanic
mata eye); homi to sniff (Maori ho, honi); horomi to swallow (Maori
hnro, horomi).
HaAvaiian,

puai to spout (Maori pua foaming); luai to vomit; huai to
open; holoi to wash; kaluii to bind, girdle (Polynesian kaha
sinnet); kiko a dot, kikokikoi irregularly; honi to smell; iniki to
pinch (Oceanic gini, 'iiii).

(8) ] crhal Sujjires in Mala//.

Minum to drink (Sa'a 'inu, 'inumi; Nguna nivnu, munugi); apif
to lie side by side (Maori apiapi; Sa'a apie.pi); apit-kan a press;
luat to loathe; amhnsi to puff out from the mouth (Mota pupus Pol.
pupuhi); m/ilamida at first, mulai to be first; susu milk, sitsui to
suckle; panas hot, panasi to heat; penoh full, pe//ohkaii to fill;
lapix a fold, lapiskan to line; tangis to Aveep {Po taxxi).

Dr. Codrington (" Mel. Lang.,'" p. 181) says that the Verbal
Suffixes aie looked for in vain in Malay, and that they are not
appai-ent in Tongan. and that he has no knowledge of their exist-

Siiffi.reti ill Ocediiic LaiKjaages. 815

ence in Taliitian and Hawaiian. However, the above examples
clearly show the presenee of those Suffixes in all the four languages.
But there can be no (l()ul)t tliat the Suffixes do not play the im-
portant part in these four languages which they play in Melanesia,
or in Samoan. *

(8) Verhol Suffices in the Solomon Island Languages.

For tlie purpose of this Paper it will not be necessary to give
instances of words show^ing the ordinary way in which the Verbal
Suffixes are used in the Solomon Island languages; a full account of
their use in Florida is given in " Melanesian Languages," and the
present Avriter has done the same for Sa'a and Ulawa and Lau in
his grammars of those languages.

No very satisfactory explanation can be given of the termination
ni in the Syllabic Suffixes in Ulaw-a, Wango, Sa'a, Lau, Florida.
Dr. Codrington (" Mel. Lang.," p. 532) speaking of its use in
Florida with the Verbal Suffixes, calls it a Preposition and refers to
the use of ni in Oba, where it is compounded with the Preposition
gi (Polynesian /./). The Florida ni occurs also as an Instrumental,
but in the Eastern Solomons in Sa'a, etc.. ni is used only as a Geni-
tive, the Instrumental being ana or a7ii. It is possible that the
Instrumental ani may be formed from nia by metathesis, and that
nia is compounded of ni prep, and a suffixed pronoun.

Lau and Wango use the Syllabic forms in an Active sense, i.e., a
Pronoun is added as an anticipatory Object, without the necessity
of adding ni to the Suffix; Lau gonifa^i v.t. to receive; gwoutaH or
gu'outa'ini to incline the body; oalana'i to distribute; fatolama'i
to command (Sa'a haafolana'vni); Wango poofa'i to beseech. In
Ulawa and Sa'a when /// is omitted after the Suffix the Verb has no
transitive force. Jcire ho kelite'i honoiamu they stand in a circle
round you; ^«> to raise, fa'ela'i v.i. to set out. start, make a be-
ginning; and when the Verb with Suffix is separated from its
Object the ni is dropped and the Possessive is used as the Object
instead of the Suffixed Pronoun; kire ke su'uhe'i niano ada they
will completely destroy them; xwanc 'o ha'apolahd'A saewasu ana
mane i'oe chast-en not thy servant in thy displeasure.

In Ulawa, Wango, Sa'a and Lau, there is an adjectival or parti-
cipal use of the Syllal)ic forms in «'/ without ni added; Sa'a
honide^i Wango Jiontira'i full of; Sa'a fekela'i, Lau tegela'i lost,
tarau continuously, straight on, taraure^i continuously. Also
ha'ideuie'i till daylight. Also in Lau the Syllabic forms without

316 W. G. Ivens:

ni are added to certain Verbs (active or neuter) without conferring
a definite transitive force on them, 'eli to dig, nia 'elio si 'a?w he
dug the ground, nia 'elifai lohoro he dug deep ; oil to )'eturn, come
back, olifa'i v.i. to return.

'In Sa'a, Ulawa, Wango, there is a separation of the SyUabic
Suffix ta'i (used with ?ii added) fi-om the Verb; Wango a nonia
heia ai ta e huraa wou i liaka ta'inia / one he asked him to thrust
out the ship from the land; Sa'a w<ii e mapipi olie ofo ta'inie kolune
vaakana whether the waters had I'cceded from tlie surface of tlie
land; Ulawa ani noto nuuwa te'inilemiu in refraining yourselves.
This Suffix ta'i thus used may be paralleled by the use of the separ-
able Suffix vag in Mota, " Mel. Lang.," p. 281.

The Noun Suffix \\a may be attached in Sa'a and Ulawa to the
Syllabic Suffix, nsuneine commandment. The Xouu Suffix na is
not attached to the Consonantal Suffix, l^it always to the Verb
itself, but where a Verb is made up of a Noun and a Verb used
with a Consonantal Suffix the Noun Suffix is added to the Verb so
formed, sae uinihi to grudge, .sy/(^ u/ia/n'we a grudging spirit.

(9) Verbal Suffi.res in Mela ne si an New Guinea.
The following examples have been collected from Mr. Ray's work,
"Expedition to Torres Straits," Vol. iii., p. 458: —

Roro.

Tlie Verb takes a Suffix na or /// when diiectly governing the
Pronoun; ita to see, ne ifa/ia'u he ses me; /la ?fa/i/o I see j/oii,
hau na itana men I see them.

Mekeo.

Mikinnle malele ip.'i-lounui-i aiii missionary teaches tlie men to
read {pa-lnno make heai;).

Molu

Haga to gape, Jiagai to open the moutli, lat/a to graze, /aqa/ii to
strike something in falling; hoi to call, hoi/i to call a person;
kanudi to spit (Samoan anu); rani to be overtaken by (hiylight (Pol.
ra day); di aild ni are not quoted as Suffixes by Mr. Ray. Noho to
stay, nohori to delay, gugu to clasp, guguha to hold tight, gugnhai
to squeeze; gege to surround, hegegcdai to go round; lao to go,
laohai to go away with; heagi to boast, heagilai to pi-aise ; vaxi to
go iK'ar, rasi/fii, to take near; ahi to take, ahilai to take with;
mataniatd new, niatatnatai to begin ; (/(Uia a lump, lieqaqanai to
stumble; dina sun, dav, liedinarai to i-onfess.

Snjffixes in Oct'dnie L<i iKjiKigcs. ol7

Keapaia aiul Hula.
Ila to speak. /f(ir/i to speak to; ao to go, aof/a/ to go witli ;
gegelciffi to surround (c.f. Motu (jef/e to surround); reaniai to l)riiig,
veamaiagi to come witli ; horoyingi to 1)6 a substitute for (c.f. Motii
boloa a substitute, hehoJo to be a substitute).

8uau.
Saha what? ;/ sahaigu wliat have vou to do with me? atai to know
about, guiaii vasnna i afaiei the chief his word he knew it.

Kiri

wina.

/ saopo he tell lies, / saojxili he deceives, / Kdopakaigu he de-
ceives me; ilili he goes to him.

Wedau.
Bawauci a bundle, fxnrni to cavi'V in a bundle; gudii door, gudui
to close a door; riwa to say, rlwei to tell; vipeuni to drop some-
thing {vi Causative pen. to drop); qa to be finished, viqai to finish;
kiala to sit, ktalei to sit on something; galo to be in soak, vigaloi
to soak something; viai to be clean, u ta viaini-u you (may) clean
me.

Tavara.

koekoeama false, koeame-hi deceive them; kuku near, lei-kukui
to make near; hanapii wise, hanapugeni to know.

Miikawa.

waba a name, wahei to name; 6o^^^, to come, hotuvi to bring;
tomatomci drinking, tomani to drink something; iiagari-si fear
them, /cepfa /v;e nagara do not fear ; wona to say, (i'o/ii to tell ;
gaigaire clean, gaireni to cleanse.

Remarks. — The above instances show the addition of the Verbal
Suffix to Verbs, Nouns, and Adjectives, but no instance is given
of the Suffix added to an Adverb. In Suau the Suffix is attached to
saha what? but as shown by Dr. Codrington ("Mel. Lang.," p.
134), this Pronoun common to the Oceanic Languages saha. sa,
sava, taha, is a Noun.

(10) Other Suffvres to Verbs.

Ta; Motu nuihuta to sleep (Sa'a maahu); Samoan faufili a cord
to fasten a bundle, faufilita to come back empty using the faufili
to beat off tlie flies; viafuta to be aroused from sleep; ' apata to clap

318 W. G. Ivens:

the wings (Sa'a apa wing); Maori kapekapeta to flutter (Sa'a
h/uhiu kape to flutter, a wagtail, c.f. Maori kapokapa, Mota lopa-
lapn to flutter).

Possibly fa in the above instances is the same as ta the adjectival
Suflix.

Sa; Sa'a loloku to be bent, lokuna v.t. to bend; qao to do,
qaona to appoint; duu to move v.i. duu7ie to move a thing up; ata
to move, atana to move a thing slightly; Motu pisili spray, pipisina
to splash (Sanioan pid to splash, Sa'a qisi v.i. to splash, qisili v.t.);
Mota tiana to be pregnant, tia belly.

Sa ; Samoan anusa to spit (Mota anu-x spittle); po night, ponisa
to be dark; ranu water, ranusa to bale water (see " Mel. Lang.," p.
181.) Mota maru to sink, subside, maruso to subside.

Va; Samoan musumusu to whisper, musiiva to whisper together.

La: Samoan ua rain, uala to be rainy with sunshine; Sa'a 'apala
to carry in the arms, 'apa' apa wing, shoulder; Mota sapan Samoan
sapasapai to carry in the arms, probably show sapa with a Verbal
Suffix. Dr. Codrington connects sapan with panel hand. Mota
ivanara branch, may show ra as a Verbal Suffix, wana to open the
mouth.

Na; Samoan to' ana to settle down, to frequent, to' a to settle;
Maori kapu to close the hand, kapuna to take up with both hands.
In these two instances the Suffix no is probably the Noun Suffix.

Rana; Maori pu a heap, piirana to heap up; hua to raise with a
lever, huarana to transplant; kapu to close the hand, kapurana to
take up by handfuls (Marquesas kapu hand). This termination
rana is probably the gerundival Suffix.

In some of the Oceanic languages a is used as a Verbal Suffix : —
Samoan tane man, tanea having to do with men; lele to fly, lelea
to be carried off by the wind; sili exceedingly, silia to let pass; lat
the westerly wind, lata to be blighted by the westerly wind; Motu
lokua to be folded (Sa'a loloku bent). This termination a is prob-
ably the same as the adjectival Suffix a (see below under Table IV.),
Niue niu coconut, niue possessing coconuts; Sa'a niuniue tasting
of coconuts. The Suffix la in Samoan uala is also probably the
same as the adjectival Suffix la, Sa'a 'iisu dog. 'usule possessing
dogs.

TABLE IL
Noun S^iffixes.

Dr. Codrington, in " Melanesian Languages," give no Table of
Noun Suffixes. The Melanesian examples in this Table have been

Sufjixei^ ill Oceanic Languages.

•m)

compiled from the various ^nammars in Dr. Codrington's book; the
Sa"a and Ulawa lists have been amplified; the Malagasy examples
are from Richardson's " Malagasy Grammar "; the Melanesian New
Guinea have been copied from " Torres Straits Expedition," Vol.
iii.

Abstract Nouns. Independent Nouns.

Nengone

(1) with n (2) without n (1) with

(a) Loyalty Islands.

- ue

(b) New Hebrides.

n
na

Anaiteuni

-

-

Nguna -

- ana

Sesake -

- na

Epi

- ena

Pate

- ana.

ena

an,

en

►Santo

- a

Araga

- ana

Oba

- ana

Maewo -

- ana,

na

■ a

(^•)

Banks' Islands.

Merlav -

- ne

- a, ia, va

Lakona -

-

- e^g

Gog

-

- <?> h

Vanua Lava

-

- a, e, ea, g, r

Mota

- a, ia, ga, ra, va

- {ta, i, s)

Motalava -

- e, r, g, V

Torres'

- i, r, ve

Islands

(2) without n

I, in, HI,

g'

'\ gi

g'

gi

- i, in, ui, ei

n, ne - ge

(d) Fiji.

(e)

Maori.

- (a) na

- (/3) Gerundives, na,

- a, ha, i

ana, kana, rana.

/ana

(f)

Samoan.

- (a) na

-

- (j3) Gerundives, na,

- a, laa, ta

ana, lana, mana

tana, sana

320

W. G. Ivens

Abstract Nouns

Independent Nouns.

uT

with

n

(2) without a

(g) Malagasy.

oT

with n (

i) without

- ancj, na

- tra, ka
(h) Malay.

- na

- n, an

(i) Tongan.

- na

- (For Gerundives see - a

- na

Sana can)

(j) Rotuma.

- na, m,

n\

(k)

Solomon Islands

Fagani

- ua

- fa

-

Wango

- na

- a, ha

- na

Ulawa

- (a) na

- ha, la, ta

ia-

- na

Sa'a

- (c) na

- a, ha, la, ta.

- na

-

- {P)la-,le-,

ta-

-

Lau

- {V)na

- a, fa, la, ta

- na

Florida

- a

- na, ni -

Bugotu

- a

- na, ni -

8avo

-

^«

(1)

Mel

anesian New Guinea.

Motu

- na

-

- na

a

Panaieti

- na

- n

Wedau

na

- ra, va

- na

i

Dobu

-

.

- na

NOTES, ETC., ON TABLE II.

" In the Melanesiau languages thei-e are two classes of VerV)al
Substantives, those Avhich may i»i' called Gerundives, which are
rather more Verl)al than Nominal, and others which are more pro-
perly Abstract Nouns. Tlie first class are such words as ' thinking,'
the second such words as 'thought.' .Mclanesian languages do not
generally appear to have both kinds of Verbal Substantives to-
gether. Polynesian languages do not appeal- to have the second
class at all." (" Mel. Lang.," p. 138.) Dr. Codiington instances

Suffi^xes in Oceanic Langiuu/es. ;32I

only Fagani and Merlav as having both classes, but Maewo will be-
seen to possess both, and three Solomon Island languages in the
Table besides Fagani have both, and Maori and Samoan have both ;
c.f. infra. Wedau also has both forms. The first class of these
Noun Suffixes, the gerundival. has // as a constant letter, in the-
second class /i does not appear.

In the Melanesian languages the form of the Gerundive is not
always the same, as the Polynesian has the termination 7iga (na).
Mate is commonly "to die," but matea in Florida is "dying."
Galea in Mota may mean either deceit or being deceived, na galeana
what deceived him. In Fiji mate without change is " to die," and
" death " as it is in Maori. But when the Maori uses heino for " to-
die," "death" in hemona dying. ("Mel. Lang.," p. 138.)

The Suffixes la, le, ta, ha, are used in Sa'a and Ulawa with the
Personal Pronoun ahvays suffixed to form Gerundives; with neuter
Verbs ni or i is always added; horo to kill, horoH to kill anyone,
horo'ilana his being killed. The sense of the Gerundive in Ulawa
and Sa'a is either Active or Passive, tohulana the chopping of it, its
being chopped; Ulawa ha'aurifaku my being saved, a ha'auritaku
my saviour. In Ulawa na with the suffixed Pronoun may be used
as a Gerundive; lae to go, laewa a going, laenana his going. With
the Maori Gerundive the action may be either Active or Passive.

In Florida Verbal Substantives are formed by suffixing a to Active
Verbs, and the sense of these, which may be called Gerundives, is
often Passive. Bosa to speak is also a Noun, and hosagu is ray
speaking; but hosaagu is my being spoken to. In Ysabel it is the
same, gotigotihi to break in pieces, na gotigotihiadia their being^
broken in pieces. {" Mel. Lang.," p. 524, 139.)

The Ulawa word wala'ana speech, needs a little explanation.
Dr. Codrington (" Mel. Lang.," p. 138) gives wala'ana as an in-
stance of ana used as a Noun Suffix, but no other such instance
occurs in Ulawa, and the Verb is wala or wala'a to speak; ha' i
wala a word, walana his word, kira ahuni wala they took counseV
together, wala odoodo to repudiate in speech, 'o si'e walawala'a
do not speak. A form walani also occurs meaning to effect a
magical charm by means of words. The second form of the Verb,
wala'a, may possibly be made up of wala, and 'a the adjectival
Suffix, and accordingly ivala'a would mean dealing in words, wordy.
This Suffix 'a is added to certain Verbs in Ulawa and Sa'a to form
Nouns; usi to barter, usVe market; kalite'i to encircle, ro kalife'i'a
double strands. With wala'ana may be compared roro'ana debt,.

322 W. G. Ivens:

which is formed from the Verb roro'a to be liable, and this again
is formed from roro to tie tightly and '« the adjectival Suffix. A
Noun walana appears in Sa'a in compounds, mu tale'i sulu walana
mere verbose repetitions.

In UlaAva and Sa'a certain words .show the Noun Sulhxes fa, ha ^
but are used only with the suffixed Pronoun or with the Possessive
-attached; hono to close, honotana against, to meet, him; walahada
tlieir word; i lado'ihaana in a straight line with; in the last
example H the Verbal Suffix has been added; paiuahaana its big-
ness. This points to ta and ha having a gerundival force in these
words. In na'nnehume a seat {naku to sit), me (nia) appears to l)e
a Noun Suffix.

In both Samoan and Maori Noun Suffixes of the second class are
found; Samoan fua fruit, fiiata crop, as well as fuana; tau to fight,
taua Avar, fauna a fighting; faida an anchor, fau to anchor;
f,ee to prop up, feela a boom; mafuta dwelling together, may show
the Suffix ta (c.f. Motu inahufa to sleep, Sa'a ino'ahu), nofo to sit.
nofoa a seat.

Maori : puaha the mouth of a river, puaJii to come forth (Samoan
pua the mouth of a fish trap) ; kareha the day after to-morrow, the
day before yesterday, may possibly be composed of kai'e and ha
(c.f. Mota risa, Florida valiha, Samoan alivu long ago, Ulawa wali
long ago, walita day after to-morrow); tatau to assault, taua war
party; ahu to heap up, ahua form, appearance (for ahu as "to
tend," " to heap up," " to be mature," c.f. Sa'a ahu to be per-
fect, ahuH to surround, protect, ahui ola a parcel); kagu to put
on, surface, garment, kahua form, appearance; Ao/m?' herd, Samoan
laju herd.

Mota appears to have other Noun Suffixes besides those given by
Dr. Codrington; lumuta moss. Sa'a luniu and lumute; anus spittle.
Motu kanudi, Samoan anu; puasa lizard, vua crocodile, Sa'a
huasa crocodile, Samoan puaa animal; kurut dog, Sa'a 'usu,
Maori kuri, Malagasy alika.

It is unnecessary to give here instances of the use of the Noun
Suffixes in Melanesia, they may all be found in " Melanesian
Languages."

Noun Suffixes in Melanesian Nezv Guinea.
Motu,
doko to finish, dokona the end; rami water, ranuna juice; hero
to wound, berona a wound.

Panaieti,
rohu to condemn, rohuna condemnation.

Su^.rfs In Oc('<iru<! La/ngiuiyrx. :\-I'.)

Wedaii,
am to eat, ainna the eating; hairai to carry in a bundle, hairana
a bundle. In Wedau na is added to tlie root of a transitive Veib,
i.e. to the Verb without the transitive ending; hahani to talk,
bahana the subject discussed. Noun endings of the second class
without n are seen in Wedau, tigura a thorn, tiguri to pick out with
a thorn; utuva a flood, ufuvi to water; iuwa fruit, uwei to bear
fruit. (" Expedition to Torres Straits," Vol. iii. p. 440.) ••

Noun Sujfixes in Malagasy.

Vono to kill, ronoana murder; ravina leaf (Mota naui, Poly-
nesian rail, Malay dau.?i;) hatsara good, hatsarana goodness;
havitra fish hook (Malay kawit, New Guinea gahu, Mota gau);
laaka aperture (Polynesian lua, rua. hole), bono to cover, bonoka
a covering.

N 01171 Su-ffixes in Malay.

Dauii a leaf (Motlav ran, Fiji drau, Maori ran); ujan rain
(Lau usa, Maori ua); ikan a fish (Pol. ika) ; kumis mustache (Mota
wunui Maori kumikumi) ; arus current (Mota arte); mataku to
fear, yanhutan fear; tidor to sleep, partidoran sleep; kata to
speak, parkataan speech ; lumiit moss (Maori lumidumu) ; laut sea
shore (Mota laii); kawit fish hook; simor ray of light (Melanesian
sitia to shine).

Remarks.— The terminations shown above in Malagasy and Malay
show definitely the connection between them and the other Oceanic
languages given in the Table, but it can hardly be said that these
two languages use the Noun Suffixes as freely as the Melanesian
languages use both classes of the Suffix, or the Polynesian the first
class.

Tongan appears to have a form in a; huhu breast, huhua milk.

The Gerundives in Maori.

The Verbal Substantives in Maori denote the taking place of
an action, the place of the action, the time of its taking place.
The action may be either Passive or Active. (" Mel. Lang.," p.
138.) However, no is suffixed in Maori to form Abstract Nouns,
just as it is in Melanesia; kawe to carry, kaiuena a burden (c.f.
Sa'a tola to carry, tolana a burden); ako to learn, akona a learner;
keokeo peaked, keokeona a peak; ra/ii big. rahina bigness (Sa'a
paine big, pianana size); koi sharp, koina point, edge; tika

824 W. G. IveuH:

straight, fikana rule, plan (Sa'a odo straight, odoodona straiglrk-
iiess), r/fe like, rifeua likeness. In the same way ana and tana
form Noun Substantives; 7ioho to sit, nohoana a seat; kawiti to
taper, kaivititana the wrist; hua to bear fruit, huhuatana excel-
lence; also imported words kinitana dominion; kawenatana gov-
ernment; kapu, to close the hand, makes both kapuna palm of the
hand, and kaptirana handful, and each of these words serves either
as a Noun or a Verb. Still it is plain that the suffixing of na
conveys even in these examples in Maori more of the idea of a
Gerundive than of an ordinary Abstract Noun.

The Gerundives in Maori are composed of the Noun Suffix na
by itself, or of the Suffix ana, either by itself or with h, /.•, //?, /•, t,
€<f)eXKV(TTLK(n', where the Consonunt in each CHse is tlie .same as
the Consonant of the Verbal Suffix. When the Passive is formed
In' adding ia to the root Verb then ana is suffixed to the root Verb
to form tlie Gerundive; ko to plant, kola planted, koana sowing
time. The Suffix ana itself does not occur as a Noun Suffix any-
where, but ana occurs frequently, and there is no radical difference
in form between ana and ana, or between na and na, since n is
only nasalized n.

It seems to be evident that the gerundival forms with the Con-
sonant ((fteXKva-TiKoi' are composed of two part.s, and since
the initial Consonant is the same as the Consonant of the Verbal
Suffix it would seem that the construction of these particular forms
of the Gerundive is either this Consonant and ana (in which case
the Consonant alone would be considered to be the real Verbal
Suffix), or the Verbal Suffix and na, the i of the Verbal Suffix
being changed to a for the sake of euphony, i.e., tana for tina,
etc. Thus in Sa'a e gives place to a before ?ia and ta for the sake
of euphony; nikf. mother, nikana his mother; hune to anchor,
hunata an anchor. If it be considered that ana is added to the
Consonant of the Verbal Suffix in order to form the Gerundive,
then it might be considered that ana itself is probably a compound
Noun Suffix, being made up of a and n«, which l>oth appear as
Noun Suffixes. Ulawa furnishes instances of the use of compound
Noun Suffixes; alida to travel by sea, alidana also alidanaha a
sea journey; kae to deceive, kaena also kaenaha deceit; raqa to
deceive, raqatana, guile.

Gerundives in Samoan. •

In Samoan na is used as a Noun Suffix forming Abstract Nouns
to a greater extent than in Maori; tuli to drive, tulina driving;

Suffixes in Oceanic LaiKjwigcs. 325

malolo to rest, /i/aloloua a lasting place (Sa'a niamalo to rest,
mamalona a rest. iiinnidloJia a resting place); fan to fight, tauna
A fight, feana'i to correspond, feaiui' iwci a )-elationship ; /wZor/'i
to command,/Jo/o<7'/nrtf a commandment j ?//?/ to make double, uliiwa
a pair ; tanu to bury, ton una a burial. The other gerundival Suffixes
are also used to foi-m Abstract Nouns ; luluu to fill the hand, luutana
a handful; (iin/ to spit. a/iufi(iua spittle; /nii to drink, itiumana
a drink ; ola to save, olaana life time, olafaiia a means of deliver-
ance; lele to fly, /e/f«. to lae driven away by wind, Meaua a party
driven off by a strong wind ; fan to anchor, faiilana a harbour.
The second class of Noun Sutlixes in Melanesia furnishes examples
of such secondary usages; la, le, f<(, ha, in Sa'a and Ulawa when
used with the suffixed Pronoun or the Possessive have a more or
less gerundival force (see above); saanau a young man, saanauheku
my youth; tono to drink, tonohana a Kalita'alu the drinking
(place) of KalitaWtln. In these two languages when it is desired
to form Abstract Nouns from Verbs to which these gerundival
endings may be added the Noun Suffix na is used and not one of
these gerundival Suffixes; thus tono to drink, fonowa drinking,
and not tonoha.

Remarks. — It may be concluded then from the Samoan use that
the gerundival ending \\a in Samoan and in Maori is the same as
the na which appears in Melanesia as a Noun Suffix. And since
in Samoan the Gerundives (with the exception of na and ana), em-
ploy the Consonant of the Verbal Suffix, whether that Suffix is
attached by itself to the Verb, or only appears with the addition
of a as forming the Passive of the Verb {takahi to trample,
takahana the trampling; huaki to open, rush on, huakana the
rushing on; naromia to be destroyed, naromana the destroying)
the conclusion may therefore be drawn that the Gerundive in
Samoan as well as in Maori is compounded of Verbal Suffix and
Noun Suffix or Suffixes, and that either the Vowel of the Verbal
Suffix is changed to a for euphonic reasons, or that with the elision
of the Vowel i of the Verbal Suffix the Gerundive is made up of
the Consonant of the Suff.x, and ana a variant of na and possibly
itself a compound of the two Noun Suffixes a and na, the two classes
of the Noun Suffix thus combining to form the special gerundival
Suffix.

Independent Nou?is.

" Independent Nouns are formed by adding the terminations
?■ or c/i, ill or ?/?, or w to the stem word — there is only one class
of words which receives this generalising termination — Nouns

13

;326 W. G. Ivens:

which signify parts of a whole, members of a l^ody ; things which
can stand in a certain relation to some inchisive whole." (" Mel.
Lang.," p. 141.) Nouns with these terminations are found in the
vocabularies of the Banks' Islands' and New Hel)rides' languages
for "beliy," "body, "bone," "child," "ear," "egg^" "fnce."

Dr. Codrington states that these terminations are not found in
the Polynesian languages, or in Fiji. Tliis statement is un-
doubtedly correct in regard to the greatei- number of the Nouns
or subdivisions of the class of Nouns which he instances, 1)ut it
will be found that a great number of the Oceanic languages which
do not otherwise show any trace of these terminations, yet have
terminations in n or iia in Nouns signifying mendjei-sliip of a
body, or relationship, e.g., father, mother, Itrother (but not in-
cluding child, husband, wife).

It is almost impossible for one accustomed to tlie practice of the
Melanesian languages to believe that the Maori word taina brother
does not really mean "his brother," and so also with iupuna an-
cestor, which means in Mota "his ancestor," but comparison with
Nengone tenene child, where tene is the stem, and with Anaiteum
netgan belly, nohun body, naklin egg, Motlav nten child, flen ^^,
shows that the final na in taina is a Noun termination, and not
the Suffixed Pronoun. In the Banks' and New Hebrides' languages
this Noun termination is dropped when the Pronoun is suffixed,
Mota natui son, nofiina his son, Nengone tenene child, tenego my
child; but since the Polynesian languages do not suffix the Pronoun
to the Noun, the na or ne of the Independent Noun form remains
constant. Ordinarily in Ulawa and Sa'a the words expressing re-
latiotiship have no particiilar termination as such, but when cer-
tain Prefixes are used to mark reciprocity of relationship or of
kinship, ma, ma, hn'i, lie'i, the Noun to which they are affixed
always has the termination na or ne; nlke wife, ro ha' i nikana
a man's wife and child ; m.u he'i malahune friends; uweli (Vocative
only) a boy's uncle, a man's nephew, (sister's child) ro ma uweline
uncle and nephew; ro n\a 'asine brothers, mu ma 'asine brethren;
I'o ma hunaonn father- and son-in-law; ro ha' i ma'amana father
and son. Thej'o .seems to be no reason to doubt that the termina-
tion na seen in these Sa'a words is identical with the na seen as a
termination of the words expressing relationship in other Oceanic
languages. In Sa'a and Ulawa all the words expressing kinship
(and the word for " friend " also), except those for " wife." " hus-
band," " father " (when in the Vocative), " child," are never used

Suffixes in Oceanic Languages.

:527

without a suffixed Pronoun, i.e., there is no way of saying "bro-
ther," "sister," "friend," etc., without saying "my brother,"
■etc. This peculiarity of speech seems to suggest that originally
certain Nouns expressing kinship or relationship had a definite
termination as such in these two languages as they have in Poly-
nesia; and the refusal of the two peoples to use these words exctj)t
with a suffixed Pronoun may mark a consciousness of the loss of
the termination.

In xMota " a brother," " the brother,'" is rendered o tasiu, in
Maori te teina, in Sa'a a ma 'asine, in Ulawa a 'ulaka'elu {ka e.lu
meaning " our "). This termination iia is seen extensively in the
Oceanic languages in words denoting relationship : — Maori tupuna
ancestor (Mot a tupui); teina younger brother (Mota tasiu);
tuakana elder brother ; Samoan teine girl ; Niue hoana friend
(Maori hoa, Mota soai); Fiji tinana, Motu sinana, Samoan tina,
Malay inana, mother; Fiji tamana father (Mota tamaim his
father), txikana grandfather; lomana heart, may be an instance
■of na as a Suffix ; suina bone certainly shows na as a Suffix (Mota
suriu, Sa'a su'isuli).

Melanesian New Guinea shoAvs i, a, na as Suffixes forming Inde-
pendent Nouns. Wedau ; natui son ; amana father. Dobu ; nimana
hand; hihma bone. Panaieti; matan eye; niman hand; maninin
face. Motu ; tamana father ; tadina brother ; kakana elder bro-
ther; turia bone (Oceanic suli); the word for "hand" in Mala-
gasy tanana seems to show na as a Suffix of this nature; c.f. also
Malay tanaii hand (Polynesian tano to touch). In Sa'a, Ulawa,
San Cristoval, Samoa, na is added to Cardinals to form Ordinals,
ni is thus used in Florada, and iu, i, in Mota, and the word so
formed is a Noun ; hence it is probable that these endings na, ni,
iu, i, are identical with the terminations of the Independent
Nouns.

TABLE III.

Passive Suffixes.

(a) Florida

(1) with n

(2) without n

(b) Bugotu
<c) Fiji -
(d) Maori -

■ na, ina, rina, tvhina

«(?)

' ^■^. . .

a, la, hia, kia, tnia, n/a,
ria, tia

(e) Samoan

- na, ina, a'ina

a, ia, fia, Iia, mia, n/a,

(f) Gilbert Is.

- kina

sia, tia

<g) Malagasy

• na, ana, ena, ina

W. G. Ivens

TABLE IV.

A djectival S^iffixes.

For the foundation of this Table see "Mel. Lang," p. 167, Torn
Straits' Expedition, Vol. III., p. 453.

(a) New Hebrides.

Sesake
Nguna
Araga
Oba
Mae wo

Lakona
Vanua Lava
M ota

Motalava -
Volow
Ureparapara

(1) with n

(2) withoiit n.

a
g<h si

(b) Banks' Islands.

n, na

a, ga, ra, sa, ta

(c) Fiji.

a, li, ta

(d) Samoa.

-

a, la, sa

(e) Tongan.

a

(f) Malagasy.

-

;/«, (

ana,

ena, ina

te)

Solomon Islands.

Ulawa

-

\i, ^ala, la, ta'a

Sa'a - - ■-

-

\i, ^a'a, 'a/a, la, k, ta'a

Lau -

-

a, laa

Fagani

-

ga

Wango

-

'a

Vaturanga

-

ha

Florida

ga ' \

Savo

-

sua

Duke of York -

ina

.

0

New Britain

ina

.

Gilbert Islands -

ina

-

Suffi^xes in Oceanic Lamjimge!^. •129

(h) Meliiiiesiaii New Guinea. (See "Torres Straits' M\pt'ditioii."
Vol. TIL, p. 454).

(1) With )(. (2) Without n.

Motn - - - ka, ga, hi, va, a

Kabadi - - - va

Wedau - - - ra

Dobu - - iia, ina

(i) Malay.
- an

NOTES. ETC.. ON TABLES IIL AND IV.

The two instances of Passives in Melanesia in the languages of
Florida and Biigotu have been referred to above under Table ii..
Noun Suffixes. Dr. Codrington states that the a in these two in-
stances being attached to the Verb conveys a sense Avhich is Passive.
It will be noticed in these two instances that the Suffix a which is
used could not be the Suffixed Pronoun since the Pronoun is added
to it, and the adding of the Pronoun proves that the Avord sn
formed is a Noun, since the Pronouns f)u, mu, na, etc., are at-
tached only to Nouns, and in consequence this a must be a Noun
Suffix. Its use then in Florida and Bugotu may be compared with
the use of the Noun Suffixes la, ta in Sa'a and Ulawa, which also
are used with a gerundival force, and we should thus conclude that
there is no real example of Passive Suffixes in Melanesia.

Dr. Codrington ("Mel. Lang.," p. 192). suggests that the
Maori Passive may have arisen from an impersonal use of the Verb
^fter the style of the following sentence in Mota; nie taiir veta o
Ima built already the hou.*ie, the house is built. There is no pas-
sive in Melanesia as such and the nearest approach to it is in such
impersonal uses of the Voib. Mr. Ray, " Common Origin of the
Oceanic Languages," consideis tliat tlie Passive in Polynesian is
built up of the Verbal Suffix and c/, and he considers this d to be
the Suffixed Pronoun, but he gives no reason why the Pronoun
should be suffixed in the third Person Singular only, nor Avhy this
special Melanesian characteristic of suffixing the Pronoun should
thus occur in Polynesia. As he says words like pmiif/a and ta\\isi<i
in Samoan have a decidedly Melanesian look, but in no Polynesian
language is the Personal Pronoun suffixed to the Verb, and this
fact alone would seem to vitiate Mr. Ray's theory as to tlie nature
of the termination a of the Polynesian Passive. Dr. Codrington
is probably correct in his theory of the Passive arising from an

mo W. G. Ivens:

impersonal use of the Verb, but he propounds no theory to account
for the endings of these Passive Suffixes, though he calls attention
to the similarity between the first part of them and the Verbal
Suffixes, and Mr. Ray's theory fails to account for the Passive
Suffixes which contain ■//.

It will be noticed in Table iv. that the adjectival SutHxes in
Malagasy are the same as the Passive Suffixes. Richardson
(" Malagasy Grammar ") says that " the place of English Adjec-
tives in ttble, ihle, is supplied in Malagasy by Passive Verbs pre-
ceded by azo, e.g., azo hanina eatable, tsy azo resena invincible."
In the Dictionary hanina appears as a Noun, but the presence of
gana, 'ani, in Oceanic languages, nxeaning "to eat," suggests
that haniiHi is made up of hajii v. and vn Suffix, and resena is an
Adjective formed from rese v. The use of the Passives in Malagasy
ua, ana. ena, ina, is plain enough, but while Dr. Codrington says
that there is no sign of special forms in Malagasy for adjectival
endings Richardson in his " Grammar " in a Table of Adjectives
says that they are " formed from the root of the word with the
affix ina, ena, ana,'' and he instances nofo flesh, nofosana fleshy.
To this may be added vorif froth, vortna. frothy; vaoka whiskers,
caohina whiskered; Komotra beard, soniorina bearded; olitra a
worm, olerina wormy; ozatra muscle, ozatina muscular; volo hair,
volohui hairy. Many of the so-called Adjectives in Malagasy are
evidently Neuter Verbs, while others are Participles, e.g. fotsiona
whitened (fotsy white), is evidently a Participle. From the above
example the connection seems established between the Passive and
the adjectival (or participial) terminations in Malagasy.

Polynesia has no adjectival endings of the first class containing
//, but Micronesia has Gilbert Islands mama moonlight, mamaina
white (Mota vida (1) moon, (2) white), and Melanesia shows four;
Mofca 9vnivana wide, oba tvaivn open sea (Sa'a niatawa
open sea, Malag, fafana, M.L. p. 189, c.f. Malag. inasina
salt, Figi inasima) ; Mota malea tasteless, malean Ijrackish ,
Duke of York ina; ruma house, rumaina containing houses; Dobu
va: werahana witch, werahaimia witch-likv ; ha ran sorcerer,
haraharauna sorcerer-like; hila to rot, hilahilina. rotten; muta
to mould, mutamutana mouldy; 'edagi to laugh, ' eda' cdagiva hav-
ing the quality of laughter; siwa to pour out. Kiwaaiirana poured
out; 'efinie to send, 'etu'etunena the sent. New Bi-itain ina;
IcdLau lime, kahanina white. Malay shows an used in the same
way; pileh to choose, pilehhan v.t. pilrhan chosen; hantah to con-

Suffixes in Oceanic Languages. 331

tradict, hantahan quarrelsome; durian a thorny fruit, duri a
tliorii, ra)iihutan a liairy fruit, ramhut hair, probably shown an as
an adjectival ending. In Tagalog an appears as an adjectival
Suffix e(][uivalent to -ahlc in English, lapii idea of approaching,
di imdapitan unapproachable.

From the evidence of the endings in Malagasy and from the use
of an in Malay and tia in Melanesia as adjectival endings it may
safely be concluded that the termination na of the Passive Suffixes
in Polynesia is identiral with the termination na of the adjectival
Suffixes seen above.

The use of the adjectival Suffix a in Samoan and Melanesian
justifies the conclusion that the Passive Suffix a is the same as the
adjectival Suffix a. Samoan shows a and sa as adjectival Suffixes;
eleelt dii-t, eleelea dirty; naoa also naosa stony; Tongan maka
stone, makaia stony; Motu lokua folded (Sa'a loloku to be bent).
The Suffix a is used with an adjectival force in the following
Samoan words: Tane man. tanea having to do with men; full of
men; lele to fly, lelea, to be carried off by the wind; lai the westerly
wind, laia to be bliglited by £lie Avesterly wind. In Sa'a and Ulawa
the adjectival Suffix when added to Verbs conveys a sense which
might really be said to be Passive; rere to sharpen by rubbing,
rere'a sharpened, clean; roro to be tight, to incur a debt, roro'a
to be at fault, to have incurred a debt; ere to coil, ereere'a also
ereerea'ile (a'i Verbal Suffix) coiled. The explanation of the Ulawa
word irala'awa, walaa to speak (see above, under Noun Suffixes)
may possi51y be found in the addition of V/, the adjectival Suffix
to the Verb wala.

There remains yet the provision of a theory to account for the
initial portion of the Passive Suffixes. //*, mi, etc., of the second
class, and /, //. whi. fi' i , of the first class. It will be noticed that
the Consonant and first Vowel of the Passive Suffixes of the second
class, and the initial vowel or Consonant with Vowel (exclud-
ing the foriii nn) of the first class are the same as the initial Con-
sonants and Vowels of the Verbal Suffixes, and since the use of
Passives in the Polynesian languages has very probably arisen, as
Dr. (,'odrington suggests, from an impersonal use of the Verb as
seen in Melanesia, Ave seem to be justified in concluding that the
Passive Suffixes are made up of the Verbal Suffixes with the addi-
tion of the adjectival Suffixes conveying a participial force.

The use of the Transitive Suffixes in the formation of the Pas-
sive Suffixes would seem to be accounted for bv what Mr. Ray says

332 W. G. Ivens : Suffi.xes in Oceanic Languages.

in "Common Origin of the Oceanic Languages," "The identity
of passive and transitive is strengthened by the fact that the Poly-
nesian passive i§ used when the action is emphatic rather than the
agent, and hence is more frequently used in the case of transitive
A'erbs than the active form." This laying stress upon the action
is seen in the Samoan Passive Suffix n'hia which is said to denote
intensity of action; tuli to drive, tidiaina to drive on; telea'i to
run quickl3^ telea'ina to hurry on. The same thing appears in
the Gilbert Islands where the Passive Sufhx kina denotes " a fre-
quentative use"; matai to look at covetously, mafalakitia to look
at with longing for; mutiahina to regard.

It having been shown that Verbal Suffixes occur in Polynesian
languages there is ,no difficulty in drawing the conclusion that since
the Verbal Suffix definitely strengthens the action of the Verb (and
having regard to the nature of the Passive as explained above by
Mr. Ray), the /(/, mi, etc., and the /, r/, v/7^/, «'/, of the Passive
endings are identical with the Verbal Suffixes, and that the n,
na, of the endings conveys the passive, i.e., tlie adjectival, or par-
ticipial, force.

No rule can be given as to whether the Suffixes with /; are to be
used for the formation of the Passive in any particular case, or
those without n.

TJie Passive in Fijian.

Dr. Hazelwood says that the Passive in Fijian is formed by re-
placing the final a of the Verbal Suffix by /, or by adding i to the
verb when no Ver1)al Suffix is ordinai'ily used, Init tliis statement
is questioned by Dr. Codrington in " Mel. Lang.," p. 191, on the
authority of Dr. Fison, who says tliat " no Fijian would use Hazel-
wood's example." If Dr. Hazelwood's examples of words used
showing a passive meaning, are coi-rcct. tlicn tliev would seem to
fall into line witli such words in Maori as hokai spread out; punui
close together; irhai settled. These liave been shown above (see
Verbal Suffixes in Maoi'i) to l)e Participles formed l)y the addition
of Verbal Suffixes.

[Proc. lioY. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Part \I., 1914].

Akt. ^XW.—Nofe.^ on the s()-(;aUed Obsidian ffoni Geelong and
fr<n)i Taradale, and. on A'iistndites.

By Profkssok K.RNE.ST W. SKEAT8, D.Sc, A.R.C.S., F.G.S.
L^ead lOtli December, 1911].

Introduction,

In the Records of the Geological Survey of Victoria, Vol. III.,
Part 3, 19U. pp. 322-326, recently published, Mr. E. J. Dunn.
F.G.S. , in a paper entitled " Further notes on Australites," quotes
some old analyses of Mr. Cosmo Newbery of two specimens of
"obsidian'' from the Geelong district, of a "basalt'' from neai-
Kyneton, and of an australite from the Wimmera Plains. In
addition a recent analysis of a so-called obsidian from Taradale
is quoted, and the claim is made in the paper that these analyses
show that acidic volcanic glass, similar in composition to that of
australites exists in Victoria associated with the newer volcanic
rocks.

Mr. Dunn's long and wide experience as a field geologist ensures
that any paper of his dealing witli problems of field geology will
command confidence and respect fi'om all geologists. He has had,
however, no special experience in chemical and jDetrological ques-
tions, and the problems raised in his recent paper and on austral-
ites generally are to a large extent chemical and petrological. In
consequence of this I feel that he has misunderstood tlie evidence
and come to erroneous conclusions.

The object of this communication is to criticise some of tlie
evidence stated in Mr. Dunn's paper and to show that the older
rock analyses of the Geological Survey of Victoria, in common with
many old rock analyses, arc quite unreliable, tliat tlie rocks from
Geelong, described as obsidian, are ically tacliylytv. that the
rock from Taradale is not obsidian, l)ut ii vok-anic glass of peculiar
composition and belonging to the Intei'inediate division, that no
rock of the nature of obsidian is known to occur among the newer
Volcanic rocks of Victoria, and that in consequence no support is
lent to the hypothesis of the volcanic oiigin of australites by an
appeal to the chemical composition of the newer volcanic rocks of
this State.

334 Ernest W. Skeats

The nature of obsidian.

During the last century the significance of many of the terms
used by the older mineralogists and geologists has by a process of
evolution undergone change and revision. The change has usually
been from a vague and general definition to one of a more precise
and limited character. The progressive changes in the meaning
attached to the word obsidian illustrate this process.

A century ago, and even down to 60 or 70 years ago, the black
compact glass called obsidian was believed to be definite in com-
position and to constitute a true mineral species.

Later it was shown to be a volcanic glass of variable composition,
and then any volcanic glass was spoken of as obsidian. At a later
date the glassy form of basalt was distinguished by the name of
tachylyte, while the name of obsidian was reserved for volcanic
glasses of acid to intermediate composition.

In recent years intermediate volcanic glasses have been distin-
guished either as trachyte-glass and andesite-glass, or as trachytic-
obsidian and andesitic-obsidian. Avhile the term obsidian, without
qualification, has been by petrologists restricted to the acid volcanic
glasses corresponding in chemical composition to the rhyolites and
acid granites.

It is this modern definition as an acid volcanic glass which alone
should be applied to obsidian, and it is in this sense that I, in
common with other petrologists, understand the term.

The present-day definition implies an acid volcanic glass of about
the following composition : —

SiO.,
AI..O.,

I

66-
13-

-80%

-16%

Fe,0,
FeO

}

2 .

-3%

CaO
MgO

{
1

1

-3%

K,()
Na./)

\
1

6

-8%

Most obsidians have a silica percentage of over 70, and it should
be noted not only that the iron oxides seldom exceed 3 per cent.,
but that the alkalies are commonly in notable excess over the alka-
line earths.

NoteK o)i Obsididn and Anntrdlitcti. 385

The so called obsidians from Geelong.

In the Notes on the Physical Geography, Geology and Mineralogy
of Victoria, by A. H. Selwyn and G. H. F. Ulrich, published in. the
Intercolonial Exhibition Essays, 1866, p. 65, obsidian is stated
to occur in a basalt quarry near Geelong in patches and irregular
veins of an inch or more in thickness. Two analyses by Mr. Cosmo'
Newbery are quoted from this locality. The same statements and
analyses are quoted in Selwyn's Descriptive Catalogue of the rock
specimens and minerals in the National Museum, collected by the
Geological Survey of Victoria, 1868, p. 80. The specimens are
labelled Specimen 24 and 24a.

These are two of the analyses quoted by Mr. Dunn, and are a&
follow : —

Geelong Specimen.

Geelong Specii

Black to bi

I'own. Sp.

Gr. 2.41.

Bluish

g-rey. Sp. G

No. 24.

No. 24 A.

SiO.,

-

72.23

68.45

AlA

-

16.43

5.38

Fe.30,,

-

-

2.2s

7.21

CaO

-

3.17

-

8.11

MgO

-

2.12

-

1.03

MnO,

-

—

-

-

0.50

TiO.,

-

—

.

0.30

Na,0 ,
K.p )

4.65

-

7.36

Loss ijy

ignition

0.13

-

-

—

101.01 98.34

To anyone accustomed to rock analyses the above figures at once
suggest inaccuracy, not only by the summation, but still more by
the curious and unusual proportions of some of the oxides.

Mr. Dunn has overlooked the fact that as long ago as 1898 Mr.
Walcotti in his paper on Obsidianites had examined these speci-
mens, had called attention to the discrepancy between the published
analyses and the appearances of the specimens and had detached
a chip from specimen 24 and by chemical analysis obtained only
53.2 per cent, of silica. He pointed out that the appearance and
silica percentage pointed to the mate'-ial being tachylyte and not
obsidian.

1 Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xi. (N.S.), 1898, p. 32.

336 Ernest W. Skeats :

By the courtesy of Professor Spencer I was enabled to make an
examination of the two specimens, Nos. 24 and 24a. There are
two specimens of No. 24. The smaller is partly scoriaceous, partly
dense, and is a dark grey-green in colour.

The larger specimen is similar to the smaller, but shows a
sporadic development of spherical scoriaceous areas constituting
pseudo-spherulites. The rest of the material is a dense glass.

No. 24a is dense and mostly dark blue in colour. Some black
spherulitic areas occur with cracks, filled with ])i-own limonite.

Both 24 and 24a have all the appearances characteristic of tachy-
lyte, as Mi-. Walcott has previously described. I determined the
specific gravity of the two pieces of No. 24 by Walker's balance.
The small piece gave a value of 2.36.

The specific gravity is, of course, quite unreliable, as the speci-
men is very vesicular. The true specific gravity would be much
higher.

The larger piece of 24 gave a value of 2.50.

This specimen is also vesicular, so the result is also too low. A
small chip from the larger specimen of No. 24 Avas fairly compact,
but contained some vesicles. By the Joly's spring l)alance the
specific gravity of the chip was determined at 2.60.

We may conclude that the true specific gravity exceeds this latter
figure. The glass must therefore be basic in composition, i.e., the
specimen is tachylyte. This is in agreement with Mr. Walcott's
silica deteiinination of 5'3.2 %

Specimen No. 24a (" Blue obsidian ") is larger and quite com-
pact. By Walker's balance the specific gravity is 2.74. This also
indicates clearly that the specimen is tachylyte. I am quite at a
loss to explain how Mr. Cosmo Newbery could have obtained the
results quoted for the chemical analysis of these specimens or the
figures for their specific gravities (No. 24 = 2.41, No. 24a = 2.36).
It is clear, however, from Mr. Walcott's Avork and my own deter-
minations of specific gravity that ])oth specimens are tacliylyte and
not obsidian, as described.

Further, it is uiif<u-tunately cleai- tlint [\w oldor clu'itiical analyses
of rocks, etc., published by the Cieological Survey of Victoi-ia, must
be regarded as quite untrustworthy.

This criticism must include in tliis ((.nncrtion not only the an-
alysis of the " obsidian " from Geelong. but also tlie analysis of
Specimen No. 21, an australite from Horsham, in which less than
5 per cent, of alumina is recorded, and over 10 per cent, of

Xotes on Obsidian (iiid Auslralites. 337

alkalies, and also the " basalt " from the Coliljaii Kivtr, near
Kjneton, in which 61.96 % of silica, 10.43 % of iron, and only
2.10 % of alkalies are recordeil. Tliese are published in the essay
cited above, and ai-e quoted without coiuuient by Mr. Dunn. They
must be regarded as quite unreliable.

The Taradale "obsidian."

Associated with pebbles of black basalt along the course of the
Coliban River from the Upper Coliban Reservoir to Taradale, Mr.
Dunn found and has describedi well-rounded pebbles of what he calls
black obsidian. Mr. Dunn first found these pebbles at Taradale.
He quotes a first-class analysis made of this material by Mr. J. C.
Watson, of the Geological Survey Laboratory, and for comparison
the analysis by Mr. J. C. Mingaye, of N.S. Wales Geol. Labora-
tory, of a remarkable australite from Uralla, in N.S. Wales.

The analyses are as follow, with another for comparison : —

(1) Taradale (2) Uralla (8) Diorite

Obsidian. Australite. Porphyry.

SiO, 63.67 64.68 62 18

AlA 15.83 16.80 15.77

Fe,A 1-39 6.57 1.83

FeO 4.06 1.01 2 44

MgO 2.15 2.50 3.55

CaO 3.88 3.88 4.13

Na^O 3.57 tr. 3.92

K2O 3.69 4.01 3.91

H,0+ 0.02 — 0.70

H^O- 0.15 — 0.30

TiOa 1.27 — 0.55

PA 0.02 — 0.32

MnO 0.43 — BaO 0.43

NiO and CoO 0.01 — —

Total =100.14 99.45 100.23

Sp. Gr. = 2.569

3. Diorite Porphyry, Steam Boat, Little Belt Mt., Montana. Analyst,
W. F. Hillebrand. Desci-ibed by L. V. Pirrson. Recorded in Chemical
Analyses of Igneous Rocks by Washington, 1903, p. 222, United States
Geol. Survey.

The Taradale rock is a remarkable one, and Mr. Dunn has done
a distinct service to Victorian petrology in drawing attention to it,
since it appears to be a type hitherto unrecognised among the recent

1. Op. cit.

mS Ernest W. Hkeat.^ :

volcanic rocks of Victoria. Until it has been found " in situ," and
its relation to the basaltic rocks of the district has been determined
it would be premature to give a detailed discussion of its characters.

A glance at the analysis, however, shows at once that it is not
■obsidian, as the relatively low silica percentage and the six per cent,
of alkaline earths preclude this possibility. On the other hand it is
clearly not a basalt in view of the high silica percentage, and the
fact that the total alkalies exceed 7 per cent.

Through Mr. Herman, Director of tlic (Geological Survey of
Victoria, I obtained a small fragment of the material, from which
the analysis was made, and had two rock sections made. The rock
is clearly a volcanic glass and contains besides brown glass, globu-
lites, trichites and scattered phenocrysts of olivine, augite and
plagioclase felspar.

The minerals present show affinities with the basalts, but the
large amount of glass is evidently high in silica and the alkalies.

It has long been known that in a molten basic magma in which
crystals are floating the composition of the molten ground mass is
generally more acid than that of the phenocrysts or of the whole
rock. In Teall's British Petrography, pp. .399-401, analyses by
Lagorio are quoted which show this effect, which is especially
marked in rocks of intermediate composition and less marked in
basic rocks. It is interesting to note that the glass of such rocks is
richer in silica and in the alkalies than is the parent rock. It is
this richness in silica and the alkalies which makes the Taradale
rock interesting, and suggests that it may represent the glass from
a basaltic magma from which the bulk of the phenocrysts are want-
ing.

The closest approach to the composition of the Taradale rock i.s
an analysis of a diorite-porphyry from Montana, quoted above.

The norms of the Taradale rock and of the Montana loek. and
of the Uralla australite are as follow : —

Taradale

Diorite

Uralla

Rock.

Porphyry.

Australite.

Quartz

15.66

11.2

37.2

Orthoclase

21.68

22.8

23.9

Albite

30.39

33.0

Anorthite

16.12

13.9

19.2

Diopside

2.51

5.3

Coi

•undum

I 5.4

Hypersthene

9.06

8.1

6.2

Magnetite

2.09

2.6

3.9

Ilnienite

2.43

1.1

Hematite

3.8

Notes on Obsidian and Avstralites. 83P

In the American classification ])oth rocks belong to —
Class 2. Dosalane.
Oi-der 4. Dofelic.
Rang 2. Domalkalic.
Sug-Rang 3. Sodipotassic.
Their inagmatic name is Adamellose.

This comparison shows that in chemical composition the Taradale
rock belongs to the basic end of the intermediate class, while the
mineral phenocrysts and apjiarently its field occurrence suggest a
genetic relationship with the basalts. It is quite clear that rlie
rock is not obsidian.

This analysis of the evidence of the so-called obsidian from
Geelong and from Taradale shows that Mr. Dunn's claim that
acidic volcanic glass, similar in composition to that of australites,
exists in Victoria associated with the newer volcanic rocks, is
quite unwarranted by the evidence so far available.

The chemical characters of austral ites.

The literature ou australites, obsidianites, or obsidian buttons as
they wei-e formerly called, is now voluminous. The best papers
describing the physical characters of these bodies are Mr. Walcott'si
and Mr. Dunn's. 2

The illustrations in Mr. Dunn's paper are particularh" valuable.
From the point of view of origin and chemical relationships the
most important papers are by Dr. Summers^ and Dr. Suess."* Dr.
Summers has given the most complete discussion of their origin from
a chemical standpoint, and has given a fairly complete bibliography
of the literature, which it is unnecessary for me to repeat.

Among the hypotheses as to the origin of australites are the
following : —

1. That they are artificial bodies.

2. That they have been formed by lightning discharge during

dust storms.

3. That they are of volcanic origin.

4. That they are of meteor itic origin.

For the first two hypotheses no serious evidence or arguments
have been advanced.

1. Walcott. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xL, (ii.s.), 1898.

2. Dunn. Records CJeol. Surv. Victoria, vol. ii., pt. iv., IWS. Bulletin Geol. Surv. Vict.,
No. 27, 1912.

3. Summers. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. xxi. (n.s.), pt. ii., 1909: Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sc,
Melb., 1913.

4. Suess. Jahr. d. k.k. Geol Leichaust. Vienna, vol. 50, 1900, p. 194.

840 Ervest W. Cheats:

The volcanic hypothesis was once commonly held until the ex-
amination of recent volcanic rocks in Austialasia and the absence
of similar forms from any known active volcanoes made the
explanation of their composition and distribution difficult.

Dr. Summers has clearly pointed out that though these bodies
have been called obsidianites, the material is not obsidian, and
differs from it in certain notable chemical characters, especially
the low alkali percentage, and the relatively higli percentage of the
alkaline earths, the latter being normally in excess of the former^
whereas the reverse relation is true of obsidian.

Comparison of the Taradale so-called obsidian with
the Uralla austr-allte.

Mr. Dunn has made a comparison of the chemical composition
of the Taradale rock with that of the Uralla australite, and comes
to the conclusion that the two rocks are practically identical and
both are obsidian. I have shown that the Taradale rock is not
obsidian, neither for that matter is the Uralla australite. Neither
are the tw^o rocks identical. It is true that the percentages of silica
alumina and alkaline earths are fairly comparable, but the percent-
ages of soda and of oxide of iron, especially ferric oxide, are widely
different.

Two ways exist of comparing analyses, each of which is more
illuminating than a simple comparison of oxides. The one method
is by a comparison of the norms determined on the American
classification. These are shown above (p. 338), and show wide
differences.

The other method is by the drawing and examination of " varia-
tion curves,'' as utilised by Dr. Summers in his recent paper. l By
this method variations of composition within the limits of a rock
species can be shown to lie along a curve, and not only so, but
where a number of different rocks in a district have a genetic
relationship with one another this is brought out clearly b}^ the fact
that all the related types conform to the curves. On the other
hand if two or more rocks are not so related this difference is
indicated by a lack of conformity between the luives representing
the different rocks.

I have made such a comparison of " variation curves " between
the curves of the Uralla australite and that of the Taradale roc';

1. Op. cit.

Notes on Ohsidid/)! and Auslialites. 341

The Uralla australite while quite extreme in iheinical composition
is shoAvn by Dr. Summers to lie on a curve containing most of the
australites which have been analysed. In the case of the Taradale
rock the points for ferrous oxide, soda and total alkalies lie a long
way outside the main curve of most of the australites.

The comparison of the two types by both methods, therefore, in-
dicates their essential dissimilarity and the dissimilarity between
the Taradale rock and australites in general.

Incidentally it may be noted that Mr. Dunn's comparison of the
Taradale rock is not with Victorian australites, as one would
expect, but with a New South Wales australite of quite extreme
composition. This is curious since Mr. Dunn's claim is to establish
a connection between australites and Victorian volcanic rocks. Of
course a comparison with analyses of Victorian australites would
have at once shown an almost complete dissimilarity of composition.

The complete failure up to the present of all attempts to locate
any newer volcanic rocks in Victoria, or even in Australasia, which
are similar in chemical composition to the australites, is a for-
midable difficulty in the way of the acceptance of a volcanic origin
for these bodies. With the large and rapid increase of our know-
ledge of the newer volcanic rocks of Australasia, made in recent
years, the probability of finding rocks of such peculiar composition
becomes less and less, and the argument, though based on negative
evidence, that the australites are not of volcanic origin has been
proportionately strengthened.

Even if. a volcanic rock of similar composition to that of the aus-
tralites were found in Australia, the difficulties of the distribution
of these bodies, in many cases hundreds of miles from any volcanic
rocks, remains as has been pointed out by Dr. Summers. The
shapes of these bodies, and especially the smooth nature of the
flange, appear to me to negative Mr. Dunn's ingenious hypothesis
that they represent the blebs of volcanic bubbles, a hypothesis put
forward by Mr. Dunn to explain not only their form, but also
their distribution.

It is the general failure of the volcanic hypothesis rather than
positive evidence in favour of an extra-terrestrial origin which
leads most modern writers on this subject to regard the meteoritic
hypothesis of the origin of australites as the most probable one in
view of the present state of our knowledge on the subject.

[Pboc. Eoy. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Part II., 1914].

Art. XXI II. — On Bitter Pit and Sensitivity of Apples to
liaison .

By ALFRED J. KWAHT, l).8c., Ph.D.

(Professor of Botany and Plant fhysiolog-y in the Melbourne University).

[4th Papkk].
[Read tlitli Noveuil)er, IDUJ.

In 1913 Rothera and Greenwood made a direct attempt to test
the poisoning theory of Bitter Pit, on the line that if the non-
solution of the starch grains usually shown in Bitter Pit tissue is
due to the action of the poison, a diastase solution after contact
with Bitter Pit tissue should have its diastatic activit}- retarded.
They stated, however, that witli malt diastase and Taka diastase an
accelerating action was shown. In the Proceedings of the Royal
Society of Victoria, Vol. 26, p. 233, I showed, however, that they
had overlooked the influence of the presence of tannic acid, and
that even a short contact of 10 c.c. of 1 % Taka diastase
with 20 grams of pounded apple pulp distinctly retarded the
diastatic activity of the filtered extract. It is well known that
tannic acid retards diastatic action, and this was supposed to be due
to a direct action on the diastase. I showed, however, that tannic
acid, even when dilute, precipitates starch from a watery solution,
and thence concluded that the action was rather on the starch than
■on the diastase. This is borne out by the fact that the precipitating
action is less pronounced at high temperatures, and that under
these circumstances the retarding action of the tannic acid is also
relatively less pronounced.

In replying to my criticism, Rothera and Breidahl reaflirni the
existence of an accelerating action. This might be obtained under
the following conditions : — (1) If a resistant and very active diastase
such as Taka diastase is used in relatively large amount. (2) If the
tests are made at high temperatures. (3) If dry bitter pit pulp in
Avhich the tannic acid has been oxidised is compaied with fresh pulp
rich in tannic acid.

I found that using equal volumes of 1 % taka diastase or malt
diastase, of 1 % starch solution, and of tannic acid, the latter
retarded the hydrolysis of starch down to concentrations of 0.005 to

Bitter Pit. 343

0.001 % at 28° and 35° C. With larger amounts of tannic acid an
apparent acceleration may be shown, but this is simply due to the
tannic acid condensing and precipitating the starch, so that the
liquid above gives yellow with iodine. If the whole of the j-emain-
ing starch is precipitated with excess of tannic acid, filtered, dried
and weighed, the control always contains less starch than the tube
with tannic acid. To get the full retarding action, the diastase
extract must contain no proteids capable of combining with and
removing the tannic acid, and for this reason filtered malt diastase
is more sensitive to the presence of tannic acid than unfiltered malt
diastase. When the diastase extract is free from proteids capable
of removing tannic acid, the retarding action is probably entirely
due to the action of the tannic acid on the starch and not to an
action on the diastase. In addition, I was able to show that dilu-
tions of metallic poisons unable to destroy either oxidase or diastase
were still poisonous to the living protoplasm of the apple and potato
when applied externally. It is, in fact, a fairly general rule that
enzymes are a little more resistant to dry and moist heat and to
poisons than the protoplasm of the cells containing them, and hence
the diastase method will only detect a poison when present in
relatively large amount and in soluble form, and even then only
when nothing else which affects diastatic action is present in the
tissue.

At the Sejitember meeting of the Royal Society of Victoria.
Rothera, together with Miss Kincaid and Miss Jackson, advanced
a criticism of my work on the sensitivity of apples to poison. They
stated that the poisoning effects obtained by me were not due to the
poisons used at all, but to the action of the distilled water to which
the apple pulp was exposed at the points where the cuticle had been
removed. They based this conclusion on the following statements :
— (1) Prepared apples floated on distilled water developed brown
pits beneath the points from which the "cuticle" had been re-
moved. (2) In isosmotic (isotonic) solutions of sodium chloride
(2.6 % and upwards) to which poisonous solutions were added, no
brown pits developed. (3) Peeled apple pulp floated on distilled
water slowly turns brown, but remains colourless when floated in
apple sap. They conclude, therefore, that in (2) and (3) the pulp
cells are under normal osmotic conditions, and the pulp cells remain
living, and that in (1) they are under abnormal osmotic conditions
and therefore die. As a matter of fact the reverse is the case. No
plant cell provided with a cell-wall can grow in a medium isosmotic

844 Alfred J. Ewavt:

with the cell-sup. The essential feature of a typical plant cell as
compared with an animal cell is that it avoids isosmotic condi-
tions, and spends its whole life not quite in distilled water, but in a
very dilute solution containing usually not more than one gram of
dissolved solids in 1 to 2000 c.c. of water. This water saturates
the cell-wall, and the strong solution inside the cell presses the
semi-permeable protoplasm against the cell-wall, and stretches the
latter until its distension balances the surplus osmotic energy
of the cell sap Avhen a condition of the hydrostatic equilibrium is
reached. If the cell is now placed in an isosmotic solution of an
impermeable salt, the cell wall is no longer stretched, no growth is
possible, and the cell is in an entirely abnormal condition.

Scarlet Nonpareil apples of approximately the same shape and
size were selected, only varying a few grams from 800 grams weight.
After removing the cuticle from 15 points in areas of as nearly
as possible 1 mm. diameter, the apples were weighed and floated in
water and 2.5 salt solution for 1 week. The first apple gained 0.6
gram per cent, in weight, the second 0.057 grams. In a second
experiment the calyx and stalk w^ere covered with paraffin. In
distilled water the apple absorbed 0.45 c.c. of water per 100 grams,
in the salt solution it lost 0.03 c.c. In 0.5 % and 1.5 % solutions
of sodum chloride distinct gains of w'eight were shown, but always
less in the 1.5 % as compared with the 0.5 % solution, and in the
latter as compared with distilled water, provided that the skin of
the apples was without injury or crack so that water could enter
only at the prepared points.

The amount of absorption will depend largely upon whether
the osmotic pressure of the j^ulp cells is or is not fully satisfied in
the apple before it is immersed in water. Hence it is important to
use apples fresh from cool storage, in which the loss by transpira-
tion has been slight. In the tests with very dilute poisonous solu-
tions, a little of the solution is drawn into the apple at special
points where the poisonous action is localised, in addition to the
poison reaching the surface by diffusion. In one experiment with
1 per 100,000 copper sulphate, 0.4 gram of the solution was
absorbed and 2.4 grams of tissue were poisoned, so that to poison
1 gram of the pulp cells required at least one millionth of a gram
of anhydrous copper sulphate.

Although prepared apples soaked in 1.5 % and 0.5 % salt solu-
tions absorb appreciable quantities of the solution, the prepared
spots show at first sight no signs of poisoning and remain colourless

B'iftcr Pit 845

or nearly so. instead of turning brown. If fresli apple pulp is
pounded up with 0.5 to 2.5 % solutions of sodium chloride, it does
not turn brown, although the cells are completely killed. The pulp
^ivee even after some hours a faint blue with guiacuiii. a strong
one with guiacum and hydrogen peroxide, and a fairly i-apid
reaction with ursol tartrate. Salt, therefore, prevents the oxida-
tion of tannic acid by apple oxidase without destroying the latter.
and it is a sensitiser to the oxidase action on guiacum, which
normally only turns l)lue with guiacixm in the i^resence of hydrogen
peroxide. I have already given specific instances of many similar
specific " antioxidase " and "sensitiser" reactions. ;ind have
shown that the presence of salt affects various of the colour reac-
tions of tannic acid, including its reaction with ferric chloride.

Owing to the action of salt in preventing broAvning it is difficult
to determine its poisonous action. So far as can be judged by
microscopic examination of the cells beneath the prepared spots
where the salt solution is absorbed, it appears to belong to the
elass of almost non-poisonous salts as compared with mercury and
copper salts, and to be less poisonous than potassium salts. With
strong solutions osmotic injury is caused, but this is mainly con-
fined to the surfaces of the prepared spots.

In regard to the statement that browni pits developed in apples
floated on distilled Avater beneath the prepared spots from which
the cuticle had been removed, I was fortunately able to examine
subsequently the apples in question and to see that not only the
cuticle but also the epidermis and hypodermis had lieen removed
right doAvn to the pulp tissue. The importance of not removing
these layers is that they form continuous layers of cells without air
spaces (except at the lenticels), and hence prevent the invasion of
micro-organisms, which takes place very rapidly in water, particu-
larly if any of the pulp cells have been injured or cut, and is soon
followed by an invasion of fungal hyphae.

The browning of peeled pulp floated in distilled water is usually
due to the action of micro-organisms. They can l)e seen in a few
hours, and if the water is previously sterilised, all ])ossible .anti-
septic precautions taken and the peeling done witli a sliarp razoi-,
the browning of the pulp is very slow. Peeled pulp will remain
fresh and living under kerosene for as long as 2 to 3 weeks, show-
ing that the death of the pulp is not due to asphyxiation by diow ii-
ing. In fact, apples remain living for some Aveeks in an atmo-
sphere of nitrogen or hydrogen.

:U6 Alfred J. Eivart :

When imiuersed in its own sap living pulp usually remains un-
browned for some time if the sap has been previously sterilised by
boiling. The soluble matters in this sap are impermeable to the
living protoplasm, just as they are when inside the cell. No pene-
tration therefore takes place, .and the tannic and other acids of the
sap prevent or retard the development of bacteria. Such pulp is,
however, readily invaded by fungal hypae.

In all cases, for a poisoning effect to be exercised the poison must
be able either to penetrate the protoplasm or to injure its ecto-
plasmic membrane. A curious point worth noting here is that the
protoplasm of the pulp cells is, as one might expect, resistant to
tannic acid. This is probably due to the formation of an imper- »
meable coagulation film on the surface of the ectoplasmic membrane,
such as must exist normally on the endoplasmic membrane. This-
membrane appears to increase the impermeability of the protoplasm,,
especially to organic acids (malic, citric, tartaric, oxalic), and
hence in the presence of tannic acid externally applied, solutions
of these acids are only poisonous in considerably increased concen-
tration. This may explain the remarkable effectiveness with which
the delicate pulp cells retain their sugary and acid contents, al-
though some of the acids when applied externally are poisonous.

It is perhaps hardly necessary to say that in my own work these
possibilities of error were detected early. Every experiment was
done with a control in distilled water. These controls were
unaffected, and, in fact, properly prepared apples can be kept
almost as well floating in distilled water as ordinary apples can be
kept in air. In addition the results were throughout consistent —
i.e., Avith increasing dilution less and less poisoning effect was
exercised. In order to settle this matter finally, I arranged to
perform these experiments before a committee consisting of Dr,
Hall, President of the Royal Society, Pi-ofessor Osborne, Dr.
Rothera, Miss Kincaid and Miss Jackson. All the apples were pre-
jjared by me. In the whole series about 260 removals of the cuticle
from usually 10 to 12 points in each apple took place. In about
5 or 6 cases the cut was a little below the cuticle. Part of the solu-
tions (series A) were prepared by myself, part (series B) liy Dr.
Rotheia, Miss Kincaid and Miss Jackson. The apples were placed
in the solutions by one of the three foregoing. They were kept in
a locked cupboard by Dr. Hall and inspected jointly after 3 and
7 days' immersion. The solutions were then poured away, the
apples and cylinders washed with distilled water, left for a week

Bitter Pit. 347

in moist air and examined by the members of thu committee. The
average temperature was IS^-lSo C. Dr. Rothera brought Graven-
stein apples for testing. I preferred Yates' Pippin, which is a
hard-fleshed, resistant apple, much less sensitive to poisons but
always unaffected by distilled water if properly prepared.
The results of the test are as follows : —

Series A. — Yates' Pippin.

Controls.

Di stilled water.

(1) No pits, browning or signs of poisoning on any of the pre-
pared spots.

(2) No pits, browning or signs of poisoning on any of the pre-
pared spots.

Copper Sulphate.

(3) 1 per 100,000. Well-defined brown pits 1-2 mm. deep on all
prepared spots.

Lead Nitrate.

(4) 1 per 100,000. Doubtful. i

Mercuric Chloride.

(5) 1 per 10,000. Large pits 1-3 mm. deep.

(6) 1 per 100,000. Small brown pits 1-2 mm. deep on all the
prepared spots.

(7) 1 per 1,000.000. Doul)tfnl.i

Series B. — All Gravenstein apples except in the case of 6 (b), 8 (b),
9 (b) and 10 (b). wliere Yates apples were used.

Coiitroh.
Distilled irater.

(1) No browning, pits or signs of poisoning on any of the pre-
pared spots.

(2) Light brown irregidar pits beneath three contiguous prepared
spots, possibly over a slightly bruised area, the other nine spots
quite unaffected.

1. I could see distinct signs of poisonin{f on these apples, but as Dr. Rothera could not, they
are given as doubtful. Lead nitrate rapidly destroys oxidase and penetrates slowly. Lead nitrate
pits are always pale, copper sulphate ones much dai-ker.

348 Alfred J. Ewart :

Mercuric chloride.

(3) 1 gram per 10,000 c.c. All the spots with brown pits 2-4: mm.
deep.

(4) 1 gram per 100,000. All the spots witli brown pits 1-3 mm.
deep.

(5) 1 gram per 1,000,000. All the spots with brown pits 1-2 mm.
deep.

(6) 1 gram per 100.000 in 3 % sodium chloride.

(a) Browned and invaded by Pcnicillium.

(b) Yates. Rather pale pits to all the prepared spots

1-2 mm. deep.

(7) 1 gram per 10,000 in 3 % sodium chloride. Large deep pits
to all the prepared spots 4-6 mm. deep.^

(8) In 3 % sodium chloride alone.

(a) From superficial browning to pits i mm. deep.

(b) Yates. Superficial browning. No distinct pits.

Copper Sulphate.

(9) 1 per 10,000 in 3 % sodium chloride.

(a) Large well-defined pits 2-3 mm. deep, but paler than

with copper sulphate alone.

(b) Yates. Large pits, but ap])le invaded by Penicillium

through a bruise.
(10) 1 per 100,000 in 3 % sodium chloride.

(a) All the piepared spots b)owiied, pits pale, barely ex-

ceeding I mm. deep.

(b) Yates. As above, but. pits not exceeding 1 mm.
(11) 1 per 100,000 (co])pei' sulphate alone).

Large dark pits to all tlie prepared spots 3-4 mm. deep.

These results closely coincide with those already published by me,
and show that dilute metallic jjoisons produce browning and pit
formation in the presence of isosmotic solutions of sodium chloride,
the entry here taking place by diffusion only. Further, Graven-
stein apples appear to resemble Five Crowns in their greater sen-
sitivity as compared with Yates. In a pale-skinned apple it is
difficult to be sure that the I'ut has not gone too deep, whereas in a
red apple the fragments removed from the skin must show no colour.
If they do, the cut has passed through the hypodermal layers.
Further, in soft-fleshed apples some of the prepared spots may be

1 The mercuric chloride kills the cells before sufficient s-ilt has entered to prevent browninif.

Bittrr Pit. 349

made over slightly bruised areas, which will subsequently give an
imitation of irregular pit formation. It was owing to the occa-
sional unreliability of the controls that I abandoned in my first
paper the use of pale-skinned, soft-fleshed apples. Even in sucli
■cases, however, an element of doubt only creeps in in determining
the lowest limits of the poisonous concentrations. In the stronger
solutions every prepared spot shows a brown pit whicli has a well-
defined area centric to the prepared spot, and does not spread
beyond a sharp boundai'v zone. If when using a soft-fleshed or
pale-skinned apple, an occasional prepared spot on the control
develops an apparent " poison " pit; this is usually a pale colour.
If it is due to a bruise it will be irregular and not centric around
the spot. If it is due to too deep a cut admitting micro-organisms
it will slowly develop further in moist air, but the other prepared
spots will be unaffected. If it is due to an invasion of fungal
hypae, it will spread rapidly through the whole apple and the pulp
will become soft and watery.

I might perhaps add that if red-skinned, hard-fleshed apples are
used, this method forms the best possible class experiment to
demonstrate —

(a) the indifference of the plant-cell to distilled Avater ;

(b) the importance of the cuticle;

(c) the extreme sensitivity of the pulp cells to metallic poisons.

For class experiments the best solutions to use are 1 gram per
100,000 of mercuric chloride or copper sulphate, and the method
can be used to some extent to test the freedom of distilled water from
small amounts of soluble metallic poisons.

[Proc. Eot. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Part II., 1914]

Art. XXIV. — Neiv or Little-known Victorian Fossiia in the
National Museum.

Part XVII. — Some Tertiary Cephalopoda.

By FREDERICK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., <fec.
(Palaeontologist to the National Museum, Melbourne).

[With Plates III.-VIII.]

[Read December 10th, 1914].

Introductory Note.

The series herein discussed comprises examples of cephalopod
shells, some of which have been in the collection for many years
In the case of the genus Nautilus the fossils are generally fragile, or
are only known as casts, so that it is often impossible to get quitf
perfect representatives which would serve as complete types. These
specimens, imperfect as they are, nevertheless afford many charac-
ters of differentiation which will serve to distinguish the several
forms; and, indeed, the only named Australian Tertiary species
of the genus Nautilus {N . geelongensis), was originally described
from an imperfect cast by Mr. A. H. Foord in his British Museum
Catalogue of Cei^halopoda. It seems, therefore, in the interests of
systematic work upon Victorian Tertiary fossils to place on record,
without further delay, some of the chief of our cephalopod fossils of
this latest geological era.

The present collection comprises the following forms : —
Aturia atistralis, McCoy.
Nautilus halcomhensis, sp. nov.
,, geelongensis, Foord.
,, altifrons, sp. nov.

felix, sp. nov.
Notosepia cliftoni, gen. et sp. nov.

Ictorlan Fof<sib, Pari XVI J. 851

DESCRIPTION OF THE FOSSILS.

Tk'I'habhanchiata.- Order Nautiloidka.

Fani. Claudonautilidak, Hyatt.

Genus Aturia, Bronn.

Aturia nustraUs, McCoy. (Plate III., Fig. '1).

Nautilus ziczoc, T. Woods, 1862, Geol. Observ. in S. Australia,
p. 83, woodcut.

Aturia ausfralis, McCoy, 1867, On the Recent Zoology and Palae-
ontology of Victoria, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 3, Vol. XX., p.
192. Brougli Sniytli, 1874, in Geol. Surv. Vic. ; Report of Progress,
p. 36.

Aturia zicznc. Sow. sp., var. ausfralis, McCoy, 1876, Prod. Pal.
Vict., dec. III., p. 21, pi. XXIV., figs. 1-5.

Aturia -J cza(\ Sow. sp. Ether idge junr., 1878, Cat. Austr. Fossils,
p. 171.

Aturia aturi, Basterot sp., var. ausfralis, McCoy. Foord, 1891,
Cat. Fossil Cephalopoda (Brit. Mus.), pt. II., p. 354; also p. 336,
fig. 71b.

Aturia ausfralis, McCoy, Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Cat. Fossils
Cain. Fauna Victoria, Rec. Geol, Surv. Vict., Vol. I., pt. 2, p. 92.

Observations. — The Australian form of the type of Aturia aturi,
Basterot, has been the subject of wavering opinion amongst palae-
ontologists as to its specific or varietal standing. The present study
of a large number of Australian specimens seems to show that it is a
distinct form, having some marked characters which help to dis-
tinguish it from the Burdigalian species of France and Italy.

McCoy in 1876 (vide supra p. 21), remarked that " It is with the
compressed Miocene variety found at Dax, named N. Aturi by
Basterot, rather than with the more ventricose original types of the
N. zizac of Sowerby, proper to the Eocene London clay, that our
Australian fossil more completely agrees; and I can only doubtfully
suggest the separation of it as a local variety, from the somewhat
greater compression indicated by the slightly greater length of the
aperture in proportion to its width; and also a slightly greater
curvature of the septa on the sides as shown by a line from the
apex of the lancet-shaped lobe to the inner end of the same septum,
encroaching rather more on the third chamber behind."

Mr. A. H. Foord in his British Museum Catalogue has taken the
same standpoint as McCoy, and regaided it as a variety, the specific

:352 Frederick ('hajmian :

type being Afiir/a aturi. Foord says (op. eit. p. "joS), " This
variety closely resembles the Dax specimens of Afuria aturi : a speci-
men from " Muddy Creek," Victoria (Australia) being quite indis-
tinguishable at first sight from the Dax fossils. On comparing,
however, a specimen of the latter with the Muddy Creek shell, both
])eing of equal size, it is found that the Australian shell has a
lai-.gev siphuncular orifice than the Dax specimens, thus adding
another point of difference to those indicated by McCoy as existing
between tlie two forms."

Quite recently M. Vignal, of Paris, has favoured the Museum
Avith a specimen of Afuria afitrl, of Burdigalian age, from Dax.
Landes. Fi'ance. On comparing this specimen with Australian
examples, the following features, already pointed out by McCoy
and Foord are seen :• —

(1) The Australian shells are more compressed.

(2) The septa and growth-lines are more strongly recurved to-

wards the periphery.
(.3) The siphvincular orifice is larger.

In view of the above-named cliaraeters, which , are constant so
far as my own observations go. there are justifiable grounds for
keeping the Australian form as a distinct species, at the same time
bearing in mind that its relationship is nearest Aturia aturi. It
is only fair to state, however, that Mi-. R. B. Newton, during his
visit with the British Association to Melbourne this year, infornietl
U8 at the sessional meeting that he and Mr. G. C. Crick, of the
British Museum of Natural History, are agreed to consider our
Australian species as identical with Aturia aturi. Probably did
the London Museum possess a larger comparative series of the
Australian form, that view might undergo some modification, and
it is to be regretted that Mr. Newton did not have time to criti-
cally examine the series of Aturiae in the Melbourne National
Museum.

C. F. Parona in 1899 described from Gassino. Piedmont, an
Upper Eocene or Oligocene Aturia under the name of A. rnraxen-
diana.^ This species has a compressed shell after the mode of A.
aturi, but in the structure of the septation it shows more afiRnity
with A. ziczac and its allies. This species thus appears to indicate
a connecting link between the palaeogene and neogene aturids.

Occurrence and Horizons. — The related European Aturia aturi
is, so far as I can discover, typically found in Miocene beds in

1 Pal. Ital., vol. iv. (1838), 189!), p. 156, pi. xii., fisr. 1; pi. xiii., figs. 1-3.

2 Foord. Brit. Mus. Cat., supra cit., p. 354 (" IjOtidon Clay.")

l^ictoruin Fossils, Part XVII. .S5:^

France, Malta and Italy, although recorded, apparently in error,
from the Lower Eocene, since no Eocene locality is given in the list
tliat follows. The Australian species on the other hand, has a very
extensive range, from Oligocene to Lower Pliocene, and throughout
seems to maintain its specific characters.

Oligocene or Balcombian. — Muddy Creek, near Hamilton (lower
beds), Newport and Altona bores. Port Phillip. Balcombe Bay
and Grice's Creek, Port Phillip.

Miocene or Janjukian. — Gellibrand River (low down in series).
Brown's Creek, Otway Coast. Birregurra. Lower Moorabool, Mit-
chell River, Gippsland. Mount Gambler, South Australia. Table
Cape. Tasmania. Spring Creek, near Torquay. Flemington, near
Melbourne.

Lower Pliocene or-Kalimnan. — Beaumaris.

Fani. N AUTILIDAH, Owen.

Genus Nautilus, Linne.

Xautilus balcojnbenais, s}). nov. (Plate IIL, Fij;s. 3, 4; Plate IV.
Figs. 5, 6; Plate VIIL, Figs. 18, 19).

Description. — Shell well inflated, periphery well rounded. Dor-
sal arch not so deep as in N. geelongensis . Septa, about 17 in the
last Avhorl; sutures slightly waved. Umbilicus narrow and deep.
Siphuncle a little above the centre in a young specimen. Young
examples show a striated surface of shell, as in adult forms from
mesozoic strata.

Dlmt)isions. — Type specimen (from Balcombe Bay) : greatest
diameter, 205 mm.; height of apei'ture, 118 mm.; width, 110 mm.
Another specimen (from Muddy Creek) : greatest diameter, 80
mm. ; height of aperture, 45.5 mm. ; width, 42 mm. A small speci-
men (from Balcombe Bay) : Height of aperture, 23 mm. ; width,
26 mm.

Affinities. — This Nautilus attains to a large size, but is very
difficult to secure in anything like a complete state owing to the
thinness of the shell, and its frequent occurrence in loose, shelly
marl. The type of shell is near N . regalis, Sowerby,! but, unlike
that species, has an open, though narrow umbilicus. At first sight
it might be confused with N . geelongensis, as a compressed variety,
but the latter species has fewer chambers, a more strongly arched
dorsum, and a siphuncle situated slightly below the centre. The

1 Mineral Concholotfi , 1SS2, vol.

:^54 Frederick Cltapman .-

sides of N. geelonr/ensis are also more strongly convex, and pro-
portionately broader, whilst the body chamber in N . halcomhensis
is higher and more nearly equal to the width, which it exceeds in
the later stages.

Occurrence and Horizon. — The type specimen is from Balcombe
Bay; collected and presented by Mr. F. A. Cudmore. This par-
ticular specimen must have lain for some time on the Balcombian
sea-bed, since there are numerous attached valves of Dimija
dissimilis^ Tate, adherent to the exterior of the shell.

Other specimens, presented by Mr. Cudmore, from the same
locality, are in the brephic and neanic stages. Another example,
in the Museum collection, in the ephebic stage, was collected by
the Avriter from Muddy Creek (lower beds). All the examples are
from strata of Balcombian age.

Xiiutihis yeelotuietisis, Foord. (Plate TV., Figs. 7-9).

Nautilus geelongensis, Foord, 1891, Cat. Foss. Cephalopoda
(Brit. Mus.). part II., p. 332, woodcut fig. 69.

Dtscri'pfion. — The following diagnosis is quoted from A. H.
Foord :—

" Sp. Char. A number of detached casts of the chaml>ers which,
when fitted together, make up a shell of a somewhat inflated form,
rather compressed on the sides, and broadly rounded on the peri-
phery. The aperture would be considerably wider than high. The
septa are moderately distant, the sutures very slightly flexuous,
with a dorsal lobe in the young shell. . . The siphuncle is

nearly central, perhaps a little below the centre. Not a vestige
of the shell remains."

The above description, based on a cast, gives the chief points
about the form of this species. Judging by the figure given by
Foord, the type specimen would possess about 15 chambers on the
last whorl, and this number coincides with the examples I have
identified as N. geelongensis in the Museum collection. It occurs
throughout the Miocene proper, or the Janjukian series of Vic-
toria, but chiefly in the form of a cast of the interior of the shell.
The shell is occasionally met with, but the beds in which it is
found are not usually favourable for the extraction of the fossil
in anything like completeness. Only one such shell is preserved
in the Museum collection. The shell is moderately thin, and the
outer layer conspicuously marked with growth lines. The um-
bilicus is apparently nearly closed; the sutures slightly flexuous.

Victor tan Fo.ssUs, Part XVTf. 355

Casts of tlie interior of the shell of this species, from the Murray
River cliffs, show that the annular lobe on the dorsum or impressed
zone is very distinct in the earlier camerae, but become fainter,
and disappear on reaching the ephebic stage of the shell. It is
interesting to note in connection with the presence of the annular
lobe in this species, that it is also seen in another Australian form,
N. felix, but less strongly developed.

Dimensions. — The type specimen of N. geelo?i(/ensis, figured by
Foord (op. cit. p. 333, fig. 69), has a maximum diameter of about
114 mm. The heigFt of aperture is about 45 nmi., and the width
63 mm.

A shell from Fyansford shows, height of aperture from impressed
zone to periphery, 25 mm. ; width, 32 mm.

Another specimen (cast), from the Murray River, measures on
the aperture about 67 mm. in height, and 89 mm. in width.

Observations.- — This species is apparently the commonest and
best known of the Victorian Tertiary nautili, since it is a typical
form in the widely developed Janjukian series, although ranging into
the Kalimnan. Occurring so often in polyzoal rock, however, it is
met with generally in the form of an internal cast of the shell.
This is obviously due to the great solvent processes continually pro-
ceeding in and through this porous limestone. The characters and
form of the original shell are so often clearly shown in the casts, as
to leave no room for doubting the identity of the species. The
general form of N. geelongensis is like that of N. imperiolis,
Sowerby,! but is not so wide at the aperture.

Occurrence and Horizon. — The original locality, " near Gee-
long," is somewhat vague, as it may have come from any of the
chalky or polyzoal limestones within a wide radius in that district.
All of those localities, however, would belong to the Janjukian
series. Casts of Nautilus, probably of this species, occur in South
Australia, in the Avhite and yellow limestone of the Murray cliffs.
A cast of N . geelongensis preserved in the white polyzoal lime-
stone of that locality Avas presented by the late Rev. C. S. Y. Price,
to whom the Museum has been indebted from time to time for many
valuable specimens.

The small example, having the shell preserved, was collected by
Mr. J. F. Mulder, at Fyansford, the deposit at which locality I
now include in the Janjukian series.

1 Min. Conch., vol. i., 1812, p. !), pi. i.

856 Frederick Cluvinnan :

From the Kalimuaii series (Lower Pliocene) at its base, a fine ex-
ample of y. geelonyensis has been collected by Mr. Kurtze, of
Hochkirch, which specimen was subsequently presented to the
Museum by Mr. C. French, junr. It occurred in a gypsum-bear-
ing bed, opposite Mr. Henty's farm, on the Grange Burn, asso-
ciated with Ostrea manuhriata and Nation cunninghamensis, and
is itself partially filled with selenite.

Nantihis aUifronn, sp. uov. (Plate V., Figs. 10-12; Plate VI.,
Fig 13).

Descri2)tion. — This species is of moderate to large size. It is
remarkable for the compressed form of the shell, and its conse-
quently high apertural front. The chambers number about 15 to
17 in the last whorl. The umbilicus is open and deep, but not of
great width; it has the appearance of being stepped, OAving to the
compression of the sides of each turn of the shell. The sutures are
more undulate than in N . geelongensis, from which it is further
distinguished by its depressed form, and almost quadrate aper-
ture. Siphuncle sometimes preserved by the infilling of the shell
with selenite, when it is seen to be ventral in position.

Dimensions. — Greatest diameter of type specimen, about 225
mm. ; width of umbilicus, 13 mm. ; height of aperture, 124 mm. ;
width, 103 mm.

Affinities. — This form of Nautilus is of the N . urhanus type, of
the London Clay, near London, and the I. of Sheppey. In N.
urbanns the siphuncle is described by Edwards^- as dor.sal in posi-
tion, whilst in the present species, N. altifrofis, as seen in the
remarkably fine selenite casts, it is decidedly ventral.

Occurrence and Horizon. — N . altifrons appears to be restricted
to Janjukian strata. It occurs at the Murray River cliffs (type),
where it is found preserved in gypsum of the clear variety selenite,
which mineral has invaded the chambers, whilst the shelly septa
and siphuncle are often well preserved. A cast of this species
in white polyzoal limestone from Nor'-west Bend, Murray River,
South Australia, is also found in the Museum collection. A cast
of Nautilus, probably referable to this species, occurring at Bairne-
dale, was presented by Mr. W. A. C. a'Beckett.

1 "Moil. Eocene CephulaiHida ;ui(i dnivalMs of l';iif,'l.ahd," vol. i. (Pal. Soc), 1841), p. 46.

Victoria a Fossils. Part XVII. 357

.Vaufl/us felir,' sp. uov. (Phite VL, Fig. U; Plate VII., Fig. 15).

Description. — Shell somewhat compressed, or only moderately
inflated, with a well rounded periphery; whorls increasing rapidly.
Camerae high, and with the sutures slightly undulate; few in num-
ber, nine in the last whorl. A feeble annular lobe on the im-
pressed zone. Umbilicus rather wide and deep. Aperture roundly
dome-shaped; higher than wide.

Dimensions. — Maximum diameter of shell in type specimen, 85
mm. ; minimum diameter, 63 mm. ; height of aperture, 47 mm. ;
width, 42 mm. ; width of umbilicus, 7.5 mm.

Observations. — This form differs in many respects from any other
known Victorian species. Its salient characters are — its com-
pressed form compared with N . halcombensis and N . geelongensis,
the wide umbilicus, and the small number of camerae in each
whorl.

Occurrence and Horizon. — Happy Valley, South Australia
(Magellania j)ectoralis beds)2 Janjukian (Miocene). Type speci-
men in the Dennant coll.

DIBRANCHIATA.

Fam. Sepiophoridae.
Genus Notosepla, gen. nov.

Notosepia cliftonensis, sp. nov. (Plate VII., Figs. 16, 17; Plate VIII.,
Figs. 20-22).
Description. — Shell or sepion large and comparatively thick,
but variable in the latter respect, according to habitat; triangu-
lary ovate in ventral aspect. Alveolus moderately deep, filling up
with age. Ventral lip of alveolar border recurved, and sometimes
quite pendent; inner surface of lip radiately grooved or fluted.
Back and sides of sepion coarsely reticulated or labyrinthic, and
spongy. Vestigial septation of the internal surface of the pro-
ostracum faintly marked, but stronger than in the living Sepia.
Pro-ostracum strongly convex dorsally, at the anterior end be-
coming depressed and marked with strongly-arched lamellar
growth-lines. Mucro thick, cylindrical, and bluntly terminated;
in fully grown specimens directly in line with the back of the pro-
ostracum, but in younger specimens having a slight tendency to
recurve.

1 Name sujfgested by its oociyrence at Happy Valley.

•2 For notes on this deposit see H. Basedow, Trans. R. Soc. S.A., vol. xxviii., 1904, p. 248.

15

358

Fredei •ick Gh(ip7nan

Dimensions. — Approximate lengtli of type specimen (including
impression of the anterior part of the pro-ostraciim), i;^2 mm. ;
width of anterior extremity of pro-ostracum, 6-5 mm. ; thickness
of ventral lip of alveolus in tyjje specimen, 8 mm.; approximate
length of mucro, measured dorsally from the basal sinus at junc-
tion with the pro-ostracum, 13.5 mm. Distance from centre of
alveolus to edge of lip, 21.5 mm.

Relationships. — Piesumably on account of the thickened ventral
lip of the alveolar border, and the strong mucro, the present species
has been listed by some Australian authors in the genus Belosejv'a.
Although characters such as those mentioned, agree witli BeIo.'ie/>ifi.
yet the latter genus is distinct in several essential characters, and
these mav be tabulated as follows : —

Belosepia

Notosepia

Sepia

(Middle Eocene).

(Oligooene).

(Livii,.?).

Dorsum

- Stron'i.ly convex •
anteriorly ; vel-
licate posteri-
orly.

- Strongly con- ■
vex.

■ Flatly convex.

Alveolar

cavity

- Deep and coni- ■

- Moderately

■ Shallow ; inner

,

cul ; inner sur-

deep ; i n n e 1-

s VI r f a c e with

face with dis-

surface with

faint transverse

tant septation.

faint septation.

lamellae.

Alveolar

lip

- Greatly extend-

Moderately ■

■ A sharp project-

ed, flabelli-

thick, over- -

ing border.

form.

hanging.

Mucro

- Large, thick and •

■ Moderately -

Small, generally

bent backward.

large, thick,
bent backward
in young form,
afterwards

slender, and
either straight,
or bent backward
or forward.

straight.

It is especially noteworthy that young individuals of .Xotosepin,
in having a recurved mucro, point to the older Belosepia type of
shell; whilst the straight mucro of the adult form agrees more
nearly with that of the living Sepia, in which it is normally
straight, or only slightly l)ent.

Observations. — A large portion of the inner surface of the an-
terior region of the pro-ostracum in the type specimen, was for-
tunately preserved in collecting the specimen, and this materially
adds to our knowledge of the form of the complete sepion. The
pro-ostracum is thin and expanded, as in Sepia, and bordered by
a wrinkled sub-chitinous membrane.

Victorian Fossils, Part XVII. 359

Practica,lly all the specimens of .V. cliftoni in the collection had
lain on the sea-bed for some considerable time before being
covered up, for the intei'ior of the pro-ostracum generally carries
attached organisms, as polyzoa and Dinii/o (right or attached
valves).

Occurrence and Horizon. — The type specimen was presented to
the Museum by Mr. F. P. Spry, and was collected by Mr. H. Lodge
at Clifton Bank, Muddy Creek, from the upper, broAvn polyzoal
marls of Balcombian age. It also occurs in the lower, blue marls
of the same series. There is a specimen in the Dennant coll., from
the same locality, and several examples in theMuseum coll., found
by the late Mr. W. Kershaw, at Balcombe Bay and Grice's Creek,
Port Phillip. These latter examples are of slightly thinner build,
indicative in all probability of their deeper water habitat, as
compai-ed with the deposits at Muddy Creek.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate III.

Fig. 1. — Aturia aturi, Basterot. Broken shell, showing the char-
acter and arrangement of the siphuncular funnels. Of
Burdigalian age. Dax. Nat. size.

Fig. 2. — Aturia australis, McCoy. Broken shell, showing the in-
ternal structure. Balcombian. Grice's Creek, Port Phillip.
(Coll. J. F. Bailey). Nat. size.

Fig. 3. — Nautilus halcomhensis,^s^. nov. Exterior of shell of tyi>e
specimen, lateral aspect; w'ith attached valves of Dimya
dissimilis. Balcombian. Balcombe Bay, Port Phillip.
(Coll. F. A. Cudmore). 7-17 nat. size.

Fig. 4. — N. balcombe n sis, sp. nov. Opposite face of the same
shell, showing the internal concameration. About § nat.
size.

Plate IV.

Fig. 5. — N. balcombensis, sp. nov. Apertural aspect of the same
shell. Slightly less than half nat. size.

Fig. 6. — iV. balcombensis, sp. nov. Apertural aspect of an ex-
ample in the neanic stage. Balcombian. Balcombe Bay,
Port Phillip. (Coll. F. A. Cudmore). Paratype. Nat.
Bize.

HOC Frederick Chapman :

Fig. 7. — Nnvtilus geelongensis, Foord. A cast in polyzoal rock.

Janjukian. Murray Cliffs. South Australia. (Coll. Rev.

C. S. Y. Price). ;^5th nat. size.
Fig. 8. — .T. gedotige/isis, Foord. Shell infilled with gypsum.

Kalininan. Cliffs opposite Henty's farmstead, Grange Burn,

near Hamilton, Victoria. Lateral aspect. Nat. size.
Fig. 9. — N. f/eelongensis, Foord. Apertural view of the above

specimen. Nat. size.

Pl,ATE V.

Fig. 10. — Nautilus alfifrom, sp. nov. Type specimen. Lateral

aspect. Janjukian. Murray River Cliffs, South Australia.

About 4-lOth nat. size.
Fig. IT. — N. altifrons, sp. nov. Apertural aspect of the above.

Al)()ut 4-lOth nat. size.
Fig. 12. — N. altifrons, sp. nov. Portion of a shell infilled with

selenite; showing the septa and siphuncle preserved in situ.

Janjukian. Murray River Cliffs, South Australia. Nat-

Plate VL

Fig. 13. — Nautilus altifrons, sp. nov. A cast in polyzoal lime-
stone. Janjukian. Nor'-west Bend, Murray River, South
Australia. Paratype. About 3-5th nat. size.

Fig. 14. — Navtilus felix, sp. nov. Lateral aspect of type speci-
men. A siliceous internar cast; with portion of the shell
preserved. Janjukian. Happy Valley. South Australia.
(Dennant coll.). About nat. size.

Plate VIL

Fig. 15. — N . felix, sp. nov. Apertural aspect of the above speci-
men. About nat. size.

Fig. 16. — Notosepia cliftonensis, sp. et gen. nov. Internal face
of aepion of type specimen. Balcombian. Clifton Bank.
Muddy Creek, near Hamilton, Victoria. (Coll. H. Lodge).
Nat. size.

Fig. 17. — N. cliftonensis, sp. nov. Side view of above specimen.
Nat. size.

Proc. E.S. Victoria, 19U. Plate III.

Proc. R.S. Victoria, 19U. Plate IV.

Proc. R.S. Victoria. 191 1. Plate V.

F.C., Photo.

Proc. K.S. Victoria, 1914. Plato VI.

F.C., Photo.

or. K.S. ViftoriM, mil. I'hd.- Vll.

F.C., Photo.

Proc. R.S. Vie-lnria, J ".I Ik Plate VIII.

Victorian Fossils, Part XVII. ;5(31

Platk VIII.

Fig. 18. — Nautilus halcomhensiti, sp. nov. Specimen in the
brephic stage, with siphixncular orifice clearly seen on the
face of the chamber, and with the superficial shell-orna-
ment well-preserved. Balcombian. Balcombe Bay, Port
Phillip. (Coll. F. A. Cudmore). Paratype. Nat. size.

Fig. 19. — N . balcotnben.sis, sp. nov. Ornament in aboA'^e specimen
enlarged. x 3.

Fig. 20. — Notosepifi cliftonensis, sp. et gen. nov. Balcombian.
Balcombe Bay. (Coll. W. Kershaw). Paratype. Nat. size.

Fig. 21. — N. cliff ovensis, sp. nov. Sepion in early stage of
growth, showing recurved mucro. Balcombian. Balcombe
Bay. (Coll. W. Kershaw). Paratype. x 2.

Fig. 22. — N . cliffone?isis, sp. nov. The proostracum, showing
outer shell and inner concentric lamininae. Balcombian.
Clifton Bank, Muddy Creek. (Coll. H. Lodge). Paratype.
Nat. size.

[Pkoc. Rot. Soc. Victoria, 27 (N.S.), Pt. II., 1914].

Art. XXV. — Descriptions of ihree unusual forms of
Australites from Western Victoria.

By Professor ERNEST W. SKEATS, D.Sc, A.R.C.S., F.G.S.

(With Plate IX.).

[Read lUth December, 1914].

Introduction.

During a visit to the Grampians in February, 1913, in conn-
pany with Mr. W. H. Ferguson, of the Geological Survey, I paid
a visit to the Stony Creek basin, near Hall's gap, from which
a considerable quantity of alluvial gold has been obtained. From
the gold-bearing gravels and sands a large number of australites
has been found from time to time. The gravels are quite shal-
low, and I understand that some of the australites have been
obtained from a depth of a few feet below the surface. I was
not successful in my search, but Mr. Charles D'Alton. of Hall's
Gap, showed me some which he had found, and generously pre-
sented to me for the Geological Museum of the University, two
small forms, of remarkable character.

Last Aveek Professoi- Baldwin Spencer, C.M.G.. F.R.S.. Director
of the National Museum, showed me another remarkable form
of australite, from Western Victoria, recently presented to the
National Museum by Mr. H. Quiney.

Professor Spencer kindly allowed me to describe this specimen,
with the tAVo presented to me by IMr. D'Alton.

Desrriptlons of Speciviens. — See Plate.

jUisfralite, presented hy Mr. H. QtUney, to National Museum.
Measurements. — The weight determined by the chemical balance
is .5330 grams.

The specific gravity determined by Joly's spring balance is 2.47

Length of austi-alite is 20 mm. or 'i% inch.

Breadth of australite is 10.7 mm. or ^-f inch.

Maximum thickness is 3.5 nnn. or ,.''j inch.

Length of australite, excluding the flange, is 13 mm. or \l inch.

Breadth of australite, excluding the flange,

Aasfr(difey< jroni Western Victoria, 363

A/)/)earafice of Aifstralife.
General cliaraoteis. — Tlie speciinen is sliaped somewhat like a
pine-seed, being elliptical in outline, flat above, convex below, and
tapering at its edge to a thin flange, which is flat at the extremities
of the specimen, and curved back on the middle part of the upper
surface. The flange has l)een slightly chipped near each extremity.
The colour of the australite ranges from light yellow in the thin
flange, thvougli bottle-green to black, but even the thickest part is
translucent.

Fhif (ir upper surface.

Examiifed under the microscope Avith a 2-inch objective, numer-
ous small pits of hemispherical shape are noticed on the middle
part of the upper surface. Near the flange these pass into semi-
cylindrical grooves, which are recurved at the junction with the
flange. The recurving is in opposite directions on opposite sides
of the central part of the flange. Near the extremities of the longer
axis of the specimen tlie grooves run out into the flange parallel to
the longer axis of the specimen. This recurving of the grooves
alluded to above is what would be expected to occur if they were"
formed while the glass was still plastic and rotating about an axis at
right angles to the flat or upper side, while the turning upwards of
the central part of the flange might be expected to occur in a plastic
body as a result of resistance from the air, Avhile the body was mov-
ing in the direction of the assumed axis of rotation.

Convex or lower surface.

Pits and grooves are also noticed on this surface of the speci-
men. In the middle of the specimen they are hemispherical, at
the margins of the central part they become semi-elliptical to semi-
cylindrical, and in the flange, especially at the extremities of the
longer axis, they are drawn out to linear grooves.

Examination of interior of Australite.

For this purpose the australite Avas immersed in water in a
watch glass, and examined under the microscope.

The specimen shows no sign of crystals or incipient crystals;
it is completely glassy. In polarised light the central parts are
completely isotropic, but the marginal parts, especially the thin
part of the flange, exhibit grey to Avhite polarization colours, in-
dicating the existence of a state of sti-ain in the glass of the mar-
gin and flange of the australite.

364 Ernest W. Skcais :

Boat-shaped Australife presented hy Mr. Charles DWlton to
Geolor/ical Museum of the University.

Measurements. — The weight determined by the chemical bahiiice
is .4632 grams.

The specific gravity determined by Joly's spring balance is 2.4.'').

Length of australite is 20 mm. or || inch.

Breadth of australite is 9.5 mm. or | inch.

Maximum thickness is 3 mm. or yL- inch.

Breadth of australite, excluding the flange, is 4 mm. or wV inch.

Appearance of Australite.

General characters. — The specimen is more or less boat-shaped. It
is elliptical in outline, with an upper surface, whose central part is
approximately cylindrical, and with a flange curved upwards, im-
parting a general concave appearance to the upper surface. Much
of the flange has been lost by fracture, but in one place appears
to be unbroken, and there the outer rim of the flange is slightly
curved back, and appears to be fluted. The specimen is bottle-
green to black in colour.

Concave or upper surface.

The central convex or cylindrical portion has a slight constric-
tion or " waist " developed half-way Ijetween the extremities. The
latter taper off towards a point. The surface of the central por-
tion shows small hemispherical pits, but most prominently de-
veloped, especially near the junction with the flange are long, semi-
cylindrical grooves, running generally parallel to the longer axis
of the australite, and curving in at the " waist," and outwards
beyond it. A few short grooves run nearly at right angles to
these across the central convex portion. The flange does not show
a constriction to a " waist," and exhibits on its surface small
hemispherical pits.

Convex or lower surface.

This shows a few longitudinal grooves near the flange, but the
general surface is covered with a large number of pits, some small
and hemisphei-ical, others large and flatter, as if adjacent pits
had become confluent.

Auatralites from. Wo^tern Victoria. 365

Examitiafion of interior of Ausiralite.

The australite Avas immersed in water in a watch glass, and
examined under the microscope.

The specimen is completely glassy, showing neither crystallites
or microlites, and is completely isotropic, except for slight strain
polarization effects at the thin ends of the australite.

Disc-shaped Australite presented by Mr. Charles D' Alton to
Geological Museum of the U niversity.

Measurements. — The weight determined by the chemical balance
is .3184 grams.

The specific gravity determined by Joly's spring balance is 2.41.

Length of australite is 13 mm. or |^ inch.

Breadth of australite is 11.8 mm. or ?,# inch.

Maximum thickness is 1.2 mm. or ^^ inch.

Length of australite, excluding the flange, is 5.2 mm. or ^f inch.

Breadth of australite, excluding the flange, is 45 mm. or ^-^
inch.

Appearance of Australite.

The specimen is approximately disc-shaped, and almost circu-
lar in outline. It is dark bottle-green in colour, and quite trans-
lucent, owing to its thinness. The flange is much broader, and
slighter thicker than the central portion. The edge of the flange is
perfect, except for a small chip. It is smooth, except for small
pits and quite clearly could never have formed a portion de-
tached from a glass bubble.

Upper Surface. — The whole surface is crowded with minute pits,
some hemispherical in shape, some shallower, and many are con-
fluent at their edges. In addition shallow grooves are seen form-
ing a closed, roughly elliptical curve tangent at one point to the
central portion, and passing out to neai- the margin of one part
of the flange. The junction of the flange with the central portion
is depressed, and the flange as a whole is thicker than the central
portion.

Lower Surface. — The lower surface is almost flat. It is covered
with minute pits, and in the central portion with sub-parallel
grooves trending in the direction of the longer axis of the speci-
men. These grooves, however, fail to reach the margin of the
flange.

:')66 Ernest W. Skeats :

Examination of interior of Avstralite.

The australite was immersed in water in a watch glass, and
examined under the microscope.

On focusing beneath the surface of the australite, it was
noticed that the pits or bubbles were internal, as well as external,
and were in places arranged roughly in rings. A few still smaller
gas bubbles, with dark borders, were also noticed. The specimen
was entirely glassy and isotropic, except for slight evidence of
strain polarization.

Conclusion.

The three australites above described are remarkable, and I
think constitute more or less distinct types from any hitherto
described. The best and most complete reproduction of different
types of australites is given by Mr. E. J. Dunn,i and includes
button shaped, ellipsoidal. dumb-lDell shaped, and almost spherical
forms.

To these must now be added the " pine-seed " type, the " boat-
shaped " type, and the discoidal type.

The three specimens described are remarkable also for their small
dimensions and light weight. I believe the disc-shaped specimen
from the Stony Creek Basin in the Grampians is the smallest and
lightest australite hitherto described.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE.

A is the pine-seed type of australite. (Nat. Miiseum collection).

B is the disc-shaped type of australite. (Geol. Dept. Univ. collec-
tion.

C is the boat-shaped type of australite. (Geol. Dept. Univ. col-
lection.

Below each australite is a drawing of a transverse section through
the australite, and a drawing of the upper surface, showing
the flange and peculiar distribution of grooves. Millimetre
and inch scales are shown.

1 Records of Geol. Survey of Victoria, vol. ii., pt. 4, 1908, pp. 202-207
r.uUetiii of Geol. Survey of Victoria, No. 27, 1912.

Pfoc. RS. Victoria, lOU. Plate IX.

d

B. a

Lu!ll|l|||||!llllllh.llllllllllllllllllij.

c:i^.i,,,i.,;i.„i.,,i,

[Proc. Kot. Soc. Victoria. 27 (N.S.), Pt. II., 1914].

Akt. XXV'K "iVoff- on Eucalyptus aljnna, Liiui., and its^
Essential Oil.

By R. T. baker, F.L.S., and H. G. SMITH, F.C.S.,

Teclmolo^ical Museum, Sydney.

(Comuiunicated by Prof. A. J. Evvart, D.Sc).
[Eead December 10th, 1914].

This specimen was discovered by Sir Thomas Mitchell, in 1836,
on the summit of Mt. William at an elevation of over 4,000 feet,
and, so far, is endemic to Victoria. Until quite within the last year
or so, this was the only locality recorded for it, none other being
given by Bentham in his " Flora Australiensis," or by Mueller h\
his " Eucalyptographia," Dec. 11, where this species is figured.

It has, however, now been found by Mr. J. W. Audas to occur
at Hall's Gap, in the Grampians, and the leaves from which this oil
was obtained were collected " on that poi'tion of the Serra-range
lying between Hall's Gap and the Victorian Valley, Grampian
Mountains," where it grows on black sandy loam. Mr. C. W.
D' Alton, of that locality, informs us that the species seldom grows
below an altitude of two thousand feet, and appears to flourish best
at about 3000 feet above sea level. The height of the ti-ee is between
twelve and thirty feet, being a robust spreading tree, with rough
bark at the foot of the trunk and smooth above.

Timber. — The timber is very tough, and stands heavy winds well.
but becomes hollow with age.

Remarks. — Being confined to so restricted an area, one would
hardly expect to find any variations, and Mueller, who figures and
describes it in liis "Eucalyptographia," does not give or refei- to
any. Additional collections of material, however, show that the
fruits, at least, leally do vary in shape. Those delineated by
Mueller might be taken as the extreme in size and contour of rim.
which is there shown to be domed, but specimens in this herbarium
show the rim to be. even in mature fruits, quite truncate, and in
others even half countersunk. The fruit is also occasionally
ribbed.

The smaller form of capsule is not unlike that of E. capitellata
in shape, otherwise the features appear fairly constant.

i^68 Biihcv and ISinith :

Essential Oil. — We are indebted, through Mr. Audas, to Mr. C.
W. D'xVlton, of Hair.s Gap, Grampians, Vic, for the material for
chemical investigation.

The leaves with terminal branchlets Avere tolleoted from trees 12
to 30 feet high.

The leaves, which were thick and coriaceous, shoAved considerable
oil glands, but these must have been largely empty, judging from
the yield of oil, as this Avas only 0.36 per cent.

The crude oil, which was thin and mobile, had a terpene-like
odour, suggesting that of turpentine. Phellandrene was not de-
tected, and Eucalyptol was only present in small amount. The
presence of the solid paraffin peculiar to some Eucalyptus oils
(Proc. Roy. Soc, N.S.W., July, 1913) was also determined.

The results show this oil to consist largely of pinene. the laevo-
rotatory form predominating slightly. Although lielonging to the
group of Eucalypts producing a Eucalyptol-pinene oil, yet the
epecies has no commercial value as an oil-producing plant, the
yield being much too small, while the oil itself is deficient in
oxygen -bearing constituents.

The crude oil had the following characters : —
Specific gravity at 15o C. =0.8973.
notation an=— 2.80.
Refractive index at 15o C. = 1.4779.

Insoluble in 10 volumes 80 per cent, alcohol, and, owing to the
presence of paraffin, not entirely soluble in 90 per cent, alcohol.

The saponification number for the esters was only 2.6, so that
esters were only present in very small amount.

On re-distilling the crude oil, the usual amount of acid water and
volatile aldehydes for this class of Eucalyptus oils came over below
1550 C. (corrected). Between 1550 and 1630 no less than 66 per
cent, distilled.

This fraction, which contained a little Eucalyptol, had the fol-
lowing characters : —

Specific gravity at 15o C. =0.8669.

Rotation an = — ^A)o.

Refractive index at 15o C. = 1.4678.

This fraction had an odour of turpentine, and gave the charac-
teristic nitrosochloride for pinene, thus showing this fraction to
consist largely of that terpene.

Between 163o and 215o, 16 per cent, distilled (14 per cent, below
I8O0). This fraction, Avhich contained Eucalyptol, gave the follow-
ing :—

Eucalyptus aljxiva. ;}6*.>

Specific gravity at loo C. =0.8783.
Rotation ajj = — 3.20.
Refractive index at 15o C. = 1.4680.
Between 215° and 285o only 1 per cent, came over, leaving no
less than 16 per cent, in the still, boiling above the latter tempera-
ture. This residue contained some paraffin, the remainder con-
sisting, perhaps, largely of polyterpenes.

A portion of the crude oil was distilled to 190oC., and the
Eucalyptol 'determined in this by the resorcinol method. The
result showed 10.2 per cent, of Eucalyptol to be present in the crude
oil.

fPROc. Roy. Sol-. Victoria, 27 (N.S.j, Part II., l'J]4].

Akt. XXVI I. — Some Ohservatiovf* on the Metltods of Using the
Agglutination Test in the Diagnosis of Disease in
Bovines caused by the Bacillus of Contagious Abortion.

By H. R. SEDDON, B.V.Sc.

(Veterinary Research Institute, University of Melbourne).

[Read lOth December, 1914].

1. Materials required on whicli to found a Diagnosis
of Contagious Abortion.

The materials which may be examined are : —

(1) Vaginal or Uterine Exudate after Parturition.

(2) Foetus or Foetal membranes.

(3) Blood serum.

(4) Milk.

In animals which have recently aborted (1) and (2) are applic-
able, but in animals from which these were not secured, or in
others in which it is desirable to diagnose infection in the absence
of abortion, or at a time remote from the act of abortion, the most
•commonly used material is (3) Serum. This is of especial value
because of its being easily obtained from cows at all stages of the
disease from shortly after infectidn onwards; also from male
animals, proving that they are susceptible to infection, and from
laboratory animals, such as guinea-pigs. The drawback is the
difficulty of obtaining the serum from a whole herd in the country
where dairymen would have to collect the samples.

It was because of this difficulty that investigations have been
made as to the possible use of (4) Milk. As far as I have been
able to ascertain, this material, on account of its physical proper-
ties, has not been used to any extent for the agglutina-
tion test. In some respectts milk itself is an unsatis-
factory material, and for that reason Avhey, prepared by
the artificial clotting of milk, has been used. Although
these investigations ai-e incomplete, they furnish evidence
strongly suggesting that it will be found satisfactory for
diagnosis. Should this be so, milk, from its ease of collection,
would be the ideal material for examination in the case of lactating
animals.

Agglutination l^cst in Abortion. ;>/ I

In this section will be found results of eertaiu researches con-
ducted on diajjnosis from specimens of uterine exudate and of
whey.

When triiei/ has been used the a<i:glutination test alone has l)een
applied to it.

When usi/u/ e.ru<I(ite} tlic /ncdiis dvaildhle in t/ie Iio/ids of fhe
bacteriolo(jiitt are : —

(1) ]\Iicrf)Scopical examination.

(2) Cultures.

(3) Inoculation of animals.

(4) Agglutination test; and

(5) Complement fixation test.

1. Microscojncal examination . — To a person who is in the habit
of frequently examining specimens containing the bacilhis abortus
the diagnosis presents no great difficulties, especially if the organ-
isms are plentiful and typically arranged. On the other hand
there are met with in vaginal or uterine material bacteria which
simulate more or less the B. abortus, and here the other tests aid
to confirm the diagnosis.

2. Cultures. — For these to be satisfactory, the materfal should
be as free as possible from contamination by other organisms. In
Australia a cow is frequently at grass wdien abortion takes place,
and may have aborted some days before the stockman sees her.
The discharge in such cases is sure to be badly contaminated.

Also, the discharge should obviously not contain any antiseptic.
It sometimes happens that one is called upon to examine material
from a cow which has been syringed out with lysol, the specimen
smelling strongly of the antiseptic. For these reasons this method
is of very limited application.

3. Inoculation of Animals. — The remai'ks made about contamina-
tion and antiseptics under the last heading apply equally here.
Nevertheless, this method of diagnosis has been used here with
success, guinea-pigs being used. Owing to the length of time before
marked lesions develop one resorts to the agglutination test of the
blood serum of the guinea-pig to determine whether infection by
the specific organism has taken place.

4. Agglutination Test. — This has proved valuable in diagnosing
a sample of exudate, in which the microscopical findings were
doubtful, and where, on account of great containination, cultures
were not obtained.

1 The word exudate is used throughout to mean vaginal discharge oontainiiiy- uterine exudate.

:'>72 H. R. Seddon :

It has been found very delicate, as little as 0.0025 c.c. of exud-
ate causing agglutination. From one of these positive cases the
blood serum, secured 16 days later than the exudate and 17 days
after abortion, gave an exactly similar agglutinating titre to the
exudate. (See Cow II., " Bluey.")

Further, exudate may be kept until it is fairly swarming with
bacteria, and yet show little loss of agglutinant action. Also
exudate diluted with carbolised saline (10% of exudate in saline
containing 0.5% of carbolic acid) shows little loss of agglutinating
bodies.

Exudate from a healthy cow which calved at the Institute was
tested, and even in an amount of 0.25 c.c, failed to give any
agglutination.

5. Coinjdement Fixation Test. — No opportunity has presented
itself of applying this test to exudate, but, judging from the re-
sults with the agglutination test on this material, there seems to
be no reason why it should not be of use for diagnostic purposes. ^

Details of Cows.

I. Normal Cow. — This animal was kept at the Institute in con-
nection with another experiment. She calved, after the usual signs
of on-coming parturition, the offspring being of full size, and
vigorous.

Exudate secured the day she calved gave no agglutination with
0.25 c.c.

Whey from milk taken eleven days after calving gave a positive
agglutination with 0.25 c.c, but a negative with 0.05 c.c.

II. Cow, " Bluey." — Detailed history not available. Aborted
on 1st September, 1913. Exudate — in appearance typical of the
disease — was secured from the vagina next day. It Avas tested four
days later, and agglutinated at 0.15 c.c, this being the smallest
quantity used. Twelve days later the end-point was determined
to be 0.0025 c.c, the material used in this test having been left
in the bottle and being now fairly putrid. At the same liime
material which had been diluted with carbolised saline twelve days
ago now gave a reaction with 0.005 c.c

Microscopical exainination of exudate showed long chains of
bacilli, streptococci, and also some clumps of bacilli the siae of B.

1 An opportunity has since presented itself of testing:, by the Complement Fixation method, a
''ample of vapinal exudate from a cow which had recently aborted. The result was positive, thus
showing- that tlie test may l)e .ilso availed of for diagnosis as is suggested al)ove.

AggiiUiudfion Ted in Abortion. 373

ff/ji/iosus. Smears from plat'ontal membi-am.' showed streptobacilli
and strept(K(tcri. as above. Neither specimen showed bacilli which
tduhl be detiiutely recognised as tlie l)acilli of contagious abortion.
Cii/fiirex of the 7i. ahortns were not obtained, the tubes being over-
grown by the other organisms present.

III. Cow, " Baptist."— Aborted on 22nd June, 1914. Exudate,
secured from the vagina two days later, gave agglutination with
0.0025 CO. Microscopical ejamination of c.rudate showed numerous
organisms morphologically like B. abort ax.

Inoculation of Aniniah. — Guinea-pig \'t^^ was inoculated sub-
cutaneously with exudate, and its serum, tested nine days later,
gave no agglutination ; 10 days after irjoculation a positive agglu-
tination was obtained with 0.15 c.c. of serum; 76 days after inocu-
lation 0.0025 c.c. of serum gave a positive agglutination; 95 days
after inocidation the animal was killed.

I'ost-morteni E.raniinafion. — Animal in good condition and all
organs apparently normal, except the spleen, which showed a nodu-
lar appearance externally and on section numerous very small
greyish foci, which looked rather more like enlarged and prominent
malpighian bodies than foci of necrotic material. On smears, no
organisms could be detected.

Guinea-pig 489, inoculated intraperitoneally with exudate, was
tested 40 days after inoculation, when the serum gave a positive
agglutination reaction.

IV. Cow. "Garfish." — Calved 5th July, 1914, not being due
till the I7tli of the same month, but the owner remarks: "Calf
full size, but dead." Exudate w'as secured two days after parturi-
tion, and gave no agglutination when tested, using 0.05 c.c.

Microscopical era mi not ion of exudate failed to demonstrate the
presence of B. abortus, and ciiltures gave negative results.

Animals Inoculated. — Guinea-pig 491, inoculated intraperitone-
ally with exudate, was tested three times (the last test ll.'i days
after inoculation), the serum giving no agglutination. Guinea-pig
492, inoculated subcutaneously with exudate, tested one month
after inoculation, gave a similar negative residt.

Whey from milk collected eight days after calving, gave a nega-
tive result with 0.05 c.c.

2. Technique Employed.

In the following pages details of the technique employed in the
use of all the materials examined are given with a view to a

874 H. R. Seddon:

standardisation of the test in the hands of different workers, so
that the interpretation and comparison of lesnlts may be possiljle
and accurate.

a. — The use of whey and the value of ihc meihod.

That the specific agglutinins of Bacillus ahortus may occur in
milk has been mentioned by MacFadyean anil Stoclcman, (1) in
the Appendix to Part 1 of the Departmental Committee's Report,
p. 28, where they say : " We also found that the milk of an animal
which had aborted possessed agglutinating i)roperties up to 1 in
25, but, owing to the opacity caused l)y the addition of milk to a
culture, milk is unsuitable for testing purposes." Whether this
product has been used at all in diagnosis I am not aware.

It is obvious that if milk, or milk products, could be used it
would be advantageous, owing to the ease of securing specimens;
but, as milk, even diluted, is unsatisfactory on account of its physi-
cal properties, experiments were made Avith whey. The whey was
obtained by clotting milk with Lactic Acid, the technique being as
follows : —

To 9 c.c. of milk, 1 c.c. of a 10% aqueous solution of lactic
acid is added and mixed. The coagulated milk is then filtered
through either cotton-wool and filter-paper, or filter-paper alone,
the latter method being usually applied.

The whey is then diluted, one part to nine parts of carbolised
saline (Acid. Carbol. \'n\. 0.5, Sod. chlor. 0.85, water 100), to
form the basal dilution 1 in 10, and incubated over-niglit. Incu-
bation and subsequent filtration are found necessary, otherwise
there may be a deposit of albuminous material, which, though
unlike the typical deposit of agglutinated organisms, is not desir-
able, since it may lead to confusion in reading the results.

With the diluted, incubated, and filtered whey, four tubes, each
receiving 0.6 c.c. of standard bacterial emulsion, ;ire put up. con-
taining the following amounts of the basal dilution of whey (1 in
10).

rhey).

A.

B. c.

I).

].0

0.2 - 0.1

0.05 c.c.

(representin"^ 0.1

tM»2 - 0.01

0.005 c.c. of piu-e

As a control. 1 cc.

of diluted wliey is put

in a t ube withoi

emulsion.

Carbolised saline is

then added till tlie an

louiit of li(]uid ii

tulje is approximately

1.5 c.c.

Agglittinatlon Test in Abort to ti.
Thus the series of tubes contain : —

A.

B.

(.'.

L>.

Whey -

-

O.l

0.02

.

0.01

0.005 c.c.

Emulsion

0.5

0.5

-

n.5

O.o c.c.

Saline -

-

0.9

0.98

-

0.99

0.995 c.c.

The tubes are then shaken and put in the incubator till next
<lay, when the results are read. Further incubation shows littlr
alteration, a tube showing " partial " agglutination — i.e., small
deposit, with no "clearing" of the supernatant fluid at the end
18 to 24 hours, may be complete at the end of 36 to 48 hours.

Whey, from milk Avhich had been kept 20 days at room tempera-
ture, and clotted naturally, has also been tested, when it was
found that this bacterially-produced whey exhibited the same tit re
as the wliolr milk.

A large number of experiments with whey have been performed,
Ijut as yet no conclusion has been come to as regards the limiting
titres upon which a diagnosis may be made. It has be(en found
that the agglutinins in Avhey increase and decrease in much the
same manner as they do in blood serum. The work to date has
been chiefly among cows on a property where the disease has been
in existence for a number of years, but where the abortions, since
the investigations commenced, have been very few — not sufficient
to warrant a definite opinion as to the comi3arative value of whey
versus serum. Sufficient has been done, however, to warrant inves-
tigation of the value of whey as a material for diagnosis by other
workers.

b. — Collect inn of Senini from Cattle and Guiuea-iiir/s.
Occurretice of the Agglutinins in the Blood of Steers.

Cattle. — Undoubtedly the most satisfactory method of obtain-
ing serum in large quantities is by bleeding from the jugular vein.
but as this method takes some time, and often necessitates the cast-
ing of the animal, another and simpler method is required where
only small quantities of blood, suflicient for diagnostic purposes,
are required.

It has been found that such may be best obtained from the small
artery which runs with the vein extending along the centre of the
dorsum of the ear. This vein is the most prominent and is easily
found. The hair is clipped off, and an incision is made across the
vein and the artery at a point about mid-way betwen the tip and the
base of the ear. The artery may not te cut at the first incision, as

16a

:{70 H. R. Seddon:

it usually lies underneath the vein, and a second rather free inci-
sion may be necessary. From this the blood spurts or drips freely,
and 5 to 10 c.c. can be collected in a test-tube. The blood is allowed
to clot, the clot loosened from the sides of the tube for about two-
thirds of its attachment, and the tube inverted in a conical urine
test-glass. After allowing this to stand for some hours, the serum
may be collected free from corpuscles.

Guinea-pigs. — The following method has been found satisfactory
for obtaining small. quantities of serum for diagnostic purposes: —

Centrifuge tubes are put up, containing 2 c.c. of citrated carbol
saline (Sod. chlor. 0.85, Sod. cit. 1, Ac. Carb. liq. 0.5, water 100).
The margin of the ear of the guinea-pig is then incised with the
scissors and held dependant. There is a .small artery in this region
from which, if it has been cut, the blood drips freely. Six drops
of blood are collected in the prepared tubes. If we assume that
six drops of blood are equal to 0.3 c.c, then we should have about
0.2 c.c. of serum in each tube, or a dilution of 1 in 10.

The tubes are shaken, centrifugalised, and the supernatant fluid
pipetted off and tested in various quantities. Though not quite
accurate, this method is sufficiently so for determining whether
the animal is harbouring the bacilli, as, for example, those animals
inoculated with vaginal exudate or milk fiom suspected cows.
Healthy, non-inoculated guinea-pigs have invariably given a nega-
tive reaction, even with 0.1 c.c. of pure serum (?'.<?., 1 c.c. of the
citrated saline mixture), whereas some of our reacting guinea-pigs
have given an agglutinating titre of 0.005 c.c, and in one cas©
of 0.0005 c.c

E.ra/ni/iafioii of the Blood of Steers.

Because of the large number of cows which give a positive
agglutination reaction it is important to determine whether agglu-
tination of the Contagious Abortion bacillus is brought about by
normal ox serum, and, if at all, to what extent. With a view to
obtaining information on this point, experiments have been con-
ducted Avith the serum of male animals never used for breeding.

The following experiments have been made with the serum of
steers. The animals were for human consumption, and the blood
was taken, immediately upon slaughter at the abattoirs, into
a bottle containing a small quantity of strong (20%) citrate solu-
tion. The serum was obtained by centrifugalising and tested as
follows : —

Agglutination Test in Abortion. Ml

Basal dilutions were made containing 1 of seinini to !) of i-ar-

holised saline ; the ani<nint of standardised emulsion used in eaeli
tube was 0.5 e.c. Results :

0.02 0.01 0.1 05 CO. piiii

Seiinii.

Steer 1
2

+ + .\gglutination and clearintf.
+ Agglutination.
S Slight agglutination.
No agglutination.

From the above, it will be seen that, with the exception of Steer
5, no animal gave a positive reaction with less than 0.1 c.c. of
pure serum, and only one a definite agglutination with thait
amount. With regard to the " S " readings, as mentioned else-
where, we do not count these as positives, as the amount of agglu-
tination is extremely small — only perceptible on very careful naked
eye examination.

The serum of the positive .steer (5) was also tested by the com
plement fixation method, and again gave a positive reaction.

(c) Standard isal ion of t]ic Bacterial Knndsion.

In the description of the technique adopted by other workers
there is a remarkable absence of detail as to the concentration of
the bacterial emulsion.

Although Mohler and Traum (2) use a metliod of .standardising
bacterial emulsion ("agglutinating fluid"), they do so ])y com-
paring it Avith "the old titred agglutinating fluid," but how this
" old agglutinating fluid " itself was standardised they do not say.
nor do the}' indicate what it was like in ai)pearancc.

MacFadyean and Stofkman ("5) ))icpare " an emulsion of greater
turbidity than is ultimately recjuired," and dilute it " until when
viewed in one of the small tubes employed for the tests it is faintly
hazy in appearance."

In this laboiatory a method. l)asod upon comparison of tlie emul-
eion to be emitloyed with a suspension of Barium sidphate. has

:!7S H. B. Seddon :

heeii used, the idea l)eiiig suggested by the " Nephelometer " of
MoFailaud (4).

For the test the following solutions are made: — A 1% solution
of Barium chloride in distilled water, and a 1% solution of Sul-
phuric acid in Avater. Three cubic centimetres of the Barium solu-
tion is then mixed with 97 cubic centimeters of the acid solution,
shaken, and allowed to stand, to come to a state of chemical equi-
liliriuni.

The B. abortus is sown on agar in Roux flasks and incubated
for two or three dajs, the water of condensation being ruti over
the surface daily so as to get a good growth over the whole sur-
face. Twenty cubic centimetres of carbolised saline (Ac. Carb. liq.
0.5. Sod. chlor. 0.85, water 100) is then added to the flasks and
the growth washed ott'. shaken thoroughly, and passed twice through
filter-paper. Dilutions of this suspension, or " emulsion," as it is
generally called, are then made with carbolised saline as folloAvs : —
1 c.c. of emulsion and 1 c.c. of carbolised solution; 1 c.c. of emul-
sion and 2 c.c. of carbolised saline; and so on up to 1 c.c. of emul-
sion and 10 c.c. of carbol saline. These suspensions are the fluids
ti) l>e compared with the barium sulphate mixture.

To compare, the Barium sulphate mixture is thoroughly shaken
and a small tube of about 1 cm. calibre filled with the fluid, tlie
fluids to be tested being placed in similarly sized tubes and com-
parisons made over printed paper. This Barium suspension is
our standard of opacity for emulsion (Standard X).

Supposing the tulje which approximates the opacity of
the Barium mixture is that tube which contains 1 c.c. of thick
emulsion and 6 c.c. of carbolised saline, then this tube is of the
proper standard, and is called "Standard X." The whole of the
ennilsion may then lie diluted down with rarltolised saline to the
proper strength, or kejjt as thick emulsion, the standard being*
now known. In the case instanced, the thick emulsion may be
termed " 7 X," thereby denoting that it requires diluting to seven
times its volume — i.e., adding six times its volume of carbolised
saline, to prepare a standardised enndsion "X."

In our tests, in which we make the total volume of fluid in th©
tii})e up to 1.5 c.c, we use 0.5 c.c. of this standard emulsion " X "
in each tube.

A (jglvtf nation Test in Abortion. 379

3. Quantitative Factors in the Agglutination
Reaction.

(rt) Not simply a matter of dilution, but a quantitative reaction^
An unfortunate terminology has crept into descriptions of agglu-
tination methods — probably a relic from the descriptions of the
so-called Widal reactions with the serum of typhoid patients — in
which frequent use is made of the term " dilution," to express
the amounts of serum (or other diagnostic fluid) necessary to bring
about agglutination.

The following experiments show that the sensitiveness of the re-
action is to be measured by accurate determination of the minimal
quantity of serum employed; in other words, it is not simply a
matter of dilution, but a quantitative reaction.
Experiments. — To determine whether —

1. The relation of the quantity of pure serum to the quantity

of fluid in a tube (i.e., degree of dilution), or

2. The amount of pure serum in the tube,

is the determining factor in agglutination of a particular serum.

Serum collected from a cow thirteen days previously was used, a
basal dilution of 1 of serum to 49 of carbolised saline being made
(1 in 50).

The emulsion was standardised in accordance with the usual
method, and found to lie of a standard " 10 X."

Set la.
Ten tubes were put up, as follows : —

A. B. C. 0. K. F. G. H. J. K.

Serum (1 in 50) - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.25 c.c.

Carbolised saline - 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 1.25 1.5 2.0 2.5 1.75 c.c.

Total volume - - 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 1.75 2.0 2.5 3.0 2.0 c.c.
Eelationship of serum

to fluid- - lin 50 75 100 125 150 175 2(X) 250 300 400

Of each of these dilutions 1 c.c. was put in a tube, and the tubes
similarly lettered so tliat the amounts of pure serum in these tubes
were : —

A. B. C. I). K. K. U. H. .1. K.

0.02 0.012 0.01 O.OOS O.OOG 0.0056 0 005 0.004 0.0(J3 0.0025 c.c.

Emulsion (0.05 c.c. Standard 10 X) was then added to each tube
and tlie tubes incubated till next day, when readings were taken.

380 H. R. Seddon:

Results : —

A, B, and C. agfj:lutinati(>ii and clearing.
D and E, agglutination.

F, slight agglutination.

G, H, J, and K, no agglutination.

Set lb.
Another ten tubes were put up similarly to above (8et la), but
with 0.1 CO. of emulsion (i.e., double quantity) added.
Results : —

A, agglutination and clearing.
No agglutination in other tubes.
Note: — In these two sets of tubes actual dihitlon of serum in
total fluid (neglecting the small amount added with the emulsion)
was the outstanding test.

Set Ha.
Serum and carbolised saline were placed in tubes as in Set 1. : —

A. B. C. 1). E. F. G. H. J. K.

Serum (1 in 50) - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.25 c.c.
Carbolised saline - 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 1.25 1.5 20 2.5 1.75 c.c.

The bacterial emulsion was added to the whole of tlie fluid in
each tube (not to 1 c.c. of each dilution).

Emulsion added (0.05 c.c), and tubes incul)ated as in Set la.
Result :—

Agglutination and clearing in all tuljcs from .\ to J, in-
clusive.
No agglutination in K.

Set lib.

Tubes put up similarly to last set (Set 11a), l>ut wiih 0.1 c.c. of
emulsion (double (piantity) added.

Result : —

Agglutination and clearing in .\, l{, (', 1), and E.
No agglutination in other tubes.

The actual dilution of tlie serum in tliesf tulies, tlierefoi-e, is
the same in l«)th tests (Sets 1. and 11.), but tlie aitual (nnoiinf of
serum in each tube is not the same in coii-espoiidingly lettered
tubes in each test. (See Table 1.)

With each set, control tithes were put uj), containing (1) scrum
and saline, and (2) emulsion and saline.

Agglutination Tent in Abort i

381

Note on liendinds.

"Agglutination " is to be interpreted as a definite macroscopic
aggregation of organisms into clumps deposited eithei- at bottom
of tube or at bottom and along sides of tubes.

" Clearing," where the supernatant fluid is free, to the naked
•eye, of suspended organisms — i.e., agglutination and sedimenta-
tion.

" Slight," wliere there is a trace of agglutination deposit — not
Avhat one might Avith confidence call a definite agglutination. These
" slights " are read as ncijative agglutinations, in considering the
agglutination titre of a serum.

Set I.

Amount of Seniir

0.02 c.c.
0.012 c.c.
0.01 c.c.
0.008 c.c.
0.006 c.c.
0.0056 c.c.
0.005 c.c.
0.004 c.c.
0.003 c.c.
0.0025 c.c.

TABLE I.

Dilution.
1 in 50
75
100
125
150
175
200
250
300
400

Emulsion
0.05 c.c.

Enuihion
0.1 c.c.

+ +

+

+ +

—

+ +

—

+

—

+

—

s

-.

Set II.

a.

b.

Tiil)e.

Amount of Serum.

Dilution.

Emulsion
0.05 c.c.

Emulsion
0.1 c.c.

A

0.02 c.c.

1 in 50

+ +

+ +

B

0.02 C.C.

75

+ +

+ +

C

0.02 c.c.

100

+ +

+ +

D

0.02 c.c.

125

+ +

+ +

E

0.02 c.c.

150

+ +

+ +

F

0.01 c.c.

175

+ +

—

G

0.01 c.c.

200

+ +

H

0.01 c.c.

250

+ +

—

J

0.01 c.c.

300

+ +

K

0.005 c.c

400

—

—

+ + Siy:nifies agglutination and clearing.

+ Signifies agglutination.

S Signifies slight agglutination.

— Signifies no agglutination.

882 H. R. Seddon:

Conclusio/is to be drawn from ((bore.

1.— Using the same quantity of emulsion in eacli tube, tube^
2^ossessurg the same ddvtion {but different quantities) of serum do
uot furnish parallel results. (Compare Set la. with Set Ila., Set
lb. and Set lib., etc.)

2. — Using the same quantity of emulsion in each tube, tubes
containing/ the same qtiantit/j of serum do furnish parallel results.

3. — The agglutination titre varies with the quantity of emul-
sion used, for, as is evident in the table (I.) — -

(a) With 0.05 c.c. of concentrated emulsion (10 X), the

minimum amount of this serum which will produce
agglutination is 0.006 c.c.

(b) Witli 0.1 c.c. of concentrated emulsion (10 X), the mini-

mum quantity of serum required is 0.02 c.c.
Experiments were then carried out to test the effect of dilution
on an agglutination system.

Tubes were put up, containing : —

.\.

B.

C.

D.

Pure Sevuiu -

0.02

0.015

0.01

0.005 c.c.

Emulsion (10 X) -

0.0.J

0.05

0.05

0.05 c.c.

Test 1. — Volume of fluid in each tube made up with carbolised
saline to 1 c.c.

Test 2. — Volume of fluid in each tube made up to 2.5 c.c.
Results, both tests : —

A and B, agglutination and clearing.

C, agglutination.

D, no agglutination.

Test 3. — A tube was put up, containing 0.02 c.c. pure serum
and 0.05 c.c. emulsion (10 X), and carbolised saline added tip to
20 c.c.

Result : — Agglutination.

These tests show that the dominating factor is the quantity of
serum in each tube, and not the degree of dilution. Of course, if
equal quantities of each dilution be taken for testing, the quantity
of serum in the tube will vary as the dilution (as is shoAvn in Set
la.). On the other hand, in the practical application of the agglu-
tination test the important figure is what may be termed the " end-
point " — i.e., the smallest quantity of serum which will produce
agglutination witli n standard quantity of emulsion. The neces-
sity, therefore, arises for taking for all tests an exactly similar

Agglvfhiation Text in Ahortioii. oB-f

<iuaiititv of ililuted soniui, heiift' it is advisahU' to n-for to the-
agglutinating titre of a serum as " so many cul)ic (.-(.'iitinietres of
serum,'" and not us " up to a dilution of such and such." Foi-
the statement of the dilution to ho of any guide to other workers
this must be supplemented by a statement referring not only to th&
actual amount of diluted serum used, but to the actual quantity
of emulsion used also.

Adopting the suggested method — i.e.^ the statement of the exact
Huantity of serum used, the amount of emulsion used is the only
supplementary factor required to be known, for, as is shown by
these experiments, and by the following section, the amount of
emulsion markedly and in a regular manner affects the agglutina-
tion titre.

b. — Influence of Qtia/it/f// of Emulsion on Agglutination.
Also a note on a peculiar it >/ of agglutination.

As is indicated in the experiments in sub-section (a) of section 5
of this paper, the quantity of emulsion present in a tube in which
there is a certain definite amount of serum (or, in other words,
the proportion between the amount of emulsion and the amount
of serum), has a bearing on whether that particular quantity of
serum will show agglutination of the bacilli or not.
whereas with 0.05 c.c. of emulsion (Standard 10 X) agglutination

The tests, la. and lb. (see Conclusion 3, page 382), showed that
occurred with quantities of serum varying from 0.006 c.c. up, with
0.1 c.c. of the same emidsion the smallest quantity of serum to giver
agglutination was 0.02 c.c.

To further elucidate this relationship, a large number of tubes,
with varying proportions of emulsion and serum, were put up as
indicated in the table (Table 2), in which the results are also
shown. On account of the wide range in quantities over which
the experiment Avas made, various concentrations of serum and of
emulsion were used in actually making the test.

These basal dilutions Avere : —

Of Serum : — 1 in 5. 1 in 50, and 1 in 500.
Of Emulsion: — A standard suspension "X," and also one
standardised to 10 X — i.e., 10 times as strong.

The quantities of emulsion used are stated throughout the table
in terms of standard X enmlsion, but for those tubes shown in
the table as containing 1 c.c. and over of standard X emulsion, the
10 X emulsion was used; the amounts of this (standard 10 X) that

S84

H. R. Seddon:

-!+ + + + + + + + + + +
^ '+++ + + + + + + + +

+ + + +
+ + + +

i+ + +
+ + +

^ + +

+ + +

I d + + +

+ + + + +,, I I , I

+ + + + + + I M I I

+ + + +
+ + + +

+

+ "^ + + i I I I

+ + + + I I i I

i I 1

Ut + + I I I I

x^ i^ + + +

+ + ; + + 1 I I 1 I
+ + + +

+ +

I I I I I ! I

+ t t + + I I M I I I ! I I I

+ -+ I

+ +
+ +

; + + I I I ! i I I I I 1 I

+ 4-

+ +

+ + I I I I I I i ! ! !

+++illlllllll

I I

CO T-i rfj -^ o\

-r' <M CO -* c-i — I r-H o o o

CD <MiiO-ti<Mr-<-HOOOOOOOO
rir-<^0000000000000

od oddcJdddddddddd

A (jghUi nation Test in Abortion. *385

were put in being 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, O.G, 0.8, and 1 c.c. respectively.
Similarly in regard to the serum — for those tubes shown as con-
taining 0.04 c.c. of serum and over, the basal dilution of 1 in 5
was used, the quantities of this that were put in being 0.2, 0.4,
0.6, 0.8, and 1 c.c. respectively; for those tubes shown as contain-
ing from 0.002 to 0.02 c.c. of seium a basal dilution of 1 in 50'
was used, the quantities being 0.1, 0.2, O.G, 0.8, and 1 c.c. respec-
tively; for those tubes shown as containing less than 0.002 c.c. of
serum, a basal dilution of 1 in 600 was used, the quantities of this
that Avere put in being 0.8, 0.6, 0.4, 0.2, and 0.1 c.c. respectively.

In each tube the total quantity of fluid was made up to (approxi-
mately) 2 c.c. Control tubes were put up, (1) of serum, and (2)
of emulsion, and in each case remained unchanged.

These tests show that the cjuantities of emulsion and of serum
combining to produce agglutination bear a direct relationship to
one another. The result is particularly striking if one takes the
extreme results (" the agglutination and clearing," end-point,
shown by -H +), which are found to form a straight line when
plotted as a graph.

It will also be noted that this arrangement is kept up over the
whole length of the series.

One further point is evident from this table (Table 2) — namely,
that there is a partial inhil)itioii with certain proportions of emul-
sion and serum, as may be seen from looking at the tubes contain-
ing :—

2 c.c. emulsion and 0.2 c.c. serum;

1 c.c. emulsion, and 0.2, 0.16, and 0.12 c.c. serum;

0.8 c.c. enmlsion, and 0.2, 0.16, 0.12, and 0.08 c.c. serum;

0.6 c.c. emulsion, and 0.12, 0.08, and 0.04 c.c. serum;

0.4 c.c. emulsion, and 0.08 and 0.04 c.c. serum;

And 0.2 c.c. emulsion, and 0.04 c.c. serum. i

Comparing these with tubes lower down in the same column
where the amount of serum is less, we find that where the smaller
quantities of serum are used there is again complete agglutination
and clearing. Further, where larger quantities of serum are used,
there is also agglutination and clearing, the inhibition thus being
apparently zonary. This is well seen in the columns of tubes con-
taining— 0.8, 0.6, 0.4, and 0.2 of enmlsion.

Further, in the table, this zone of inhibition is found to lie
approximately parallel to the agglutination end-point; it seems,

1 An enclosing line is used in the table to make these tubes more evident.

-■386 H. R Seddon .-

therefore, as if there were at least two maxima of agglutination,
for a given quantity of serum, varying with the quantity of emul-
:«ion, and, between these two maxima, the zone of inhibition.

A peculiar agglutination phenomenon similar to this had been
noted before with serum from the same animal.

In this previous test the same amount of emulsion was used in
«ach tube, and the following quantities of serum Avas placed in
tubes : —

Tube. A. B. C. D. E. I-'. G.

0.15 - 0.1 - 0.075 - 0.05 - 0.02 - O.ol - 0.005 c.c,
Resiilt - +- + - + -++-++--

After incubation for 24 hours, there was agglutination deposit
in all the tubes except G, but there was a marked increase of
•opacity of the supernatant fluid going from C. to A — i.e., with the
greater amount of serum. The only tubes where the super-
natant fluid cleared were D and E. After incubating
for a total of four days, all the tubes — A, B and C —
showed clearing. Emulsion controls, it should be noted,
remained unchanged---^.e., were not sedimented. It was considered
at the time that, as the most outstanding feature was the failure
of A, B and C to sediment, the cause might be physi-
cal, and that the reason sedimentation did not occur was
because of the increased viscosity in these tubes, due to
the large amount of serum. In view of the further ex-
periment detailed above in Table 2, and of the mention by Hew-
lett of a similar phenomenon of a zone of inhibition with M. Meli-
fensis, no suggestion as to the cause is offered. No op})ortunity
of consulting the work referred to by HeAvlett has been possible, but
the phenomenon, in the main, seems parallel.

The phenomenon is of importance in that an apparent falling off
in the agglutinating power of a serum does not necessarily mean
that the end-point is to be expected in the next tube.

There may be a zone of lessened agglutination, and then a fur-
ther increase may be met before the end-point of agglutination re-
action. This "end-point" of reaction figure is important in
Contagious Abortion, as it affords a means of comparing an ani-
mal's condition from time to time as regards the progress of the
•disease.

c. — Ojitimum Amount of Eniuhion to V xe .

Having determined the points referred to earlier in this paper,
■the question of optimum quantity of bacterial emulsion naturally
arises.

Agglutination Test in Abortion. 387

Here, again, there being no universal standard adopted, ob-
servers cannot strictly compare their results. Thus, to say that
an animal, 0.05 c.c. of whose serum produces agglutination, should
be considered as affected, in reality conveys no definite meaning, in
view of the experiments in sub-sections (a) and (b) above, unless
the amount of emulsion be stated at the same time. On the other
hand, workers find by experience what is a convenient quantity of
emulsion to use, based on the size of the tubes employed, etc., and
having found this amount retain it as a standard and use this in
future; their own results, therefore, are strictly comparable with
one another, but not with those of other workers.

The following experiments were made to determine what quan-
tity, allowing for ease of reading after 24 houis' incubation, was
suitable to use.

Material.

Serum, from Cow (as used in previous tests).

Emulsion (standardised, = " 10 X ").

Four sets of tubes, numbered 1, 2, ?>, 4, were put up, iising a
different quantity of serum in each set. Eacli .set consisted of four
tubes — A. B, C, and D, and the quantity of emulsion used was: —

in the A tubes - 0.05 c.c. (10 X emulsions)

,. „ B „ - 0.025 c.c.

.. „ C „ - 0.01 c.c.

„ „ D „ - 0.005 c.c.

To Set I. was added 1 c.c. diluted serum (equal to 0.02 c.c. pure
serum), and carbolised saline was added, to make tlie Total Vol.
2 c.c.

To Set II. was added 0.5 c.c. diluted serum (wjual to 0.01 c.c.
pure serum), and carbolised saline Avas added, to make the Total
Vol. 2 c.c.

To Set III. was added 0.25 c.c. diluted serum (equal to 0.005 c.c.
pure serum), and carbolised saline was added, to make the Total
Vol. 2 c.c.

To Set IV. was added 1 c.c. diluted serum (equal to 0.02 c.c.
of pure serum), and carbolised saline was added, to make the Tf)tal
Vol. 20 c.c.

Controls. — Serum controls were put up. and remained unchanged.

Emulsion control tubes, of each quantity of enuilsion used, with
•carbolised saline added, were put up, and remained unchanged.

Sets I., II., and III. Avere read at the end of 24 hours' incuba-
tion, the result ]>eing : —

o88 ' H. B. Seddon .-

Emulsion.

A

B

C

D

0.05

0.025

0.01

0.005 c.c.

Set I. (containing- pure

serum 0.02 c.c.)

+

+

-

t

+

Set IE. (containing pure

serum 0.01 c.c.)

+

+

-

+

+

Set III. (containing pure

serum O.UOo c.c.)

-

+

-

+

+

Set IV. (containing pure

serum 0.02 c.c.)

+

+

-

+

p

Note: — Set IV., ut the end of 24 hours' incubation, showed
positive agglutination with 0.05 c.c. of emulsion — i.e., in Tube A,
but not in the other tubcvS — B, (', and D.

In tubes B and C, containing O.OL'5 and 0.01 c.c. emulsion, a
positive agglutination was manifest at the end of three days' in-
cubation, but the deposit in tube D, with 0.005 c.c. emulsion, even
at the end of this time, was very small indeed — in fact, barely
appreciable.

The controls, it should be mentioned, i-emained unchanged.

From these experiments it appears as if the large volume of
Huid (20 c.c.) in Set IV. affected the rate of sedimentation of the
clumps of bacilli in those tubes with the smaller quantities of
emulsion. As, however, such a large quantity of fluid is not used
in the tubes in making a diagnostic test, these results in Set. IV.
are not of great impoitance. In the practical application of the
test the total volume of fluid in each tube is usually made up to
about 1.5 c.c. A number of tests have also been made in which
the total amount was 2 c.c. The tubes in Sets 1, 2 and 3, where
the total volume has been made up to 2 c.c, are, therefore, of
primary importance. Here it is found that such a quantity of
emulsion and of total fluid have been employed that the complete
agglutination reaction takes place within the first 24 hours.

Tubes of 2.5 c.c. capacity have been found very suitable in mak-
ing the test, and the amounts of diagnostic material (serum, whey,
etc.), and of emulsion, are, even over a lai-ge range of quantities,
but involving only a few different basal dilutions, easily contained
in 1.5 or 2 c.c. of fluid. Also, 24 hours is a convenieTit time for
incubation l)efore reading the results.

Where the total volume of Huid in each tuljc is niade up to 1.5
or 2 c.c, with incubation extending over 18 to 24 hours, the
optimum of emuhioti will he the smallest quontiti/ which gives re-
sults thitt are easily read, wiietlier the agglutination teactioii be
positive or negative.

Agf/latiiuition Test In A hurt ion.

:58<)

The deposit following agglutination sliovild l^e siich that it can
be easily distinguished l)y the naked eye, even though, as is fre-
quently tlie case, the whole of the organisms be not sediniented.

In the absence of deposit — i.e., in a negative agglutination re-
action, there should be surli a cjuantity of emulsion that a tulie
containing it can l)c easily distinguished from a tul)e not contain-
ing any emulsion.

It is (if interest here to note the naked eye ap]ica)'ance of the
emulsion controls to the sets of tutes under review.

In four of these controls the total volume of fluid was made up to
2 c.c, with carbolised saline: in the other four to 20 c.c.

Amount of Emulsion.

Total Volume.

Naked Eye appearance.

(1) 0.05 C.C.

2 c.c.

cloudy.

(2) 0.025 CO.

2 c.c.

faint clondmess.

(3) 0.01 c.c.

2 c.c.

trace of cloudiness.

(4) 0.005 c.c.

2 c.c.

no cloudmess.

(5) 0.05 c.c.

20 c.c.

faintly hazy.

(»-,) 0.025 c.c.

20 c.c.

trace of haziness.

(7) 0.01 c.c.

20 c.c.

haziness ai^preciable only
on compari.son.

(8) 0.005 c.c.

20 c.c.

no haziness.

Of tho.se enndsion controls containing 2 c.c. of total fluid, it
will be seen that (1) and (2) above possess sxich a degree of cloudi-
ness that they are readily distinguishable to the naked eye as
containing emulsion.

These tubes contain 0.05 c.c. and 0.02") r.c. respectively.

In Sets I., II., and III., of agglutination results I'ecorded above
the smallest deposit (positive agglutination), wliich is easily read
(tubes containing 2 c.c. of fluid), is that where there is 0.025 c.c.
of emulsion.

In Set IV.. tlie oidy tu])c where (although tliere was tlio same
quantity of serum in each tu])e), agglutination was manifest in
24 hours, was that one in wliicli tlierc was 0.05 c.c. of emulsion in
the tube.

With tliis large volume of fluid (20 c.c), no smaller quantity
gave a completed reaction in 2-1 liours.

From tliese experiments, therefore, it has l)een conchuled that tlie
optimum amount of enudsion to use- is 0.05 c.c. of " Standard
10 X '' emulsion (or 0.5 c.c. of " Standai'd X " cnuilsion).

This amount, 0.5 c.c. of " Standard X " emulsion has, thei'e-
fore, been ado])ted foi- use in all pi-actical diagnostic tests for the
reasons that —

•490 H. R. Seddon:

(1) It gives a marked naked eye deposit (and lience is easily

read), in a positive reaction;

(2) Conversely, it gives a definitely cloudy appearance (and

hence is easily read), in a tube where there is no agglu-
tination.

(3) With the total volume of fluid in tlie tube anything from

H to 20 c.c, the agglutuiation reaction is (.'omplete in
24 hours.

(4) It is tlie minimum amount of ennilsion that will answer the

above i-equirements.

In conclusion, I wish to express my best tlianks to Professor H.
A. Woodruff, Director of the Institute, for permission to under-
take this work, and for much kindly help and advice.

BIOGRAPHY.

1. MacFadyean and Stockman (1909). Report of Dei.artmental

Committee (Board of Agriculture, Ct. Britain), on Epizootic
Abortion, Part 1.

2. Mohler and Traum (1913). Annual Report, Bureau of Animal

Industry, Dept. of Agriculture, U.S.A., 1911, pp. 147-183.

3. MacFadyean and Stockman (1912). Journal of Comparative

Pathology and Therapeutics, Vol. XXV., 1912, pp. 22-29.

4. McFarland, Journal American Medical Association, Vol. 49, p.

1176. Extracted in Bulletin de L'Institut Pasteur, Vol. 6,
1908. p. 123.

5. Hewlett (1914). Manual of Bacteriology, 5th Editi..n. p. 188.

IN DEX.

The names of new genera ami species are printed in italics.

Acantliochites rubrostratus, 103
Acantholophus dixoiii, 256
Acantiiolophus hrevicornis, 257
Acantholophus (ingusticollis, 259
Additions to the Catalogue of

Marine Shells of Victoria, 99
African cicadas, 15.
Agglutination Test for Disease in

Bovines, 370
Araycterides, — Notes on. Part II.,

232
Anagallis ar^'ensis, 297
Analyses of Eocks, 123, 267, 276,

277, 335, 337.
Anatomy of Caryodes dufresnyi,

19
Anthistiria imberis, 297
Antirrhinum Orontium, 297
Argilloecia badia, 28
Argobuccinum retioluui, 99
Artemisia vulgaris, 297
Ashton, Howard, 12, 15
Aster subulatus, 298
Atropis magellanica, 298
Atropis stricta (?), 298
Aturia australis, 351
Australia, Flora of. No. 22, 297
Australian and Tasmauian Scyd-

maenidae, 198
Australian Cicadidae, 12
Austmlian Hydroids, Part III.,

72
Auslralites, Notes on, 333
Australites from Western Vic-
toria, 362
A vena barbata, 298
Bacillus of Contagious Abortion

in Bovines, 370
Baii'dia amygdaloides, 31
Bairdia australis, 31
Baker, R. T., 367
Balanus jsittacus, 53
Balanus varians, 54
Bale, W. M., 72
Bitter Pit and Sensitivity of

Apples to Poison, 191

Bitter Pit and Sensitivity of
Apples to Poison, 4th Paper,
342

Bovines, Agglutination Test for
Disease in, 370

Breidahl, H. G., 191

Bythocypris tumefacfa, 30

Caladenia oongesta, 299

Caryodes dufi'esnyi. Anatomy of,
19

Catalogue of Marine Shells of Vic-
toria, Additions to, 99

Caudina chilensis, 6

Centunculus minimus, 299

Ceratodus — New Species of, 25

Ceratodus (Metaceratodus), wol-
lastoni, 25

Cestracion cainzoicus, 55

Chapman, F., 25, 28, 350

Chemistry, 149, 367.

Chemistry of Essential Oils, 149

Chiridota gigas, 7

Chiridota ingens, 8.

Chrysophrys, 57

Cicadas, New African, 15

Cicadida?, Australian, 12

Cithna augulata, 101

Coatesxa, 230

Coatesia lata, 230

Colochirus doliolum, 6

Colochirus spinosus, 5

Conglomerate from Walballsi,, 286

Conringia orientalis. 299

Corbula pixidata, 103

Cucumaria inconspicua, 3

Cucumaria mutans, 2

Cucumaria mutans, 4

Cyclostrema hilcundae, 95, 101

Cyclostrema vercoi, 96, 101

Cynosurus echinatus, 299

Cythere canaliculata, 32

Cythtre cr'spata, 33

Cythere dasyderma, 34

Cythere demissa, 34

Cythere dictyon, 34

Cythere fir jc least at a, 35

:};i2

liuh

Cytlune lactea, 36
Cytlieve lepralioides, 36
Cytheie lubbockiana, 36
Cytheie militaris, 37
Cythere noimaiii, 37
Cytliere obtusalata, 3S
Cythere ovalis, 38
Cythere parallelograiunia, 39
Cythere postikdiris, 39
Cythere rastromargiiiata. 1()
Cythere scabrocimeata, 40
Cythere scintillnlata, 41
Cythere sciitigera, 11
Cythere wyville-thomsoni, 41
Cytherella auriculus, 49
Cytherella, lata, 50
Cytherella polita, 50
Cytherella piik-hra, 50
Cytherella punctata, 50
Cytherella .mbtruncafa, 51
Cythei'opteron batesfordiense, 45
Cytheropteroii batesfordiense var.

acuhata, 46
Cytheropteron pudtiinhmuttuii), 46
Cythcropteron pmcantarcticuiu ,

47
Cytheropteron nficnsuiii, 47
Cytheropteron vodniffuin, 48
Cythernra capiUlfpya: 44
Cyth crura ouyenensis, 44
Davies, O. B., 19
Didymograptus adaniaittinus, 106
Didymograptns aurrns, 105
Didyniograptus bifidiis, 108
Didymograptns caduceus var.

inomihriufv.s. 108
Didymograptns dihitdiix. 107
Didymograptns extensus, 104
Didymograptns gracilis, 1U5
Didyjiiograptus hitcii'^. 106
Didymograptns ntuiidus. 107
Didymograp^tus perdifiis. 104
Didymograptns piocumbens, KH!
Disease in bovines Agghitinatioii

test for, 370
Distribution of Sea-(Jra:?ses, 180
Diuris maculata, 300
Dosinia rictoriar, 96, 103
Drew. 1!. 15., 149
Eragrostis cinviila var. valida,

300.

Erechtites Atkinsoniae, 300
Erechtit-es valerianaefolia, 300
Erigeron cariadense, 300
Essential oil of eucalyptus alpina,

367
Essentiil Oils, Pliysieal Ciicm-

istry of, 149
Euchalns vixumliilicatus, 102
Eucalyptus alpina. 367
Eulima victoriup, 94, 100
Ewart, A. J., 297, 342
F«iguson, E. W., 232
Flora of Australia, No. 22, 297
Foramelina cxempla, 103
Fossils found in Mallee borings.

List of, 58
Fossils from the Malice Bores,

New and Bare, Pt. III., 28
Further Notes on Australian

Hj-droids, III., 72.
Gabriel, C. J., 94, 99.
Gatlitf, J. H., 94, 99.
Geelong, Obsidian from. 333
Geographical Distribution of Sea-
Grasses, 180
Geology, 119, 261, 286, 333, 363
Gladiolus grand is, 300
Goinphrena canescens, 301
Goniograptus crinitus, 110
Gonigraptus laxus, 113
Gonigraptus uiacer, 110
Croniograptus spi'cio.tns, 110
Graptolites, Victorian, }*art IV.,

101
Hall, T. S., IM

Ilcalesville and Narbethong — Ig-
neous Eocks near, 2('l
Helipterum Guilfoylei, 301
Iletei'ognatluis armitagei, 199
Heterognatlius geuiculatus, 199
Hcterognathus gracilis, 199
Heterognatlius rahnstus, 199
Holothuroidca, Victorian, 1
Hydrocotyle medicaginoides, 301
Hydroids, Further Notes on Aus-
tralian, III., 72
Hyoscyanus aibus, 301
Igneous Pebbles from Walhalla, 286
Igneous Eocks near Healesville

and Narbctlidug, 261
Ivens, W. G., 30 4

hnlr.

■■V.r.

Joshua, 1'.. C, 1

Juiiner, X. \\., lli», 2l)1. 280

Krithe eggeri, 42

Languages, Certain Suffixes in
Oceanic, 305

Lea, A. M., 198

Leiobtraca kilcundar, 94-. TH

Leiostraca stiiJifinniis, 9."), 101

Leptosynapta dolabrifcia, 7

Liuai-ia elatiue, 301

Lippia nodiflora, 301

List of fossils found iu Malice
borings, 58

Loxocoucli I aastralis, 4-:^

Lucapinella crucis. 1()2

Macrocypris decora, 29

Macrocypris tumida, 29

Macrotvistia fniichi, 12

Macrotristia fliopJin'nlrs, 13

Mallee, New and Rare Fossils
found in Deep Borings, Pt.
III., 28

Mallee Borings, List of Fossils
found in, 58

Marginella schoutanica, 100

Marine Shells of Victoria, Addi-
tions to Catalogue of, 99

Marine Mollusca, New Specios ot
Victorian, 94.

Mrtaceiafodus woUastoni, 25

MoUu-ca, New Species of Vic-
torian Marine, 94

Monograptus apUnl, 114

Monograptus priodon, 115

Monograptus turriculatus, 114

Morgania glabra, 302

Myliobatis moorabinensis, 57

Myodora suhalbida, 96, 103

Narbethong, Igneous Rucks near. 2G1

Nautilus altifrons, 356

Nautilus balcomhensis, 353

Nautilus felij', 357

Nautilus grrJniKjciisls, 354

New African Cicadas, 15

New and Rare Fossils from Mallee
Bores, Pt. III., 28

New or Little Known Victorian
Fossils, 350

N.S.W. — New Species of Ccrato-
dus from, 25

New Species of Aniycterides, 232

New Species of Ceralodus from
N.S.W., 25

New Species of Victorian Marine

Mollusca, 94
Notosepia cliftoncnsi.'f, 357
Obsidian from Geelong and fioui

Taradale, 333
Occurrence of Igneous Pebbles

neav Walhalla, 286
( >c(';in;c Tjiinf;uMg-es, Suffixes, iu, 3(i5
Olcaria raniulo^a var. inter-
media, 302
(> II cog rapt us, 109
Oncugraptus upsilm, 109
Ononis spinosa, 302
Ortlioceras strietum, 302
Ortiiopyxis, 72
Orthopyxis anguUita, 82
Orthopyxis caliculata, 74
Orthopyxis compressa, 80
Ortiiopyxis macrogona, 77
Orthopyxis platycarpa, 79
Orthopyxis wiJHuni, 78
Ostenfeld, C. H., ,180
Palaeontology, 25, 28, 104, 350
Parameter Values in Potential

Theory, 164
Petrology of Igneous Rocks near

Healesville, 262
Pliagonophana uhundans, 223
Plia^onophana aiithicnides, 228
Phagonophana ciassipes, 225
Phagonophana hirticeps, 224
Phagonophana iiriptiiaiii, 228
Phagonophana pan-icollis, 227
Phagonophana pcdnncuhiia, 226
Pliagonophana mduruUs, 223
Phagonophana tenuis, 229
Phasianotrochus rutilus, 102
Phy1loplioi-us dearmatus, 4
Phyllophorus restiens, 5
Pliysaliis visoosa, 302
Physical Chemistry of Essential

Oils, 149
Pinus insignis, 303
Platypleura luiiyirostiis, 17
Platypleura nigvoinatginata, 16
Platypleura sikuinliu, 16
Potential Theory, Parameter

Values in, 164
Prasophyllum fiavum, 303
Prasophyllum Suttoni, 303
Prostanthera dcnticulata, 303.
I'salidura Irai, 241
Psalidura vcstita, 240

ladt

Psaltoda ad<m\^. 13
Psaltoda iusiilaiis. 14
Psolidium convergent, 6
Queeustown, Petrolojrv and Geo

logy of, 119
Kauui'cnlus ophioglossitoliu.-. Mvi
Eeseda lut^a, 30:3
Rissoa ( A mpliitlialaiuus ) erratiwi. 102
Rissoa pertranslucida, 101
Rosenblum. E. I., 149
Rothera. A. C. H., 191
Salix Caprea. 304
Sca!a platyplenra, KKl
Scalpelluni suhrfaadintuin. 52
Scleroriiuis Jij-oni, 253
Scleroriniis gmulh'i. 254
Scleioi-inus innrnatus, 254
Sclerorrhiuella, 244
Scydraaeuidae. Not^< on Austra-
lian and Tasmanian, 198
Scydmaenns ampJiptiinis, 211
Scydmaeuus (ippropiitquan.'t, 221
Scydmaenns atruphu<i, 222.
Scydmaenns hrrripUis, 206
Scydmaeuus brevisetdsus, 206
Scydmaenns calrici'ps, 216
Scydmaenns clat-us, 201
Scydmaenns (Jentirentris, 208
Scydmaenns ihpnssus, 217
Scydmaenns iraniilus, 219
Scydmaenns Jimbrialns, 210
Scydmaenns fimbricnUi'<r 202
Scydmaenns flaripes, 204
Scydmaenns flamapUaUs. 203
Scydmaenns fui-cidistans, 220
Scydmaenns fu~scipaJpis, 218
Scydmaenns griff ithi, 217
Scydmaenns gnlosus. 20(J
Scydmaenns kingensis, 200
S-ydmaenus latrbncola, 215
Scydmaeuus nnt-stnat, 212
Scydmaeuus obficuricoynis, 205
Scydmaeuus panamattcnsis. 201
Scydmaenns pibisicnlliK, 214
Scydmaenns rivuiaris. 219
Scydmaenns .'uniini'icr, 262
Scydmaenns subyJabriprunis, 204
Scydmaenns trituicnUis, 212
Scydmaeuus tcnuicornis, 207
Scydmaenns fritkntatus, 209
Scydmaeuus usifahix, 213
Scydmaenns iralkrri. 21o
Sea-Grasses, Geographical Distri-
bution of, 180

Seddon, H. R., 370

Shells of Victoria, Additions to
Catalogue of Marine, 99

Silicularia, 83

Siliciilaria cjmpanularia, 84

Silicularia undulata, 89

Singular Parameter Values in
Potential Theory, 164

Skeats, E. W., 333, 362

Smith, H. G., 367

Stichopus mollis, 2

Stichopus .-;inn!laris, 3

Stylifer auricula, 101

Suffixes in Oceanic Lani^uages, 305

Talaurinus, 242

Talaurinus carinatwr, 251

Talaurinus giauulattts. 244

'I'ahuainus, iiytttrix, 247

Talaurinus koi. 248

Talaurinus perplerus, 245

Talaurinus posficalis, 252

Talaurinus .-iiiDpIex, 'Ho

Talaurinus vaUdus, 250

Taradale. ol:)sidian from, 333

Tasmanian Scydmaenidae. Xotcs
on, 198

Tetragraptus harfi, 113

Tetragraptns whitektiri, 114

Thelymitra venosa, 304

Thyroscyphus marginatus^ 91

Triw iiiigrapfu.'i iicgkciiis, 115

Tritouia lineata, 304

Trochodota a Hani, 8

Trochodola rwbufki, 9

Trygon cf. rugosus, 56

Vicia tetraspenna, 304

Victoria, Additions to the Cata-
logues of Marine Shells. 99

Victorian Fossils, 350

Victorian Graptolitcs, 104

Victorian Holothuroidoa, 1

Victorian Marine Mollusca, New
Species, 94

Voluta magnitica, 99

Wjilhalla, Conglomerate from. 2-<6

Wcatherburu, C. E., 164

Xestoleberis cnrta, iS

Xe^toleberis margaritea, 43

Xestoleberis variegata. 43

Zoology, 19

Zygophylax rufa, 90

Zygophyllum ovatum, 304

END OF VOLUME XXVII.

Part 11. Published ]\lARrH. 191").

PROCEEDINGS

8opl ^orietn of f itloria.

VOL. XXVII. (New SERiES>^^g[Q;^-^

PART I. y^ /^.^ <^<P]

£///M/ u/uier the Authority oj the Ck/HUp. VA»*>Mrs^''
/SSUHD SEPTEMBER, 1914-

{Conlniniug Haters rend before the Society durinfi the months of
March to July, 1914)-

IHK AUI.IOKfl or IIIK SKVBllAL PAPBR8 KUK INDIVIDUAM.Y RKSPONBIHLK KOK IMK

SOIINDNKHS OK IMK OPINIONS 81VKN AND FOR THK ACCURACY OK IMK

STATKMKNTS MAUK, TMKRKIN.

MELBOUKNE:
FURU & SON, PRINTERS, DRUMMOND STREET, CARLTON.

1914.

Publications of the Royal Society of Victoria, and
of the Societies amalgamated with it.

Victorian Institute for the Advancement of Science.
Transactions. Vol. 1. 1855.

Philosophical Society of Victoria.
Tran.sactions. Vol. 1. 1855.

These two Soaeiies then amalgamated and became: —

Philo.sophical Institute of Victoria.
Transactions. Vols. 1-4.

The Society then became : —

Royal Society of Victoria.

Tran.sacbions and Proceedings (Vol. 5, entitled Transac-
tions). (8vo). Vols. 5-24.

Transactions. (4to). Vols. 1, 2, 3 (Pt. 1 only was pub-
lished), 4, 5. 1888-1909.
Proceedings (New Series). (8vo). Vols. 1 .1888 ,

Microscopical Society of Victoria.

Journal (Vol. 1, Pt. 1, entitled Quarterly Journal). V^ol. 1
(Pts. 1 to 4), 2 (Pt. 1), title page and index {all
published]. 1-S79-82.

[The Society then combined with the Royal Society op Victoria]

NoTS. — Most of the volumes published before i8go are out
of print.

PROCEEDINGS

§01)111 c^arietD of f ittoria.

VOL. XXVII. (New Series).

PART II.

Edited iindet the Authoril) of the Council.

ISSUED MARCH, igiS-

(Conf, lining t'apers read before the Society during the mouths of

July to December, njjf)-

■IIIK ADTIIURS Ul' IIIK SKVUItAL FAl'KRS ARB INDIVIDUALLY KKSPONSIKI.B KOR IHH

ti(HTNI>NK«H «IK IIIK OPINIONS OIVBN AND FOR TlIK ACCURACY OK IIIK

STATBMBNiS MAUK TIIBKKIN.

MELbOUKNE:

FORD & SON, t'KINTERS, l>RUMMONI) .STKKET, CARLTON.
1915.

'iBL WHO! Library - Serials

5 WHSE 00608